(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Mechanical metallurgy"

MECHANICAL METALLURGY 



Metallurgy and Metallurgical Engineering Series 

Robert F. Mehl, Consulting Editor 
Michael B. Bever, Associate Consulting Editor 



Barrett • Structure of Metals 

BiRCHENALL • Physical Metallurgy 

Bridgman • Studies in Large Plastic Flow and Fracture 

Briggs • The Metallurgy of Steel Castings 

Butts • Metallurgical Problems 

Darken and Gurry • Physical Chemistry of Metals 

Dieter • Mechanical Metallurgy 

Gaudin • Flotation 

Hansen • Constitution of Binary Alloys 

Kehl • The Principles of Metallographic Laboratory Practice 

Rhines • Phase Diagrams in Metallurgy 

Seitz • The Physics of -Metals 

Smith • Properties of Metals at Elevated Temperatures 

Williams and Homerberg • Principles of Metallography 



VSL 



Mechanical Metallurgy 



GEORGE E. DIETER, JR. 

Professor and Head of Department of Metallurgical 

Engineering 
Drexel Institute of Technologij 
Philadelphia 4, Pa. 




McGRAW-HILL BOOK COMPANY 

New York Toronto London 1961 



MECHANICAL METALLURGY 

Copyright © 1961 by the McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc. Printed 
in the United States of America. All rights reserved. This book, or 
parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form without permis- 
sion of the publishers. Library of Congress Catalog Number 61-11385 

12 13 14 15 16- MAMM - 7 5 4 3 

ISBN 07-016890-3 



PREFACE 



Mechanical metallurgy is the area of knowledge which deals with the 
behavior and response of metals to applied forces. Since it is not a pre- 
cisely defined area, it will mean different things to different persons. To 
some it will mean mechanical properties of metals or mechanical testing, 
others may consider the field restricted to the plastic working and shaping 
of metals, while still others confine their interests to the more theoretical 
aspects of the field, which merge with metal physics and physical metal- 
lurgy. Still another group may consider that mechanical metallurgy is 
closely allied with applied mathematics and applied mechanics. In writ- 
ing this book an attempt has been made to cover, in some measure, this 
great diversity of interests. The objective has been to include the entire 
scope of mechanical metallurgy in one fairly comprehensive volume. 

The book has been divided into four parts. Part One, Mechanical 
Fundamentals, presents the mathematical framework for many of the 
chapters which follow. The concepts of combined stress and strain are 
reviewed and extended into three dimensions. Detailed consideration 
of the theories of yielding and an introduction to the concepts of plas- 
ticity are given. No attempt is made to carry the topics in Part One to 
the degree of completion required for original problem solving. Instead, 
the purpose is to acquaint metallurgically trained persons with the mathe- 
matical language encountered in some areas of mechanical metallurgy. 
Part Two, Metallurgical Fundamentals, deals with the structural aspects 
of plastic deformation and fracture. Emphasis is on the atomistics of 
flow and fracture and the way in which metallurgical structure affects 
these processes. The concept of the dislocation is introduced early in 
Part Two and is used throughout to provide qualitative explanations for 
such phenomena as strain hardening, the yield point, dispersed phase 
hardening, and fracture. A more mathematical treatment of the proper- 
ties of dislocations is given in a separate chapter. The topics covered in 
Part Two stem from physical metallurgy. However, most topics are dis- 
cussed in greater detail and with a different emphasis than when they 
are first covered in the usual undergraduate course in physical metal- 
lurgy. Certain topics that are more physical metallurgy than mechanical 



VI rreracc 



Prefe 



metallurgy are included to provide continuity and the necessary back- 
ground for readers who have not studied modern physical metallurgy. 

Part Three, Applications to Materials Testing, deals with the engineer- 
ing aspects of the common testing techniques of mechanical failure of 
metals. Chapters are devoted to the tension, torsion, hardness, fatigue, 
creep, and impact tests. Others take up the important subjects of 
residual stresses and the statistical analysis of mechanical-property data. 
In Part Three emphasis is placed on the interpretation of the tests and 
on the effect of metallurgical variables on mechanical behavior rather 
than on the procedures for conducting the tests. It is assumed that the 
actual performance of these tests will be covered in a concurrent labora- 
tory course or in a separate course. Part Four, Plastic Forming of 
Metals, deals with the common mechanical processes for producing use- 
ful metal shapes. Little emphasis is given to the descriptive aspects of 
this subject, since this can best be covered by plant trips and illustrated 
lectures. Instead, the main attention is given to the mechanical and 
metallurgical factors which control each process such as forging, rolling, 
extrusion, drawing, and sheet-metal forming. 

This book is written for the senior or first-year graduate student in 
metallurgical or mechanical engineering, as well as for practicing engi- 
neers in industry. While most universities have instituted courses in 
mechanical metallurgy or mechanical properties, there is a great diversity 
in the material covered and in the background of the students taking 
these courses. Thus, for the present there can be nothing like a stand- 
ardized textbook on mechanical metallurgy. It is hoped that the breadth 
and scope of this book will provide material for these somewhat diverse 
requirements. It is further hoped that the existence of a comprehensive 
treatment of the field of mechanical metallurgy will stimulate the develop- 
ment of courses which cover the total subject. 

Since this book is intended for college seniors, graduate students, and 
practicing engineers, it is expected to become a part of their professional 
library. Although there has been no attempt to make this book a hand- 
book, some thought has been given to providing abundant references to 
the literature on mechanical metallurgy. Therefore, more references are 
included than is usual in the ordinary textbook. References have been 
given to point out derivations or analyses beyond the scope of the book, 
to provide the key to further information on controversial or detailed 
points, and to emphasize important papers which are worthy of further 
study. In addition, a bibliography of general references will be found 
at the end of each chapter. A collection of problems is included at the 
end of the volume. This is primarily for the use of the reader who is 
engaged in industry and who desires some check on his comprehension of 
the material. 



Preface vii 

The task of writing this book has been mainly one of sifting and sorting 
facts and information from the literature and the many excellent texts on 
specialized aspects of this subject. To cover the breadth of material 
found in this book would require parts of over 15 standard texts and 
countless review articles and individual contributions. A conscientious 
effort has been made throughout to give credit to original sources. For 
the occasional oversights that may have developed during the "boiling- 
down process" the author offers his apologies. He is indebted to many 
authors and publishers who consented to the reproduction of illustrations. 
Credit is given in the captions of the illustrations. 

Finally, the author wishes to acknowledge the many friends who 
advised him in this work. Special mention should be given to Professor 
A. W. Grosvenor, Drexel Institute of Technology, Dr. G. T. Home, 
Carnegie Institute of Technology, Drs. T. C. Chilton, J. H. Faupel, 
W. L. Phillips, W. I. Pollock, and J. T. Ransom of the du Pont Company, 
and Dr. A. S. Nemy of the Thompson-Ramo-Wooldridge Corp. 

George E. Dieter, Jr. 



CONTENTS 



Preface v 

List of Symbols xvii 

Part One. Mechanical Fundamentals 

1. Introduction 3 

1-1. Scope of This Book 3 

1-2. Strength of Materials — Basic Assumptions 5 

1-3. Elastic and Plastic Behavior 6 

1-4. Average Stress and Strain 7 

1-5. Tensile Deformation of Ductile Metal 8 

1-6. Ductile vs. Brittle Behavior 9 

1-7. What Constitutes Failure? 10 

1-8. Concept of Stress and the Types of Stress 13 

1-9. Concept of Strain and the Types of Strain 15 

2. Stress and Strain Relationships for Elastic Behavior 17 

2-1. Introduction 1^ 

2-2. Description of Stress at a Point 17 

2-3. State of Stress in Two Dimensions (Plane Stress) 19 

2-4. Mohr's Circle of Stress— Two Dimensions 23 

2-5. State of Stress in Three Dimensions 24 

2-6. Mohr's Circle — Three Dimensions 27 

2-7. Description of Strain at a Point 31 

2-8. Measurement of Surface Strain 33 

2-9. Stress-Strain Relations ... 35 

2-10. Calculation of Stresses from Elastic Strains • • 39 

2-11. Generalized Stress-Strain Relationships 41 

2-12. Theory of Elasticity 43 

2-13. Stress Concentration 46 

2-14. Spherical and Deviator Components of Stress and Strain .... 50 

2-15. Strain Energy ^2 

3. Elements of the Theory of Plasticity 54 

3-1. Introduction 54 

3-2. The Flow Curve ^^ 

3-3. True Strain 57 

ix 



K Contents 

3-4. Yielding Criteria for Ductile Metals 58 

3-5. Combined Stress Tests 62 

3-6. Octahedral Shear Stress and Shear Strain 65 

3-7. Invariants of Stress and Strain 66 

3-8. Basis of the Theories of Plasticity 67 

3-9. Flow Theories 69 

3-10. Deformation Theories 72 

3-11. Two-dimensional Plastic Flow — Plane Strain 73 

3-12. Slip-field Theory 74 

Part Two. Metallurgical Fundamentals 

4. Plastic Deformation of Single Crystals 81 

4-1. Introduction 81 

4-2. Concepts of Crystal Geometry 82 

4-3. Lattice Defects 85 

4-4. Deformation by Slip 90 

4-5. Slip in a Perfect Lattice 95 

4-6. Slip by Dislocation Movement 97 

4-7. Critical Resolved Shear Stress for Slip 99 

4-8. Testing of Single Crystals 102 

4-9. Deformation by Twinning 104 

4-10. Stacking Faults 108 

4-11. Deformation Bands and Kink Bands 110 

4-12. Strain Hardening of Single Crystals Ill 

5. Plastic Deformation of Polycrystalline Aggregates » . . . .118 

5-1. Introduction 118 

5-2. Grain Boundaries and Deformation 119 

5-3. Low-angle Grain Boundaries 123 

5-4. Solid-solution Hardening 128 

5-5. Yield-point Phenomenon 132 

5-6. Strain Aging 135 

5-7. Strengthening from Second-phase Particles 137 

5-8. Hardening Due to Point Defects 145 

5-9. Strain Hardening and Cold Work 146 

5-10. Bauschinger Effect 149 

5-11. Preferred Orientation 150 

5-12. Annealing of Cold-worked Metal 153 

5-13. Anneahng Textures 156 

6. Dislocation Theory . . . o . 1 58 

6-1. Introduction 158 

6-2. Methods of Detecting Dislocations 158 

6-3. Burgers Vector and the Dislocation Loop 162 

6-4. Dislocations in the Face-centered Cubic Lattice 164 

6-5. Dislocations in the Hexagonal Close-packed Lattice 169 

6-6. Dislocations in the Body-centered Cubic Lattice 169 

6-7. Stress Field of a Dislocation 171 

6-8. Forces on Dislocations 174 

6-9. Forces between Dislocations 175 



Contents xi 

6-10. Dislocation Climb 177 

6-11. Jogs in Dislocations 178 

6-12. Dislocation and Vacancy Interaction 179 

6-13. Dislocation — Foreign-atom Interaction 181 

6-14. Dislocation Sources 183 

6-15. Multiplication of Dislocations — Frank-Read Source 184 

6-16. Dislocation Pile-up 186 

7. Fracture 190 

7-1. Introduction 190 

7-2. Types of Fracture in Metals 190 

7-3. Theoretical Cohesive Strength of Metals 192 

7-4. Griffith Theory of Brittle Fracture 194 

7-5. Modifications of the Griffith Theory 197 

7-6. Fracture of Single Crystals 199 

7-7. Metallographic Aspects of Brittle Fracture 200 

7-8. Dislocation Theories of Fracture 204 

7-9. Delayed Yielding 209 

7-10. Velocity of Crack Propagation ... 210 

7-11. Ductile Fracture 211 

7-12. Notch Effect in Fracture 213 

7-13. Concept of the Fracture Curve 215 

7-14. Classical Theory of the Ductile-to-Brittle Transition 216 

7-15. Fracture under Combined Stresses 218 

7-16. Effect of High Hydrostatic Pressure on Fracture 219 

8. Internal Friction 221 

8-1. Introduction 221 

8-2. Phenomenological Description of Internal Friction 222 

8-3. Anelasticity . 224 

8-4. Relaxation Spectrum 227 

8-5. Grain-boundary Relaxation 227 

8-6. The Snoek Effect 229 

8-7. Thermoelastic Internal Friction 229 

8-8. Dislocation Damping 230 

8-9. Damping Capacity 232 

Part Three. Applications to Materials Testing 

9. The Tension Test 237 

9-1. Engineering Stress-Strain Curve 237 

9-2. True-stress-True-strain Curve 243 

9-3. Instability in Tension 248 

9-4. Stress Distribution at the Neck 250 

9-5. Strain Distribution in the Tensile Specimen 252 

9-6. Effect of Strain Rate on Tensile Properties 254 

9-7. Effect of Temperature on Tensile Properties 256 

9-8. Combined Effect of Strain Rate and Temperature 258 

9-9. Notch Tensile Test 260 

9-10. Tensile Properties of Steels 262 

9-11. Anisotropy of Tensile Properties 269 



xii Contents 

10. The Torsion Test 273 

10-1. Introduction 273 

10-2. Mechanical Properties in Torsion 273 

10-3. Torsional Stresses for Large Plastic Strains 276 

10-4. Types of Torsion Failures 278 

10-5. Torsion Test vs. Tension Test 279 

11. The Hardness Test 282 

11-1. Introduction 282 

11-2. Brinell Hardness 283 

11-3. Meyer Hardness 284 

11-4. Analysis of Indentation by a Spherical Indenter 286 

11-5. Relationship between Hardness and the Tensile-flow Curve .... 287 

11-6. Vickers Hardness 289 

11-7. Rockwell Hardness Test 290 

11-8. Microhardness Tests 291 

11-9. Hardness-conversion Relationships 292 

11-10. Hardness at Elevated Temperatures 293 

12. Fatigue of Metals 296 

12-1. Introduction 296 

12-2. Stress Cycles 297 

12-3. The -S-iV Curve 299 

12-4. Statistical Nature of Fatigue 301 

12-5. Structural Features of Fatigue 304 

12-6. Theories of Fatigue 307 

12-7. Efifect of Stress Concentration on Fatigue 310 

12-8. Size Effect 314 

12-9. Surface Effects and Fatigue 315 

12-10. Corrosion Fatigue 320 

12-11. Effect of Mean Stress on Fatigue 323 

12-12. Fatigue under Combined Stresses 326 

12-13. Overstressing and Understressing 327 

12-14. Effect of Metallurgical Variables on Fatigue Properties 329 

12-15. Effect of Temperature on Fatigue 332 

13. Creep and Stress Rupture ° ° 335 

13-1. The High-temperature Materials Problem 335 

13-2. The Creep Curve 336 

13-3. The Stress-rupture Test 341 

13-4. Deformation at Elevated Temperature 342 

13-5. Fracture at Elevated Temperature 345 

13-6. Theories of Low-temperature Creep 347 

13-7. Theories of High-temperature Creep 349 

13-8. Presentation of Engineering Creep Data 354 

13-9. Prediction of Long-time Properties 356 

13-10. High-temperature Alloys 359 

13-11. Effect of Metallurgical Variables 363 

13-12. Creep under Combined Stresses 367 

13-13. Stress Relaxation 367 



Contents xiii 

14. Brittle Failure and Impact Testing 370 

14-1. The Brittle-failure Problem 370 

14-2. Notched-bar Impact Tests 371 

14-3. Slow-bend Tests 375 

14-4. Specialized Tests for Transition Temperature 377 

14-5. Significance of the Transition Temperature 379 

14-6. Metallurgical Factors Affecting Transition Temperature 381 

14-7. Effect of Section Size 384 

14-8. Notch Toughness of Heat-treated Steels 385 

14-9. Temper Embrittlement 387 

14-10. Hydrogen Embrittlement 388 

14-11. Flow and Fracture under Very Rapid Rates of Loading 390 

15. Residual Stresses 393 

15-1. Origin of Residual Stresses 393 

15-2. Effects of Residual Stresses 397 

15-3. Mechanical Methods of Residual-stress Measurement 398 

15-4. Deflection Methods 403 

15-5. X-ray Determination of Residual Stress 407 

15-6. Quenching Stresses 411 

15-7. Surface Residual Stresses 415 

15-8. Stress Relief 417 

16. Statistics Applied to Materials Testing 419 

16-1. Why Statistics? 419 

16-2. Errors and Samples 420 

16-3. Frequency Distribution 421 

16-4. Measures of Central Tendency and Dispersion 424 

16-5. The Normal Distribution 426 

16-6. Extreme-value Distributions 430 

16-7. Tests of Significance 432 

16-8. Analysis of Variance 435 

16-9. Statistical Design of Experiments 439 

16-10. Linear Regression 441 

16-11. Control Charts 442 

16-12. Statistical Aspects of Size Effect in Brittle Fracture 444 

16-13. Statistical Treatment of the Fatigue Limit 446 

Part Four. Plastic Forming of Metals 

17. General Fundamentals of Metalworking 453 

17-1. Classification of Forming Processes 453 

17-2. Effect of Temperature on Forming Processes 455 

17-3. Effect of Speed of Deformation on Forming Processes 458 

17-4. Effect of Metallurgical Structure on Forming Processes 459 

17-5. Mechanics of Metal Forming 462 

17-6. Work of Plastic Deformation 466 

17-7. Formability Tests and Criteria 468 

17-8. Friction in Forming Operations 470 

17-9. Experimental Techniques for Forming Analysis 471 



xlv Contents 

18. Forging 473 

18-1. Classification of Forging Processes 473 

18-2. Forging Equipment 476 

18-3. Deformation in Compression 479 

18-4. Forging in Plane Strain with Coulomb Friction 481 

18-5. Forging in Plane Strain with Sticking Friction 483 

18-6. Forging of a Cylinder in Plane Strain 483 

18-7. Forging Defects 484 

18-8. Residual Stresses in Forgings 486 

19. Rolling of Metals 488 

19-1. Classification of Rolling Processes 488 

19-2. RoUing Equipment 489 

19-3. Hot RoUing 491 

19-4. Cold Rolling 492 

19-5. Rolling of Bars and Shapes 493 

19-6. Forces and Geometrical Relationships in Rolling 494 

19-7. Main Variables in RoUing 498 

19-8. Deformation in Rolling 501 

19-9. Defects in RoUed Products 502 

19-10. Residual Stresses in Rolled Products 503 

19-11. Theories of Cold Rolling 504 

19-12. Theories of Hot RoUing 508 

19-13. Torque and Horsepower .511 

20. Extrusion 514 

20-1. Classification of Extrusion Processes 514 

20-2. Extrusion Equipment 517 

20-3. Variables in Extrusion 518 

20-4. Deformation in Extrusion . 522 

20-5. Extrusion Defects 524 

20-6. Extrusion under Ideal Conditions 525 

20-7. Extrusion with Friction and Nonhomogeneous Deformation .... 526 

20-8. Extrusion of Tubing 527 

20-9. Production of Seamless Pipe and Tubing 529 

21 . Rod, Wire, and Tube Drawing 532 

21-1. Introduction 532 

21-2. Rod and Wire Drawing 532 

21-3. Defects in Rod and Wire 534 

21-4. Variables in Wire Drawing 535 

21-5. Wire Drawing without Friction 536 

21-6. Wire Drawing with Friction 539 

21-7. Tube-drawing Processes 541 

21-8. Tube Sinking 542 

21-9. Tube Drawing with a Stationary Mandrel 543 

21-10. Tube Drawing with a Moving Mandrel 545 

21-11. Residual Stresses in Rod, Wire, and Tubes 547 

22. Sheet-metal Forming 549 

22-1. Introduction 549 



Contents xv 

22-2. Forming Methods 550 

22-3. Shearing and Blanking 555 

22-4. Bending 557 

22-5. Stretch Forming 562 

22-6. Deep Drawing 563 

22-7. Redrawing Operations 568 

22-8. Ironing and Sinking 569 

22-9. Defects in Formed Parts 57] 

22-10. Tests for Formability 57^ 

Appendix. Constants, and Conversion Factors 577 

Problems , . 579 

Answers to Selected Problems 599 

Name Index 603 

Subject Index 609 



LIST OF SYMBOLS 



A Area 

a Linear distance 

ao Interatomic spacing 

B Constant 

6 Width or breadth 

b Burgers vector of a dislocation 

C Generahzed constant 

Cij Elastic coefficients 

c Length of Griffith crack 

D Diameter, grain diameter 

E Modulus of elasticity for axial loading (Young's modulus) 

e Conventional, or engineering, strain 

exp Base of natural logarithms (= 2.718) 

F Force per unit length on a dislocation line 

/ Coefficient of friction 

G Modulus of elasticity in shear (modulus of rigidity) 

9 Crack-extension force 

H Activation energy 

h Distance, usually in thickness direction 

{h,k,l) Miller indices of a crystallographic plane 

/ Moment of inertia 

J Invariant of the stress deviator; polar moment of inertia 

K Strength coefficient 

Kf Fatigue-notch factor 

Ki Theoretical stress-concentration factor 

k Yield stress in pure shear 

L Length 

I, m, n Direction cosines of normal to a plane 

In Natural logarithm 

log Logarithm to base 10 

Mb Bending moment 

Mt Torsional moment, torque 



xvili List of Symbols 

m Strain-rate sensitivity 

N Number of cycles of stress or vibration 

n Sti'ain-hardening exponent 

n' Generalized constant in exponential term 

P Load or external force 

p Pressure 

q Reduction in area; plastic-constraint factor; notch sensitivity 

index in fatigue 

R Radius of curvature; stress ratio in fatigue; gas constant 

r Radial distance 

*Si Total stress on a plane before resolution into normal and shear 

components 

Sij Elastic compliance 

s Standard deviation of a sample 

T Temperature 

Tm Melting point 

t Time; thickness 

tr Time for rupture 

U Elastic strain energy 

Uo Elastic strain energy per unit volume 
u, V, IV Components of displacement in x, ij, and z directions 
[uvw] Miller indices for a crystallographic direction 

V Volume 

V Velocity; coefficient of variation 
W Work 

Z Zener-Hollomon parameter 

a Linear coefficient of thermal expansion 

a,0,d,(t) Generalized angles 

r Line tension of a dislocation 

7 Shear strain 

A Volume strain or cubical dilatation; finite change 

8 Deformation or elongation; deflection; logarithmic decrement 
e Natural, or true, strain 

e Significant, or effective, true strain 

e True-strain rate 

im Minimum creep rate 

7/ Efficiency; coefficient of viscosity 

6 Dorn time-temperature parameter 

K Bulk modulus or volumetric modulus of elasticity 

A Interparticle spacing 

X Lame's constant 

ju Lode's stress parameter 



List of Symbols xix 



p Poisson's ratio; Lode's strain parameter 

p Density 

a- Normal stress; the standard deviation of a population 

(To Yield stress or yield strength 

(Tq Yield stress in plane strain 

CT Significant; or effective, true stress 

0-1,0-2,0-3 Principal stresses 

0-' Stress deviator 

0-" Hydrostatic component of stress 

(Ta Alternating, or variable, stress 

o-,„ Average principal stress; mean stress 

ar Range of stress 

a„ Ultimate tensile strength 

o-u, Working stress 

T Shearing stress; relaxation time 

<l> Airy stress function 

i/' Specific damping capacity 



Part One 

MECHANICAL FUNDAMENTALS 



Chapter 1 

INTRODUCTION 

1-1. Scope of This Book 

Mechanical metallurgy is the area of metallurgy which is concerned 
primarily with the response of metals to forces or loads. The forces 
may arise from the use of the metal as a member or part in a structure 
or machine, in which case it is necessary to know something about the 
limiting values which can be withstood without failure. On the other 
hand, the objective may be to convert a cast ingot into a more useful 
shape, such as a flat plate, and here it is necessary to know the con- 
ditions of temperature and rate of loading which minimize the forces 
that are needed to do the job. 

Mechanical metallurgy is not a subject which can be neatly isolated 
and studied by itself. It is a combination of many disciplines and many 
approaches to the problem of understanding the response of materials to 
forces. On the one hand is the approach used in reference to strength 
of materials and in the theories of elasticity and plasticity, where a metal 
is considered to be a homogeneous material whose mechanical behavior 
can be rather precisely described on the basis of only a very few material 
constants. This approach is the basis for the rational design of struc- 
tural members and machine parts, and the three topics of strength of 
materials, elasticity, and plasticity are covered in Part One of this book 
from a more generalized point of view than is usually considered in a first 
course in strength of materials. The material covered in Chaps. 1 to 3 
can be considered the mathematical framework on which much of the 
remainder of the book rests. For students of engineering who have had 
an advanced course in strength of materials or machine design, it proba- 
bly will be possible to skim rapidly over these chapters. However, for 
most students of metallurgy and for practicing engineers in industry, it is 
worth spending the time to become familiar with the mathematics pre- 
sented in Part One. 

The theories of strength of materials, elasticity, and plasticity lose 
much of their power when the structure of the metal becomes an impor- 

3 



4 Mechanical Fundamentals [Chap. 1 

tant consideration and it can no longer be considered as a homogeneous 
medium. Examples of this are in the high-temperature behavior of 
metals, where the metallurgical structure may continuously change with 
time, or in the ductile-to-brittle transition, which occurs in plain car- 
bon steel. The determination of the relationship between mechanical 
behavior and structure (as detected chiefly with microscopic and X-ray 
techniques) is the main responsibility of the mechanical metallurgist. 
When mechanical behavior is understood in terms of metallurgical struc- 
ture, it is generally possible to improve the mechanical properties or at 
least to control them. Part Two of this book is concerned with the metal- 
lurgical fundamentals of the mechanical behavior of metals. Metallurgi- 
cal students will find that some of the material in Part Two has been 
covered in a previous course in physical metallurgy, since mechanical 
metallurgy is part of the broader field of physical metallurgy. However, 
these subjects are considered in greater detail than is usually the case in 
a first course in physical metallurgy. In addition, certain topics which 
pertain more to physical metallurgy than mechanical metallurgy have 
been included in order to provide continuity and to assist nonmetallurgi- 
cal students who may not have had a course in physical metallurgy. 

The last three chapters of Part Two, especially Chap. 6, are concerned 
primarily with atomistic concepts of the flow and fracture of metals. 
Many of the developments in these areas have been the result of the 
alliance of the solid-state physicist with the metallurgist. This is an 
area where direct observation is practically impossible and definitive 
experiments of an indirect nature are difficult to conceive. Moreover, 
it is an area of intense activity in which the lifetime of a concept or theory 
may be rather short. Therefore, in writing these chapters an attempt 
has been made to include only material which is generally valid and to 
minimize the controversial aspects of the subject. 

Basic data concerning the strength of metals and measurements for the 
routine control of mechanical properties are obtained from a relatively 
small number of standardized mechanical tests. Part Three, Appli- 
cations to Materials Testing, considers each of the common mechanical 
tests, not from the usual standpoint of testing techniques, but instead 
from the consideration of what these tests tell about the service per- 
formance of metals and how metallurgical variables affect the results of 
these tests. Much of the material in Parts One and Two has been uti- 
lized in Part Three. It is assumed that the reader either has completed 
a conventional course in materials testing or will be concurrently taking 
a laboratory course in which familiarization with the testing techniques 
will be acquired. 

Part Four considers the metallurgical and mechanical factors involved 
in the forming of metals into useful shapes. Attempts have been made 



Sec. 1-2] Introduction 5 

to present mathematical analyses of the principal metalworking processes, 
although in certain cases this has not been possible, either because of the 
considerable detail required or because the analysis is beyond the scope 
of this book. No attempt has been made to include the extensive special- 
ized technology associated with each metalworking process, such as roll- 
ing or extrusion, although some effort has been made to give a general 
impression of the mechanical equipment required and to familiarize the 
reader with the specialized vocabulary of the metalworking field. Major 
emphasis has been placed on presenting a fairly simplified picture of the 
forces involved in each process and how geometrical and metallurgical 
factors affect the forming loads and the success of the metalworking 
process. 

1-2. Strength of Materials — Basic Assumptions 

Strength of materials is the body of knowledge which deals with the 
relation betw^een internal forces, deformation, and external loads. In 
the general method of analysis used in strength of materials the first step 
is to assume that the member is in equilibrium. The equations of static 
equilibrium are applied to the forces acting on some part of the body in 
order to obtain a relationship between the external forces acting on the 
member and the internal forces resisting the action of the external loads. 
Since the equations of equilibrium must be expressed in terms of forces 
acting external to the body, it is necessary to make the internal resisting 
forces into external forces. This is done by passing a plane through the 
body at the point of interest. The part of the body lying on one side 
of the cutting plane is removed and replaced by the forces it exerted on 
the cut section of the part of the body that remains. Since the forces 
acting on the "free body" hold it in equilibrium, the equations of equi- 
librium may be applied to the problem. 

The internal resisting forces are usually expressed by the stress^ acting 
over a certain area, so that the internal force is the integral of the stress 
times the differential area over which it acts. In order to evaluate this 
integral, it is necessary to know the distribution of the stress over the 
area of the cutting plane. The stress distribution is arrived at by observ- 
ing and measuring the strain distribution in the member, since stress 
cannot be physically measured. However, since stress is proportional to 
strain for the small deformations involved in most work, the determi- 
nation of the strain distribution provides the stress distribution. The 
expression for the stress is then substituted into the equations of equi- 

* For present purposes stress is defined as force per unit area. The companion term 
strain is defined as the change in length per unit length. More complete definitions 
will be given later. 



6 Mechanical Fundamentals [Chap. 1 

librium, and they are solved for stress in terms of the loads and dimen- 
sions of the member. 

Important assumptions in strength of materials are that the body 
which is being analyzed is continuous, homogeneous, and isotropic. A 
continuous body is one which does not contain voids or empty spaces of 
any kind. A body is homogeneous if it has identical properties at all 
points. A body is considered to be isotropic with respect to some property 
when that property does not vary with direction or orientation. A 
property which varies with orientation with respect to some system of 
axes is said to be anisotropic. 

While engineering materials such as steel, cast iron, and aluminum may 
appear to meet these conditions when viewed on a gross scale, it is readily 
apparent when they are viewed through a microscope that they are any- 
thing but homogeneous and isotropic. Most engineering metals are made 
up of more than one phase, with different mechanical properties, such 
that on a micro scale they are heterogeneous. Further, even a single- 
phase metal will usually exhibit chemical segregation, and therefore the 
properties will not be identical from point to point. Metals are made up 
of an aggregate of crystal grains having different properties in different 
crystallographic directions. The reason why the equations of strength 
of materials describe the behavior of real metals is that, in general, the 
crystal grains are so small that, for a specimen of any macroscopic vol- 
ume, the materials are statistically homogeneous and isotropic. How- 
ever, when metals are severely deformed in a particular direction, as in 
rolling or forging, the mechanical properties may be anisotropic on a 
macro scale. 

1-3. Elastic and Plastic Behavior 

Experience shows that all solid materials can be deformed when sub- 
jected to external load. It is further found that up to certain limiting 
loads a solid will recover its original dimensions when the load is removed. 
The recovery of the original dimensions of a deformed body when the 
load is removed is known as elastic behavior. The limiting load beyond 
which the material no longer behaves elastically is the elastic limit. If 
the elastic limit is exceeded, the body will experience a permanent set or 
deformation when the load is removed. A body which is permanently 
deformed is said to have undergone plastic deformation. 

For most materials, as long as the load does not exceed the elastic 
limit, the deformation is proportional to the load. This relationship is 
known as Hooke's law; it is more frequently stated as stress is proportional 
to strain. Hooke's law requires that the load-deformation relationship 
should be linear. However, it does not necessarily follow that all mate- 



Sec. 1-4] 



Introduction 



rials which behave elastically will have a linear stress-strain relationship. 
Rubber is an example of a material with a nonlinear stress-strain relation- 
ship that still satisfies the definition of an elastic material. 

Elastic deformations in metals are quite small and require very sensi- 
tive instruments for their measurement. Ultrasensitive instruments 
have shown that the elastic limits of metals are much lower than the 
values usually measured in engineering tests of materials. As the meas- 
uring devices become more sensitive, the elastic limit is decreased, so that 
for most metals there is only a rather narrow range of loads over which 
Hooke's law strictly applies. This is, however, primarily of academic 
importance. Hooke's law remains a quite valid relationship for engi- 
neering design. 

•(_4. Average Stress and Strain 

As a starting point in the discussion of stress and strain, consider a 
uniform cylindrical bar which is subjected to an axial tensile load (Fig. 
1-1). Assume that two gage marks are put on the surface of the bar in 



Lo + S- 
- Ln- 



-^P 



'a dA 



-^P 



Fig. 1-1. Cylindrical bar subjected to Fig. 1-2. Free-body diagram for Fig. 1-1. 
axial load. 



its unstrained state and that Lo is the gage length between these marks. 
A load P is applied to one end of the bar, and the gage length undergoes 
a slight increase in length and decrease in diameter. The distance 
between the gage marks has increased by an amount 5, called the defor- 
mation. The average linear strain e is the ratio of the change in length 
to the original length. 



_ J^ _ AL _ L - Lo 

Lo Lo Lo 



(1-1) 



Strain is a dimensionless quantity since both 5 and Lo are expressed in 
units of length. 

Figure 1-2 shows the free-body diagram for the cylindrical bar shown 
in Fig. 1-1. The external load P is balanced by the internal resisting 
force j(7 dA, where a is the stress normal to the cutting plane and A is 



8 Mechanical Fundamentals [Chap. 1 

the cross-sectional area of the bar. The equinbrium equation is 

P = jadA (1-2) 

If the stress is distributed uniformly over the area A, that is, if a is con- 
stant, Eq. (1-2) becomes 

P = aj dA = (tA 

cr = j (1-3) 

In general, the stress will not be uniform over the area A, and therefore 
Eq. (1-3) represents an average stress. For the stress to be absolutely- 
uniform, every longitudinal element in the bar would have to experience 
exactly the same strain, and the proportionality between stress and strain 
would have to be identical for each element. The inherent anisotropy 
between grains in a polycrystalline metal rules out the possibility of com- 
plete uniformity of stress over a body of macroscopic size. The presence 
of more than one phase also gives rise to nonuniformity of stress on a 
microscopic scale. If the bar is not straight or not centrally loaded, the 
strains will be different for certain longitudinal elements and the stress 
will not be uniform. An extreme disruption in the uniformity of the 
stress pattern occurs when there is an abrupt change in cross section. 
This results in a stress raiser or stress concentration (see Sec. 2-13). 

In engineering practice, the load is usually measured in pounds and 
the area in square inches, so that stress has units of pounds per square 
inch (psi). Since it is common for engineers to deal with loads in the 
thousands of pounds, an obvious simpHfication is to work with units of 
1,000 lb, called kips. The stress may be expressed in units of kips per 
square inch (ksi). (1 ksi = 1,000 psi.) In scientific work stresses are 
often expressed in units of kilograms per square millimeter or dynes per 
square centimeter. (1 kg/mm^ = 9.81 X 10^ dynes/cml) 

Below the elastic limit Hooke's law can be considered vaHd, so that 
the average stress is proportional to the average strain, 

- = E = constant (1-4) 

e 

The constant E is the modulus of elasticity, or Young's modulus. 

1-5. Tensile Deformation of Ductile Metal 

The basic data on the mechanical properties of a ductile metal are 
obtained from a tension test, in which a suitably designed specimen is 
subjected to increasing axial load until it fractures. The load and elonga- 
tion are measured at frequent intervals during the test and are expressed 



Sec. 1-6] 



Introduction 




Fig. 1-3. 

curve. 



Fracture 



Strain e 
Typical tension stress-strain 



as average stress and strain according to the equations in the previous 
section. (More complete details on the tension test are given in Chap. 9.) 

The data obtained from the tension test are generally plotted as a 
stress-strain diagram. Figure 1-3 shows a typical stress-strain curve for 
a metal such as aluminum or cop- 
per. The initial linear portion of 
the curve OA is the elastic region 
within which Hooke's law is 
obeyed. Point A is the elastic 
limit, defined as the greatest stress 
that the metal can withstand with- 
out experiencing a permanent 
strain when the load is removed. 
The determination of the elastic 
limit is quite tedious, not at all 
routine, and dependent on the sen- 
sitivity of the strain-measuring 

instrument. For these reasons it is often replaced by the proportional 
limit, point A'. The proportional limit is the stress at which the stress- 
strain curve deviates from linearity. The slope of the stress-strain curve 
in this region is the modulus of elasticity. 

For engineering purposes the limit of usable elastic behavior is described 
by the yield strength, point B. The yield strength is defined as the stress 
which will produce a small amount of permanent deformation, generally 
a strain equal to 0.2 per cent or 0.002 inches per inch. In Fig. 1-3 
this permanent strain, or offset, is OC. Plastic deformation begins 
when the elastic limit is exceeded. As the plastic deformation of the 
specimen increases, the metal becomes stronger (strain hardening) so 
that the load required to extend the specimen increases with further 
straining. Eventually the load reaches a maximum value. The maxi- 
mum load divided by the original area of the specimen is the ultimate 
tensile strength. For a ductile metal the diameter of the specimen 
begins to decrease rapidly beyona maximum load, so that the load 
required to continue deformation drops off until the specimen fractures. 
Since the average stress is based on the original area of the specimen, 
it also decreases from maximum load to fracture. 



1-6. Ductile vs. Brittle Behavior 

The general behavior of materials under load can be classified as ductile 
or brittle depending upon whether or not the material exhibits the ability 
to undergo plastic deformation. Figure 1-3 illustrates the tension stress- 
strain curve of a ductile material. A completely brittle material would 



10 



Mechanical Fundamentals 



[Chap. 1 




fracture almost at the elastic limit (Fig. 1-4.0), while a brittle metal, such 
as white cast iron, shows some slight measure of plasticity before fracture 
(Fig. 1-46). Adequate ductility is an important engineering consider- 
ation, because it allows the mate- 
rial to redistribute localized stresses. 
When localized stresses at notches 
and other accidental stress concen- 
trations do not have to be con- 
sidered, it is possible to design for 
static situations on the basis of 
average stresses. However, with 
brittle materials, localized stresses 
continue to build up when there 
is no local yielding. Finally, a 
crack forms at one or more points 
of stress concentration, and it 
spreads rapidly over the section. Even if no stress concentrations are 
present in a brittle material, fracture will still occur suddenly because the 
yield stress and tensile strength are practically identical. 

It is important to note that brittleness is not an absolute property of 
a metal. A metal such as tungsten, which is brittle at room temperature, 
is ductile at an elevated temperature. A metal which is brittle in tension 
may be ductile under hydrostatic compression. Furthermore, a metal 
which is ductile in tension at room temperature can become brittle in the 
presence of notches, low temperature, high rates of loading, or embrittling 
agents such as hydrogen. 



strain 



Fig. 1-4. (a) Stress-strain curve for com- 
pletely brittle material (ideal behavior); 
(b) stress-strain curve for brittle metal 
with slight amount of ductility. 



1-7. What Constitutes Failure? 

Structural members and machine elements can fail to perform their 
intended functions in three general ways: 

1. Excessive elastic deformation 

2. Yielding, or excessive plastic deformation 

3. Fracture 

An understanding of the common types of failure is important in good 
design because it is always necessary to relate the loads and dimensions 
of the member to some significant material parameter which limits the 
load-carrying capacity of the member. For different types of failure, 
different significant parameters will be important. 

Two general types of excessive elastic deformation may occur: (1) 
excessive deflection under conditions of stable equilibrium, such as the 



Sec. 1-7] Introduction 11 

deflection of beam under gradually applied loads; (2) sudden deflection, 
or buckling, under conditions of unstable equilibrium. 

Excessive elastic deformation of a machine part can mean failure of the 
machine just as much as if the part completely fractured. For example, 
a shaft which is too flexible can cause rapid wear of the bearing, or the 
excessive deflection of closely mating parts can result in interference and 
damage to the parts. The sudden buckling type of failure may occur in 
a slender column when the axial load exceeds the Euler critical load or 
when the external pres.sure acting against a thin-walled shell exceeds a 
critical value. Failures due to excessive elastic deformation are con- 
trolled by the modulus of elasticity, not by the strength of the material. 
Generally, little metallurgical control can be exercised over the elastic 
modulus. The most effective way to increase the stiffness of a member 
is usually by changing its shape and increasing the dimensions of its 
cross section. 

Yielding, or excessive plastic deformation, occurs when the elastic limit 
of the metal has been exceeded. Yielding produces permanent change of 
shape, which may prevent the part from functioning properly any longer. 
In a ductile metal under conditions of static loading at room temperature 
yielding rarely results in fracture, because the metal strain hardens as it 
deforms, and an increased stress is required to produce further deforma- 
tion. Failure by excessive plastic deformation is controlled by the yield 
strength of the metal for a uniaxial condition of loading. For more com- 
plex loading conditions the yield strength is still the significant parameter, 
but it must be used with a suitable failure criterion (Sec. 3-4). At tem- 
peratures significantly greater than room temperature metals no longer 
exhibit strain hardening. Instead, metals can continuously deform at 
constant stress in a time-dependent yielding known as creep. The failure 
criterion under creep conditions is complicated by the fact that stress is 
not proportional to strain and the further fact that the mechanical proper- 
ties of the material may change appreciably during service. This com- 
plex phenomenon will be considered in greater detail in Chap. 13. 

The formation of a crack which can result in complete disruption of 
continuity of the member constitutes fracture. A part made from a 
ductile metal which is loaded statically rarely fractures like a tensile 
specimen, because it will first fail by excessive plastic deformation. 
However, metals fail by fracture in three general ways: (1) sudden 
brittle fracture; (2) fatigue, or progressive fracture; (3) delayed fracture. 
In the previous section it was shown that a brittle material fractures 
under static loads with little outward evidence of yielding. A sudden 
brittle type of fracture can also occur in ordinarily ductile metals under 
certain conditions. Plain carbon structural steel is the most common 



12 Mechanical Fundamentals [Chap. 1 

example of a material with a ductile-to-brittle transition. A change from 
the ductile to the brittle type of fracture is promoted by a decrease in 
temperature, an increase in the rate of loading, and the presence of a 
complex state of stress due to a notch. This problem is considered in 
Chap. 14. 

Most fractures in machine parts are due to fatigue. Fatigue failures 
occur in parts which are subjected to alternating, or fluctuating, stresses. 
A minute crack starts at a localized spot, generally at a notch or stress 
concentration, and gradually spreads over the cross section until the 
member breaks. Fatigue failure occurs without any visible sign of yield- 
ing at nominal or average stresses that are well below the tensile strength 
of the metal. Fatigue failure is caused by a critical localized tensile stress 
which is very difficult to evaluate, and therefore design for fatigue failure 
is based primarily on empirical relationships using nominal stresses. 
Fatigue of metals is discussed in greater detail in Chap. 12. 

One common type of delayed fracture is stress-rupture failure, which 
occurs when a metal has been statically loaded at an elevated temper- 
ature for a long period of time. Depending upon the stress and the tem- 
perature there may be no yielding prior to fracture. A similar type of 
delayed fracture, in which there is no warning by yielding prior to failure, 
occurs at room temperature when steel is statically loaded in the presence 
of hydrogen. 

All engineering materials show a certain variability in mechanical 
properties, which in turn can be influenced by changes in heat treat- 
ment or fabrication. Further, uncertainties usually exist regarding the 
magnitude of the applied loads, and approximations are usually neces- 
sary in calculating the stresses for all but the most simple member. 
Allowance must be made for the possibility of accidental loads of high 
magnitude. Thus, in order to provide a margin of safety and to protect 
against failure from unpredictable causes, it is necessary that the allow- 
able stresses be smaller than the stresses which produce failure. The 
value of stress for a particular material used in a particular way which is 
considered to be a safe stress is usually called the working stress (Tw. For 
static applications the working stress of ductile metals is usually based 
on the yield strength ao and for brittle metals on the ultimate tensile 
strength o-,,. Values of working stress are established by local and Federal 
agencies and by technical organizations such as the American Society of 
Mechanical Engineers (ASME). The working stress may be considered 
as either the yield strength or the tensile strength divided by a number 
called the factor of safety. 

O-w "^ -jTf- or CTu, = -rj- (l-5j 

•/V iV u 



Sec. 1-8] 



Introduction 



13 



where ay, = working stress, psi 
cro = yield strength, psi 
(r„ = tensile strength, psi 

iVo = factor of safety based on yield strength 

Nu = factor of safety based on tensile strength 
The value assigned to the factor of safety depends on an estimate of 
all the factors discussed above. In addition, careful consideration should 
be given to the consequences which would result from failure. If failure 
would result in loss of life, the factor of safety should be increased. The 
type of equipment will also influence the factor of safety. In military 
equipment, where light weight may be a prime consideration, the factor 
of safety may be lower than in commercial equipment. The factor of 
safety will also depend on the ex- 
pected type of loading. For static 
loading, as in a building, the factor 
of safety would be lower than in a 
machine, which is subjected to vi- p 
bration and fluctuating stresses. 











A-- 


® L 


u 


\ 




f 


k"^ 5 


^\ 




\ 




~- 


V. 




\ 


^o> 


\^ 


•^- 


X^X 



1-8. Concept of Stress a 
Types of Stresses 



nd tfi( 



® 





y 


Pa 








© 


/-'''^ 




\ 




\ 


\-^ 


\ 




-A — >x 



Stress is defined as the internal 
resistance of a body to an external 
applied force, per unit area. In Sec. 
1-4 the stress was considered to be 
uniformly distributed over the cross- 
sectional area of the member. How- 
ever, this is not the general case. 
Figure l-5a represents a body in 
equilibrium under the action of 
external forces Pi, P2, . . . , Ph- 
There are two kinds of external 
forces which may act on a body, sur- 
face forces and body forces. Forces 
distributed over the surface of the 
body, such as hydrostatic pressure 
or the pressure exerted by one body 
on another, are called surface forces. 
Forces distributed over the volume 

of a body, such as gravitational forces, magnetic forces, or inertia forces 
(for a body in motion), are called body forces. The two most common 
types of body forces encountered in engineering practice are centrifugal 



Fig. 1-5. (a) Body in equilibrium under 
action of external forces Pi, . . . , Pb', 
(b) forces acting on parts. 



14; Mechanical Fundamentals [Chap, 1 

forces due to high-speed rotation and forces due to temperature diffe)'- 
ential over the body (thermal stress). 

In general the force will not be uniformly distributed over any cross 
section of the body illustrated in Fig. l-5a. To obtain the stress at some 
point in a plane such as mm, part 1 of the body is removed and replaced 
by the system of external forces on mm which will retain each point in 
part 2 of the body in the same position as before the removal of part 1. 




Fig. 1-6. Resolution of total stress into its components. 

This is the situation in Fig. 1-56. We then take an area AA surrounding 
the point and note that a force AP acts on this area. If the area AA is 
continuously reduced to zero, the limiting value of the ratio AP/AA is the 
stress at the point on plane mm of body 2. 

lim — -r = cr (1-6) 

AA^O AA 

The stress will be in the direction of the resultant force P and will gener- 
ally be inclined at an angle to A A. The same stress at point in plane 
mm would be obtained if the free body were constructed by removing 
part 2 of the solid body. However, the stress will be different on any 
other plane passing through point 0, such as the plane nn. 

It is inconvenient to use a stress which is inclined at some arbitrary 
angle to the area over which it acts. The total stress can be resolved 
into two components, a normal stress a perpendicular to AA, and a shear- 
ing stress (or shear stress) r lying in the plane mm of the area. To illus- 
trate this point, consider Fig. 1-6. The force P makes an angle 6 with 
the normal z to the plane of the area A. Also, the plane containing the 
normal and P intersects the plane A along a dashed line that makes an 
angle <^ with the y axis. The normal stress is given by 

P 

a ^ -r COS 6 (1-7) 

A 



Sec. 1-9] Introduction 15 

The shear stress in the plane acts along the line OC and has the magnitude 

T=-T&\nd (1-8) 

This shear stress may be further resolved into components parallel to 
the X and y directions lying in the plane. 

P 

X direction "^ ~ ~a ^^^ ^ ^^^^ ^ (1"9) 

P 
y direction '^ ~ ~a ^^^^ ^ ^^^ ^ (1-10) 

Therefore, in general a given plane may have one normal stress and two 
shear stresses acting on it. 

1-9. Concept of Strain and the Types of Strain 

In Sec. 1-4 the average linear strain was defined as the ratio of the 
change in length to the original length of the same dimension. 

_ ± _ AL L - Ln 



where e = average linear strain 

5 = deformation 
By analogy with the definition of stress at a point, the strain at a point 
is the ratio of the deformation to the gage length as the gage length 
approaches zero. 

Rather than referring the change in length to the original gage length, 
it often is more useful to define the strain as the change in linear dimen- 
sion divided by the instantaneous value of the dimension. 

—- = \n-j^ (1-11) 

The above equation defines the natural, or true, strain. True strain, 
which is useful in dealing with problems in plasticity and metal form- 
ing, will be discussed more fully in Chap. 3. For the present it should 
be noted that for the very small strains for which the equations of elas- 
ticity are valid the two definitions of strain give identical values.^ 

Not only will the elastic deformation of a body result in a change in 
length of a linear element in the body, but it may also result in a change 

^ Considerable variance exists in the literature regarding the notation for average 
linear strain, true strain, and deformation. Linear strain is often denoted by e, while 
true strain is sometimes denoted by 5 or e. 



16 



Mechanical Fundamentals 



[Chap. 1 



in the initial angle between any two lines. The angular change in a 
right angle is known as shear strain. Figure 1-7 illustrates the strain 
produced by the pure shear of one face of a cube. The angle at A, which 
was originally 90°, is decreased by the application of a shear stress by a 
small amount 6. The shear strain y is equal to the displacement a 




Fig. 1-7. Shear strain. 



divided by the distance between the planes, h. The ratio a/h is also 
the tangent of the angle through which the element has been rotated. 
For the small angles usually involved, the tangent of the angle and the 
angle (in radians) are equal. Therefore, shear strains are often expressed 
as angles of rotation. 



7 = 7- = tan 6 = 
n 



(1-12) 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Crandall, S. H., and N. C. Dahl (eds.): "An Introduction to the Mechanics of Solids," 

McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 1959. 
Frocht, M. M.: "Strength of Materials," The Ronald Press Company, New York, 

1951. 
Seely, F. B., and J. O. Smith: "Resistance of Materials," 4th ed., John Wiley & Sons, 

Inc., New York, 1957. 
and ^: "Advanced Mechanics of Materials," 2d ed., John Wiley & 

Sons, Inc., New York, 1952. 
Shanley, F. R.: "Strength of Materials," McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New 

York, 1957. 



Chapter 2 

STRESS AND STRAIN RELATIONSHIPS 
FOR ELASTIC BEHAVIOR 

2-1 . Introduction 

The purpose of this chapter is to present the mathematical relation- 
ships for expressing the stress and strain at a point and the relationships 
between stress and strain in a rigid body which obeys Hooke's law. 
While part of the material covered in this chapter is a review of infor- 
mation generally covered in strength of materials, the subject is extended 
beyond this point to a consideration of stress and strain in three dimen- 
sions and to an introduction to the theory of elasticity. The material 
included in this chapter is important for an understanding of most of the 
phenomenological aspects of mechanical metallurgy, and for this reason 
it should be given careful attention by those readers to whom it is 
unfamiliar. In the space available for this subject it has not been possi- 
ble to carry it to the point where extensive problem solving is possible. 
The material covered here should, however, provide a background for 
intelligent reading of the more mathematical literature in mechanical 
metallurgy. 

2-2. Description of Stress at a Point 

As described in Sec. 1-8, it is often convenient to resolve the stresses 
at a point into normal and shear components. In the general case the 
shear components are at arbitrary angles to the coordinate axes, so that 
it is convenient to resolve each shear stress further into two components. 
The general case is shown in Fig. 2-1. Stresses acting normal to the 
faces of the elemental cube are identified by the subscript which also 
identifies the direction in which the stress acts; that is, ax is the normal 
stress acting in the x direction. Since it is a normal stress, it must act 
on the plane perpendicular to the x direction. By convention, values of 
normal stresses greater than zero denote tension; values less than zero 

17 



18 Mechanical Fundamentals [Chap. 2 

indicate compression. All the normal stresses shown in Fig. 2-1 are 
tensile. 

Two subscripts are needed for describing shearing stresses. The first 
subscript indicates the plane in which the stress acts and the second the 
direction in which the stress acts. Since a plane is most easily defined 
by its normal, the first subscript refers to this normal. For example, 
Tyz is the shear stress on the plane perpendicular to the y axis in the 




Fig. 2-1 . Stresses acting on an elemental unit cube. 

direction of the z axis. t„x is the shear stress on a plane normal to the 
y axis in the direction of the x axis. Shearing stresses oriented in the 
positive directions of the coordinate axes are positive if a tensile stress 
on the same cube face is in the positive direction of the corresponding axis. 
All the shear stresses shown in Fig. 2-1 are positive. 

The notation given above is the one used by Timoshenko^ and most 
American workers in the field of elasticity. The reader is reminded, 
however, that several other systems of notation are in use. Before 
attempting to read papers in this field it is important to become familiar 
with the notation which is used. 

It can be seen from Fig. 2-1 that nine quantities must be defined in 
order to establish the state of stress at a point. They are ax, o-y, cr^, Txy, 
Txz, Tyx, Tyz, T^x, and Tzy. Howcvcr, some simplification is possible. If we 
assume that the areas of the faces of the unit cube are small enough so 
that the change in stress over the face is negligible, by taking the sum- 

1 S. P. Timoshenko and J. N. Goodier, "Theory of Elasticity," 2d ed., McGraw- 
Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 1951. 



)ec. 



2-3] 



Stress and Strain Relationships For Elastic Behavior 19 



mation of the moments of the forces about the z axis it can be shown that 

Tiy = Tyx. 

(tjcu a?/ Az) Ax = (Tyx Ax Az) Ay 

• • Txy == Tyx 

and in like manner 

TXZ ^^ TzX Tyz = Tgy 



(2-1) 



Thus, the state of stress at a point is completely described by six com- 
ponents/ three normal stresses and three shear stresses, ax, a-y, cr^, Txy, 



Txz, Tyz. 



2-3. State of Stress in Two Dimensions (Plane Stress) 

Many problems can be simplified by considering a two-dimensional 
state of stress. This condition is frequently approached in practice when 



) 




Fig. 2-2. Stress on oblique plane, two dimensions. 

one of the dimensions of the body is small relative to the others. For 
example, in a thin plate loaded in the plane of the plate, there will be no 
stress acting perpendicular to the plate. The stress system will consist 
of two normal stresses (Xx and ay and a shear stress Txy. A stress con- 
dition in which the stresses are zero in one of the primary directions is 
called plane stress. 

Figure 2-2 illustrates a thin plate with its thickness normal to the 
plane of the paper. In order to know the state of stress at point in 
the plate, we need to be able to describe the stress components at for 
any orientation of the axes through the point. To do this, consider an 
oblique plane normal to the plane of the paper at an angle 6 between the 

^ For a more complete derivation see C. T. Wang, "Applied Elasticity," pp. 7-9, 
McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 1953. 



20 Mechanical Fundamentals [Chap. 2 

X axis and the normal A^ to the plane. It is assumed that the plane 
shown in Fig. 2-2 is an infinitesimal distance from and that the ele- 
ment is so small that variations in stress over the sides of the element 
can be neglected. The stresses acting on the oblique plane are the normal 
stress a and the shear stress r. The direction cosines between N and the 
X and y axes are I and m, respectively. From the geometry of Fig. 2-2, 
it follows that I = cos 6 and m = sin 6. If A is the area of the oblique 
plane, the areas of the sides of the element perpendicular to the x and y 
axes are Al and Am. 

Let Sx and Sy denote the x and y components of the total stress acting 
on the inclined face. By taking the summation of the forces in the x 
direction and the y direction, we obtain 

SxA = CFxAl -f TxyA^m 

SyA = ay Am + TxyAl 
or Sx = (Tx cos 6 -f- Txy sin 6 

Sy = (Ty sin 6 + Txy cos 

The components of Sx and Sy in the direction of the normal stress a are 

SxN = Sx COS 6 and SyN = Sy sin 9 

so that the normal stress acting on the oblique plane is given by 

(T = Sx COS 6 -j- Sy sin 6 

cr = (Tx cos^ d -\- (jy sin^ d -\- 2Txy sin 6 cos 6 (2-2) 

The shearing stress on the oblique plane is given by 

T = Sy cos 6 — Sx sin 9 

T = Txy{cos~ 6 — sin^ 9) + (o-y — (Xx) sin 9 cos 6 (2-3) 

To aid in computation, it is often convenient to express Eqs. (2-2) and 
(2-3) in terms of the double angle 29. This can be done with the follow- 
ing identities: 

, , cos 20 + 1 



uuo u 






2 




sm2 9 


_ 1 


— 


cos 29 
2 


2 sin 


9 cos 


9 


= 


sin 29 


cos^ 9 — 


sin^ 


9 


= 


cos 29 



Equations (2-2) and (2-3) now become 

O'x -\- (Ty (Xx — (T 



a = — ^- + ' ^ " cos 29 + Txy sin 29 (2-4) 

sin 26 -{- Txy cos 29 (2-5) 



2 ' 2 

0"u — (Xx 



Sec. 2-3] 



Stress and Strain Relationships for Elastic Behavior 21 



Equations (2-2) and (2-3) and their equivalents, Eqs. (2-4) and (2-5), 
describe the normal stress and shear stress on any plane through a point 
in a body subjected to a plane-stress situation. Figure 2-3 shows 



cr^ = 2,000psi 




Fig. 2-3. Variation of normal stress and shear stress with angle 6. 



the variation of normal stress and shear stress with 6 for the biaxial- 
plane-stress situation given at the top of the figure. Note the following 
important facts about this figure : 

1. The maximum and minimum values of normal stress on the oblique 
plane through point occur when the shear stress is zero. 

2. The maximum and minimum values of both normal stress and shear 
stress occur at angles which are 90° apart. 

3. The maximum shear stress occurs at an angle halfway between the 
maximum and minimum normal stresses. 

4. The variation of normal stress and shear stress occurs in the form 
of a sine wave, with a period oi 6 = 180°. These relationships are valid 
for any state of stress. 



22 Mechanical Fundamentals [Chap. 2 

For any state of stress it is always possible to define a new coordinate 
system which has axes perpendicular to the planes on which the maxi- 
mum normal stresses act and on which no shearing stresses act. These 
planes are called the principal planes, and the stresses normal to these 
planes are the principal stresses. For two-dimensional plane stress there 
will be two principal stresses ai and a 2 which occur at angles that are 90° 
apart (Fig. 2-3). For the general case of stress in three dimensions there 
will be three principal stresses ai, 0-2, and 0-3. According to convention, 
(Ti is the algebraically greatest principal stress, while 0-3 is the algebraically 
smallest stress. The directions of the principal stresses are the principal 
axes 1, 2, and 3. Although in general the principal axes 1, 2, and 3 do 
not coincide with the cartesian-coordinate axes x, y, z, for many situations 
that are encountered in practice the two systems of axes coincide because 
of symmetry of loading and deformation. The specification of the princi- 
pal stresses and their direction provides a convenient way of describing 
the state of stress at a point. 

Since by definition a principal plane contains no shear stress, its angu- 
lar relationship with respect to the xy coordinate axes can be determined 
by finding the values of 6 in Eq. (2-3) for which r = 0. 

Ti,v(cos2 6 — sin- 6) + {uy — Ux) sin 6 cos = 
rxy _ sin e cos d ^ >^(sin 26) ^ 1 ^^^^ ^^ 
(Tx — (^y cos^ 6 — sin^ 6 cos 26 2 

tan 26 = -^^^^ (2-6) 

(Tx — Cy 



Since tan 26 = tan (tt -|- 26), Eq. (2-6) has two roots, 61 and 62 = 61 
-j- mr/2. These roots define two mutually perpendicular planes which 
are free from shear. 

Equation (2-4) will give the principal stresses when values of cos 26 and 
sin 26 are substituted into it from Eq. (2-6). The values of cos 26 and 
sin 26 are found from Eq. (2-6) by means of the Pythagorean relationships. 



sin 26 = ± 
cos 26 = + 



[{ax - (r,)V4 + ry^^ 

(O-X - (Ty)/2 



Substituting these values into Eq. (2-4) results in the expression for the 



Sec. 2-4] 



Stress and Strain Relationships for Elastic Behavior 23 



maximum and minimum principal stresses for a two-dimensional (biaxial) 
state of stress. 



(7 max = O"! I 
O'miD = 0'2| 



0"X + (Ty \ ( a, — (Jy \- 2 T' 



(2-7) 



2-4. Mohr's Circle of Stress — Two Dimensions 

A graphical method for representing the state of stress at a point on 
any oblique plane through the point was suggested by O. Mohr. Figure 
2-4 is a Mohr's circle diagram for a two-dimensional state of stress. 




Fig. 2-4. Mohr's circle for two-dimensional state of stress. 



Normal stresses are plotted along the x axis, shear stresses along the 
y axis. The stresses on the planes normal to the x and y axes are plotted 
as points A and B. The intersection of the line AB with the x axis 
determines the center of the circle. At points D and E the shear stress 
is zero, so that these points represent the values of the principal stresses. 
The angle between the x axis and ax is determined by angle ACD in Fig. 



24 



Mechanical Fundamentals 



[Chap. 2 



2-4. This angle on Mohr's circle is equal to twice the angle between ai 
and the x axis on the actual stressed body. 
From Fig. 2-4 it can be determined that 



^^ = OC + CD = ^^±^^ + 



OC - CE = 



2 

<^X + CTy 



Ax — <Ty\ 

2 J 



I 2 

I ' xy 



The radius of the circle is equal to 



nn "^i ~ *^2 



Thus, the radius of Mohr's circle is equal to the maximum shearing 

stress. 



<Ti — (72 



+ r^ 



(2-8) 



This value is given by the maximum ordinate of the circle. Note that it 
acts on a plane for which 6 = x/4 (26 = 7r/2 on Mohr's circle); i.e., the 
plane on which r^ax acts bisects the angle between the principal stresses. 
Mohr's circle can also be used to determine the stresses acting on any 
oblique plane mm. Using the convention that 6 is positive when it is 
measured clockwise from the positive x axis, we find that to determine 
the stresses on the oblique plane whose normal is at an angle 6 we must 
advance an angle 26 from point A in the Mohr's circle. The normal and 
shearing stresses on the oblique plane are given by the coordinates of 
point F. The stresses on a plane perpendicular to mm would be obtained 
by advancing an additional 180° on the Mohr's circle to point G. This 
shows that the shearing stresses on two perpendicular planes are numeri- 
cally equal. It can also be seen from Fig. 2-4 that OF' + OG' = 20C. 
Therefore, the sum of the normal stresses on two perpendicular planes is 
a constant, independent of the orientation of the planes. 



2-5. State of Stress in Three Di 



mensions 



The general three-dimensional state of stress consists of three unequal 
principal stresses acting at a point. This is called a triaxial state of stress. 
If two of the three principal stresses are equal, the state of stress is known 
as cylindrical, while if all three principal stresses are equal, the state of 
stress is said to be hydrostatic, or spherical. 

The determination of the principal stresses for a three-dimensional 
state of stress in terms of the stresses acting on an arbitrary cartesian- 
coordinate system is an extension of the method described in Sec. 2-3 



Sec. 2-5] 



Stress and Strain Relationships for Elastic Behavior 85 



for the two-dimensional case. Figure 2-5 represents an elemental free 
body similar to that shown in Fig. 2-1 with a diagonal plane JKL of 
area A. The plane JKL is assumed to be a principal plane cutting 
through the unit cube, a is the principal stress acting normal to the 
plane JKL. Let I, m, n be the direction cosines of a, that is, the cosines 




Fis. 2-5. Stresses acting on elemental free body. 



of the angles between <x and the x, y, and z axes. Since the free body in 
Fig. 2-5 must be in equilibrium, the forces acting on each of its faces must 
balance. The components of a along each of the axes are Sx, Sy, and S^. 



Sx = (tI 
Area KOL = Al 



Sy = a-m 
Area J OK = Am 



S. 
Area JOL 



an 
An 



Taking the summation of the forces in the x direction results in 

(tAI — (TxAl — TyxAm — TzxAn = 
which reduces to 

((7 — (Tx)l — Tyxtn — Tsxn = 

Summing the forces along the other two axes results in 

— Txyl + (O- — Cry)m — T^yU = 
— Txzl — TyzVl + (cr — (tO = 



(2-9a) 



(2-96) 
(2-9c) 



Equations (2-9) are three homogeneous linear equations in terms of I, 



26 MechaHcal Fundamentals [Chap. 2 

m, and n. The only solution can be obtained by setting the determinant 
of the coefficients of I, m, and n equal to zero, since I, m, n cannot all eqtial 
zero. 



— Txtj cr — cr„ — T, 



= 



Solution of the determinant results in a cubic equation in a. 

<J^ — (o-x + 0"^ + O'z)"'" + {(TxCTy + (Ty(J2 + (X x(T z " T .^y — Ty^ " T ^^ff 

— {(Jx(Ty(Tz + '^iTxyTyzTxz — (TxTy^ — (TyTxz ~ (^ zT xy) = (2-10) 

The three roots of Eq. (2-10) are the three principal stresses ci, 0-2, and 0-3. 
To determine the direction, with respect to the original x, y, z axes, in 
which the principal stresses act, it is necessary to substitute o-i, 0-2, and 0-3 
each in turn into the three equations of Eq. (2-9). The resulting equa- 
tions must be solved simultaneously for I, m, and n with the help of the 
auxiliary relationship P -^ m^ -{- n"^ = 1. 

Let S be the total stress before resolution into normal and shear com- 
ponents and acting on a plane (not a principal plane), and let I, m, and n 
be the direction cosines for the plane with respect to the three principal 
axes. 

S' = Sx"" + Sy^ + Sz' = ai'P + a^'m-' + az'n-' (2-11) 

The normal stress a acting on this plane is given by 

a = Sxl + SyM + SzTl = (7l/2 + 0-2^2 + (7371^ (2-12) 

Therefore, the shearing stress acting on the same plane is given by 
r^ = S^ - <j^ = aiT- + as^m^ -{- a^V - (cxiP + cr^m^ + a^n^)^ 
<vhich reduces to 

^2 ^ (^^ _ o-2)2^2m2 + (ai - asyPn^ + ((72 - as)hn^n^ (2-13) 

Values of t for the three particular sets of direction cosines listed below 
are of interest because they bisect the angle between two of the three 
principal axes. Therefore, they are the maximum shearing stresses or the 
principal shearing stresses. 



(2-14) 



I 


m 


n 


r 





+ Vy2 


+ Vy2 


0'2 — <T3 

''^ 2 


±vy2 





±Vy2 


"1 Orj 

T2 - 2 


±vk 


±V^ 





(X\ — (T% 
Tz — o 



Sec. 2-6] 



Stress and Strain Relationships for Elastic Behavior 27 



Since according to convention ai is the algebraically greatest principal 
normal stress and 0-3 is the algebraically smallest principal stress, n has 
the largest value of shear stress and it is called the maximum shear stress 



ci — O'S 



(2-15) 



The maximum shear stress is important in theories of yielding and metal- 
forming operations. Figure 2-6 shows the planes of the principal shear 



0\ 




_ — > 



•mnv ~ *? "~ 



_ tr, - cTi 



o-i 



. I 


^2 




* 

> 



'az 



g'z -^3 



Fig. 2-6. Planes of principal shear stresses. 

stresses for a cube whose faces are the principal planes. Note that for 
each pair of principal stresses there are two planes of principal shear stress, 
which bisect the principal directions for the normal stresses. 



2-6. Mohr's Circle — Three Dimensions 

The discussion given in Sec. 2-4 of the representation of a two-dimen- 
sional state of stress by means of Mohr's circle can be extended to three 
dimensions. Figure 2-7 shows how a triaxial state of stress, defined by 
the three principal stresses, can be represented by three Mohr's circles. 



28 



Mechanical Fundamentals 



[Chap. 2 



It can be shown ^ that all possible stress conditions within the body fall 
within the shaded area between the circles in Fig. 2-7. 



k^2 



/ f 




Fig. 2-7. Mohr's circle representation of a three-dimensional state of stress. 



While the only physical significance of Mohr's circle is that it gives a 
geometrical representation of the equations that express the transforma- 
tion of stress components to different sets of axes, it is a very convenient 
way of visualizing the state of stress. Figure 2-8 shows Mohr's circle 
for a number of common states of stress. Note that the application of 
a tensile stress ai at right angles to an existing tensile stress ax (Fig. 2-8c) 
results in a decrease in the principal shear stress on two of the three sets 
of planes on which a principal shear stress acts. However, the maximum 
shear stress is not decreased from what it would be for uniaxial tension, 
although if only the two-dimensional Mohr's circle had been used, this 
would not have been apparent. If a tensile stress is applied in the third 
principal direction (Fig. 2-8d), the maximum shear stress is reduced 
appreciably. For the limiting case of equal triaxial tension (hydrostatic 
tension) Mohr's circle reduces to a point, and there are no shear stresses 
acting on any plane in the body. The effectiveness of biaxial- and tri- 
axial-tension stresses in reducing the shear stresses results in a consider- 
able decrease in the ductility of the material, because plastic deformation 
is produced by shear stresses. Thus, brittle fracture is invariably associ- 
ated with triaxial stresses developed at a notch or stress raiser. Hovf 
ever. Fig. 2-8e shows that, if compressive stresses are applied lateral to a 
tensile stress, the maximum shear stress is larger than for the case of 

1 A. Nadai, "Theory of Flow and Fracture of Solids," 2d ed., pp. 96-98, McGraw- 
Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 1950. 



Sec. 2-6] 




Stress and Strain Relationships for Elastic Behavior 29 

,2 



(C) 





cr, = 2 cr. 



{c] 



7-max = r-2=r, c^jj^ 




33. 




^mox ~ ^2 ~ ^3 



cr, = 20-2 = 20-3 



U) 




Fig. 2-8. Mohr's circles (three-dimensional) for various states of stress, (a) Uniaxial 
tension; (6) uniaxial compression; (c) biaxial tension; (d) triaxial tension (unequal); 
(e) uniaxial tension plus biaxial compression. 



either uniaxial tension or compression. Because of the high value of 
shear stress relative to the applied tensile stress the material has an 
excellent opportunity to deform plastically without fracturing under this 
state of stress. Important use is made of this fact in the plastic working 
of metals. For example, greater ductility is obtained in drawing wire 
through a die than in simple uniaxial tension because the reaction of the 
metal with the die will produce lateral compressive stresses. 



30 



Mechanical Fundamentals 



[Chap. 2 



An important state of stress is pure shear. Figure 2-9a illustrates 
Mohr's circle for a two-dimensional state of pure shear. This state of 
stress is readily obtained by twisting a cylindrical bar in torsion. The 
Mohr's circle for this state of stress shows that the maximum and mini- 
mum normal stresses are equal to the shear stress and occur at 45° to the 



'/x 



im 



'// 



-K ^min~ '// 



'//C 




max" '// 



(a) 



cr^-a-y =-cr, 




Kb) 

Fig. 2-9. Equivalent pure-shear conditions, (a) Pure shear (plane stress); (6) equal 
biaxial tension and compression. 



shear stresses. The maximum shear stress is equal to the applied shear 
stress Txii, but it occurs only on the set of planes parallel to the z axis. 
On the other two sets of planes the principal shear stress is rxi//2. Note 
that for three-dimensional pure shear two out of the three sets of shear 
planes have a value of Tn,ax = ci. An identical state of stress to pure 
shear can be obtained when equal tensile and compressive stresses are 
applied to a unit cube (Fig. 2-96). Once again Xmax = cri, but to obtain 
complete identity with a state of two-dimensional pure shear, the axes 
must be rotated 45° in space or 90° on the Mohr's circle. 



Sec. 2-7] 



Stress and Strain Relationships for Elastic Behavior 31 



2-7. Description of Strain at a Point 

The brief description of linear strain and shear strain given in Sec. 1-9 
can be expanded into a more generaHzed description of the strain at a 
point in a rigid body. For simpUcity in illustration, Fig. 2-10 considers 



dy ^ 



'^Ty'^y 



dy 



M 



I I 

I L I 



.__^^ 



dx- 



.*%,i. 



dx 



Fig. 2-10. Components of strain for plane strain. 



a two-dimensional, or plane-strain, condition where all the deformation is 
confined to the xy plane. It is, however, a simple matter to generalize 
the relationship obtained from this figure to the three-dimensional case. 
Let the coordinates of a point in an unstrained rigid body be defined by 
X, y, and z. After strain is applied, the point will undergo displacements 
u, V, and w in the directions x, y, and z. In order that the displacement 
of the entire body be geometrically compatible, it is necessary that no 
two particles occupy the same point in space or that no voids be created 
within the body. In order to satisfy these requirements, the displace- 
ment components u, v, and w must vary continuously from point to point. 
This can be accomplished if their gradients with respect to x, y, and z 
have no discontinuities, and therefore the partial derivatives of u, v, and 
w with respect to x, y, and z enter into the analysis. 

In Fig. 2-10 for the plane-strain condition, it can be seen that the 
x component of the displacement of K to K' is the displacement of J, 
given by u, plus the rate of change of u along the distance dx, given by 
(du/dx) dx. The unit linear strain in the x direction, e^, is given by 

_ J'K' — JK _ [dx -\- (du/dx) dx] — dx _ du /q ir ^ 
^^ ~ JK ~ dx " di ^^^ ^^ 



Similarly 



J'M' - JM _ dy -\- (dv/dy) dy - dy _ dv 



JM 



dy 



dy 



(2-166) 



32 Mechanical Fundamentals [Chap. 2 

and if the z direction were being considered, 

e. = ^ (2-16c) 

The shearing strain 7^^ at J' is given by the change in angle of the two 
elements originally parallel to the x and y axes. 

7x^ = /-KJM - LK'J'W = IBJ'M' + lAJ'K' 

Since, for the small strains involved, the tangent of the angle equals the 
angle, from Fig. 2-10 it can be seen that 

(du/dy) dy (dv/dx) dx du dv /n icj\ 

^- = dy + dx ^di^di ^^-^^^^ 

In the same way, it can be shown that 

du dw /o ic \ 

^- ^Tz-^Tx (2-16e) 

dy dw 

Thus, six terms are necessary completely to describe the state of strain 
at a point, e^, ey, e^, 7^^, 75^^, 7x2. 

In complete analogy with stress, it is possible to define a system of 
coordinate axes along which there are no shear strains. These axes are 
the principal strain axes. For an isotropic body the directions of the 
principal strains coincide with those of the principal stresses.^ An ele- 
ment oriented along one of these principal axes will undergo pure exten- 
sion or contraction without any rotation or shearing strains. As with 
principal stresses, the largest and smallest linear strains at a point in the 
body are given by the values of the principal strains. 

Methods similar to those used in Sec. 2-5, for the derivation of the 
equation for the values of the three principal stresses, and in Sec. 2-3, 
for the normal and shear stresses on any plane through a point in the 
body, can be used for the derivation^ of similar quantities in terms of 
strain. However, these equations may be obtained much more easily by 
replacing a and r in the stress equation by e and 7/2. For example, the 
linear strain on any plane in a two-dimensional situation can, from Eq. 
(2-2), be expressed by 

es = ex cos^ 6 -\- Cy sin^ 6 -\- 72y sin 6 cos d (2-17) 

The three principal strains ei > 62 > 63 are the three roots of the follow- 

' For a derivation of this point see Wang, op. cii., pp. 26-27. 
2 Timoshenko and Goodier, op. cit., pp. 221-227. 



Sec. 2-8] Stress and Strain Relationships For Elastic Behavior 33 

ing equation [obtained from Eq. (2-10)] : 

e^ - (fx + ey -\- e,)e'^ + [e^Cy + e^e, + e^e, - }^i(yl,, + tL + ylz)]e 

- e^eye, + Mi^xll^ + e,,7L + ^ztL - lx,nxzi,z) = (2-18) 

By following through with this analogy, the equations for the principal 
shearing strains can be obtained from Eq. (2-14). 

7i = €"2 — f's 

Tmax = 72 = fl - 63 (2-19) 

73 = ei — 62 

The volume strain, or cubical dilatation, is the change in volume per 
unit of original volume. Consider a rectangular parallelepiped with edges 
dx, dy, dz. The volume in the strained condition is 

(1 + ei)(l + 62) (1 + 63) dx dy dz 
From its definition, the volume strain A is given by 

_ (1 + 61) (1 + 62) (1 + 63) dx dy dz — dx dy dz 
" dx dy dz 

= (1 -f ei)(l +e2)(l +63) - 1 

which for small strains, after neglecting the products of strains, becomes 

A = ei 4- 62 + 63 (2-20) 

2-8. Measurement of Surface Strain 

Except in a few cases involving contact stresses, it is not possible to 
measure stress directly. Therefore, experimental measurements of stress 
are actually based on measured strains and are converted to stresses by 
means of Hooke's law and the more general relationships which are given 
in Sec. 2-10. The most universal strain-measuring device is the bonded- 
wire resistance gage, frequently called the SR-4 strain gage. These gages 
are made up of several loops of fine wire or foil of special composition, 
which are bonded to the surface of the body to be studied. When the 
body is deformed, the wires in the gage are strained and their electrical 
resistance is altered. The change in resistance, which is proportional to 
strain, can be accurately determined with a simple Wheatstone-bridge 
circuit. The high sensitivity, stability, comparative ruggedness, and ease 
of application make resistance strain gages a very powerful tool for strain 
determination. 

For practical problems of experimental stress analysis it is often impor- 
tant to determine the principal stresses. If the principal directions are 
known, gages can be oriented in these directions and the principal stresses 



34 



Mechanical Fundamentals 



[Chap. 2 





\a} id] 

Fig. 2-11. Typical strain-gage rosettes, (a) Rectangular; (6) delta. 




r 

2 


c 

c 

1 


'^2 

D 


b t 
oc\. 


z 

V 




i 


y 


0\2^ \ 


I 




< — ^ — *■ 


B 










^b " 








Cq, 







Fig. 2-1 2. Mohr's circle for determination of principal strains. 

determined quite readily. In the general case the direction of the princi- 
pal strains will not be known, so that it will be necessary to determine 
the orientation and magnitude of the principal strains from the measured 
strains in arbitrary directions. Because no stress can act perpendicular 
to a free surface, strain-gage measurements involve a two-dimensional 
state of strain. The state of strain is completely determined if e^, e^, 
and ^xM can be measured. However, strain gages can make only direct 



Sec. 2-9] Stress and Strain Relationships for Elastic Behavior 35 

readings ©f linear strain, while shear strains must be determined indirectly. 
Therefore, it is the usual practice to use three strain gages separated at 
fixed angles in the form of a "rosette," as in Fig. 2-11. Strain-gage read- 
ings at three values of 6 will give three simultaneous equations similar to 
Eq. (2-17) which can be solved for e^, Cy, and yxy The two-dimensional 
version of Eq. (2-18) can then be used to determine the principal strains. 
Equations for directly converting strain-gage readings into principal 
stresses for the two rosettes shown in Fig. 2-11 will be found in Table 2-2. 
A more convenient method of determining the principal strains from 
strain-gage readings than the solution of three simultaneous equations in 
three unknowns is the use of Mohr's circle. In constructing a Mohr's 
circle representation of strain, values of linear normal strain e are plotted 
along the x axis, and the shear strain divided by 2 is plotted along the 
y axis. Figure 2-12 shows the Mohr's circle construction^ for the gener- 
alized strain-gage rosette illustrated at the top of the figure. Strain-gage 
readings Ca, Cb, and Cc are available for three gages situated at arbitrary 
angles a and /3. The objective is to determine the magnitude and orien- 
tation of the principal strains ei and e-z. 

1. Along an arbitrary axis X'X' lay off vertical lines aa, bb, and cc 
corresponding to the strains Ca, Cb, and Cc. 

2. From any ])oint on the line bb (middle strain gage) draw a line 
DA at an angle a with bb and intersecting aa at point A. In the same 
way, lay off DC intersecting cc at point C. 

3. Construct a circle through A, C, and D. The center of this circle is 
at 0, determined by the intersection of the perpendicular bisectors to 
CD and AD. 

4. Points A, B, and C on the circle give the values of e and 7/2 (meas- 
ured from the new x axis through 0) for the three gages. 

5. Values of the principal strains are determined by the intersection of 
the circle with the new x axis through 0. The angular relationship of ei 
to the gage a is one-half the angle AOP on the Mohr's circle {AOP = 26). 

2-9. Stress-Strain Relations 

In the first chapter it was shown that uniaxial stress is related to uni- 
axial strain by means of the modulus of elasticity. This is Hooke's law 
in its simplest form, 

(T. = Ee, (2-21) 

where E is the modulus of elasticity in tension or compression. While a 
tensile force in the x direction produces a linear strain along that axis, 

» G. Murphy, /. Appl. Mech., vol. 12, p. A209, 1945; F. A. McClintock, Proc. Soc. 
Exptl. Stress Analysis, vol. 9, p. 209, 1951. 



36 Mechanical Fundamentals [Chap. 2 

it also produces a contraction in the transverse y and z directions. The 
ratio of the strain in the transverse direction to the strain in the longi- 
tudinal direction is known as Poisson's ratio, denoted by the symbol v. 

Cy == e^ = -PC:, = - -^ (2-22) 

Only the absolute value of v is used in calculations. Poisson's ratio is 
0.25 for a perfectly isotropic elastic material, but for most metals the 
values^ are closer to 0.33. 

The generalized description of Hooke's law says that for a body acted 
upon by a general stress system the strain along any principal axis is due 
to the stress acting along that axis plus the superimposed strain resulting 
from the Poisson effect of the principal stresses acting along the other 
two axes. 

1 V V 

= ^ [o-l - J'(0"2 + org)] 

and for the other two principal axes 

^2 = -p, [o-2 — v((Ti + 0-3)] 

^ (2-23) 

^3 = -p, ks — v((ri + 0-2)] 

For a biaxial state of plane stress, 0-3 = 0, and Eqs. (2-23) reduce to 

ei = -^ (o-i - W2) 

^2 = -p, (o"2 — vari) {2-23a> 

63 = ~ E^'^^ ~^ ^^^ 

Note that, even when the stress along the third axis is zero, the strain 
along that axis is not zero (unless ci = —0-2). 

In the case of plane strain, es = 0, and the strain-stress relationships 
become 

ei = — p^ [(1 - j/)(Ti - W2] 

1 + . (2-2^^^ 

62 = — p — [(1 — v)<r2 — wi] 

' A derivation which intuitively suggests that v = 0.33 has been presented by F. R. 
Shanley, "Strength of Materials," pp. 138-139, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., 
New York, 1957. 



Sec. 2-9] 



Stress and Strain Relationships for Elastic Behavior 37 



Shear stress is related to shear strain by relationships similar to Eq. 

(2-21). 

Txy = Gy^y T„ = Gy^^ Ty^ = Gyy: (2-24) 

The proportionality constant G is the modulus of elasticity in shear, or the 
modulus of rigidity. 

Three material constants E, G, and v are involved in the description 
of the elastic behavior of materials. It will be shown that these con- 
stants are related, so that for an isotropic material there are only two 





1 1 1 


1 1 1 




— *■ 


^ 


a 

y 


tiz 


— *- 
— > 


^ \\ ° 


c 






J i J 


\ \ \ 


( 




a) 



Fig. 2-13. (a) Element subjected to pure shear; (6) stresses on triangle Oab before 
deformation; (c) after deformation. 

independent elastic constants. Consider a rectangular element which is 
subjected to a condition of pure shear (Fig. 2-13) (see the Mohr's circle 
in Fig. 2-96). <Tx and a-y are principal stresses since no shear stresses are 
present on the faces on which they act. The maximum shearing stress 
will lie on a 45° plane, and if ay = —dx, the value of Xmax will be (Ty. The 
shearing stresses distort the element in the manner shown in Fig. 2-1 3c. 
Oa is elongated, Ob is shortened, and ab does not change in length. Angle 
Oab is reduced by an amount 7/2. 



. /w y\ Ob' 1 



+ ex 
1 + 

Since, for elastic strains, 7 is a small angle 

tan (x/4) - tan (7/2) 



/tt _ 7\ ^ J 
\4 V 1 



tan I - — 



_ 1 - 7/2 
-H tan (7r/4) tan (7/2) 1 -\- 7/2 



For pure shear 



— (Tx = T 



38 Mechanical Fundamentals 

Substitution into Eq. (2-23) produces 



[Chap. 2 



_ _ _ 1 + V _ ^ + V 

^V ^X ^V -n *~~ ^ 



E 



E 



Equating the two expressions for tan (7r/4 — 7/2) and substituting the 
above equation gives 

Comparing this relation with the generalized form of Eq. (2-24) results in 
the general relationship between the three elastic constants. Typical 
values for a number of materials are given in Table 2-1. 



G = 



E 



2(1 + v) 



(2-26) 



Table 2-1 

Typical Room-temperature Values of Elastic Constants 

FOR Isotropic Materials 



Material 



Aluminum alloys 

Copper 

Steel (plain carbon and low-alloy) . 

Stainless steel (18-8) 

Titanium 

Tungsten 



Modulus of 
elasticity, 
10-e psi 



10.5 
16.0 
29.0 
28.0 
17.0 
58.0 



Shear 

modulus, 

10-6 psi 



4.0 
6.0 

11.0 
9.5 
6.5 

22.8 



Poisson' 
ratio 



0.31 
0.33 
0.33 
0.28 
0.31 
0.27 



The addition of the three equations giving the strain produced by the 
three principal stresses [Eq. (2-23)] results in 



ei + 62 + 63 = — ^ — (o-i + 0-2 + o's) 



(2-27) 



The left-hand term of Eq. (2-27) is the volume strain A. Rewriting Eq. 
(2-27) results in 

S'^™ (1 - 2p) 



A 



E 



(2-28) 



where am is the average of the three principal stresses. This can be 
written as 

_arn _ E^ 

" ~ A ~ 3(1 - 2v) 



(2-29) 



The constant k is the volumetric modulus of elasticity, or the hulk modulus. 



Sec. 2-10] Stress and Strain Relationships for Elastic Behavior 39 

The bulk modulus is therefore the ratio of the average stress to the vol- 
ume strain. It is frequently evaluated for conditions of hydrostatic com- 
pression, where o-„, is equal to the hydrostatic pressure. 

2-10. Calculation of Stresses from Elastic Strains 

The general equations expressing stress in terms of strain are consider- 
ably more complicated than the equations giving strain in terms of stress 
[Eqs. (2-23)]. The simultaneous solution of these equations for o-i, ai, and 
(73 results in 

_ vE . . E 

''' - (1 + .)(! - 2u) ^ + TlTv '' 

--= (l + .)a-2.) ^ + lf-/- (2-30) 

vE ^ , E 

"' ~ 0"T".)(i - 2.) ^ + IT". '' 

where A = ei -{- e2 -\- e^. The term X = vE/(l -\- p)(l — 2v) is called 
Lame's constant. By using this constant the above equations can be 
simplified to 

(71 = XA -f 2Gei 

(72 = XA -f- 2Ge2 (2-31) 

(73 = XA + 2Ge3 

For the case of plane stress (a^ = 0) two simple and useful equations 
relating the stress to the strains may be obtained by solving the first two 
of Eqs. (2-23) simultaneously for ai and (72. 

ci = :j-^^ — I (ei + 1^62) 

E ' (2-32) 

0-2 = 1 5 (^2 + vei) 

These equations can be very useful for determining the values of princi- 
pal stress from strain-gage measurements. Note that even when a strain 
gage is oriented in the principal direction it is not correct to multiply the 
strain by the elastic modulus to get the stress in that direction. Because 
of the Poisson effect, corrections for lateral strains must be made by using 
Eqs. (2-32). 

Usually the methods described in Sec. 2-8 will have to be employed to 
determine the values of principal strain before these equations can be 
used. A short-cut procedure is to use a strain-gage rosette with three 
gages at fixed orientations for which relationships have been worked out 
between the strains measured by each gage and the principal stresses. 
Table 2-2 gives the relationships between the principal stresses and the 



i-H m 

t ^ 

Eh HI 

o 
o >- 



CC 



m .2 

(M S "If 

I 03 & 

=^ H -C 

Z si 
n 

CO 



P5 



0^ 



+ 



+ 



+ 



+ + 



6q IcN &q 



tf 



+ 



+ 



> 



+ 



^ 


+ 


1 




T— 1 




^ 


;^ 




+ 


1 


+ 





^H 





bqicN Ki 



P4 



+ 



+ 



> 



+ 



K5 



+ 



&q 



+ 



3 
III 





^ 




«t> 


^ 


1 


lU 


•ij 


+ 


^ ^-x 




,^ 




e ^ 


1 


^ ^ 















t I (M 



+ 
+ 

1 

T 

I I (M 



^ 



40 



Sec. 2-11] Stress and Strain Relationships for Elastic Behavior 41 

strain readings €«, ei>, and Cc for the three gages in the rectangular and 
delta rosettes shown in Fig. 2-11. The derivation of the equations and 
graphical solutions for these equations are discussed in texts^ on strain- 
gage technology. 

2-1 1 . Generalized Stress-Strain Relationships 

The stress-strain relationships given in the previous two sections con- 
tain three elastic constants E, G, and v. These are the only material 
constants needed to describe the elastic stress-strain behavior provided 
that the material can be considered isotropic. However, many materials 
are anisotropic ; i.e., the elastic properties vary with direction. A metallic 
single crystal is an extreme example of an anisotropic elastic material, 
while cold-worked metals may also exhibit anisotropic elastic behavior. 
However, in the usual case with engineering materials the grain size is 
small enough and the grains are in a sufficiently random arrangement 
so that the equations based on isotropic conditions may be used. 

In order to consider the possibility of elastic constants which vary with 
orientation in the material, Hooke's law can be written in completely 
general terms as a linear relationship between strain and stress. 

^x = SllCTx + Sl2(^y -f- Sn(72 -f- SuTxy + SnTyz -\- SieTzx 

€y = S2lO'x + S^-lCy + S230'z + SiiTxy + S^bTyz + 'S26Tzi 

Cz = SsiCTx + S320^y + S^^a^ + »Sl34Txy + S^bTyz + Ss^Tzx /o oo\ 

7x2, = Suffjc + Si2Cry + *S430'j -j- SuTxy + Si^Tyz + S^^Tsx 

Jyz = SblO-x + Sh20'y + Sb^O'z -\- SbiTxy + Sf,5Tyz + S^GTzx 

7zx = SeiCx + S62cry + ♦SeaO'z + S^iTxy + SebTyz + SeeTzx 

The constants ^Sn, *Si2, . . . , >S,y are the elastic compliances. Note that 
these equations indicate that a shear stress can produce a linear strain 
in an elastically anisotropic material. A similar set of six equations 
relates the stress to the strain in terms of the elastic coefficients Cn, 

Cl2, ■ • ■ , Cij. 

cTx = Ciiex + CuCy -\- Ci^ez -j- Ciaxy + Cib-yyz + Ci&yzx 
(2-34) 

Txy = C ilCx + CiiCy + Ci^Cz -\- Cnyxy + Cihjyz + C*46T2X 

Thus, in order to calculate the stress from the strain in the most 
general circumstances, it is necessary to know 6 strain components and 
36 elastic coefficients. Fortunately, symmetry considerations can reduce 
considerably the number of necessary constants. The elastic constants 

1 C. C. Perry and H. R. Lissner, "The Strain Gage Primer," McGraw-Hill Book 
Company, Inc., New York, 1955. 



42 



Mechanical Fundamentals 



[Chap. 2 



with unequal subscripts are equivalent when the order of the subscripts 
is reversed. 



Sij — Sji 



Ci 



\jji 



Therefore, even for the least symmetrical crystal structure (triclinic) the 
number of independent constants is reduced to 21. For metals, which 
all have crystal structures of relatively high symmetry, the maximum 
number of constants that need to be considered is 12. Thus, Eqs. (2-33) 
can be written as 



ex = SnCx + Su(Ty + Snf^z Jxp = SuTxy 

62 = Si\(^x + Sz2(^v + SzZ(^z Izx — SeeTzx 



(2-35) 



By comparing these equations with Eqs. (2-23) and (2-24) it can be seen 
that *Sii is the reciprocal of the modulus of elasticity in the x direction, 
that S21 determines the component of linear strain produced in the y 

Table 2-3 

Elastic Compliances for Metal Crystals 

Units of 10~^2 cm^/dyne 



Metal 



Aluminum 

Copper 

Iron 

Iron (polycrystalline) 

Tungsten 

Magnesium 

Zinc 



-Sii 



1.59 
1.49 
0.80 
0.48 
0.26 
2.23 
0.82 



^12 



-0.58 
-0.62 
-0.28 
-0.14 
-0.07 
-0.77 
+0.11 



s. 



3.52 
1.33 
0.80 
1.24 
0.66 
6.03 
2.50 



013 



012 

012 

012 

012 
-0.49 
-0.66 



-S3 



Sn 

Su 

Su 

Sn 

Sn 

1.98 

2.64 



direction due to ax, equivalent to v/E, and that Szi represents the same 
thing for the z direction. Also, the compliance S^i is the reciprocal of 
the shear modulus. 

For metals which exist in one of the cubic crystal structures 

'Jll = *J22 = AJ33, *J12 = *J13 = S2I = 023 = -Ssi = 032, and O44 — *^55 = 066. 

Therefore, Eq. (2-35) may be written as 



Cx = Siiax + >Si2(o"j^ + (Tz) 7x2/ = SuTxy 

Qy = Snay + *Sl2(0'2 + <Tx) lyz — SiiTyz 

62 = 8\\Crz + *Sl2(o'x -f (Ty) Izx = & \^T zx 



(2-36) 



The identity between these equations and Eqs. (2-23) and (2-24) is 
apparent. Therefore, for a material with a cubic crystal structure there 
are three independent elastic constants, while for a truly isotropic mate- 
rial there are only two independent elastic constants. For an isotropic 



Sec. 2-12] Stress and Strain Relationships for Elastic Behavior 43 

material the relationship between these constants is given by 

044 = 2(oii — 012) 

Table 2-3 lists some typical values for elastic compliance. By applying 
the above relationship compare the difference in isotropy between copper 
and tungsten. 

2-1 2. Theory of Elasticity 

The mathematic theory of elasticity entails a more detailed consider- 
ation of the stresses and strains in a loaded member than is required by 



icr.^^-Bdy)dx 



dy 



dTxy 



aj^dy^ 



Tjrydyy 






dy 



dx 



>^^'^/ dy 



dy) dy 



-*(o>+^<i^)^/ 



TxydX 



ay dx 



Fig. 2-14. Forces acting on volume element. 



the ordinary methods of analysis of strength of materials. The solutions 
arrived at by strength of materials are usually made mathematically 
simpler by the assumption of a strain distribution in the loaded member 
which satisfies the physical situation but may not be mathematically 
rigorous. In the theory of elasticity no simplifying assumptions are made 
concerning the strain distribution. 

As with strength of materials, the first requirement for a solution is to 
satisfy the conditions of equilibrium. Figure 2-14 illustrates the forces 
acting on an element of the body for a plane-stress situation. Taking the 
summation of forces in the x and ij directions results in 



2P. = 



dx 



+ 



dTru 



= 



^^• = l"+^"+«-° 



(2-37) 



The term pg arises from the consideration of the weight of the body, 
where p is the mass per unit volume and g is the acceleration of gravity. 
The above equations constitute the equations of equilibrium for plane 



44 Mechanical Fundamentals [Chap. 2 

stress. For a three-dimensional stress system there will be three equa- 
tions,^ each containing one partial derivative of the normal stress and 
two partial derivatives of the shear stresses. 

Equations (2-37) must be satisfied at all points throughout the body. 
Note that these equilibrium equations do not give a relationship between 
the stresses and the external loads. Instead, they give the rate of change 
of the stresses at any point in the body. However, the relationship 
between stress and external load must be such that at the boundary of 
the body the stresses become equal to the surface forces per unit area; 
i.e., it must satisfy the boundary conditions. 

One of the important requirements of the theory of elasticity is that 
the deformation of each element must be such that elastic continuity is 
preserved. Physically, this means that the stresses must vary so that 
no gaps occur in the material. The equations of compatibility for the 
two-dimensional case can be obtained from the definitions for strain in 
terms of the displacements u and v (Sec. 2-7). 

du . . 

'^ = Ty ^^^ 

du , dv / V 

Txy = T- + — (C) 

dy dx 

These three equations show that there is a definite relationship between 
the three strains at a point, because they are expressed in terms of two 
displacements u and v. Differentiating Eq. (a) twice with respect to y, 
Eq. (h) twice with respect to x, and Eq. (c) with respect to both x and y 
results in 

dy^ ax- ox dy 

Equation (2-38) is the equation of compatibility in two dimensions. If 
the strains satisfy this equation, they are compatible with each other 
and the continuity of the body is preserved. The equation of compati- 
bility can be expressed in terms of stress by differentiating Eqs. (2-23) 
and (2-24) and substituting into Eq. (2-38). 

W - 'W' ^ ^' ' "^' ^ ^ '^ '^ didy ^^-^^^ 

If values of o-^, ay, and r^cy satisfy Eq. (2-39), it can be considered that 
the strains which accompany these stresses are compatible and that the 
continuity of the body will be preserved. 

^ Timoshenko and Goodier, op. cit., chap. 9 



Sec. 2-12] Stress and Strain Relationships for Elastic Behavior 45 

Basically, the solution of a problem with the theory of elasticity 
requires the determination of an expression for the stresses (Tx, <Ty, r^y in 
terms of the external loads that satisfies the equations of equilibrium 
[Eqs. (2-37)], the equations of compatibility [Eq. (2-39)], and the bound- 
ary conditions. Such a solution generally involves considerable mathe- 
matical agility. Most of the complications attending the theory of 
elasticity arise out of the necessity for satisfying the requirement of 
continuity of elastic deformation. In solutions by strength of materials 
continuity of deformation is not always satisfied. Continuity is main- 
tained by local plastic yielding. Generally, this does not have an impor- 
tant effect on the solution because the effects of yielding do not extend 
far beyond the region where they occur. In other problems, such as the 
determination of stresses at geometrical discontinuities (stress raisers), 
localized yielding is important, and the methods of the theory of elasticity 
must be used. 

One method which is used for the solution of problems by the theory 
of elasticity is to find a function $ in x and y which satisfies Eqs. (2-37) 
and (2-39) and also expresses the stresses in terms of the loads. Such a 
function is usually called the Airy stress function. Airy^ showed that 
there will always exist a function in x and y from which the stresses at 
any point can be determined by the following equations: 

-^ = ^ - pgy ^^ = ^.- m ^^y - - ^^j (2-40) 

Equations (2-40) satisfy the equations of equilibrium. In order to satisfy 
the compatibility equation, Eqs. (2-40) are differentiated and substituted 
into Eq. (2-39). 



dx* " 3.1-2 dy'- "^ dy 



4 + 2--— ,-f— , = (2-41) 



If a stress function can be found for the problem which satisfies Eq. 
(2-41), the stresses are given by Eqs. (2-40) provided that Eqs. (2-40) 
also satisfy the boundary conditions of the problem. The discovery of 
a stress function which satisfies both Eq. (2-41) and the boundary con- 
ditions is usually not easy, and therefore only a fairly limited number of 
problems have been solved by this technique. For problems with com- 
plicated geometry and loading systems it is usually necessary to use 
finite-difference equations and relaxation methods- for the solution of the 
problem. 

1 G. B. Airy, Brit. Assoc. Advance, Sci. Rept., 1862. 

^ R. V. Southwell, "Relaxation Methods in Theoretical Physics," Oxford University 
Press, New York, 1946. 



46 



Mechanical Fundamentals 



[Chap. 2 



2-13. Stress Concentration 

A geometrical discontinuity in a body, such as a hole or a notch, 
results in a nonuniform stress distribution at the vicinity of the discon- 
tinuity. At some region near the discontinuity the stress will be higher 
than the average stress at distances removed from the discontinuity. 
Thus, a stress concentration occurs at the discontinuity, or stress raiser. 
Figure 2-15a shows a plate containing a circular hole which is subjected 




t t 



LA. 



~fd 



\ \ \ \ 
{a) [b] 

Fig. 2-15. Stress distributions due to (a) circular hole and (6) elliptical hole. 



to a uniaxial load. If the hole were not present, the stress would be 
uniformly distributed over the cross section of the plate and it would be 
equal to the load divided by the cross-sectional area of the plate. With 
the hole present, the distribution is such that the axial stress reaches a 
high value at the edges of the hole and drops off rapidly with distance 
away from the hole. 

The stress concentration is expressed by a theoretical stress-concen- 
tration factor Kt. Generally Kt is described as the ratio of the maximum 
stress to the nominal stress based on the net section, although some 
workers use a value of nominal stress based on the entire cross section 
of the member in a region where there is no stress concentrator. 



Kt = 



^nominal 



(2-42) 



In addition to producing a stress concentration, a notch also creates a 
localized condition of biaxial or triaxial stress. For example, for the 
circular hole in a plate subjected to an axial load, a radial stress is pro- 
duced as well as a longitudinal stress. From elastic analysis,^ the stresses 
produced in an infinitely wide plate containing a circular hole and axially 

^ Timoshenko and Goodier, oj). cit. pp. 78-81. 



Sec. 2-1 3] Stress and Strain Relationships for Elastic Behavior 47 

loaded can be expressed as 

Examination of these equations shows that the maximum stress occurs 
at point A when Q = 7r/2 and r = a. For this case 

(Te = 3(7 = (Tmax (2-44) 

where a is the uniform tensile stress applied at the ends of the plate. 
The theoretical stress-concentration factor for a plate with a circular hole 
is therefore equal to 3. Further study of these equations shows that 
(To = —a for r — a and = 0. Therefore, when a tensile stress is applied 
to the plate, a compressive stress of equal magnitude exists at the edge 
of the hole at point B in a direction perpendicular to the axis of loading 
in the plane of the plate. 

Another interesting case for which an analytical solution for the stress 
concentration is available^ is the case of a small elliptical hole in a plate. 
Figure 2-156 shows the geometry of the hole. The maximum stress at 
the ends of the hole is given by the equation 



K^ + ^O 



(2-45) 



Note that, for a circular hole (a = b), the above equation reduces to 
Eq. (2-44). Equation (2-45) shows that the stress increases with the 
ratio a/b. Therefore, a very narrow hole, such as a crack, normal to the 
tensile direction will result in a very high stress concentration. 

Mathematical complexities prevent the calculation of elastic stress- 
concentration factors in all but the simplest geometrical cases. Much of 
this work has been compiled by Neuber,^ who has made calculations for 
various types of notches. Stress-concentration factors for practical prob- 
lems are usually determined by experimental methods.^ Photoelastic 
analysis^ of models is the most widely used technique. This method is 
especially applicable to plane-stress problems, although it is possible to 
make three-dimensional photoelastic analyses. Figure 2-16 shows typical 

1 C. E. Inglis, Trans. Inst. Naval Architects, pt. 1, pp. 219-230, 1913. 

2 H. Neuber, "Theory of Notch Stresses," Enghsh translation, J. W. Edwards, 
Publisher, Inc., Ann Arbor, Mich., 1946. 

'' M. Hetenyi, "Handbook on Experimental Stress Analysis," John Wiley & Sons, 
Inc., New York, 1950. 

* M. M. Frocht, "Photoelasticity," John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1951. 



48 



Mechanical Fundamentals 



[a.ap. 2 



t- 



6' 



(a) 




0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 




P\ 



-*l 2r 1- 



o.o 
3.4 


1 


b 














V 


^ r 














3.0 


\ 
















\ \ 
















2.6 


\ 


\ 


b 












,\ 


\^ 


r 












2.2 


\ N 


A 














\ 


V 


\ 












1.8 






^^^ 
















^j>^ 


"■"* — _^ 










1.4 


i) 1 


/ 


■~~ 


■*=*»- 


■ . 




-== 


r 2 












1 


1 1 













{b) 



0.2 



0.4 
r/h 



0.6 



0.8 



■^ 



iijijji 



3.2 
3.0 
•2.8 
2.6 
2.4 
2.2 
2.0 
1.8 
1.6 
1.4 
1.2 
1.0 

































































I 


/- 


•^ =i'.^^ 

-^ 












\ 






= ;.«?5 












\ 


\ ^ 


^h 












V 


A 


















\ 


\ 


\ 


/^ 

^ 


i-^-^ 













\ 


> 




-^ 
















<J 




-^ 

































>c) 



0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 



Fig. 2-16. Theoretical stress-concentration factors for different geometrical 



Sec. 2-13] 



Stress and Strain Relationships for Elastic Behavior 49 




?.^ 



CO 






















2.2 










































1.8 


\ 




















\ 




















1.4 




\ 
























.^ 














1.0 












"■^ 


' — 


— 




— 



id) 



0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 
r/h 



I I 
-M-r 
I 1 1 



\Ma 



FF^R 



^3.0 
£2.8 

o 

-2.6 

o 

\^A 

£2.2 
§2.0 
I 1.8 
^ 1.6 



\ 

4 

-> 

_^^ 

^ 

\ 
<; — 

>,— 



(e) 



0.10 0.20 



0.30 




— ^ 



Mr 



3.4 

^ 3.0 
o 

o 
f2.6 

.o 

12.2 

c 
o 

§ 1-8 

I 1.4 
en 

1.0 
( 



\\ 




1 


















\ 




■^ = 2.00- 














\ 


V' 














1 \ 


\ 






















\ ' 


A 




-^-1.20 












\ 


y 


(^ 












\ 


\ 


\ 




















\ 




\ 


\ 








LI ' ' 


— 




\ 




\ 


% 


■^ 






\ 


\ 






7^ 






-— 


^ 


s 


— 








^^ 


^ 






























■"" 


i_ 



0.04 0.08 

r/d 



0.12 



shapes. {Ajler G. H. Neugehauer, Product Eng. vol. 14, pp. 82-87, 1943.) 



50 Mechanical Fundamentals [Chap. 2 

curves for the theoretical stress-concentration factor of certain machine 
elements that were obtained by photoelastic methods. Much of the 
information on stress concentrations in machine parts has been collected 
by Peterson. 1 

The effect of a stress raiser is much more pronounced in a brittle 
material than in a ductile material. In a ductile material, plastic defor- 
mation occurs when the yield stress is exceeded at the point of maximum 
stress. Further increase in load produces a local increase in strain at the 
critically stressed region with little increase in stress. Because of strain 
hardening, the stress increases in regions adjacent to the stress raiser, 
until, if the material is sufficiently ductile, the stress distribution becomes 
essentially uniform. Thus, a ductile metal loaded statically will not 
develop the full theoretical stress-concentration factor. However, redis- 
tribution of stress will not occur to any extent in a brittle material, and 
therefore a stress concentration of close to the theoretical value will 
result. Although stress raisers are not usually dangerous in ductile 
materials subjected to static loads, appreciable stress-concentration 
effects will occur in ductile materials under fatigue conditions of alter- 
nating stresses. Stress raisers are very important in the fatigue failure 
of metals and will be discussed further in Chap. 12. 

2-14. Spherical and Deviator Components of Stress and Strain 

Experiment shows that materials can withstand very large hydrostatic 
pressures (spherical state of stress) without undergoing plastic defor- 
mation. In many problems, particularly in the theory of plasticity, it is 
desirable to designate the part of the total stress which can be effective 
in producing plastic deformation. This is known as the stress deviator a'. 
The other component is the spherical, or hydrostatic, component of stress c" . 

a" = "' + ""' + "' ^ -p (2-46) 

The stress deviator is given by the following equations: 

, ,, 2c7i — (72 — Cs 
O"! = 0-1 — (Ti = 

' I' 2 o-2 — 0-1—0-3 /9 A^\ 

(J, = 0-2 — 0-2 = o K^-^n 

, ,, 2o-3 — 0-1 — 0-2 
0^3 = 0-3 — 0"3 ^ 

It can be readily shown that (j\ + 0-3 + o's = 0. 

1 R. E. Peterson, "Stress-concentration Design Factors," John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 
New York, 1953. 





3 




2ei 


- 62 - 


- 63 




3 




2^2 


- ei - 


- 63 




3 




263 


- ei - 


- 62 



Sec. 2-14] Stress and Strain Relationships for Elastic Behavior 51 

The principal stress direction of the stress deviator is the same as that 
of the principal stress of the total stress. Thus, (t[, has the same direc- 
tion as a I. Since an incompressible isotropic body is not deformed by 
hydrostatic pressure, the deformation depends entirely on the stress 
deviator, the spherical component making no contribution. 

In a completely analogous manner the strain at a point can be divided 
into a spherical component e" and a strain deviator e'. 

e" = 'A±^l±Jl (2-48) 

e'l = ei — e' 

4 = 62 - e" = "-^ ^ ^* (2-49) 

e'g = 63 - e" = 

Hooke's law may then be written in terms of the stress and strain devi- 
ators as follows: 

a\ = 2Ge[ (2-50) 

There are two analogous equations for the other two principal stresses 
and strains. Hooke's law in terms of the spherical components is given 
by 

o"" + <^2 + 0-3' = 3K(e{' -f 62' + 63') (2-51) 

where k is the volumetric modulus of elasticity. 

When the stress deviator is referred to three arbitrary orthogonal axes 
X, y, z, the principal components may be found in a manner analogous to 
the method for determining the principal stresses of an arbitrary state of 
stress. The principal stress deviators are the roots of the cubic equation 

(a'r - J, a' - J3 = (2-52) 

The coefficients J 2 and J 3 are invariants of the stress deviator, i.e., their 
values are independent of the coordinate system in which the stress devi- 
ator is expressed. Expre.s.sions for J2 and J3 are found below. These 
quantities are frequently useful in the mathematical theory of plasticity. 

W,y + w.y + w,y] 

Hiiar - a^y + (a, - a,y + (^3 - a,y] (2-53) 



= —l/r. 



J, = 



<^x Txy T 



^yX <^ y Tyz 



' zy 



0-, 



= Vd{<y\y + W,y + {a'.y] 

= K7[(2o-i — 0-2 — 0-3) (2(72 — 0-3 — 0"i)(2cr3 - ax — 02)] (2-54) 



52 Mechanical Fundamentals [Chap. 2 

2-1 5. Strain Energy 

The elastic strain energy is the amount of energy expended by the action 
of external forces in deforming an elastic body. Essentially all the work 
performed during elastic deformation is stored as elastic energy, and this 
energy is recovered on the release of the load. Energy (or work) is equal 
to a force times the distance over which it acts. In the deformation of 
an elastic body the force and deformation increase linearly from initial 
values of zero, so that the average energy is equal to one-half of their 
product. This is also equal to the area under the load-deformation curve. 

U = yiPb (2-55) 

For an elemental cube that is subjected to only a tensile stress along the 
sc axis, the elastic strain energy is given by 

U = KP5 = ma,dA){e,dx) 

= y2{(T^e,){dA dx) (2-56) 

Equation (2-56) describes the total elastic energy absorbed by the ele- 
ment. Since dA dx is the volume of the element, the strain energy 'per 
unit volume, Uq, is given by 

Uo = y2CTA = l^ = Vze.'E (2-57) 

Note that the lateral strains which accompany deformation in simple 
tension do not enter in the expression for strain energy because no forces 
exist in the directions of the strains. 

By the same reasoning, the strain energy per unit volume of an ele- 
ment subjected to pure shear is given by 

Uo = V2T.yy.y = l%= V^llyG (2-58) 

The relationship for pure uniaxial deformation and pure shear can be 
combined by the principle of superposition to give the elastic strain 
energy for a general three-dimensional stress distribution. 

f/o = y2{<yxex + Oyey + a^e^ -f Txylxy + r^^-^xz + ry^-iy^ (2-59) 

Substituting the equations of Hooke's law [Eqs. (2-23) and (2-24)] for 
the strains in the above expression results in an expression for strain 



Sec. 2-1 5] Stress and Strain Relationships for Elastic Behavior 53 

energy per unit volume expressed solely in terms of the stress and the 
elastic constants. 

+ ^ (jI + tI + tD (2-60) 

Also, by substituting Eqs. (2-31) into Eq. (2-59) the stresses are elimi- 
nated, and the strain energy is expressed in terms of strains and the 
elastic constants. 

C/o = V2\^' + G{e.' + e,' + e;~) + ^Giyl + tL + ^D (2-61) 

It is interesting to note that the derivative of Uq with respect to 
any strain component gives the corresponding stress component. Thus, 
dUa/de^ = XA + 2Gej, = a^ [compare with Eqs. (2-31)]. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Love, A. E. H.: "A Treatise on the Mathematical Theory of Elasticity," 4th ed., 

Dover Publications, New York, 1949. 
Southwell, R. v.: "An Introduction to the Theory of Elasticity," 2d ed., Oxford 

University Press, New York, 1941. 
Timoshenko, S. P., and J. N. Goodier: "Theory of Elasticity," 2d ed., McGraw-Hill 

Book Company, Inc., New York, 1951. 
Wang, C. T.: "Applied Elasticity," McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 

1953. 



Chapter 3 

ELEMENTS OF 

THE THEORY OF PLASTICITY 

3-1 . Introduction 

The theory of plasticity deals with the behavior of materials in the 
region of strain beyond which Hooke's law is no longer valid. The 
mathematical description of the plastic deformation of metals is not 
nearly so well developed as the description of elastic deformation by 
means of the theory of elasticity because plastic deformation is much 
more complicated than elastic deformation. For example, in the plastic 
region of strain, there is no simple relationship between stress and strain 
as there is for elastic deformation. Moreover, elastic deformation 
depends only on the initial and final states of stress and is independent 
of the loading path, but for plastic deformation the plastic strain depends 
not only on the final load but also on the path by which it was reached. 

The theory of plasticity is concerned with a number of different types 
of problems. From the viewpoint of design, plasticity is concerned with 
predicting the maximum load which can be applied to a body without 
causing excessive yielding. The yield criterion^ must be expressed in 
terms of stress in such a way that it is valid for all states of stress. The 
designer is also concerned with plastic deformation in problems where 
the body is purposely stressed beyond the yield stress into the plastic 
region. For example, plasticity must be considered in designing for 
processes such as autofrettage, shrink fitting, and the overspeeding of 
rotor disks. The consideration of small plastic strains allows economies 
in building construction through the use of the theory of limit design. 

The analysis of large plastic strains is required in the mathematical 
treatment of the plastic forming of metals. This aspect of plasticity 

1 The determination of the Hmiting load between elastic and plastic behavior is also 
generally covered in strength of materials. However, because it is necessary to adopt 
a yield criterion in the theories of plasticity, this topic is covered in the chapter on 
plasticity. 
54 



Sec. 3-2J 



Elements oF the Theory of Plasticity 55 



will be considered in Part Four. It is very difficult to describe, in a 
rigorous analytical way, the behavior of a metal under these conditions. 
Therefore, certain simplifying assumptions are usually necessary to obtain 
a tractable mathematical solution. 

Another aspect of plasticity is concerned with acquiring a better under- 
standing of the mechanism of the plastic deformation of metals. Interest 
in this field is centered on the imperfections in crystalline solids. The 
effect of metallurgical variables, crystal structure, and lattice imperfec- 
tions on the deformation behavior are of chief concern. This aspect of 
plasticity is considered in Part Two. 

3-2. The Flow Curve 

The stress-strain curve obtained by uniaxial loading, as in the ordinary 
tension test, is of fundamental interest in plasticity when the curve is 
plotted in terms of true stress a- and true strain e. True stress is given 
by the load divided by the instantaneous cross-sectional area of the speci- 
men. True strain is discussed in the next section. The purpose of this 
section' is to describe typical stress-strain curves for real metals and to 
compare them with the theoretical flow curves for ideal materials. 

The true stress-strain curve for a typical ductile metal, such as alumi- 
num, is illustrated in Fig. 3-la. Hooke's law is followed up to some yield 





[a] [b) 

Fig. 3-1 . Typical true stress-strain curves for a ductile metal. 

stress o-Q. (The value of o-q will depend upon the accuracy with which 
strain is measured.) Beyond cro, the metal deforms plastically. Most 
metals strain-harden in this region, so that increases in strain require 
higher values of stress than the initial yield stress cro. However, unlike 
the situation in the elastic region, the stress and strain are not related by 



' See Chap. 9 for a more complete discussion of the mathematics of the true stress- 
strain curve. 



56 Mechanical Fundamentals [Chap. 3 

any simple constant of proportionality. If the metal is strained to point 
A, when the load is released the total strain will immediately decrease 
from €i to C2 by an amount a/E. The strain decrease ei — eo is the 
recoverable elastic strain. However, the strain remaining is not all perma- 
nent plastic strain. Depending upon the metal and the temperature, a 
small amount of the plastic strain €2 — €3 will disappear with time. This 
is known as anelastic behavior. ^ Generally the anelastic strain is neg- 
lected in mathematical theories of plasticity. 

Generally the stress-strain curve on unloading from a plastic strain 
will not be exactly linear and parallel to the elastic portion of the curve 
(Fig. 3-16). Moreover, on reloading the curve will generally bend over 
as the stress approaches the original value of stress from which it was 
unloaded. With a little additional plastic strain, the stress-strain curve 
becomes a continuation of what it would have been had no unloading 
taken place. The hysteresis behavior resulting from unloading and load- 
ing from a plastic strain is generally neglected in plasticity theories. 

A true stress-strain curve is frequently called a flow curve because it 
gives the stress required to cause the metal to flow plastically to any 
given strain. Many attempts have been made to fit mathematical equa- 
tions to this curve. The most common is a power expression of the form 

a = Ke (3-1) 

where K is the stress at e = 1.0 and n, the strain-hardening coefficient, 
is the slope of a log-log plot of Eq. (3-1). This equation can be valid 
only from the beginning of plastic flow to the maximum load at which 
the specimen begins to neck down. 

Even the simple mathematical expression for the flow curve that is 
given by Eq. (3-1) can result in considerable mathematical complexity 
when it is used with the equations of the theory of plasticity. Therefore, 
in this field it is common practice to devise idealized flow curves which 
simplify the mathematics without deviating too far from physical reality. 
Figure 3-2a shows the flow curve for a rigid, perfectly plastic material. 
For this idealized material, a tensile specimen is completely rigid (zero 
elastic strain) until the axial stress equals cro, whereupon the material 
flows plastically at a constant flow stress (zero strain hardening). This 
type of behavior is approached by a ductile metal which is in a highly 
cold-worked condition. Figure 3-26 illustrates the flow curve for a 
perfectly plastic material with an elastic region. This behavior is 
approached by a material such as plain-carbon steel which has a pro- 
nounced yield-point elongation (see Sec. 5-5). A more realistic approach 
is to approximate the flow curve by two straight lines corresponding to 

1 Anelasticity is discussed in greater detail in Chap. 8. 



Sec. 3-3] 



Elements of the Theory of Plasticity 



57 




Fig. 3-2. Idealized flow curves, (a) Rigid ideal plastic material; (b) ideal plastic 
material with elastic region; (c) piecewise linear (strain-hardening) material. 

the elastic and plastic regions (Fig. 3-2c). This type of curve results in 
somewhat more complicated mathematics. 



3-3. True Strain 

Equation (1-1) describes the conventional concept of unit linear strain, 
namely, the change in length referred to the original unit length. 

e = -y- = ^ / dL 

Lid Lio Jlo 

This definition of strain is satisfactory for elastic strains where AL is very 
small. However, in plastic deformation the strains are frequently large, 
and during the extension the gage length changes considerably. Ludwik^ 
first proposed the definition of true strain, or natural strain, e, which obvi- 
ates this difficulty. In this definition of strain the change in length is 
referred to the instantaneous gage length, rather than to the original 
gage length. 



■l^ 



~ Lo L^ 



or 



^dL , L 
^ = In J- 



u 



Li Ls — L2 . 



L2 



(3-2) 
(3-3) 



The relationship between true strain and conventional linear strain 
follows from Eq. (1-1). 



e+l = 



AL 

Lo 
L 



L — Lo _ L 

Lo Lo 



e = In ^ = In (e -1- 1) 



(3-4) 



* P. Ludwik, "Elemente der technologischen Mechanik," Springer-Verlag OHG. 
Berlin, 1909. 



58 Mechanical Fundamentals [Chap. 3 

The two measurements of strain give nearly identical results up to 
strains of about 0.1. 

Because the volume remains essentially constant during plastic defor- 
mation, Eq. (3-3) can be written in terms of either length or area. 

6 = In ^ = In 4^ (3-5) 

Also, because of constancy of volume, the summation of the three princi- 
pal strains is equal to zero. 

61 + 62 + €3 = (3-6) 

This relationship is not valid for the principal conventional strains. 

The advantage of using true strain should be apparent from the follow- 
ing example: Consider a uniform cylinder which is extended to twice its 
original length. The linear strain is then e = (2Lo — Lo)/Lo = 1.0, or a 
strain of 100 per cent. To achieve the same amount of negative linear 
strain in compression, the cylinder would have to be squeezed to zero 
thickness. However, intuitively we should expect that the strain pro- 
duced in compressing a cylinder to half its original length would be the 
same as, although opposite in sign to, the strain produced by extending 
the cylinder to twice its length. If true strain is used, equivalence is 
obtained for the two cases. For extension to twice the original length, 
e = In (2Lo/Lo) = In 2. For compression to half the original length, 
€ = In [(Lo/2)/Lo] = In M = - In 2. 

3-4. yielding Criteria for Ductile Metals 

The problem of deducing mathematical relationships for predicting 
the conditions at which plastic yielding begins when a material is sub- 
jected to a complex state of stress is an important consideration in the 
field of plasticity. In uniaxial loading, plastic flow begins at the yield 
stress, and it is to be expected that yielding under a situation of com- 
bined stresses is related to some particular combination of the princi- 
pal stresses. A yield criterion can be expressed in the general form 
F(ai,a2,(T3,ki, . . .) = 0, but there is at present no theoretical way of cal- 
culating the relationship between the stress components to correlate yield- 
ing in a three-dimensional state of stress with yielding in the uniaxial 
tension test. The yielding criteria are therefore essentially empirical 
relationships. At present, there are two generally accepted theories for 
predicting the onset of yielding in ductile metals. 

Maximum-shear-stress Theory 

The maximum-shear-stress theory, sometimes called the Tresca, Cou- 
lomb, or Guest yield criterion, states that yielding will occur when the 



(7i — 0-3 


= ro= 2 


or 0-1 — 0-3 = (To 




This is sometimes written as 





Sec. 3-4] Elements of the Theory of Plasticity 59 

maximum shear stress reaches a critical value equal to the shearing yield 
stress in a uniaxial tension test. From Eq. (2-15), the maximum shear 
stress is given by ^ 

_ (Ti — 0-3 

Tmax Q \0~l ) 

where en is the algebraically largest and as is the algebraically smallest 
principal stress. 

For uniaxial tension ai = ao, ao = (Ts = 0, where ao is the yield strength 
in simple tension. Therefore, the shearing yield stress for simple tension 
To is equal to one-half of the tensile yield stress. 

O"0 

To — -^ r; 

Substituting these values into the equation for the maximum shear stress 
results in 

(3-8) 
(3-9) 



(Ti - <Js = a[ - a, = 2k (3-10) 

where a^ and a'^ are the deviators of the principal stresses and k is the 
yield stress for pure shear, i.e., the stress at which yielding occurs in 
torsion, where ai = —as. 

The maximum-shear-stress theory is in good agreement with experi- 
mental results, being slightly on the safe side, and is widely used by 
designers for ductile metals. It has replaced the older and far less accu- 
rate maximum-stress theory, Rankine's theory. 

Prager and Hodge ^ have pointed out that in certain plasticity problems 
the simple relations of Eq. (3-9) or (3-10) cannot be used as the yielding 
conditions since it is not known which of the three principal stresses is the 
largest. In this case, the much more complicated general form of the 
equation, which is given below, must be used. 

4/2' - 27J3' - 36^2/2^ + 96/CV2 - 64A;« = (3-11) 

J 2 and Js are the invariants of the stress deviator (see Sec. 2-14). Obvi- 
ously, such a complex relation will result in very cumbersome mathe- 
matics. It is for this reason that the yielding criterion that is discussed 
next is preferred in most theoretical work. 

^ W. Prager and P. G. Hodge, Jr., "Theory of Perfectly Plastic Solids," p. 23, 
John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York. 1951. 



60 Mechanical Fundamentals [Chap. 3 

Von Mises, or Distortion-energy, Theory 

A somewhat better fit with experimental results is provided by the 
yield criterion given in Eq. (3-12). 

(70 = ^ [((Ti - a,y + ((72 - a^y + ((73 - (7i)2]^^ (3-12) 

V2 

According to this criterion, yielding will occur when the differences 
between the principal stresses expressed by the right-hand side of the 
equation exceed the yield stress in uniaxial tension, ao. The develop- 
ment of this yield criterion is associated with the names of Von Mises, 
Hencky, Maxwell, and Huber. Von Mises proposed this criterion in the 
invariant form given by Eq. (3-13) primarily because it was mathemati- 
cally simpler than the invariant form of the maximum-shear-stress theory 
given by Eq. (3-11). Subsequent experiments showed that Eq. (3-13) 
provides better over-all agreement with combined stress-yielding data 
than the maximum-shear-stress theory. 

^2 - fc2 = (3-13) 

J2 is the second invariant of the stress deviator, and k is the yield stress 
in pure shear. 

A number of attempts have been made to provide physical meaning 
to the Von Mises yield criterion. One commonly accepted concept is 
that this yield criterion expresses the strain energy of distortion. On the 
basis of the distortion-energy concept, yielding will occur when the strain 
energy of distortion per unit volume exceeds the strain energy of distor- 
tion per unit volume for a specimen strained to the yield stress in uniaxial 
tension or compression. The derivation of Eq. (3-12) on the basis of 
distortion energy is given below. Another common physical interpreta- 
tion of Eq. (3-12) is that it represents the critical value of the octahedral 
shear stress (see Sec. 3-7). 

The total elastic strain energy per unit volume (see Sec. 2-15) can be 
divided into two components, the strain energy of distortion, Uq, and the 
strain energy of volume change, Uq. To illustrate the resolution of total 
strain energy into its components, consider Fig. 3-3. This figure illus- 
trates the point established in Sec. 2-14 that a general three-dimensional 
state of stress can be expressed in terms of a spherical or hydrostatic 
component of stress, a", and a stress deviator, a'. Because experiments 
have shown 1 that up to rather large values of hydrostatic pressure a 
hydrostatic state of stress has no effect on yielding, it is valid to assume 
that only the stress deviator can produce distortion. Therefore, the 

1 P. W. Bridgman, "Studies in Large Plastic Flow and Fracture," McGraw-Hill 
Book Company, Inc., New York, 1952, 



Sec. 3-4] Elements of the Theory of Plasticity 61 

strain energy of distortion will be based on the stress deviator. It repre- 
sents only the strain energy associated with changing the shape of the 
specimen and neglects the strain energy associated with changes in 
volume. 

The strain energy of distortion will be determined by first calculating 
the strain energy of volume change and then subtracting this term from 

Oz Og 02 






Fig. 3-3. Resolution of stress into hydrostatic stress and stress deviator. 

the total strain energy. Referring again to Fig. 3-3, the strain energy 
per unit volume associated with a volume change will be 

jrii ■, / n n I -i / It n 1 -, / 11 ir 

Uo = /'20-1 ei + >^0-2 62 + >20-3 ^3 

Referring to the definitions for the deviator component of strain given in 
Sec. 2-14 and letting o-„i equal the hydrostatic component of stress, or 
average stress, 

Uo = H<T.(ei + 62 + 63) = V2<rmA (3-14) 

However, from Eq. (2-29) A = (Xm/n, so that Eq. (3-14) becomes 

U'o'^l"-^ (3-15) 

Since U'o = Uo — U[' , the strain energy of distortion can be determined 
by using Eq. (2-60) for the total strain energy C/o. 

1 12 

f/o = 2^ (O"!^ + 0-2- -1- 0-3^) — -p (o-lO-2 + 0-2(r3 "I" Oldi) " 9 "^ (3-16) 

However, since (Xm = (o-i -f 0-2 -f- (Ts)/3 and k = -E'/[3(l — 2v)], Eq. 
(3-16) reduces to 

C/'O = —^ [(<^l - ^2)2 + (<T2 - a,r + (<T3 - CT.y] (3-17) 

For a uniaxial state of stress, <ti — tro, cr2 = 0-3 = 0. 

C/'o = ^'^o^ (3-18) 



62 Mechanical Fundamentals [Chap. 3 

Therefore, the distortion-energy yield criterion can be written 

or <T0 = -^ [{<Jl - <T2y + (<r2 - a,y + ((73 - (7l)2]^^ (3-19) 

For a condition of pure shear, such as occurs in torsion, t = a. 

O"! ^= fO Cr2 = Cj ^ — (To 

Therefore, the strain energy of distortion for this state of stress is given by 

Uo=^-^<^'=^^r^ (3-20) 

If for any type of stress system yielding begins when the strain energy of 
distortion reaches a critical value, the ratio between this critical value 
for uniaxial stress and pure shear can be obtained by equating Eqs. 
(3-18) and (3-20). 

1 + V 2 1 + '^ 2 

TO = -^(70 = 0.577(70 (3-21) 

V3 

Thus, if the distortion-energy theory is a valid yielding criterion, the 
yield strength in shear, as determined from a torsion test, should be 
0.577 times the tensile yield strength. Actual data show that the shear 
yield stress falls between 0.5 and 0.6 of the tensile yield stress, with the 
average occurring close to the predicted value. It should be noted that 
the maximum-shear-stress theory predicts that tq = 0.50(7o. The better 
agreement shown by the distortion-energy theory for these two different 
types of tests is one reason for preferring the distortion-energy theory of 
yielding. 

3-5. Combined Stress Tests 

The conditions for yielding under states of stress other than uniaxial 
and torsion loading can be conveniently studied with thin-wall tubes. 
Axial tension can be combined with torsion to give various combinations 
of shear stiess to normal stress intermediate between the values obtained 
separately in tension and torsion. For the combined axial tension and 



(T2 = 



(3-22) 



Sec. 3-5] Elements oF the Theory of Plasticity 63 

torsion, the principal stresses from Eq. (2-7) are 

^1 = 2" + (^T + ^-j 



2 V 4 """7 

Therefore, the maximum-shear-stress criterion of yielding is given by 

fey +^ fey =1 ^'-''^ 

and the distortion-energy theory of yielding is expressed by 

Both equations define an ellipse. Figure 3-4 shows that the experi- 
mental results 1 agree best with the distortion-energy theory. 

0.6 

0.5 

0.4 
I? 
^ 0.3 

0.2 

0.1 


0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 

Fig. 3-4. Comparison between maximum-shear-stress theory and dist9rtion-energy 
(Von Mises) theory. 

Another type of combined stress test is to subject thin-wall tubes to 
axial load and internal hydrostatic pressure.^ Since the stress in the 
radial direction is negligible (0-3 = at the outer free surface), this test 
provides a biaxial state of stress. 

For the plane-stress condition, the distortion-energy theory of yielding 
can be expressed mathematically by 

(3-25) 







1 


> 




















"-< 


-- Distort 10 


n ene 


rgy 






~ 






^^ 


>v 










Mox/r 


num s 


hear 


strest 


^ 


^ 


\, 




















\^ 


\ 




















\\ 




















^ 



Ol- + O-o- 



aiCf-y 



ao^ 



1 G. I. Taylor and H. Quinney, Proc. Roy. Soc. (London), vol. 230A, pp. 323-362, 
1931. 

2 W. Lode, Z. Phijsik, vol. 3G, pp. 913-939, 1926. 



64 



Mechanical Fundamentals 



[Chap. 3 



Distortion 
energy theory 



This is the equation of an ellipse whose major semiaxis is -x/^ co and 

whose minor semiaxis is ^/% o-q. 

A convenient way of comparing yielding criteria for a two-dimensional 

state of stress is with a plot such as Fig. 3-5. Note that the maximum- 
shear-stress theory and the distor- 
tion-energ3'^ theory predict the same 
yield stress for conditions of uni- 
axial stress and balanced biaxial 
stress (<Ti = a 2). The greatest di- 
vergence between the two theories 
occurs for a state of pure shear 
((71 = —0-2). It has already been 
shown that for this state of stress 
the shear-stress law predicts a yield 
stress which is 15 per cent lower 
than the value given by the distor- 
tion-energy criterion. 

A very sensitive method of dif- 
ferentiating between the two yield 
criteria is the procedure adopted by 
Lode of determining the effect of 
the intermediate principal stress on 

yielding. According to the maximum-shear-stress law, there should be no 

effect of the value of the intermediate stress 0-2. Thus, (o-i — 0-3) /o-q = 1. 

For the distortion-energy theory, to account for the influence of the 

intermediate principal stress, Lode introduced the parameter n, called 

Lode's stress parameter. 




Maximum shear 
stress theory 



Fig. 3-5. Comparison of yield criteria for 
plane stress. 



M = 



2(T2 — g"3 — 0"] 
O"! — 0-3 



(3-26) 



Solving this equation for 0-2 and eliminating 0-2 from Eq. (3-12) results in 

(7 1 — 0-3 2 



<T0 (3 + M^) 



2\H 



(3-27) 



Experimental data plot much better against Eq. (3-27) than against the 
maximum-shear-stress equation, indicating that the intermediate princi- 
pal stress has an influence on yielding. 

Another contribution of Lode was the introduction of a strain 
parameter v. 

V = 2 A62 - A63 - Aei .3_2g) 

Aei — Aes 

where Ae is a finite increment of strain. A plot of n against v should 



Sec. 3-6] Elements of the Theory of Plasticity 65 

yield a straight line at 45° to the axis if the metal behaves according to 
the Levy-Von Mises equations of plasticity (see Sec. 3-9). Most metals 
show some slight but systematic deviation from Lode's relationship n = v. 

3-6. Octahedral Shear Stress and Shear Strain 

The octahedral stresses are a particular set of stress functions which 
are important in the theory of plasticity. They are the stresses acting 
on the faces of a three-dimensional octahedron which has the geometric 
property that the faces of the planes make equal angles with each of the 
three principal directions of stress. For such a geometric body, the angle 
between the normal to one of the faces and the nearest principal axis is 
54°44', and the cosine of this angle is l/-\/3. 

The stress acting on each face of the octahedron can be resolved^ into 
a normal octahedral stress o-Qct and an octahedral shear stress lying in the 
octahedral plane, Xoct. The normal octahedral stress is equal to the hydro- 
static component of the total stress. 

Coot = "^ + "3^ + "^ = a" (3-29) 

The octahedral shear stress r„ct is given by 

root = M[(^l - <J,Y + (cr2 - (TzY + (C73 - (Ti)']^^ (3-30) 

Since the normal octahedral stress is a hydrostatic stress, it cannot pro- 
duce yielding in solid materials. Therefore, the octahedral shear stress 
is the component of stress responsible for plastic deformation. In this 
respect, it is analogous to the stress de viator. 

If it is assumed that a critical octahedral shear stress determines yield- 
ing, the failure criterion can be written as 

1 ^, ^2 

Toot = r, [(o"l — 0-2)^ + (0-2 — 0-3)2 + ((T2 — O-l)-]'-^ = —^ (To 

or o-o = ~ [(^1 - ^^y + (<^2 - (T^y -f ((73 - a.y^'' (3-31) 

Since Eq. (3-31) is identical with the equation already derived for the 
distortion-energy theory, the two yielding theories give the same results. 
In a sense, the octahedral theory can be considered the stress equivalent 
of the distortion-energy theory. According to this theory, the octahedral 

1 A. Nadai, "Theory of Flow and Fracture of Solids," 2d ed., vol. I, pp. 99-105, 
McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 1950. 



66 Mechanical Fundamentals [Chap. 3 

shear stress corresponding to yielding in uniaxial stress is given by 

-\/2 

Toct= -^(70 - 0.471(70 (3-32) 

Octahedral strains are referred to the same three-dimensional octahe- 
dron as the octahedral stresses. The octahedral linear strain is given by 

€oct = o (3-33) 

Octahedral shear strain is given by 

Toot = %[(^l - ^2)' + (62 - 63)2 + (63 - 61)^]^^- (3-34) 

3-7. Invariants of Stress and Strain 

It is frequently useful to simplify the representation of a complex state 
of stress or strain by means of invariant functions of stress and strain. 
If the plastic stress-strain curve (the flow curve) is plotted in terms of 
invariants of stress and strain, approximately the same curve will be 
obtained regardless of the state of stress. For example, the flow curves 
obtained in a uniaxial-tension test and a biaxial-torsion test of a thin tube 
with internal pressure will coincide when the curves are plotted in terms 
of invariant stress and strain functions. 

Nadai^ has shown that the octahedral shear stress and shear strain are 
invariant functions which describe the flow curve independent of the type 
of test. Other frequently used invariant functions are the effective, or 
significant, stress and strain. These quantities are defined by the follow- 
ing equations for the case where the coordinate axes correspond to the 
principal directions: 

Effective or significant stress 

^ = ^ [(<ri - <T2y + ((T2 - <x,y + ((73 - a{}T- (3-35) 

Effective or significant strain 

^ = ^ [(ei - 62)2 + (62 - 63)2 + (63 - 61)^]^^- (3-36) 

Note that both effective stress and effective strain reduce to the axial 
normal component of stress and strain for a tensile test. These values 

1 A. Nadai, J. Appl. Phys., vol. 8, p. 205, 1937. 



)ec. 



3-81 Elements oF the I heory of Plasticity 67 



are also related to the octahedral shearing stress and strain, as can be 
seen by comparing Eqs. (3-30) and (3-34) with the above equations. 

-\/2 /- 

Toct = — o— 0- Toct = V 2 e (3-37) 

Drucker^ has pointed out that there are a large number of different 
functions of stress and strain which might serve as invariant stress and 
strain parameters. For example, he shows that combined stress data for 
aluminum-alloy tubes show better agreement when the eciuivalent shear- 
ing stress Teq, defined below, is plotted against octahedral shearing strain 
instead of Xoct being plotted against Toct- 



— Toct 



0--^:)' 



(3-38) 



where J 2 and J3 are invariants of the stress deviator. There appears to 
be no theoretical or experimental justification for choosing invariant stress 
and strain parameters other than the closeness of agreement with the 
data and mathematical convenience. 

3-8. Basis of the Theories of Plasticity 

The development of a generalized theory of plasticity, wnth the same 
wide applicability as the theory of elasticity, has not progressed rapidly 
because of the complexity of the problem. The inherent difficulty in 
developing a simple mathematical description of plasticity lies in the fact 
that plastic deformation is essentially an irreversible process. While 
elastic deformation depends only on the initial and final states of stress 
or strain and therefore the results are independent of the path along 
which the load is reached, in plastic deformation the total plastic strain 
depends not only on the final load but also on the path by which it was 
reached. Therefore, in plastic deformation, the type of load cycle deter- 
mines the strain increment. The final value of a plastic-strain component 
is given by the integral of the increments of the plastic-strain component 
over the loading history that the material has undergone. 

A particular condition of loading which simplifies the analysis is 'propor- 
tional loading. For proportional loading, the stress components increase 
in constant ratio to each other. 

dcFl _ da 2 _ d(Tz /q OQN 

(T\ 0'2 O'S 

For this type of loading, the strains can be expressed in terms of the final 
stress state because the final stress state specifies the stress history. 

' D. C. Drucker, J. Appl. Mech., vol. 16, pp. 349-357, 1949. 



68 Mechanical Fundamentals [Chap. 3 

Mathematical theories of plasticity can be divided roughly into two 
types. Deformation theories relate the stress to the strain, while flow 
theories relate the stress to the strain rate, or the velocity of strain. 
Deformation theories utilize an averaging process over the entire defor- 
mation history and relate the total plastic strain to the final stress. This 
tj^pe of theory is valid when the material is subjected to proportional 
loading, but it is not generally considered to be reliable^ when the direc- 
tion of loading is changed during the test. Flow theories consider a suc- 
cession of infinitesimal increments of distortion in which the instantaneous 
stress is related to the increment of the strain rate. Because a flow theory 
considers the instantaneous deformation, it is better able to describe large 
plastic deformations. 

There are a number of general assumptions which are common to all 
plasticity theories. The metal is considered to be continuous and iso- 
tropic. The principal axes of plastic stress and strain are assumed to 
coincide at all times. Time effects are usually neglected, so that visco- 
elastic materials are excluded from the theories presented in this chapter. 
For the values of stress usually encountered, it is a very good assumption 
to consider that volume remains constant. This also leads to the useful 
relation that the sum of the principal true strains is equal to zero. 

61 + €2 + 63 = 

Constancy of volume also requires that Poisson's ratio must increase from 
its elastic value to a value of 0.5 for the plastic condition. Experiments 
show that Poisson's ratio increases with progressive plastic strain to this 
limiting value, but frequently the incorrect assumption is made that 
V = 0.5 for all values of plastic strain. 

Unfortunately, there is no simple relationship between stress and strain 
in the plastic region such as exists with elastic deformation. An obvious 
simplification is to assume that plastic flow occurs at a constant value of 
flow stress, i.e., that there is no strain hardening. Plasticity theory 
based on ideal plastic behavior has been developed further than theories 
which consider the strain hardening of the metal. One way to take strain 
hardening into consideration is to use experimental data plotted as invari- 
ant stress-strain functions. In analyses of forming operations involving 
large plastic strains, it is common practice to allow for strain hardening 
by using an average value of yield stress. 

The formation of many plasticity theories is based on the premise 
that the stress deviator is proportional to the strain increment. This is 
equivalent to saying that Lode's stress and strain parameters are equal, 

^ Arguments to show that deformation theories of plasticity should be valid for 
loading paths other than proportional loading have been given by B. Budiansky, 
J. Appl. Mech., vol. 26, no. 2, pp. 259-264, 1959. 



Sec. 3-9] Elements of the Theory of Plasticity 69 

n = V. Although deviations from Lode's relationship have been shown 
by experiment, it appears that the proportionality between stress devi- 
ator and strain increment is a reasonably good approximation. 

To provide additional simplification to the analysis, it is often assumed 
that the body acts as a rigid plastic material. With this assumption, 
all elastic strain is neglected, and the total strain is considered to be 
entirely plastic. This is a suitable assumption when the plastic strain is 
large, so that the elastic strains are negligible by comparison. However, 
in many problems the body is strained only slightly beyond the yield 
stress, so that the elastic and plastic strains are of comparable magnitude. 
For this situation, it is necessary that the elastic strains be considered in 
the analysis. The total strain is then the sum of the elastic and plastic 
strain. 

^ij = 4 + 4 (3-40) 

However, because of the assumption of constancy of volume, the plastic 
component of the hydrostatic component of strain must be equal to zero. 

e^" = H(^/ + 62^ + 63^) = 

Therefore, the plastic-strain deviator is equal to the plastic strain. 

e/' = er €2^ = e-r e,^ = e^ (3-41) 

3-9. Flow Theories 

Rigid Ideal Plastic Material 

A flow theory for a rigid ideal plastic material based on the propor- 
tionality between stress deviator and strain rate is the outgrowth of work 
by St. Venant, Levy, and Von Mises. The Levy- Von Mises equations 
are given below for a general coordinate system. X is a proportionality 
constant, and <rm is the hydrostatic component of stress. Note that a 
dot over the symbol for strain indicates the time derivative of strain, i.e., 
the strain rate. 

Cx ~ CFm = fx — 2Xex Txy = ^^jxy 

a'y = 2Xey Ty^ = Xjy, (3-42) 

a^ = 2X63 Txz = Xjxz 

In terms of the principal stresses, the Levy- Von Mises equations can 
be written 

a^ = 2Xei ffo = 2X€2 a"3 — 2Xe3 (3-43) 

These equations are similar to the equations of viscosity for an incom- 
pressible fluid. The important difference is that for the case of the fluid 
the proportionality constant X is a true material constant, the coefficient 



70 Mechanical Fundamentals [Chap. 3 

of viscosity. For the case of the plastic body, the value of X depends on 
the vakies of stress and strain. X can be evaluated when the yield cri- 
terion is established. 

The Von Mises yield criterion is given by 

or 2J, = {a[Y + {a',Y + {c',Y^ ^' (3-44) 

Substituting Eqs. (3-43) into Eq. (3-44) results in 

X2(6i2 + e^^ + h') = ^' (3-45) 

The quantity ei^ + €2^ + €3^ is an invariant of strain rate. Substituting 
Eq. (3-45) back into Eqs. (3-43) gives 

> = V^ o-pei (o_Aa\ 

' [3(6i2 + e^^ -H k,^W ^ ^ 

Completely analogous equations follow for a'^ and 0-3. 
Equations (3-43) can be written 

Z<Ti — 0-2 — 0-3 = -37 dei 
at 

2o-2 ~ <^i ~ <^3 = "^ '^^2 (3-47) 

Z(T3 — (Ti — (T2 — —r; Ci^3 

at 

Eliminating Q\/dt from these equations results in 

2ai — (T2 — (7z _ dei 
2a2 — cs — o"! de2 
2cri — 0-2 — Cs _ dei 

2(73 — Ci — (72 C?€3 



(3-48) 



The above two equations, plus the constancy-of-volume relationship 
ei + €2 + €3 = 0, constitute a system of differential equations that must 
be integrated over a particular stress path or strain path for the solution 
of a particular problem. 

Elastic-Plastic Material 

The extension of the Levy-Von Mises equations to the consideration 
of both elastic and plastic strains has been primarily the work of Prandtl 
and Reuss. In discussing this theory it will be necessary to differentiate 
between the elastic strain e^ and the plastic strain e^. Assuming that 



Sgc. 3-9] Elements oF the Theory of Plasticity 71 

the rate of change of plastic strain is proportional to the stress deviator 
results in 

2^6/' = \a[ 2^62^' = \<j', 2Gi,P' = \a', (3-49) 

The time derivative of Hooke's law expressed in terms of stress and strain 
deviators [Eq. (2-50)] gives the corresponding equations for elastic strain. 

2G'6i^' = &[ 2G'62^' = &2 2(?e3^' = &'s (3-50) 

Combining Eqs. (3-49) and (3-50) results in expressions for the time 
derivative of total strain. 

2G€[ = (Ti + XcTi 2G'e2 = 0^2 + Xo-2 26^63 = ^3 "f- \a^ (3-51) 

If it is assumed that the Von Mises criterion of yielding applies and that 
there is no strain hardening, 

J2 = F J2 = 
From Eq. (3-44) 

J2 = a[{a[r + a',{a',r- -f a[(a',r- = (3-52) 

This expression can be used to eliminate the proportionality constant X 
from Eq. (3-51). However, to simplify the algebra, the quantity Uq is 
introduced.' U'o is the rate of change of strain energy involved in dis- 
tortion, as opposed to the strain energy required for volume change. 

U'o = o-'ifi + aU'^ + cr'-^e's (3-53) 

By using Eqs. (3-52) and (3-53) and the yield criterion J2 = fc^ it is 
possible to obtain the relationship 

2GUo = 2XA;2 (3-54) 

The stress-strain relations of Reuss's equations are obtained by substi- 
tuting Eq. (3-54) into Eq. (3-52) and solving for the stress rate. 

a', = SG'f^-l^^;) (3-55) 



= 2G 



(., 3L^'o A 



These equations give the rate of change of the stress deviator as long as 
J 2 = k"^ and £/[, > 0. To get the rate of change of stress, it is necessary 
to remember that ai = a[ -f a^ . From Eq. (2-51) 

a" = 3/ce^" (3-56) 

^ This derivation follows the procedure given by Prager and Hodge, op. cit., pp. 
27-29. 



72 Mechanical Fundamentals 



[Ch 



ap. 



When the stress is in the elastic range, or in unloading from the plastic 
region, Eqs. (3-55) do not apply. The proper equations are given by the 
elasticity equations like Eq. (2-50). 



3-10. Deformation Theories 

Hencky proposed that for small strains the stress deviator could be 
considered proportional to the strain deviator. 



(J = 2Gp^' 



(3-57) 



Elastic strains are neglected in Eq. (3-57). Gp is a plastic shear modulus 
which varies depending upon the values of stress and strain. Because 
of the assumption of constancy of volume, e" = 0, and e = e. There- 
fore, Eq. (3-57) can be expanded in terms of principal stresses and strains 
to give 



ei 



€2 = 



es 



2(Ti — a2 — ^3 _ 1 

2a'2 — Ci — CTs 1 

QGp ^ 3Gp 

2cr3 — (Ti — ^2 _ 1 

QGp ~ 3^ 



O"! — 2 (^^2 + 0-3) 

o-s — 2 (<^i + ^2) 



Ep 

J_ 

E p 

J_ 

Ep 



O-l — 2 (^^2 + 0-3) 
0-2 — 2 ^^^ "*" '^^-^ 

0-3 — 2 ^^^ '^ '^^^ 



(3-58) 



The analogy is apparent between the right-hand side of Eqs. (3-58) and 
the familiar equations of elasticity expressing strain in terms of the 



principal stresses [Eqs. (2-23)]. 




For the plastic case, Poisson's ratio has 
been taken equal to 3^. Ep can be 
considered to be a plastic modulus that 
is actually a variable depending upon 
the stress and strain. The evaluation 
of Ep from an invariant stress-strain 
curve is shown in Fig. 3-6. 

J_ ^ e 
Ep ff 



(3-59) 



Significant strain 
Fig. 3-6. Definition of Ep. 



Nadai^ has developed relationships 
similar to Eqs. (3-58) based on the equal- 
ity of Lode's stress and strain param- 
eters. The fact that 11 = v leads to the conclusion that the ratios of 
the principal shearing stresses to the principal shearing strains are equal. 



1 A. Nadai, "Plasticity," pp. 77-79, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 
1931. 



)ec. 



3-11] 



Elements of the Theory of Plasticity 73 



and from these three relationships the equations can be derived. It is 
for this reason that relationships like Eqs. (3-58) are sometimes called 
Nadai's equations. 

In a deformation theory, such as is given by the Hencky or Nadai 
equations, the total plastic strain is proportional to the stress de viator, 
while in a flow theory, such as is given by the Reuss equations, the 
increments of plastic strain are proportional to the stress deviator. The 
Hencky theory gives results in agreement with the incremental or flow 
theory provided that the principal axes of stress and strain remain coinci- 
dent during the straining process and provided that proportional loading 
is maintained. The Hencky theory is not satisfactory for large defor- 
mations, but it is often used for small plastic strains because it offers 
certain mathematical conveniences. 

3-11. Two-dimensional Plastic Flow — Plane Strain 

In many practical problems, such as rolling and drawing, all displace- 
ments can be considered to be limited to the xy plane, so that strains in 



Punch- 



Plastic 
metal 






// // merai // // 



<i^////////////////////////A. 



Punch 



f^=0 



Rigid ^^■ • ^ ■ .■ • ^ ■ - ■ -^v'J v Rigid 

^iPlastic^^ 

v//////y//?7/?///////// 



(a) Kb) 

Fig. 3-7. Methods of developing plastic constraint. 



the z direction can be neglected in the analysis. This is known as a con- 
dition of ylane strain. When a problem is too difficult for an exact three- 
dimensional solution, a good indication of the deformation and forces 
required can often be obtained by consideration of the analogous plane- 
strain problem. 

Since a plastic material tends to deform in all directions, to develop a 
plane-strain condition it is necessary to constrain the flow in one direc- 
tion. Constraint can be produced by an external lubricated barrier, such 
as a die wall (Fig. 3-7 a), or it can arise from a situation where only part 
of the material is deformed and the rigid material outside the plastic 
region prevents the spread of deformation (Fig. 3-7b). 

Even though the strain in one of the principal directions is equal to 



74 Mechanical Fundamentals [Chap. 3 

zero for plane strain, it does not follow that there is zero stress in this 
direction. It can be shown ^ that for plane strain o-^ = (a^ + (Ty)/2 or 
(Ts = (o-i + c7-2)/2. If this value is substituted into the expression for the 
Von Mises criterion of yielding, the yield criterion for plane strain becomes 

2 
(Ti — a2 = — 7= Co = 1.15o-o (3-60) 

V3 

The maximum-shear-stress criterion of yielding can be expressed by 
(Ti — cTs = (To = 2k. However, with the plane-strain condition defining 
the value of 0-3, the minimum principal stress will be 0-2 and the shear- 
stress criterion should be written 

CTi — (72 = CTo = 2k (3-61) 

In Eq. (3-61) k is the yield stress in pure shear. However, based on the 
Von Mises criterion of yielding the relationship between the tensile yield 
stress and the yield stress in shear [Eq. (3-21)] is given by ca = s/S k. 
Therefore, Eq. (3-60) becomes o-i — 0-2 = 2k. Thus, for plane-strain con- 
ditions, the two yield criteria are equivalent, and it can be considered 
that two-dimensional flow will occur when the shear stress reaches a 
critical value of k. Equation (3-61) is equally valid when written in 
terms of the stress deviator. 



(,; = ao = 2k (3-62) 



3-12. Slip-field Theory 



Consider a volume element in plane strain within a plastic region of a 
body. Figure 3-8a represents the two-dimensional state of stress with 
respect to arbitrary cartesian coordinates. It is possible to determine 
the principal planes such that the shear stresses vanish (Fig. 3-86). The 
principal stresses are simply functions of the spherical component of 
stress, a" , and the shearing stress k. fc is a constant throughout the 
plastic region if strain hardening is neglected, but a" varies from point to 
point. The maximum shear stress will occur on planes 45° to the direc- 
tion of the principal stresses. Thus, the critical shear stress k will first 
reach its value on these planes. This condition is shown in Fig. 3-8c, 
where it is seen that the maximum shear stress occurs in two orthogonal 
directions, designated a and ,8. These lines of maximum shear stress are 
called slip lines. The slip lines have the property that the shear strain 
is a maximum and the linear strain is zero tangent to their direction. 
However, it should be carefully noted that the slip lines just referred to 

' O. Hoffman and G. Sachs, "IntroductiontotheTheoryof Plasticity for Engineers, " 
p. 1]8, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 1953. 



Sec. 3-12] 



Elements of the Theory of Plasticity 



75 



are not the slip lines, or slip bands, observed under the microscope on 
the surface of plastically deformed metal. This latter type of slip lines 
will be discussed more fully in the next chapter. 





o] =a +/[ 



ic) 
Fig. 3-8. Two-dimensional state of stress in plane strain. 

By comparing Fig. 3-86 and c, it is seen that the principal stresses have 
a direction 45° to the slip lines. The values of the principal stresses can 
be determined if a" is known since 



cTi = a" -\- k 

(72 — 0" — K 



(3-63) 
If a" is constant throughout the region, the slip lines will be straight lines. 



a-< =0 




Fig. 3-9. Slip-line field at free surface. 

However, if the slip Unes curve by an angle 0, the following relationships 
hold: 



a" -j- 2k(^ — constant along a line 
a" — 2k4) = constant along (3 line 



(3-64) 



The slip lines at a free surface must make an angle of 45° with the 
surface (Fig. 3-9), since there can be no resultant tangential force at a 



76 



Mechanical Fundamentals 



[Ch 



ap. 



free surface. Since there is no resultant normal stress at a free surface, 
0-1 = and by Eqs. (3-63) 0-" = —k. Therefore, 0-2 = —2fc, and the trans- 
verse principal stress is compressive with a value of 2k. 

As a further example of the use of slip lines, consider the deformation 
of an ideal plastic metal by a fiat punch. ^ The friction between the face 




Fig. 3-10. Slip-line field produced by indentation of a punch. 

of the punch and the metal is considered to be negligible. Plastic defor- 
mation will first start at the corners of the punch and will result in a 
slip-line field such as is shown in Fig. 3-10. Consider the point M. 
Since this is at a free surface, the normal stress is zero and a" = k. In 
accordance with Eqs. (3-64), the equation of this slip line may be written 
a" -\- 2k(f> = k. There is no change in the value of a" until we reach 
point A^, where the slip line deviates from a straight line. In going from 
A'' to Q, the slip line turns through an angle ^ = — 7r/2 so that its equa- 
tion at point Q is a" — 2/c(7r/2) = k. Since no further change takes 
place in (/> in going to point R, the principal stress normal to the surface 
at R is 

<yin = a" ^ k = (k -^ 2k l) + k 

a,, = 2k(^l+ fj 



or 



and 



^2« = 2k 



If we trace out any of the other slip lines, we shall find in the same way 
that the normal stress is 2k{l -\- x/2). Therefore, the pressure is uni- 
form over the face of the punch and is equal to 



(71 = 2k[l -{- 



i) 



(3-65) 



1 D. Tabor, "The Hardness of Metals," pp. 34-37, Oxford University Press, New 
York, 1951. 



Sec. 3-12] Elements of the Theory of Plasticity 77 

Since k = ao/y/S, 



<Ji = cr^ax = -^ ^1 + I ) = 3(ro (3_66: 



Thus, the theory predicts that full-scale plastic flow, with the resulting 
indentation, will occur when the stress across the face of the punch 
reaches three times the yield strength in tension. 

The example described above is relatively simple and represents an 
overidealized situation. However, the method of slip fields, sometimes 
called the Hencky plastic-section method, is an important analytical tool 
for attacking difficult problems in plasticity. It has been used in the 
analysis of two-dimensional problems such as the yielding of a notched 
tensile bar^ and the hot rolling of a slab.^ Prager^ and Thomsen* have 
given general procedures for constructing slip-line fields. However, there 
is no easy method of checking the validity of a solution. Partial experi- 
mental verification of theoretically determined slip-line fields has been 
obtained for mild steel by etching techniques^ which delineate the plas- 
tically deformed regions. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Hill, R.: "The Mathematical Theory of Plasticity," Oxford University Press, New- 
York, 1950. 

Hoffman, O., and G. Sachs: "Introduction to the Theory of Plasticity for Engineers," 
McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 1953. 

Nadai, A.: "Theory of Flow and Fracture of Solids," 2d ed., vol. I, McGraw-Hill 
Book Company, Inc., New York, 1950. 

Phillips, A.: "Introduction to Plasticity," The Ronald Press Company, New York, 
1956. 

Prager, W.: "An Introduction to Plasticity," Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 
Reading, Mass., 1959. 

and P. G. Hodge, Jr. : "Theory of Perfectly Plastic Solids," John Wiley & Sons, 

Inc., New York, 1951. 

1 R. Hill, Quart. J. Mech. Appl. Math, vol. 1, pp. 40-52, 1949. 

2 J. M. Alexander, Proc. Inst. Mech. Engrs., (London), vol. 169, pp. 1021-1030, 1955. 
* W. Prager, Trans. Roy. Inst. TechnoL, Stockholm, no. 65, 1953. 

^E. C. Thomsen, /. Appl. Mech., vol. 24, pp. 81-84, 1957. 

" B. B. Hundy, Meiallurgia, vol. 49, no. 293, pp. 109-118, 1954. 



Part Two 

METALLURGICAL FUNDAMENTALS 



Chapter 4 

PLASTIC DEFORMATION 
OF SINGLE CRYSTALS 

4-1 . Introduction 

The previous three chapters have been concerned with the phenomeno- 
logical description of the elastic and plastic behavior of metals. It has 
been shown that formal mathematical theories have been developed for 
describing the mechanical behavior of metals based upon the simplifying 
assumptions that metals are homogeneous and isotropic. That this is 
not true should be obvious to anyone who has examined the structure 
of metals under a microscope. However, for fine-grained metals sub- 
jected to static loads within the elastic range the theories are perfectly 
adequate for design. Within the plastic range the theories describe the 
observed behavior, although not with the precision which is frequently 
desired. For conditions of dynamic and impact loading we are forced, 
in general, to rely heavily on experimentally determined data. As the 
assumption that we are dealing with an isotropic homogeneous medium 
becomes less tenable, our ability to predict the behavior of metals under 
stress by means of the theories of elasticity and plasticity decreases. 

Following the discovery of the diffraction of X rays by metallic crystals 
by Von Laue in 1912 and the realization that metals were fundamentally 
composed of atoms arranged in specific geometric lattices there have been 
a great many investigations of the relationships between atomic structure 
and the plastic behavior of metals. Much of the fundamental work on 
the plastic deformation of metals has been performed with single-crystal 
specimens, so as to eliminate the complicating effects of grain boundaries 
and the restraints imposed by neighboring grains and second-phase parti- 
cles. Techniques for preparing single crystals have been described in a 
number of sources.^"* 

' R. W. K. Honeycombe, Met. Reviews, vol. 4, no. 13, pp. 1-47, 1959. 

2 A. N. Holden, Trans. ASM, vol. 42, pp. 319-346, 1950. 

3 W. D. Lawson and S. Nielsen, "Preparation of Single Crystals," Academic Press, 
Inc., New York, 1958. 

81 



82 Metallurgical Fundamentals 



[Ch 



ap. 



The basic mechanisms of plastic deformation in single crystals will be 
discussed in this chapter. This subject will be extended in the next chap- 
ter to a consideration of plastic deformation in polycrystalline specimens. 
Primary consideration will be given to tensile deformation. The funda- 
mental deformation behavior in creep and fatigue will be covered in 
chapters specifically devoted to these subjects. The dislocation theory, 
which plays such an important part in present-day concepts of plastic 
deformation, will be introduced in this chapter to the extent needed to 
provide a qualitative understanding of modern concepts of plastic defor- 
mation. A more detailed consideration of dislocation theory will be 
found in Chap. 6. This will be followed by a chapter on the funda- 
mental aspects of fracture and a chapter on internal friction and anelastic 
effects. 



4-2. Concepts oF Crystal Geometry 

X-ray diffraction analysis shows that the atoms in a metal crystal are 
arranged in a regular, repeated three-dimensional pattern. The atom 
arrangement of metals is most simply portrayed by a crystal lattice in 
which the atoms are visualized as hard balls located at particular locations 
in a geometrical arrangement. 

The most elementary crystal structure is the simple cubic lattice (Fig. 
4-1). This is the type of structure cell found for ionic crystals, such as 

NaCl and LiF, but not for any oi' 
the metals. Three mutually perpen- 
dicular axes are arbitrarily placed 
through one of the corners of the cell. 
Crystallographic planes and direc- 
tions will be specified with respect to 
these axes in terms of Miller indices. 
A crystallographic plane is specified 
in terms of the length of its inter- 
cepts on the three axes, measured 
from the origin of the coordinate axes. 
To simplify the crystallographic 
formulas, the reciprocals of these in- 
tercepts are used. They are reduced 
to a lowest common denominator to give the Miller indices (hkl) of the 
plane. For example, the plane ABCD in Fig. 4-1 is parallel to the x and 
z axes and intersects the y axis at one interatomic distance ao. There- 
fore, the indices of the plane are 1/ oo , 1/1, 1/ oo , or (hkl) = (010). Plane 
EBCF would be designated as the (TOO) plane, since the origin of the 
coordinate system can be moved to G because every point in a space 




Fig. 4-1 . Simple cubic structure. 



4-2] 



Plastic Deformation of Single Crystals 83 



[\00)- HADG 
[WO]- HBCG 
[\\\)-GEC 
[\\2)-GJC 



lattice has the same arrangement of points as every other point. The 
bar over one of the integers indicates that the plane intersects one of the 
axes in a negative direction. There are six crystallographically equiva- 
lent planes of the type (100), any one of which can have the indices (100), 
(010), (001), (TOO), (OlO), (OOT) depending upon the choice of axes. The 
notation J 100} is used when they 
are to be considered as a group, 
or family of planes. 

Crystallographic directions are 
indicated by integers in brackets: 
[uvw]. Reciprocals are not used in 
determining directions. As an ex- 
ample, the direction of the line F D 
is obtained by moving out from the 
origin a distance ao along the x axis 
and moving an equal distance in the 
positive y direction. The indices 
of this direction are then [110]. 
A family of crystallographically 
equivalent directions would be des- 
ignated {uvw.) For the cubic lat- 
tice only, a direction is always 
perpendicular to the plane having 
the same indices. 

Many of the common metals have 
either a body-centered cubic (bcc) or 
face-centered cubic (fee) crystal struc- 
ture. Figure 4-2a shows a body- 
centered cubic structure cell with 
an atom at each corner and another 
atom at the body center of the cube. 
Each corner atom is surrounded 
by eight adjacent atoms, as is the 
atom located at the center of the cell. 





Fig. 4-2. (a) Body-centered cubic struc- 
ture; (6) face-centered cubic structure. 



Therefore, there are two atoms per structure cell for the body-centered 
cubic structure {% -\- I). Typical metals which have this crystal struc- 
ture are alpha iron, columbium, tantalum, chromium, molybdenum, and 
tungsten. Figure 4-26 shows the structure cell for a face-centered cubic 
crystal structure. In addition to an atom at each corner, there is an 
atom at the center of each of the cube faces. Since these latter atoms 
belong to two unit cells, there are four atoms per structure cell in the 
face-centered cubic structure (% -f- ^^). Aluminum, copper, gold, lead, 
silver, and nickel are common face-centered cubic metals. 



84 



Metallurgical Fundamentals 



[Ch 



ap. 



The third common metallic crystal structure is the hexagonal close- 
packed (hep) structure (Fig. 4-3). In order to specify planes and direc- 
tions in the hep structure, it is convenient to use the Miller-Bravais 
system with four indices of the type (hkil). These indices are based on 

four axes ; the three axes ai, a^, az are 
120° apart in the basal plane, and 
the vertical c axis is normal to the 
basal plane. These axes and typical 
planes in the hep crystal structure 
are given in Fig. 4-3. The third 
index is related to the first two by 
the relation i = —{h-\-k). 




Basal plane (0001) - ABCDEF 

Prism plane (1010) - FEJH 

Pyramidal planes 
Type I, Order 1 (lOTl) - GHJ 
Type I, Order 2 (101_2) - KJH 
Type n, Order 1 (1 1 21 ) - GHL 
Type n, Order 2 (1122) - KHL 

Digonal axis [ll20] - FGC 




Fig. 4-3. 

ture. 



Hexagonal close-packed struc- Fig. 4-4. Stacking of close-packed spheres. 



The face-centered cubic and hexagonal close-packed structures can both 
be built up from a stacking of close-packed planes of spheres. Figure 4-4 
shows that there are two ways in which the spheres can be stacked. The 
first layer of spheres is arranged so that each sphere is surrounded by 
and just touching six other spheres. This corresponds to the solid circles 
in Fig. 4-4. A second layer of close-packed spheres can be placed over 
the bottom layer so that the centers of the atoms in the second plane 
cover one-half the number of valleys in the bottom layer (dashed circles 
in Fig. 4-4). There are two ways of adding spheres to give a third close- 
packed plane. Although the spheres in the third layer must fit into the 
valleys in the second plane, they may lie either over the valleys not 
covered in the first plane (the dots in Fig. 4-4) or directly above the 
atoms in the first plane (the crosses in Fig. 4-4). The first possibility 
results in a stacking sequence ABC ABC ■ • • , which is found for the 



Sec. 4-3] Plastic Deformation of Single Crystals 85 

{111} planes of an fee strueture. The other possibility results in the stack- 
ing sequence ABAB • ■ , which is found for the (0001) basal plane of 
the hep strueture. For the ideal hep packing, the ratio of c/a is \/%, 
or 1.633. Table 4-1 shows that actual hep metals deviate from the ideal 
c/a ratio. 

Table 4-1 
Axial Ratios of Some Hexagonal Metals 

Metal c/a 

Be 1.568 

Ti 1.587 

Mg 1.623 

Ideal hep 1 . 633 

Zn 1 . 856 

Cd 1 . 886 

The fee and hep structures are both close-packed structures. Seventy- 
four per cent of the volume of the unit cell is occupied by atoms, on a 
hard sphere model, in the fee and hep structures. This is contrasted 
with 68 per cent packing for a bcc unit cell and 52 per cent of the volume 
occupied by atoms in the simple cubic unit cell. 

Plastic deformation is generally confined to the low-index planes, which 
have a higher density of atoms per unit area than the high-index planes. 
Table 4-2 lists the atomic density per unit area for the common low-index 
planes. Note that the planes of greatest atomic density also are the 
most widely spaced planes for the crystal structure. 



Table 4-2 
Atomic Density of Low-index Planes 







Atomic density, 


Distance 


Crystal structure 


Plane 


atoms per 


between 






unit area 


planes 


Face-centered cubic 


Octahedral |lllj 


4/-v/3 ao^ 


ao/V3 

ao/2 




Cube {1001 


2/ao^ 




Dodecahedral {1101 


2/^/2 ao^ 


ao/2 V2 


Body-centered cubic 


Dodecahedral {llOj 


2/ V2 oo^ 


ao/V2 




Cube {1001 


l/flo^ 


Oo/2 




Octahedral {1111 


l/V3ao2 


ao/2 y/3 


Hexagonal close-packed 


Basal {00011 


1/3 V3ao2 


c 



4-3. Lattice Defects 

Real crystals deviate from the perfect periodicity that was assumed in 
the previous section in a number of important ways. While the concept 



86 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 4 

of the perfect lattice is adequate for explaining the structure-insensitive 
properties of metals, for a better understanding of the structure-sensitive 
properties it has been necessary to consider a number of types of lattice 
defects. The description of the structure-sensitive properties then 
reduces itself largely to describing the behavior of these defects. 

Structure-insensitive Structure-sensitive 

Elastic constants Electrical conductivity 

Melting point Semiconductor properties 

Density Yield stress 

Specific heat Fracture strength 

CoeflScient of thermal expansion Creep strength 

As is suggested by the above brief tabulation, practically all the 
mechanical properties are structure-sensitive properties. Only since the 
realization of this fact, in relatively recent times, have really important 
advances been made in understanding the mechanical behavior of 
materials. 

The term defect, or imperfection, is generally used to describe any devi- 
ation from an orderly array of lattice points. When the deviation from 
the periodic arrangement of the lattice is localized to the vicinity of only 
a few atoms it is called a point defect, or point imperfection. However, 
if the defect extends through microscopic regions of the crystal, it is 
called a lattice imperfection. Lattice imperfections may be divided into 
line defects and surface, or plane, defects. Line defects obtain their name 
because they propagate as lines or as a two-dimensional net in the crystal. 
The edge and screw dislocations that are discussed in this section are the 
common line defects encountered in metals. Surface defects arise from 
the clustering of line defects into a plane. Low-angle boundaries and 
grain boundaries are surface defects (see Chap. 5). The stacking fault 
between two close-packed regions of the crystal that have alternate stack- 
ing sequences (Sec. 4-10) is also a surface defect. 

Point Defects 

Figure 4-5 illustrates three types of point defects. A vacancy, or vacant 
lattice site,^ exists when an atom is missing from a normal lattice position 
(Fig. 4-5a). In pure metals, small numbers of vacancies are created by 
thermal excitation, and these are thermodynamically stable at temper- 
atures greater than absolute zero. At equilibrium, the fraction of lattices 
that are vacant at a given temperature is given approximately by the 
equation 

n lis /A i\ 

^ = exp-^ (4-1) 



1 ' 



'Vacancies and Other Point Defects," Institute of Metals, London, 1958. 



bee. 4-ii Plastic Deformation of Single Crystals 87 

where n is the number of vacant sites in N sites and E^ is the energy 
required to move an atom from the interior of a crystal to its surface. 
Table 4-3 illustrates how the fraction of vacant lattice sites in a metal 
increases rapidly with temperature. By rapid quenching from close to 
the melting point, it is possible to trap in a greater than equilibrium 

oooo oooo ooooo 

oooo oooo ooooo 

oo o oooo o^ooo 

o 
oooo oooo ooooo 

ia) [b] [c) 

Fig. 4-5. Point defects, (a) Vacancy; (6) interstitial; (c) impurity atom. 

number of vacancies at room temperature. Higher than equilibrium 
concentrations of vacancies can also be produced by extensive plastic 
deformation (cold work) or as the result of bombardment with high- 
energy nuclear particles. When the density of vacancies becomes rela- 
tively large, it is possible for them to cluster together to form voids. 

Table 4-3 
Equilibrium Vacancies in a Metal 





Approximate fraction 


Temperature, °C 


of vacant lattice sites 


500 


1 X 10-10 


1000 


1 X 10-6 


1500 


5 X 10-" 


2000 


3 X 10-3 



E, ~ 1 ev 

An atom that is trapped inside the crystal at a point intermediate 
between normal lattice positions is called an interstitial atom, or inter- 
stitialcy (Fig. 4-56). The interstitial defect occurs in pure metals as a 
result of bombardment with high-energy nuclear particles (radiation 
damage), but it does not occur frequently as a result of thermal activation. 

The presence of an impurity atom at a lattice position (Fig. 4-5c) or at 
an interstitial position results in a local disturbance of the periodicity of 
the lattice, the same as for vacancies and interstitials. 

Line Defects — Dislocations 

The most important two-dimensional, or line, defect is the dislocation. 
The dislocation is the defect responsible for the phenomenon of slip, by 
which most metals deform plastically. Therefore, one way of thinking 
about a dislocation is to consider that it is the region of localized lattice 




88 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 4 

disturbance separating the slipped and unslipped regions of a crystal. 
In Fig. 4-6, AB represents a dislocation lying in the slip plane, which is 
the plane of the paper. It is assumed that slip is advancing to the right. 
All the atoms above area C have been displaced one atomic distance in 
the slip direction; the atoms above D have not yet slipped. AB is then 
the boundary between the slipped and unslipped regions. It is shown 

shaded to indicate that for a few atomic dis- 
tances on each side of the dislocation line 
there is a region of atomic disorder in which 
the slip distance is between zero and one 
atomic spacing. As the dislocation moves, 
slip occurs in the area over which it moves. 
In the absence of obstacles, a dislocation can 
move easily on the application of only a small 
force; this helps explain why real crystals 

.,,,.-, . . deform much more readily than would be 

Fig. 4-6. A dislocation in a ^ i r ^ i -^i r , ■, ,.• 

slip plane expected tor a crystal with a perfect lattice. 

Not only are dislocations important for ex- 
plaining the slip of crystals, but they are also intimately connected with 
nearly all other mechanical phenomena such as strain hardening, the 
yield point, creep, fatigue, and brittle fracture. 

The two basic types of dislocations are the edge dislocation and the 
screw dislocation. The simplest type of dislocation, which was originally 
suggested by Orowan, Polanyi, and Taylor, is called the edge disloca- 
tion, or Taylor-Orowan dislocation. Figure 4-7 shows the slip that 
produces an edge dislocation for an element of crystal having a simple 
cubic lattice. Slip has occurred in the direction of the slip vector over 
the area ABCD. The boundary between the right-hand slipped part of 
the crystal and the left-hand part which has not yet slipped is the line 
AD, the edge dislocation. Note that the parts of the crystal above the 
slip plane have been displaced, in the direction of slip, with respect to 
the part of the crystal below the slip plane by an amount indicated by 
the shaded area in Fig. 4-7. All points in the crystal which were origi- 
nally coincident across the slip plane have been displaced relative to each 
other by this same amount. The amount of displacement is equal to the 
Burgers vector b of the dislocation. For a pure edge dislocation such as is 
shown here, the magnitude of the Burgers vector is equal to the atomic 
spacing. A defining characteristic of an edge dislocation is that its 
Burgers vector is always perpendicular to the dislocation line. 

Although the exact arrangement of atoms along AZ) is not known, it is 
generally agreed that Fig. 4-8 closely represents the atomic arrangement 
in a plane normal to the edge dislocation AD. The plane of the paper in 
this figure corresponds to a (100) plane in a simple cubic lattice and is 



Sec. 4-3] 



Plastic Deformation of Single Crystals 



89 



equivalent to any plane parallel to the front face of Fig. 4-7. Note that 
the lattice is distorted in the region of the dislocation. There is one more 
vertical row of atoms above the slip plane than below it. The atomic 
arrangement results in a compressive stress above the slip plane and a 
tensite stress below the slip plane. An edge dislocation with the extra 
plane of atoms above the slip plane, as in Fig. 4-8, is called by convention 
a positive edge dislocation and is frequently indicated by the symbol X. 



Slip vector 




vector 



Fig. 4-7. Edge dislocation produced by 
slip in a simple cubic lattice. Disloca- 
tion lies along AD, perpendicular to slip 
direction. Slip has occurred over area 
ABCD. {W. T. Read, Jr., "Disloca- 
tions in Crystals," p. 2, McGraw-Hill 
Book Company, Inc., New York, 1953.) 



■'- ,, r . 


r T ? ? 9 








J^Xii 


rzijirrn . 






1 






Hz ^rm 

A 4 4 A i i i A 



Fig. 4-8. Atomic arrangement in a plane 
normal to an edge dislocation. {W. T. 
Read, Jr., "Dislocations in Crystals," p. 3, 
]\IcGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New 
York, 1953.) 



If the extra plane of atoms lies below the slip plane, the dislocation is a 
negative edge dislocation, T . 

A pure edge dislocation can glide or slip in a direction perpendicular 
to its length. However, it may move vertically by a process known as 
climb, if diffusion of atoms or vacancies can take place at an appreciable 
rate. Consider Fig. 4-8. For the edge dislocation to move upward 
(positive direction of climb), it is necessary to remove the extra atom 
directly over the symbol ± or to add a vacancy to this spot. One such 
atom would have to be removed for every atomic spacing that the dis- 
location climbs. Conversely, if the dislocation moved down, atoms 
would have to be added. Atoms could be removed from the extra 
plane of atoms by the extra atom interacting with a lattice vacancy. 
Atoms are added to the extra plane for negative climb by the diffusion 
of an atom from the surrounding crystal, creating a vacancy. Since 
movement by climb is diffusion-controlled, motion is much slower than 
in glide and less likely except at high temperatures. 



90 



Metallurgical Fundamentals 



[Ch 



ap. 



The second basic type of dislocation is the screw, or Burgers, dislocation, 
J'igure 4-9 shows a simple example of a screw dislocation. The upper 
part of the crystal to the right oi AD has moved relative to the lower 
part in the direction of the slip vector. No slip has taken place to the 
left of AD, and therefore AD is a, dislocation line. Thus, the dislocation 
line is parallel to its Burgers vector, or slip vector, and by definition this 
must be a screw dislocation. Consider the trace of a circuit around the 
dislocation line, on the front face of the crystal. Starting at X and com- 
pleting the circuit, we arrive at X', 
one atomic plane behind that con- 
taining X. In making this circuit 
we have traced the path of a right- 
handed screw. Every time a cir- 
cuit is made around the dislocation 
line, the end point is displaced one 
plane parallel to the slip plane in 
the lattice. Therefore, the atomic 
planes are arranged around the 
dislocation in a spiral staircase or 
screw. 

The arrangement of atoms (in 
two dimensions) around a screw 
dislocation in a simple cubic lattice 
is shown in Fig. 4-10. In this figure 
we are looking down on the slip 
plane in Fig. 4-9. The open circles 
represent atoms just above the slip 
plane, and the solid circles are atoms just below the slip plane. A screw 
dislocation does not have a preferred slip plane, as an edge dislocation 
has, and therefore the motion of a screw dislocation is less restricted than 
the motion of an edge dislocation. However, movement by climb is 
not possible with a screw dislocation. 

For the present, the discussion of dislocations will be limited to the 
geometrical concepts presented in this section. After a more complete 
discussion of the plastic deformation of single crystals and polycrystalline 
specimens, we shall return to a detailed discussion of dislocation theory in 
Chap. 6. Among the topics covered will be the effect of crystal structure 
on dislocation geometry, the experimental evidence for dislocations, and 
the interaction between dislocations. 




/'Slip 
^ vector 



Fig. 4-9. Slip that produces a screw dis- 
location in a simple cubic lattice. Dis- 
location lies along AD, parallel to slip 
direction. Slip has occurred over the 
area ABCD. (W. T. Read, Jr., "Disloca- 
tions in Crystals," p. 15, McGraw-Hill 
Book Company, Inc., New York, 1953.) 



4-4. Deformation by Slip 

The usual method of plastic deformation in metals is by the sliding of 
blocks of the crystal over one another along definite crystallographic 



Sec. 4-4] 



Plastic Deformation of Single Crystals 



91 



planes, called slip planes. As a very crude approximation, the slip, or 
glide, of a crystal can he considered analogous to the distortion produced 
in a deck of cards when it is pushed from one end. Figure 4-11 illus- 
trates this classical picture of slip. In Fig. 4-1 la, a shear stress is applied 



® — ® — ® — ® — ® — ®=^ 



<ii 6) ii ii ^i «>=^ 



<i^ «) «5 6) «J 6N^ 



«? 65 ^) 6) ^)- 



5 6 J «5 i) 65 6^ 



(5 65 6 5 ^5 6 5 6^ 



65 65- 



$ 65 65 65 6) 6^ 



65 65 65 65 65 6 5=:^ 



(5 6) 65 65 6^ 



(5 65 ® 6^ 



«5 65 6^ 



(5 65 6 5 6 5 ^ 



65 65 6) 6) ®- 



6 5 ® 6 5 6 5 65 



6 5 65 65 6 5 65 6>=. 



65 6 5 6 5 65 65 6^ 



® ® ® ® ® 



^5 65 6) 65 6^ 




Slip 
vector 



Fig. 4-10. Atomic arrangement around the screw dislocation shown in Fig. 4-9. The 
plane of the figure is parallel to the slip plane. ABCD is the slipped area, and AD is 
the screw dislocation. Open circles represent atoms in the atomic plane just above 
the slip plane, and the solid circles are atoms in the plane just below the slip plane. 
(W. T. Read, Jr., "Dislocations in Crystals," p. 17, McGraw-Hill, Book Company, Inc., 
New York, 1953.) 



to a metal cube with a top polished surface. Slip occurs when the shear 
stress exceeds a critical value. The atoms move an integral number of 
atomic distances along the slip plane, and a step is produced in the 
polished surface (Fig. 4-116). When we view the polished surface from 
above with a microscope, the step shows up as a line, which w^e call a 
slip line. If the surface is then repolished after slip has occurred, so that 
the step is removed, the slip line will disappear (Fig. 4-1 Ic). The single 



92 



Metallursical Fundamentals 



[Chap. 4 



crystal is still a single crystal after slip has taken place provided that 
the deformation was uniform. Note that slip lines are due to changes in 
surface elevation and that the surface must be suitably prepared for 



Polished surface 


• • • 1 • • • 









^ 


-Slip 


ine 














































r 
























1' 












Slip 


plane 











U) {^) (c) 

Fig. 4-1 1 . Schematic drawing of classical idea of slip. 




Fig. 4-12. Straight slip lines in copper, 500 X. {Courtesy W. L. Phillips.) 



microscopic observation prior to deformation if the slip lines are to be 
observed. Figure 4-12 shows straight slip lines in copper. 

The fine structure of slip lines has been studied at high magnification 
by means of the electron microscope. What appears as a line, or at best 
a narrow band, at 1,500 diameters' magnification in the optical microscope 
can be resolved by the electron microscope as discrete slip lamellae at 
20,000 diameters, shown schematically in Fig. 4-13. The situation where 



Sec. 4-4] 



Plastic Deformation of Single Crystals 



93 



there are many slip lamellae comprising the slip band is found for alumi- 
num and copper, but in alpha brass there is only one slip line, even when 
viewed at high magnification. 

Slip occurs most readily in specific directions on certain crystallographic 
planes. Generally the slip plane is the plane of greatest atomic density 
(Table 4-2), and the slip direction is the closest-packed direction within 
the slip plane. Since the planes of greatest atomic density are also the 
most widely spaced planes in the crystal structure, the resistance to slip 
is generally less for these planes than for any other set of planes. The 
slip plane together with the slip direction establishes the slip system. 



Slip distance 

^Interslip 
/ region 




Lamella 
spacing 



id) 

Fig. 4-1 3. Schematic drawing of the fine structure of a sKp band, 
tion; (6) large deformation. 



(a) Small deforma- 



In the hexagonal close-packed metals, the only plane with high atomic 
density is the basal plane (0001). The digonal axes (1120) are the close- 
packed directions. For zinc, cadmium, magnesium, and cobalt slip 
occurs on the (0001) plane in the (1120) directions.^ Since there is only 
one basal plane per unit cell and three (1120) directions, the hep structure 
possesses three slip systems. The limited number of slip systems is the 
reason for the extreme orientation dependence of ductility in hep crystals. 

In the face-centered cubic structure, the {lllj octahedral planes and 
the (110) directions are the close-packed systems. There are eight | 111 } 
planes in the fee unit cell. However, the planes at opposite corners of 
the cube are parallel to each other, so that there are only four sets of 
octahedral planes. Each { 111 } plane contains three (110) directions (the 
reverse directions being neglected). Therefore, the fee lattice has 12 
possible slip systems. 

The bcc structure is not a close-packed structure like the fee or hep 
structures. Accordingly, there is no one plane of predominant atomic 
density, as (111) in the fee structure and (0001) in the hep structure. 
The {110} planes have the highest atomic density in the bcc structure, 

' Zirconium and titanium, which have low c/a ratios, slip primarily on the prism and 
pyramidal planes in the (1120) direction. 



94 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 4 

but they are not greatly superior in this respect to several other planes. 
However, in the bee structure the (111) direction is just as close-packed 
as the (110) and (1120) directions in the fee and hep structures. There- 
fore, the bcc metals obey the general rule that the slip direction is the 
close-packed direction, but they differ from most other metals by not 
having a definite single slip plane. Slip in bcc metals is found to occur 
on the {110}, {112}, and {123} planes, while the slip direction is always 
the [111] direction. There are 48 possible slip systems, but since the 



€P 




Fig. 4-14. Wavy alip lines in alpha iron, 150 X. {Cuuiicsy J. J. Cox.) 

planes are not so close-packed as in the fee structure, higher shearing 
stresses are usually required to cause slip. 

Slip in bcc alpha iron has been particularly well studied.^ It has been 
concluded that the slip plane in alpha iron may occupy any position in 
the [111] zone, its position being determined by the orientation of the 
stress axis with respect to the crystal axis and the variation in the shear- 
ing strengths of the planes in the slip zone. These studies have shown 
that observed deviations from the low-index planes {110}, {112}, and 
{ 123} are real effects, which supports the belief that slip in alpha iron is 
noncrystallographic. Further evidence for noncrystallographic slip is the 
fact that slip lines in alpha iron are wavy^ (Fig. 4-14). 

Certain metals show additional slip systems with increased temper- 

1 F. L. Vogel and R. M. Brick, Trans. AIME, vol. 197, p. 700, 1958; R. P. Steijn 
and R. M. Brick, Trans. ASM, vol. 4G, pp. 140G-1448, 1954; J. J. Cox, G. T. Home, 
and R. F. MchI, Trans. ASM, vol. 49, 118-131, 1957. 

2 J. R. Low and R. W. Guard, Acta Mel., vol. 7, pp. 171-179, 1959, have shown that 
curved slip linos are produced in iron by screw components of the dislocation loop 
but that the slip lines are straight when viewed normal to the edge component of the 
dislocation. 



Sec. 4-5] 



Plastic Deformation of Single Crystals 



95 



ature. Aluminum deforms on 'he {100} plane at elevated temperature, 
while in magnesium the {lOllj pyramidal plane plays an important role 
in deformation by slip above 225°C. In all cases the slip direction 
remains the same when the slip plane changes with temperature. 

4-5. Slip in a Perfect Lattice 

If slip is assumed to occur by the translation of one plane of atoms 
over another, it is possible to make a reasonable estimate^ of the shear 



o o o o 
o o o 



[a) 



/ 


^Sinusoidal relationsh 
^/■~\ \^^ Realistic relations 


p 

hip 















Displacement x 



Fig. 4-15. (a) Shear displacement of one plane of atoms over another atomic plane; 
(6) variation of shearing stress with displacement in sHp direction. 

stress required for such a movement in a perfect lattice. Consider two 
planes of atoms subjected to a homogeneous shear stress (Fig. 4-15). 
The shear stress is assumed to act in the slip plane along the slip direc- 
tion. The distance between atoms in the slip direction is b, and the 
spacing between adjacent lattice planes is a. The shear stress causes a 
displacement x in the slip direction between the pair of adjacent lattice 
planes. The shearing stress is initially zero when the two planes are in 
coincidence, and it is also zero when the two planes have moved one 
identity distance h, so that point 1 in the top plane is over point 2 on the 
bottom plane. The shearing stress is also zero when the atoms of the 
top plane are midway between those of the bottom plane, since this is a 



' J. Frenkel, Z. Physik, vol. 37, p. 572, 1926. 



96 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 4 

symmetry position. Between these positions each atom is attracted 
toward the nearest atom of the other row, so that the shearing stress is 
a periodic function of the displacement. 

As a first approximation, the relationship between shear stress and dis- 
placement can be expressed by a sine function 

T = Tm Sni —r- ' (4-2) 

where r^ is the amplitude of the sine wave and h is the period. At small 
values of displacement, Hooke's law should apply. 

Gx 
r = Gy =~ (4-3) 



For small values of x/h, Eq. (4-2) can be written 

27ra; 



(4-4) 



Combining Eqs. (4-3) and (4-4) provides an expression for the maximum 
shear stress at which slip should occur. 

As a rough approximation, h can be taken equal to a, with the result that 
the theoretical shear strength of a perfect crystal is approximately equal 
to the shear modulus divided by 2x. 

Tm^§^ (4-6) 

The shear modulus for metals is in the range 10® to 10'^ psi (10^^ to 
10^2 dynes/cm^). Therefore, Eq. (4-6) predicts that the theoretical shear 
stress will be in the range 10^ to 10® psi, while actual values of the shear 
stress required to produce plastic deformation are in the range 10^ to 
10* psi. Even if more refined calculations are used to correct the sine- 
wave assumption, the value of r^ cannot be reduced by more than a 
factor of 5 from the value predicted by Eq. (4-6). Thus, it seems reason- 
able to expect that the theoretical shear strength of most metals lies 
between G/10 and G/50. This is still at least 100 times greater than the 
observed shear strengths of metal crystals. It can only be concluded 
that a mechanism other than the bodily shearing of planes of atoms is 
responsible for slip. In the next section, it is shown that dislocations 
provide such a mechanism. 



Sec. 4-6] Plastic Deformation of Single Crystals 97 

4-6. Slip by Dislocation Movement 

The concept of the dislocation was first introduced to explain the dis- 
crepancy between the observed and theoretical shear strengths of metals. 
For the concept to be useful in this field, it is necessary to demonstrate 
(1) that the passage of a dislocation through a crystal lattice requires 
far less than the theoretical shear stress and (2) that the movement of 
the dislocation through the lattice produces a step, or slip band, at the 
free surface. 



1 23456789 

id) 

Fig. 4-16. Schematic diagram illustrating the fact that a dislocation moves easily 
through a crystal lattice, (a) Energy field in perfect crystal lattice; (6) lattice 
containing an edge dislocation. {F. Seilz, "The Physics of Metals," p. 91, McGraw- 
Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 1943.) 

To illustrate that the stress required to move a dislocation through a 
crystal is very low compared with the theoretical shear stress, we shall 
use Fig. 4-16. Figure 4-16a represents the atoms in two adjacent planes 
in a perfect crystal lattice which does not contain a dislocation. The 
top curve of the figure represents schematically the energy of an atom in 
the lower plane of atoms as a function of its position relative to the upper 
plane. For the normal arrangement of a perfect crystal, all the atoms 
in the lower plane are at minimum positions in the energy curve. There- 
fore, if the top row of atoms is displaced toward the right relative to the 
bottom row, each atom encounters the same force opposing the displace- 
ment. This is the situation described in Sec. 4-5. Now consider the 
situation when the crystal contains a dislocation (Fig. 4-166). This illus- 
trates a positive edge dislocation, with the extra plane of atoms between 
4 and 5. The atoms at large distances from the center of the dislocation 
are at positions corresponding to the minimum of the energy curve; the 
atoms at the center are not. Now consider pairs of atoms, for example. 



98 Metallurgical Fundamentals 



rch 



ap. 



4 and 5, 3 and 6, etc., located symmetrically on opposite sides of the 
center of the dislocation. They encounter forces which are equal and 
opposite. As a result, if the atoms near the center of the dislocation are 
displaced by equal distances, one-half will encounter forces opposing the 
motion and one-half will encounter forces which assist the motion. 
Therefore, to a first approximation, the net work required to produce 




Fig. 4-1 7. Movement of edge dislocation in a simple cubic lattice. 
Roy. Soc. (London), vol. 145A, p. 369, 1934.) 



(G. I. Taylor, Proc. 



the displacement is zero, and the stress required to move the dislocation 
one atomic distance is very small. 

The lattice offers essentially no resistance to the motion of a dislocation 
only when the dislocation lies at a position of symmetry with respect to 
the atoms in the slip plane. In general, a small force, the Peierls-Nabarro 
force, is needed to drive a dislocation through the lattice. While it is 
well established that the value of the Peierls-Nabarro force is much 
smaller than the theoretical shear stress for a perfect lattice, the accu- 
rate calculation of this force is difficult because it depends strongly on 
the relatively uncertain atomic arrangement at the center of a dislocation. 

Figure 4-17, based on the original work by Taylor,^ illustrates that the 
movement of a dislocation results in a surface step, or slip band. The 
top series of sketches shows a positive edge dislocation moving to the right 
in a simple cubic lattice. The slip plane is shown dashed. When the dis- 
location reaches the right side of the crystal, assumed to be a free surface, 

' G. I. Taylor, Proc. Roy. Soc. (London), vol. 145A, p. 362, 1934. 



)ec, 



4-7] 



Plastic Deformation of Single Crystals 99 



it produces a shift with respect to the planes on each side of the slip plane 
of one Burgers vector, or one atomic distance for the simple cubic lattice. 
The bottom series of sketches shows that the same surface step is pro- 
duced by the movement of a negative edge dislocation to the left. 



Slip 
direction 



Slip plane 



4-7. Critical Resolved Shear Stress for Slip 

The extent of slip in a single crystal depends on the magnitude of the 
shearing stress produced by external loads, the geometry of the crystal 
structure, and the orientation of the 
active slip planes with respect to the 
shearing stresses. Slip begins when 
the shearing stress on the slip plane in 
the slip direction reaches a threshold 
value called the critical resolved shear 
stress. This value ^ is really the single- 
crystal equivalent of the yield stress of 
an ordinary stress-strain curve. The 
value of the critical resolved shear 
stress depends chiefly on composition 
and temperature. 

The fact that different tensile loads 
are required to produce slip in single 
crystals of different orientation can be 
rationalized by a critical resolved shear 
stress; this w^as first recognized by 
Schmid.- To calculate the critical re- 
solved shear stress from a single crystal 

tested in tension, it is necessary to know, from X-ray diffraction, the 
orientation with respect to the tensile axis of the plane on which slip first 
appears and the slip direction. Consider a cylindrical single crystal with 
cross-sectional area A (Fig. 4-18). The angle between the normal to the 
slip plane and the tensile axis is 0, and the angle which the slip direc- 
tion makes with the tensile axis is X. The area of the slip plane inclined 
at the angle 4> will be A /cos 0, and the component of the axial load 
acting in the slip plane in the slip direction is P cos X. Therefore, the 
critical resolved shear stress is given by 




Fig. 4-1 8. Diagram for calculating 
critical resolved shear stress. 



P COS X P 

'■^ ^ ~T7? 1\ = "T COS (^ COS X 

A/(cos <t>) A 



(4-7) 



1 In practice it is very difficult to determine the stress at which the first slip bands 
are produced. In most cases, the critical shear stress is obtained by the intersection 
of the extrapolated elastic and plastic regions of the stress-strain curve. 

2 E. Schmid, Z. Elektrochem., vol. 37, p. 447, 1931. 



100 Metallurgical Fundamentals 



[Ch 



ap. 



The law of the critical resolved shear stress, also known as Schmid's 
law, is best demonstrated with hep metals, where the limited number of 
slip systems allows large differences in orientation between the slip plane 
and the tensile axis (see Prob. 4-8). In fee metals the high symmetry 
results in so many equivalent slip systems that it is possible to get a 

Table 4-4 

Room-temperature Slip Systems and Critical Resolved Shear Stress 

FOR Metal Single Crystals 



Metal 



Zn. 
Mg 
Cd. 
Ti. 

Ag. 

Cu. 

Ni. 
Fe. 

Mo 



Crystal 
structure 



hep 
hep 
hep 
hep 

fee 



fee 

fee 
bee 



bee 



Purity, 

% 



99.999 

99.996 

99.996 

99.99 

99.9 

99.99 

99.97 

99.93 

99.999 

99.98 

99.8 

99.96 



Slip 
plane 



(0001) 

(0001) 

(0001) 

(1010) 

(1010) 

(111) 

(111) 

(111) 

(111) 

(111) 

(111) 

(110) 

(112) 

(123) 

(110) 



Slip 
direction 



[1120] 

[1120] 

[1120] 

[1120] 

[1120] 

[110] 

[110] 

[110] 

[110] 

[110] 

[110] 

[111] 



[111] 



Critical 

shear stress, 

g/mm^ 



18 

77 

58 

1,400 

9,190 

48 

73 

131 

65 

94 

580 

2,800 



5,000 



Ref. 



« D. C. Jillson, Trans. AIME, vol. 188, p. 1129, 1950. 

^ E. C. Burke and W. R. Hibbard, Jr., Trans. AIME, vol. 194, p. 295, 1952. 
'^ E. Schmid, "International Conference on Physics," vol. 2, Physical Society, 
London, 1935. 

<* A. T. Churchman, Proc. Roy. Soc. (London), vol. 226A, p. 216, 1954. 

« F. D. Rosi, Trans. AIME, vol. 200, p. 1009, 1954. 

/J. J. Cox, R. F. Mehl, and G. T. Home, Trans. ASM, vol. 49, p. 118, 1957. 

"R. Maddin and N. K. Chen, Trans. AIME, vol. 191, p. 937, 1951. 



variation in the yield stress of only about a factor of 2 because of differ- 
ences in the orientation of the slip plane with the tensile axis. The 
demonstration of the resolved-shear-stress law is even less favorable in 
bcc metals owing to the large number of available slip systems. How- 
ever, available data indicate that Schmid's law is obeyed for cubic metals 
as well as hep metals. 

Table 4-4 gives values of critical resolved shear stress for a number of 
metals. The importance of small amounts of impurities in increasing 
the critical resolved shear stress is shown by the data for silver and copper. 



Sec. 4-7] 



Plastic Deformation of Single Crystals 



101 



Alloying-element additions have even a greater effect, as shown by the 
data for gold-silver alloys in Fig. 4-19. Note that a large increase in the 
resistance to slip is produced by alloying gold and silver even though 
these atoms are very much alike in size and electronegativity, and hence 






Ag 



20 



00 

Au 



40 60 

Atom % Au 

Fig. 4-19. Variation of critical resolved shear stress with composition in silver-gold- 
alloy single crystals. ((?. Sachs and J. Weerts, Z. Physik, vol. 62, p. 473, 1930.) 



28 



24 



20 



16 



2? 12 



I 

8 

J 

\ 

o \ 

l\ 

t \ 

• N- — 

N. ° 





-250 -200 



-150 



100 -50 

Temoerature, °C 



50 



100 



150 



.CO 



Fig. 4-20. Variation of critical resolved shear stress with temperature for iron single 
crystals. (J. J. Cox, R. F. Mehl, and G. T. Home, Trans. ASM, vol. 49, p. 123, 1957.) 



they form a solid solution over the complete range of composition. In 
solid solutions, where the solute atoms differ considerably in size from the 
solvent atoms, an even greater increase in critical resolved shear stress 
would be observed. 



102 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 4 

The magnitude of the critical resolved shear stress of a crystal is deter- 
mined by the interaction of its population of dislocations with each other 
and with defects such as vacancies, interstitials, and impurity atoms. 
This stress is, of course, greater than the stress required to move a single 
dislocation, but it is appreciably lower than the stress required to pro- 
duce slip in a perfect lattice. On the basis of this reasoning, the critical 
resolved shear stress should decrease as the density of defects decreases, 
provided that the total number of imperfections is not zero. When the 
last dislocation is eliminated, the critical resolved shear stress should rise 
abruptly to the high value predicted for the shear strength of a perfect 
crystal. Experimental evidence for the effect of decreasing defect den- 
sity is shown by the fact that the critical resolved shear stress of soft 
metals can be reduced to less than one-third by increasing the purity. At 
the other extreme, micron-diameter single-crystal filaments, or whiskers, 
can be grown essentially dislocation-free. Tensile tests ^ on these fila- 
ments have given strengths which are approximately equal to the calcu- 
lated strength of a perfect crystal. 

4-8, Testing of Single Crystals 

Most studies of the mechanical properties of single crystals are made 
by subjecting the crystal to simple uniaxial tension. While the stress- 
strain curves may be plotted in terms of average uniaxial stress vs. aver- 
age linear strain (AL/Lo), a more fundamental way of presenting the data 
is to plot resolved shear stress [Eq. (4-7)] against the shear strain or glide 
strain. Glide strain is the relative displacement of two parallel slip planes 
separated at a unit distance. If the orientation of the slip plane and the 
slip direction with respect to the tensile axis are known both before and 
after deformation, the glide strain y can be obtained^ from Eq. (4-8) 

cos Xi cos Xo . . Qx 

7 = -. -. (4-8) 

sm xi sm Xo 

where xo and xi are the initial and final angles between the slip plane and 
the tensile axis and Xo and Xi are the initial and final angles between the 
slip direction and the tensile axis. The glide strain can also be expressed 
in terms of the axial change in length and the original orientation, with- 
out requiring information on the final orientation of the glide elements. 

1^ - (1 + 27 sin xo cos Xo + 7- sin^ xo)'^'^ (4-9) 

-t>0 



or T = 

sm 






2 

— sin^ Xo} — cos \o 



(4-10) 



1 S. S. Brenner, /. AppL Phtjs., vol. 27, pp. 1484-1491, 1956. 

2 For a derivation of Eqs. (4-8) and (4-9), see E. Schmid and W. Boas, "PlasticiU 
of Crystals," English translation, pp. 58-60, F. A. Hughes & Co., London, 1950. 



Sec. 4-8j 



Plastic Deformation of Single Crystals 103 



In the ordinary tension test, the movement of the crosshead of the 
testing machine constrains the specimen at the grips, since the grips must 
remain in line. Therefore, the specimen is not allowed to deform freely 
by uniform glide on every slip plane along the length of the specimen, 
as is pictured in Fig. 4-2 la. Instead, the specimen deforms in the 
manner shown in Fig. 4-216. Near the center of the gage length the 




sV 



(a) [b] 

Fig. 4-21. (a) Tensile deformation of 
single crystal without constraint; (6) 
rotation of slip planes due to con- 
straint. 




Fig. 4-22. Stereographic triangles show- 
ing lattice rotation of fee metal during 
tensile elongation. 



slip planes rotate, as the crystal is extended, so as to align themselves 
parallel with the tensile axis. Near the grips bending of the slip planes 
is superimposed on the rotation. The amount of rotation toward the 
tensile axis increases with the extent of deformation. In tensile defor- 
mation, the change in the angle between the slip plane and the tensile 
axis is related to the change in gage length in the axial direction by 






sm xo 
sin XI 



(4-11) 



A convenient way of recording this reorientation is by following the 
axis of the specimen on the unit stereographic triangle.^ In Fig. 4-22, 
the initial orientation of the axis of an fee single-crystal tension speci- 
men is plotted on the unit stereographic triangle at P. The slip plane is 

1 For a description of stereographic projection, see C. S. Barrett, "The Structure of 
Metals," 2d ed., chap. 2, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 1952. 



104 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 4 

(111), and the slip direction is [101]. During elongation of the crystal, 
the specimen axis moves along a great circle passing through P and the 
slip direction [101]. As the deformation continues and rotation of the 
initial or primarij slip system occurs, the value of cos 4> cos X for the pri- 
mary slip system decreases. Therefore, even if strain hardening is neg- 
lected, a greater tensile load must be applied to maintain the value of the 
resolved shear stress on this slip system. While cos <^ cos X is decreasing 
on the primary slip system owing to rotation, it is increasing on another 
set of planes, which are being rotated closer to a position 45° to the tensile 
axis. When the resolved shear stress on the new slip system is equal or 
about equal to the shear stress on the old slip system, a new set of slip 
lines appear on the specimen surface and the axis rotates toward the [112]. 
In the fee metals, the new slip lines occur on the conjugate slip system 
(111)-[011]. Under the microscope conjugate slip appears as another set 
of intersecting slip lines. Cross slip on the (111)-[101] system may also 
occur. This slip system has the same slip direction as the primary slip 
system. In the microscope cross slip usually appears as short offsets to 
the primary slip lines. With even greater rotation, it is geometrically 
possible for a fourth slip system (Ill)-[011] to become operative. How- 
ever, this slip system is usually not found to be operative in fee metals. 
The appearance of more than one slip system during deformation is often 
described under the general heading of duplex or multiple slip. 

An excellent method of studying the deformation behavior of single 
crystals is by loading in shear. Parker and Washburn ^ have described 
a method of loading single crystals in pure shear so that the shear strain 
is applied by a couple acting parallel to the active slip system. This 
method of testing has the advantage that the crystal can be oriented 
so that the maximum shear stress occurs on any desired slip system. 
Resolved shear stress and shear strain are measured directly in this type 
of test. 

4-9. DeFormation by Twinning 

The second important mechanism by which metals deform is the 
process known as twinning.^ Twinning results when a portion of the 
crystal takes up an orientation that is related to the orientation of the 
rest of the untwinned lattice in a definite, symmetrical way. The 
twinned portion of the crystal is a mirror image of the parent crystal. 

1 E. R. Parker and J. Washburn, "Modern Research Techniques in Physical Metal- 
lurgy," American Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1953. 

2 For a complete review of this subject, see E. O. Hall, "Twinning and Diffusionless 
Transformations in Metals," Butterworth & Co. (Publishers), Ltd., London, 1954, or 
R. W. Cahn, Adv. in Phys., vol. 3, pp. 363-445, 1954. 



Sec. 4-9] 



Plastic Deformation of Single Crystals 



105 



The plane of symmetry between the two portions is called the twinning 
plane. Figure 4-23 illustrates the classical atomic picture of twinning. 
Figure 4-23a represents a section perpendicular to the surface in a cubic 
lattice with a low-index plane parallel to the paper and oriented at an 
angle to the plane of polish. The twinning plane is perpendicular to the 
paper. If a shear stress is applied, the crystal will twin about the twin- 
ning plane (Fig. 4-236). The region to the right of the twinning plane is 
undeformed. To the left of this plane, the planes of atoms have sheared 
in such a way as to make the lattice a mirror image across the twin plane. 



Polished surface 




Fig. 4-23. Classical picture of twinning. 



In a simple lattice such as this, each atom in the twinned region moves 
by a homogeneous shear a distance proportional to its distance from the 
twin plane. In Fig. 4-236, open circles represent atoms which have not 
moved, dashed circles indicate the original positions in the lattice of atoms 
which change position, and solid circles are the final positions of these 
atoms in the twinned region. Note that the twin is visible on the 
polished surface because of the change in elevation produced by the 
deformation and because of the difference in crystallographic orientation 
between the deformed and undeformed regions. If the surface were 
polished down to section A A, the difference in elevation would be elimi- 
nated but the twin would still be visible after etching because it possesses 
a different orientation from the untwinned region. 

It should be noted that twinning differs from slip in several specific 
respects. In slip, the orientation of the crystal above and below the slip 
plane is the same after deformation as before, while twinning results in 
an orientation difference across the twin plane. Slip is usually considered 
to occur in discrete multiples of the atomic spacing, while in twinning 
the atom movements are much less than an atomic distance. Slip occurs 



106 Metallurgical Fundamentals 



[Ch 



ap. 



on relatively widely spread planes, but in the twinned region of a crystal 
every atomic plane is involved in the deformation. 

Twins may be produced by mechanical deformation or as the result 
of annealing following plastic deformation. The first type are known as 
mechanical twins; the latter are called annealing twins. Mechanical twins 
are produced in bcc or hep metals under conditions of rapid rate of load- 
ing (shock loading) and decreased temperature. Face-centered cubic 
metals are not ordinarily considered to deform by mechanical twinning, 
although gold-silver alloys twin fairly readily when deformed at low tem- 
perature, and mechanical twins have been produced in copper by tensile 
deformation at 4°K. Twins can form in a time as short as a few micro- 
seconds, while for slip there is a delay time of several milliseconds before 
a slip band is formed. Under certain conditions, twins can be heard to 
form with a click or loud report (tin cry) . If twinning occurs during a 
tensile test, it produces serrations in the the stress-strain curve. 

Twinning occurs in a definite direction on a specific crystallographic 
plane for each crystal structure. Table 4-5 lists the common twin planes 



Twii 


Table 4-5 

\i Planes and Twin 


Directions 


Crystal 
structure 


Typical 
examples 


Twin 
plane 


Twin 
direction 


bcc 

hep 

fee 


a-Fe, Ta 

Zn, Cd, Mg, Ti 

Ag, Au, Cu 


(112) 

(1012) 

(111) 


[111] 

[1011] 

[112] 



and twin directions. It is not known whether or not there is a critical 
resolved shear stress for twinning. The shear stress at which twinning 
occurs is influenced by prior deformation. Figure 4-20 shows data for 
iron single crystals pulled in tension at — 196°C. The solid circles show 
a resolved shear stress appreciably below that for slip. The crosses repre- 
sent iron crystals prestrained 4 per cent at room temperature before test- 
ing at — 196°C. Note that the resolved shear stress for twinning is 
increased by the prior deformation by slip. If the crystals are given 
even greater prestrain at room temperature (open circles), deformation 
by twinning is completely suppressed and the crystal deforms by slip at 
-196°C. 

The lattice strains needed to produce a twin configuration in a crystal 
are small, so that the amount of gross deformation that can be produced 
by twinning is small. For example,^ the maximum extension which it is 
possible to produce in a zinc crystal when the entire crystal is converted 

' Barrett, op. cit., p. 384. 



Sec. 4-9] Plastic DcFormation of Single Crystals 107 

into a twin on the {1012} plane is only 7.39 per cent. The important 
role of twinning in plastic deformation comes not from the strain pro- 
duced by the twinning process but from the fact that orientation changes 
resulting from twinning may place new slip systems in a favorable orien- 
tation with respect to the stress axis so that additional slip can take place. 
Thus, twinning is important in the over-all deformation of metals with a 
low number of slip systems, such as the hep metals. However, it should 
be understood that only a relatively small fraction of the total volume of 




-f'" 




-_^-^ 






4 






~y -, 


- 










--^.^ 


•y—-/ 






■* / 






/ 


'x^- ., 





Fig. 4-24. Microstructures of twins, (a) Neumann bands in iron; (b) mechanical 
twins produced in zinc by polishing; (c) annealing twins in gold-silver alloy. 

a crystal is reoriented by twinning, and therefore hep metals will, in 
general, possess less ductility than metals with a greater number of slip 
systems. 

Figure 4-24 shows some metallographic features of twins in several 
different systems. Figure 4-24a is an example of mechanical twins in 
iron (Neumann bands). Note that the width of the twins can be readily 
resolved at rather low magnification. The boundaries of the twins etch 
at about the same rate as grain boundaries, indicating that they are 
rather high-energy boundaries. Figure 4-246 shows the broad, lense- 
shaped twins commonly found in hep metals. Note that twins do not 
extend beyond a grain boundary. Figure 4-24c shows annealing twins 
in an fee gold-silver alloy. Annealing twins are usually broader and with 
straighter sides than mechanical twins. The energy of annealing twin 
boundaries is about 5 per cent of the average grain-boundary energy. 
Most fee metals form annealing twins. Their presence in the micro- 
structure is a good indication that the metal has been given mechanical 
deformation prior to annealing, since it is likely that they grow fron) 
twin nuclei produced during deformation. 



108 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 4 

4-10. Stacking Faults 

In an earlier section, it was shown that the atomic arrangement on the 
{111 } plane of an fee structure and the {0001 } plane of an hep structure 
could be obtained by the stacking of close-packed planes of spheres. For 
the fee structure, the stacking sequence of the planes of atoms is given by 
ABC ABC ABC. For the hep structure, the stacking sequence is given 
by AB AB AB. 

^o o^ So off 

^o ~^C^ ^° Z^'^ 

Bq -Op Cq^ o 






tOA 



Be 



-o 



A B C A BCA A B C A\C A B 

(a) {b] 



-TO 



Ar.^ 



'o— o° o OB 

^o- oc o- o A 

^^^ ^o °5 

^o o a- o A 

o o o OB 

o o^ o A 



A BC'A CB'CA ABABAB 

I I 

(c) {d) 

Fig. 4-25. Faulted structures, (a) Face-centered cubic packing; (6) deformation 
fault in fee; (c) twin fault in fee; id) hep packing. 

Fairly recently it has been realized that errors, or faults, in the stack- 
ing sequence can be produced in most metals by plastic deformation.^ 
Slip on the {111} plane in an fee lattice produces a deformation stacking 
fault by the process shown in Fig. 4-255. Slip has occurred between 
an A and a B layer, moving each atom layer above the slip plane one 
identity distance to the right. The stacking sequence then becomes 
ABC A CAB. Comparison of this faulted stacking sequence (Fig. 
4-256) with the stacking sequence for an hep structure without faults 
(Fig. 4-25d) shows that the deformation stacking fault contains four 
layers of an hep sequence. Therefore, the formation of a stacking fault 

^ Very precise X-ray diffraction measurements are needed to detect the presence of 
stacking faults. For example, see B. E. Warren and E. P. Warekois, Acta Met., 
vol. 3, p. 473, 1955. 



Sec. 4-10] Plastic Deformation of Single Crystals 109 

in an fee metal is equivalent to the formation of a thin hep region. 
Another way in which a stacking fault eould oeeur in an fee metal is by 
the sequence' shown in Fig. 4-25c. The stacking sequence ABC\ACB\CA 
is called an extrinsic, or twin, stacking fault. The three layers ACB 
constitute the twin. Thus, stacking faults in fee metals can also be con- 
sidered as siibmicroscopic twins ot nearly atomic thickness. The reason 
why mechanical twins of microscopically resolvable width are not formed 
readily when fee metals are deformed is that the formation of stacking 
faults is so energetically favorable. 

The situation for the hep structure is somewhat different from that 
found in fee metals. Figure 4-25(i shows that, on going from an A layer 
to a -B layer, if we continue in a 
straight Hne we will not come stacLing f^uit^ ^siip plane 

^ Partiol ^ '^ 



to another atom on the next A disiocationsr-^^y ) / 

layer. However, slip can occur / /^\ J 

between tw^o of the planes so that //r: ■■:;■.;. ■:■.■•^^J^>>^ 

the stacking seciuence becomes i^sA^-.\>.^_>.i---' ^--<-ui^ 

ABABACBCBC. As a result, Z / 

four layers of atoms BACB are Fig. 4-26. Schematic model of a stacking 
in the straight-line fee stacking fault. 
order. Thus, a stacking fault in 

an hep metal is equivalent to the formation of a thin fee region. It is 
more difficult to form stacking faults in a bee lattice than in the close- 
packed fee and hep structures. The possibility of stacking faults in the 
{112} planes has been investigated theoretically and demonstrated by 
X-ray diffraction." Stacking faults have been observed w^ith thin-film 
electron microscopy in columbium.^ 

Stacking faults occur most readily in fee metals, and they have been 
most extensively studied for this crystal structure. For example, it is 
now known that differences in the deformation behavior of fee metals 
can be related to differences in staeking-fault behavior. From the point 
of view of dislocation theory, a stacking fault in an fee metal can be con- 
sidered to be an extended dislocation consisting of a thin hexagonal region 
bounded by partial dislocations^ (Fig. 4-26). The nearly parallel dis- 
locations tend to repel each other, but this is balanced by the surface 
tension of the stacking fault pulling them together. The lower the 
stacking -fault energy, the greater the separation between the partial dis- 

1 C. N. J. Wagner, Acta Met., vol. 5, pp. 427-434. 1957. 

2 P. B. Hirsch and H. M. Otte, Acta Cryst., vol. 10, pp. 447-45.3, 1957; O. J. Guenter 
and B. E. Warren, /. Appl. Phtjs., vol. 29, pp. 40-48, 1958. 

3 A. Fourdeux and A. Berghezen, J. Inst. Metals, vol. 89, pp. 31-32, 1960-1961. 

* Partial dislocations will be considered in more detail in Chap. 6. The splitting 
of dislocations into separated partials has been observed with the electron microscope 
in stainless-steel foils. 



110 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 4 

locations and the wider the stacking fault. Stacking-fault energies in 
fee metals have been estimated on the assumption that the stacking- 
fault energy is equal to twice the energy of a coherent boundary of an 
annealing twin. On this basis, the stacking-fault energies for copper, 
nickel, and aluminum are approximately 40, 80, and 200 ergs/cm^. Since 
the lower the energy of the twin boundary, the greater the tendency for 
the formation of annealing twins, the estimates of stacking-fault energy 
are in qualitative agreement with metallographic observations of the fre- 
quency of occurrence of annealing twins; e.g., aluminum rarely shows 
annealing twins. X-ray work has shown that the energy of stacking 
faults in brass decreases with zinc content, and this is in agreement with 
the fact that alpha brass forms a greater number of annealing twins than 
copper. 

Stacking faults enter into the plastic deformation of metals in a number 
of ways. Metals with wide stacking faults strain-harden more rapidly, 
twin easily on annealing, and show a different temperature dependence 
of flow stress from metals with narrow stacking faults. Figure 4-26 helps 
to illustrate why cross slip is more difficult in metals with wide stacking- 
fault ribbons. Because dislocations in the slip plane are extended, it is 
not possible for them to transfer from one slip plane to another except 
at a point where the partial dislocations come together. Since it requires 
energy to produce a constriction in the stacking fault, the process of cross 
slip is more difficult in a metal with wide stacking faults than in a metal 
with narrow stacking faults. For example, the activation energy for 
cross slip is about 1 ev in aluminum and approximately 10 ev in copper. 

4-11. DeFormation Bands and Kink Bands 

Inhomogeneous deformation of a crystal results in regions of different 
orientation called deformation bands. When slip occurs without restraint 
in a perfectly homogeneous fashion, the slip lines are removed by subse- 
quent polishing of the surface. Deformation bands, however, can be 
observed even after repeated polishing and etching because they repre- 
sent regions of different crystallographic orientation. In single crystals, 
deformation bands several millimeters wide may occur, while in poly- 
crystalline specimens microscopic observation is needed to see them. 
The tendency for the formation of deformation bands is greater in poly- 
crystalline specimens because the restraints imposed by the grain bound- 
aries make it easy for orientation differences to arise in a grain during 
deformation. Deformation bands generally appear irregular in shape 
but are elongated in the direction of principal strain. The outline of 
the bands is generally indistinct and poorly defined, indicating a general 



Sec. 4-12] Plastic Deformation of Sinsle Crystals 111 

fading out of the orientation difference. Deformation bands have been 
observed in both fee and bee metals, but not in hep metals. 

Consideration of the equation for critical resolved shear stress shows 
that it will be difficult to deform a hexagonal crystal when the basal plane 
is nearly parallel to the crystal axis. Orowan^ found that if a cadmium 
crystal of this orientation w^re 
loaded in compression it would 
deform by a localized region of the 
crystal suddenly snapping into a 
tilted position with a sudden short- 
ening of the crystal. The buckling, 
or kinking, behavior is illustrated 
in Fig. 4-27. The horizontal lines 
represent basal planes, and the 




Fig. 4-27. Kink band. 



planes designated p are the kink planes at which the orientation sud- 
denly changes. Distortion of the crystal is essentially confined to the 
kink band. Further study of kink bands by Hess and Barrett^ showed 
that they can be considered to be a simple type of deformation band. 
Kink bands have also been observed in zinc crystals tested in tension, 
where a nonuniform distribution of slip can produce a bending moment 
which can cause kink formation. 

4-12. Strain Hardenins oF Sinsle Crystals 

One of the chief characteristics of the plastic deformation of metals 
is the fact that the shear stress required to produce slip continuously 
increases with increasing shear strain. The increase in the stress required 
to cause slip because of previous plastic deformation is known as strain 
hardening, or work hardening. An increase in flow stress of over 100 per 
cent from strain hardening is not unusual in single crystals of ductile 
metals. 

Strain hardening is caused by dislocations interacting with each other 
and with barriers which impede their motion through the crystal lattice. 
Hardening due to dislocation interaction is a complicated problem because 
it involves large groups of dislocations, and it is difficult to specify group 
behavior in a simple mathematical way. It is known that the number 
of dislocations in a crystal increases with strain over the number present 
in the annealed crystal. Thus, the first requirement for understanding 
strain hardening was the development of a logical mechanism for the 
generation of dislocations. F. C. Frank and W. T. Read conceived a 

1 E. Orowan, Nature, vol. 149, p. 643, 1942. 

2 J. A. Hess and C. S. Barrett, Trans. AIME, vol. 185, p. 599, 1949. 



US Metallutgical Fundamentafs 



[Qap. 4 



Slip direction J 80 ° to 
original direction , 



logical mechanism by which a large amount of shp couJd be produced 
by one dislocation. The Frank-Read source (see Chap. 6 for details) 
provides a method by which the dislocations initially present in the crystal 
as a result of growth can generate enough dislocations to account for the 
observed strain hardening. The mechanism is consistent with the experi- 
mental observation that slip is concentrated on a relatively few active 
slip planes and that the total slip on each slip plane is of the order of 
1,000 atomic spacings. A method is also provided in the concept of the 
Frank-Read source for immobilizing the source after slip of this order of 

magnitude has occurred. Direct ex- 
perimental evidence for the existence 
of the Frank-Read source in crystals 
has been developed in recent years. 
One of the earliest dislocation con- 
cepts to explain strain hardening was 
the idea that dislocations pile up on 
slip planes at barriers in the crystal. 
The pile-ups produce a hack stress 
which opposes the applied stress on 
the slip plane. The existence of a 
back stress was demonstrated experi- 
mentally by shear tests on zinc single 
crystals.^ Zinc crystals are ideal for 




Shear strain y 

Fig. 4-28. Effect of complete reversal of 
slip direction on stress-strain curve. 
(E. H. Edwards, J. Washburn, and E. R. 
Parker, Trans. AIMS, vol., 197, p. 1526, 
1953.) 



crystal-plasticity experiments because they slip only on the basal plane, 
and hence complications due to duplex slip are easily avoided. In Fig. 
4-28, the crystal is strained to point 0, unloaded, and then reloaded in 
the direction opposite to the original slip direction. Note that on reload- 
ing the crystal yields at a lower shear stress than when it was first loaded. 
This is because the back stress developed as a result of dislocations piling 
up at barriers during the first loading cycle is aiding dislocation move- 
ment when the direction of slip is reversed. Furthermore, when the slip 
direction is reversed, dislocations of opposite sign could be created at the 
same sources that produced the dislocations responsible for strain in the 
first slip direction. Since dislocations of opposite sign attract and annihi- 
late each other, the net effect would be a further softening of the lattice. 
This explains the fact that the flow curve in the reverse direction lies 
below the curve for continued flow in the original direction. The lower- 
ing of the yield stress when deformation in one direction is followed by 
deformation in the opposite direction is called the Bauschinger effect.^ 
While all metals exhibit a Bauschinger effect, it may not always be of 

1 E. H. Edwards, J. Washburn, and E. R. Parker, Trans. AIME, vol. 197, p. 1525, 
1953. 

2 J. Bauschinger, Zivilingur., vol. 27, pp. 289-347, 1881. 



Sec. 4-1 2] 



Plastic Deformation of Single Crysta! 



113 



the magnitude shown here for zinc crystals. Moreover, the flow curve 
after reversal of direction does not fall below the original flow curve for 
all metals. 

The existence of back stress and its importance to strain hardening in 
metals having been established, the next step is to identify the barriers 
to dislocation motion in single crystals. Microscopic precipitate parti- 
cles and foreign atoms can serve as barriers, but other barriers which are 
effective in pure single crystals must be found. Such barriers arise from 
the fact that glide dislocations on intersecting slip planes may combine 




Fig. 4-29. Schematic representation of intersection of two screw dislocations, (a) 
Before intersection; (6) jogs formed after intersection. 

with one another to produce a new dislocation that is not in a slip direc- 
tion. The dislocation of low mobility that is produced by a dislocation 
reaction is called a sessile dislocation. Since sessile dislocations do not lie 
on the slip plane of low shear stress, they act as a barrier to dislocation 
motion until the stress is increased to a high enough level to break down 
the barrier. The most important dislocation reaction, which leads to 
the formation of sessile dislocations, is the formation of Cottrell-Lomer 
barriers in fee metals by slip on intersecting {111} planes. 

Another mechanism of strain hardening, in addition to that due to the 
back stress resulting from dislocation pile-ups at barriers, is believed to 
occur when dislocations moving in the slip plane cut through other dis- 
locations intersecting the active slip plane. The dislocations threading 
through the active slip plane are often called a dislocation forest, and this 
strain-hardening process is referred to as the intersection of a forest of 
dislocations. Figure 4-29 shows that the intersection of dislocations 
results in the formation of jogs, or offsets, in the dislocation line. The 
jogs formed in this case are edge dislocations because their Burgers vec- 
tors are perpendicular to the original dislocation line. Any further move- 
ment of the screw dislocations along the line A A would require the newly 
formed edge components to move out of their slip planes. Thus, the 



114 Metallurgical Fundamentals 



[Ch 



ap. 



formation of jogs in screw dislocations impedes their motion and may 
even lead to the formation of vacancies and interstitials if the jogs are 
forced to move nonconservatively. Jogs in edge dislocations do not 
impede their motion. All these processes require an increased expendi- 
ture of energy, and therefore they contribute to hardening. 

Strain hardening due to a dislocation cutting process arises from short- 
range forces occurring over distances less than 5 to 10 interatomic dis- 
tances. This hardening can be overcome at finite temperatures with the 




^2 ^3 

Resolved shear strain y 
Fig. 4-30. Generalized flow curve for fee single crystals. 



help of thermal fluctuations, and therefore it is temperature- and strain- 
rate-dependent. On the other hand, strain hardening arising from dis- 
location pile-up at barriers occurs over longer distances, and therefore it 
is relatively independent of temperature and strain rate. Accordingly, 
data on the temperature and strain-rate dependence of strain hardening 
can be used^ to determine the relative contribution of the two mechanisms. 
When the stress-strain curves for single crystals are plotted as resolved 
shear stress vs. shear strain, certain generalizations can be made for all 
fee metals. Following the notation proposed by Seeger,^ the flow curve 
for pure-metal single crystals can be divided into three stages (Fig. 4-30) . 
Stage I, the region of easy glide, is a stage in which the crystal undergoes 
little strain hardening. During easy glide, the dislocations are able to 
move over relatively large distances without encountering barriers. The 
low strain hardening produced during this stage implies that most of the 
dislocations escape from the crystal at the surface. During easy glide, 



1 Z. S. Basinski, Phil. Mag., vol. 4, ser. 8, pp. 393-432, 1959. 

2 A. Seeger, "Dislocations and Mechanical Properties of Crystals,' 
Sons, Inc., New York, 1957. 



John Wiley & 



Sec. 4-12] Plastic Deformation oF Single Crystals 115 

slip always occurs on only one slip system. For this reason, stage I slip 
is sometimes called laminar flow. 

Stage II is a nearly linear part of the flow curve where strain hardening 
increases r.apidly. In this stage, slip occurs on more than one set of 
planes. The length of the active slip lines decreases with increasing 
strain, which is consistent with the formation of a greater number of 
Cottrell-Lomer barriers with increasing strain. During stage II, the 
ratio of the strain-hardening coefficient (the slope of the curve) to the 
shear modulus is nearly independent of stress and temperature, and 
approximately independent of crystal orientation and purity. The fact 
that the slope of the flow curve in stage II is nearly independent of tem- 
perature agrees with the theory that assumes the chief strain-hardening 
mechanism to be piled-up groups of dislocations. 

Stage III is a region of decreasing rate of strain hardening. The proc- 
esses occurring during this stage are often called dynamical recovery. In 
this region of the flow curve, the stresses are high enough so that dis- 
locations can take part in processes that are suppressed at lower stresses. 
Cross slip is believed to be the main process by which dislocations, piled 
up at obstacles during stage II, can escape and reduce the internal-strain 
field. The stress at which stage III begins, T3, is strongly temperature- 
dependent. Also, the flow stress of a crystal strained into stage III is 
more temperature-dependent than if it had been strained only into stage 
II. This temperature dependence suggests that the intersection of forests 
of dislocations is the chief strain-hardening mechanism in stage III. 

The curve shown in Fig. 4-30 represents a general behavior for fee 
metals. Certain deviations from a three-stage flow curve have been 
observed. For example, metals with a high stacking-fault energy, like 
aluminum, usually show only a very small stage II region at room tem- 
perature because they can deform so easily by cross slip. The shape and 
magnitude of a single-crystal flow curve, particularly during the early 
stages, depends upon the purity of the metal, the orientation of the 
crystal, the temperature at which it is tested, and the rate at which it is 
strained. The easy-glide region is much more prominent in hep crystals 
than in fee metals. A region of easy glide in the flow curve is favored by 
slip on a single system, high purity, low temperature, absence of surface 
oxide films, an orientation favorable for simple slip, and a method of 
testing which minimizes extraneous bending stresses. Figure 4-31 shows 
that crystal orientation can have a very strong eff"ect on the flow curve 
of fee single crystals. When the tensile axis is parallel to a (Oil) direc- 
tion, one slip system is carrying appreciably more shear stress than any 
other and the flow curve shows a relatively large region of easy glide. 
When the tensile axis is close to a (100) or (111) direction, the stress on 
several slip systems is not very different and the flow curves show rapid 
rates of strain hardening. 



116 Metallurgical Fundamentals 



[Ch 



ap. 



Starting as close to absolute zero as is practical, the value of the 
resolved shear stress at a given shear strain decreases with increasing 
temperature. If fee crystals are strained to the end of stage II at a tem- 
perature Ti and then the temperature is increased to T2 without any 




Resolved shear strain 



Fig. 4-31. Effect of specimen orientation on the shape of the flow curve for fee single 
crystals. 




Shear strain 



Fig. 4-32. Flow curves exhibiting work softening. 



change in strain, the flow stress drops from ri to t2 (Fig. 4-32). The 
state of strain hardening reached at Ti is unstable at T2, and a recovery 
process sets in which tends to reduce the strain hardening to what it 
would have been if all the straining had been accomplished at T2. This 
behavior is called^ work softening. Work softening is the result of the 
release at T2 of dislocation pile-ups produced at Ti. The release of dis- 
locations may be due to easier cross shp at the higher temperature or 

1 A. H. Cottrell and R. J. Stokes, Proc. Roy. Soc. (London), vol. A233, p. 17, 1955. 



Sec. 4-12] Plastic Deformation of Sinsle Crystals 117 

the fact that the size of a stable dislocation pile-up is smaller at T2 because 
of increased thermal fluctuations. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Azaroff, L. V.: "Introduction to Solids," McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New 

York, 1960. 
Barrett, C. S.: "The Structure of Metals," 2d ed., McGraw-Hill Book Company, 

Inc., New York, 1952. 
Clarebrough, L. M., and M. E. Hargreaves: Work Hardening of Metals, in "Progress 

in Metal Physics," vol. 8, Pergamon Press, Ltd., London, 1959. 
Cottrell, A. H.: "Dislocations and Plastic Flow in Crystals," Oxford University Press, 

New York, 1953. 
Maddin, R., and N. K. Chen: Geometrical Aspects of the Plastic Deformation of 

Metal Single Crystals, in "Progress in Metal Physics," vol. 5, Pergamon Press, 

Ltd., London, 1954. 
Schmid, E., and W. Boas: "Plasticity of Crystals," English translation, F. A. Hughes 

& Co., London, 1950. 



Chapter 5 

PLASTIC DEFORMATION 

OF POLYCRYSTALLINE AGGREGATES 

5-1 . Introduction 

The previous chapter considered the plastic deformation of metallic 
single crystals in terms of the movement of dislocations and the basic 
deformation mechanisms of slip and twinning. Single-crystal specimens 
represent the metal in its most ideal condition. The simplification which 
results from the single-crystal condition materially assists in describing 
the deformation behavior in terms of crystallography and defect struc- 
ture. However, with the exception of electronic and semiconductor 
devices, single crystals are rarely used for practical purposes because of 
limitations involving their strength, size, and production. Commercial 
metal products are invariably made up of a tremendous number of small 
individual crystals or grains. The individual grains of the polycrystalline 
aggregate do not deform in accordance with the relatively simple laws 
which describe plastic deformation in single crystals because of the 
restraining effect of the surrounding grains. Therefore, there is a gap 
between fundamental deformation mechanisms determined from single 
crystals and the prediction of the plastic behavior of a polycrystalline 
aggregate from these basic concepts. 

Grain boundaries exert a considerable influence on the plastic-deforma- 
tion behavior of polycrystalline metals. Other factors which also have 
an important effect on mechanical properties are the presence of sub- 
grain boundaries within the grains, solid-solution alloying additions, 
and dispersion of second-phase particles. These factors will each 
be considered in this chapter, primarily in terms of how they 
influence the tensile-flow curve. Wherever possible, qualitative explana- 
tions of these processes will be given in terms of dislocation theory. 
Other topics covered in this chapter include yield-point behavior, strain 
aging, cold work, annealing, and the development of preferred orienta- 
tions. It will be appreciated that not all these topics are solely restricted 
to polycrystalline materials. However, the bulk of the experimental 
118 



Sec. 5-2] Plastic Deformation oF Polycrystalline Aggregates 119 

data on these phenomena have been obtained from polycrystalHne 
materials, and therefore they are considered in this chapter. 

5-2. Grain Boundaries and Deformation 

The boundaries between grains in a polycrystalline aggregate are a 
region of disturbed lattice only a few atomic diameters wide. In the 
general case, the crystallographic orientation changes abruptly in passing 
from one grain to the next across the grain boundary. The ordinary 
high-angle grain boundary represents a region of random misfit between 
the adjoining crystal lattices.^ As the difference in orientation between 
the grains on each side of the boundary decreases, the state of order in the 
boundary increases. For the limiting case of a low-angle boundary 
where the orientation difference across the boundary may be less than 1° 
(see Sec. 5-3), the boundary is composed of a regular array of dislocations. 

Ordinary high-angle grain boundaries are boundaries of rather high 
surface energy. For example, a grain boundary in copper has an inter- 
facial surface energy of about 600 ergs/cm^, while the energy of a twin 
boundary is only about 25 ergs/cm^. Because of their high energy, grain 
boundaries serve as preferential sites for solid-state reactions such as 
diffusion, phase transformations, and precipitation reactions. An 
important point to consider is that the high energy of a grain boundary 
usually results in a higher concentration of solute atoms at the boundary 
than in the interior of the grain. This makes it difficult to separate the 
pure mechanical effect of grain boundaries on properties from an effect 
due to impurity segregation. 

Grain boundaries may serve to either strengthen or weaken a metal, 
depending upon the temperature, rate of strain, and the purity of the 
metal. At temperatures below approximately one-half of the absolute 
melting point, and for relatively fast strain rates (so that recovery effects 
are not great), grain boundaries increase the rate of strain hardening and 
increase the strength. At high temperatures and slow strain rates (con- 
ditions of creep deformation) deformation is localized at the grain 
boundaries. Grain-boundary sliding and stress-induced migration can 
occur, and eventually fracture takes place at the grain boundary. The 
fairly narrow temperature region in which the grain boundaries become 
weaker than the interior of the grains, so that fracture occurs in an inter- 
granular rather than transgranular fashion, is called the equicohesive 
temperature. 

The principal difference between the room-temperature deformation of 
single-crystal and polycrystalline specimens is that polycrystalline 

1 For a review of the proposed models of grain boundaries see D. McLean, "Grain 
Boundaries in Metals," chap. 2, Oxford University Press, New York 19.57 



120 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 5 

material exhibits a higher rate of strain hardening. The stress-strain 
curve for polycrystaUine material shows no stage I or easy-glide region. 
Only stage II and stage III deformation are obtained with polycrystaUine 
specimens. Associated with the increased strain hardening is usually an 
increase in yield stress and tensile strength. The effects of grain bound- 
aries on strength are due to two main factors. The first is the fact that 




Fig. 5-1 . Dislocations piled up against a grain boundary, as observed with the electron 
microscope in a thin foil of stainless steel, 17,500 X. [M. J. Whelan, P. B. Hirsch, 
R. W. Home, and W. Bollman, Proc. Roy. Soc. (London), vol. 240A, p. 524, 1957.] 

grain boundaries are barriers to slip. Of greater importance is the fact 
that the requirement for continuity between grains during deformation 
introduces complex modes of deformation within the individual grains. 
Slip on multiple-slip systems occurs very readily in polycrystaUine 
specimens. 

The fact that slip lines stop at grain boundaries can be readily observed 
with the light microscope. However, by means of special etch-pit 
techniques (Sec. 6-2) and high-magnification electron microscopy of thin 
films it is possible to establish that dislocations pile up along the slip 
planes at the grain boundaries (Fig. 5-1). Dislocation pile-ups produce 
back stresses which oppose the generation of new dislocations at Frank- 
Read sources within the grains. With increasing applied stress more and 
more dislocations pile up at grain boundaries. High shear stresses are 
developed at the head of a dislocation pile-up, and eventually this becomes 
high enough to produce dislocation movement in the neighboring grain 
across the boundary. This will reduce the dislocation pile-up and mini- 
mize hardening from this effect. Hardening due to dislocation pile-up 



Sec. 5-21 Plastic Deformation of Polycrystalline Aggregates 121 

at grain boundaries is therefore important in the early stages of deforma- 
tion, but not at large strains. It will be more effective in an hep metal, 
with only one easy slip plane, than in fee or bee metals, with many 
equivalent slip planes. For the latter case, no grain can be very unfavor- 
ably oriented with respect to the applied stress, so that, on the average, 
slip can be initiated in a neighboring grain at only a little higher stress 
than was required to initiate slip in the most favorably oriented grains. 
However, for hep metals, there may be a very unfavorable orientation 
difference between neighboring grains so that an appreciably higher stress 
is required to initiate slip in the neighboring grain. Therefore, poly- 
crystalline hep metals show a very much higher rate of strain hardening 
compared with single crystals. In fee and bcc metals the difference in the 
flow curve between polycrystals and single crystals is not nearly so great. 

The effect of crystal orientation on the flow curve of fee single crystals 
was illustrated in Fig. 4-31. Orientations which produce many favorably 
oriented slip systems readily deform by multiple slip. Multiple slip 
always results in a high rate of strain hardening. From purely geometri- 
cal considerations the grains of a polycrystalline metal must remain in 
contact during deformation. Taylor^ has shown that five independent 
slip systems must operate in each grain in order to maintain continuity. 
Since slip on only two or three systems, depending on orientation, occurs 
for multiple slip in single crystals, slip in polycrystals is more complex 
than in single crystals oriented for multiple slip. Greater strain harden- 
ing is usually observed in polycrystals than can be accounted for on the 
basis of multiple slip in single crystals and by grain-boundary barriers.^ 

Grain size has a measurable effect on most mechanical properties. For 
example, at room temperature, hardness, yield strength, tensile strength, 
fatigue strength, and impact resistance all increase with decreasing grain 
size. The effect of grain size is largest on properties which are related to 
the early stages of deformation, for it is at this stage that grain-boundary 
barriers are most effective. Thus, yield stress is more dependent on 
grain size than tensile strength. For the later stages of deformation the 
strength is controlled chiefly by complex dislocation interactions occurring 
within the grains, and grain size is not a controlling variable. 

For most metals the yield stress is related to the grain size by 

cro = ai + K,D-y^ (5-1) 

where an = yield stress 

(Xi = friction stress opposing motion of a dislocation 
K,, = measure of extent to which dislocations are piled up at 

barriers 
D = grain diameter 

1 G. I. Taylor, J. Inst. Metals, vol. 62, p. 307, 1938. 

2 McLean, op. cit., chap. 6. 



122 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 5 

Equation (5-1) was first proposed for low-carbon steeP and has been 
extensively applied to tests on this material. The slope of a plot of o-q 
versus D~^^ is Ky, a measure of the extent to which dislocations are piled 
up at grain boundaries. It is essentially independent of temperature. 
The intercept ai is a measure of the stress needed to drive a dislocation 
against the resistance of impurities, precipitate particles, subgrain bound- 
aries, and the Peierls-Nabarro force. This term depends on both the 
composition and the temperature, but it is independent of the applied 
stress. Since the Peierls-Nabarro force is temperature-dependent and 
the other resistances to dislocation motion are approximately tempera- 
ture-independent, it appears possible to obtain an estimate of the lattice 
resistance to dislocation motion from an analysis of the grain-size depend- 
ence of yield stress." 

The problem of determining the flow curve of polycrystalline material 
from single-crystal data is difficult. The analyses of this problem which 
have been made^ consist essentially in averaging the single-crystal curves 
over different orientations. Only moderate agreement has been obtained. 

Grain size is measured with a microscope by counting the number of 
grains within a given area, by determining the number of grains that 
intersect a given length of random line, or by comparison with standard 
charts. The average grain diameter D can be determined from measure- 
ments along random lines by the equation 

D = ^ (5-2) 

where L is the length of the line and N is the number of intercepts which 
the grain boundary makes with the line. This can be related^ to the 
ratio of the grain-boundary surface area S to the volume of the grains, 
V, by the equation 

where I is the total length of grain boundary on a random plane of polish 
and A is the total area of the grains on a random plane of polish. A very 
common method of measuring grain size in the United States is to com- 
pare the grains at a fixed magnification with the American Society for 
Testing Materials (ASTM) grain-size charts. The ASTM grain-size 

1 N. J. Fetch, /. Iron Steel Inst. (London), vol. 173, p. 25, 1953; E. O. Hall, Proc. 
Phys. Soc. (London), vol. 64B, p. 747, 1951. 

2 J. Heslop and ISl J. Fetch, Phil. Mag., vol. 1, p. 866, 1956. 

3 Taylor, op. cit.; J. F. W. Bishop, J. Mech. and Phys. Solids, vol. 3, pp. 259-266, 
1955; U. F. Kocks, Ada Met., vol. 8, pp. 345-352, 1960. 

^ C. S. Smith and L. Guttman, Trans. AIMS, vol. 197, p. 81, 1953. 



Sec. 5-3] 



Plastic Deformation of Polycrystalline Aggregates 123 



number n is related to N*, the number of grains per square inch at a 
magnification of lOOX by the relationship s , 



N* = 2' 



(5-4)' 



Table 5-1 compares the ASTM grain-size numbers with several other 
useful measures of grain size. 

Table 5-1 
Comparison of Grain-size Measuring Systemsj 



ASTM 
No. 


Grains/in. 2 at 100 X 


Grains /mm 2 


Grains /mm. 3 


Av. grain 
diam, mm 


-3 


0.06 


1 


0.7 


1.00 


-2 


0.12 


2 


2 


0.75 


-1 


0.25 


4 


5.6 


0.50 





0.5 


8 


16 


0-35 


1 


1 


16 


45 


0.25 


2 


2 


32 


128 


0.18 


3 


4 


64 


360 


0.125 


4 


8 


128 


1,020 


0.091 


5 


16 


256 


2,900 


0.062 


6 


32 


512 


8,200 


0.-044 


7 


64 


1,024 


23,000 


G 032 


8 


128 


2,048 


65,000 


0.022 


9 


256 


4,096 


185,000 


0.016 


10 


512 


8,200 


520,000 


0.011 


11 


1,024 


16,400 


1,500,000 


0.008 


12 


2,048 


32,800 


4,200,000 


0.006 



t ASM Metals Handbook, 1948 ed. 



5-3. Low-angle Grain Boundaries 

It has been recognized only fairly recently that a definite substructure 
can exist within the grains surrounded by high-energy grain boundaries. 
The subgrains are low-angle boundaries in which the difference in orienta- 
tion across the boundary may be only a few minutes of arc or, at most, a 
few degrees. Because of this small orientation difference, special X-ray 
techniques are required to detect the existence of a substructure network. 
Subgrain boundaries are lower-energy boundaries than grain boundaries, 
and therefore they etch less readily than grain boundaries. However, 
in many metals they can be detected in the microstructure by metallo- 
graphic procedures (Fig. 5-2). 

A low-angle boundary contains a relatively simple arrangement of 
dislocations. The simplest situation is the case of a tilt boundary. 
Figure 5-3a illustrates two cubic crystals with a common [001] axis. The 



124 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 5 

slight difference in orientation between the grains is indicated by the 
angle 6. In Fig. 5-36 the two crystals have been joined to form a bicrystal 
containing a low-angle boundary. Along the boundary the atoms adjust 
their position by localized deformation to produce a smooth transition 
from one grain to the other. However, elastic deformation cannot 
accommodate all the misfit, so that some of the atom planes must end on 
the grain boundary. Where the atom planes end, there is an edge dis- 
location. Therefore, low-angle tilt boundaries can be considered to be 

A »; 





^ 



Fig. 5-2. Substructure network in iron-3 per cent silicon alloy, 250 X. 

an array of edge dislocations. From the geometry of Fig. 5-36 the 
relationship between d and the spacing between dislocations is given by 

^ = 2tan-i2^ = -^ (5-5) 

where h is the magnitude of the Burgers vector of the lattice. 

The validity of the dislocation model of the low-angle boundary is 
found in the fact it is possible to calculate the grain-boundary energy as 
a function of the difference in orientation between the two grains. So 
long as the angle does not become greater than about 20°, good agreement 
is obtained between the measured values of grain-boundary energy and 
the values calculated on the basis of the dislocation model. Other 
evidence for the dislocation nature of low-angle boundaries comes from 
metallographic observations. If the angle is low, so that the spacing 
between dislocations is large, it is often possible to observe that the 



Sec. 5-3] 



Plastic Deformation of Polycrystalline Aggregates 125 





ia) id) 

Fig. 5-3. Diagram of low-angle grain boundary, (a) Two grains having a common 
[001] axis and angular difference in orientation of 6; (b) two grains joined together to 
form a low-angle grain boundary made up of an array of edge dislocations. {W. T. 
Read, Jr., ^'Dislocations in Crystals," p. 157, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New 
York, 1953.) 




Fig. 5-4. Etch-pit structures along low-angle grain boundaries in iron-silicon alloy, 
1,000 X. 



126 Metallurgical Fundamentals 



[Chap. 5 



boundary is composed of a row of etch pits, with each pit corresponding 
to the site of an edge dislocation (Fig. 5-4). 

Subboundaries or low-angle boundaries can be produced in a number 






(a) id) 

Fig. 5-5. Movement of dislocations to produce polygonization (schematic). 

of ways.^ They may be produced during crystal growth, during high- 
temperature creep deformation, or as the result of a phase transformation. 
The veining in ferrite grains is a well-known example of a substructure 

resulting from the internal stresses ac- 
companying a phase transformation. 
Perhaps the most general method of 
producing a substructure network is 
by introducing a small amount of de- 
formation (from about 1 to 10 per 
cent prestrain) and following this with 
an annealing treatment to rearrange 
the dislocations into subgrain bound- 
aries. The amount of deformation 
and temperature must be low enough 
to prevent the formation of new grains 
by recrystallization (see Sec. 5-12). 
This process has been called recrystal- 
lization in situ, or polygonization. 

The term polygonization was used 
originally to describe the situation that 
occurs when a single crystal is bent to 
a relatively small radius of curvature 
and then annealed. Bending results 
in the introduction of an excess number of dislocations of one sign. 
These dislocations are distributed along the bent-glide planes as shown 
in Fig. 5-5a. When the crystal is heated, the dislocations group them- 
selves into the lower-energy configuration of a low-angle boundary by 
dislocation climb. The resulting structure is a polygonlike network of 
low-angle grain boundaries (Fig. 5-56). 

^ R. W. Cahn, "Impurities and Imperfections," American Society for Metals, 
Metals Park, Ohio, 1955. 



1 2 3 4 5 6 

Density of subboundaries 
(arbitrary scale) 

Fig. 5-6. Effect of density of sub- 
boundaries on yield stress. (E. R. 
Parker and T. H. Hazlett, "Relation 
of Properties to Microstructure," 
American Society for Metals, Metals 
Park, Ohio, 1954.) 



5-3] 



Plastic Deformation of Polycrystalline Agsregatcs 127 



Since low-angle boundaries consist of simple dislocation arrays, a study 
of their properties should provide valuable information on dislocation 
behavior. Parker and Washburn ^ demonstrated that a low-angle bound- 
ary moves as a unit when subjected to a shear stress, in complete agree- 
ment with what would be expected for a linear dislocation array. It has 
also been found that the boundary angle decreases with increasing 



80 



70 



60 



o 
850 



i:40 



30 



20 



10 



n 














)-o-J— 


Jv 
















LJ— L 


n--rLj--.| 


¥^ 


s. 


^ 


Lc^ 












\ 












L. 


L> 


r 

K 










r— e-< 


y-m-{ 


p-T-^^iA 


i-ew 


L 






tier 


\ 


^<^ 


L^ 


ws< 


l»» ' 








\ 




1 


rn 




i 




^ 


i^*^ 














\ 






\ 






/ 


















t 


p 








hdoi 


oi' 


























































\ 








Aircraft quality AISI C1020 steel 
A// specimens annealed initially 
I275°F forZhr 
• As annealed 

^ Cold-reduced 8 % in thickness 
D Cold -reduced 8% annealed 
1 27 5° F for V2 hr oil-quenched 
Strain rote, 0.002 in./in./min 






? 

























































































































0.10 0.20 

Engineering strain, in. /in. 



0.30 



Fig. 5-7. Effect of a substructure of low-angle grain boundaries on the stress-strain 
curve of SAE 1020 steel. {E. R. Parker and J. Washburn, ''Impurities and Imperfec- 
tions," p. 155, American Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1955.) 

distance of shear. This means that the boundary loses dislocations as it 
moves, a fact which would be expected if dislocations are held up at 
imperfections such as foreign atoms, precipitated particles, and other 
dislocations. 

The formation of subgrains in an annealed material results in a signifi- 
cant increase in strength. Figure 5-6 shows the increase in the yield 
stress in nickel due to an increase in the density of subgrain boundaries 
produced by various prestraining and anneaUng treatments. The fact 
that the curves for pure nickel and alloyed nickel are nearly parallel 
indicates that the strengthening due to substructure is additive to that 
produced by solid-solution hardening. The effect of a substructure of 
low-angle grain boundaries on the stress-strain curve of 1020 steel is 
shown in Fig. 5-7. Note that the material that was cold-reduced and 

1 E. R. Parker and J. Washburn, Trans. AIME, vol. 194, pp. 1076-1078, 1952. 



128 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 5 

annealed, so as to produce a substructure, has a higher yield point and 
tensile strength than both the annealed material and the material which 
was only cold-reduced. Moreover, the ductility of the material contain- 
ing a substructure is almost as good as the ductility of the annealed steel. 

5-4. Solid-solution Hardening 

The introduction of solute atoms into solid solution in the solvent- 
atom lattice invariably produces an alloy which is stronger than the pure 
metal. There are two types of solid solutions. If the solute- and solvent 
atoms are roughly similar, the solute atoms will occupy lattice points in 
the crystal lattice of the solvent atoms. This is called substitutional 
solid solution. If the solute atoms are much smaller than the solvent 
atoms, they occupy interstitial positions in the solvent lattice. Carbon, 
nitrogen, oxygen, hydrogen, and boron are the elements which commonly 
form interstitial solid solutions. 

The factors which control the tendency for the formation of substitu- 
tional solid solutions have been uncovered chiefly through the work of 
Hume-Rothery. If the sizes of the two atoms, as approximately indi- 
cated by the lattice parameter, differ by less than 15 per cent, the size 
factor is favorable for solid-solution formation. When the size factor is 
greater than 15 per cent, the extent of solid solubility is usually restricted 
to less than 1 per cent. Metals which do not have a strong chemical 
affinity for each other tend to form solid solutions, while metals which are 
far apart on the electromotive series tend to form intermetallic com- 
pounds. The relative valence of the solute and solvent also is important. 
The solubility of a metal with higher valence in a solvent of lower valence 
is more extensive than for the reverse situation. For example, zinc is 
much more soluble in copper than is copper in zinc. This relative-valence 
effect can be rationalized to a certain extent in terms of the electron-atom 
ratio. ^ For certain solvent metals, the limit of solubility occurs at 
approximately the same value of electron-atom ratio for solute atoms of 
different valence. Finally, for complete solid solubility over the entire 
range of composition the solute and solvent atoms must have the same 
crystal structure. 

The acquisition of fundamental information about the causes of solid- 
solution hardening has been a slow process. Early studies'' of the increase 
in hardness resulting from solid-solution additions showed that the hard- 

^ For example, an alloy of 30 atomic per cent Zn in Cu has an electron-atom ratio 
of 1.3. (3 X 2) + (7 X Ij = 13 valence electrons per 3 + 7 = 10 atoms. 

2 A. L. Norbury, Trans. Faraday Soc, vol. 19, pp. 506-600, 1924; R. M. Brick, D. 
L. Martin, and R. P. Angier, Trans. ASM, vol. 31, pp. 675-698, 1943; J. H. Frye and 
W. Hume-Rothery, Proc. Roy. Soc. (London), vol. 181, pp. 1-14, 1942. 



)ec. 



5-4] 



Plastic Deformation of Polycrystaliinc Aggregates 129 




ness increase varies directly with the difference in the size of the sohite 
and solvent atoms, or with the change in lattice parameter resulting 
from the solute addition. However, it is apparent that size factor alone 
cannot explain solid-solution hardening. An improvement in correlation 
of data' results when the relative valence of the solute and solvent are 
considered in addition to the lattice-parameter distortion. The impor- 
tance of valence is shown in Fig. 5-8, where the yield stress of copper 
alloys of constant lattice parameter is 
plotted against the electron-atom 
ratio.'- Further results^ show that 
alloys with equal grain size, lattice 
parameter, and electron-atom ratio 
have the same initial yield stress, but 
the flow curves differ at larger strains. 

Systemic studies of the effect of 
solid-solution alloying additions on 
the flow curve in tension have been 
made for iron,* copper,^ aluminum,^ 
and nickel.^ For the case of iron the 
solid-solution-strengthened alloy is a 
power function of the alloy addition. 
Figure 5-9 shows the increase in ten- 
sile strength due to alloying additions 
in iron. For a given atomic per cent of solute the increase in strength 
varies inversely with the limit of solubility. 

The distribution of solute atoms in a solvent lattice is not usually 
completely random. There is growing evidence that solute atoms group 
preferentially at dislocations, stacking faults, low-angle boundaries, and 
grain boundaries. However, even in a perfect lattice the atoms would 
not be completely random. For a solid solution of A and B atoms, if B 
atoms tend to group themselves preferentially around other B atoms, thp 
situation is called clustering. However, if a given B atom is preferentially 
surrounded by A atoms, the solid solution exhibits short-range order. 
The tendency for clustering or short-range order increases with increasing 
solute additions. 

1 J. E. Dorn, P. Pietrokowsky, and T. E. Tietz, Trans. AIME, vol. 188, pp. 933- 
943, 1950. 

2 W. R. Hibbard, Jr., Trans. Met. Soc. AIME, vol. 212, pp. 1-5, 1958. 

3 N. G. Ainslie, R. W. Guard, and W. R. Hibbard, Trans. Met. Soc. AIME, vol. 215, 
pp. 42-48, 1959. 

^ C. E. Lacy and M. Gensamer, Trans. ASM, vol. 32, pp. 88-110, 1944. 

5 R. S. French and W. R. Hibbard, Jr., Trans. AIME, vol. 188, pp. 53-58, 1950. 

^ Dorn, Pietrokowsky, and Tietz, op. cit. 

' V. F. Zackay and T. H. Hazlett, Ada Met., vol. 1, pp. 624-628, 1953. 



1.10 1.15 1.20 

E!ectron-o!om ratio 

Fig. 5-8. Effect of electron-atom ratio 
on the yield stress of copper solid-solu- 
tion alloys. {W. R. Hibbaid, Ji., 
Trans. Met. Soc. AIME, vol. 212, p. 3, 
1958.) 



130 Metallurgical Fundamentals 



[Chap. 5 



It is likely that solid-solution hardening is not simply the result of 
internal stresses due to the local lattice disturbance from randomly 
dispersed solute atoms. Consider a dislocation line in a perfectly random 
solid-solution lattice. On the average, there will be equal numbers of 
positive and negative stress fields, due to solute atoms, acting on the 
dislocation line. The net stress will be nearly zero, and the dislocation 




0.4 0.7 

Atomic % solute 

Fig. 5-9. Increase in tensile strength of iron due to solid-solution alloy additions vs. 
atomic per cent of alloy added. (C. E. Lacy and M. Gensamer, Trans. ASM, vol. 
32, p. 88, 1944.) 



will move through the lattice almost as easily as through the lattice of a 
pure metal. 

Following the ideas of Cottrell,^ it is generally held that hardening 
from solute atoms results from the interaction of solute atoms, in the 
form of "atmospheres," with dislocations. Since the atoms in the 
region above a positive edge dislocation are compressed and below the 
slip plane are stretched, the strain energy of distortion can be reduced by 
large atoms collecting in the expanded region and small atoms collecting 
in the compressed region. Interstitial atoms collect in the expanded 

1 A. H. Cottrell, "Dislocations and Plastic Flow in Crystals," Oxford University 
Press, New York, 1953. 



Sec. 5-4] Plastic Deformation of Polycrystalline Aggregates 131 

region below the slip plane of a positive edge dislocation. Because the 
local energy is lower when a dislocation is surrounded by a solute atmos- 
phere, a higher stress is required to make the dislocation move than would 
be required if there were no interaction between the dislocation and the 
solute atoms. If the stress becomes high enough, the dislocation can be 
torn away from its atmosphere. When this happens, the dislocation is 
free to move at a lower stress. 

The best-known case of dislocation interaction wj^^h a solute-atom 
atmosphere is the existence of an upper and lower yield point in iron and 
other metals. The occurrence of a yield point in iron is known to be 
associated with interstitial solute atoms (see Sec. 5-5). The upper yield 
point corresponds to the stress required to tear dislocations away from 
their atmospheres of interstitial atoms. 

A number of types of solute-atom interaction must be considered in 
explaining solid-solution strengthening.^ Cottrell locking due to elastic 
interaction between the solute atoms and the dislocations, such as is 
described above for interstitial atoms, is certainly an important factor in 
solid-solution strengthening. In view of the valency effects observed in 
solid solutions, electrical interaction must also be considered. However, 
estimates show that electrical interaction is only about one-third to one- 
seventh as strong as elastic interaction. Suzuki- has pointed out the 
existence of a third type of interaction. Thermodynamic reasoning 
shows that the concentration of solute atoms at a stacking fault will be 
greater than the average bulk concentration. Thus, there is a "chemical 
interaction" between these regions and dislocations. While for most 
alloys this chemical interaction is weaker than the interaction force due 
to Cottrell locking, the force due to chemical interaction does not decrease 
with increasing temperature nearly so much as in the case of Cottrell 
locking. Fisher^ has pointed out that the existence of short-range order 
or clustering in an alloy will produce a strengthening effect. Slip in a 
pure metal does not change the internal energy of the lattice, because the 
configuration of atoms across the slip plane is the same after slip as before. 
The same situation would exist for a completely random solid solution, 
but in an alloy with short-range order slip will partially destroy the 

1 Theories of solid-solution strengthening are reviewed by E. R. Parker and T. H. 
Hazlett, "Relation of Properties to Microstructure," pp. 50-53, American Society for 
Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1954. A fairly mathematical discussion of the interactions 
between dislocations and solute atoms is given by A. H. Cottrell, "Relation of Proper- 
ties to Microstructure," pp. 131-162, American Society for Metals, Metals Park, 
Ohio, 1954. 

2 H. Suzuki, Sci. Repts. Research Insts. Tohoku Univ., vol. 4A, no. 5, pp. 455-463, 
1952; "Dislocations and Mechanical Properties of Crystals," p. 361, John Wiley & 
Sons, Inc., New York, 1957. 

3 J. C. Fisher, Ada Met., vol. 2, p. 9, 1954. 



132 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 5 

pattern of order across the slip plane. An internal surface of increased 
energy is produced at the slip plane, and this results in an increase in 
the stress required to produce slip. The chemical interaction of Suzuki 
would be expected to predominate over short-range order in dilute solu- 
tions, where the stacking-fault energy decreases rapidly with concentra- 
tion. In concentrated solid solutions strengthening from short-range 
order should predominate. 

In a binary alloy with long-range order each of the constituent atoms 
occupies special sites in the lattice. In effect, this results in a superlattice 
with a larger unit cell and a new crystal structure. The interaction of 
dislocations with long-range order^ results in a strengthening effect. An 
ordered crystal will contain domains within which the order is perfect, 
but which are out of step with the order in the neighboring domains. 
Since the domain boundaries are a high-energy interface, there is an 
interaction between dislocations and these antiphase boundaries. The 
stress required to produce slip varies inversely with the distance between 
domain boundaries. Because more domain boundaries are produced as 
slip continues, the rate of strain hardening is higher in the ordered condi- 
tion than in the disordered state. Ordered alloys with a fine domain size 
(approximately 50 A) are stronger than the disordered state. Ordered 
alloys with a large domain size generally have a yield stress lower than 
that of the disordered state. This arises from the fact that the disloca- 
tions in a well-ordered alloy are grouped into pairs, each pair having a 
Burgers vector twice as large as that for the disordered lattice. 

5-5. Yield-point Phenomenon 

Many metals, particularly low-carbon steel, show a localized, hetero- 
geneous type of transition from elastic to plastic deformation which 
produces a yield point in the stress-strain curve. Rather than having a 
flow curve with a gradual transition from elastic to plastic behavior, such 
as was shown in Fig. 3-1, metals with a yield point have a flow curve or, 
what is equivalent, a load-elongation diagram similar to Fig. 5-10. The 
load increases steadily with elastic strain, drops suddenly, fluctuates 
about some approximately constant value of load, and then rises with 
further strain. The load at which the sudden drop occurs is called the 
upper yield point. The constant load is called the lower yield point, and 
the elongation which occurs at constant load is called the yield-point 
elongation. The deformation occurring throughout the yield-point elon- 

1 N. Brown and M. Herman, Trans. AIME, vol. 206, pp. 1353-1354, 1954; A. H. 
Cottrell, "Relation of Properties to Microstriicture," pp. 131-162, American Society 
for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1954; N. Brown, Phil. Mag., vol. 4, pp. 693-704, 1959; 
P. A. Flinn, Trans. AIME, vol. 218, pp. 145-154, 1960. 



5-5] 



Plastic Deformation of Polycrystalline Aggregates 133 



,. Upper yield point 




Elongotion 
Fig. 5-10. Typical yield-point behavior. 



gation is heterogeneous. At the upper jdeld pomt a discrete band of 
deformed metal, often readily visible with the eye, appears at a stress 
concentration such as a fillet, and coincident with the formation of the 
band the load drops to the lower yield point. The band then propagates 
along the length of the specimen, causing the yield-point elongation. 
In the usual case several bands will 
form at several points of stress 
concentration. These bands are 
generally at approximately 45° to 
the tensile axis. They are usually 
called Luders hands, Hartmann 
lines, or stretcher strains, and this 
type of deformation is sometimes 
referred to as the Piobert effect. 
When several Liiders bands are 
formed, the flow curve during the 
yield-point elongation will be ir- 
regular, each jog corresponding 
to the formation of a new Liiders band. After the Liiders bands have 
propagated to cover the entire length of the specimen test section, the 
flow will increase with strain in the usual manner. This marks the end 
of the yield-point elongation. 

The yield-point phenomenon was found originally in low-carbon steel. 
A pronounced upper and lower yield point and a yield-point elongation of 
over 10 per cent can be obtained wdth this material under proper condi- 
tions. More recently the yield point has come to be accepted as a general 
phenomenon, since it has been observed in a number of other metals and 
alloys. In addition to iron and steel, yield points have been observed in 
polycrystalline molybdenum, titanium, and aluminum afloys and in 
single crystals of iron, cadmium, zinc, alpha and beta brass, and alumi- 
num. Usually the yield point can be associated with small amounts of 
interstitial or substitutional impurities. For example, it has been shown^ 
that almost complete removal of carbon and nitrogen from low-carbon 
steel by wet-hydrogen treatment will remove the yield point. However, 
only about 0.001 per cent of either of these elements is required for a 
reappearance of the yield point. 

A number of experimental factors affect the attainment of a sharp 
upper yield point. A sharp upper yield point is promoted by the use of 
an elastically rigid (hard) testing machine, very careful axial alignment 
of the specimen, the use of specimens free from stress concentrations, high 
rate of loading, and, frequently, testing at subambient temperatures. 
If, through careful avoidance of stress concentrations, the first Liiders 

1 J. R. Low and M. Gensamer, Trans. AIME, vol. 158, p- 207, 1944. 



134 Metallurgical Fundamentals [^hap. 5 

band can be made to form at the middle of the test specimen, the upper 
yield point can be roughly twice the lower yield point. However, it is 
more usual to obtain an upper yield point 10 to 20 per cent greater than 
the lower yield point. 

Cottrell's concept that the yield point is due to the interaction of solute 
atoms with dislocations was introduced in the previous section. Solute 
atoms diffuse to dislocations because this lowers the strain energy of the 
crystal. The dislocations are then anchored in position by an atmosphere 
of solute atoms. The original theory^ considered that solute atoms would 
segregate only to edge dislocations, because a screw dislocation ordinarily 
has no tensile component. More recently the theory has been modified 
to show that there is a strong interaction between interstitial atoms and 
screw dislocations when the lattice is nonsymmetrically deformed by the 
solute atoms so that a tensile component of stress is developed. - 

The local concentration of solute atoms near the dislocation, c, is 
related to the average concentration co by the relationship 

c = Co exp — T— (5-6) 

where U is the interaction energy. For carbon and nitrogen in iron the 
interaction energy has a value between 0.5 and 1.0 ev. As the tempera- 
ture decreases, the solute atmosphere becomes more concentrated and 
below a critical temperature the atmosphere condenses into a line of 
solute atoms. These atoms occupy a position of maximum interaction 
energy just below the center of a positive edge dislocation running parallel 
to the length of the dislocation. 

The shear stress required to tear away a dislocation from its atmosphere 
goes through a maximum when plotted against displacement. Therefore, 
a dislocation will tend to return to its atmosphere for small displacements, 
but when a certain breakaway stress has been reached, movement of 
the dislocation becomes easier with increasing distance from the atmos- 
phere. The stress at which the dislocations break away from their 
atmosphere corresponds to the upper yield point. This releases an 
avalanche of dislocations into the slip plane, and these pile up at the 
grain boundary. The stress concentration at the tip of the pile-up 
combines with the applied stress in the next grain to unlock the disloca- 
tions in that grain, and in this way a Liiders band propagates over the 
specimen. 

1 A. H. Cottrell and B. A. Bilby, Proc. Phijs. Soc. (London), vol. 62A, pp. 49-62, 
1949. 

2 A. W. Cochardt, G. Schoek, and H. Wiedersich, Acta Met., vol. 3, pp. 533-537, 
1955. 



Sec. 5-6] 



Plastic DeFormation of Polycrystalline Aggregates 135 



5-6. Strain Asing 

Strain aging is a type of behavior, usually associated with the yield- 
point phenomenon, in which the strength of a metal is increased and the 
ductility is decreased on heating at a relatively low temperature after 
cold working. This behavior can best be illustrated by considering 
Fig. 5-11, which schematically describes the effect of strain aging on the 




Strain 



Fig. 5-11. Stress-strain curves for low-carbon steel showing strain aging. Region A, 
original material strained through yield point. Region B, immediately retested after 
reaching point A'. Region C, reappearance and increase in yield point after aging at 
300°F. 

flow curve of a low-carbon steel. Region A of Fig. 5-11 shows the stress- 
strain curve for a low-carbon steel strained plastically through the yield- 
point elongation to a strain corresponding to point X. The specimen is 
then unloaded and retested without appreciable delay or any heat treat- 
ment (region B). Note that on reloading the yield point does not occur, 
since the dislocations have been torn away from the atmosphere of carbon 
and nitrogen atoms. Consider now that the specimen is strained to point 
Y and unloaded. If it is reloaded after aging for several days at room 
temperature or several hours at an aging temperature like 300°F, the 
yield point will reappear. Moreover, the yield point will be increased 
by the aging treatment from F to Z. The reappearance of the yield 
point is due to the diffusion of carbon and nitrogen atoms to the dis- 
locations during the aging period to form new atmospheres of interstitials 
anchoring the dislocations. Support for this mechanism is found in the 
fact that the activation energy for the return of the yield point on aging 
is in good agreement with the activation energy for the diffusion of carbon 
in alpha iron. 



136 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 5 

Nitrogen plaj^s a more important role in the strain aging of iron than 
carbon because it has a higher solubihty and diffusion coefficient and 
produces less complete precipitation during slow cooling. From a 
practical standpoint it is important to eliminate strain aging in deep- 
drawing steel because the reappearance of the yield point can lead to 
difficulties with surface markings or "stretcher strains" due to the local- 
ized heterogeneous deformation. To control strain aging, it is usually 
desirable to lower the amount of carbon and nitrogen in solution by 
adding elements which will take part of the interstitials out of solution 
in the form of stable carbides or nitrides. Aluminum, vanadium, 
titanium, columbium, and boron have been added for this purpose. 
While a certain amount of control over strain aging can be achieved, 
there is no commercial low-carbon steel which is completely non-strain 
aging. The usual industrial solution to this problem is to deform the 
metal to point X by roller leveling or a skin-pass rolling operation and use 
it immediately before it can age. 

Just as the existence of a yield point has become recognized as a general 
metallurgical phenomenon, so the existence of strain aging has come to 
be recognized in metals other than low-carbon steel. In addition to the 
return of the yield point and an increase in the yield point after aging, 
it has been suggested^ that a serrated flow curve and a minimum in the 
variation of strain-rate sensitivity with temperature are characteristics 
of strain aging. The strain-rate sensitivity is the change in stress required 
to produce a certain change in strain rate at constant temperature (see 
Chap. 9). The occurrence of serrations in the stress-strain curve is 
known as discontinuous, or repeated, yielding. It is also called the 
Portevin-Le Chdtelier effect. This phenomenon is due to successive 
yielding and aging while the specimen is being tested. This results from 
the fact that in the range of temperature in which it occurs the time 
required for the diffusion of solute atoms to dislocations is much less 
than the time required for an ordinary tension test. Discontinuous 
yielding is observed in aluminum-3 per cent magnesium alloys, duralumin, 
alpha brass, and plain-carbon steel. 

For plain-carbon steel discontinuous yielding occurs in the temperature 
region of 450 to 700°F. This temperature region is known as the blue 
brittle region because steel heated in this temperature region shows a 
decreased tensile ductility and decreased notched-impact resistance. 
This temperature range is also the region in which steels show a minimum 
in strain-rate sensitivity and a maximum in the rate of strain aging. All 
these facts point to the realization that blue brittleness is not a separate 
phenomenon but is just an accelerated strain aging. 

The phenomenon of strain aging should be distinguished from a process 

» J. D. Lubahn, Trans. ASM, vol. 44, pp. 643-666, 1952. 



Sec. 5-7] Plastic Deformation of Polycrystalline Aggregates 137 

known as quench aging, which occurs in low-carbon steels. Quench 
aging is a type of true precipitation hardening that occurs on quenching 
from the temperature of maximum solubility of carbon and nitrogen in 
ferrite. Subsequent aging at room temperature, or somewhat above, 
produces an increase in hardness and yield stress, as in the age hardening 
of aluminum alloys. Plastic deformation is not necessary to produce 
quench aging. 

5-7. Strengthening from Second-phase Particles 

Only a relatively small number of alloy systems permit extensive solid 
solubility between two or more elements, and only a relatively small 
hardening effect can be produced in most alloy systems by solid-solution 
additions. Therefore, most commercial alloys contain a heterogeneous 
microstructure consisting of two or more metallurgical phases. A num- 
ber of different conditions may be encountered.^ The two phases may 
be ductile and present in the microstructure in relatively massive form, 
as in alpha-beta brass. On the other hand, the structure may consist 
of a hard, brittle phase in a ductile matrix, as in spheroidized steel or 
WC particles in a cobalt matrix in a cemented carbide cutting tool. 

The strengthening produced by second-phase particles is usually addi- 
tive to the solid-solution strengthening produced in the matrix. For 
two-phase alloys produced by equilibrium methods, the existence of a 
second phase ensures maximum solid-solution hardening because its 
presence resulted from supersaturation of the continuous phase. More- 
over, the presence of second-phase particles in the continuous matrix 
phase results in localized internal stresses which modify the plastic 
properties of the continuous phase. Many factors must be considered 
for a complete understanding of strengthening from second-phase par- 
ticles. These factors include the size, shape, number, and distribution 
of the second-phase particles, the strength, ductility, and strain-hardening 
behavior of the matrix and second phase, the crystallographic fit between 
the phases, and the interfacial energy and interfacial bonding between 
the phases. It is almost impossible to vary these factors independently 
in experiments, and it is very difficult to measure many of these quantities 
with any degree of precision. Therefore, our existing knowledge of the 
effect of second phases on mechanical properties is mainly empirical and 
incomplete. 

In a multiphase alloy, each phase contributes certain things to the 
over-all properties of the aggregate. If the contributions from each 

' A review of the effect of second-phase particles on mechanical properties has been 
given by J. E. Dorn and C. D. Starr, "Relation of Properties to Microstructure," 
pp. 71-94, American Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1954. 



138 Metallurgical Fundamentals 



[Chap. 5 



phase are independent, then the properties of the multiphase alloy will 
be a weighted average of the properties of the individual phases. For 
example, the density of a two-phase alloy will be equal to the sum of the 
volimie fraction of each phase times its density. However, for the 
structure-sensitive mechanical properties the properties of the aggregate 
are generally influenced by interaction between the two phases. Two 
simple hypotheses may be used to calculate the properties of a two-phase 
alloy from the properties of the individual phases. It it is assumed that 





Fig. 5-12. Estimate of flow stress of two-phase alloy, (a) Equal strain; (b) equal 
stress. (From J. E. Dorn and C. D. Starr, "Relation of Properties to Microstrudure," 
pp. 77-78, American Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1954.) 



the strain in each phase is equal, the average stress in the alloy for a 
given strain will increase linearly with the volume fraction of the strong 
phase. 

O-avg = /lO-l + /2Cr2 (5-7) 

The volume fraction of phase 1 is/i, and/i + /a = 1. Figure 5-12a shows 
the calculation of the flow curve for an alloy with 0.5 volume fraction of 
phase 2 on the basis of the equal-strain hypothesis. An alternative 
hypothesis is to assume that the two phases are subjected to equal stresses. 
The average strain in the alloy at a given stress is then given by 



= /lei + fo^i 



(5-8) 



Figure 5-126 shows the flow curve for a 0.5-volume-fraction alloy on the 
basis of the equal-stress hypothesis. Both these hypotheses are simple 
approximations, and the strengths of alloys containing two ductile phases 
usually lie somewhere between the values predicted by the two models. 
The deformation of an alloy consisting of two ductile phases depends 
upon the total deformation and the volume fractions of the phases. 
Slip will occur first in the weaker phase, and if very little of the stronger 



Sec. 5-7] Plastic Deformation of Polycrystalline Aggregates 139 

phase is present, most of the deformation will continue in the softer phase. 
At large deformations flow of the matrix will occur around the particles 
of the harder phase. If the volume fraction of the harder phase is less 
than about 0.3, the soft phase deforms more than the hard phase for 
reductions of up to 60 per cent. At greater reductions the two phases 
deform more uniformly. When the phases are present in about equal 
amounts, they deform to about the same extent.^ 

The mechanical properties of an alloy consisting of a ductile phase and 
a hard brittle phase will depend on how the brittle phase is distributed in 
the microstructure. If the brittle phase is present as a grain-boundary 
envelope, as in oxygen-free copper-bismuth alloys or hypereutectoid 
steel, the alloy is brittle. If the brittle phase is in the form of discon- 
tinuous particles at grain boundaries, as when oxygen is added to copper- 
bismuth alloys or with internally oxidized copper and nickel, the brittle- 
ness of the alloy is reduced somewhat. When the brittle phase is present 
as a fine dispersion uniformly distributed throughout the softer matrix, 
a condition of optimum strength and ductility is obtained. This is the 
situation in heat-treated steel with a tempered martensitic structure. 

The strengthening produced by a finely dispersed insoluble second 
phase in a metallic matrix is known as dispersion hardening. A very 
similar strengthening phenomenon, precipitation hardening, or age harden- 
ing, is produced by solution treating and quenching an alloy in which a 
second phase is in solid solution at the elevated temperature but precipi- 
tates upon quenching and aging at a lower temperature. The age- 
hardening aluminum alloys and copper-beryllium alloys are common 
examples. For precipitation hardening to occur, the second phase must 
be soluble at an elevated temperature but must exhibit decreasing 
solubility with decreasing temperature. By contrast, the second phase 
in dispersion-hardening systems has very little solubility in the matrix, 
even at elevated temperatures. Usually there is atomic matching, or 
coherency, between the lattices of the precipitate and the matrix, while in 
dispersion-hardened systems there generally is no coherency between the 
second-phase particles and the matrix. The requirement of a decreasing 
solubility with temperature places a limitation on the number of useful 
precipitation-hardening alloy systems. On the other hand, it is at least 
theoretically possible to produce an almost infinite number of dispersion- 
hardened systems by mixing finely divided metallic powders and second- 
phase particles (oxides, carbides, nitrides, borides, etc.) and consolidating 
them by powder metallurgy techniques. Advantage has been taken of 
this method to produce dispersion-hardened systems which are thermally 
stable at very high temperatures. Because of the finely dispersed second- 
phase particles these alloys are much more resistant to recrystallization 

' L. M. Clarebrough, Australian J. Sci. Repts., vol. 3, pp. 72-90, 1950. 




140 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 5 

and grain growth than single-phase alloys. Because there is very little 
solubility of the second-phase constituent in the matrix, the particles 
resist growth or overaging to a much greater extent than the second- 
phase particles in a precipitation-hardening system. 

The formation of a coherent precipitate in a precipitation-hardening 
system, such as Al-Cu, occurs in a number of steps. After quenching 
from solid solution the alloy contains regions of solute segregation, or 
clustering. Guiner and Preston first detected this local clustering with 
special X-ray techniques, and therefore this structure is known as a GP 
zone. The clustering may produce local strain, so that the hardness of 

GP[1] is higher than for the solid 

solution. With additional aging 

Loss of coherency the hardness is increased further 

by the ordering of larger clumps of 

Equilibrium copper atoms on the {100} planes 

precipitate Qf ^j^g matrix. This structure is 

known as GP[2], or Q" . Next, 

„ . . definite precipitate platelets of 

Aging time -^ 

(Particle size ^) CUAI2, or 0, which are coherent 

r. r 4o Tr • 4^- 4^ • ij 4^ -it, with the matrix, form on the {100} 

rig. 5-1 3. Variation 01 yield stress with ' ' ' 

aging time (schematic). planes of the matrix. The co- 

herent precipitate produces an in- 
creased strain field in the matrix and a further increase in hardness. 
With still further aging the equilibrium phase CUAI2, or 0, is formed from 
the transition lattice Q' . These particles are no longer coherent with the 
matrix, and therefore the hardness is low^er than at the stage when 
coherent Q' was present. For most precipitation-hardening alloys the 
resolution with the light microscope of the first precipitate occurs after 
the particles are no longer coherent with the matrix. Continued aging 
beyond this stage produces particle growth and further decrease in hard- 
ness. Figure 5-13 illustrates the way in which strength varies with aging 
time or particle size. The sequence of events in the Al-Cu system is 
particularly complicated. Although other precipitation-hardening sys- 
tems may not have so many stages, it is quite common for a coherent 
precipitate to form and then lose coherency when the particle grows to a 
critical size. 

Metallographic observations of deformation mechanisms in precipita- 
tion-hardening systems require very careful techniques.^ In the as- 
quenched condition slip bands are broad and widely spaced. As aging 
continues, the slip bands become finer and more closely spaced. As 
GP[2] zones form and the alloy proceeds toward peak hardness, fewer 
and fewer slip bands can be observed with the electron microscope. 

1 (J. Thomas and J. Nutting, J. Insl. Melals, vol. 86, pp. 7-14, 1957-1958; R. B. 
Nicholson, G. Thomas, and J. Nutting, Acta Met., vol. 8, pp. 172-176, 1960. 



Sec. 5-7] Plastic Deformation of Polycrystalline Aggregates 141 

When the alloy begins to overage and coherency breaks down, the slip 
lines once more can be observed. Electron-microscope studies have 
shown that dislocation motion is impeded by fully and partially coherent 
precipitates, but eventually the dislocations shear Ihrouj^h the particles. 
For a noncoherent precipitate the slip lines do not cut through the 
particles. Instead, the dislocation lines bend to avoid the particles, 
probably by a process of cross slip.^ 

The degree of strengthening resulting from second-phase dispersions 
depends upon the distribution of particles in the soft matrix. In addi- 
tion to shape, the second-phase dispersion can be described by specifying 
the volume fraction, average particle diameter, and mean interparticle 
spacing. These factors are all interrelated so that one factor cannot be 
changed without affecting the others (see Prob. 5-5). For example, for 
a given volume fraction of second phase, reducing the particle size 
decreases the average distance between particles. For a given size 
particle, the distance between particles decreases with an increase in 
the volume fraction of second phase. Quantitative relationships between 
strength and the geometrical factors have not been determined to any 
extent for real alloys. 

However, the qualitative aspects of dispersion hardening can be con- 
sidered, the common situation of carbide particles in ferrite being used as 
an example. In general, the hardness and strength increase with carbon 
content or volume fraction of the carbide phase. Further, for a given 
carbon content, the strength will be higher for a fine carbide spacing 
than with a coarse interparticle spacing. Particle shape has a less impor- 
tant effect on tensile properties, although for a given volume fraction of 
carbides lamellar carbides will be stronger than spheroidized carbides. 
Particle shape is of greater importance in notched impact, where a 
spheroidized structure will be tougher than a lamellar structure. 

Detailed quantitative metallography on steels heat-treated to provide 
different interparticle spacings has shown the relationship between 
strength and structure. Gensamer and coworkers- found that the flow 
stress, at a true strain of 0.2, was inversely proportional to the logarithm 
of the mean interparticle spacing (mean free ferrite path) for pearlite 
and spheroidite structures (Fig. 5-14). Confirmation of this relation- 
ship has been found for tempered martensitic structures' and overaged 
Al-Cu alloys.'' Figure 5-15 illustrates the marked strengthening produced 
by CuAl2 particles in an Al-Cu alloy. The figure shows the variation of 

1 P. B. Hirsch, /. Inst. Metals, vol. 86, pp. 13-14, 1957-58. 

2 M. Gensamer, E. B. Pearsall, W. S. Pellini, and J. R. Low, Jr., Trans. ASM, 
vol. 30, pp. 983-1020, 1942. 

3 A. M. Turkalo and J. R. Low, Jr., Trans. Met. Soc. AIMS, vol. 212, pp. 750-758, 
1958. 

^C. D. Starr, R. B. Shaw, and J. E. Dorn, Trans. ASM, vol. 46, pp. 1075-1088, 
1954. 



142 Metallurgical Fundamentals 



[Chap. 5 



200 


\- 


• 












\ 


• • 


% 








( 








• 










160 




^ 


yo 














^. 
















oN 


o 








120 






o 
o 


\ 


% 












o 


\^A 


A 
A 




80 








o 


° O^ 


\, 














\ 


\, 


40 






<-niH np 


nrlitp 






\ 


° Spheroidife 










^ Hypoeutecfoid pearl ne 









1 1 1 1 







3.0 



3.4 3.8 42 4.6 5.0 5.4 
log of mean ferrite path, angstroms 



5.8 



Fig. 5-14. Flow stress vs. logarithm of mean free ferrite path in steels with pearlitic 
and spheroidal distribution of carbides. (M. Gensamer, E. B. Pearsall, W. S. Pelhni, 
and J. R. Low, Trans. ASM, vol. 30, p. 1003, 1942.) 




300 400 500 
Temperature, °K 



700 



Fig. 5-15. Variation of flow stress with temperature for AI-Cu alloy containing 5 
volume per cent fine and coarse second-phase particles. (C D. Starr, R. B. Shaw, 
and J. E. Darn, Trans. ASM, vol. 46, p. 1085, 1954.) 



>ec. 



5-7] 



Plastic Deformation of Polycrystalline Aggresates 143 



flow stress witk temperature for an alloy containing 5 volume per cent 
of CuAU in three conditions. The top curve i»s for a fine CuAU disper- 
sion, the middle curve for a coarse dispersion, and the bottom curve is for 
an alloy without dispersed particles which contains the same amount of 
copper in solid solution as the top two alloys. 

Table 5-2 gives the variation of proportional limit and tensile strength 

Table 5-2 

Variation of Tensile Properties with Volume Fraction 

OF Second Phase for Co-WC Alloys! 



Volume 


Mean 


Proportional 


Tensile 


fraction 


interparticle 


limit, 


strength, 


of WC 


path, n 


psi X 10-3 


psi X 10-3 


0.00 






103 


0.10 


16.8 


9 


102 


0.35 


3.4 


21 


165 


0.50 


1.7 


40 


173 


0.63 


1.0 


74 


193 


0.78 


0.4 


85 


124 


0.90 


0.2 




95 



t C. Nishimatsu and J. Gurland, Trans. ASM, vol. 52, pp. 469-484, 1960. 

with composition and mean interparticle spacing for a series of Co-WC 
alloys. These alloys were prepared by powder metallurgy and consisted 
of uniform dispersions of 2-fi WC particles in a cobalt matrix. The rapid 
increase in proportional limit with increasing volume fraction of second 
phase shows the effect of decreasing interparticle spacing in raising the 
flow stress of the ductile matrix. Tensile strength is much less sensitive. 
However, when the microstructure is nearly all tungsten carbide, the 
material fails in a brittle manner by fracture through the carbides. Frac- 
ture initiates in the brittle carbide phase but does not propagate readily 
through the surrounding cobalt envelope. However, with a high volume 
fraction of carbide many WC particles are touching, and the brittle frac- 
ture can propagate readily from carbide to carbide. This is reflected in 
a decrease in tensile strength. 

Dislocation models of dispersion hardening and precipitation harden- 
ing consider that second-phase particles act as obstacles to the movement 
of dislocations. In making the first analysis of this problem, Mott and 
Nabarro^ considered that a dislocation line would take on a smoothly 
curved form when moving through the lattice instead of moving as a 
straight line. Since different sections of the dislocation line can move 
partly independently of each other, the random stress fields in the matrix 
which intc/act with the dislocation line do not cancel out. Because a 

1 N. F. IMott and F. R,. N. Nabarro, Proc. Phys. Soc. {London), vol. 52, p. 86, 1940. 



144 



Metallurgical Fundamentals 



[Chap. 5 



dislocation possesses line tension, which tends to keep it at its shortest 
length, any bending or increase in length of a dislocation line requires the 
expenditure of extra energy. The smallest radius of curvature to which a 
dislocation line can be bent under the influence of an internal stress field 
Ti is given by 

Gb 



R = 



2Ti 



(5-9) 



Orowan' suggested that the yield stress of an alloy containing a disper- 
sion of fine particles is determined by the shear stress required to force a 
dislocation line between two particles separated by a distance A. In 



'^ 



Ci>< ® 



Ci> c ® 



(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) 

Fig. 5-16. Schematic drawing of stages in passage of a dislocation between widely 
separated obstacles — based on Orowan's mechanism of dispersion hardening. 

Fig. 5-16, stage 1 shows a straight dislocation line approaching two 
particles separated by a distance A. At stage 2 the line is beginning to 
bend, and at stage 3 it has reached the critical stage. Since A equals 
twice the critical radius of curvature, from Eq. (5-9) the stress needed to 
force the dislocation line between the obstacles is given by 



Gb 
A 



(5-10) 



At stage 4 the dislocation has passed between the obstacles, leaving them 
encircled by small loops of dislocations. Every dislocation gliding over 
the slip plane adds one loop around the obstacle. These dislocation 
loops exert a back stress which must be overcome by dislocations moving 
on the slip plane. This requires an increase in shear stress to continue 
deformation. Thus, the presence of dispersed particles leads to increased 
strain hardening during the period when loops are building up around the 
particles. This continues until the shear stress developed by the loops is 
high enough to shear the particles or the surrounding matrix. According 
to the theory developed by Fisher, Hart, and Pry,^ the increase in shear 

^ E. Orowan, discussion in "Symposium on Internal Stresses," p. 451, Institute of 
Metals, London, 1947. 

2 J. C. Fisher, E. W. Hart, and R. H. Pry, Ada Met., vol. 1, p. 33G, 1953. 



Sec. 5-8] Plastic DeFormation of Polycrystalline Aggregates 145 

stress due to fine particles, ta, is related to the volume fraction of the sec- 
ond phase, /, and the shear strength of a dislocation-free matrix, Tc, by 
the relationship 

TH = 3rJ" (5-11) 

where n is between 1 and 1 .5. 

Orowan's relationship between strength and particle spacing has been 
experimentally confirmed for most systems containing overaged or non- 
coherent particles. The Fisher, Hart, and Pry equation for the contribu- 
tion to strain hardening from dispersed particles also appears to be 
approximately verified. According to Eq. (5-10) the shear strength of a 
dispersion-hardened alloy will have a maximum value when A has a value 
that makes it e(}ually likely that dislocations will pass between the 
particles or cut through them. As the distance between particles is 
increased, the critical radius of curvature is increased and the stress 
required to bend the dislocation line is decreased. When the distance 
between particles is decreased, the dislocation line becomes more rigid. 
It is difficult for the dislocation line to bend sharply enough to pass 
between the particles, and so it shears through them instead. There are 
indications that in the region of small particle spacing the yield stress is a 
direct function of the radius of the particles. 

5-8. Hardening Due to Point Defects 

Vacancies and interstitials are produced by the bombardment of a 
metal with high-energy nuclear particles. The bombardment of the 
lattice with fast neutrons having energies up to 2 million ev knocks atoms 
into interstitial positions in the lattice, and vacancies are left behind. 
Neutron irradiation increases the hardness and yield strength of most 
metals. In copper single crystals a dose of 10'^ neutrons per scjuare 
centimenter increases the yield strength by a factor of 10 and changes 
the deformation characteristics so that they are similar to alpha brass.' 
In metals which show a ductile-to-brittle transition, such as steel, pro- 
longed neutron irradiation can appreciably raise the transition tempera- 
ture. The structural changes producing radiation hardening and radia- 
tion damage are difficult to study in detail because at least two point 
defects are acting simultaneously. Interstitials are even more mobile 
than vacancies, so that quite low temperatures are required to prevent 
them from interacting with other lattice defects. 

A situation in which the only point defects are vacancios can be 
produced by rapidly quenching a pure metal (so that there can be no 

'A. H. Cottrell, "Vacancies and Other Point Defects in Metals and Alloys," 
pp. 1-39, Institute of Metals, London, 1958. 



146 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 5 

precipitation of a second phase) from a temperature near its melting 
point. At room temperature or below the metal contains a super- 
saturated solution of most of the vacancies that existed in equilibrium at 
the higher temperature. Vacancy concentrations of up to about 10~^ 
can be achieved by quenching. Soft metals, such as aluminum, copper, 
and zinc, can be hardened by introducing a randomly distributed popula- 
tion of vacancies in this way. Quench hardening results in an increase 
in yield stress and a decrease in the rate of strain hardening, just as is 
produced by radiation hardening. Therefore, a dispersion of point 
defects can produce hardening, by analogy with the hardening produced 
by a dispersion of second-phase particles. The mechanism by which this 
occurs is not yet established. There is some evidence that at this stage 
the single vacancies have migrated into clusters. A greater quench 
hardening results if an aging treatment is interposed between the quench 
and the measurement of the tensile properties. It is likely that the aging 
permits the vacancies to migrate to dislocations, where they interact and 
impede the movement of dislocations (see Sec. 6-12). Much remains to 
be learned about the interaction of point defects with each other and with 
line defects and how these interactions affect the mechanical properties. 
Plastic deformation produces point defects, chiefly vacancies. These 
point defects are created by the intersection of dislocations, and therefore, 
a discussion of this topic will be deferred until Chap. 6. Vacancy forma- 
tion appears to be particularly important in the fatigue of metals, and it 
will be considered from this standopint in Chap. 12. At elevated tem- 
peratures vacancies become very important in controlling diffusion and in 
making possible dislocation climb. Thus, vacancies are important in the 
creep of metals, and they will be considered in greater detail in Chap. 13. 

5-9. Strain Hardening and Cold Work 

In Chap. 4 strain hardening was attributed to the interaction of dis- 
locations with other dislocations and with other barriers to their motion 
through the lattice. So long as slip takes place on only a single set of 
parallel planes, as with single crystals of hep metals, only a small amount 
of strain hardening occurs. However, even with single crystals extensive 
easy glide is not a general phenomenon, and with polycrystalline speci- 
mens it is not observed. Because of the mutual interference of adjacent 
grains in a polycrystalline specimen multiple slip occurs readily, and there 
is appreciable strain hardening. Plastic deformation which is carried out 
in a temperature region and over a time interval such that the strain 
hardening is not relieved is called cold work. 

Plastic deformation produces an increase in the number of dislocations, 



>ec. 



5-9] 



Plastic Deformation of Polycrystallinc Asgregates 147 



which by virtue of their interaction results in a higher state of internal 
stress. An annealed metal contains about 10® to 10^ dislocations per 
square centimeter, while a severely plastically deformed metal contains 
about 10^^ dislocations per square centimeter. Strain hardening or cold 
work can be readily detected by X-ray diffraction, although detailed 
analysis of the X-ray patterns in terms of the structure of the cold-worked 
state is not usually possible. In Laue patterns cold work produces a 
blurring, or asterism, of the spots. For Debye-Scherrer patterns the lines 
are broadened by cold work. X-ray 



Regions of relatively 
perfect lottice- 




Groin boundary 

Distorted 
regions of 
high dislocation 
density 



Fig. 5-17. Model of the structure of cold- 
worked metal (schematic). 



line broadening can be due to both 
a decrease in size of the diffraction 
unit, as would occur if the grains 
were fragmented by cold work, and 
an increase in lattice strain due 
to dislocation interaction. Tech- 
niques for analyzing the entire 
peak profile of X-ray lines and 
separating out the contribution 
due to lattice strain and particle 
size have been developed.^ It is 
likely that improvements in this 
method and more widespread application of the technique will result in 
better understanding of the structure of cold-worked metal. 

A fairly reliable model of the structure of cold-worked metal has devel- 
oped from microbeam X-ray studies^ and from electron microscopy of 
thin films. Figure 5-17 is a schematic drawing of the cold-worked struc- 
ture that occurs within a single grain. It is a cell-like structure consisting 
of relatively perfect regions of the lattice which are connected with each 
other by boundaries of dislocation networks. According to this model the 
dislocation density varies drastically from a high value in the distorted 
boundaries to a low value in the relatively perfect regions. The study of 
the dislocation structure of cold-worked metal with thin-film electron 
microscopy is a very active area of research which should provide valuable 
information about how these networks vary with composition, deforma- 
tion, and temperature. 

Most of the energy expended in deforming a metal by cold working is 
converted into heat. However, roughly about 10 per cent of the expended 

IB. E. Warren and B. L. Averbach, J. Appl. Phijs., vol. 21, p. 595, 1950; B. E. 
Warren and B. L. Averbach, "Modern Research Techniques in Physical Metallvirgy," 
American Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1953; B. E. Warren, "Progress in 
Metal Physics," vol. 8, pp. 147-202, Pergamon Press, Ltd., London, 1959. 

2 P. Gay, P. B. Hirsch, and A. Kelly, Acta Cryst., vol. 7, p. 41, 1954. 



148 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 5 

energy is stored in the lattice as an increase in internal energy. Reported 
values of stored energy^ range from about 0.01 to 1.0 cal/g of metal. The 
magnitude of the stored energy increases with the melting point of the 
metal and with solute additions. For a given metal the amount of stored 
energy depends on the type of deformation process, e.g., wire drawing vs. 
tension. The stored energy increases with strain up to a limiting value 
corresponding to saturation. It increases with, decreasing temperature of 
deformation. Very careful calorimeter measurements are required to 
measure the small amounts of energy stored by cold working. 

The major part of the stored energy is due to the generation and inter- 
action of dislocations during cold working. Vacancies account for part 
of the stored energy for metals deformed at very low temperature. How- 
ever, vacancies are so much more mobile than dislocations that they 
readily escape from most metals deformed at room temperature. Stack- 
ing faults and twin faults are probably responsible for a small fraction of 
the stored energy. A reduction in short-range order during the deforma- 
tion of solid solutions may also contribute to stored energy. Elastic 
strain energy accounts for only a minor part of the measured stored 
energy. 

Strain hardening or cold working is an important industrial process that 
is used to harden metals or alloys that do not respond to heat treatment. 

The rate of strain hardening can be 
gaged from the slope of the flow 
curve. In mathematical terms, 
the rate of strain hardening can be 
expressed by the strain-hardening 
coefficient n in Eq. (3-1). Gener- 
ally, the rate of strain hardening 
is lower for hep metals than for 
cubic metals. Increasing tempera- 
ture also lowers the rate of strain 
hardening. For alloys strength- 
ened by solid-solution additions 

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 ,, . r . • i i • 

Reduction by cold work, % the rate ot straui hardenmg may 

Fig. 5-18. Variation of tensile properties ^e either increased or decreased 
with amount of cold work. compared with the behavior for the 

pure metal. However, the final 
strength of a cold-worked solid-solution alloy is almost always greater 
than that of the pure metal cold-worked to the same extent. 

Figure 5-18 shows the typical variation of strength and ductility 

' For a comprehensive review of the stored energy of cold work see A. L. Titchener 
and M. B. Bever, "Progress in Metal Physics," vol. 7, pp. 247-338, Pergamon Press, 
Ltd., London, 1958. 




5-10] 



Plastic Deformation of Polycrystallinc Aggregates 149 



parameters with increasing amount of cold work. Since in most cold- 
working processes one or two dimensions of the metal are reduced at the 
expense of an increase in the other dimensions, cold work produces 
elongation of the grains in the principal direction of working. Severe 
deformation produces a reorientation of the grains into a preferred 
orientation (Sec. 5-11). In addition to the changes in tensile properties 
shown in Fig. 5-18, cold working produces changes in other physical prop- 
erties. There is usually a small decrease in density of the order of a few 
tenths of a per cent, an appreciable decrease in electrical conductivity due 
to an increased number of scattering centers, and a small increase in the 
thermal coefficient of expansion. Because of the increased internal energy 
of the cold-worked state chemical reactivity is increased. This leads to a 
general decrease in corrosion resistance and in certain alloys introduces 
the possibility of stress-corrosion cracking. 



5-10. Bauschinger Effect 

In an earlier discussion of the strain hardening of single crystals it was 
shown that generally a lower stress is required to reverse the direction of 
slip on a certain slip plane than to 
continue slip in the original direction. 
The directionality of strain hardening 
is called the Bauschinger effect. Fig- 
ure 5-19 is an example of the type 
of stress-strain curve that is obtained 
when the Bauschinger effect is 
considered. 

The initial yield stress of the ma- 
terial in tension is A. If the same 
ductile material were tested in com- 
pression, the yield strength would be 
approximately the same, point B on 
the dashed curve. Now, consider 
that a new specimen is loaded in 
tension past the tensile yield stress to 
C along the path OAC. If the speci- 
men is then unloaded, it will follow the 
path CD, small elastic-hysteresis effects being neglected. If now a 
compressive stress is applied, plastic flow will begin at the stress corre- 
sponding to point E, which is appreciably lower than the original compres- 
sive yield stress of the material. While the yield stress in tension was 
increased by strain hardening from A to C, the yield stress in compression 
was decreased. This is the Bauschinger effect. The phenomenon is 




Fig. 5-1 9. Bauschinger effect and hys- 
teresis loop. 



150 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 5 

reversible, for had the specimen originally been stressed plastically in 
compression, the yield stress in tension would have been decreased. 
One way of describing the amount of Bauschinger effect is by the Bau- 
schinger strain 13 (Fig. 5-19). This is the difference in strain between the 
tension and compression curves at a given stress. 

If the loading cycle in Fig. 5-19 is completed by loading further in 
compression to point F, then unloading, and reloading in tension, a 
mechanical-hysteresis loop is obtained. The area under the loop will 
depend upon the initial overstrain beyond the yield stress and the number 
of times the cycle is repeated. If the cycle is repeated many times, failure 
by fatigue is likely to occur. 

Orowan^ has pointed out that, if the Bauschinger effect is due solely to 
the effect of back stresses, the flow curve after reversal of strain ought 
always to be softer than the flow curve for the original direction of strain. 
However, not all metals show a permanent softening after strain reversal, 
and those which do show only a small effect. Therefore, Orowan con- 
siders that the Bauschinger effect can be explained by the same mecha- 
nism which he proposed for dispersion hardening (Sec. 5-7). Obstacles 
to dislocation motion are considered to be other dislocations, inclusions, 
precipitate particles, etc. The stress required to move a dislocation 
through these obstacles is given approximately by Eq. (5-10). For a 
given shear stress a dislocation line will move over the slip plane until it 
meets a row of obstacles that are strong enough to resist shearing and 
close enough to resist the dislocation loop from squeezing between them. 
Now, when the load is removed, the dislocation line will not move appreci- 
ably unless there are very high back stresses. However, when the direc- 
tion of loading is reversed, the dislocation line can move an appreciable 
distance at a low shear stress because the obstacles to the rear of the dis- 
location are not likely to be so strong and closely packed as those imme- 
diately in front of the dislocation. As the dislocation line moves, it 
encounters, on the average, stronger and closer obstacles, so that the 
shear stress continuously increases with strain. This is in agreement 
with the type of flow curve usually observed for the Bauschinger effect. 

5-11. Preferred Orientation 

A metal which has undergone a severe amount of deformation, as in 
rolling or wire drawing, will develop a preferred orientation, or texture, in 
which certain crystallographic planes tend to orient themselves in a pre- 
ferred manner with respect to the direction of maximum strain. The 
tendency for the slip planes in a single crystal to rotate parallel to the axis 

1 E. Orowan, Causes and Effects of Internal Stresses, in "Internal Stresses and 
Fatigue in Metals," Elsevier Publishing Company, New York, 1959. 



Sec. 5-11] Plastic Deformation of Polycrystalline Aggregates 151 

of principal strain was considered in the previous chapter. The same 
situation exists in a polycrystalline aggregate, but the complex inter- 
actions between the multiple slip systems makes analysis of the poly- 
crystalline situation much more difficult. Since the individual grains in 
a polycrystalline aggregate cannot rotate freely, lattice bending and 
fragmentation will occur. 

Preferred orientations are determined by X-ray methods. The X-ray 
pattern of a fine-grained randomly oriented metal will show rings corre- 
sponding to different planes where the angles satisfy the condition for 
Bragg reflections. If the grains are randomly oriented, the intensity of 
the rings will be uniform for all angles, but if a preferred orientation 
exists, the rings will be broken up into short arcs, or spots. The dense 
areas of the X-ray photograph indicate the orientation of the poles of the 
planes corresponding to the diffraction ring in question. The orientation 
of the grains of a particular crystallographic orientation with respect to 
the principal directions of working is best shown by means of a pole 
figure. For a description of the methods of determining pole figures and 
a compilation of pole figures describing the deformation textures in many 
metals, the reader is referred to Barrett.^ The current use of Geiger- 
counter X-ray diffractometer techniques'- has made it possible to deter- 
mine pole figures with greater accuracy and less labor than with older 
film methods. 

A preferred orientation can be detected with X rays after about a 20 to 
30 per cent reduction in cross-sectional area by cold working. At this 
stage of reduction there is appreciable scatter in the orientation of indi- 
vidual crystals about the ideal orientation. The scatter decreases with 
increasing reduction, until at about 80 to 90 per cent reduction the pre- 
ferred orientation is essentially complete. The type of preferred orienta- 
tion, or deformation texture, which is developed depends primarily on 
the number and type of slip systems available and on the principal 
strains. Other factors which may be important are the temperature of 
deformation and the type of texture present prior to deformation. 

The simplest deformation texture is produced by the drawing or rolling 
of a wire or rod. This is often referred to as a fiber texture because of its 
similarity to the arrangement in naturally fibrous materials. It is 
important to note that a distinction should be made between the crystal- 
lographic fibering produced by crystallographic reorientation of the grains 
during deformation and mechanical fibering, which is brought about by 
the alignment of inclusions, cavities, and second-phase constituents in the 

1 C. S. Barrett, "Structure of Metals," 2d ed., chap. 9, McGraw-Hill Book Com- 
pany, Inc., New York, 1952. 

2 A. H. Geisler, "Modern Research Techniques in Physical Metallurgy," American 
Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1953. 



152 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 5 

main direction of mechanical working. Mechanical and crystallographic 
fibering are important factors in producing directional mechanical 
properties of plastically worked metal shapes such as sheet and rods. 
This will be discussed further in Chap. 9. 

In an ideal wire texture a definite crystallographic direction lies 
parallel to the wire axis, and the texture is symmetrical around the wire or 
fiber axis. Several types of deviations from the ideal texture are observed. 
In face-centered cubic metals a double fiber texture is usually observed. 
The grains have either (111) or (100) parallel to the wire axis and have 
random orientations around the axis. ^ Body-centered cubic metals have a 
simple (1 10) wire texture. The wire texture in hep metals is not so simple. 
For moderate amounts of deformation the hexagonal axis (0001) of zinc is 
parallel to the fiber axis, while for severe deformation the hexagonal axis is 
about 20° from the wire axis. For magnesium and its alloys (1010) is 
parallel to the wire axis for deformation below 450° C, while above this 
temperature (2110) is parallel to the fiber axis. 

The deformation texture of a sheet produced by rolling is described by 
the crystallographic planes parallel to the surface of the sheet as well as 
the crystallographic directions parallel to the direction of rolling. There 
is often considerable deviation from the ideal texture, so that pole figures 
are useful for describing the degree of preferred orientation.^ Precision 
determination of the rolling texture in fee metals has shown that the 
texture may be described best by the {123} planes lying parallel to the 
plane of the sheet with the (112) direction parallel to the rolling direction.^ 
This texture changes to the more common {110} (112) texture by the addi- 
tion of solid-solution alloying elements. In bcc metals the {100} planes 
tend to be oriented parallel to the plane of the sheet with the (110) direc- 
tion within a few degrees of the rolling direction. For hep metals the 
basal plane tends to be parallel with the rolling plane with (2110) aligned 
in the rolling direction. 

The preferred orientation resulting from deformation is strongly 
dependent on the slip and twinning systems available for deformation, but 
it is not generally affected by processing variables such as die angle, roll 
diameter, roll speed, and reduction per pass. The direction of flow is the 
most important process variable. For example, the same deformation 
texture is produced whether a rod is made by rolling, drawing, or swaging. 

The formation of a strong preferred orientation will result in an 

^ It has been suggested that a (111) texture is favored by easy cross sUp, which 
occurs most readily in metals with high stacking-fault energy. See N. Brown, 
Trans. AIME, vol. 221, pp. 236-238, 1961. 

2 A large number of pole figures for rolling textures are given by Barrett, op. cit., 
chap. 18. 

3 R. E. Smallman, J. Inst. Metals, vol. 84, pp. 10-18, 1955-56. 



)ec. 



5-12] 



Plastic DcFormation of Polycrystalline Aggregates 153 



anisotropy in mechanical properties. Although the individual grains of a 
metal are anisotropic with respect to mechanical properties, when these 
grains are combined in a random fashion into a polycrystalline aggregate 
the mechanical properties of the aggregate tend to be isotropic. How- 
ever, the grain alignment that accounts for the preferred orientation 
again introduces an anisotropy in mechanical properties. Different 
mechanical properties in different directions can result in uneven response 
of the material during forming and fabrication operations. 

5-12. Annealins of Cold-worked Metal 

The cold-worked state is a condition of higher internal energy than the 
undeformed metal. Therefore, there is a tendency for strain-hardened 



Reco\/ery i Recrystollization | Grain growth 




Temperature — * 

Fig. 5-20. Schematic drawing indicating recovery, recrystallization, and grain growth 
and the chief property changes in each region. 

metal to revert to the strain-free condition. With increasing temperature 
the cold-worked state becomes more and more unstable. Eventually the 
metal softens and reverts to a strain-free condition. The over-all process 
by which this occurs is known as annealing.' Annealing is very impor- 
tant commercially because it restores the ductility to a metal that has 
been severely strain-hardened. Therefore, by interposing annealing 
operations after severe deformation it is possible to deform most metals to 
a very great extent. 

The over-all process of annealing can be divided into three fairly distinct 
processes, recovery, recrystallization, and grain growth. Figure 5-20 will 
help to distinguish between these processes. Recovery is usually defined 
as the restoration of the physical properties of the cold-worked metal 
without any observable change in microstructure. Electrical con- 

^ For detailed reviews of annealing, see P. A. Beck, Adv. in Phys., vol. 3, pp. 245- 
324, 1954; J. E. Burke and D. Turnbull, "Progress in Metal Physics," vol. 3, Inter- 
science Publishers, Inc., New York, 1952. 



154 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 5 

ductivity increases rapidly toward the annealed value during recovery, 
and lattice strain, as measured with X rays, is appreciably reduced. The 
properties that are most affected by recovery are those which are sensitive 
to point defects. The strength properties, which are controlled by dis- 
locations, are not affected at recovery temperatures. An exception to 
this is single crystals of hep metals which have deformed on only one set 
of planes (easy glide) . For this situation it is possible to recover com- 
pletely the yield stress of a strain-hardened crystal without producing 



(a) (b) (D 

Fig. 5-21. Changes in microstructure of cold-worked 70-30 brass with annealing. 
(a) Cold-worked 40 per cent; (6) 400°C, 15 min; (c) 575°C, 15min. 150X. {Courtesy 
L. A. Monson.) 

recrystallization. Recrystallization is the replacement of the cold- 
worked structure by a new set of strain-free grains. Recrystallization is 
readily detected by metallographic methods and is evidenced by a 
decrease in hardness or strength and an increase in ductility. The density 
of dislocations decreases considerably on recrystallization, and all effects 
of strain hardening are eliminated. The stored energy of cold work is the 
driving force for both recovery and recrystallization. Polygonization 
(Sec. 5-3) can be considered an intermediate situation between recovery 
and recrystallization. If the new strain-free grains are heated at a 
temperature greater than that required to cause recrystallization, there 
will be a progressive increase in grain size. The driving force for grain 
growth is the decrease in free energy resulting from a decreased grain- 
boundary area due to an increase in grain size. Figure 5-21 shows the 
progression from a cold-worked microstructure to a fine recrystallized 
grain structure, and finally to a larger grain size by grain growth. 

Recrystallization is the reversion by thermal activation of the cold- 
worked structure to its original strain-free condition. As the temperature 
is increased, the dislocation networks tend to contract and the regions 
of initially low dislocation density begin to grow. The fraction of the 
microstructure that has recrystallized in a time t can be represented by an 



Sec. 5-12] Plastic Deformation of Polycrystalline Aggregates 155 

equation of the form 

X = 1 - exp i-Bt"') (5-12) 

where B and n' are constants. Values of n' between 1 and 2 indicate one- 
dimensional recrystallization, while values between 2 and 3 denote two- 
dimensional recrystallization. It is convenient to consider the process of 
recrystallization in terms of the rate of nucleation A^ and the rate of growth 
G of new strain-free grains. The relative values of N and G determine the 
recrystallized grain size. If A^ is large with respect to G, there are many 
sites of nucleation and the grain size will be relatively small. 

Six main variables influence recrystallization behavior. They are 
(1) amount of prior deformation, (2) temperature, (3) time, (4) initial 
grain size, (5) composition, and (6) amount of recovery or polygonization 
prior to the start of recrystallization. Because the temperature at which 
recrystallization occurs depends on the above variables, it is not a fixed 
temperature in the sense of a melting temperature. For practical con- 
siderations a recrystallization temperature can be defined as the tem- 
perature at which a given alloy in a highly cold-worked state completely 
recrystallizes in 1 hr. The relationship of the above variables to the 
recrystallization process can be summarized^ as follows. 

1 . A minimum amount of deformation is needed to cause recrystalliza- 
tion. 

2. The smaller the degree of deformation, the higher the temperature 
required to cause recrystallization. 

3. Increasing the annealing time decreases the recrystallization 
temperature. However, temperature is far more important than time. 
Doubling the annealing time is approximately equivalent to increasing 
the annealing temperature 10°C. 

4. The final grain size depends chiefly on the degree of deformation and 
to a lesser extent on the annealing temperature. The greater the degree 
of deformation and the lower the annealing temperature, the smaller the 
recrystallized grain size. 

5. The larger the original grain size, the greater the amount of cold 
work recjuired to produce an equivalent recrystallization temperature. 

6. The recrystallization temperature decreases with increasing purity 
of the metal. Solid-solution alloying additions always raise the recrystal- 
lization temperature. 

7. The amount of deformation required to produce equivalent recrystal- 
lization behavior increases with increased temperature of working. 

8. For a given reduction in cross section, different metalworking proc- 
esses, such as rolling, drawing, etc., produce somewhat different effective 

» R. F. Mehl, Recrystallization, in "Metals Handbook," pp. 259-268, American 
Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1948. 



156 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 5 

deformations. Therefore, identical recrystallization behavior may not be 
obtained. 

Because the driving force for grain growth is appreciably lower than 
the driving force for recrystallization, at a temperature at which recrystal- 
lization occurs readily grain growth will occur slowly. However, grain 
growth is strongly temperature-dependent, and a grain-coarsening region 
will soon be reached in which the grains increase in size very rapidly. 
Grain growth is inhibited considerably by the presence of a fine dispersion 
of second-phase particles, which restricts grain-boundary movement. 
For the usual type of grain growth, where the grains increase in size uni- 
formly, theory predicts that at a given temperature the grain size Z> at a 
time t is given by 

/)2 - D^ = Ct (5-13) 

However, most experimental data agree best with an equation 

where n varies from about 0.2 to 0.5, depending on the metal and the 
temperature. 

Under certain conditions, some of the grains of a fine-grained recrystal- 
lized metal will begin to grow rapidly at the expense of the other grains 
when heated at a higher temperature. This phenomenon is known as 
exaggerated, or abnormal, grain growth. The driving force for exaggerated 
grain growth is the decrease in surface energy, not stored energy, but 
because the phenomenon shows kinetics similar to those of recrystalliza- 
tion it is often called secondary recrystallization. 

5-1 3. Annealing Textures 

The recrystallization of a cold-worked metal may produce a preferred 
orientation which is different from that existing in the deformed metal. 
This is called an annealing texture, or recrystallization texture. An out- 
standing example is the cube texture in copper, where the { 100} plane lies 
parallel to the rolling plane with a (001) direction parallel to the direction 
of rolling. The existence of a recrystallization texture depends on a 
preferential orientation of the nuclei of the recrystallized grains. Anneal- 
ing-texture formation depends on a number of processing variables, the 
amount and type of deformation preceding annealing, the composition of 
the alloy, the grain size, the annealing temperature and time, and the 
preferred orientation produced by the deformation. 

Generally the factors which favor the formation of a fine recrystallized 
grain size also favor the formation of an essentially random orientation of 
recrystallized grains. Moderate cold reductions and low annealing 



Sec. 5-13] Plastic Deformation oF Polycrystalline Aggregates 157 

temperatures are beneficial. A good way of minimizing a recrystalliza- 
tion texture is first to produce a strong preferred orientation by a heavy 
initial reduction and then use a high anneaUng temperature. This is fol- 
lowed by enough added cold reduction to break up this orientation and 
produce a fine recrystallized grain size at a low temperature. 

Sometimes the formation of a strong recrj stallization texture is bene- 
ficial. The best example is cube-oriented silicon-iron transformer sheet, 
where the grains are oriented in the easy direction of magnetization. To 
obtain a nearly perfect recrystallization texture, it is necessary to produce 
a high degree of preferred orientation in the cold-worked metal. This is 
followed by long annealing at a high temperature to allow selective grain 
growth to produce a strong texture. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Barrett, C. S.: "Structure of Metals," 2d ed., chap. 15, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 

Inc., New York, 1952. 
Birchenall, C. E.: "Physical Metallurgy," McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New 

York, 1959. 
Chalmers, B.: "Physical Metallurgy," John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1959. 
Guy, A. G.: "Elements of Physical Metallurgy," 2d ed., Addison-Wesley Publishing 

Company, Reading, Mass., 1959. 
"Relation of Properties to Microstructure," American Society for Metals, Metals 

Park, Ohio, 1954. 



Chapter 6 
DISLOCATION THEORY 

6-1. Introduction 

A dislocation is the linear lattice defect that is responsible for nearly 
all aspects of the plastic deformation of metals. This concept was 
introduced in Chap. 4, where the geometry of edge and screw dislocations 
was presented for the case of a simple cubic lattice. It was shown that 
the existence of a dislocationlike defect is necessary to explain the low 
values of yield stress observed in real crystals. A general picture has 
been given of the interaction of dislocations with foreign atoms, precipitate 
particles, and other dislocations. This has been used to give a qualitative 
picture of the strain hardening of single crystals and, in Chap. 5, to help 
explain solid-solution hardening, dispersed-phase hardening, yield-point 
behavior, and strain aging. 

This chapter is intended to present a more complete and somewhat more 
rigorous treatment of dislocation theory. The rapidly improving tech- 
niques for detecting dislocations in real metals are considered, and experi- 
mental evidence to support the theory is given wherever possible in sub- 
sequent portions of the chapter. The effect on dislocation behavior of 
considering real fee, bcc, or hep crystal structures is considered. Inter- 
action of dislocations with other dislocations, vacancies, and foreign 
atoms is discussed in some detail. The important problem of dislocation 
multiplication by means of the Frank-Read source is given particular 
attention. 

6-2. Methods of Detectins Dislocations 

The concept of the dislocation was proposed independently by Taylor, 
Orowan, and Polan^d^ in 1934, but the idea lay relatively undeveloped 
until the end of World War II There followed a period of approximately 
10 years in which the theory of dislocation behavior was developed 

1 G. I. Taylor, Proc. Roy. Soc. (London), vol. USA, p. 362, 1934; E. Orowan, Z. 
Physik, vol. 89, pp. 605, 614, 634, 1934; M. Polanyi, Z. Physik, vol. 89, p. 660, 1934. 
158 



Sec. 6-2] Dislocation Theory 159 

extensively and applied to practically every aspect of the plastic deforma- 
tion of metals. Because there were no really reliable methods for detect- 
ing dislocations in real materials, it was necessary to build much of this 
theory on the basis of indirect observations of dislocation behavior. 
Fortunately, since 1955 improved techniques have made it possible to 
observe dislocations as they actually exist in many materials. Today, 
there is no question as to the existence of lattice defects with properties 
similar to those ascribed to the dislocation. Many of the theoretical 
predictions have been confirmed by experiment, while others have had to 
be modified and some abandoned. Undoubtedly, better experimental 
techniques, applicable to a wider variety of materials, will be developed 
in the future. As more information is obtained on dislocation behavior in 
real materials, there certainly will be other changes in current concepts of 
dislocation theory. 

The resolving power of the best electron microscope would have to be 
improved by a factor of 5 to 10 in order to observe directly the distortion 
of the individual lattice planes around a dislocation in a metal crystal.^ 
Practically all the experimental techniques for detecting dislocations 
utilize the strain field around a dislocation to increase its effective size. 
These experimental techniques can be roughly classified into two cate- 
gories, those involving chemical reactions with the dislocation, and those 
utilizing the physical changes at the site of a dislocation.- Chemical 
methods include etch-pit techniques and precipitation techniques. Meth- 
ods based on the physical structure at a dislocation site include trans- 
mission electron microscopy of thin films and X-ray diffraction techniques. 

The simplest chemical technique is the use of an etchant which forms 
a pit at the point where a dislocation intersects the surface. Etch pits 
are formed at dislocation sites because the strain field surrounding the 
dislocation causes preferential chemical attack. A great deal of informa- 
tion about dislocation behavior in the ionic crystal LiF has been obtained 
in this way by Oilman and Johnston.'^ Important information about 

' It has been possible by means of an electron microscope to observe this lattice dis- 
tortion in an organic crystal of platinum phthalocyanine, which has a very large lattice 
spacing (12 A) [J. W. Menter, Proc. Roy. Soc. (London), vol. 236A, p. 119, 1956]. An 
indication of the lattice distortion at a dislocation in metals has been obtained by 
making use of the magnification resulting from moire patterns produced by electron 
transmission through two thin overlapping crystals with slightly different orienta- 
tions or lattice spacings. See G. A. Bassett, J. W. Menter, and D. W. Pashley, Proc. 
Roy. Soc. (London), vol. 246A, p. 345, 1958. 

^ Several excellent reviews of experimental techniques have been published. See 
P. B. Hirsch, Met. Reviews, vol. 4, no. 14, pp. 101-140, 1959; J. Nutting, Seeing Dis- 
locations, in "The Structure of Metals," Institution of Metallurgists, Interscience 
Publishers, Inc., New York, 1959. 

^J. J. Oilman and W. G. Johnston, "Dislocations and Mechanical Properties of 
Crystals," John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1957. 



160 Metallurgical Fundamentals 



[Chap. 6 



dislocations in metals has also been obtained with etch-pit techniques. 
Figure 6-1 shows the excellent resolution obtainable from etch-pit studies 
on alpha brass. ^ Pits only 500 A apart have been resolved. In the 
region of heavy slip shown in this electron micrograph the dislocation 
density is 10^" cm^^. 

In metals, etch-pit formation at dislocations appears to be dependent 
on purity.^ Because of solute segregation to the dislocation, the region 






»/j.... ., . 



^J->.. 



'*•}; 



•> .( . : 




M^ i 






'*» ir. 



a .'V'.--..*- 






■•-*.., l'*"*-Vt 



^. 



i' * ■- 

f*J 1 ,■:, '♦ "' "■* 

Fig. 6-1 . Etch pits on slip bands in alpha brass crystals. 5,000 X. {J ■ D. Meakin and 
H. G. F. Wilsdorf, Trans. AIME, vol. 218, p. 740, 1960.) 




around the dislocation becomes anodic to the surrounding metal, and 
consequently preferential etching occurs at the dislocation. Figure 5-4 
shows an etch-pit structure in an iron-silicon alloy which was made visible 
by diffusion of carbon atoms to the dislocations. Etch-pit techniques are 
useful because they can be used with bulk samples. However, care must 
be taken to ensure that pits are formed only at dislocation sites and that 
all dislocations intersecting the surface are revealed. 

A similar method of detecting dislocations is to form a visible precipitate 
along the dislocation lines. Usually a small amount of impurity is added 
to form the precipitate after suitable heat treatment. The procedure is 
often called "decoration" of dislocations. This technique was first used 

1 J. D. Meakin and H. G. F. Wilsdorf, Trans. AIME, vol. 218, pp. 737-745, 1960. 

2 A summary of etch-pit techniques in metals is given by L. C. Lowell, F. L. Vogel, 
and J. H. Wernick, Metal Prog., vol. 75, pp. 96-96D, 1959. 



Sec. 6-2] Dislocation Theory 161 

by Hedges and MitchelP to decorate dislocations in AgBr with photolytic 
silver. It has since been used with many other ionic crystals,^ such as 
AgCl, NaCl, KCl, and CaF2. With these optically transparent crystals 
this technique has the advantage that it shows the internal structure of 
the dislocation lines. Figure 6-2 shows a hexagonal network of disloca- 
tions in a NaCl crystal which was made visible by decoration. Although 
dislocation decoration has not been used extensively with metals, some 






'^ X^''^^ 






Fig 6-2. Hexagonal network of dislocations in XaCl detected by a decoration technique. 
(S. Amelinckx, in "Dislocations and Mechanical Properties of Crystals," John Wiley 
& Sons, Inc., New York, 1957.) 

work has been done along these lines with the Al-Cu precipitation- 
hardening system and with silicon crystals. 

The most powerful method available today for the detection of dis- 
locations in metals is transmission electron microscopy of thin foils.* 
Thin sheet, less than 1 mm thick, is thinned after deformation by electro- 
polishing to a thickness of about 1,000 A. At this thickness the specimen 
is transparent to electrons in the electron microscope. Although the 
crystal lattice cannot be resolved, individual dislocation lines can be 
observed because the intensity of the diffracted electron beam is altered 
by the strain field of the dislocation. By means of this technique it has 
been possible to observe dislocation networks (Fig. 6-3), stacking faults, 
dislocation pile-up at grain boundaries (Fig. 5-1), Cottrell-Lomer barriers, 
and many other structural features of dislocation theory. Dislocation 

1 J. M. Hedges and J. W. Mitchell, Phil. Mag., vol. 44, p. 223, 1953. 

^ S. Amelinckx, "Dislocations and Mechanical Properties of Crystals," John Wiley 
& Sons, Inc., New York, 1957. 

5 P. B. Hirsch, R. W. Home, and M. J. Whelan, Phil. Mag., vol. 1, p. 677, 1956; 
W. BoUmann, Phys. Rev., vol. 103, p. 1588, 1956. 



162 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 6 

movement has been observed by generating thermal stresses in the thin 
foil with the electron beam. It is expected that much more information 
will be gained with this method as techniques for preparing and deforming 
thin foils are improved. 

The dislocation structure of a crystal can be detected by X-ray- 
diffraction microradiographic techniques.^ The strain field at the dis- 
location results in a different diffracted intensity. The method has the 





Fig. 6-3. Dislocation network in cold-worked aluminum. 32,500 X. (P. B. Hirsch, 
R. W. Home, and M. J. Whelan, Phil. Mag., ser. 8, vol. 1, p. 677, 1956.) 

advantage of being nondestructive and giving information on a bulk 
sample. However, with the resolution at present available it is limited to 
crystals of low dislocation density (approximately lO^cm-^). 

6-3. Burgers Vector and the Dislocation Loop 

The Burgers vector b is the vector which defines the magnitude and 
direction of slip. Therefore, it is the most characteristic feature of a dis- 
location. It has already been shown that for a pure edge dislocation the 
Burgers vector is perpendicular to the dislocation line, while for a pure 
screw dislocation the Burgers vector is parallel to the dislocation line. 
Actually, dislocations in real crystals are rarely straight lines and rarely 
lie in a single plane. In general, a dislocation will be partly edge and 
partly screw in character. As shown by Figs. 6-2 and 6-3, dislocations will 

1 A. R. Lang, /. Appl. Phys., vol. 30, pp. 1748-1755, 1959. 



Sec. 6-3] 



Dislocation Theory 163 



ordinarily take the form of curves or loops, which in three dimensions 
form an interlocking dislocation network. In considering a dislocation 
loop in a slip plane any small segment of the dislocation line can be 
resolved into edge and screw components. For example, in Fig. 6-4, the 
dislocation loop is pure screw at point A and pure edge at point B, while 
along most of its length it has mixed edge and screw components. Note, 
however, that the Burgers vector is the same along the entire dislocation 
loop. If this were not so, part of the crystal above the slipped region 
would have to slip by a different 



Slip plane 



Burgers 
vector 




Fig. 6-4. Dislocation loop lying in a slip 
plane (schematic). 



amount relative to another part of 
the crystal and this would mean 
that another dislocation line would 
run across the slipped region. 

A convenient way of defining the 
Burgers vector of a dislocation is by 
means of the Burgers circuit. Con- 
sider Fig. 4-8, which shows the 
atomic arrangement around an edge 
dislocation. Starting at a lattice 
point, imagine a path traced from 
atom to atom, an equal distance in 
each direction, always in the direc- 
tion of one of the vectors of the unit 
cell. If the region enclosed by the path does not contain a dislocation, 
the Burgers circuit will close. However, if the path encloses a disloca- 
tion, the Burgers circuit will not close. The closure failure of the Burgers 
circuit is the Burgers vector b. The closure failure of a Burgers circuit 
around several dislocations is equal to the sum of their separate Burgers 
vectors. 

Because a dislocation represents the boundary between the slipped and 
unslipped region of a crystal, topographic considerations demand that it 
either must be a closed loop or else must end at the free surface of the 
crystal. In general, a dislocation line cannot end inside of a crystal. 
The exception is at a node, where three or four dislocation lines meet. A 
node can be considered as two dislocations with Burgers vectors bi and b2 
combining to produce a resultant dislocation bs. The vector bs is given 
by the vector sum of bi and b2. 

Since the periodic force field of the crystal lattice requires that atoms 
must move from one equilibrium position to another, it follows that the 
Burgers vector must always connect one equilibrium lattice position with 
another. Therefore, the crystal structure will determine the possible 
Burgers vectors. A dislocation with a Burgers vector equal to one lattice 
.spacing is said to be a dislocation of unit strength. Because of energy 



164 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 6 

considerations dislocations with strengths larger than unity are generally 
unstable and dissociate into two or more dislocations of lower strength. 
The criterion for deciding whether or not dissociation will occur is based ^ 
on the fact that the strain energy of a dislocation is proportional to the 
square of its Burgers vector. Therefore, the dissociation reaction 
bi— ^ b2 + bs will occur when br^ > hi^ + 63^, but not if 61" < 62^ + 63^. 

Dislocations with strengths less than unity are possible in close-packed 
lattices where the equilibrium positions are not the edges of the structure 
cell. A Burgers vector is specified by giving its components along the 
axes of the crystallographic structure cell. Thus, the Burgers vector for 
slip in a cubic lattice from a cube corner to the center of one face has the 
components an/2, ao/2, 0. The Burgers vector is [ao/2, ao/2, 0], or, as 
generally written, b = (ao/2) [110]. The strength of a dislocation 
with Burgers vector aaluvw] is \h\ — ao[w^ + w^ + w'^Y'-. For example, 
the magnitude of the Burgers vector given above is \h\ = ao/\/2. 

A dislocation of unit strength, or unit dislocation, has a minimum energy 
when its Burgers vector is parallel to a direction of closest atomic packing 
in the lattice. This agrees with the experimental observation that 
crystals almost always slip in the close-packed directions. A unit dis- 
location of this type is also said to be a perfect dislocation because transla- 
tion equal to one Burgers vector produces an identity translation. For a 
perfect dislocation there is perfect alignment of atom planes above and 
below the slip plane within the dislocation loop. A unit dislocation par- 
allel to the slip direction cannot dissociate further unless it becomes an 
imperfect dislocation, where a translation of one Burgers vector does not 
result in an identity translation. A stacking fault is produced by the 
dissociation of a unit dislocation into two imperfect dislocations. For a 
stacking fault to be stable, the decrease in energy due to dissociation 
must be greater than the increase in interfacial energy of the faulted 
region. 

6-4. Dislocations in the Face-centered Cubic Lattice 

Shp occurs in the fee lattice on the {111} plane in the (110) direction. 
The shortest lattice vector is (ao/2) [110], which connects an atom at a 
cube corner with a neighboring atom at the center of a cube face. The 
Burgers vector is therefore (ao/2) [110]. 

However, consideration of the atomic arrangement on the {111} slip 
plane shows that slip will not take place so simply. Figure 6-5 represents 
the atomic packing on a close-packed (111) plane. It has already been 
shown that the {111} planes are stacked in a sequence ABC ABC • • . 
The vector bi = (ao/2) [lOl] defines one of the observed slip directions. 

1 F. C. Frank, Physica, vol. 15, p. 131. 1949. 



)ec, 



6-4] 



Dislocation Theory 165 



However, if the atoms are considered as hard spheres, ^ it is easier for an 
atom on a type B plane to move along a zigzag path b2 + bg in the valleys 
instead of moving over the hump that lies in the path of the vector 61. 
The dislocation reaction is given by 

bi— > b2 + bs 
|"[10Tj-.f[2TT) + |'|112] 

To check this reaction, the summa- 
tion of the X, y, z components of the 
right-hand side of the equation must 
add up to the x, y, z components of 
the original dislocation. 



X component 
y component 
z component 



M = % + M 



-¥2 



76 



— 2, 




Fig. 6-5. Slip in a close-packed (111) 
plane in an fee lattice. {After A. H. 
CottreU, "Dislocations and Plastic Flow 
in Crystals," p. 73, Oxford University 
Press, New York, 1953.) 



The above reaction is energetically 
favorable since there is a decrease in 
strain energy proportional to the 
change ao~/2 —> air/3. 

Slip by this two-stage process creates a stacking fault ABC A'C ABC in 
the stacking sequence. As Fig. 6-6 shows, the dislocation with Burgers 
vector bi has been dissociated into two partial dislocations bo and bs. 
This dislocation reaction was suggested by Heidenreich and Shockley,- 
and therefore this dislocation arrangement is often known as Shockley 
partials, since the dislocations are imperfect ones which do not produce 
complete lattice translations. Figure 6-6 represents the situation looking 
down on (111) along [111]. AB represents the perfect dislocation line 
having the full slip vector bi. This dissociates according to the above 
reaction into partial dislocationswith Burgers vectors b2 and bs. The 
combination of the two partials AC and AD is known as an extended dis- 
location. The region between them is a stacking fault representing a part 
of the crystal which has undergone slip intermediate between full slip 
and no slip. Because b2 and bs are at a 60° angle, there will be a repulsive 
force between them (Sec. 6-9). However, the surface tension of the 
stacking fault tends to pull them together. The partial dislocations will 
settle at an equilibrium separation determined primarily by the stacking- 
fault energy. As was discussed in Sec. 4-10, the stacking-fault energy 

1 F. C. Thompson and W. E. W. Millington, J. Iron Steel Inst. (London), vol. 109, 
p. 67, 1924; C. H. Mathewson, Trans. AIME, vol. 32, p. 38, 1944. 

2 R. D. Heidenreich and W. Shockley, "Report on Strength of Solids," p. 37, 
Physical Society, London, 1948. 



166 



Metallurgical Fundamentals 



[Chap. 6 



can vary considerably for different fee metals and alloys and this in turn 
can have an important influence on their deformation behavior. 

A characteristic of the fee lattice is that any Burgers vector is common 
to two shp planes. This presents the possibility that screw dislocations, 
which have no fixed glide plane, may surmount obstacles by gliding onto 
another slip plane having a common slip direction. This is the process 
of cross slip. However, in order to do this, the extended dislocations 



Extended dislocation 
C 



to = 




[121] 



■foi] 



3 = ^[2Tl] 



Fully slipped 



No slip 
>^1=^[10T] 



Fig. 6-6. Dissociation of a dislocation into two partial dislocations. 



must first recombine into perfect dislocations since an extended disloca- 
tion cannot glide on any plane except the plane of the fault. Figure 4-26 
shows that this requires the formation of a constriction in the stacking- 
fault ribbon. The greater the width of the stacking fault, or the lower 
the stacking fault energy, the more difficult it is to produce constrictions 
in the stacking faults. This may explain why cross slip is quite prevalent 
in aluminum, which has a very narrow stacking-fault ribbon, while it is 
difficult in copper, which has a wide stacking-fault ribbon. 

These ideas are borne out by electron-microscope transmission studies 
of dislocation networks in thin foils. ^ Stacking faults can be readily 
detected in these thin films. The nature of the dislocation network in fee 
metals changes with the stacking-fault energy. Austenitic stainless steel, 
with a stacking-fault energy around 13 ergs/cm^, shows dislocation net- 
works only along slip planes, even for large deformations. Gold, copper, 
and nickel, where the energy is about 30, 40, andSOergs/cm^, respectively, 

^ Hirsch, op. cit. 




Sec. 6-4] Dislocation Theory 167 

show the dislocations arranged in complex three-dimensional networks at 
low strains. This changes into poorly developed subboundaries at higher 
deformations. Aluminum, with a stacking-fault energy of 200 ergs/cm-, 
shows almost perfect subboundaries. This picture of a graded transition 
in the way the dislocations are arranged is in agreement with the intiuence 
of the stacking-fault energy on the 
ability of a metal to undergo cross 
slip. Cross slip is very difficult in 
stainless steel, even at high strains, 
so that the dislocations are confined 
to the slip planes. In gold, copper, 
and nickel, cross slip is possible, but 
probably only at highly stressed '"'s- 6-7. A Frank partial dislocation or 
rj^, n 1- J* sessile dislocation. {After A. H. Cottrell, 

regions, i here! ore, cross slip oi r,- , ,■ i vi ,■ jpi ■ n 

° ' ^ Dislocations and rtastic blow in Crys- 

SCrew dislocations occurs, and at ^^/^ - ^ 75^ Oxford University Press, New 

high strains they try to form low- York, 1953.) 

angle boundary networks to lower 

their strain energy. In aluminum, cross slip is very prevalent, and screw 

dislocations can easily arrange themselves into a network of low-angle 

boundaries. 

Frank' pointed out that another type of partial dislocation can exist in 
the fee lattice. Figure 6-7 illustrates a set of (111) planes viewed from 
the edge. The center part of the middle A plane is missing. An edge 
dislocation is formed in this region with a Burgers vector (ao/3)[lll]. 
This is called a Frank partial dislocation. Its Burgers vector is per- 
pendicular to the central stacking fault. Since glide must be restricted 
to the plane of the stacking fault and the Burgers vector is normal to 
this plane, the Frank partial dislocation cannot move by glide. For this 
reason it is called a sessile dislocation. A sessile dislocation can move only 
by the diffusion of atoms or vacancies to or from the fault, i.e., by the 
process of climb. Because climb is not a likely process at ordinary 
temperatures, sessile dislocations provide obstacles to the movement of 
other dislocations. Dislocations which glide freely over the slip plane, 
such as perfect dislocations or Shockley partials, are called glissile. A 
method by which a missing row of atoms can be created in the (111) 
plane is by the condensation of a disk of vacancies on that plane. Evi- 
dence for the collapse of disks of vacancies in aluminum has been obtained 
by transmission electron microscopy. - 

Sessile dislocations are produced in the fee lattice by the glide of dis- 
locations on intersecting (111) planes. These sessile dislocations are 

1 F. C. Frank, Proc. Phys. Soc. (London), vol. 62A, p. 202, 1949. 
-' P. B. Hirsch, J. Silcox, R. E. Smallman, and K. H. Westmacott, Phil. Mag., vol. 3, 
p. 897, 1958. 



168 Metallurgical Fundamentals 



[Ch 



ap. 



known as Cottrell-Lomer harriers. They are an important element in the 
mechanism of the strain hardening of metals. Lomer^ pointed out that 
dislocations moving on intersecting slip planes will attract and combine 
if their Burgers vectors have suitable orientations. Figure 6-8 illustrates 
two dislocations moving on the slip planes of an fee lattice. Dislocation 
A is moving in a (111) plane with a Burgers vector (ao/2)[101]. Disloca- 
tion B glides in a (111) plane with a Burgers vector (ao/2)[011]. These 

dislocations attract each other and move 
toward the intersection point 0, which is 
the intersection of the two Burgers vectors 
along the direction [110]. At this point 
// the two dislocations react according to 

Lomer's reaction 




f [101]+ I [Oil] 



ao 



[110] 



Fig. 6-8. Dislocation reaction 
leading to Cottrell-Lomer bar- 
riers. {After A. H. Cottrell, 
"Dislocations and Plastic Flow 
in Crystals," p. 171, Oxford 
University Press, New York, 
1953.) 



to form a new dislocation of reduced energy. 
Since all three dislocations must be parallel 
to the line of intersection of the slip plane, 
[lIO], the edge dislocation formed by 
Lomer's reaction has a slip plane (001). 
The plane (001) contains both the Burgers 
vector [110] and the line [lIO]. Since (001) 
is not a common slip plane in the fee lattice, 
the dislocation formed from Lomer's reac- 
tion should not glide freely. However, it is not a true sessile disloca- 
tion, in the sense of the Frank partial, because it is not d,n imperfect 
dislocation. 

CottrelP showed that the product of Lomer's reaction could be made 
truly immobile by the following dislocation reaction : 

I [110] -^ ^ [112] + ^ [112] + ^ [110] 

The products of this dislocation reaction are imperfect edge dislocations 
which form the boundaries of stacking faults. The dislocation (ao/6)[112] 
is a Shockley partial which glides in the (111) plane. It is repelled from 
the line and forms a stacking fault bounded by two [110] lines, the line 
and the line of the dislocation. In a similar way, the dislocation 
(ao/6)[112] glides in the (111) plane and forms a stacking fault bounded 
by the line and the line of the dislocation. The third dislocation with 
Burgers vector (ao/6)[110] hes along the line where the two stacking 

» W. M. Lomer, Phil. Mag., vol. 42, p. 1327, 1951. 
2 A. H. Cottrell, Phil. Mag., vol. 43, p. 645, 1952. 






Sec. 6-6] Dislocation Theory 169 

faults join. This combination of three dislocations produced by the 
Cottrell-Lomer reaction forms an isosceles triangle which is locked 
rigidly in place and cannot glide. Therefore, Cottrell-Lomer locking 
provides an effective barrier to slip. Studies by transmission electron 
microscopy of dislocation interaction in thin foils have confirmed the 
existence of interaction that is in agreement with the model of Cottrell- 
Lomer locking. 1 

Cottrell-Lomer barriers can be overcome at high stresses and/or 
temperatures. A mathematical analysis of the stress required to break 
down a barrier either by slip on the (001) plane or by dissociation into 
the dislocations from which it was formed has been given by Stroh.^ 
However, it has been shown'' that for the important case of screw disloca- 
tions piled up at Cottrell-Lomer barriers the screw dislocations can 
generally escape the pile-up by cross slip before the stress is high enough 
to collapse the barrier. 

6-5. Dislocations in the Hexagonal Close-packed Lattice 

The basal plane of the hep lattice is a close-packed plane with the 
stacking sequence ABABAB • • • . Slip occurs on the basal plane 
(0001) in the <1120> direction (Fig. 4-3). The smallest unit vector for the 
hep structure has a length ao and lies in the close-packed (1120) direction. 
Therefore, the Burgers vector is ao[1120]. Dislocations in the basal plane 
can reduce their energy by dissociating into Shockley partials according 
to the reaction 

ao[1120]^ ao[10lO] + ao[OlTO] 

The stacking fault produced by this reaction lies in the basal plane, and 
the extended dislocation which forms it is confined to glide in this plane. 

6-6. Dislocations in the Body-centered Cubic Lattice 

Shp occurs in the (111) direction in the bcc lattice. The shortest 
lattice vector extends from an atom corner to the atom at the center 
of the unit cube. Therefore, the Burgers vector is (ao/2)[lll]. It will 
be recalled that shp lines in iron have been found to occur on {110}, 
{112}, and {123}, although in other bcc metals slip appears to occur 
predominantly on the {110} planes. 

1 M. J. Whelan, Proc. Roy. Soc. (London), vol. 249A, p. 114, 1958; all possible dis- 
location reactions in the fee lattice have been worked out by J. P. Hirth, J. Appl. 
Phys., vol. 32, pp. 700-706, 1961. 

2 A. N. Stroh, Phil. Mag., vol. 1, ser. 8, p. 489, 1956. 

3 A. Seeger, J. Diehl, S. Mader, and R. Rebstock, Phil. Mag., vol. 2, p. 323, 1957. 



170 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 6 

Dislocation reactions have not been studied so extensively in the bcc 
lattice as in the fee lattice. Cottrell^ has suggested that a perfect dis- 
location in a (112) plane can dissociate according to the reaction 

f [111] ^ 1° [112] + 1° [111] 

The dislocation (ao/3)[112] is a pure edge dislocation since its Burgers 
vector lies perpendicular to the slip plane. It is also an imperfect sessile 
dislocation that forms the boundary of a stacking fault in the (112) planes. 
The dislocation (ao/6)[lll] is an imperfect glissile dislocation similar to 
the Shockley partial of the fee lattice. However, because [111] is the 
line of intersection of three planes of the type {112}, this dislocation can 
glide out of the plane of the stacking fault too easily to be part of a true 
extended dislocation. A dislocation in the (112) plane may also lower its 
energy by dissociating according to the reaction 

f [lll]->|°[lll]+f [111] 

As discussed above, both the partial dislocations formed by this reaction 
are pure screw, and because of the geometry of the situation, they are not 
completely confined to the (112) slip plane. An analysis^ of the atomic 
positions giving rise to stacking faults on {112} planes shows that there 
are two types which may result. While the existence of stacking faults 
in the bcc lattice has been demonstrated by X-ray diffraction, detailed 
studies of the dislocation reactions discussed in this paragraph have not 
yet been made. 

CottrelP has suggested another dislocation reaction, which appears to 
lead to the formation of immobile dislocations in the bcc lattice. This 
dislocation reaction may be important to the brittle fracture of bcc metals. 
Consider Fig. 6-9a. Dislocation A, with Burgers vector (ao/2)[lll], 
is gliding in the (101) plane. Dislocation B, with Burgers vector 
(ao/2)[lll], is gliding in the intersecting slip plane (101). The two 
dislocations come together and react to lower their strain energy by the 
reaction 

f [ni]-f|[lll]^ao[001] 

The product of this reaction is a pure edge dislocation which lies on the 
(001) plane. Since this is not a common slip plane in the bcc lattice, 

1 A. H. Cottrell, "Dislocations and Plastic Flow in Crystals," Oxford University 
Press, New York, 1953. 

2 J. M. Silcock, Acta Met., vol. 7, p. 359, 1959. 

3 A. H. Cottrell, Trans. Met. Soc. AIMS, vol. 212, p. 192, 1958. 



Sec. 6-7] 



Dislocation Theory 171 



the dislocation is immobile. However, the (001) plane is the cleavage 
plane along which brittle fracture occurs. Cottrell suggests that the 
formation of a dislocation on the cleavage plane by slip on intersecting 
{110} planes is equivalent to introducing a crack one lattice spacing thick 
(Fig. 6-95). This crack can then grow by additional dislocations gliding 
over the {110} planes. While this particular dislocation reaction has not 





Fi9. 6-9. Slip on intersecting (110) planes. (.4. H. Cottrell, Trans. AIME, vol. 212, 
p. 196, 1958.) 

been established by experiment in bcc metals, it has been found to oper- 
ate in cubic ionic crystals such as LiF and MgO. 



6-7. Stress Field of a Dislocation 

A dislocation is surrounded by an elastic stress field that produces 
forces on other dislocations and results in interaction between dislocations 
and solute atoms. For the case of a perfect dislocation a good approxi- 
mation of the stress field can be obtained from the mathematical theory 
of elasticity for continuous media. However, the equations obtained 
are not valid close to the core of the dislocation line. The equations 
given below apply to straight edge and screw dislocations in an isotropic 
crystal. 1 The stress around a straight dislocation will be a good approxi- 
mation to that around a curved dislocation at distances that are small 
compared with the radius of curvature. Appreciably greater complexity 
results from the consideration of a crystal with anisotropic elastic 
constants.^ 

Figure 6-10 represents the cross section of a cylindrical piece of elastic 
material containing an edge dislocation running through point parallel 
to the z axis (normal to the plane of the figure). The original undistorted 
cylinder without a dislocation is shown by the dashed line. The dis- 

1 For derivations see F. R. N. Nabarro, Advances in Phys., vol. 1, no. 3, pp. 271-395, 
1952; W. T. Read, Jr., "Dislocations in Crystals," pp. 114-123, McGraw-Hill Book 
Company, Inc., New York, 1953. 

"^ J. D. Eshelby, W. T. Read, and W. Shockley, Acta Met., vol. 1, pp. 351-359, 1953, 



172 Metallurgical Fundamentals 



[Chap. 6 



location was produced by making 
a radial cut along the plane ?/ = 
(line OA), sliding the cut surfaces 
along each other the distance A A', 
and joining them back together 
again. This sequence of operations^ 
produces a positive edge dislocation 
running along the z axis with a strain 
field identical with that around a 
dislocation model such as that of 
Fig. 4-8. Since the dislocation line 
is parallel to the z axis, strains in 
that direction are zero and the prob- 
lem can be treated as one in plane 
strain. 

For the case of a straight edge 
dislocation in an elastically isotropic 
material the stresses, in terms of 

three orthogonal coordinate axes, are given by the following equations. 

The notation is the same as that used in Chaps. 1 and 2. 




Fig. 6-10. Deformation of a circle con- 
taining an edge dislocation. The un- 
strained circle is shown by a dashed line. 
The solid line represents the circle after 
the dislocation has been introduced. 



-To 



To 



by(3x- + ij^) 
by(x'- - y^) 



where 



To = 



G 

27r(l - v) 
bx{x^ — y'^) 
(x^ -\- y'^'Y 
.. = 



Txy — To 
Txz Ty, 



For polar coordinates, the equations are 

—Toh sin Q 



CTr — (Te — 



r 
h cos d 



TrB — TBt — To 



(6-1) 

(6-2) 
(6-3) 



(6-4) 
(6-5) 

(6-6) 
(6-7) 



ar acts in the radial direction, while ae acts in a plane perpendicular to r. 
Note that the stresses vary inversely with distance from the dislocation 

1 It is interesting that this problem was analyzed by Volterra in 1907, long before 
the concept of dislocations was originated. The mathematical details may be found 
in A. E. H. Love, "A Treatise on the Mathematical Theory of Elasticity," pp. 221^ 
228, Cambridge University Press, New York, 1934. 



Sec. 6-7] Dislocation Theory 173 

line. Since the stress becomes infinite at r = 0, a small cylindrical 
region r = ro around the dislocation line must be excluded from the 
analysis. 

A straight screw dislocation in an isotropic medium has complete 
cylindrical symmetry. For a rectangular-coordinate system only two 
components of stress are not equal to zero. 

- ^ a; 

Since there is no extra half plane of atoms in a screw dislocation, there 
are no tensile or compressive normal stresses. The stress field is simply 
one of shear. The radial symmetry of this stress field is apparent when 
the shear stress is expressed in a polar-coordinate system. 

r.. = ^^ (6-10) 

The strain field around an edge dislocation in a silicon crystal has been 
observed' by means of polarized infrared radiation. The variation in 
intensity is in agreement with what would be expected from the equa- 
tions for a stress field around an edge dislocation in an isotropic medium. 

The strain energy involved in the formation of an edge dislocation 
can be estimated from the work involved in displacing the cut OA in 
Fig. 6-10 a distance h along the slip plane. 

1 /''■' 1 /"'■' dr 

U = n\ Trebdr = - rob" cos ^— (6-11) 

2 Jro 2 Jro r 

But cos 6=1 along the slip plane y = 0, so that the strain energy is 
given by 

U = . ,^" , In ^ (6-12) 

47r(l - v) ro 

In the same way, the strain energy of a screw dislocation is given by 

U = ^ \ Te^h dr = ^\n -' (6-13) 

2 Jro 47r ro 

Note that, in accordance with our assumption up to this point, the strain 
energy per unit length of dislocation is proportional to Gh'^. This strain 
energy corresponds to about 10 ev for each atom plane threaded by an 
edge dislocation (Prob. 6-9). The total energy of a crystal containing 

1 W. L. Bond and J. Andrus, Phys. Rev., vol. 101, p. 1211, 1956. 



174 Metallurgical Fundamentals 



[Chap. 6 



many dislocation lines is the si^t^ f the strain energies of the individiml 
dislocations, plus terms expressing the interactions of the stress fields of 
the dislocations, plus a term describing the internal stresses developed 
by the external forces. 



6-8. Forces on Dislocations 

When an external force of sufficient magnitude is applied to a crystal, 
the dislocations move and produce slip. Thus, there is a force acting on 

a dislocation line which tends to drive it 
forward. Figure 6-11 shows a dislocation 
line moving in the direction of its Burgers 
vector under the influence of a uniform 
shear stress t. An element of the disloca- 
tion line ds is displaced in the direction 
of slip normal to ds by an amount dl. 
The area swept out by the line element 
is then ds dl. This corresponds to an 
average displacement of the crystal above 
the slip plane to the crystal below the 
slip plane of an amount ds dlb/A, where 
A is the area of the slip plane. The work 
done by the shear stress acting in the slip 
plane is dW = TA{ds dlh)/A. This corresponds to a force dW/dl act- 
ing on the element ds in the direction of its normal. Therefore, the force 
per unit length acting on the dislocation line is 




Fig. 6-11. Force acting on a dis 
location line. 



F = Th 



(6-14) 



This force is normal to the dislocation line at every point along its length 
and is directed toward the unslipped part of the glide plane. 

Because the strain energy of a dislocation line is proportional to its 
length, work must be performed to increase its length. Therefore, it is 
convenient to consider that a dislocation possesses a line tension which 
attempts to minimize its energy by shortening its length. The line ten- 
sion has the units of energy per unit length and is analogous to the surface 
tension of a liquid. For a curved dislocation line, the line tension pro- 
duces a restoring force which tends to straighten it out. The magnitude 
of this force is T/R, where r is the line tension and R is the radius of 
curvature of the bent dislocation line. The direction of this force is 
perpendicular to the dislocation line and toward the center of curvature. 
Because of line tension, a dislocation line can have an equilibrium curva- 
ture only if it is acted on by a shear stress. The equilibrium condition 



Sec. 6-9] Dislocation Theory 175 

for this to occur is 

Therefore, the shear stress needed to maintain a dislocation line in a 
radius of curvature R is 

r = i^ (6-15) 

Orowan^ has pointed out that the determination of this stress bears an 
analogy with the problem of blowing a bubble from a nozzle submerged 
in a liquid. The line tension will vary from point to point along a dis- 
location line. Stroh^ has shown that Eq. (6-13) provides a good approxi- 
mation of the line tension. An approximation often used is F ~ 0.5Gb^. 
This is obtained from Eq. (6-13) when typical values ri = 1,000 A and 
ro = 2 A are used. 

6-9. Forces between Dislocations 

Dislocations of opposite sign on the same slip plane will attract each 
other, run together, and annihilate each other. This can be seen readily 
for the case of an edge dislocation (Fig. 4-8), where the superposition of 
a positive and negative dislocation on the same slip plane would elimi- 
nate the extra plane of atoms and therefore the dislocation would dis- 
appear. Conversely, dislocations of like sign on the same slip plane will 
repel each other. 

The simplest situation to consider is the force between two parallel 
screw dislocations. Since the stress field of a screw dislocation is radially 
symmetrical, the force between them is a central force which depends 
only on the distance that they are apart. 

Fr = re.h = ^ (6-16) 

The force is attractive for dislocations of opposite sign (antiparallel 
screws) and repulsive for dislocations of the same sign (parallel screws). 
Consider now the forces between two parallel edge dislocations with 
the same Burgers vectors. Referring to Fig. 6-10, the edge dislocations 
are at P and Q, parallel to the z axis, with their Burgers vectors along 
the X axis. The force between them is not a central force, and so it is 
necessary to consider both a radial and a tangential component. The 

^ E. Orovvan, "Dislocations in Metals," pp. 99-102, American Institute of Mining 
and Metallurgical Engineers, New York, 1953. 

2 A. N. Stroh, Proc. Phys. Soc. (London), vol. 67B, p. 427, 1954. 



176 Metallurgical Fundamentals 

force per unit length is given by^ 
Gb'- 1 



Gh' 



sin 20 



[Chap. 6 



(6-17) 



27r(l - v)r 27r(l - v) r 

Because edge dislocations are mainly confined to the slip plane, the force. 




-0.3 



Fig. 6-12. Graphical representation of Eq. (6-18). Solid curve A is for two edge dis- 
locations of same sign. Dashed curve B is for two unlike edge dislocations. {After 
A. H. Cottrell, "Dislocations and Plastic Flow in Crystals," p. 48, Oxford University 
Press, New York, 1953.) 

component along the x direction, which is the slip direction, is of most 
interest. 



F:c = Fr cos e - Fe sin 6 

_ Gh^x(x^ — y'^) 
~ 27r(l - p)(x^^ + yT 



(6-18) 



Figure 6-12 is a plot of the variation of F^ with distance x, where x is 
expressed in units of y. Curve A is for dislocations of the same sign; 
curve B is for dislocations of opposite sign. Note that dislocations of 
the same sign repel each other when x > y (6 < 45°) and attract each 
other when x < y {d > 45°). The reverse is true for dislocations of 

1 A. H. Cottrell, "Dislocations and Plastic Flow in Crystals," p. 46, Oxford Uni- 
versity Press, New York, 1953. 



Sec. 6-10] Dislocation Theory 177 

opposite sign. Fx is zero at x = and x = y. The situation a; = 0, 
where the edge dislocations lie vertically above one another, is a con- 
dition of equilibrium. Thus, theory predicts that a vertical array of 
edge dislocations of the same sign is in stable equilibrium. This is the 
arrangement of dislocations that exists in a low-angle grain boundary 
of the tilt variety. 

The situation of two parallel dislocations with different Burgers vec- 
tors can be rationalized by considering their relative energies.' This 
represents the situation of dislocations on two intersecting slip planes. 
In general there will be no stable position, as for the previous case. The 
dislocations either will try to come together or will move far apart. Con- 
sider two parallel dislocations bi and b2, which may or may not attract 
and combine into bs. The two dislocations will attract if 63^ < 61^ -\- 62^ 
and will repel if 63^ > bi^ + 62^ Expressed another way, the disloca- 
tions will attract if the angle between their Burgers vectors is greater 
than 90°. They will repel if it is less than 90°. 

A free surface exerts a force of attraction on a dislocation, since escape 
from the crystal at the surface would reduce its strain energy. Koehler^ 
has shown that this force is approximately equal to the force which would 
be exerted in an infinite solid between the dislocation and one of opposite 
sign located at the position of its image on the other side of the surface. 
This image force is equal to 

F = , ,f^' , - (6-19) 

47r(l — v) r 

for an edge dislocation. However, it should be noted that metal surfaces 
are often covered with thin oxide films. A dislocation approaching a 
surface with a coating of an elastically harder material will encounter a 
repulsive rather than an attractive image force. 

6-10. Dislocation Climb 

An edge dislocation can glide only in the plane containing the disloca- 
tion line and its Burgers vector (the slip direction). To move an edge 
dislocation in a direction perpendicular to the slip plane requires the 
process of climb. The motion of a screw dislocation always involves 
glide, so that it is not involved with climb. Climb requires mass trans- 
port by diffusion, and therefore it is a thermally activated process. By 
convention, the positive direction of climb is the direction in which atoms 
are taken away from the extra half plane of atoms in an edge dislocation 
so that this extra half plane moves up one atomic layer. The usual way 

1 Read, op. cit., p. 131. 

2 J. S. Koehler, Phys. Rev., vol. 60, p. 397, 1941. 



178 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 6 

for this to occur is by a vacancy diffusing to the dislocation and the 
extra atom moving into the vacant lattice site (Fig. 6-13). It is also 
possible, but not energetically favorable, for the atom to break loose from 
the extra half plane and become an interstitial atom. To produce nega- 
tive climb, atoms must be added to the extra half plane of atoms. This 
can occur by atoms from the surrounding lattice joining the extra half 

plane, which creates vacancies, or, 
less probably, by an interstitial atom 
diffusing to the dislocation. 

• • V^ • • Dislocation climb is necessary to 

• • ' • • bring about the vertical alignment of 

• • • « edge dislocations on slip planes that 
(^) ,.^ produces low-angle grain boundaries 

by the process of polygonization. 
Fig. 6-1 3. (a) Diffusion of vacancy to t?., i^ -i . t ■ -u j. j 

, J. , \. ,,, ,. , ,. ,f , JtLitch-pit techniques on bent and 
edge dislocation; (o) dislocation climbs ^ . 

up one lattice spacing. annealed crystals have amply dem- 

onstrated the existence of this phe- 
nomenon. Dislocation climb is also a very important factor in the creep 
of metals, where the activation energy for steady-state creep is equal to 
the activation energy for self-diffusion in pure metals. Since self-dif- 
fusion occurs by the movement of vacancies, this implies that dislocation 
climb is involved in creep. 

6-1 1 . Jogs in Dislocations 

There is no requirement that a dislocation must be confined to a single 
plane. When a dislocation moves from one slip plane to another, it cre- 
ates a step, or jog, in the dislocation line. Jogs can be produced by the 
intersection of dislocations, as was shown earlier, in Fig. 4-29, or a jog 
can be produced during climb owing to the failure of climb to occur along 
the entire length of the extra half plane of atoms. 

The intersection of two edge dislocations is illustrated in Fig. 6-14. 
An edge dislocation XY with a Burgers vector bi is moving on plane Pxy. 
It cuts through dislocation AD, with Burgers vector h, lying on plane 
Pad. The intersection produces a jog PP' in dislocation AD. The 
resulting jog is parallel to bi, but it has a Burgers vector b since it is 
part of the dislocation line APP'D. The length of the jog will be equal 
to the length of the Burgers vector bi. It can be seen that the jog result- 
ing from the intersection of two edge dislocations has an edge orientation, 
and therefore it can readily glide with the rest of the dislocation. Hence, 
the formation of jogs in edge dislocations will not impede their motion. 
However, it requires energy to cut a dislocation because the formation 



Sec. 6-12] 



Dislocation Theory 179 







/-^ 


Y 




X 


^ 


bx 


/I ^ 


Pad 




^ \ ^ 


.-^ 




PxY^^ 




[a) 




^^ 





of a jog increases its length. The energy of a jog will be about 0.5G'6^, 
since the average line tension is 0.5Gb^ and the jog has a length 6,. 

Figure 4-29 illustrates the intersection of two screw dislocations. As is 
the general rule when jogs are 
formed by dislocation intersection, 
the jogs are perpendicular to the 
slip planes in which the dislocations 
are moving. It can be seen that 
the jogs formed by the intersection 
of two screw dislocations have an 
edge orientation because they lie 
perpendicular to the Burgers vector 
of the screw dislocations. Since an 
edge dislocation can move easily 
only in the plane containing its line 
and its Burgers vector, the jog can 
move only along the screw axis of 
the dislocation. Therefore, so long 
as the jog is present on the screw 
dislocation, it cannot move in a 
direction normal to the screw axis 
except by the process of climb. 
Hence, it is more difficult to move 
screw dislocations through an inter- 
secting forest of dislocations than it 
is to move edge dislocations through 
an intersecting array. This is sub- 
stantiated by the observation^ that 
slip bands in aluminum advance 
more slowly when viewed in a di- 
rection perpendicular to the slip 
direction than when viewed along 
the slip direction. For the intersection of mixed dislocations, part edge 
and part screw, the jog can move sidewise by glide as the dislocation 
moves through the lattice. 




Fig. 6-14. Intersection of two edge dis- 
locations. (W. T. Read, Jr., "Disloca- 
tions in Crystals," McGraw-Hill Book 
Company, Inc., New York, 1953.) 



6-1 2. Dislocation and Vacancy Interaction 

There is a growing amount of evidence that point defects, mainly 
vacancies, are produced during plastic deformation. Most of the experi- 



' N. K. Chen and R. B. Pond, Trans. AIME, vol. 194, pp. 1085-1092, 1952. 



180 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 6 

mental evidence' is based on deformation at low temperature (so as to 
suppress the mobility of vacancies) followed by the measurement of elec- 
trical resistivity and mechanical strength before and after annealing treat- 
ments. It is found that about half the increased resistivity due to cold 
work anneals out over well-defined temperature ranges and with acti- 
vation energies which generally agree with the temperatures and acti- 
vation energies observed for the annealing of quenched and irradiated 
samples. Moreover, the changes in resistivity are accomplished with 
little change in mechanical strength, indicating that dislocations are not 
responsible for the resistivity changes. The generation of point defects 
due to deformation has been demonstrated in ionic crystals by measure- 
ments of conductivity and density and by the observation of color centers. 

Jogs in dislocation lines can act as sources and sinks for point defects. 
Because of the reentrant corner at a jog, it is a favorable center for the 
absorption and annihilation of vacancies. It is also generally considered 
that vacancies can be generated at jogs. The usual mechanism^ involves 
the jogs formed by the intersection of screw dislocations. As was pointed 
out in the previous section, motion of a screw dislocation containing jogs 
in a direction normal to its axis can occur only by climb. As the jog 
climbs, it generates vacancies. However, two points of doubt have been 
raised about this mechanism. Friedel^ has pointed out that there is no 
reason why a jog should not glide along a screw dislocation without pro- 
ducing vacancies so long as it can shortly attach itself to an edge com- 
ponent of the dislocation line. Cottrell^ has shown that the jogs formed 
by intersecting screw dislocations will generally produce interstitials, not 
vacancies. However, annealing experiments show that vacancies rather 
than interstitials are the predominant point defect in cold-worked metals. 
Other mechanisms for the generation of vacancies by jogs on dislocations 
have been proposed by Friedel, Mott, and Cottrell.^ While the exact 
details for the mechanism of vacancy formation during cold work have 
not been established, there is little question that jog formation due to 
the intersection of dislocations is involved. 

An attractive force exists between vacancies and dislocations. There- 

1 For reviews of this subject see T. Broom, Advances in Phys., vol. 3, pp. 26-83, 
1954, and "Symposium on Vacancies and Other Point Defects in Metals and Alloys," 
Institute of Metals, London, 1958. 

2 F. Seitz, Advances in Phys., vol. 1, p. 43, 1952. 

3 J. Friedel, Phil. Mag., vol. 46, p. 1165, 1955. 

^ A. H. Cottrell, "Dislocations and Mechanical Properties of Crystals," pp. 509- 
512, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1957. 

5 J. Friedel, "Les Dislocations," Gauthier-Villars & Cie, Paris, 1956; N. F. Mott, 
"Dislocations and Mechanical Properties of Crystals," pp. 469-471, John Wiley & 
Sons, Inc., New York, 1957; A. H. Cottrell, "Vacancies and Other Point Defects in 
Metals and Alloys," pp. 28-29, Institute of Metals, London, 1958. 



Sec. 6-1 3] Dislocation Theory 181 

fore, vacancies should be able to form atmospheres around dislocations 
in the same way as solute atoms. Vacancies may also interact with each 
other to form vacancy pairs (divacancies), and there is some evidence to 
support the hypothesis that they collect into larger groups or clusters. 

6-1 3. Dislocation — Foreign-atom Interaction 

The presence of a large foreign atom produces a dilation of the matrix. 
An oversized atom will be attracted to the tension region and repelled 
from the compression region of an edge dislocation. The segregation of 
solute atoms to dislocations lowers the strain energy of the system. For 
simplicity, it is assumed that the solute atom produces a symmetrical 
hydrostatic distortion of the matrix. If the solute atom occupies a vol- 
ume AV greater than the volume of the matrix atom it replaces, the energy 
of interaction between the local stress field of the dislocation and the 
foreign atom will be 

Ui = a^AV (6-20) 

where o-„, = — Is{(Tx + c^ + (7^) is the hydrostatic component of the stress 
field. The volume change is given by 

AV = %wea^ (6-21) 

where a is the radius of the solvent atom and e = (a' — a) /a is the strain 
produced by introducing a solute atom of radius a'. When the solute 
atom is located at a point given by the polar coordinate r, 6 from an edge 
dislocation, the interaction energy is given by^ 

U, = ^^^^ = 4Gbea^'^ (6-22) 

r r 

The force between an edge dislocation and a solute atom is not a central 
force. The radial and tangential components are given by 

When the solute atom produces an unequal distortion of the matrix 
lattice in different directions, solute atoms can interact with the shear 
component of the stress field as well as the hydrostatic component. 
Under these conditions interaction occurs between solute atoms and both 
screw and edge dislocations. For the case of carbon and nitrogen atoms 
in iron the tetragonal symmetry around the interstitial sites leads to a 
shear component of the stress field. In fee alloys the dissociation of dis- 

1 B. A. Bilby, Proc. Phys. Soc. (London), vol. 63A, p. 191, 1950. 



182 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 6 

locations into partial dislocations produces two elastically bound dis- 
locations with a substantial edge component. 

Cottrell and Bilbj^ have shown that in time t the number of solute 
atoms, n{t), that migrate to a unit length of dislocation line from a solu- 
tion containing initially no solute atoms per unit volume is 

^(0 = 3(^y''(^^y'no (6-24) 

where A = interaction parameter of Eq. (6-22) 

D = diffusion coefficient of solute atoms at temperature T 
In the derivation of this equation the dislocation line serves as a solute- 
atom sink which captures any passing atom but does not obstruct the 
entry of other atoms. This concept is valid during the early stages of 
strain aging, where the f'^ relationship is found to hold. However, 
toward the later stages of strain aging the sites on the dislocation line 
become saturated, and the assumption that it acts like a sink can no 
longer be valid. Now the probability of atoms leaving the center equals 
the probability of atoms flowing in, and a steady-state concentration 
gradient develops. The steady-state distribution of solute atoms around 
the dislocation is referred to as an atmosphere. The local concentration 
c is related to the average concentration co by the relationship 

c = Co exp -j-~ (6-25) 

It has been suggested^ that solute atoms can diffuse along dislocations 
until they meet a barrier. If the interaction between the solute atoms is 
strong, a fine precipitate can be formed. In this way the dislocation lines 
are freed to act as sinks for a longer period of time, and the fi^ relation- 
ship will remain valid until all dislocation lines have been saturated with 
solute atoms. 

When the concentration of solute atoms around the dislocation becomes 
high enough, the atmosphere will condense into a single line of solute 
atoms parallel to the dislocation line at the position of maximum binding 
about two atomic spacings below the core of a positive edge dislocation. 
The breakaway stress required to pull a dislocation line away from a line 
of solute atoms at 0°K is 

6Vo^ 



(6-26) 



where A is given by Eq. (6-22) and ro « 2 X 10"^ cm is the distance from 

the dislocation core to the site of the line of solute atoms. When the 

1 B. A. Bilby and G. M. Leak, /. Iron Steel Inst. (London), vol. 184, p. 64, 1956. 



Sec. 6-14] Dislocation Theory 183 

dislocation line is pulled free from the field of influence of the solute 
atoms, slip can proceed at a stress lower than that given by Eq. (6-26). 
This is the origin of the upper yield point in the stress-strain curve. 

When an external force tries to move a dislocation line away from its 
atmosphere, the atmosphere exerts a restoring force that tries to pull it 
back to its original position. If the speed of the dislocation line is slow, 
it may be able to move by dragging the atmosphere along behind it. 
According to Cottrell, the maximum velocity at which a dislocation line 
can move and still drag its atmosphere with it is 

If the dislocation line is moving faster than this velocity, it will be neces- 
sary for the restoring force to be overcome and the atmosphere is left 
behind. Serrations in the stress-strain curve are the result of the dis- 
location line pulling away from the solute atmosphere and then slowing 
down and allowing the atmosphere to interact once again with the 
dislocations. 

6-14. Dislocation Sources 

The low yield strength of pure crystals leads to the conclusion that 
dislocation sources must exist in completely annealed crystals and in 
crystals carefully solidified from the melt. The line energy of a disloca- 
tion is so high as to make it very unlikely that stresses of reasonable 
magnitude can create new dislocations in a region of a crystal where no 
dislocations exist, even with the assistance of thermal fluctuations. This 
results in an important difference between line defects and point defects. 
The density of dislocations in thermal equilibrium with a crystal is vanish- 
ingly small. There is no general relationship between dislocation density 
and temperature such as exists with vacancies. Since dislocations are 
not affected by thermal fluctuations at temperatures below which recrys- 
tallization occurs, a metal can have widely different dislocation densities 
depending upon processing conditions. Completely annealed material 
will contain about 10^ to 10* dislocation lines per square centimeter, 
while heavily cold-worked metal will have a dislocation density of about 
10'^ dislocation lines per square centimeter. 

It is generally believed that all metals, with the exception of tiny 
whiskers, initially contain an appreciable number of dislocations, pro- 
duced as the result of the growth of the crystal from the melt or the 
vapor phase. Experimental evidence for dislocations in crystals solidi- 
fied under carefully controlled conditions has been obtained by etch-pit 
studies and by X-ray diffraction methods. For crystals grown by vapor 



184 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 6 

deposition it has been shown that nucleation of the soUd phase occurs 
around screw dislocations emerging from the surface of the solid substrate. 
Ample evidence of the existence of three-dimensional dislocation net- 
works in annealed ionic crystals has been provided by dislocation deco- 
ration techniques. In annealed metals, dislocation loops have been 
observed by transmission-electron microscopy of thin films. ^ These 
loops are believed to originate from the collapse of disks of vacancies 
and correspond to prismatic dislocations. There is some evidence to 
indicate that these loops can grow and join up to form dislocation net- 
works in annealed, unworked crystals. There is also some evidence to 
suggest that some of the condensed vacancies form voids, which are then 
responsible for the formation of dislocations. While there is little doubt 
that dislocations exist in annealed or carefully solidified metal, much more 
information is needed about the mechanism, by which they are produced 
and the way in which they are arranged in the metal. 

6-1 5. Multiplication of Dislocations — Frank-Read Source 

One of the original stumbling blocks in the development of dislocation 
theory was the formulation of a reasonable mechanism by which sources 
originally present in the metal could produce new dislocations by the 
process of slip. Such a mechanism is required when it is realized that 
the surface displacement at a slip band is due to the movement of about 
1,000 dislocations over the slip plane. Thus, the number of dislocation 
sources initially present in a metal could not account for the observed 
slip-band spacing and displacement unless there were some way in which 
each source could produce large amounts of slip before it became immobi- 
lized. Moreover, if there were no source generating dislocations, cold 
work should decrease, rather than increase, the density of dislocations in 
a single crystal. Thus, there must be a method of generating dislocations 
or of multiplying the number initially present to produce the high dis- 
location density found in cold-worked metal. The scheme by which dis- 
locations could be generated from existing dislocations was proposed by 
Frank and Read^ and is commonly called a Frank-Read source. 

Consider a dislocation line DD' lying in a slip plane (Fig. 6-1 5a). The 
plane of the figure is the slip plane. The dislocation line leaves the slip 
plane at points D and D', so that it is immobilized at these points. This 
could occur if D and D' were nodes where the dislocation in the plane of 
the paper intersects dislocations in other slip planes, or the anchoring 
could be caused by impurity atoms. If a shear stress t acts in the slip 
plane, the dislocation line bulges out and produces slip. For a given 

^ Hirsch, Silcox, Smallman, and Westmacott, op. cit. 

2 F. C. Frank and W. T. Read, Phys. Rev., vol. 79, pp. 722-723, 1950. 



Sec. 6-1 5] 



Dislocation Theory 185 



stress the dislocation line will assume a certain radius of curvature given 
by Eq. (6-15). The maximum value of shear stress is required when the 
dislocation bulge becomes a semicircle so that R has the minimum value 
1/2 (Fig. 6-156). From the approximation that V ~ Q.bGh'^ and Eq. 



Tb 

III , 



[a) 



Tb 

k 

[b) 





.Tb 




(d) 



[e) 



Fig. 6-1 5. Schematic representation of the operation of a Frank-Read source. {W . T. 
Read, Jr., "Dislocations in Crystals,'' McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 
1953.) 



(6-15) it can be readily seen that the stress required to produce this 
configuration is 

Gh 



(6-28) 



where I is the distance DD' between the nodes. When the stress is raised 
above this critical value, the dislocation becomes unstable and expands 
indefinitely. Figure 6-1 5c shows the expanded loop, which has started 
to double back on itself. In Fig. 6-1 5rf the dislocation has almost doubled 
back on itself, while in Fig. 6-15e the two parts of the loop have joined 
together. This produces a complete loop and reintroduces the original 
dislocation line DD' . The loop can continue to expand over the slip 
plane with increasing stress. The section DD' will soon straighten out 
under the influence of applied stress and line tension, and the Frank- 
Read source will then be in a position to repeat the process. This process 
can be repeated over and over again at a single source, each time pro- 



186 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 6 

diicing a dislocation loop which produces slip of one Burgers vector along 
the slip plane. However, once the source is initiated, it does not con- 
tinue indefinitely. The back stress produced by the dislocations piling 
up along the slip plane opposes the applied stress. When the back stress 



Fig. 6-16. Frank-Read source in silicon crystal. [W. C. Dash, in "Dislocations and 
Mechanical Properties of Crystals," John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1957.) 

equals the critical stress given by Eq. (6-28), the source will no longer 
operate. 

The most dramatic evidence for the existence of a Frank-Read source 
has been found by Dash^ in silicon crystals decorated with copper. Fig- 
ure 6-16 shows a Frank-Read source in a silicon crystal as photographed 
with infrared light. Evidence has also been found by precipitation tech- 
niques in aluminum alloys and in ionic crystals and by means of thin-film 
electron microscopy in stainless steel. 

6-16. Dislocation Pile-up 

Frequent reference has been made to the fact that dislocations pile up 
on slip planes at obstacles such as grain boundaries, second-phase parti- 
cles, and sessile dislocations. The dislocations in the pile-up will be 

^ W. C. Dash, "Dislocations and Mechanical Properties of Crystals," p. 57, John 
Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1957. 



Sec. 6-16] Dislocation Theory 187 

tightly packed together near the head of the array and more widely 
spaced toward the source (Fig. 6-17). The distribution of dislocations 
of like sign in a pile-up along a single slip plane has been studied by 
Eshelby, Frank, and Nabarro.^ The number of dislocations that can 



Source 




/ 

Fig. 6-17. Dislocation pile-up at an obstacle. 

occupy a distance L along the slip plane between the source and the 
obstacle is 

klTTsL 



n = 



Gh 



(6-29) 



where r,, is the average resolved shear stress in the slip plane and k is a 
factor close to unity. For an edge dislocation k = I — v, while for a 
screw dislocation A- = 1. When the source is located at the center of 
a grain of diameter D, the number of dislocations in the pile-up is given by 

n = ^^ (6-30) 

The factor 4 is used instead of the expected factor of 2 because the back 
stress on the source arises from dislocations piled up on both sides of the 
source. 

A piled-up array of n dislocations can be considered for many purposes 
to be a giant dislocation with Burgers vector nb. At large distances from 
the array the stress due to the dislocations can be considered to be due 
to a dislocation of strength nb located at the center of gravity three- 
quarters of the distance from the source to the head of the pile-up. The 
total slip produced by a pile-up can be considered that due to a single 
dislocation nb moving a distance 3L/4. Very high forces act on the dis- 

1 J. D. Eshelby, F. C. Frank, and F. R. N. Nabarro, Phil. Mag., vol. 42, p. 351, 
1951; calculations for more complicated types of pile-ups have been given by A. K. 
Head, Phil. Mag., vol. 4, pp. 295-302, 1959; experimental confirmation of theory has 
been obtained by Meakin and Wilsdorf, op. cit., pp. 745-752. 



188 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 6 

locations at the head of the pile-up. This force is equal to nbrg, where 
T, is the average resolved shear stress on the slip plane. Koehler^ has 
pointed out that large tensile stresses of the order of nr will be produced 
at the head of a pile-up. Stroh- has made a somewhat more detailed 
analysis of the stress distribution at the head of a dislocation pile-up. 
Using the coordinate system given in Fig. 6-17, he showed that the tensile 
stress normal to a line OP is given by 



m 



- ) Ts sin d cos 2 (6-31) 

The maximum value of a occurs at cos 9 = i^ or 6 = 70.5°. For this 
situation 



(6-32) 



The shear stress acting in the plane OP is given by 

T = ^Ts (jY (6-33) 

where /S is an orientation-dependent factor which is close to unity. 

The number of dislocations which can be supported by an obstacle 
will depend on the type of barrier, the orientation relationship between 
the slip plane and the structural features at the barrier, the material, and 
the temperature. Breakdown of a barrier can occur by slip on a new 
plane, by climb of dislocations around the barrier, or by the generation 
of high enough tensile stresses to produce a crack. 

Fetch's equation that expresses the dependence of yield stress on grain 
size can be developed from the concepts discussed above. Yielding is 
assumed to occur when a critical shear stress Tc is produced at the head 
of the pile-up. This stress is assumed independent of grain size. From 
Eq. (6-30) we get 

7r(l - pWD 



nTs = 



4G6 



It is assumed that the resolved shear stress is equal to the applied stress 
minus the average internal stress required to overcome resistances to dis- 
location motion. If, in addition, shear stresses are converted to uniaxial 
tensile stresses, for example, Tc = o-e/2, the above expression becomes 

7r(l - p)(ao -<r,)-£ ) _ 
8Gb 

1 J. S. Koehler, Phys. Rer., vol. 85, p. -480, 1952. 

2 A. N. Stroh, Proc. Roy. Soc. (London), vol. 223, pp. 404-414, 1954. 



Sec. 6-16] Dislocation Theory 189 

This can be rearranged to give the desired relationship between yield 
stress (To and grain diameter D. 



- = " + VJ^) 5 = - + "'"-' ^"-''^ 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Burgers, J. M., and W. G. Burgers: Dislocations in Crystal Lattices, in F. R. Eirich 
(ed.), "Rheology," vol. I, Academic Press Inc., New York, 1956. 

Cohen, M. (ed.): "Dislocations in Metals," American Institute of Mining and Metal- 
lurgical Engineers, New York, 1953. 

Cottrell, A. H.: "Dislocations and Plastic Flow in Crystals," Oxford University Press, 
New York, 1953. 

Fisher, J. C, W. G. Johnston, R. Thomson, and T. Vreeland, Jr. (eds.): "Dislocations 
and Mechanical Properties of Crystals," John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 
1957. 

Read, W. T., Jr.: "Dislocations in Crystals," McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., 
New York, 1953. 

Schoek, G.: Dislocation Theory of Plasticity of Metals, in "Advances in Applied 
Mechanics," vol. IV, Academic Press, Inc., New York, 1956. 

Van Bueren, H. G.: "Imperfections in Crystals," Interscience Publishers, Inc., New 
York, 1960. 



Chapter 7 
FRACTURE 

7-1 . Introduction 

Fracture is the separation, or fragmentation, of a solid body into two 
or more parts under the action of stress. The process of fracture can be 
considered to be made up of two components, crack initiation and crack 
propagation. Fractures can be classified into two general categories, 
ductile fracture and brittle fracture. A ductile fracture is characterized 
by appreciable plastic deformation prior to and during the propagation 
of the crack. An appreciable amount of gross deformation is usually 
present at the fracture surfaces. Brittle fracture in metals is character- 
ized by a rapid rate of crack propagation, with no gross deformation and 
very little microdeformation. It is akin to cleavage in ionic crystals. 
The tendency for brittle fracture is increased with decreasing temper- 
ature, increasing strain rate, and triaxial stress conditions (usually pro- 
duced by a notch). Brittle fracture is to be avoided at all cost, because 
it occurs without warning and usually produces disastrous consequences. 

This chapter will present a broad picture of the fundamentals of the 
fracture of metals. Since most of the research has been concentrated 
on the problem of brittle fracture, this topic will be given considerable 
prominence. The engineering aspects of brittle fracture will be con- 
sidered in greater detail in Chap. 14. Fracture occurs in characteristic 
ways, depending on the state of stress, the rate of application of stress, 
and the temperature. Unless otherwise stated, it will be assumed in this 
chapter that fracture is produced by a single application of a uniaxial 
tensile stress. Fracture luider more complex conditions will be con- 
sidered in later chapters. Typical examples are fracture due to torsion 
(Chap. 10), fatigue (Chap. 12), and creep (Chap. 13) and low-temper- 
ature brittle fracture, temper embrittlement, or hydrogen embrittlement 
(Chap. 14). 

7-2. Types of Fracture in Metals 

Metals can exhibit many different types of fracture, depending on the 
material, temperature, state of stress, and rate of loading. The two 
190 



7-2] 



Fracture 



191 



broad categories of ductile and brittle fracture have already been con- 
sidered. Figure 7-1 schematically illustrates some of the types of tensile 
fractures which can occur in metals. A brittle fracture (Fig. 7-la) is 
characterized by separation normal to the tensile stress. Outwardly 
there is no evidence of deformation, although with X-ray diffraction 
analysis it is possible to detect a 
thin layer of deformed metal at the 
fracture surface. Brittle fractures 
have been observed in bcc and hep 
metals, but not in fee metals unless 
there are factors contributing to 
grain-boundary embrittlement. 

Ductile fractures can take several 
forms. Single crystals of hep metals 
may slip on successive basal planes {a) 




.■O's 
I 



Fig. 7-1. Tj^pes of fractures observed in 
metals subjected to uniaxial tension, 
(a) Brittle fracture of single crystals 
and polycrystals; (6) shearing fracture 
in ductile single crystals; (c) completely 
ductile fracture in polycrystals; (d) 
ductile fracture in polycrystals. 



until finally the crystal separates by 

shear (Fig. 7-16). Polycrystalline 

specimens of very ductile metals, like 

gold or lead, may actually be drawn 

down to a point before they rupture 

(Fig. 7-lc). In the tensile fracture 

of moderately ductile metals the 

plastic deformation eventually produces a necked region (Fig. 7 -Id). 

Fracture begins at the center of the specimen and then extends by a 

shear separation along the dashed lines in Fig. 7 -Id. This results in the 

familiar "cup-and-cone" fracture. 

Fractures are classified with respect to several characteristics, such as 
strain to fracture, crystallographic mode of fracture, and the appearance 
of the fracture. Gensamer^ has summarized the terms commonly used 
to describe fractures as follows: 



Behavior described 


Terms used 


Crystallographic mode 

Appearance of fracture 


Shear 

Fibrous 

Ductile 


Cleavage 
Granular 


Strain to fracture . . 


Brittle 







A shear fracture occurs as the result of extensive slip on the active 
slip plane. This type of fracture is promoted by shear stresses. The 
cleavage mode of fracture is controlled by tensile stresses acting normal 
to a crystallographic cleavage plane. A fracture surface which is caused 

' M. Gensamer, General Survey of the Problem of Fatigue and Fracture, in "Fatigue, 
and Fracture of Metals," John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1952. 



192 Metallursical Fundamentals 



[Chap. 7 



by shear appears at low magnification to be gray and fibrous, while a 
cleavage fracture appears bright or granular, owing to reflection of light 
from the flat cleavage surfaces. Fracture surfaces frequently consist of 
a mixture of fibrous and granular fracture, and it is customary to report 
the percentage of the surface area represented by one of these categories. 
Based on metallographic examination, fractures in polycrystalline sam- 
ples are classified as either transgranular (the crack propagates through 
the grains) or inter granular (the crack propagates along the grain bound- 
aries). A ductile fracture is one which exhibits a considerable degree of 
deformation. The boundary between a ductile and brittle fracture is 
arbitrary and depends on the situation being considered. For example, 
nodular cast iron is ductile when compared with ordinary gray iron; yet 
it would be considered brittle when compared with mild steel. As a 
further example, a deeply notched tensile specimen will exhibit little 
gross deformation; yet the fracture could occur by a shear mode. 




7-3. Theoretical Cohesive Strength oF Metals 

Metals are of great technological value, primarily because of their high 
strength combined with a certain measure of plasticity. In the most 

basic terms the strength is due to 
the cohesive forces between atoms. 
In general, high cohesive forces are 
related to large elastic constants, 
high melting points, and small coeffi- 
cients of thermal expansion. Figure 
7-2 shows the variation of the cohe- 
sive force between two atoms as a 
function of the separation between 
these atoms. This curve is the re- 
sultant of the attractive and repul- 
sive forces between the atoms. The 
interatomic spacing of the atoms in 
the unstrained condition is indicated 
by ao. If the crystal is subjected to a tensile load, the separation between 
atoms will be increased. The repulsive force decreases more rapidly with 
increased separation than the attractive force, so that a net force between 
atoms balances the tensile load. As the tensile load is increased still 
further, the repulsive force continues to decrease. A point is reached 
where the repulsive force is negligible and the attractive force is decreas- 
ing because of the increased separation of the atoms. This corresponds 
to the maximum in the curve, which is equal to the theoretical cohesive 
strength of the material. 



Separation 
between 
atoms, X 



Fig. 7-2. Cohesive force as a function of 
*^^he separation between atoms. 



Sec. 7-3] Fracture 193 

A good approximation to the theoretical cohesive strength can be 
obtained if it is assumed that the cohesive force curve can be repre- 
sented by a sine curve. 

o- = o-„,a, sm — - (7-1) 

where o-max is the theoretical cohesive strength. The work done during 
fracture, per unit area, is the area under the curve. 

f/o = / <T„ax sm ^- dx. = —^^ (7-2) 

J3 A TT 

The energy per unit area required to produce a new surface is y. If it is 
assumed that all the work involved in fracture goes into creating two new 
surfaces, Eq. (7-2) can be written 

27r'Y 
or (T^a. = -— (7-3) 

Since Hooke's law holds for the initial part of the curve, the stress can 
be written as 

<T = — (7-4) 

do 

In order to eliminate X from Eq. (7-3), take the first derivative of Eq. 

(7-1). 

da _ 2tt 2-wx 

dx ~ '"'"="' y ^°^ IT 

Since cos (27rx/X) is approximately unity for the small values of x which 
are involved, the above expression can be written as 

Also, Eq. (7-4) can be differentiated to give 

dx ao 

Equating (7-5) and (7-6) and substituting into Eq. (7-3) produces the 
final expression for the theoretical cohesive strength of a crystal. 



O" 



(7-7) 



194 Metallurgical Fundamentals 



[Ch 



ap. 



The substitution of reasonable values for the quantities involved in 
the above expression (see Prob. 7-1) results in the prediction of a cohesive 
strength of the order of 2 X 10^ psi. This is 10 to 1,000 times greater 
than the observed fracture strengths of metals. Only the fracture 
strength of dislocation-free metal whiskers approaches the theoretical 
cohesive strength. 



7-4. Griffith Theory of Brittle Fracture 

The first explanation of the discrepancy between the observed fracture 
strength of crystals and the theoretical cohesive strength was proposed 
by Griffith.^ Griffith's theory in its original form is applicable only to 
a perfectly brittle material such as glass. However, while it cannot be 
applied directly to metals, Griffith's ideas have had great influence on 
the thinking about the fracture of metals. 

Griffith proposed that a brittle material contains a population of fine 
cracks which produce a stress concentration of sufficient magnitude so 

that the theoretical cohesive strength is reached 
in localized regions at a nominal stress which is 
well below the theoretical value. When one of 
the cracks spreads into a brittle fracture, it pro- 
duces an increase in the surface area of the sides 
of the crack. This requires energy to overcome 
the cohesive force of the atoms, or, expressed in 
another way, it requires an increase in surface en- 
ergy. The source of the increased surface energy 
is the elastic strain energy which is released as the 
crack spreads. Griffith established the following 
criterion for the propagation of a crack : A crack 
will propagate when the decrease in elastic strain 
energy is at least equal to the energy required to 
create the new crack surface. This criterion can be 
used to determine the magnitude of the tensile 
stress w^hich will just cause a crack of a certain 
size to propagate as a brittle fracture. 
Consider the crack model shown in Fig. 7-3. The thickness of the 
plate is negligible, and so the problem can be treated as one in plane stress. 
The cracks are assumed to have an elliptical cross section. For a crack 
at the interior the length is 2c, while for an edge crack it is c. The effect 
of both types of crack on the fracture behavior is the same. The stress 

1 A. A. Griffith, Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. London, vol. 221A, pp. 163-198 1920; First 
Intn. Congr. Appl. Mech., Delft, 1924, p. 55. 




Fig. 7-3. Griffith crack 
model. 



Sec. 7-4] Fracture 195 

distribution for an elliptical crack was determined by Inglis.^ A decrease 
in strain energy results from the formation of a crack. The elastic strain 
energy per unit of plate thickness is equal to 

U. = - "^ (7-8, 

where a is the tensile stress acting normal to the crack of length 2c. The 
surface energy due to the presence of the crack is 

Us = 4c7 (7-9) 

The total change in potential energy resulting from the creation of the 
crack is 

AU = Us+ Ue (7-10) 

According to Griffith's criterion, the crack will propagate under a con- 
stant applied stress a if an incremental increase in crack length produces 
no change in the total energy of the system; i.e., the increased surface 
energy is compensated by a decrease in elastic strain energy. 



dAU _ = — 
dc dc 



(^^^ - ^-^) 



Equation (7-11) gives the stress required to propagate a crack in a brittle 
material as a function of the size of the microcrack. Note that this 
equation indicates that the fracture stress is inversely proportional to 
the square root of the crack length. Thus, increasing the crack length 
by a factor of 4 reduces the fracture stress by one-half. 

For a plate which is thick compared with the length of the crack (plane 
strain) the Griffith equation is given by 



2Ey 



(1 - j')Vc 



(7-12) 



Analysis of the three-dimensional case, where the crack is a very flat 
oblate spheroid,- results only in a modification to the constant in Griffith's 
equation. Therefore, the simplification of considering only the two- 
dimensional case introduces no large error. 

An alternative way of rationalizing the low fracture strength of solids 

1 C. E. Inglis, Trans. Inst. Naval Architects, vol. 55, pt. I, pp. 219-230, 1913. 

2 R. A. Sack, Proc. Phys. Soc. (London), vol. 58, p. 729, 1946. 



196 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 7 

with the high theoretical cohesive strength was proposed by Orowan.^ 
Inghs showed that the stress at the end of an ellipsoidal crack of length 
2c, with a radius of curvature p at the end of the crack, is given by 

(7-13) 

where o- is the nominal stress when no crack is present. The sharpest 
radius of curvature at the end of the crack should be of the order of the 
interatomic spacing, p = ao. Making this substitution in Eq. (7-13) and 
combining it with Eq. (7-7) results in an expression for the critical stress 
to cause brittle fracture which is similar to Griffith's equation. 



m' 



(7-14) 



Within the accuracy of the estimate, this equation predicts the same 
stress needed to propagate a crack through a brittle solid as the Griffith 
equation. 

Griffith's theory satisfactorily predicts the fracture strength of a com- 
pletely brittle material such as glass. ^ In glass, reasonable values of 
crack length of about 1 n are calculated from Eq. (7-11). For zinc, the 
theory predicts a crack length of several millimeters. This average 
crack length could easily be greater than the thickness of the specimen, 
and therefore the theory cannot apply. 

Early experiments on the fracture of glass fibers showed that strengths 
close to the theoretical fracture strength could be obtained with fibers 
freshly drawn from the melt. The highest fracture strengths were found 
with the smallest-diameter fibers, since on the average these fibers would 
have the shortest microcracks. However, other factors besides diam- 
eter, such as method of preparation, temperature of the melt, and 
amount and rate of drawing from the melt, can affect strength. Recent 
results^ indicate that there is no dependence of strength on diameter 
when different-size glass fibers are prepared under nearly identical con- 
ditions. Experiments on metal whiskers* have also demonstrated frac- 
ture strengths close to the theoretical value. The strength of a metal 
whisker varies inversely with its diameter. This is the type of size 
dependence that would be expected if the strength were controlled by 
the number of surface defects. On the other hand, if the whisker con- 
tains a certain number of dislocation sources, the length of the most 

1 E. Orowan, Welding J., vol. 34, pp. 157s-160s, 1955. 

2 O. L. Anderson, The Griffith Criterion for Glass Fracture, in "Fracture," pp. 331- 
353, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1959. 

3 F. Otto, /. Am. Ceramic Soc, vol. 38, p. 123, 1955. 

< S. S. Brenner, J. Appl. Phys., vol. 27, p. 1484, 1956. 



Sec. 7-5] Fracture 197 

extended source will vary directly with the diameter and the strength 
will again be inversely related to the whisker diameter. Thus, it is not 
possible from the size dependence of strength to establish whether the 
high strength of whiskers is due to a freedom from surface defects or 
dislocations. 

The strength of glass fibers is extremely sensitive to surface defects. 
If the surface of a freshly drawn fiber is touched with a hard object, the 
strength will instantly decrease to a low value. Even the strength of 
a fiber which has not been handled will, under the influence of atmos- 
pheric attack, decrease to a low value within a few hours of being drawn 
from the melt. 

Joffe^ showed that the fracture strength of NaCl crystals could be 
greatly increased when the test was carried out under water. This 
Joffe effect has been attributed to the healing of surface cracks by the 
solution of the salt crystal in the water. The fracture behavior of other 
ionic crystals has been shown to depend on the environment in contact 
with the surface. However, the Joffe effect in these crystals cannot 
always be explained simply by surface dissolution. 

7-5. ModiFications of the Griffith Theory 

Metals which fracture in a brittle manner show evidence of a thin layer 
of plastically deformed metal when the fracture surface is examined by 
X-ray diffraction.- Other indications that brittle fracture in metals is 
always preceded by a small amount of plastic deformation, on a micro- 
scopic scale, are given in Sec. 7-7. Therefore, it appears that Griffith's 
theory, in its original form, should not be expected to apply to the brittle 
fracture of metals. 

Orowan' suggested that the Griffith equation could be made more 
compatible with brittle fracture in metals by the inclusion of a term p 
expressing the plastic work required to extend the crack wall. 



2E(y + p) 



ire 



m' 



(7-15) 



The surface-energy term can be neglected, since estimates of the plastic- 
work term are about 10^ to 10^ ergs/cm^, compared with values of y of 

1 A. F. Joffe, "The Physics of Crystals," McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New- 
York, 1928. 

2E. P. Klier, Trans. ASM, vol. 43, pp. 935-957, 1951; L. C. Chang, /. of Mech. 
andPhys. Solids, vol. 3, pp. 212-217, 1955; D. K. Felbeck and E. Orowan, Welding J., 
vol. 34, pp. 570s-575s, 1955. 

' E. Orowan, in "Fatigue and Fracture of Metals," symposium at Massachusetts 
Institute of Technology, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1950. 



198 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 7 

about 1,000 to 2,000 ergs/cm-. There is some experimental evidence 
that p decreases with decreasing temperature. 

An extension of the Griffith theory into the area of fracture mechanics 
has been made by Irwin. ^ The objective is to find a reHable design cri- 
terion for predicting the stress at which rapidly propagating fractures 
will occur. This is essentially a macroscopic theory that is concerned 
with cracks that are tenths of an inch in length or greater. The quantity 
of interest is the crack-extension force, also called the strain-energy release 
rate. The crack-extension force 9, measured in units of in.-lb/in.^, is the 
quantity of stored elastic strain energy released from a cracking specimen 
as the result of the extension of an advancing crack by a unit area. When 
this quantity reaches a critical value £c, the crack will propagate rapidly. 
9c is the fracture toughness. It represents the fraction of the total work 
expended on the system which is irreversibly absorbed in local plastic 
flow and cleavage to create a unit area of fracture surface. 9c appears 
to be a basic material property which is essentially independent of size 
effects. It does depend on composition, microstructure, temperature, 
and rate of loading. Values of 9c for steel vary from about 100 to 
600 in. -lb/in. 2, depending on temperature and composition. 

To measure 9c, it is necessary to have a reliable mathematical expres- 
sion for 9 in terms of the crack dimensions, the geometry of the speci- 
men, the elastic constants, and the nominal applied stress.^ The speci- 
men is then loaded until a stress is reached at which the crack which was 
initially present in the specimen propagates rapidly. The calculated 
value of 9 for this condition is equal to 9c- For a crack of length 2c in an 
infinitely wide plate the relationship between the stress and 9 is given by 

' - &r 

Comparison of Eq. (7-16) with the modified Griffith equation (7-15) 
shows that 9 is analogous to Orowan's plastic-work factor p. In the 
original Griffith theory, a crack was assumed to propagate rapidly when 
9 = 27. However, in Irwin's modification of this theory 9 is taken as 
an experimentally determined parameter For a finite plate of width L 
with a central crack of length 2c or two edge cracks of length c, the crack- 
extension force for tensile loading is given by 

= ^ (1 - .^) tan (^) (7-17) 



E 



^ G. R. Irwin, Naval Research Lab. Rept. 4763, May, 1956, available from Office of 
Technical Services, PB 121224; G. R. Irwin, J. A. Kies, and H. L. Smith, Proc. ASTM, 
vol. 58, pp. 640-660, 1958. 

2 Detailed procedures for measuring 9c in tension have been presented in the ASTM 
Bulletin, January and February, 1960. Methods using a notched-bend test and a high- 
speed rotating disk have been given by D. H. Winne and B. M. Wundt, Trans. 
ASME, vol. 80, p. 1643, 1958. 



Sec. 7-6] 



Fracture 



199 



7-6. Fracture of Sinsle Crystals 

The brittle fracture of single crystals is considered to be related to the 
resolved normal stress on the cleavage plane. Sohncke's law states that 
fracture occurs when the resolved normal stress reaches a critical value. 
Considering the situation used to develop the resolved shear stress for 
slip (Fig. 4-18), the component of the tensile force which acts normal to 
the cleavage plane is P cos </>, where is the angle between the tensile axis 
and the normal to the plane. The area of the cleavage plane is A /(cos <^). 
Therefore, the critical normal stress for brittle fracture is 

P cos </) P 



A/(cos 4>) A 



= -r cos" 



(7-18) 



The cleavage planes for certain metals and values of the critical normal 
stress are given in Table 7-1. 

Table 7-1 
Critical Normal Stress for Cleavage of Single Crystals t 



Metal 


Crystal 
lattice 


Cleavage plane 


Temper- 
ature, 
°C 


Critical 
normal 

stress, 
kg/mm^ 


Iron 


boo 

hep 
hep 
hep 
hep 

Hexagonal 

Rhombohedral 

Rhombohedral 


(100) 

(0001) 

(0001) 

(0001) 

(0001), (1011) 

(1012), (1010) 

(1010) 

(111) 

(111) 


-100 
-185 
-185 
-185 
-185 

20 
20 
20 


26 


Zinc (0.03% Cd) 

Zinc (0.13% Cd) 

Zinc (0.53 % Cd) 

Magnesium 


27.5 
0.19 
0.30 
1.20 


Tellurium 


0.43 


Bismuth 


32 


Antimony 


66 







t Data from C. S. Barrett, "Structure of Metals," 2d ed., McGraw-Hill Book Com- 
pany, Inc., New York, 1952; N. J. Fetch, The Fracture of Metals, in "Progress in 
Metal Physics," vol. 5, Fergamon Press, Ltd., London, 1954. 

Although Sohncke's law has been accepted for over 25 years, it is not 
based on very extensive experimental evidence. Doubt was cast on its 
reliability by fracture studies^ on zinc single crystals at —77 and — iy6°C. 
The resolved normal cleavage stress was found to vary by over a factor 
of 10 for a large difference in orientation of the crystals. This vari- 
ation from the normal-stress law may be due to plastic strain prior to 
fracture, although it is doubtful that this could account for the observed 
discrepancy. 

1 A. Deruyttere and G. B. Greenough, /. Inst. Metals, vol. 84, pp. 337-345, 1955-56. 



200 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 7 

Several modes of ductile fracture in single crystals are shown in Fig. 
7-1. Under certain conditions hep metals tested at room temperature 
or above will shear only on a restricted number of basal planes. Frac- 
ture will then occur by "shearing off" (Fig. 7-16). More usually, slip 
will occur on systems other than the basal plane, so that the crystal 
necks down and draws down almost to a point before rupture occurs. 
The usual mode of fracture in fee crystals is the formation of a necked 
region due to multiple slip, followed by slip on one set of planes until 
fracture occurs. The crystal can draw down to a chisel edge or a point 
(if multiple slip continues to fracture). The best stress criterion for 
ductile fracture in fee metals appears to be the resolved shear stress on 
the fracture plane (which is usually the slip plane). 

The mode of fracture in bcc iron crystals is strongly dependent on 
temperature, purity, heat treatment, and crystal orientation. ^ Crystals 
located near the [001] corner of the stereographic triangle show no measur- 
able ductility when tested in tension at — 196°C, while crystals closer to 
[111] and [Oil] orientations may rupture by drawing down to a chisel edge 
when tested at the same temperature. An interesting point is that the 
change from brittle to ductile fracture is very sharp, occurring over a 
change in orientation of only about 2°. 

7-7. Metallosraphic Aspects of Brittle Fracture 

Because of the prominence of the Griffith theory, it has been natural 
for metallurgists to use their microscopes in a search for Griffith cracks in 
metals. However, based on observations up to the magnifications avail- 
able with the electron microscope, there is no reliable evidence that 
Griffith cracks exist in metals in the unstressed condition. There is, 
however, a growing amount of experimental evidence to show that 
microcracks can be produced by plastic deformation. 

Metallographic evidence of the formation of microcracks at nonmetallic 
inclusions in steel as a result of plastic deformation has existed for a num- 
ber of years. These microcracks do not necessarily produce brittle frac- 
ture. However, they do contribute to the observed anisotropy in the 
ductile-fracture strength. The fact that vacuum-melted steel, which is 
very low in inclusions, shows a reduction in the fracture anisotropy sup- 
ports the idea of microcracks being formed at second-phase particles. 

An excellent correlation between plastic deformation, microcracks, and 
brittle fracture was made by Low.^ He showed that for mild steel of a 

1 N. P. Allen, B. E. Hopkins, and J. E. McLennan, Proc. Roy. Soc. (London), vol. 
234A, p. 221, 1956. 

2 J. R. Low, I.U.T.A.M. Madrid Colloqium, "Deformation and Flow of Solids," 
p. 60, Springer- Verlag OHG, Berlin, 1956. 



Sec. 7-7] Fracture 201 

given grain size tested at — 196°C brittle fracture occurs in tension at 
the same value of stress that is required to produce yielding in com- 
pression. Microcracks only one or two grains long were observed. More 
detailed studies of the conditions for microcrack formation have been 
made^ with tensile tests on mild steel at carefully controlled subzero tem- 
peratures. Figure 7-4 illustrates a typical microcrack found in a speci- 
men before it fractured. 

The correlation between the temperature dependence of yield stress, 



^^^0^ 

/'^ 





Fig. 7-4. Microcracks produced in iron by tensile deformation at — 140°C. 250 X- 
{Courtesy G. T. Hahn.) 

fracture stress, and ductility and microcrack formation is shown in Fig. 
7-5. In region A, in the neighborhood of room temperature, a tensile 
specimen fails with a ductile cup-and-cone fracture. The reduction of 
area at fracture is of the order of 50 to 60 per cent. In region B the 
fracture is still ductile, but the outer rim of the fracture contains cleavage 
facets. A transition from ductile to brittle fracture occurs at the duc- 
tility transition temperature Td. The existence of a transition temper- 
ature is indicated by the drop in the reduction of area at the fracture 
to practically a zero value. Accompanying this is a large decrease in 
the fracture stress. The percentage of grains containing microcracks 
increases rapidly in region C just below Td. However, microcracks are 
found above Td. Therefore, the ductility transition occurs when the 
conditions are suitable for the growth of microcracks into propagating 
fractures. The initiation of microcracks is not a sufficient criterion for 

• G. T. Hahn, W. S. Owen, B. L. Averbach, and M. Cohen, Welding J., vol. 38, 
pp. 367s-376s, 1959. 



202 Metallurgical Fundamentals 



[Chap. 7 



brittle fracture. Microcracks occur only in regions which have under- 
gone discontinuous yielding as a result of being loaded through the upper 
yield point. As the temperature drops in region C, eventually the frac- 
ture stress drops to a value equal to the lower yield stress. In region D 
the lower yield stress and fracture stress are practically identical. Frac- 
ture occurs at a value equal to the lower yield stress after the material 



CJ» o 
-t- o 



Lower yield ^ 
stress - 




-Reduction 
in area 



tl^icrocraclfs 




100 



Temoeroture, °C 

Fig. 7-5. Temperature dependence of fracture stress, yield stress, and microcrack fre- 
quency for mild steel. {After G. T. Hahn, W. S. Owen, B. L. Averbach, and M. Cohen, 
Welding J., vol. 38, p. 372s, 1959.) 

has undergone some discontinuous yielding. The fracture stress increases 
because the yield stress is increasing with decreasing temperature. In 
region E cleavage fracture occurs abruptly before there is time for dis- 
continuous yielding. Presumably fracture occurs at the first spot to 
undergo discontinuous yielding. Finally, at very low temperatures in 
region F fracture is initiated by mechanical twins. Mechanical twins are 
observed at temperatures as high as Td, but it is only in region F that 
they appear to be the source of initiation of fracture. 

Detailed experiments such as these demonstrate that the cracks respon- 
sible for brittle-cleavage-type fracture are not initiallj'- present in the 
material but are produced by the deformation process. The fact that 
at appropriate temperatures appreciable numbers of microcracks are 



Sec. 7-7] 



Fractu 



re 



203 



present shows that the conditions for the initiation of a crack are not 
necessarily the same as conditions for the propagation of a crack. The 
process of cleavage fracture should be considered to be made up of 
three steps, (1) plastic deformation, (2) crack initiation, and (3) crack 
propagation. 

Most brittle fractures occur in a transgranular manner. However, if 
the grain boundaries contain a film of brittle constituent, as in sensitized 



7^^ 




Fig. 7-6. Cleavage steps and river pattern on a cleavage surface. 

austenitic stainless steel or molybdenum alloys containing oxygen, nitro- 
gen, or carbon, the fracture will occur in an intergranular manner. Inter- 
granular failure can also occur without the presence of a microscopically 
visible precipitate at the grain boundaries. Apparently, segregation at 
the grain boundaries can lower the surface energy sufficiently to cause 
intergranular failure. The embrittlement produced by the addition of 
antimony to copper and oxygen to iron and the temper embrittlement 
of alloy steels are good examples. 

Sometimes a considerable amount of information can be obtained by 
examining the surfaces of the fracture at fairly high magnifications. This 
type of examination is known as fractography.^ At high magnification, 
transgranular-cleavage surfaces usually contain a large number of cleav- 
age steps and a "river pattern" of branching cracks (Fig. 7-6). These 
are indications of the absorption of energy by local deformation. The 

' C. A. Zappfe and C. O. Worden, Trans. ASM, vol. 42, pp. 577-603, 1950. 



204 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 7 

surfaces of intergranular brittle fractures are mvich smoother, with a 
general absence of cleavage steps. From the appearance of the fracture 
surface, the energy absorbed in an intergranular fracture is much lower 
than for transgranular cleavage. 

7-8. Dislocation Theories of Fracture 

The idea that the high stresses produced at the head of a dislocation 
pile-up could produce fracture was first advanced by Zener.^ The shear 
stress acting on the slip plane squeezes the dislocations together. At 
some critical value of stress the dislocations at the head of the pile-up 
are pushed so close together that they coalesce into an embryonic crack 
or cavity dislocation. After analyzing the stresses at a dislocation pile-up 
and making use of the Griffith criterion, Stroh^ has proposed that a cleav- 
age crack can form when n dislocations piled up under the action of a 
resolved shear stress r^ satisfy the condition 

nbTs = 127 (7-19) 

where b is the Burgers vector and y is the surface energy. The length 
of the slip plane that the pile-up will occupy is given by 



nbG 



7r(l — v)ts 
Eliminating n from these equations gives 



(7-20) 



rs^L = ^^ (7-21) 

7r(l — V) 

When a specimen of grain size D is tested in tension, Ts = (t/2 and 
L = D/2. The fracture stress in tension can be expressed in terms of 
grain size by 

QGy 



0-/ 



7r(l - v) 



' D-''- = KD-^'^ (7-22) 



However, Petch^ has found that experimental data for iron and steel 
agree best with an equation of the type 

as = a + KD-^'^ (7-23) 

^ C. Zener, The Micro-mechanism of Fracture, in "Fracturing of Metals," American 
Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1948. 

2 A. N. Stroh, Proc. Roy. Soc. (London), vol. 223 A, p. 404, 1954; Phil. Mag., vol. 46, 
p. 968, 1955. 

3 N. J. Fetch, /. Iron Steel Inst. {London), vol. 174, p. 25, 1953. 



Sec. 7-8] Fracture 205 

This equation is very similar to the equation expressing the grain-size 
dependence of the yield strength. 

(TO = cr, + KyD-^'^ (7-24) 

This similarity is to be expected in view of the fact that yielding and 
brittle fracture are closely related. In both equations ai is the frictional 
stress resisting the motion of an unlocked dislocation. This term 
increases with decreasing temperature of testing. The constant K in 
the fracture equation is given approximately by Eq. (7-22). The con- 
stant Ky in the yield-strength equation is a measure of the localized stress 
needed to unlock dislocations held up at a grain boundary so that yield- 
ing can be transmitted to the next grain by the propagation of a Liiders 
band. This quantity is important in current theories of fracture. 

The fact that brittle fracture can occur in single crystals suggests that 
the role of grain boundaries as barriers for dislocation pile-up may be 
overemphasized in current theories. Also, it is questionable that the 
necessary stress concentration can be produced at the head of a pile-up 
before slip occurs in the neighboring grains to relieve the high localized 
stresses. It is possible that deformation twins may act as barriers for 
dislocation pile-up. For example, the strong orientation dependence of 
the brittle fracture of iron single crystals can be explained' on this basis. 
While there is experimental evidence to indicate that twin intersections 
may initiate brittle fracture,- there is also evidence to show that brittle 
fracture can be produced in the absence of mechanical twins. Another 
mechanism by which cracks can form is the glide of dislocations on inter- 
secting slip planes according to the hypothesis of CottrelP (see Sec. 6-6 
and Fig. 6-9). This mechanism is energetically favorable for a bcc and 
hep metal, but not for an fee lattice, in agreement with the fact that 
fee metals do not undergo brittle fracture. 

A consideration of the known facts of fracture has led Cottrell and 
Fetch independently to conclude that the growth of a microcrack into a 
self-propagating fracture is a more difficult step than the nucleation of 
microcracks from glide dislocations. Support for this viewpoint is found 
in the fact that many nonpropagating microcracks are observed. More- 
over, crack nucleation by dislocation coalescence should depend only on 
the shear stress, not the hydrostatic component of stress. But there is 
ample experimental evidence that fracture is strongly influenced by the 
hydrostatic component of stress (see Sec. 7-16). If the propagation of 
microcracks, according to a Griffith-type criterion, is the controlling step 
in fracture, the stress normal to the crack would be an important factor. 

1 H. K. Birnbaum, Acta Met., vol. 7, pp. 516-517, 1959. 

2 D. Hull, Acta Met., vol. 8, pp. 11-18, 1960. 

3 A. H. Cottrell, Trans. Met. Soc. AIME, vol. 212, pp. 192-203, 1958. 



206 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 7 

This should lead to a strong dependence of fracture on the hydrostatic 
component of stress. 

Utilizing the Griffith criterion, Cottrell^ has shown that the stress 
required to propagate a microcrack is given by 

.-^ (7-25) 

where n is the number of dislocations of Burgers vector h that coalesce 
into the crack and y is the surface energy of the crack. To evaluate nh, 
assume that a slip plane of length L is acted on by an applied shear stress 
r ~ a/2. The effective shear stress on the slip plane is given by r — n-, 
where n is the frictional resistance. The shear displacement at the center 
of the length L is given by (r — Ti)L/G, and this is approximately equal to 
nh. If L is taken as about one-half the average grain diameter D, 

Equation (7-24) can be written in terms of shear stress as 

TO = r. + k,D-'^^ (7-27) 

Writing Eq. (7-25) as nhro = y and substituting for nh and to from the 
above equations results in 

inD'^'- + k,)k, = (?7/3 (7-28) 

or the equivalent relationship 

TokyDy^ = Gyl3 (7-29) 

In the above equations /3 is a term which expresses the ratio of the maxi- 
mum shear stress to the maximum normal stress. For torsion /3 = 1, 
for tension jS = 3^^, and for the plastically constrained region at the root 
of a notch j8 « 3^. 

When the glide dislocations coalesce into a crack or a cavity disloca- 
tion, the frictional resistance to glide equals zero. Therefore, by making 
substitutions from the above equations into Eq. (7-25) one arrives at an 
expression for the stress required to propagate a microcrack of length D. 

. - 2 (^^y (7-30) 

Equations (7-28) and (7-29) express the limiting conditions for the for- 
mation of propagating crack from a pile-up of glide dislocations. If con- 
ditions are such that the left-hand side of the equation is less than the 
» Ihid. 



7-8] 



Fract 



ure 



207 



right-hand side, a crack can form but it cannot grow beyond a certain 
length. This is the case of nonpropagating microcracks. When the left- 
hand side of the equations is greater than the right side, a propagating 
brittle fracture can be produced at a shear stress equal to the yield stress. 
Therefore, these equations predict a ductile-to-brittle transition, such 
as was shown in Fig. 7-5 for tension tests on mild steel at decreasing 
temperature. 

The equations describing the ductile-to-brittle transition are expressed 
in terms of the following metallurgical or mechanical factors: grain size, 
state of stress, surface energy, yield stress, friction stress, and k,,. The 
parameter ky is very important, since it determines the number of dis- 
locations that are released into a pile-up when a source is unlocked. 
Table 7-2 gives some typical values of ky obtained from measurements of 

Table 7-2 
Values of ky/Gf 



Material 


Temperature, 
°K 


ky/G, 
cm '/^ 


Iron 

Molybdenum 

Columbium 

Tantalum 


300 
300 
200 
200 


0.4 X 10-" 
0.55 X 10-" 
0.1 X 10-" 
0.1 X 10-" 



t A. H. Cottrell, Trans. Met. Soc. AIME, vol. 212, p. 194, 1958. 



fracture stress vs. grain size. Large values of ky indicate brittle behavior, 
which agrees with the observations that pure columbium and tantalum 
are less prone to brittle fracture than the other bcc metals, iron and 
molybdenum. Equation (7-28) shows that at a constant temperature 
there is a certain grain size above which the metal will be brittle and 
below which it will be ductile. This is shown in Fig. 7-7, where above a 
certain grain size there is measurable ductility at fracture. The fric- 
tional resistance n increases with decreasing temperature. However, 
since this term enters into Eq. (7-28) as the product of Z)'^, it can be seen 
that a fine-grained metal can withstand higher values of r, (lower temper- 
atures) before becoming brittle. Many of the effects of the composition 
of steel on the ductile-to-brittle transition are due to changes in grain size 
or in ky or r,. For example, manganese decreases the grain size and 
reduces ky, while silicon produces larger grain size and increases r,. 

The yield stress increases with decreasing temperature, and in agree- 
ment with Eq. (7-29) this increases the tendency for brittle fractvire. If 
conditions are such that microcracks cannot propagate at the yield point, 
it is necessary to increase the stress by At in order to produce fracture. 



208 Metallursical Fundamentals 

From Eq. (7-29), the necessary value of shear stress is 

T/ = To + Ar = -^ D-H 



[Chap. 7 



(7-31) 



This predicts that fracture stress is a linear function of Z)~5^^, which 
extrapolates to zero at D~5^^ = 0. Figure 7-7 shows that this relation- 
ship is satisfied. In the region of grain size for which cracks propagate 
as completely brittle fractures, the fracture stress equals the yield stress. 



200 



-3 



Approximate ASTM, G.S. No. 
13 5 6 



I i r 

X Fracture stress 

o Yie/d stress 

o Strain to fracture 




0.6 ^ 

0.4 o 

0.2 I 
^ 



1 2 ^ _i "^ 1 5 6 

(Grain diameter)" ^2 ^ rnm~ ^2 

Fig. 7-7. Effect of grain size on the yield and fracture stresses for a low-carbon steel 
tested in tension at — 196°C. (/. R. Low, in "Relation of Properties to Microstructure," 
American Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1954.) 



This branch of the curve extrapolates to the fracture stress for a single 
crystal. 

High values of surface energy tend to promote ductile fracture. 
Unfortunately, this is not a factor which is readily increased, although 
various environmental and metallurgical conditions may lower the sur- 
face energy. The embrittlement of steel due to hydrogen has been 
attributed to this factor. Intergranular fracture due to an embrittling 
film may also be explained in this way. 

It is well known that the presence of a notch greatly increases the 
tendency for brittle fracture. The complicated effects of a notch will be 
considered more fully in Sec. 7-12. The effect of a notch in decreasing 
the ratio of shear stress to tensile stress is covered in Cottrell's equations 
by the constant /3. Strain rate or rate of loading does not enter explicitly 
into Cottrell's equations. However, for a notch to produce the plastic 



7-9] 



Fracture 



209 



constraint that results in a value of j8 c^ 3^', it is necessary for the material 
to yield locally. At high rates of strain, such as occur in a notched- 
impact test, yielding will have to occur more rapidly. As is indicated by 
Eq. (7-32) in the next section, this can occur at the same value of ro if the 
temperature is increased. Therefore, increasing the strain rate raises the 
transition temperature. 

7-9. Delayed Yielding 

A phenomenon which is important to brittle fracture is delayed yielding. 
When certain metals, notably mild steel, are rapidly loaded to a constant 




10 



10' 



10 



10"2 10"' 1 10 

Delay time, sec 



10^ 



10^ 



10" 



Fig. 7-8. Delay time for initiation of yielding in mild steel as a function of stress. 
(D. S. Clark, Trans. ASM, vol. 46, p. 49, 1954.) 



stress above the yield stress, it is found that a certain delay time is required 
before plastic yielding occurs.^ Figure 7-8 shows that the delay time 
increases with decreasing temperature at a constant stress. For a con- 
stant temperature, the delay time increases with decreasing stress. The 
lower limiting stress shown by the horizontal portion of the curves corre- 
sponds to the upper yield point for tests carried out at slow speeds. 

The temperature dependence of the delay time may be expressed by 
an exponential relationship 



t = to exp 



kT 



(7-32) 



1 D. S. Clark, Trans. ASM, vol. 46, p. 34, 1954. 



210 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 7 

where t = delay time 

^0 = a constant, approximately 10~^^ sec 
A; = Boltzmann's constant 
Q{a/ao) = stress-dependent activation energy 

Cottrell' has estimated that Qia/ao), in electron volts, is given approxi- 
mately by 0.9(1 — o"/a■o)^ where a is the applied stress and o-q is the yield 
stress. 

The fact that brittle fracture occurs when plastic deformation fails to 
keep the stress below a critical value indicates that there should be a 
connection between delayed yielding and brittle fracture. The delay 
time is quite temperature-dependent, and so is brittle fracture. In the 
temperature region where brittle fracture is caused by an avalanche of 
dislocations breaking away from a barrier and running together to form 
a crack, delayed yielding probably plays the important role of localizing 
the slip by preventing nearby dislocation sources from operating. At 
temperatures where the metal fractures in a ductile manner the delay 
time is so short that slip occurs around the pile-ups and the high localized 
stresses are dissipated by plastic deformation. This agreement is sup- 
ported by the fact that metals which have a ductile-to-brittle fracture 
transition also have a delayed yield phenomenon. 

7-10. Velocity of Crack Propagation 

Brittle fracture is not possible unless the cracks which are nucleated 
can propagate at a high velocity throughout the metal. Mott^ has made 
an analysis of the velocity of a crack in an ideal elastic, isotropic medium. 
The elastic energy that is released by the movement of the crack is the 
driving force. This must be balanced by the surface energy of the new 
surface that is created and the kinetic energy associated with the rapid 
sidewise displacement of material on each side of the crack. The crack 
velocity v is given by 

V = Bvo ( 1 - — ) (7-33) 

jrhere -B is a constant and Vo = {E/p)'' is the velocity of sound in the 
material. The term cg is the length of a Griffith crack, as evaluated by 
Eq. (7-11), and c is the actual crack length. When c is large compared 
with Cg, Eq. (7-33) approaches the limiting value Bvq. The constant has 
been evaluated^ for the plane-stress condition and found tohe B c^ 0.38. 

1 A. H. Cottrell, Proc. Conf. on Properties Materials at High Rates of Strain, Institu- 
tion of Mechanical Engineers, London, 1957. 

2 N. F. Mott, Engineering, vol. 165, p. 16, 1948. 

» D. K. Roberts and A. A. Wells, Engineering, vol. 178, p. 820, 1954. 



Sec. 7-11] 



Fracture 



211 



Table 7-3 shows that experimental values for the crack velocity in brittle 
materials agree quite well with the theoretical prediction that the limiting 
crack velocity is given by 

V = 0.38^0 = 0.38 ( - ) ^" (7-34) 



-Kf) 



Table 7-3 
Velocity of Propagation of Brittle Fracture 



Material 


Observed 

velocity, 

ft /sec 


v/vo 


Reference 


Steel 

Fused quartz 

Lithium fluoride 


6,000 
7,200 
6,500 


0.36 
0.42 
0.31 


t 
§ 



t T. S. Robertson, J. Iron Steel Inst. (London), vol. 175, p. 361, 1953. 

t H. Schardin and W. Struth, Glastech. Ber., vol. 16, p. 219, 1958. 

§ J. J. Oilman, C. Knudsen, and W. P. Walsh, J. Appl. Phys., vol. 29, p. 601, 1958. 



7-11. Ductile Fracture 

Ductile fracture has been studied much less extensively than brittle 
fracture, probably because it is a much less serious problem. Up to this 
point ductile fracture has been defined rather ambiguously as fracture 
occurring with appreciable gross plastic deformation. Another impor- 
tant characteristic of ductile fracture, which should be apparent from 
previous considerations of brittle fracture, is that it occurs by a slow 
tearing of the metal with the expenditure of considerable energy. Many 
varieties of ductile fractures can occur during the processing of metals 
and their use in different types of service. For simplification, the dis- 
cussion in this section will be limited to ductile fracture of metals pro- 
duced in uniaxial tension. Other aspects of tensile fracture are con- 
sidered in Chap. 9. Ductile fracture in tension is usually preceded by 
a localized reduction in diameter called necking. Very ductile metals 
may actually draw down to a line or a point before separation. This 
kind of failure is usually called rupture. 

The stages in the development of a ductile "cup-and-cone" fracture 
are illustrated in Fig. 7-9. Necking begins at the point of plastic insta- 
bility where the increase in strength due to strain hardening fails to 
compensate for the decrease in cross-sectional area (Fig. 7-9a). This 
occurs at maximum load or at a true strain equal to the strain-hardening 
coefficient (see Sec. 9-3). The formation of a neck introduces a triaxial 
state of stress in the region. A hydrostatic component of tension acts 



212 Metallurgical Fundamentals 



[Chap. 7 



along the axis of the specimen at the center of the necked region. Many 
fine cavities form in this region (Fig. 7-96), and under continued strain- 
ing these grow and coalesce into a central crack (Fig. 7-9c). This crack 
grows in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the specimen until it 




Shear 




Fibrous 



(^1 ie) 

Fig. 7-9. Stages in the formation of a cup-and-cone fracture. 



approaches the surface of the specimen. It then propagates along local- 
ized shear planes at roughly 45° to the axis to form the "cone" part of 
the fracture (Fig. 7-9d). 

When the central "cup" region of the fracture is viewed from above, 
it has a very fibrous appearance, much as if the individual elements of 
the specimen were split into longitudinal fibers and were then drawn 
down to a point before rupture. When the fracture is sectioned longi- 
tudinally, the central crack has a zigzag contour, such as would be pro- 
duced by tearing between a number of holes. The outer cone of the 
fracture is a region of highly localized shear. Extensive localized defor- 
mation occurs by the sliding of grains over one another, and because the 



Sec. 7-1 2] Fracture 21 3 

shear fracture propagates rapidly compared with the fibrous fracture, 
there is appreciable localized heating. 

Fetch ^ has shown that the fracture stress (corrected for necking) for 
the ductile fracture of iron has the same dependence on grain size as is 
found for brittle fracture. This suggests that the voids are nucleated 
by dislocation pile-ups at grain boundaries. However, it is extremely 
unlikely that dislocation pile-ups large enough to produce cavity dis- 
locations can be produced in ductile fee metals like aluminum and copper. 
Instead, voids in these metals appear to be nucleated at foreign particles 
such as oxide particles, impurity phases, or second-phase particles. 
Under tensile strain either the metal separates from the inclusion, or 
the inclusion itself fractures. ^ Even in metals for which no crack- 
nucleating second-phase particles can be observed, it appears that 
fracture-nucleating elements are present before deformation. This is 
borne out by the fact that the fracture stress and reduction in area can 
be appreciably lower when tested in a direction perpendicular to the 
original rolling or extrusion direction than when tested in the direction 
of working, even though all microstructural evidence of working has been 
removed by heat treatment and there is no strong crystallographic 
texture. It must be assumed that working elongates these "sites" so 
that they open into voids more readily when the tensile stress is applied 
perpendicular to their length. 

7-1 2. Notch Effect in Fracture 

The changes produced by the introduction of a notch have important 
implications for the fracture of metals. The presence of a notch will 
very appreciably increase the temperature at which a steel changes from 
ductile to brittle fracture. The introduction of a notch results in a stress 
concentration at the root of the notch. Figure 7-10 shows the non- 
uniform distribution of the longitudinal tensile stress in a notched tensile 
bar. When yielding occurs at the root of the notch, the stress concen- 
tration is reduced. However, transverse and radial stresses are set up 
in the vicinity of the notch (Fig. 7-10). The radial stress <tr is zero at 
the free surface at the root of the notch, but it rises to a high value in 
the interior of the specimen and then drops off again. The transverse 
stress (tt acts in the circumferential direction of a cylindrical specimen. 
This stress drops from a high value at the notch root to a lower value 
at the specimen axis. 

The occurrence of this state of stress can be explained by the con- 
straints to plastic flow which a notch sets up. For an equilibrium of 

1 N. J. Fetch, Phil. Mag., ser. 8, vol. 1, p. 186, 1956. 

2 K. E. Puttick, Phil. Mag., ser. 8, vol. 4, p. 964, 1959. 



214 Metallursical Fundamentals 



[Ch 



ap. 



forces to be maintained in the notched bar, it is necessary that no stresses 
act normal to the free surfaces of the notch. All the tensile load must be 
taken by the metal in the core of the notch. Therefore, a relatively large 
mass of unstressed metal exists around a central core of highly stressed 
material. The central core tries to contract laterally because of the Pois- 

son effect, but it is restrained by what amounts 
to a hoop of unstressed material around it. 
The resistance of the unstressed mass of ma- 
terial to the deformation of the central core 
produces radial and transverse stresses. 

The existence of radial and transverse 
stresses (triaxial stress state) raises the value 
of longitudinal stress at which yielding occurs. 
For simplification, consider that yielding oc- 
curs at a critical shear stress Tc. For an un- 
notched tension specimen this critical value is 
given by 

Tc - 2 

For a notched tension specimen this becomes 




Fig. 7-10. Stress distribution 
produced in notched cylinder 
under uniaxial loading, ctl = 
longitudinal stress; or = 
transverse stress; o-r = ra- 
dial stress. 



Since the critical shear stress for yielding is 
the same for both cases, it is apparent from 
these equations that the existence of trans- 
verse stresses requires a higher longitudinal 
stress to produce yielding. The entire flow 
curve of a notched specimen is raised over 
that for an unnotched specimen because of this effect. The amount by 
which the flow curve is raised because of the notch can be expressed by a 
plastic-constraint factor q. 

Plastic constraint differs from elastic-stress concentration in a basic 
way. From elastic considerations the stress concentration at the root of 
a notch can be made extremely high as the radius at the root of 
the notch approaches zero. When plastic deformation occurs at the root 
of the notch, the elastic-stress concentration is reduced to a low value. 
However, plastic deformation produces plastic constraint at the root of 
the notch. In contrast to elastic-stress concentrations, no matter how 
sharp the notch the plastic-constraint factor^ cannot exceed a value of 
about 3. 

' E. Orowan, J. F. Nye, and W. J. Cairns, "Strength and Testing of Materials," 
vol. 1, H. M. Stationery Office, London, 1952. 



>cc. 



7-13] 



Fracture 



215 



A third important contribution of a notch is to produce an increase in 
the local strain rate. While the notch is still loaded in the elastic region, 
the stress at a point near the notch is rapidly increasing with time because 
of the sharp gradients. Since stress is proportional to strain, there is a 
high local elastic strain rate. When yielding occurs, the plastic flow 
tends to relieve the stresses. The stress picture changes from one of 
high elastic stresses to a lower plastic constraint, and in so doing a high 
plastic strain rate develops near the notch. 



7-1 3. Concept of the Fracture Curve 

In earlier chapters it was shown that the flow curve, or the true stress- 
strain curve, can be considered to represent the stress required to cause 
plastic flow at any particular value of plastic strain. In an analogous 
manner it was proposed by Ludwik^ that a metal has a fracture stress 

BritfleS^-—"- — ——- 



Fraclurecurje__^ 


«i 






^r ' 


!>>l 




«.. 




^ 




■C: 1 




^1 




5^1 




1 
1 
1 




True strain e 

Fig. 7-1 1 . Schematic drawing of intersec- 
tion of flow curve and fracture curve ac- 
cording to the Ludwik theory. 



True strain e 

Fig. 7-12. Modification of the Ludwik 
theory to include shear and brittle frac- 
ture curves. 



curve which indicates the stress required to cause fracture at any value 
of plastic strain. He further suggested that fracture would occur when 
the flow curve intersects the fracture curve (Fig. 7-11). This concept 
was widely accepted until after World War II, and several measurements 
of the fracture curve were attempted. However, it eventually was real- 
ized that basic factors in the fracture mechanism of metals prevent a 
correct determination of the fracture curve of metals. Since this reali- 
zation, the idea of the fracture curve has lost much of its popularity. 
It is, however, still a useful concept for obtaining a qualitatively correct 
picture of the fracture phenomenon if the limitations which will be dis- 
cussed shortly are recognized. With this in mind, and in view of the 
current realization that both shear and cleavage fractures are possible in 
metals, it is often found that a separate fracture curve for each mode of 
fracture is considered, as shown in Fig. 7-12. The curves in this figure 

1 P. Ludwik, Z. Ver. deut. Ing., vol. 71, pp. 1532-1538, 1927. 



216 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 7 

are for the ordinary tensile fracture of a ductile metal in which a shear 
type of fracture takes place. The separation between the two fracture 
curves and their relative height will be different for other conditions of 
fracture. 

In principle, a point on the fracture curve is obtained by plastically 
straining a specimen to a given point on the flow curve and then intro- 
ducing embrittling parameters (low temperature or a notch) so that the 
specimen is stressed to failure without added strain. By repeating this 
process with different specimens stressed to different values of plastic 
strain it would be possible to construct the entire fracture curve. How- 
ever, since the embrittling effect of a notch is limited to a plastic-con- 
straint factor of about 3, it is generally more effective to attempt to 
resist any further deformation by carrying out the test at a very low 
temperature. Actually, with most metals this is not possible since a 
slight amount of deformation invariably results on straining at low tem- 
perature. In view of the evidence that fracture is initiated by plastic 
deformation, it would appear that the fracture stress measured by this 
technique does not measure the true resistance of the metal to fracture. 
Further, the fracture stress for ductile fracture is very difficult to meas- 
ure accurately because the ductile fracture is initiated at the interior of 
the specimen, and the stress distribution is complicated by necking of the 
tensile specimen. Therefore, there is no reliable method for determining 
the fracture curve of metals. However, this does not prohibit using the 
concept of the fracture stress, in a qualitative sense, where it is useful 
for describing certain aspects of fracture. 

7-14. Classical Theory of the Ductile-to-Brittle Transition 

Brittle fracture is promoted by three main factors, (1) a triaxial state 
of stress, (2) a low temperature, and (3) a high strain rate. In the previ- 
ous section it was shown that the presence of a notch provides condition 1 
and contributes to condition 3. Temperature has a strong effect on the 
basic flow and fracture properties of the metal. For all metals the yield 
stress or flow stress increases with decreasing temperature. With fee 
metals, where there is no ductile-to-brittle transition, the increase in yield 
stress on going from room temperature to liquid-nitrogen temperature 
(— 196°C) is about a factor of 2. In bcc metals, which show a ductile- 
to-brittle transition, the yield stress increases by a factor of 3 to 8 over 
the same temperature range. Figure 7-5 illustrates the trends in frac- 
ture stress and yield stress with temperature. It also shows that the 
reduction of area at fracture in a tensile specimen drops off rapidly over 
a narrow temperature interval. The temperature range at which this 
transition occurs is called the transition temperature. 



Sec. 7-14] 



Hracture 



217 



t 




The so-called classical theory of the ductile-to-brittle transition was 
suggested by Davidenkov and Wittman.^ According to this concept, 
the existence of a transition temperature is due to the difference in the 
way the resistances to shear and cleavage change with temperature. The 
relative values of these two parameters determine whether the fracture 
will be ductile or brittle. Above the transition temperature the flow 
stress is reached before the fracture 
stress, while below the transition 
temperature the fracture stress is 
reached first. Factors which in- 
crease the critical shear stress for 
slip without at the same time raising 
the fracture stress will favor brittle 
fracture. Decreasing the tempera- 
ture and increasing the strain rate 
both have this effect. In Fig. 7-13, 
the curve marked cto gives the tem- 
perature dependence of yield stress 
for simple tension. The ciu've qao, 
where q « 3, is the temperature de- 
pendence of the yield stress in the 
presence of the plastic constraint at 
a notch. The curve marked aj is 

the fracture strength or cleavage strength as a function of temperature. 
In agreement with available data, it is drawn as a less sensitive func- 
tion of temperature than the yield stress. A transition temperature 
occurs when a curve of flow stress intersects the cleavage strength. For 
an unnotched tension specimen this occurs at a quite low temperature, 
but for a notched test the transition temperature is much closer to room 
temperature. 

While this picture of the ductile-to-brittle transition does not provide 
for the structural details embodied in the dislocation theory, it does give 
an easily grasped working model of the phenomenon. As originally pro- 
posed, this classical theory ascribes no major effect to the role of strain 
rate; yet recent experiments have indicated that strain rate may be more 
important than plastic constraint in producing brittle fracture. Using 
sharp cleavage cracks as notches, Felbeck and Orowan^ were unable to 
produce cleavage fracture in steel plates unless the crack reached a high 
velocity. Extensive plastic deformation was present at the base of the 
crack in all cases. These experiments could be interpreted only by con- 

1 N. N. Davidenkov and F. Wittman, Phys. Tech. Inst. (U.S.S.R.), vol. 4, p. 300, 
1937. 
^ Felbeck and Orowan, op. cit. 



Transition temperature Notcti 

simple tension transition temperature 

Temperature— >- 

Fig. 7-1 3. Schematic description of tran- 
sition temperature. 



218 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 7 

sidering that the jaeld stress is raised to the value of the fracture stress, 
not by plastic constraint, but by the effect of high strain rate on increas- 
ing the yield stress. It is difficult to separate these two effects, and 
additional experiments would be very worthwhile. However, it is inter- 
esting to note that the yield stress of mild steel is very sensitive to 
strain rate. Also, the large increase in transition temperature that is 
brought about by using a notched-impact test can be understood on this 
basis when it is considered that the strain rate in the impact test is about 
10^ times greater than in the ordinary tension test. 

7-1 5. Fracture under Combined Stresses 

The phenomenological approach to fracture is concerned with uncover- 
ing the general macroscopic laws which describe the fracture of metals 
under all possible states of stress. This same approach was discussed in 
Chap. 3 with regard to the prediction of yielding under complex states 
of stress. The problem of determining general laws for the fracture 
strength of metals is quite difficult because fracture is so sensitive to 
prior plastic straining and temperature. In principle we can conceive of 
a three-dimensional fracture surface in terms of the three principal stresses 
(Ti, 0-2, and 0-3. For any combination of principal stresses the metal will 
fracture when the limiting surface is reached. Enough experimentation 
has been done to realize that the fracture surface cannot be rigid but 
must be considered as a flexible membrane which changes shape with 
changes in stress and strain history. 

Most experimentation in this field has been with biaxial states of stress 
where one of the principal stresses is zero. Tubular specimens in which 
an axial tensile or compressive load is superimposed on the circumfer- 
ential stress produced by internal pressure are ordinarily used for this 
type of work. For accurate results bulging or necking during the later 
stages of the test must be avoided. This makes it difficult to obtain 
good data for very ductile metals. 

Figure 7-14 illustrates the fracture criteria which have been most fre- 
quently proposed for fracture under a biaxial state of stress. The 
maximum-shear-stress criterion and the Von Mises, or distortion-energy, 
criterion have already been considered previously in the discussion of 
yielding criteria. The maximum-normal-stress criterion proposes that 
fracture is controlled only by the magnitude of the greatest principal 
stress. Available data on ductile metals such as aluminum and mag- 
nesium alloys^ and steel^ indicate that the maximum-shear-stress criterion 

1 J. E. Dorn, "Fracturing of Metals," American Society for Metals, Metals Park, 
Ohio, 1948. 

2 E. A. Davis, J. Appl. Mech., vol. 12, pp. A13-A24, 1945. 



)ec. 



7-16] 



Fracture 



219 



for fracture results in the best agreement. Agreement between experi- 
ment and theory is not nearly so good as for the case of yielding criteria. 
The fracture criterion for a brittle cast iron^ is shown in Fig. 7-15. Note ' 
that the normal stress criterion is followed in the tension-tension region 
and that the fracture strength increases significantly as one of the princi- 
pal stresses becomes compressive. Two theories--^ which consider the 







+0-2 




Maximum 






normal 


stress^ 


-^ ' ~^^ 




' /7 




\ 


Von Mises /y^ 




I 


criterion — V/ 




1 


// 




/ 


-a, / 




/ +^1 


I 
1 


^l\/faximum 


// 

// 
/ / 




1 

1 


shear 




1 

I 


stress 


// 








/y^ 














-a-2 






Fig. 7-14. Proposed fracture criteria for 
biaxial state of stress in ductile metals. 



Fig. 7-15. Biaxial fracture criterion for 
brittle cast iron. 



stress concentration of graphite flakes in cast iron are in good agreement 
with the fracture data. These data are also in substantial agreement 
with the fracture curve predicted from Griffith's theory of brittle fracture. 



7-16. Effect of High Hydrostatic Pressure on Fracture 

Bridgman's work^ on the effect of superimposed hydrostatic pressure 
on the fracture characteristics of metals has produced many interesting 
results. His results have also shown that fracture is a complex phe- 
nomenon which in many cases cannot be described by the simple criteria 
of the previous section. 

Bridgman tested metal specimens in such a way that hydrostatic pres- 
sures of up to 450,000 psi were superimposed on an axial tensile stress. 
These extreme conditions produced a very great increase in the ductility 
at fracture. The strain at the location of fracture was as much as 300 
times greater when mild steel was fractured with superimposed hydro- 

1 W. R. Clough and M. E. Shank, Trans. A&M, vol. 49, pp. 241-262, 1957. 
2L. F. Coffin, Jr., J. Appl. Mech., vol. 17, p. 233, 1950. 
3 J. C. Fisher, ASTM Bull 181, p. 74, April, 1952. 

^ P. W. Bridgman, "Studies in Large Plastic Flow and Fracture," McGraw-Hill 
Book Company, Inc., New York, 1952. 



220 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 7 

static pressure than when tested with simple uniaxial loading. Materials 
which are completely brittle under ordinary conditions, like limestone or 
rock salt, actually necked down when pulled in tension with superimposed 
hydrostatic pressure. It was also found that, if a tensile specimen was 
loaded with superimposed pressure to a point short of fracture and then 
tested at atmospheric pressure, it required further deformation before 
fracturing, even if the elongation under pressure was greater than the 
metal could v/ithstand when ordinarily tested at atmospheric pressure. 
Further, the amount of deformation required to produce fracture after 
removal of the hydrostatic pressure increases with an increase in the 
magnitude of the pressure. These facts indicate that, in general, frac- 
ture is not determined completely by the instantaneous state of stress or 
strain. Bridgman was able to find no simple stress function which 
described his results. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Averbach, B. L., D. K. Felbeck, G. T. Hahn, and D. A. Thomas (eds.): "Fracture," 

Technology Press and John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1959. 
Barrett, C. S. : Metallurgy at Low Temperatures, Campbell Memorial Lecture, 1956, 

Trans. ASM, vol. 49, pp. 53-117, 1957. 
"Fracturing of Metals," American Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1948. 
Orowan, E.: Fracture and Strength of SoUds, Repts. Progr. in Phys., vol. 12, pp. 185- 

232, 1949. 
Parker, E. R. : "Brittle Behavior of Engineering Structures," John Wiley & Sons, 

Inc., New York, 1957. 
Patch, N. J.: The Fracture of Metals, in "Progress in Metal Physics," vol. 5, Perga^ 

mon Press, Ltd., London, 1954. 
Stroh, A. N.: Advances in Phys., vol. 6, pp. 418-465, 1957. 



Chapter 8 

INTERNAL FRICTION 

8-1 . Introduction 

The ability of a vibrating solid which is completely isolated from its 
surroundings to convert its mechanical energy of vibration into heat is 
called internal friction, or damping capacity. The former term is pre- 
ferred by physicists, and the latter is generally used in engineering. If 
metals behaved as perfectly elastic materials at stresses below the nominal 
elastic limit, there would be no internal friction. However, the fact that 
damping effects can be observed at stress levels far below the macroscopic 
elastic limit indicates that metals have a very low true elastic limit, if, 
indeed, one exists at all. Internal-friction, or damping, effects corre- 
spond to a phase lag between the applied stress and the resulting strain. 
This may be due simply to plastic deformation at a high stress level, 
or at low stress levels it may be due to thermal, magnetic, or atomic 
rearrangements. 

An important division of the field of nonelastic behavior is called 
anelasticity . This subject is concerned with internal-friction effects which 
are independent of the amplitude of vibration. Anelastic behavior can 
be due to thermal diffusion, atomic diffusion, stress relaxation across 
grain boundaries, stress-induced ordering, and magnetic interactions. 
Certain static effects such as the elastic-aftereffect are concerned with 
anelastic behavior. Internal friction resulting from cold work is strongly 
amplitude-dependent and, therefore, is not an anelastic phenomenon. 
Much of our present knowledge of the mechanisms which contribute to 
anelasticity is due to Zener^ and his coworkers. 

Studies of internal friction are primarily concerned with using damping 
as a tool for studying internal structure and atom movements in solids. 
The method has provided information on diffusion, ordering, and solu- 
bilities of interstitial elements and has been used for estimating the den- 
sity of dislocations. The vibration amplitudes employed in this type of 

1 C. Zener, "Elasticity and Anelasticity," University of Chicago Press, Chicago; 
1948. 

221 



222 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 8 

work are usually quite small, and the stresses are very low. Another 
aspect of this field is the determination of engineering data on the dissi- 
pation of energy in vibrating members. This work is usually concerned 
with determining the damping capacity of a material at the relatively 
large amplitudes encountered in engineering practice. 

Internal friction is measured by a number of techniques.^ The sim- 
plest device is a torsional pendulum for use in the low-frequency region 
around 1 cps. For higher-frequency measurements the specimen is 
excited by an electromagnetic drive, a piezoelectric crystal, or ultrasonic 
energy. 

8-2. Phenomenological Description of Internal Friction 

For energy to be dissipated by internal friction, the strain must lag 
behind the applied stress. The phase angle, or lag angle, a can be used 
as a measure of internal friction. 

a~4^ (8-1) 

where eg' = nonelastic strain component 90° out of phase with stress 
ei = elastic strain in phase with stress 
Internal friction is frequently measured by a system which is set into 
motion with a certain amplitude ^o and then allowed to decay freely. 
The amplitude at any time. At, can be expressed by an equation 

At = Aoexp(-/30 (8-2) 

where /3 is the attenuation coefficient. The most common way of defining 
internal friction or damping capacity is with the logarithmic decrement 5. 
The logarithmic decrement is the logarithm of the ratio of successive 
amplitudes. 

h = In 4^ (8-3) 

If the internal friction is independent of amplitude, a plot of In A versus 
the number of cycles of vibration will be linear and the slope of the curve 
is the decrement. If the damping is amplitude-dependent, the decre- 
ment is given by the slope of the curve at a chosen amplitude. The 
logarithmic decrement is related to the lag angle by 

5 = Tza (8-4) 

For a condition of forced vibration in which the specimen is driven at 

1 C. Wert, "Modern Research Techniques in Physical Metallurgy," pp. 225-250, 
American Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1953. 



Sec. 8-21 



Internal Friction 



223 



a constant amplitude a measure of internal friction is the fractional 
decrease in vibrational energy per cycle. Vibrational energy is propor- 
tional to the square of the amplitude, so that the logarithmic decrement 
can be expressed by 

AW 
i = 2W (8-5) 

where AW is the energy lost per cycle and W is the vibrational energy 
at the start of the cycle. In a 
forced-vibration type of experiment 
it is customary to determine a reso- 
nance curve such as that of Fig. 8-1. 
The logarithmic decrement for a 
resonance curve is given approxi- 
mately by 



8 = 



7r(bandwidth) 7r(/2 — /i) 



fr 



fr 



(8-6) 




A measure of internal friction that 

is often used is the Q, where 

Q = ir/8. Since in electrical-circuit 

theory the reciprocal of this value 

is called the Q of the circuit, the symbol Q^^ has been adopted as a 

measure of internal friction. 



Frequency 
Fig. 8-1. Resonance curve. 



Q-' = 



h-h 

fr 



(8-7) 



Under conditions of cyclic excitation the dynamic elastic modulus will 
be greater than the static elastic modulus because of nonelastic internal 
friction. The modulus under dynamic conditions is frequently termed 
the unrelaxed elastic modulus Eu, while the static modulus is called the 
relaxed modulus Er. The unrelaxed modulus is given by 



Eu 



0-1 



ei' 



(8-8) 



where ei^ is the elastic and ei^ is the plastic strain component in phase 
with the stress. The fact that the dynamic modulus is larger than the 
static elastic modulus is called the AE effect. 

A number of models have been proposed to describe the nonelastic 
behavior of materials. The models suggested by Voight^ and Maxwell^ 

' W. Voight, Ann. Physik, vol. 47, p. 671, 1892. 
2 J. C. Maxwell, Phil. Mag., vol. 35, p. 134, 18G8. 



224 



Metallurgical Fundamentals 



[Chap. 8 



are frequently mentioned. Both models consider that the material has 
an elastic component coupled with a viscous component. The behavior 
of a material, with the properties attributed to it by the theory, can be 
duplicated by a mechanical model composed of springs (elastic com- 
ponent) and dashpots (viscous component). Figure 8-2 illustrates the 
composition of a Voight and Maxwell solid, together with the equations 
which the models predict. For real metals the frequency dependence 
of internal friction does not agree with the equations predicted by the 
models. Further, the models do not account for the dependence of 
dynamic modulus on internal friction, which is observed with real metals. 
Various modifications of the models have been useful in studying the 
mechanical properties of polymers, but they are of limited usefulness in 
dealing with metals. 



Voight solid 



Maxwell solid 



cr= F^e + 7j€ 






Eu V 


7 






Eu 


oc- log angle 






^= Zvf 


7 = coefficient of 


viscos 


ty 




Eu = dynomic mod 


jIus 







Time- 




Time — > 

Fig. 8-2. Spring and dashpot models of Fig. 8-3. Time dependence of stress and 
Voight and Maxwell solids. strain for anelastic material, showing 

elastic aftereffect. 



8-3. Anelasticity 

A nonelastic body is said to behave anelastically when the stress and 
strain are not single-valued functions of each other and the internal fric- 
tion is independent of amplitude. One manifestation of this is the elastic 
aftereffect. Consider a metal which is subjected to a constant stress at a 
level well below the conventional elastic limit (Fig. 8-3). The strains 
involved may be of the order of 10~^, so that very sensitive measurements 
are required. After an initial strain the metal will gradually creep until 
the strain reaches an essentially constant value. This can be observed 



Sec. 8-3] 



Internal Friction 



225 



in many metals at room temperature, although the effect is greater at 
higher temperatures. When the stress is removed, the strain will 
decrease but there will be a certain amount which remains and slowly 
decreases with time, approaching its original value. This time depend- 
ence of strain on loading and unloading has been called the elastic 
aftereffect. 

In considering the stress-strain relationship for an anelastic material 
it is apparent that a constant linear relationship between these two fac- 
tors will not adequately describe 
the situation. A realistic relation- 
ship is obtained by equating the 
stress and its first derivative with 
respect to time to the strain and 
the strain rate. 

aid -\- aib = hie -{- 626 (8-9) 



Time 




A material which obeys this type 
of equation is known as a standard 
linear solid. The mechanical model 
for this material is shown in Fig. 
8-4. Note that the time depend- 
ence of strain closely duplicates the 

behavior of a material with an elastic aftereffect. The general equation 
for a standard linear solid can be rewritten in terms of three independent 
constants. 



Time 

Fig. 8-4. Mechanical model of standard 
linear solid and associated time depend- 
ence of stress and strain. 



(T + T,& = ER(e + T^e) 



(8-10) 



where t^ = time of relaxation of stress for constant strain 
Ta = time of relaxation of strain for constant stress 
Er = relaxed elastic modulus 
The relationship between the relaxation times and the relaxed and 
unrelaxed modulus is given by 



Er 

Eu 






(8-11) 



A dimensionless combination of elastic constants, called the relaxation 
strength, is a measure of the total relaxation 



E. = 



Eu — Ej 



(8-12) 



VEuEr 

For a standard linear solid there is only a single relaxation time 



226 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 8 

T = (r, + T<,)/2. The lag angle, on the basis of this model, is given by 
the following equation:^ 

a = E, .. 2'' 2 2 (8-13) 

where co = 2x/is the angular frequency of vibration. Equation (8-13) is 
symmetrical in both co and r and has a maximum when cor = 1. There- 
fore, for a material which behaves like an anelastic standard linear solid^ 
an internal-friction peak will occur at an angular frequency which is the 
reciprocal of the relaxation time of the process causing the relaxation. 

It is often difficult experimentally to vary the angular frequency by a 
factor much greater than 100. Therefore, it is usually easier to deter- 
mine the relaxation spectrum by holding co constant and varying the 
relaxation time r. In many materials, including metals, r varies expo- 
nentially with temperature so that 

r = TO exp ^ (8-14) 

Therefore, to determine the relaxation spectrum, all that is necessary is 
to measure a as a function of temperature for constant angular frequency. 
Internal-friction measurements are well suited for studying the dif- 
fusion of interstitial atoms in bcc metals. Relaxation peaks arise owing 
to diffusion of interstitial atoms to minimum-energy positions in the 
stress fields of the dislocations. For a given frequency the relaxation 
time is expressed by r = 1/co, and the peak occurs at a temperature Ti. 
At another value of frequency the relaxation peak will occur at a tem- 
perature To. From the temperature dependence of relaxation time [Eq. 
(8-14)] the activation energy Aiif can be determined. 

For a given relaxation time the diffusion coefficient of the interstitial 
atoms is given by 

D = ^ (8-16) 

dor 

where ao is the interatomic spacing. The temperature dependence of D 
is given by 

D = D, exp - 1^ (8-17) 

1 A. S. Nowick, Internal Friction in Metals, in "Progj-Rss in Metal Physics," vol. 4. 
pp. 15-16, Pergamon Press, Ltd., London, 1953. 



Sec. 8-5] Internal Friction 227 

8-4. Relaxation Spectrum 

A number of relaxation processes with different relaxation times can 
occur in metals. Each will occur in a different frequency region, so that 
a number of internal-friction peaks can be found if a wide range of fre- 
quency is investigated. Provided that the peaks are sufficiently sepa- 
rated, the behavior of the metal in the region of the peak can be expressed 
by Eq. (8-10) with suitably determined constants. This variation of 
internal friction with frequency can be considered as a relaxation spec- 
trum which is characteristic of a particular material. 

The application of stress to a substitutional solid solution can produce 
ordering in an otherwise random distribution of atoms. An alternating 
stress can give rise to relaxation between pairs of solute atoms. 

A large and broad internal-friction peak is produced in polycrystalline 
specimens by the relaxation of shear stress across grain boundaries. 
Work in this area has led to the conclusion that grain boundaries behave 
in some ways like a viscous material. This interesting aspect of internal 
friction is discussed in more detail in the next section. 

The movement of low-energy twin boundaries due to stress is believed 
to produce relaxation effects.' This type of deformation is also responsi- 
ble for anelastic effects found in conjunction with domain-boundary 
movement in ferromagnetic materials. Since twin interfaces are crys- 
tallographically coherent boundaries, the internal friction cannot be due 
to the viscous slip associated with incoherent boundaries. 

The relaxation peak due to preferential ordering of interstitial atoms 
in the lattice from an applied stress is one of the best-understood relax- 
ation processes. Studies of this relaxation process have provided data 
on the solubility and diffusion of interstitial atoms. This type of internal 
friction is considered in Sec. 8-6. Relaxation produced by thermal fluctu- 
ations will be considered in Sec. 8-7. 



8-5. Grain-boundary Relaxation 

An important source of internal friction in metals is stress relaxation 
along grain boundaries. Ke- first demonstrated the strong internal- 
friction peak due to grain-boundary relaxation by experiments on high- 
purity aluminum wires. At the low torsional strains used in this work the 
strain was completely recoverable, and all internal-friction effects were 
independent of amplitude. Ke found that a broad peak occurred in the 
region of 300°C in polycrystalline aluminum, while no internal-friction 

1 F. T. Worrell, J. Appl. Phys., vol. 19, p. 929, 1948, vol. 22, p. 1257, 1951. 

2 T. S. Ke, Phys. Rev., vol. 71, p. 533, vol. 72, p. 41, 1947. 



228 



Metallurgical Fundamentals 



[Chap. 8 



peak was observed in aluminum single crystals (Fig. 8-5). In addition, 
measurements of the modulus (which is proportional to the square of 
frequency) at different temperatures showed a sharp drop for the poly- 
crystalline specimen which was not found with the single-crystal specimen 
(Fig. 8-6). This behavior is consistent with the assumption that grain 
boundaries behave to a certain extent in a viscous manner at elevated 
temperatures. 



U.I u 

0.08 

Or 

i 0.06 
§0.04 

CZ 

0.02 



1 




1 


1 


1 


- 




/ 


\ Polycrystalline 
\ aluminum 


- 




/ 


\ 


- 


- 




/ 




^- 


9=-r^-^ 


U 


< 'T 


"single crystal" 
aluminum) ^ , __ 

1 1 



100 200 300 400 

Temperature of measurement, °C 



500 



Fig. 8-5. Variation of internal friction with temperature for polycrystalline and single- 
crystal specimens of aluminum. {T . S. Ke, Phys. Rev., vol. 71, p. 533, 1947.) 




100 200 300 400 

Temperature of measurement , °C 



500 



Fig. 8-6. Variation of modulus (p) with temperature for polycrystalline and single- 
crystal aluminum. {T. S. Ke, Phys. Rev., vol. 71, p. 533, 1947.) 



Sec. 8-7J Internal Friction 229 

8-6. The Snock Effect 

Internal friction resulting from preferential ordering of interstitial 
atoms under applied stress was first explained by Snoek' and is known as 
the Snoek effect. This type of relaxation has been most extensively 
studied in iron containing small amounts of either carbon or nitrogen in 
solid solution. Interstitial carbon atoms in bcc iron occupy the octa- 
hedral holes in the lattice. Even though no external forces are applied, 
the crystal will have tetragonal symmetry because of the distortion pro- 
duced by the interstitial atoms. As long as no stress is applied, the 
distribution of atoms among the octahedral sites is random and the 
tetragonal axes of the unit cells are randomly oriented with respect to the 
specimen axes. However, if a stress is applied along the y axis, the inter- 
stitial atoms will migrate to octahedral positions which tend to give a 
preferred alignment in the y direction. When the stress is removed, the 
atoms will migrate toward a random distribution. Under the oscillating 
stresses imposed by an internal-friction apparatus the interstitial atoms 
will be in continuous motion, either tending toward or tending away from 
a preferred orientation. A strong relaxation peak results. A similar but 
weaker relaxation peak can be observed due to short-range order in 
substitutional solid solutions. 

8-7. Thermoelastic Internal Friction 

The thermal and the mechanical behavior of materials are interrelated. 
The application of a small stress to a metal will produce an instantaneous 
strain, and this strain will be accompanied by a small change in tem- 
perature. An extension of the specimen will result in a decrease in tem- 
perature, while a contraction produces a temperature rise. This behavior 
is called the thermoelastic effect. If the applied stress is not uniform 
throughout the specimen, a temperature gradient will be set up and addi- 
tional nonelastic strain will result. If the nonuniform stress varies 
periodically with time, a fluctuating temperature gradient is produced. 
When the stress fluctuations occur at a very high frequency, so that there 
is not time for appreciable heat flow to take place during a stress cycle, the 
process is adiabatic. No energy loss or damping occurs under adiabatic 
conditions. On the other hand, at very low frequencies there is adequate 
time for heat flow, and an equilibrium temperature is maintained in the 
specimen. This is an isothermal process, and no energy or heat is lost. 
In the region of intermediate frequencies the conversion of energy into 
heat is not reversible, and internal-friction effects are observed. 

Nonuniform stress can result in macroscopic thermal currents which 

1 J. Snoek, Physica, vol. 6, p. 591, 1939, vol. 8, p. 711, 1941, vol. 9, p. 862, 1942. 



230 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 8 

produce internal-friction peaks. A rectangular bar which is vibrated 
transversely behaves like a standard linear solid (single relaxation time). 
The compression side of the specimen will increase in temperature, and 
the tension side will undergo a decrease in temperature. Therefore, an 
alternating temperature gradient is produced across the thickness of the 
bar. A relaxation process occurs, provided that the frequency is such 
that there is enough time for thermal currents to flow back and forth 
and effect a partial neutralization of the temperature gradient. Zener^ 
has shown that the relaxation time is 

(8-18) 



irWt 



where h = thickness of specimen 

Dt = thermal-diffusion constant 

= thermal conductivity/ (specific heat) (density) 
The frequency at which this relaxation peak occurs can be determined 
from the relationship w^ = 1. For specimens of ordinary thickness, the 
peak would occur in the region of 1 to 100 cps. It is theoretically possi- 
ble for a specimen vibrated in a longitudinal mode to show relaxation 
from macroscopic thermal currents. However, the frequency region 
where the peak would occur would be of the order 10^" to 10^^ cps, which 
is well beyond the range of normal observations. No relaxation from 
macroscopic thermal currents occurs in a specimen subjected to torsional 
vibration, because shearing stresses are not accompanied by a change in 
temperature. 

A poly crystalline specimen which is subjected to completely uniform 
stress can show relaxation due to intergranular thermal currents arising 
from the fluctuations in stress from grain to grain. The localized stress 
differences from grain to grain are due to the elastic anisotropy of indi- 
vidual grains. The relaxation peak due to intergranular thermal cur- 
rents will not occur at a sharp frequency and, therefore, represent a single 
relaxation time. The frequency at which the relaxation will occur is 
related to the grain size of the metal. Internal friction due to inter- 
granular thermal currents can occur for all types of stressing. It is 
important that effects from this source be considered in experiments 
where the prime interest is in damping from other sources. 

8-8. Dislocation Damping 

The internal friction of metals is quite sensitive to plastic deformation. 
The effects are very complex and depend on variables such as the amount 
of plastic deformation, the method by which the deformation was intro- 

1 C. Zener, Phys. Rev., vol. 52, p. 230, 1937. 



Sec. 8-8] Internal Friction 231 

duced into the metal, the purity of the metal, the frequency of vibration, 
and the time between the deformation and the measurement of internal 
friction. Read^ demonstrated that internal friction arising from cold 
work is strongly amplitude-dependent, even for strain amplitudes as 
small as 10^^. 

A freshly cold-worked metal has a relatively high internal friction which 
anneals out very rapidly at temperatures well below those required for 
recrystallization. The high damping is also accompanied by a decrease 
in the dynamic modulus. As the internal friction anneals out, the 
dynamic modulus returns to its steady-state value. The decrease in 
modulus due to cold work which can be eliminated by annealing at rela- 
tively low temperatures is called the modulus defect, or the Koster effect.^ 
Mott has proposed a dislocation modeP for the modulus defect which is 
based on the bowing out under stress of a network of dislocation lines 
anchored at nodes and impurities. The theory predicts that the modulus 
defect is proportional to the products of the dislocation length per cubic 
centimeter and the square of the effective loop length of a dislocation 
segment, 

^ cc NU (8-19) 

In a cold-worked metal typical values of A^" ^^ 10' and L c^ 10~^ cm would 
lead to values of I\E/E of 10 per cent, in agreement with observed results. 

The dislocation mechanism for the internal-friction effects observed in 
cold-worked metals is not well established. The theory due to Koehler* 
and Granato and Liicke^ assumes that amplitude-dependent internal fric- 
tion is due to a stress-strain hysteresis arising from the irreversibility of 
dislocation lines breaking away from pinning impurity atoms. However, 
amplitude-independent internal friction is assumed to result from a 
viscouslike damping force acting on the bowed-out segments of the dis- 
location lines. 

The only relaxation process which gives an internal peak that is 
definitely ascribable to dislocations is the Bordoni peak^ found in fee 
metals at very low temperatures in the region of 30 to 100°K. There 
are indications that the Bordoni peak is due to some intrinsic property 
of dislocations and is not involved with the interaction of dislocations 
with impurity atoms and other dislocations. 

1 T. A. Read, Trans. AIME, vol. 143, p. 30, 1941. 

2 W. Koster, Z. Metallk., vol. 32, p. 282, 1940. 

3 N. F. Mott, Phil. Mag., vol. 43, p. 1151, 1952. 

^ J. S. Koehler, "Imperfections in Nearly Perfect Crystals," John Wiley & Sons, 
Inc., New York, 1953. 

5 A. Granato and K. Lucke, J. Appl. Phys., vol. 27, p. 583, 1956. 
® P. G. Bordoni, Nuovo cimento, vol. 7, ser. 9, suppl. 2, p. 144, 1950 



232 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 8 

8-9. Dampins Capacity 

This section is concerned with the engineering aspects of internal fric- 
tion. The damping capacity of structures and machine elements is con- 
cerned with the internal friction of materials at strain amplitudes and 
stresses which are much greater than the values usually considered in 
internal-friction experiments. A high damping capacity is of practical 
engineering importance in limiting the amplitude of vibration at reso- 
nance conditions and thereby reducing the likelihood of fatigue failure. 
Turbine blades, crankshafts, and aircraft propellers are typical applica- 
tions where damping capacity is important. 

Damping capacity can be defined as the amount of work dissipated 
into heat per unit volume of material per cycle of completely reversed 
stress. The damping properties of materials are frequently expressed in 
terms of the logarithmic decrement 6 or the specific damping capacity \l/. 

^ = 2. = I^L^ (8-20) 

where \l/ = specific damping capacity 

6 = logarithmic decrement [see Eqs. (8-3) and (8-5)] 

Ai — amplitude of vibration of first cycle 

An = amplitude of vibration of nth cycle 
N = number of cycles from Ai to An 
Values of these damping parameters depend not only on the condition of 
the material but also on the shape and stress distribution of the speci- 
mens. Since these conditions are often not specified, there is considera- 
ble variation and contradiction in the published literature^ on the damp- 
ing properties of materials. The proposal has been made to express the 
engineering damping properties of materials hy the specific damping 
energy. This quantity represents the area inside a stress-strain hysteresis 
loop under uniform stress conditions and is a true material property. 
Methods of converting logarithmic decrement and damping capacity to 
specific damping energy have been published.^ 

Engineering damping-capacity measurements are not very dependent 
upon frequency of vibration. They are, however, strongly dependent on 
the stress or strain amplitude. Specific damping energy is approximately 
a power function of stress level, with the exponent varying between 2 and 

' L. J. Demer, Bibliography of the Material Damping Field, WADC Tech. Rept. 
56-180, June, 1956; available from Office of Technical Services. 

2 E. R. Podnieks and B. J. Lazan, Analytical Methods for Determining Specific 
Damping Energy Considering Stress Distribution, WADC Tech. Rept. 56-44, June, 
1957. 



Sec. 8-9] 



Internal Friction 



233 



3 for most materials. The damping behavior is a function of the number 
of reversed stress cycles. Generally, the damping capacity increases 
with number of cycles of stress reversal, the magnitude of the effect 
increasing with stress level. The damping capacity for a given metal 
and test condition depends on the type of stress system, i.e., whether 
tested in torsion or tension. This is the result of differences in stress 
distribution produced by different methods. A number of attempts 
have been made to relate damping behavior with other properties such as 
fatigue strength and notch sensitivity. While in certain cases it appears 

Table 8-1 
Damping Capacity of Some Engineering MATERiALsf 



Material 



Carbon steel (0.1 % C) 

Ni-Cr steel — quenched and tempered. 

12% Cr stainless steel 

18-8 stainless steel 

Cast iron 

Yellow brass 



Specific damping capacity 
at various stress levels APF/PT 



4,500 psi 6,700 psi 11,200 psi 



2.28 
0.38 
8.0 
0.76 
28.0 
0.50 



2.78 
0.49 
8.0 
1.16 
40.0 
0.86 



4.16 
0.70 
8.0 
3.8 



t S. L. Hoyt, "Metal Data," rev. ed., Reinhold Publishing Corporation, New York, 
1952. 

that high damping capacity correlates with a low notch sensitivity, 
there is no general relationship between these properties. Furthermore, 
there is no general relationship between damping capacity and fatigue 
limit. 

Table 8-1 lists some values of damping capacity for a number of 
engineering materials at several stress levels. Cast iron has one of the 
highest damping capacities of these materials. This is attributed to 
energy losses in the graphite flakes. One important contribution to 
damping in many alloys used for turbine-blade applications comes from 
the motion of ferromagnetic domain walls. This has been demonstrated^ 
by the fact that a ferromagnetic alloy which showed high damping had 
much decreased damping capacity when tested in a magnetic field. The 
lower damping in the magnetic field can be attributed to the fact that the 
domains are lined up in the direction of the field and cannot move freely 
under stress. 



1 A. W. Cochardt, Trans. AIME, vol. 206, pp. 1295-1298, 1956. 



234 Metallurgical Fundamentals [Chap. 8 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Entwistle, K. M. : The Damping Capacity of Metals, in B. Chalmers and A. G. Quarrell 

(eds.), "The Physical Examination of Metals," 2d ed., Edward Arnold & 

Co., London, 1960. 
Niblett, D. H., and J. Wilks: Dislocation Damping in Metals Advances inPhys., 

vol. 9, pp. 1-88, 1960. 
Nowick, A. S.: Internal Friction in Metals, in "Progress in Metal Physics," vol. 4, 

Pergamon Press, Ltd., London, 1953. 
Zener, C: "Elasticity and Anelasticity of Metals," University of Chicago Press, 

Chicago, 1948. 



Part Three 

APPLICATIONS TO MATERIALS TESTING 



Chapter 9 

THE TENSION TEST 



9-1 . Engineerins Stress-Strain Curve 

The engineering tension test is widely used to provide basic design 
information on the strength of materials and as an acceptance test for 
the specification of materials. In 
the tension test' a specimen is 
subjected to a continually increas- 
ing uniaxial tensile force while si- 
multaneous observations are made 
of the elongation of the specimen. 
An engineering stress-strain curve 
is constructed from the load-elonga- 
tion measurements (Fig. 9-1 ) . The 
significant points on the engineer- 
ing stress-strain curve have already 
been considered in Sec. 1-5, while 
the appearance of a yield point in 
the stress-strain curve was covered 
in Sec. 5-5. The stress used in this 
stress-strain curve is the average 
longitudinal stress in the tensile 

specimen. It is obtained by dividing the load by the original area of 
the cross section of the specimen. 




Fig. 9-1, 

curve. 



Conventional strain e 
The engineering stress-strain 



P_ 



(9-1) 



The strain used for the engineering stress-strain curve is the average 

1 H. E. Davis, G. E. Troxell, and C. T. Wiskocil, "The Testing and Inspection of 
Engineering Materials," 2d ed., chaps. 2-4, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New 
York 1955. 

237 



238 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 9 

linear strain, which is obtained by dividing the elongation of the gage 
length of the specimen, 8, by its original length. 

Since both the stress and the strain are obtained by dividing the load and 
elongation by constant factors, the load-elongation curve will have the 
same shape as the engineering stress-strain curve. The two curves are 
frequently used interchangeably. 

The shape and magnitude of the stress-strain curve of a metal will 
depend on its composition, heat treatment, prior history of plastic defor- 
mation, and the strain rate, temperature, and state of stress imposed 
during the testing. The parameters which are used to describe the stress- 
strain curve of a metal are the tensile strength, yield strength or yield 
point, per cent elongation, and reduction of area. The first two are strength 
parameters; the last two indicate ductility. 

Tensile Strength r 

The tensile strength, or ultimate tensile strength (UTS), is the maxi- 
mum load divided by the original cross-sectional area of the specimen. 

au = ^ (9-3) 

The tensile strength is the value most often quoted from the results of a 
tension test; yet in reality it is a value of little fundamental significance 
with regard to the strength of a metal. For ductile metals the tensile 
strength should be regarded as a measure of the maximum load which a 
metal can withstand under the very restrictive conditions of uniaxial 
loading. It will be shown that this value bears little relation to the useful 
strength of the metal under the more complex conditions of stress which 
are usually encountered. For many years it was customary to base the 
strength of members on the tensile strength, suitably reduced by a factor 
of safety. The current trend is to the more rational approach of basing 
the static design of ductile metals on the yield strength. However, 
because of the long practice of using the tensile strength to determine 
the strength of materials, it has become a very familiar property, and as 
such it is a very useful identification of a material in the same sense that 
the chemical composition serves to identify a metal or alloy. Further, 
because the tensile strength is easy to determine and is a quite repro- 
ducible property, it is useful for the purposes of specifications and for 
quality control of a product. Extensive empirical correlations between 
tensile strength and properties such as hardness and fatigue strength are 



Sec. 9-1] The Tension Test 239 

often quite useful. For brittle materials, the tensile strength is a valid 
criterion for design. 

Yield Strength 

The yield strength is the load corresponding to a small specified plastic 
strain divided by the original cross-sectional area of the specimen. 

^6=0.002 ,p, .. 

c^o = — 2 (9-4) 

Because of the practical difficulties of measuring the elastic limit or pro- 
portional limit, the yield strength and yield point are the preferred 
engineering parameters for expressing the start of plastic deformation. 
When the design of a ductile metal requires that plastic deformation 
be prevented, the yield strength is the appropriate criterion of the 
strength of the metal. An important feature of the yield strength is 
that the value determined from the tension test can be used to predict 
the conditions for static yielding under other, more complex conditions of 
stress by means of the distortion-energy yielding criterion (Sec. 3-4). 
An example of this is the determination of the elastic-breakdown pressure 
of thick-wall tubes subjected to internal pressure from the results of a 
tension test.^ The yield strength and yield point are more sensitive 
than the tensile strength to differences in heat treatment and method of 
testing. 

Percentage Elongation 

The percentage elongation is the ratio of the increase in the length of 
the gage section of the specimen to its original length, expressed in per 
cent. 

% elongation = -^ = e/ (9-5) 

where L/ = gage length at fracture 
Lo = original gage length 
€f = conventional strain at fracture 
The numerator in Eq. (9-5) is simply the total measured elongation of 
the specimen. This value is influenced by the deformation during the 
necking of the specimen, and hence the value of per cent elongation 
depends somewhat on the specimen gage length. The elongation of the 
specimen is uniform along the gage length up to the point of maximum 
load. Beyond this point necking begins, and the deformation is no longer 
uniform along the length of the specimen. This uniform strain is of more 
fundamental importance than total strain to fracture, and it is also of 
1 J. H. Faupel, Trans. ASME, vol. 78, pp. 1031-1064, 1956. 



240 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 9 

some practical use in predicting the formability of sheet metal. How- 
ever, the uniform elongation is not usually determined in a routine ten- 
sion test, so that, unless specifically stated, the percentage elongation ifi 
always based on the total elongation. It is determined by putting the 
broken tensile specimen together and measuring the change in gage 
length. The original gage length should always be given in reporting 
percentage elongation values. 

Reduction of Area 

The percentage reduction of area is the ratio of the decrease in the cross- 
sectional area of the tensile specimen after fracture to the original area, 
expressed in per cent. 

An — At 

Reduction of area = q — ^ (9-6) 

The determination of the reduction of area in thin sheet specimens is 
difficult, and for this reason it is usually not measured in this type of 
specimen. For thicker, flat, rectangular tensile specimens, the area after 
fracture may be approximated by 

A = ^{a^2d) (9-7) 

where h, = width of specimen 

a = thickness at center of specimen 

d = thickness at ends of cross section of specimen 

The elongation and reduction of area are usually not directly useful to 
the designer. There appear to be no quantitative methods for determin- 
ing the minimum elongation or reduction of area which a material must 
have for a particular design application. However, a qualitative indica- 
tion of formability of a metal can sometimes be obtained from these 
values. A high reduction of area indicates the ability of the metal to 
deform extensively without fracture (see Prob. 9.4). 

The reduction of area is the most structure-sensitive parameter 
that is measured in the tension test. Therefore, its most important 
aspect is that it is used as an indication of material quality. A decrease 
in reduction of area from a specified level for which experience has 
shown that good service performance will result is a warning that quality 
is substandard. 

Modulus of Elasticity 

The slope of the initial linear portion of the stress-strain curve is the 
modulus of elasticity, or Young's modulus. The modulus of elasticity 
is a measure of the stiffness of the material. The greater the modulus. 



Sec. 9-1] 



TheT 



ension 



Test 



241 



the smaller the elastic strain resulting from the application of a given 
stress. Since the modulus of elasticity is needed for computing deflec- 
tions of beams and other members, it is an important design value. 

The modulus of elasticity is determined by the binding forces between 
atoms. Since these forces cannot be changed without changing the basic 
nature of the material, it follows that the modulus of elasticity is one of 
the most structure-insensitive of the mechanical properties. It is only 
slightly affected by alloying additions, heat treatment, or cold work.^ 
However, increasing the temperature decreases the modulus of elasticity. 
The modulus is usually measured at elevated temperatures by a dynamic 
method^ which measures the mode and period of vibration of a metal 
specimen. Typical values of the modulus of elasticity for common engi- 
neering metals at different temperatures are given in Table 9-1. 

Table 9-1 

Typical Values of Modulus of Elasticity at 

Different Temperatures 



Material 


Modulus of elasticity, psi X 10~« 


Room temp. 


400°F 


800°F 


1000°F 


1200°F 


Carbon steel 


30.0 
28.0 
16.5 
10.5 


27.0 

25.5 

14.0 

9.5 


22.5 
23.0 
10.7 

7.8 


19.5 
22.5 
10.1 


18 


Austenitic stainless steel 

Titanium alloys 


21.0 


Aluminum alloys 





Resilience 

The ability of a material to absorb energy when deformed elastically 
and to return it when unloaded is called resilience. This is usually meas- 
ured by the modulus of resilience, which is the strain energy per unit vol- 
ume required to stress the material from zero stress to the yield stress o-q. 
Referring to Eq. (2-57), the strain energy per unit volume for uniaxial 
tension is 

From the above definition the modulus of resilience is 



TT 1/ 1 / '''0 ^0" 



(9-8) 



This equation indicates that the ideal material for resisting energy loads 
in applications where the material must not undergo permanent distor- 
tion, such as mechanical springs, is one having a high yield stress and a 

' D. J. Mack, Trans. AIME, vol. 166, pp. 68-85, 1946. 

2 C. W. Andrews, Metal Progr., vol. 58, pp. 85-89, 96, 98, 100, 1950. 



242 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 9 



low modulus of elasticity. Table 9-2 gives some values of modulus of 
resilience for different materials. 

Table 9-2 
Modulus of Resilience for Various Materials 









Modulus of 


Material 


E, psi 


o-Q, psi 


resilience Ur, 
in.-lb/in.3 


Medium-carbon steel 


30 X 108 
30 X 108 


45,000 
140,000 


33 7 


High-carbon spring steel 


320 


Duraluminum 


10.5 X 108 


18,000 


17 


Copper 


16 X 108 


4,000 


5.3 


Rubber 


150 


300 


300 



/-//g^ carbon spring steel 



Toughness 

The toughness of a material is its ability to absorb energy in the plastic 
range. The ability to withstand occasional stresses above the yield stress 
without fracturing is particularly desirable in parts such as freight-car 
couplings, gears, chains, and crane hooks. Toughness is a commonly 
used concept which is difficult to pin down and define. One way of 
looking at toughness is to consider that it is the total area under the 
stress-strain curve. This area is an indication of the amount of work 
per unit volume which can be done on the material without causing it to 

rupture. Figure 9-2 shows the 
stress-strain curves for high- and 
low-toughness materials. The high- 
carbon spring steel has a higher 
yield strength and tensile strength 
than the medium-carbon structur- 
al steel. However, the structural 
steel is more ductile and has a 
greater total elongation. The total 
area under the stress-strain curve 
is greater for the structural steel, 
and therefore it is a tougher mate- 
rial. This illustrates that tough- 
ness is a parameter which com- 
The crosshatched regions in Fig. 9-2 
Because of its higher 




Stra,-: e 

Fig. 9-2. Comparison of stress-strain 
curves for high- and low-toughness mate- 
rials. 



prises both strength and ductility 

indicate the modulus of resilience for each steel 

yield strength, the spring steel has the greater resilience. 

Several mathematical approximations for the area under the stress- 
strain curve have been suggested. For ductile metals which have a 



Sec. 9-2J The Tension Test 243 

stress-strain curve like that of the structural steel, the area under the 
curve can be approximated by either of the following equations: 

Ut ~ GuCf (9-9) 

or Ut ^ — 2 ^f (9-10) 

For brittle materials the stress-strain curve is sometimes assumed to be 
a parabola, and the area under the curve is given by 

C/r~2,3V„e/ (9-11) 

All these relations are only approximations to the area under the stress- 
strain curves. Further, the curves do not represent the true behavior in 
the plastic range, since they are all based on the original area of the 
specimen. 

9-2. True-stress-True-strain Curve 

The engineering stress-strain curve does not give a true indication of 
the deformation characteristics of a metal because it is based entirely on 
the original dimensions of the specimen, and these dimensions change 
continuously during the test. Also, ductile metal which is pulled in 
tension becomes unstable and necks down during the course of the test. 
Because the cross-sectional area of the specimen is decreasing rapidly at 
this stage in the test, the load required to continue deformation falls off. 
The average stress based on original area likewise decreases, and this 
produces the fall-ofT in the stress-strain curve beyond the point of maxi- 
mum load. Actually, the metal continues to strain-harden all the way 
up to fracture, so that the stress required to produce further deformation 
should also increase. If the true stress, based on the actual cross-sectional 
area of the specimen, is used, it is found that the stress-strain curve 
increases continuously up to fracture. If the strain measurement is also 
based on instantaneous measurements, the curve which is obtained is 
known as a true-stress-true-strain curve. This is also known as a flow 
curve (Sec. 3-2) since it represents the basic plastic-flow characteristics 
of the material. Any point on the flow curve can be considered as the 
yield stress for a metal strained in tension by the amount shown on the 
curve. Thus, if the load is removed at this point and then reapplied, the 
material will behave elastically throughout the entire range of reloading. 

The true stress is the load at any instant divided by the cross-sectional 
area of the specimen at that instant. 

0- = ^ (9-12) 



244 Applications to Materials Testing 

True strain was defined in Sec. 3-3 as 

e = In ^^ = m — 7- 

Lo A 



[Chap. 9 



(9-13) 



This definition of strain was proposed by Ludwik^ near the beginning of 



140 
130 
120 
110 
100 
90 

'in 

o80 

o 
o 

-- 70 

cn 
tn 

?i 60 

■♦- 

50 
40 
30 
20 
10 






































-.C^. 
^py 


.y 


^ 


















'A 




^^ 


Corrected 
necking 


for 




Max/'/ 
' loc 


num 




^^A 


^ 


^^ 














'^^ 




















/ 


.M 


aximu 


m lot 


id 














/^ 


^ 


{__ 


Sr 



























t^'nee 


r/ng^^ 


'''ress- 


^^ro/n 


Curt/ 






— 















































































































































0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1. 
Strain, in./in. 



1.2 



Fig. 9-3. Comparison of engineering and true stress-strain curves for nickel. 

the century. It was also shown previously (Sec. 3-3) that the relation 
between true strain and conventional linear strain is given by 



e = In (e -H 1) 



(9-14) 



The true stress may be determined from the average engineering stress 
as follows: 



Ai 



F_A^ 

A^Ai 



ip. Ludwik, "Elemente der technologischen Mechanik," Springer-Verlag OHG, 
Berlin, 1909. 



Sec. 9-2] The Tension Test 245 

But, by the constancy-of -volume relationship, 



From Eq. (9-14) 



Ai Lo 



e = In ^ = In (e + 1) 



L 



L Ao .. 

or 7~="r = ^+l 

cr = £ (e + 1) (9-15) 

Figure 9-3 compares the true stress-strain curve for a nickel specimen 
with its engineering stress-strain curve. Note that the large scale on the 
strain axis, which was used to emphasize the plastic region, has com- 
pressed the elastic region into the y axis. Frequently, the true stress- 
strain curve is linear from the maximum load to fracture, while in other 
cases its slope continuously decreases up to fracture. Little significance 
should be attached to this linear region of the flow curve. When neck- 
ing occurs, the triaxial state of stress that is created in this region increases 
the average longitudinal stress needed to continue plastic flow. There- 
fore, the shape of the flow curve from maximum load to fracture depends 
on the rate of development of the neck. This can be different for mate- 
rials with different strain-hardening behavior, and therefore there is no 
assurance that the flow curve will be linear in this region. 

The following parameters are usually determined from the true stress- 
strain curve. 

True Stress at Maximum Load 

The true stress at maximum load corresponds to the true tensile 
strength. For most materials necking begins at maximum load. As a 
good approximation, necking will occur at a value of strain where the 
true stress equals the slope of the flow curve. Let am and e„ denote the 
true stress and strain at maximum load, while Am represents the cross- 
sectional area of the specimen at maximum load. Then, 

P P An 

■* max ^ max i -^^0 

O^u — — j Cm — —A iu — m -r— 

Ao /im Am 

and o-„ = (Tm exp (-€„) (9-16) 

Equation (9-16) relates the ultimate tensile strength to the true stress 
and strain at maximum load. 



246 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 9 

True Fracture Stress 

The true fracture stress is the load at fracture divided by the cross- 
sectional area at fracture. This stress should be corrected for the tri- 
axial state of stress existing in the tensile specimen at fracture. Since 
the data required for this correction are often not available, true-fracture- 
stress values are frequently in error. 

True Fracture Strain 

The true fracture strain e/ is the true strain based on the original area 
Ao and the area after fracture, Af. 

e/ = ln^^ (9-17) 

This parameter represents the maximum true strain that the material 
can withstand before fracture and is analogous to the total strain to 
fracture of the engineering stress-strain curve. .Since Eq. (9-14) is not 
valid beyond the onset of necking, it is not possible to calculate e/ from 
measured values of e/. However, for cylindrical tensile specimens the 
reduction of area, q, is related to the true fracture strain by the 
relationship 

5=1- exp (-e/) (9-18) 

True Uniform Strain 

The true uniform strain e„ is the true strain based only on the strain 
up to maximum load. It may be calculated from either the specimen 
cross-sectional area Au or the gage length L„ at maximum load. Equa- 
tion (9-14) may be used to convert conventional uniform strain to true 
uniform strain. The uniform strain is often useful in estimating the 
formability of metals from the results of a tension test. 

e„ = In ^ (9-19) 

True Local Necking Strain 

The local necking strain e„ is the strain required to deform the speci- 
men from maximum load to fracture. 

en = In 4^ . (9-20) 

The usual method of determining a true stress-strain curve is to meas- 



Sec. 9-2] The Tension Test 247 

ure the cross-sectional area of the specimen at increments of load up to 
fracture. Micrometers or special dial gages can be used. Care should 
be taken to measure the minimum diameter of the specimen. This 
method is applicable over the complete range of "^treag to fracture, 
including the region after necking has occurred. However, lb correct 
precisely for the complex stresses at the neck, it is necessary to know 
the profile of the contour of the neck. This method of determination is 
limited to fairly slow rates of strain and to tests at room temperature. 
If the specimen has a circular cross section, the true strain may be 
readily calculated from the original diameter Do and the instantaheous 
diameter A. 

' = '4. = '-^T = '"t^ = 21„g! (9-21). 

True stress and strain may also be determined from the conventional 
stress and strain by means of Eqs. (9-14) and (9-15). The use of these 
equations implies that the axial strain is uniformly distributed over the 
gage length of the specimen, since their derivation is based on the con- 
stancy-of-volume relationship. Stresses and strains determined from 
these equations are accurate up to the beginning of necking, but beyond 
this stage the major portion of the strain is localized at the neck and the 
equations do not apply. 

True stress-strain curves may be obtained at high strain rates and at 
elevated temperatures by using the two-load method.^ Diameters at 
various positions along tapered specimens are measured before and after 
testing. The true stress acting at each location on the specimen is the 
maximum load divided by the area at that point after testing. This 
gives the flow curve from the state of yielding to the point of maximum 
load. If the load at fracture is measured, the curve can be extended to 
the fracture stress by linear extrapolation. 

It is usually desirable to be able to express the true stress-strain curve 
by a mathematical relationship. The simplest useful expression is the 
power curve described earlier in Sec. 3-2. 

(7 = Xe" (9-22) 

where n is the strain-hardening coefficient and K is the strength coefficient. 
A log-log plot of true stress and strain up to maximum load will give a 
straight line if this equation is satisfied by the data (Fig. 9-4). The 
linear slope of this line is n, and K is the true stress at e = 1.0. In 
order to make the data fall closer to a straight line, it is usually desirable 

1 C. W. MacGregor, J. Appl. Mech., vol. 6, pp. A156-158, 1939. 



248 Applications to Materials Tcsti. 



[Ch 



ap. 



.-"T 



K 



to subtract the elastic strain from the 
total strain. Some typical values of n 
and K are listed in Table 9-3. 

There is nothing basic about Eq. 
(9-22), so that frequent deviations from 
this relationship are observed. One 
common type of deviation is for a 
log-log plot of Eq. (9-22) to result in 
two straight lines with different slopes, 
while in other cases a curve with con- 
tinuously changing slope is obtained. 
Equation (9-23) is typical of the more 

complicated relationships which have been suggested^ to provide better 

agreement with the data. 



0.001 



0.01 0.1 

True strain f 



Fig. 9-4. log-log plot of true stress 
strain curve. 



= Ci - (Ci - (72) exp - 



(-A) 



(9-23) 



Table 9-3 
Values of n and K for Metals at Room Temperature 



Metal 


Condition 


n 


K, psi 


Ref. 


0.05% C steel 

SAE 4340 steel 

0.6% C steel 

0.6% C steel 

Copper 

70/30 brass 


Annealed 

Annealed 

Quenched and tempered 1000°F 

Quenched and tempered 1300°F 

Annealed 

Annealed 


0.26 
0.15 
0.10 
0.19 
0.54 
0.49 


77,000 

93,000 

228,000 

178,000 

46,400 

130,000 









t J. R. Low and F. Garofalo, Froc. Soc. Exptl. Stress Anal., vol. 4, no. 2, pp. 16-25, 
1947. 

t J. R. Low, "Properties of Metals in Materials Engineering," American Society 
for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1949. 



9-3. Instability in Tension 

Necking generally begins at maximum load during the tensile defor- 
mation of a ductile metal. ^ An ideal plastic material in which no strain 
hardening occurs would become unstable in tension and begin to neck 
just as soon as yielding took place. However, a real metal undergoes 

1 E. Voce, Metallurgia, vol. 51, pp. 219-226, 1955. 

2 An exception to this is the behavior of cold-rolled zirconium tested at 200 to 370°C, 
where necking occurred at a strain of twice the strain at maximum load. See J. H. 
Keeler, Trans. ASM, vol. 47, pp. 157-192, 1955, and discussion by A. J. Opinsky, 
pp. 189-190. 



Sec. 9-3] 



TheT 



ension 



Test 



249 



strain hardening, which tends to increase the load-carrying capacity of 
the specimen as deformation increases. This effect is opposed by the 
gradual decrease in the cross-sectional area of the specimen as it elon- 
gates. Necking or localized deformation begins at maximum load, where 
the increase in stress due to decrease in the cross-sectional area of the 
specimen becomes greater than the increase in the load-carrying ability 









b 










^ 






in 




^ 


1 






a> 


^ 


-f 












/ 


u / 






CTm 




^^ i 




1 










-t/^ 


y 










+ 1 

" 1 


/I 











B 








^ — 






Conventiona 








Cu 




strain e -> 




< 


1 + e,, - 






>■ 







Fig. 9-5. Considere's construction for the determination of the point of maximum load. 



of the metal due to strain hardening. This condition of instability lead- 
ing to localized deformation is defined by the condition dP = 0. 

P = aA 

dP = a dA -\- A da = 

From the constancy-of-volume relationship, 



Therefore 



dL dA 






L A 






dA dL da J 
A L a 


de 

1 +e 




da 
Te=' 




(9-24) 


da a 




(9-25) 


de 1 + e 



or 



Equation (9-24) says that necking will occur in uniaxial tension at a strain 
at which the slope of the true stress-strain curve equals the true stress at 
that strain. 

Equation (9-25) permits an interesting geometrical construction for 
the determination of the point of maximum load.^ In Fig. 9-5 the stress- 

' A. Considere, Ann. ponts et chauss^es, vol. 9, ser. 6, pp. 574-775, 1885. 



250 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 9 

strain curve is plotted in terms of true stress against conventional linear 
strain. Let point A represent a negative strain of 1.0. A line drawn 
from point .4 which is tangent to the stress-strain curve will establish 
the point of maximum load, for according to Eq. (9-25) the slope at this 
point is a /{I + e). The stress at this point is the true stress at maxi- 
mum load, (T,„. If we had plotted average stress, this would have been 
the tensile strength a„. The relation between these two stresses is 

a„ _ A _ Lq 

(Tm Ao L 

From the definition of conventional linear strain, 

Lo 1 



L 1 +e 
so that a-„ = am :7— 7- — (9-26) 

A study of the similar triangles in Fig. 9-5 shows that Eq. (9-26) is satis- 
fied when OD is the tensile strength. 

If the flow curve for a material is given by the power law of Eq. (9-22), 
it is possible readily to determine the strain at which necking occurs. 

a = /ve" 

-^ = 0- = Ae" = nKe^~^ 
de 

6„ = n (9-27) 

Therefore, the strain at which necking occurs is numerically equal to the 
strain-hardening coefficient. 

Plastic instability is often important in forming operations with sheet 
metal since the strain at which the deformation becomes localized con- 
stitutes the forming limit of the metal. Lankford and SaibeP have deter- 
mined the criteria for localized deformation for the case of a sheet sub- 
jected to biaxial tensile forces (stretching), a thin- wall tube subjected to 
internal pressure and axial loading, and a sheet subjected to a hydrostatic 
bulge test. 

9-4. Stress Distribution at the Neck 

The formation of a neck in the tensile specimen introduces a complex 
triaxial state of stress in that region. The necked region is in effect a 
mild notch. As was discussed in Sec. 7-12, a notch under tension pro- 

1 W. T. Lankford and E. Saibel, Trans. AIME, vol. 171, pp. 562-573, 1947. 



)ec, 



9-4] 



The Tension Test 



251 



o> 



-*ar 



duces radial and transverse stresses which raise the value of longitudinal 
stress required to cause plastic flow. Therefore, the average true stress 
at the neck, which is determined by dividing the axial tensile load by the 
minimum cross-sectional area of 
the specimen at the neck, is higher 
than the stress which would be 
required to cause flow if simple 
tension prevailed. Figure 9-6 illus- 
trates the geometry at the necked 
region and the stresses developed 
by this localized deformation. R 
is the radius of curvature of the 
neck, which can be measured either 
by projecting the contour of the 
necked region on a screen or by 
using a tapered, conical radius 
gage. 

Bridgman' made a mathematical 
analysis which provides a correction 
to the average axial stress to compensate for the introduction of trans- 
verse stresses. This analysis was based on the following assumptions : 

1 . The contour of the neck is approximated by the arc of a circle. 

2. The cross section of the necked region remains circular throughout 
the test. 

3. The Von Mises criterion for yielding applies. 

4. The strains are constant over the cross section of the neck. 




<^t 



Fig. 9-6. (a) Geometry of necked region; 
(6) stresses acting on element at point 0. 



Table 9-4 

Correction Factors to Be Applied to Average True Stress to 

Compensate for Transverse Stresses at Neck of 

Tensile Specimen 



a/R 


Bridgman 


Davidenkov 


factor 


factor 





1.000 


1.000 


Vz 


0.927 


0.923 


M 


0.897 


0.889 


1 


0.823 


0.800 


2 


0.722 


0.667 


3 


0.656 


0.571 


4 


0.606 


0.500 



' p. W. Bridgman, Trans. ASM, vol. 32, p. 553, 1944. 



252 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 9 



According to this analysis the ratio of the true axial stress o- to the 
average axial stress o-av is 

(7av (1 + 2R/a)\ln (1 + a/2R)] 



(9-28) 



Davidenkov and Spiridonova^ determined a correction for necking based 

on somewhat different assumptions 
from those of Bridgman. Their 
expression is given by 




a 



1 



1 + a/4R 



(9-29) 



These two equations differ by less 
than 1 per cent for values of a/R 
less than 0.6. Tj^pical values for 
these corrections are given in 
Table 9-4. 

The determination of the radius 
of curvature of the neck during the 
progress of the test is certainly 
not a routine or easy operation. 
In order to help with this situa- 
tion, Bridgman determined an em- 
pirical relationship between the 
neck contour (a/R) and the true 
strain, based on about 50 steel 
specimens. Figure 9-7 shows this 
relationship converted into the var- 
iation of a/a^y with true strain. 
Experimental values^ for copper and steel are also included in this figure. 
This investigation showed that Bridgman's equation provides better 
agreement with experiment than Davidenkov's. The dashed curve in 
Fig. 9-3 is the true stress-strain curve of nickel adjusted for necking 
by means of Bridgman's correction factor. The problem of the stress 
distribution at the neck of flat tensile specimens has been considered by 
Aronofsky.^ 



Fig. 9-7. Relationship between Bridgman 
correction factor a/aav and true tensile 
strain. (E. R. Marshall and M. C. Shaw, 
Trans. ASM, vol. 44, p. 716, 1952.) 



9-5. Strain Distribution in the Tensile Specimen 

The strain distribution along the length of a tensile specimen is not 
uniform, particularly in metals which show pronounced necking before 

1 N. N. Davidenkov and N. I. Spiridonova, Proc. ASTM, vol. 46, p. 1147, 1946. 

2 E. R. Marshall and M. C. Shaw, Trans. ASM, vol. 44, pp. 705-725, 1952. 

3 J. Aronofsky, J. Appl. Mech., vol. 18, pp. 75-84, 1951. 



Sec. 9-5] 



fheT 



ension 



Test 



253 




fracture. Figure 9-8 shows in a schematic way the distribution of local 
elongation along the length of a tensile specimen. The exact distribu- 
tion of strain will depend upon the 
metal, the gage length, and the 
shape of the cross section of the 
test section. In general, the softer 
and more ductile the metal, the 
greater the amount of deformation 
away from the necked region. 
Also, the shorter the gage length, 
the greater the influence of local- 
ized deformation at the neck on the 
total elongation of the gage length. 
Therefore, for a given material, the 
shorter the gage length, the greater 
the percentage elongation. It is 

for this reason that the specimen gage length should always be reported 
with the percentage elongation. 

It is generally recognized that in order to compare elongation measure- 
ments of different-sized specimens, the specimens must be geometrically 
similar; i.e., the ratio of gage length to diameter must be constant. In 
the United States the standard tensile specimen has a 0.505-in. diameter 
and a 2-in. gage length. Thus, L/D ~ 4, or L = 4.51 y/A. This is the 
basis for the dimensions of the ASTM tensile specimens listed in Table 
9-5. The British standards specify L/D = 3.54, while the German 
standards use L/D = 10. 

Table 9-5 
Dimensions of ASTM Tensile Specimens 



Gage length 

Fig. 9-8. Schematic drawing of variation 
of local elongation with position along 
gage length of tensile specimen. 



Diam, in. 


Gage 
length, in. 


L/D 


0.505 


2 


3.97 


0.357 


1.4 


3.92 


0.252 


1 


3.97 


0.160 


0.634 


3.96 



For tensile specimens cut from thin sheet the ratio of width to thick- 
ness can affect the total elongation. With a constant gage length, an 
increase in either the width or the thickness of the specimen results in an 
increase in elongation. However, so long as the width and thickness 
are varied without changing the cross-sectional area, the elongation is 
not affected. Available data indicate that the percentage elongation 
increases in proportion to the area raised to a fractional power. 



254 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 9 



The uniform elongation is not affected by specimen geometry, since 
up to maximum load the specimen elongates and contracts in diameter 
uniformly. The specimen changes from a cylinder of a certain length 
and diameter to a cylinder of longer length and smaller diameter. For 
this reason the uniform elongation is a more fundamental measure of 
ductility than the conventional percentage elongation. 



9-6. Effect of Strain Rate on Tensile Properties 

The room-temperature stress-strain curve is not greatly influenced by 
changes in the rate of straining of the order obtainable in the ordinary 



■^40 

o 
o 
o 

sz 

a> 

c= 

^ 10 

n 


























Ro 


om fe 


vpera 


fure 




^ 


^ 


^ 


"^ 






_200^C^ 










/ 








40C 








^^q'^ 


bC 


/ 








8C 






lf^>i 







10' 



10" 



^ 10-2 

Strain rate, sec 



10' 



Fig. 9-9. Effect of strain rate on the tensile strength of copper for tests at various tem- 
peratures. {A. Nadai and M. J. Manjoine, J. Appl. Mech., vol. 8, p. A82, 1941.) 



tp.nsion test. (The effect of impact and very high-speed loading will be 
-T'nsidered in Chap. 14.) High-speed tensile tests^~^ in which the rate 
of loading has been varied by a factor of about 100,000 have shown that 
the yield stress is more sensitive to increases in strain rate than the tensile 
strength. High rates of strain cause a yield point to appear in specimens 
of low-carbon steel which do not show a yield point under ordinary rates 
of loading. The effect of strain rate in raising resistance to deformation 
,j;enerally increases on testing at elevated temperature. Figure 9-9 shows 
the effect of strain rate on the tensile strength of copper at various 
temperatures. 

The determination of a mathematical relationship between the flow 

■ J. Winlock, Trans. AIME, vol. 197, pp. 797-803, 1953. 

' R. J. MacDonald, R. L. Carlson, and W. T. Lankford, Proc. ASTM, vol. 56, pp. 
704-723, 1956. 

« A. Nadai and M. J. Majoine, J. Appl. Mech., vol. 8, pp. A77-A91, 1941. 



>ec, 



9-6] The Tension Test 255 



stress and the strain rate is difficult because of the many experimental 
problems associated with measuring tensile properties at very rapid rates 
of deformation. Among the experimental problems is that an adiabatic 
condition is created at high strain rates, causing the temperature of the 
specimen to increase; there is not enough time for the heat of plastic 
deformation to be dissipated. Tests in which the specimen is pulled at 
a constant true strain rate are not readily performed on conventional 
testing machines. Although it is fairly easy to maintain a constant rate 
of crosshead movement, this does not ensure a constant rate of strain in 
the specimen since the rate of straining in the specimen increases with 
load, particularly during necking. 

Nadai^ has presented a mathematical analysis of the conditions exist- 
ing during the extension of a cylindrical specimen with one end fixed and 
the other attached to the movable crosshead of the testing machine. The 
crosshead velocity is y = dL/dt. The strain rate expressed in terms of 
conventional linear strain is e. 



^ dt dt U dt U ^^'^^^ 

Thus, the conventional strain rate is proportional to the crosshead veloc- 
ity. The equation is applicable up to the onset of necking. 
The true strain rate e is given by 

^e d[\n (L/Lo)] 1 dL v 






dt dt L dt L 



(9-31) 



This equation indicates that for a constant crosshead speed the true 
strain rate will decrease as the specimen elongates. To maintain a con- 
stant true strain rate, the crosshead velocity must increase in proportion 
to the increase in length of the specimen. For a cylindrical specimen 
the true strain rate is related to the instantaneous diameter Di by 

de d[2 In (Z)o/A)] 2 d{D^) 






dt dt Di dt 



(9-32) 



The true strain rate is related to the conventional strain rate by the 
following equation : 

. _ v^ _ Lode _ 1 de _ e 

'~L~Ldt~l+edt~l+e ^^"'^'^^ 

Strain-rate experiments with mild steel have shown a semilogarithmic 
relationship between the lower yield point and the strain rate. 

(To = ki + k-i log e (9-34) 

' A. Nadai, "Theory of Flow and Fracture of Solids," vol. I, pp. 74-75, McGraw- 
Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 1950. 



256 



Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 9 



However, a more general relationship ^ between flow stress and strain 
rate, at constant temperature and strain, seems to be 



C{ey 



W,T 



(9-35) 



where m is a coefficient known as the strain-rate sensitivity. The strain- 
rate sensitivity m may be defined as the ratio of the incremental change in 
log <T to the resultant change in log e, at a given strain and temperature. 
A value for this parameter can be obtained from a test where the strain 
rate is rapidly changed from one value to another. 



m — 



log (q-2/o-i) 
log (€2/61) 



(9-36) 



The strain-rate sensitivity for most metals increases with temperature 
and with strain. 

9-7. Effect of Temperature on Tensile Properties 

In general, strength decreases and ductility increases as the test tem- 
perature is increased. However, structural changes such as precipitation, 



-/96°C 




Strain e 



Fig. 9-10. Changes in engineering stress- 
strain curves of mild steel with tempera- 
ture. 



en f 



•- O 
O) o 



'Room temperature 
Tens, 




Temperature — * 

Fig. 9-1 1 . Variation of tensile properties 
of steel with temperature. 



strain aging, or recrystallization may occur over certain temperature 
ranges to alter this general behavior. Further, extended exposure at 
elevated temperature may cause creep. 

The change with temperature in the shape of the engineering stress- 
strain curve in mild steel is shown schematically in Fig. 9-10. The vari- 
ation of the tensile properties of steel with temperature is shown in Fig. 
9-11. The strength of steel increases as the temperature is raised above 
room temperature. The maximum in strength is accompanied by a mini- 

1 C. Zener and J. H. Hollomon, /. App/. Phy&., vol. 15, pp. 22-32, 1944. 



Sec. 9-7] 



TheL 



Test 



257 



mum in ductility, which occurs in the vicinity of 400°F, due to strain 
aging or blue brittleness. Figure 9-12 shows the variation of yield 
strength with temperature for body-centered cubic tantalum/ tungsten, 
molybdenum, and iron and face-centered cubic nickel. Note that the 
yield strength of nickel increases with decreasing temperature to a lesser 
extent than in the body-centered cubic metals. This difference in the 

140 



120 



S.100 

o 

o 

Sso 



£ 60 



40 



20=- 



-200 

























\ 












































\ 






\ 




1 


\ 

\ 


\\" 





\ 
















\ 

\ 


f"^ 


K 




\ 














Mi 


\ 
\ 
\ 


\ 


:;^^. 


.^ 
















> 


^-*= 


— 































200 400 

Temperoture, °C 



600 



800 



Fig. 9-1 2. Effect of temperature on the yield strength of body-centered cubic Ta, W, 
Mo, Fe and face-centered cubic Ni. (/. H. Bechtold, Acta Met., vol. 3, p. 252, 1955.) 

temperature dependence of yield strength is believed to be of significance 
in explaining why face-centered cubic metals do not exhibit brittle frac- 
ture at low temperatures. The horizontal portion of the curves for W 
and Mo at low temperature represents the brittle-fracture strength, for 
these metals undergo brittle fracture without extensive yielding at these 
temperatures. In comparing the flow stress or yield stress of a material 
at two temperatures it is advisable to correct for the effect of temperature 
on elastic modulus by comparing ratios of a/E rather than simple ratios 
of flow stress. 

Figure 9-13 shows the variation of the reduction of area with temper- 
ature for these same metals. Note that tungsten is almost completely 
brittle at 200°C, iron at — 200°C, while nickel decreases little in ductility 
over the entire temperature range. The lack of a brittle transition in 
nickel is a general characteristic of face-centered cubic metals and corre- 
lates with its small temperature dependence of yield strength. The 
behavior of body-centered tantalum is anomalous in this respect, for it 
shows no ductility transition although the yield stress increases rapidly 
at low temperature. 

1 J. H. Bechtold, Acta Met., vol. 3, pp. 249-254, 1955. 



258 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap.:9 



The temperature dependence of the flow stress at constant strain and 
strain rate can be generally represented by 



a = C-2. exp 



RT 



(9-37) 



where Q = an activation energy for plastic flow, cal/g mole 
R = universal gas constant, 1.987 cal/(deg)(mole) 
T = testing temperature, °K 
If this equation represents the data, a straight line is obtained for a plot 
of In a versus 1/T. The activation energy is obtained from the slope of 



100 



60 



40 



20 





























j^ 


— 


7^' 


Jc 


] 














^ 


V 






1 












i 




r 






w/ 












/ 


J 


'Mo 






/ 










/ 


\ 


J 






V 













-200 



200 400 

Temperature, °C 



600 



800 



Fig. 9-1 3. Effect of temperature on the reduction of area of Ta, W, Mo, Fe, and Ni. 
(/. H. Bechtold, Acta Met, vol. 3, p. 253, 1955.) 

the line. Equation (9-37) has been found valid for steel, molybdenum, 
and tungsten over a considerable temperature range. It is, however, not 
valid ^ at temperatures below around 100°K. 



9-8. Combined EFFect of Strain Rate and Temperature 

Zener and Hollomon^ suggested that the flow stress at constant strain 
was related to both the strain rate and the temperature in the following 
way: 



(e exp If) 



(9-38) 



AH is an activation energy expressed in calories per gram mole and is 
related to the activation energy Q in Eq. (9-37) by Q = m AH, where 

1 E. T. Wessel, Trans. ASM, vol. 49, pp. 149-172, 1957. 
^ Zener and Hollomon, op. cit. 



Sec. 9-8] The Tension Test 259 

m is the strain-rate sensitivity. The quantity in parentheses in Eq. 
(9-38) is often called the Zener-Hollomon parameter Z. 

A/7 
Z = e exp ^ (9-39) 

A plot of In e versus 1/T should result in a straight line. Zener and 
Hollomon originally based this relationship on the fact that the yield 
strength and tensile strength of steel and copper correlated well with Z 
over rather wide ranges of e and T. More recently it has been found to 
hold for true stress data on molybdenum^ and pure aluminum.- It has 
been shown that the same functional relationship is obtained between 
stress and strain for a constant value of Z, but since AH is not inde- 
pendent of stress this relationship does not uniquely describe the flow 
curve. 

A slightly different type of approach to this problem was taken by 
MacGregor and Fisher.^ They proposed that strain rate and temper- 
ature could be combined into a velocity-modified tem-perature. Then, the 
flow stress at a particular strain is a function of the velocity-modified 
temperature T^. 

where T, = t(\ - k In - ) (9-40) 



In Eq. (9-40) k and eo are constants related to reaction-rate constants. 
This equation was originally verified for data on steel and aluminum 
over a large temperature range but only a small range of strain rates. 
More recently* it has been verified for low-carbon steel over a greater 
range of strain rates. 

When Eq. (9-38) was first proposed, it w^as interpreted much more 
broadly than it is today. It was suggested that Eq. (9-38) represented 
a mechanical equation of state, analogous to the equations of state for a 
perfect gas. The concept of the mechanical equation of state^ indicated 
that the flow stress of a metal was a function only of the instantaneous 
values of strain, strain rate, and temperature regardless of the previous 
temperature and rate of straining. In other words, if a metal did not 
undergo a phase change or gross change in metallurgical structure, it was 
considered that a metal would arrive at the same final conditions of flow 

• J. H. Bechtold, Trans. AIME, vol. 197, pp. 1469-1475, 1953. 

2 T. A. Trozera, O. D. Sherby, and J. E. Dorn, Trans. ASM, vol. 49, pp. 173-188, 
1957. 

3 C. W. MacGregor and J. C. Fisher, /. Appl. Mech., vol. 13, pp. 11-16, 1946. 
^ MacDonald, Carlson, and Lankford, op. cit. 

U. H. Hollomon, Trans. AIME, vol. 171, p. 535, 1947. 



260 



Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 9 



stress and strain by dilYerent paths of strain rate and temperature pro- 
vided that Eq. (9-3S) was satistied. However, extensive experiments' - 
on aluminum, copper, stainless steel, and low-carbon steel have shown 
appreciable deviations from the beha^•ior predicted by the mechanical 
equation of state. It is now established that the flow stress depends on 
the previous conditions of temperature and strain rate as well as on the 
instantaneous values of strain, strain rate, and temperature. The failure 
of the mechanical equation of state is due to the fact that the structural 
changes occurring during plastic deformation are dependent not solely on 
strain but on the strain rate and temperature as well. 

9-9. Notch Tensile Test 

The ordinary tension test on smooth specimens will fail to indicate 
notch sensitivity in metals. However, a tension test with a notched 



P^ 



a 

D ^ 



-^ P 



Fig. 9-14. Details of notched tensile specimen. 



tensile specimen will show whether or not a material is notch-sensitive 
and prone to brittle fracture in the presence of a stress concentration. 
Notch sensitivity can also be investigated b^y means of the notched- 
impact test, as described in Chap. 14; this test has been widely used for 
mild steels and as a test for temper embrittlement. The impact test has 
the advantage of ease in preparing specimens and testing over a wide 
range of temperature, but it lacks the advantage of the notch tensile test 
of more basic interpretation of test results because of a better-defined 
state of stress. The notch tensile test has been used for testing high- 
strength steels, for studying hydrogen embrittlement in steels, and for 
investigating the notch sensitivit}' of high-temperature alloys. 

Figure 9-14 shows the geometric details of a notched tensile specimen. 
The introduction of the notch produces a condition of biaxial stress at 
the root of the notch and triaxial stress at the interior of the specimen. 
As was shown previously in Sec. 7-12, the presence of transverse stress 
at the notch increases the resistance to flow and decreases the ratio of 

» J. E. Dorn, A. Goldberg, and T. E. Tietz, Trans. AIME, vol. 180, p. 205, 1949. 
- T. E. Tietz and J. E. Dorn, "Cold Working of Metals," pp. 163-179, American 
Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1949. 



Sec. 9-9] 



The Tension Test 



261 



shear stress to tensile stress. A notch is characterized by the notch 
sharpness a/r and the notch depth. 



Notch depth = 1 - r,2 



200 



100 



The notch strength is defined as the maximum load divided by the original 
cross-sectional area at the notch. The notch-strength ratio (NSR) is the 
ratio of the notch strength to the 
ultimate tensile strength. The '^^^ 

NSR is a measure of notch sensi- 
tivity. If the NSR is less than S. 
unity, the material is notch-brittle. ^ 
The term notch ductility is used 
to indicate the reduction of area 
at the notched region . The amount 
of notch ductility is often very 
small and therefore is difficult to 
determine accurately. The most 
commonly used notch has 50 per 
cent of the area removed at the 
notch, with a radius of 0.001 in. 
and a 60° notch angle. 

The notch sensitivity of steel is 
usually evaluated by measuring 
the notch strength as a function 
of tensile strength. Figure 9-15 
shows the type of curves which are 
obtained. The notch strength 
drops off sharply at about the 
200,000-psi strength level, indi- 
cating that the steels are notch- 
brittle above this strength level. Below this point the NSR is about 
1.5. Note that the notch ductility decreases to very low values for tensile 
strengths over 200,000 psi. For most heat-treated steels the NSR falls 
off below 1.5 when the notch ductility drops below about 6 per cent. 

The notch-strength-tensile-strength curve is a function of the notch 
shape. Increasing the notch radius reduces the elastic-stress concentra- 
tion but has little effect on the degree of triaxiality of stress. The effect 
of changes in notch radius on notched tensile properties depends on the 
strength level of the steel. At high strength levels, where ductility is low, 
reducing the notch sharpness increases the notch strength and the notch- 
strength ratio. At strength levels below about 200,000 psi there is no 
effect on the notch strength of increasing the radius from 0.001 to 0.050 in. 









/■ 


— , 


V 






/ 


^ 


\ 


V 






/ 




\ 






/ 






\ 


,4 


/ 


/ 










/ 






























\Y 












X\ 












\ 


\ 












V 


^ 







100 200 

Tensile strength, 1,000 psi 



300 



Fig. 9-1 5. Notch tensile properties of two 
steels. Steel ^4 has higher notch sensi- 
tivity than steel B. 



262 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 9 

On the other hand, changing the notch depth produces large changes in 
triaxiality with only small changes in stress concentration. At low 
strength levels the notch-strength ratio is a linear function of the notch 
depth. 

notch depth, % 



NSR = 1 + 



100 



At higher strengths, where the ductility is low, the notch strength is 
dependent on the notch ductility. The literature on notch tensile testing 
has been described in a number of reviews. ^'^ 

9-10. Tensile Properties of Steels 

Because of the commercial importance of ferrous materials, a great deal 
of work has been done in correlating their tensile properties with composi- 
tion and microstructure. It has been clearly demonstrated that micro- 
structure is the chief metallurgical variable which controls the tensile 
properties of steels. Because of the wide variety of microstructures which 
are possible with changes in composition and heat treatment, this is a very 
interesting, yet somewhat complex, subject. 

The tensile properties of annealed and normalized steels are controlled 
by the flow and fracture characteristics of the ferrite and by the amount, 
shape, and distribution of the cementite. The strength of the ferrite 
depends on the amount of alloying elements in solid solution (see Fig. 5-9) 
and the ferrite grain size. The carbon content has a very strong effect 
because it controls the amount of cementite present either as pearlite or 
as spheroidite. The strength increases and ductility decreases with 
increasing carbon content because of the increased amount of cementite 
in the microstructure. A normalized steel will have higher strength than 
an annealed steel because the more rapid rate of cooling used in the 
normalizing treatment causes the transformation to pearlite to occur at a 
lower temperature, and a finer pearlite spacing results. Differences in 
tensile properties due to the shape of the cementite particles are shown in 
Fig. 9-16, where the tensile properties of a spheroidized structure are 
compared with a pearlitic structure for a steel with the same carbon 
content. Empirical correlations have been worked out^ between composi- 
tion and cooling rate for predicting the tensile properties of steels with 
pearlitic structures. 

ij. D. Lubahn, Notch Tensile Testing, "Fracturing of Metals," pp. 90-132, 
American Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1948. 

2 J. D. Lubahn, Trans. ASME, vol. 79, pp. 111-115, 1957. 

3 1. R. Kramer, P. D. Gorsuch, and D. L. Newhouse, Trans. AIMS, vol. 172, 
pp. 244-272, 1947. 



Sec. 9-10] 



TheT 



ension 



Test 



263 

































200 














•^ 'J^ 






"^ 


^ 












^ 


p'i 


> "^ 


y' 


-''^ 




'^- 


hn^^: 


-v^/ 


V 


\ 




o 150 

o 

o 


/ 




,^^'^ 


U^ ..nth . 


' —- 


Lamellar 

1 1 






\^ 


A- 






1^ - 


"^ ^ 












Reducting 
of area \ 


Stress, 1 

5 
o 




o'<a 












^ 










IV--' 












.■' 




^■~~- 


- — 


• 


-^ 






50 


/ 


^ 


-.yiel 


dst^j 


>- 


^ 


\ 














/ 




,--' 












^ 


1 

Elongation 
^ 1 







--^'' 


















' 







^^ 


::r:: 



20 



25 



30 35 20 25 

Rockwell hardness, C scale 



30 



50 



40 



30 



20 



10 



35 



Fig. 9-16. Tensile properties of pearlite and spheroidite in a eutectoid steel. {From 
E. C. Bain, "Alloying Elements in Steel," p. 39, American Society for Metals, Metals 
Park, Ohio, 1939.) 



One of the best ways to increase the strength of annealed steel is by 
cold working. Table 9-6 gives the tensile properties which result from 
the cold reduction of SAE 1016 steel bars by drawing through a die. 

Table 9-6 
Effect of Cold Drawing on Tensile Properties of 

SAE 1016 STEELf 



Reduction 


Yield 


Tensi'.e 


Elongation, 


Reduction 


of area by 


strength. 


strength. 


in 2 in., 


of area, 


drawing, % 


psi 


psi 


% 


% 





40,000 


66,000 


34 


70 


10 


72,000 


75,000 


20 


65 


20 


82,000 


84,000 


17 


63 


40 


86,000 


95,000 


16 


60 


60 


88,000 


102,000 


14 


54 


80 


96,000 


115,000 


7 


26 



t L. J. Ebert, "A Handbook on the Properties of Cold Worked Steels," PB 121662, 
Office of Technical Services, U.S. Department of Commerce, 1955. 

The pearlitic structure in steel can be controlled best by transforming 
the austenite to pearlite at a constant temperature instead of allowing it 
to form over a range of temperature on continuous cooling from above 
the critical temperature. Although isothermal transformation is not in 
widespread commercial use, it is a good way of isolating the effect of 



264 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 9 



certain microstructures on the properties of steel. Figure 9-17 shows the 
variation of tensile properties for a Ni-Cr-Mo eutectoid steel with iso- 
thermal-reaction temperature.^ This is a recent extension of Gensamer's 
work," which showed that the tensile strength varied linearly with the 
logarithm of the mean free ferrite path in isothermally transformed struc- 
tures. In the region 1300 to 1000°F the transformation product is 



300 



8 250 
o 



■&200- 



^ 150 



100- 



50- 



- 






> 




/ / 


4 


^%, 


A^~\' 


/ 


x^ 


^ \. 


1 I 


1 1 


J^longarfon 

I I I 1 1 



-60 



40, 



-20 



1300 1100 900 700 

Transformation temperature, "F 



500 



Fig. 9-1 7. Relationship of tensile properties of Ni-Cr-Mo steel to isothermal-trans- 
formation temperature. {E. S. Davenport, Trans. AIME, vol. 209, p. 684, 1957.) 



lamellar pearlite. The spacing between cementite platelets decreases 
with transformation temperature and correspondingly the strength 
increases. In the region 800 to 500°F the structure obtained on trans- 
formation is acicular bainite. The bainitic structure becomes finer with 
decreasing temperature, and the strength increases almost linearly to 
quite high values. Good ductility accompanies this high strength over 
part of the bainite temperature range. This is the temperature region 
used in the commercial heat-treating process known as austempering. 
The temperature region 1000 to 800°F is one in which mixed lamellar 
and acicular structures are obtained. There is a definite ductility mini- 
mum and a leveling off of strength for these structures. The sensitivity 

1 E. S. Davenport, Trans. AIME, vol. 209, pp. 677-688, 1957. 

2 M. Gensamer, E. B. Pearsall, W. S. Pellini, and J. R. Low, Trans. ASM, vol. 30, 
pp. 983-1020, 1942. 



Sec. 9-10] 



TheT 



ension 



Test 



265 



of the reduction of area to changes in microstructiire is well illustrated 
by these results. 

The best combination of strength and ductility is obtained in steel 
which has been quenched to a fully martensitic structure and then 
tempered. The best criterion for comparing the tensile properties of 
quenched and tempered steels is on the basis of an as-quenched struc- 
ture of 100 per cent martensite. However, the attainment of a com- 
pletely martensitic structure may, in many cases, be commercially 




/I -99.9% martensite _ 

95 % martensite 
C - 90% martensite 
D - 80% martensite _ 
E - 50 % martensite 



0.1 



0.2 



0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 
Carbon content, wt. % 



0.7 



0.8 



Fig. 9-18. As-quenched hardness of steel as a function of carbon content for different 
percentages of martensite in the microstructure. {ASM Metals Handbook, 1948 
ed., p. 497.) 



impractical. Because of the importance of obtaining a fully marten- 
sitic structure, it is desirable that the steel have adequate hardenability. 
Hardenahility, the property of a steel which determines the depth and 
distribution of hardness induced by quenching, should be differentiated 
from hardness, which is the property of a material which represents its 
resistance to indentation or deformation. (This subject is discussed in 
Chap. 11.) Hardness is associated with strength, while hardenability 
is connected with the transformation characteristics of a steel. Harden- 
ability may be increased by altering the transformation kinetics by the 
addition of alloying elements, while the hardness of a steel with given 
transformation kinetics is controlled primarily by the carbon content. 
Figure 9-18 shows the hardness of martensite as a function of carbon 
content for different total amounts of martensite in the microstructure. 
These curves can be used to determine whether or not complete harden- 
ing was obtained after quenching. Hardness is used as a convenient 
measure of the strength of quenched and tempered steels. The validity 
of this procedure is based on the excellent correlation which exists between 



266 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 9 



tensile strength and hardness for heat-treated, annealed, and normalized 
steels (Fig. 9-19). 

The mechanical properties of a quenched and tempered steel may be 
altered by changing the tempering temperature. Figure 9-20 shows how 
hardness and the tensile properties vary with tempering temperature for 
an SAE 4340 steel. This is the typical behavior for heat-treated steel. 











Rockwell C 


hardness 






260 
240 


12 25 31 38 43 


47 5 
















/• 
















/ 




220 














/ 




f 














/ 




/ 


.-200 

O) 

o. 
















/ 
















/ 






8180 
Q. 










/ 


/ 
















/ 


/ 








strength, 
o o 










/ / 
















/ 


/ 












A 


' / 












••^ 120 






/ 


/ 
















/ / 














C 






/ / 














^ 100 
80 




/ 


















^ 
















r 
















60 






































40 





















100 



200 300 400 

Brinell hardness number 



500 



Fig. 9-19. Relationship between tensile strength and hardness for quenched and 
tempered, annealed, and normalized steels. (SAE Handbook.) 



Several methods for correlating and predicting the hardness change in 
different steels with tempering temperature have been proposed.^"* In 
using tempering diagrams like Fig. 9-20, it is important to know whether 
or not the data were obtained on specimens quenched to essentially 100 per 
cent martensite throughout the entire cross section of the specimen. 
Because of the variability in hardenability from heat to heat, there is no 
assurance of reproducibility of data unless this condition is fulfilled. 

A great many low-alloy steels have been developed and are used in the 
quenched and tempered condition. A study of the tensile properties of 
these steels could lead to considerable confusion were it not for the fact 

1 J. H. Hollomon and L. D. Jaffe, Trans. AIME, vol. 162, p. 223, 1945. 

2 R. A. Grange and R. W. Baughman, Trans. ASM, vol. 48, pp. 165-197, 1956. 

3 L. D. Jaffe and E. Gordon, Trans. ASM, vol. 49, pp. 359-371, 1957. 



Sec. 9-10] 



TheT« 



Test 



267 



that certain generalities can be made about their properties.^- For low- 
altoy steels containing 0.3 to 0.5 per cent carbon which are quenched to 
essentially 100 per cent martensite and then tempered back to any given 
tensile strength in the range 100,000 to 200^000 psi, the other common 
tensile properties will have a relatively fixed value depending only on 
the tensile strength. In other words, the mechanical properties of this 



300 



250 



'200 



150- 



^100 



50- 




E\o^ 



ion 



60. 



50 



40.5 



30. 



20- 



- 10uj 



200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 
Tempering temperature, °F 

Fig. 9-20. Tensile properties of quenched and tempered SAE 4340 steel as a function of 
tempering temperature. For fully hardened l-in.-diameter bars. 



important class of steels do not depend basically on alloy content, carbon 
content within the above limits, or tempering temperature. It is impor- 
tant to note that this generalization does not say that two alloy steels 
given the same tempering treatment will have the same tensile properties, 
because different tempering temperatures would quite likely be required 
to bring two different alloy steels to the same tensile strength. Figure 
9-21 shows this relationship between the mechanical properties of steels 
with tempered martensitic structures. The expected scatter in values is 
indicated by the shading. Because of this similarity in properties, it is 
logical to ask why so many different alloy steels are used. Actually, as 
will be seen in Chap. 14, all low-alloy steels do not have the same impact 
resistance or notch sensitivity, and they may differ considerably in these 

' E. J. Janitsky and M. Baeyertz, "Metals Handbook," pp. 515-518, American 
Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1939. 

2 W. r.. Patton, ^Utal Prngr., vol. 43, pp. 726-733, 1943. 



268 



Applications to Materials Testing 



[Ch 



ap. 



respects when heat-treated to tensile strengths in excess of 200,000 psi. 
Further, to minimize processing difficulties such as quench cracking and 
weld embrittlement, it is an advantage to use a steel with the lowest 
carbon content consistent with the required as-quenched hardness. For 
this reason, steels are available with closely spaced carbon contents. 



.400 



300 



200 



70 



60 



■S 50 



e 40 



30 







1 1 1 1 1 






inS> 








Brine// hardness number-. 




N^ 


^^<^ 




















x^M<^^ 


















^ 


.\S>^^^ 


















o.\S>^^^^ 




















v^^^ 


^^ 


















^' 


N^ 


<> 




















s>>^ 


O 












-N^ 






^, 


^ 


^' 












sS>^ 


N^^^ 


180 o 
o 


■ S 


i>^ 


\'-' 












.^^^^ 




^ 


v'^' 












^:5^^ 






ISO ° 












^ 


.-^J 


^ 




















\\>^^^ 


' 
















^ 


x-^ 


^ 


^^Yie/d stress 












i^ 


N^^^ 














120 :p 






iN"^ 


^^^ 


















b^ 


^^^ 


















100 '>■ 




^^' 




















5N 






Low-a//oy stee/s confaininc, 




















''<'', 












'{/// 


'///. 




and tempered ~^ 












>SJ 


y/A 


//// 




















V/A 




^//' 


''///. 


















//// 


//// 


7/A 


</// 


>/A 


'/, 














' 


'^yy 


y// 






y/A 


-/., 
















^/// 


y/y 


/?% 


yy/ 


//// 


^/., 
















'^//. 


Y// 


y/^ 




yy/. 


'///, 
















'^// 


//// 




•^6 


y// 


^^'' 
















'//^ 


^yp/ 


yy? 




y//. 


'/// 






Reduction of are 


n-^ 


' '// 


vy/ 


/v/^ 


'yyy} 


vy/ 


30 c 
o 














'^^, 


yy/^ 






^/. 


















'y^y 


'V^. 




'//^ 


«<C 


















y/yA 


a> 




^^ 


'///. 


















o 






'''/? 


'^^ 


/ ' ■ 


^E/onaafinn 








20 <u 








-/^ 


f>^ 


'(.'''■ 




















'^// 


^/y^ 


</// 
























'/^ 


YM 


y//^ 


y//. 




a> 
















'■'^, 


'yyy 


^/7 


^ 
























-'''// 


in ^ 





12 





14 
Ten 



sile s 


tren 



gth, 


IS 
,00( 



Dpsi 


2C 


)0 





Fig. 9-21 . Relationships between tensile properties of quenched and tempered low- 
alloy steels. iyV. G. Patton, Metal Progr., vol. 43, p. 726, 1943.) 



Steel sections which are too large to be quenched throughout to essen- 
tially 100 per cent martensite will contain higher-temperature transfor- 
mation products such as ferrite, pearlite, and bainite interspersed with 
the martensite. Such a situation is known as a slack-quenched structure. 
Slack quenching results in tensile properties which are somewhat poorer 
than those obtained with a completely tempered martensitic structure. 
The yield strength and the reduction of area are generally most affected, 



Sec. 9-11] The Tension Test 269 

while impact strength can be very greatly reduced. The effect of slack 
quenching is greatest at high hardness levels. As the tempering temper- 
ature is increased, the deviation in the properties of slack-quenched steel 
from those of tempered martensite becomes smaller. In steels with suf- 
ficient hardenability to form 100 per cent martensite it is frequently found 
that not all the austenite is transformed to martensite on quenching. 
Studies' have shown that the greatest effect of retained austenite on 
tensile properties is in decreasing the yield strength. 

9-1 1 . Anisotropy of Tensile Properties 

It is frequently found that the tensile properties of wrought-metal 
products are not the same in all directions. The dependence of proper- 
ties on orientation is called anisotropy. Two general types of anisotropy 
are found in metals. Crystallographic anisotropy results from the pre- 
ferred orientation of the grains which is produced by severe deformation. 
Since the strength of a single crystal is highly anisotropic, a severe plastic 
deformation which produces a strong preferred orientation will cause a 
polycrystalline specimen to approach the anisotropy of a single crystal. 
The yield strength, and to a lesser extent the tensile strength, are the 
properties most affected. The yield strength in the direction perpen- 
dicular to the main (longitudinal) direction of working may be greater 
or less than the yield strength in the longitudinal direction, depending 
upon the type of preferred orientation which exists. This type of ani- 
sotropy is most frequently found in nonferrous metals, especially when 
they have been severely worked into sheet. Crystallographic anisotropy 
can be eliminated by recrystallization, although the formation of a 
recrystallization texture can cause the reappearance of a different type 
of anisotropy. A practical manifestation of crystallographic anisotropy 
is the formation of "ears," or nonuniform deformation in deep-drawn 
cups. Crystallographic anisotropy may also result in the elliptical defor- 
mation of a tensile specimen. 

Mechanical fihering is due to the preferred alignment of structural dis- 
continuities such as inclusions, voids, segregation, and second phases in 
the direction of working. This type of anisotropy is important in forg- 
ings and plates. The principal direction of working is defined as the 
longitudinal direction. This is the long axis of a bar or the rolling direc- 
tion in a sheet or plate. Two transverse directions must be considered. 
The short-transverse direction is the minimum dimension of the product, 
for example, the thickness of a plate. The long-transverse direction is 
perpendicular to both the longitudinal and short-transverse directions. 

> L. S. Castleman, B. L. Averbach, and M. Cohen, Trans. ASM, vol. 44, pp. 240- 
263, 1952. 



270 



Applications to Materials Testing 



[Ch 



ap. 



In a round or square, both these transverse directions are equivalent, 
while in a sheet the properties in the short-transverse direction cannot be 
measured. In wrought-steel products mechanical fibering is the princi- 
pal cause of directional properties. Measures of ductility like reduction 
of area are most affected. In general, reduction of area is lowest in the 
short-transverse direction, intermediate in the long-transverse direction, 
and highest in the longitudinal direction. 



70 


Lo 


ngitud 


inal 






Transverse 
\ 




1 


1 1 




1 


1 




_ 










: 


55 60 






D 

o50 










Max 


: 


^ 


_ 













.|40 


- 






\.Min 




- 


T3 


- 


(^u 


= 166,000 psi 






- 


.^30 


- 


(^0 


= 146,000 psi 




V 


^^ - 


20 




1 


1 1 




1 


1 







20 



40 60 

Angle, deg 



Fig. 9-22. Relationship between reduction of area and angle between the longitudinal; 
direction in forging and the specimen axis. (C. Wells and R. F. Mehl, Trans. ASM, vol. 
41, p. 753, 1949.) 



Transversa properties are particularly important in thick-walled tubes, 
like guns and pressure vessels, which are subjected to high internal pres- 
sures. In these applications the greatest principal stress acts in the cir- 
cumferential direction, which corresponds to the transverse direction of 
a cylindrical forging. "While there is no direct method for incorporating 
the reduction of area into the design of such a member, it is known that 
the transverse reduction of area (RAT) is a good index of steel quality 
for these types of applications. For this reason the RAT may be the 
limiting value in the design of a part. A great deal of work^""^ on the 
transverse properties of gun tubes and large forgings has provided data 
in this field. Figure 9-22 shows the variation of reduction of area with 
the angle between the axis of the tensile specimen and the longitudinal 
direction in a forging of SAE 4340 steel. No similar variation with 
orientation is found for the yield strength or the tensile strength. This 
figure shows both the maximum and minimum values of reduction of 
area obtained for different specimen orientations. Because of the large 

1 C. Wells and R. F. Mehl, Trans. ASM, vol. 41, pp. 715-818, 1949. 

2 A. H. Grobe, C. Wells, and R. F. Mehl, Trans. ASM, vol. 45, pp. 1080-1122, 1963. 
' E. A. Loria, Trans. ASM, vol. 42, pp. 486-498, 1950. 



Sec. 9-11] 



TheTc 



Test 



271 



scatter in measurements of RAT it is necessary to use statistical methods. 
The degree of anisotropy in reduction of area increases with strength 
level. In the region of tensile strength between 80,000 and 180,000 psi 
the RAT decreases by about 1.5 per cent for each 5,000 psi increase in 
tensile strength. Figure 9-23 shows the way in which the longitudinal 
and transverse reduction of area varies with reduction by forging. The 
forging ratio is the ratio of the original to the final cross-sectional area 



72 


1 


1 1 1 


68 
^6A 


' 


L ongitudinal 


:/ 


r 


O 


- / 




<u 


/ 




° 60 


- 






/ 




o 


- / 




t= 


/ 




.5 56 


- /^ 


■\ 


o 






3 






■XD 




\ 


,2 52 


- 


\-3\ 




- 




48 


_ 


x^^ 




. 


x^ 


46 


" 1 


1 1 1 1 r 1 



l:l 3:1 5:1 7:1 
Forging ratio 

Fig. 9-23. Effect of forging reduction on longitudinal and transverse reduction of 
area. Tensile strength 118,000 psi. (C. Wells and R. F. Mehl, Trans. ASM, vol. 41, 
p. 755, 1949.) 



of the forging. It is usually found that the optimum properties arc- 
obtained with a forging ratio of 2 to 3:1. Nonmetallic inclusions are 
considered to be a major source of low transverse ductility. This is 
based on the fact that vacuum-melted steels give higher RAT values 
than air-melted steel and on correlations which have been made' between 
inclusion content and RAT. Other factors such as microsegregation and 
dendritic structure may also be responsible for low transverse ductility in 
forgings. 

An interesting aspect of the anisotropic strength of metals concerns 
the effect of prior torsional deformation on tensile properties. Swift^ 
twisted mild-steel bars in torsion and then determined the tensile proper- 
tias of the bar. If the torsional shear strain at the surface exceeded 
unity, it was found that the tensile-fracture stress and reduction of area 
were greatly reduced. At the same time the tensile fracture changed 

1 J. Welchner and W. G. Hildorf, Trans. ASM, vol. 42, pp. 455-485, 1950. 

2 H. W. Swift, J. Iron Steel Inst. {London), vol. 140, p. 181, 1939. 



272 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 9 

from a cup-and-cone fracture to a fracture on a 45° plane. If the speci- 
mens were twisted to this strain and then untwisted, there was little 
effect of the torsional deformation on the fracture stress, ductility, or 
type of fracture. In interpreting these results it was suggested^ that the 
twisting produced a preferred orientation of initially randomly oriented 
microcracks. The cracks were presumed to become oriented along the 
helical surface, which is in compression during twisting (see Fig. 10-4). 
Separation occurs along this 45° plane when axial tension is applied. The 
cracks were assumed to become reoriented in the longitudinal direction 
of the bar when it was untwisted, and with this orientation they would 
have little effect on the tensile properties. Although there was no real 
experimental evidence for the existence of microcracks, it was considered 
that they could be initiated at inclusions and second-phase particles. 
However, similar experiments^ with OFHC copper, in which there were 
no second-phase particles and no preferred orientation, confirmed and 
extended Swift's observations. The mechanical anisotropy which was 
observed was explained on the assumption that the metal contained a 
fibrous flaw structure, which has the characteristics of submicroscopic 
cracks. There is some indication that these cracks originate during 
solidification of the ingot and perhaps during plastic deformation, when 
they are oriented in the principal working direction. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Hollomon, J. H., and L. D. Jaffee: "Ferrous Metallurgical Design," chaps. 3 and 4, 

John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1947. 
Lessells, John M.: "Strength and Resistance of Metals," chap. 1, John Wiley & Sons, 

Inc., New York, 1954. 
Low, J. R., Jr.: Behavior of Metals under Direct or Non-reverse Loading, in "Prop- 
erties of Metals in Materials Engineering," American Society for Metals, Metals 

Park, Ohio, 1949. 
Marin, J.: "Engineering Materials," chaps. 1 and 11, Prentice- Hall, Inc., Englewood 

Cliffs, N.J., 1952 
Nadai, A.: "Theory of Flow and Fracture of Solids," vol. I, chap. 8, McGraw-Hill 

Book Company, Inc., New York, 1950. 
Symposium on Significance of the Tension Test of Metals in Relation to Design, 

Proc. ASTM, vol. 40, pp. 501-609, 1940. 

1 C. Zener and J. H. Hollomon, Trans. ASM, vol. 33, p. 163, 1944. 

2 W. A. Backofen, A. J. Shaler, and B. B. Hundy, Trans. ASM, vol. 46, pp. 655-680, 
1954. 



Chapter 10 

THE TORSION TEST 

10-1. Introduction 

The torsion test has not met with the wide acceptance and the use 
that have been given the tension test. However, it is useful in many 
engineering applications and also in theoretical studies of plastic flow. 
Torsion tests are made on materials to determine such properties as the 
modulus of elasticity in shear, the torsional yield strength, and the 
modulus of rupture. Torsion tests also may be carried out on full-sized 
parts, such as shafts, axles, and twist drills, which are subjected to tor- 
sional loading in service. It is frequently used for testing brittle mate- 
rials, such as tool steels, and has been used in the form of a high-tem- 
perature twist test to evaluate the forgeability of materials. The torsion 
test has not been standardized to the same extent as the tension test 
and is rarely required in materials specifications. 

Torsion-testing equipment consists of a twisting head, with a chuck for 
gripping the specimen and for applying the twisting moment to the speci- 
men, and a weighing head, which grips the other end of the specimen 
and measures the twisting moment, or torque. The deformation of the 
specimen is measured by a twist-measuring device called a troptometer. 
Determination is made of the angular displacement of a point near one 
end of the test section of the specimen with respect to a point on the 
same longitudinal element at the opposite end. A torsion specimen 
generally has a circular cross section, since this represents the simplest 
geometry for the calculation of the stress. Since in the elastic range 
the shear stress varies linearly from a value of zero at the center of the 
bar to a maximum value at the surface, it is frequently desirable to test 
a thin-walled tubular specimen. This results in a nearly uniform shear 
stress over the cross section of the specimen. 

10-2. Mechanical Properties in Torsion 

Consider a cylindrical bar which is subjected to a torsional moment at 
one end (Fig. 10-1). The twisting moment is resisted by shear stresses 

273 



274 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 10 



set up in the cross section of the bar. The shear stress is zero at the 
center of the bar and increases Hnearly with the radius. Equating the 




Fig. 10-1. Torsion of a solid bar. 
twisting moment to the internal resisting moment, 

rr = a -fa 

Mt = TfdA = - r'dA 

/r = o r jo 



(10-1) 



But jr"^ dA is the polar moment of inertia of the area with respect to the 
axis of the shaft. Thus, 

rJ 



or 



Mt = — 
r 

MtT 



(10-2) 



where r = shear stress, psi 

Mt = torsional moment, Ib-in. 

r = radial distance measured from center of shaft, in. 
J = polar moment of inertia, in.^ 
Since the shear stress is a maximum at the surface of the bar, for a solid 
cylindrical specimen where / = 7ri)V32, the maximum shear stress is 



^ MtD/2 ^ \QMt 
'"-- - 7rZ)V32 " ttD^ 

For a tubular specimen the shear stress on the outer surface is 

^ IQMtDi 



(10-3) 



(10-4) 



where Di = outside diameter of tube 
D2 = inside diameter of tube 
The troptometer is used to determine the angle of twist, d, usually 
expressed in radians. If L is the test length of the specimen, from Fig. 



Sec. 10-2J The Torsion Test 275 

10-1 it will be seen that the shear strain is given by 

rd 
7 = tan = — (10-5) 

During a torsion test measurements are made of the twisting moment Mr 
and the angle of twist, 6. A torque-twist diagram is usually obtained, 
as shown in Fig. 10-2. 

The elastic properties in torsion may be obtained by using the torque 
at the proportional limit or the torque at some offset angle of twist, 




Offset 



Angle of twist, deg 
Fig. 10-2. Torque-twist diagram. 



frequently 0.001 radian/in. of gage length, and calculating the shear 
stress corresponding to the twisting moment from the appropriate equa- 
tions given above. A tubular specimen is usually required for a precision 
measurement of the torsional elastic limit or yield strength. Because of 
the stress gradient across the diameter of a solid bar the surface fibers are 
restrained from yielding by the less highly stressed inner fibers. Thus, 
the first onset of yielding is generally not readily apparent with the 
instruments ordinarily used for measuring the angle of twist. The use 
of a thin-walled tubular specimen minimizes this effect because the stress 
gradient is practically eliminated. Care should be taken, however, that 
the wall thickness is not reduced too greatly, or the specimen will fail by 
buckling rather than torsion. Experience has shown that for determi- 
nations of the shearing yield strength and modulus of elasticity the ratio 
of the length of the reduced test section to the outside diameter should be 
about 10 and the diameter-thickness ratio should be about 8 to 10. 

Once the torsional yield strength has been exceeded the shear-stress 
distribution from the center to the surface of the specimen is no longer 
linear and Eq. (10-3) or (10-4) does not strictly apply. However, an 
ultimate torsional shearing strength, or modulus of rupture, is frequently 
determined by substituting the maximum measured torque into these 



276 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 10 

equations. The results obtained by this procedure overestimate the 
ultimate shear stress. A more precise method of calculating this value 
will be discussed in the next section. Although the procedure just 
described results in considerable error, for the purpose of comparing and 
selecting materials it is generally sufficiently accurate. For the determi- 
nation of the modulus of rupture with tubular specimens, the ratio of 
gage length to diameter should be about 0.5 and the diameter-thickness 
ratio about 10 to 12. 

Within the elastic range the shear stress can be considered proportional 
to the shear strain. The constant of proportionality, G, is the modulus 
of elasticity in shear, or the modulus of rigidity. 

T =Gy (10-6) 

Substituting Eqs. (10-2) and (10-5) into Eq. (10-6) gives an expression 
for the shear modulus in terms of the geometry of the specimen, the 
torque, and the angle of twist. 

MtL 

G = ^ (10-7) 

10-3. Torsional Stresses for Large Plastic Strains 

Beyond the torsional yield strength the shear stress over a cross section 
of the bar is no longer a linear function of the distance from the axis, and 
Eqs. (10-3) and (10-4) do not apply. Nadai^ has presented a method for 
calculating the shear stress in the plastic range if the torque-twist curve 
is known. To simplify the analysis, we shall consider the angle of twist 
per unit length, 6', where 6' = d/L. Referring to Eq. (10-5), the shear 
strain will be 

7 = rd' (10-8) 

Equation (10-1), for the resisting torque in a cross section of the bar, 
can be expressed as follows: 



Mn 



= 27r y"^" rr^ dr (10-9) 



Now the shear stress is related to the shear strain by the stress-strain 
curve in shear. 

T = /(t) 

Introducing this equation into Eq. (10-9) and changing the variable from 

^ A. Nadai, "Theory of Flow and Fracture of Solids," 2d ed., vol. I, p. 347-349, 
McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 1950. A generalization of this 
analysis for strain-rate sensitive materials has been given by D. S. Fields and W. A. 
Backofen, Proc. ASTM, vol. 57, pp. 1259-1272, 1957. 



Sec. 10-3] 

r to 7 by means of Eq. (10-8) gives 

Mt = 27r 



The! 



orsion 



Test 



277 



^^^' {d'Y e' 

Mrid'Y = 27r / "f(y)Y-dy (10-10) 

where 7a = ad'. Differentiating Eq. (10-10) with respect to 6' 

^ (Mre") = 2wafiad')a'id'r = 2TaHe'mae') 

But, the maximum shear stress in the bar at the outer fiber is Ta = /(ad')- 
Therefore, 

diMrd") 



dd' 



= 27ra»(0')V„ 



Therefore, 



dMr 

SMrier + (G'y^ = 2ira\d'YTa 



(10-11) 



If a torque-twist curve is available, the shear stress can be calculated 
with the above equation. Figure 10-3 illustrates how this is done. 




Angle of twist per unit lengtti d 
Fig. 10-3. Method of calculating shear stress from torque-twist diagram. 

Examination of Eq. (10-11) shows that it can be written in terms of the 
geometry of Fig. 10-3 as follows: 



27ra' 



{BC + 3CD) 



(10-12) 



It will also be noticed from Fig. 10-3 that at the maximum value of 
torque dMr/dd' = 0. Therefore, the ultimate torsional shear strength 



278 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 10 

or modulus of rupture can be expressed by 

3M, 



r,, = 



^^ (10-13) 



10-4. Types of Torsion Failures 

Figure 10-4 illustrates the state of stress at a point on the surface of a 
bar subjected to torsion. The maximum shear stress occurs on two 
mutually perpendicular planes, perpendicular to the longitudinal axis 




^max 



'7-3= -C^1 



Fig. 10-4. State of stress in torsion. 




(a) {i>) 

Fig. 10-5. Typical torsion failures, (a) Shear (ductile) failure; (b) tensile (brittle) 
failure. 

yy and parallel with the longitudinal axis xx. The principal stresses 
cTi and 0-3 make an angle of 45° with the longitudinal axis and are equal 
in magnitude to the shear stresses, o-i is a tensile stress, and 0-3 is 
an equal compressive stress. The intermediate stress a 2 is zero. 

Torsion failures are different from tensile failures in that there is little 
localized reduction of area or elongation. A ductile metal fails by shear 
along one of the planes of maximum shear stress. Generally the plane 
of the fracture is normal to the longitudinal axis (see Fig. 10-5a). A 
brittle material fails in torsion along a plane perpendicular to the direc- 
tion of the maximum tensile stress. Since this plane bisects the angle 
between the two planes of maximum shear stress and makes an angle of 
45° with the longitidunal and transverse directions, it results in a helical 
fracture (Fig. 10-56). Fractures are sometimes observed in which the 
test section of the specimen breaks into a large number of fairly small 



Sec. 10-5] The Torsion Test 279 

pieces. In these cases it can usually be determined that the fracture 
started on a plane of maximum shear stress parallel with the axis of the 
specimen. A study of torsion failures in a tool steel as a function of 
hardness^ showed that fracture started on planes of maximum shear stress 
up to a Vickers hardness of 720 and that above this hardness tensile 
stresses were responsible for starting fracture. 

10-5. Torsion Test vs. Tension Test 

A good case can be made for the position advanced by Sauveur^ that 
the torsion test provides a more fundamental measure of the plasticity 
of a metal than the tension test. For one thing, the torsion test yields 
directly a shear-stress-shear-strain curve. This type of curve has more 
fundamental significance in characterizing plastic behavior than a stress- 
strain curve determined in tension. Large values of strain can be 
obtained in torsion without complications such as necking in tension or 
barreling due to frictional end effects in compression. Moreover, in 
torsion, tests can be made fairly easily at constant or high strain rates. 
On the other hand, considerable labor is involved in converting torque- 
angle-of-twist data into shear-stress-strain curves. Furthermore, unless 
a tubular specimen is used, there will be a steep stress gradient across 
the specimen. This will make it difficult to make accurate measure- 
ments of the yield strength. 

The tension test and the torsion test are compared below in terms of 
the state of stress and strain developed in each test. 

Tension test Torsion test 

0"! = (Tmax', 0^2 = Cs = O"! = ~0'3', Cr2 = 

0"! 0-max So"! 



' max 



2 2 -max 2 ^1 



_ __«i __._n 

Cmax — Cl, €2 — €3 — ~ K ^max — Cl — ^3 , ^2 — W 

Q 

Traax = Sinh-^ Tmax = €1 — 63 = 2ei 

i = [H(e,' + 62^ + e^r^^ 
ff = (71 & = V 3(ri 

2 7 

1 R. D. Olleman, E. T. Wessel, and F. C. Hull, Trans. ASM, vol. 46, pp. 87-99, 1954. 

2 A. Sauveur, Proc. ASTM, vol. 38, pt. 2, pp. 3-20, 1938. 



280 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 10 



This comparison shows that rmax will be twice as great in torsion as in 
tension for a given value of o-max. Since as a first approximation it can be 
considered that plastic deformation occurs on reaching a critical value of 
Tmax and brittle fracture occurs on reaching a critical value of o-max, the 
opportunity for ductile behavior is greater in torsion than in tension. 
This is illustrated schematically in Fig. 10-6, which can be considered 
representative of the condition for a brittle material such as hardened 



Critical r^ax for plastic flow 




Critical 

! CTmax for 

fracture 



Fig. 10-6. Effect of ratio Tmax/cmax in determining ductility. (After Gensamer.) 





_ 






100 


- 






80 


- 


^,^-"'■'0 


""o 


60 


- / 








'/ 




rjsjJ^S^ — 


40 


^- 






20 


^ 




a vs. € for torsion 





1 1 


1 1 1 1 


1 1 1 1 1 1 1 



0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1,2 1.4 

True strain 

Fig. 10-7. Tension and torsion true-stress-true-strain curves for low-carbon steel. 



Sec. 10-5] The Torsion Test 281 

tool steel. In the torsion test the critical shear stress for plastic flow is 
reached before the critical normal stress for fracture, while in tension the 
critical normal stress is reached before the shear stress reaches the shear 
stress for plastic flow. Even for a metal which is ductile in the tension 
test, where the critical normal stress is pushed far to the right in Fig. 
10-6, the figure shows that the amount of plastic deformation is greater 
in torsion than in tension. 

The tensile stress-strain curve can be derived from the curve for tor- 
sion when the stress-strain curve is plotted in terms of significant stress 
and strain or the octahedral shear stress and strain (see Prob. 10.4). 
Figure 10-7 shows a true-stress-true-strain curve from a tension test and 
the shear-stress-shear-strain curve for the same material in torsion. 
When both curves are plotted in terms of significant stress and signifi- 
cant strain (the tension curve is unchanged), the two curves superimpose 
within fairly close limits. A number of examples of this can be found in 
the literature.*'^ Also, a straight line is obtained for torsion data when 
the logarithm of significant stress is plotted against the logarithm of sig- 
nificant strain.^ The values of K and n obtained from these curves agree 
fairly well with comparable values obtained from the tension test. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Davis, H. E., G. E. Troxell, and C. T. Wiskocil: "The Testing and Inspection of Engi- 
neering Materials," chap. 5, 2d ed., McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New 
York, 1955. 

Gensamer, M.: "Strength of Metals under Combined Stresses," American Society for 
Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1941. 

Marin, J.: "Engineering Materials," chap. 2, Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, 
N.J., 1952. 

"Metals Handbook," pp. 111-112, American Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 
1948. 

1 E. A. Davis, Trans. ASME, vol. 62, pp. 577-586, 1940. 

2 J. H. Faupel and J. Marin, Trans. ASM, vol. 43, pp. 993-1012, 1951. 

3 H. Larson and E. P. Klier, Trans. ASM, vol. 43, pp. 1033-1051, 1951. 



Chapter 11 

THE HARDNESS TEST 

11-1. Introduction 

The hardness of a material is a poorly defined term which has many 
meanings depending upon the experience of the person involved. In 
general, hardness usually implies a resistance to deformation, and for 
metals the property is a measure of their resistance to permanent or 
plastic deformation. To a person concerned with the mechanics of mate- 
rials testing, hardness is most likely to mean the resistance to indentation, 
and to the design engineer it often means an easily measured and speci- 
fied quantity which indicates something about the strength and heat 
treatment of the metal. There are three general types of hardness 
measurements depending upon the manner in which the test is con- 
ducted. These are (1) scratch hardness, (2) indentation hardness, and 
(3) rebound, or dynamic, hardness. Only indentation hardness is of 
major engineering interest for metals. 

Scratch hardness is of primary interest to mineralogists. With this 
measure of hardness, various minerals and other materials are rated on 
their ability to scratch one another. Hardness is measured according to 
the Mohs scale. This consists of 10 standard minerals arranged in the 
order of their ability to be scratched. The softest mineral in this scale 
is talc (scratch hardness 1), while diamond has a hardness of 10. A 
fingernail has a value of about 2, annealed copper has a value of 3, and 
martensite a hardness of 7. The Mohs scale is not well suited for metals 
since the intervals are not widely spaced in the high-hardness range. 
Most hard metals fall in the Mohs hardness range of 4 to 8. A different 
type of scratch-hardness test^ measures the depth or width of a scratch 
made by drawing a diamond stylus across the surface under a definite 
load. This is a useful tool for measuring the relative hardness of micro- 
constituents, but it does not lend itself to high reproducibility or extreme 
accuracy. 

In dynamic-hardness measurements the indenter is usually dropped 

1 E. B. Bergsman, ASTM Bull. 176, pp. 37-43, September, 1951. 
282 



Sec. 11-2] The Hardness Test 283 

onto the metal surface, and the hardness is expressed as the energy of 
impact. The Shore sceleroscope, which is the commonest example of a 
dynamic-hardness tester, measures the hardness in terms of the height 
of rebound of the indenter. 

11-2. Brinell Hardness 

The first widely accepted and standardized indentation-hardness test 
was proposed by J. A. Brinell in 1900. The Brinell hardness test con- 
sists in indenting the metal surface with a 10-mm-diameter steel ball at 
a load of 3,000 kg. For soft metals the load is reduced to 500 kg to 
avoid too deep an impression, and for very hard metals a tungsten car- 
bide ball is used to minimize distortion of the indenter. The load is 
applied for a standard time, usually 30 sec, and the diameter of the inden- 
tation is measured with a low-power microscope after removal of the load. 
The average of two readings of the diameter of the impression at right 
angles should be made. The surface on which the indentation is made 
should be relatively smooth and free from dirt or scale. The Brinell 
hardness number (BHN) is expressed as the load P divided by the surface 
area of the indentation. This is expressed by the formula^ 

BHN = ^ , (11-1) 

(tD/2){D - VD^ - d^) 

where P = applied load, kg 

D = diameter of ball, mm 
d = diameter of indentation, mm 
It will be noticed that the units of the BHN are kilograms per square 
millimeter. However, the BHN is not a satisfactory physical concept 
since Eq. (11-1) does not give the mean pressure over the surface of the 
indentation. 

In general, the Brinell hardness number of a material is constant only 
for one applied load and diameter of ball. It has been shown that in 
order to obtain the same Brinell hardness number at a nonstandard load 
geometrical similitude must be maintained. This requires that the ratio 
of the indentation to the indenter, d/ D, remains constant. To a first 
approximation this can be attained when P ID^ is kept constant. 

The greatest error in Brinell hardness measurements occurs in measur- 
ing the diameter of the impression. It is assumed that the diameter of 
the indentation is the same as the diameter when the ball was in con- 
tact with the metal. However, owing to elastic recovery, the radius of 
curvature of the indentation will be larger than that of the spherical 

^ Tables giving BHN as a function of d for standard loads may be found in most of 
the references in the Bibliography at the end of this chapter. 



284 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 11 




indenter, although the indentation will still be symmetrical. The harder 
the metal, the greater the elastic recovery. Elastic recovery will affect 
measurements of the depth of indentation, but it will have only a negli- 
gible effect on the chordal diameter of the impression, so that this does 
not in general influence Brinell hardness. However, two types of anoma- 
lous behavior can occur as a result of localized deformation of the metal 
at the indentation. These are shown schemat- 
ically in cross section through the indentation 
in Fig. 11-1. The sketch at the top illustrates 
"ridging," or ''piling up," in which a lip of metal 
forms around the edge of the impression. This 
behavior is most common in cold-worked metals 
with little ability to strain-harden. The measured 
diameter is greater than the true diameter of the 
impression, but since the ridge carries part of the 
load, it is customary to base the hardness measure- 
ment on the diameter d shown in the sketch. The 
drawing on the bottom shows ''sinking in," in 
which there is a depression of the metal at the rim 
of the indentation. This type of behavior is com- 
mon with annealed metals having a high rate of 
strain hardening. The true diameter of the impres- 
sion can sometimes be obtained by coating the ball with bluing or dye 
before making the indentation. It is frequently desirable to increase 
the sharpness of definition of the impression so that the diameter can be 
measured more accurately. This can sometimes be done by using a 
lightly etched steel ball or by coating the surface with a dull black 
pigment. 




Fig. 11-1. Cross sections 
through Brinell inden- 
tations illustrating (o) 
ridging and (6) sinking 
in. 



11-3. Meyer Hardness 

Meyer^ suggested that a more rational definition of hardness than that 
proposed by Brinell would be one based on the 'projected area of the impres- 
sion rather than the surface area. The mean pressure between the sur- 
face of the indenter and the indentation is equal to the load divided by 
the projected area of the indentation. 






Meyer proposed that this mean pressure should be taken as the measure 
of hardness. It is referred to as the Meyer hardness. 



4P 
Meyer hardness = —r^ 



(11-2) 



1 E. Meyer, Z. Ver. deut. Ing, vol. 52, pp. 645-654, 1908. 



Sec. 11-3] The Hardness Test 285 

Like the Brinell hardness, Meyer hardness has units of kilograms per 
square millimeter. The Meyer hardness is less sensitive to the applied 
load than the Brinell hardness. For a cold-worked material the Meyer 
hardness is essentially constant and independent of load, while the Brinell 
hardness decreases as the load increases. For an annealed metal the 
Meyer hardness increases continuously with the load because of strain 
hardening produced by the indentation. The Brinell hardness, however, 
first increases with load and then decreases for still higher loads. The 
Meyer hardness is a more fundamental measure of indentation hardness ; 
yet it is rarely used for practical hardness measurements. 

Meyer proposed an empirical relation between the load and the size of 
the indentation. This relationship is usually called Meyer's law. 

P = kd'^' (11-3) 

where P = applied load, kg 

d = diameter of indentation, mm 

n' = a material constant related to strain hardening of metal 
fc = a material constant expressing resistance of metal to 
penetration 
The parameter n' is the slope of the straight line obtained when log P is 
plotted against log d, and k is the value of P at c? = 1. Fully annealed 
metals have a value of n' of about 2.5, while n' is approximately 2 for 
fully strain-hardened metals. This parameter is roughly related to the 
strain-hardening coefficient in the exponential equation for the true- 
stress-true-strain curve. The exponent in Meyer's law is approximately 
equal to the strain-hardening coefficient plus 2. 

When indentations are made with balls of different diameters, different 
values of k and n' will be obtained. 

P = A:ii)i"'' = k,D2"^' = ksDs"^' ■ ' ' 

Meyer found that n' was almost independent of the diameter of the 
indenter D but that k decreased with increasing values of D. This can 
be expressed empirically by a relationship of the form 

C = kiDi-'-'~ = A:2/)2"'-- = ksDs-'-^ ■ ■ • 

The general expression for Meyer's law then becomes 

^ Cdi"' ^ Cd^ ^ Cd^'^' 

Z)i"'~2 i)2"'-2 Z)3"'-2 ^^^~^' 

Several interesting conclusions result from Eq. (11-4). First, this equa- 
tion can be written 






(11-5) 



286 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 1 1 

Since dl D must be constant for geometrically similar indentations, the 
ratio F Idr must also be constant. However, F jd} is proportional to the 
Meyer hardness. Therefore, geometrically similar indentations give the 
same Meyer hardness number. Equation (11-4) can also be rearranged 
to give 






(11-6) 



Remembering again that geometrically similar indentations are obtained 
when d/D is constant, we see that the above equation shows that the 
ratio P/D^ must also provide the same result. Therefore, the same 
hardness values will be obtained when the ratio F/D^ is kept constant. 

There is a lower limit of load below which Meyer's law is not valid. 
If the load is too small, the deformation around the indentation is not 
fully plastic and Eq. (11-3) is not obeyed. This load will depend upon 
the hardness of the metal. For a 10-mm-diameter ball the load should 
exceed 50 kg for copper with a BHN of 100, and for steel with a BHN 
of 400 the load should exceed 1,500 kg. For balls of different diameter 
the critical loads will be proportional to the square of the diameter. 

1'|-4. Analysis of Indentation by a Spherical Indenter 

Tabor^ has given a detailed discussion of the mechanics of deformation 
of a flat metal surface with a spherical indenter. The elements of this 
analysis will be described here. Figure 11-2 illustrates the process. For 



•0 



(a) 




Fig. 11-2. Plastic deformation of an ideal plastic material by a spherical indenter. 
(a) Beginning of plastic deformation at point 0; (b) full plastic flow. {After D. Tabor, 
"The Hardness of Metals," p. 47, Oxford University Press, New York, 1951.) 

an ideal plastic metal with no strain hardening the highest pressure occurs 
immediately below the surface of contact at a depth of about d/2. The 
pressure at this point is about 0A7pm, where pm is the mean pressure over 
the circle of contact. Assuming that the maximum-shear-stress theory is 
» D. Tabor, "The Hardness of Metals," Oxford University Press, New York, 1951. 



Sec. 11-5] The Hardness Test 287 

the criterion for plastic flow, we can write 

0A7pm = 0.5(To 

or Pm « l.lo-o (11-7) 

where o-o is the yield stress in tension or compression. 

Therefore, the deformation under the indenter is elastic until the mean 
pressure reaches about 1.1 times the yield stress. At about this pressure 
plastic deformation begins in the vicinity of point (Fig. ll-2a). As the 
load is further increased, the mean pressure increases and the plastically 
deformed region grows until it contains the entire region of contact (Fig. 
11-26). An analytical solution for the pressure between the spherical 
indenter and the indentation under conditions of full plasticity is very 
difficult. The best analysis of this problem indicates that pm « 2.66cro. 
Meyer hardness tests on severely cold-worked metal indicates that full 
plasticity occurs when 

Pm « 2.8(ro (11-8) 

For an ideally plastic metal the pressure would remain constant at this 
value if the load were increased further. Since real metals strain-harden, 
the pressure would increase owing to an increase in o-o as the indentation 
process was continued. Most Brinell hardness tests are carried out 
under conditions where full plasticity is reached. This is also a neces- 
sary condition for Meyer's law to be valid. 

11-5. Relationship between Hardness and the Tensile-How Curve 

Tabor^ has suggested a method by which the plastic region of the 
true stress-strain curve may be determined from indentation hardness 
measurements. The method is based on the fact that there is a simi- 
larity in the shape of the flow curve and the curve obtained when the 
Meyer hardness is measured on a number of specimens subjected to 
increasing amounts of plastic strain. The method is basically empirical, 
since the complex stress distribution at the hardness indentation pre- 
cludes a straightforward relationship with the stress distribution in the 
tension test. However, the method has been shown to give good agree- 
ment for several metals and thus should be of interest as a means of 
obtaining flow data in situations where it is not possible to measure 
tensile properties. The true stress (flow stress) is obtained from Eq. 
(11-8), where co is to be considered the flow stress at a given value of 
true strain. 

Meyer hardness = Pm = 2.8cro 

From a study of the deformation at indentations. Tabor concluded that 

1 Tabor, op. cit., pp. 67-76; /. Inst. Metals, vol. 79, p. 1, 1951. 



288 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 11 

the true strain was proportional to the ratio d/ D and could be expressed as 

d 



e = 0.2 



D 



(11-9) 




Thus, if the Meyer hardness is measured under conditions such that d/D 
varies from the smallest value for full plasticity up to large values and 

Eqs. (11-8) and (11-9) are used, it 
•"" ' is possible at least to approximate 

the tensile-fiow curve. Figure 11-3 
shows the agreement which has 
been obtained by Tabor between 
the flow curve and hardness versus 
d/D curve for mild steel and an- 
nealed copper. Tabor's results 
have been verified by Lenhart^ 
for duralumin and OFHC copper. 
However, Tabor's analysis did not 
predict the flow curve for mag- 
nesium, which was attributed by 
Lenhart to the high anisotropy of 
deformation in this metal. This 
work should not detract from the 
usefulness of this correlation but, 
rather, should serve to emphasize 
that its limitations should be in- 
vestigated for new applications. 
There is a very useful engineer- 
ing correlation between the Brinell hardness and the ultimate tensile 
strength of heat-treated plain-carbon and medium-alloy steels. 

Ultimate tensile strength, in pounds per square inch, = 500(BHN). 
A brief consideration will show that this is in agreement with Tabor's 
results. If we make the simplifying assumption that this class of mate- 
rials does not strain-harden, then the tensile strength is equal to the 
yield stress and Eq. (11-8) applies. 

(Tu = Ty-nVm = 0.36p„j kg/mm^ 

The Brinell hardness will be only a few per cent less than the value of 
Meyer hardness p^. Upon converting to engineering units the expression 
becomes 

au = 515(BHN) 



Fig. 1 1 -3. Comparison of flow curve deter- 
mined from hardness measurements 
(circles, crosses) with flow curve deter- 
mined from compression test (solid lines). 
{D. Tabor, "The Hai-dness of Metals," p. 
74, Oxford University Press, New York, 
1951.) 



1 R. E. Lenhart, WADC Tech. Rept. 55-114, June, 1955. 



>cc. 



11-6] The Hardness Test 289 



It shovild now be apparent why the same relationship does not hold for 
other metals. P'or example, for annealed copper the assumption that 
strain hardening can be neglected will be grossly in error. For a metal 
with greater capability for strain hardening the "constant" of propor- 
tionality will be greater than that used for heat-treated steel. 

11-6. Vickers Hardness 

The Vickers hardness test uses a square-base diamond pyramid as the 
indenter. The included angle between opposite faces of the pyramid is 
136°. This angle was chosen because it approximates the most desirable 
ratio of indentation diameter to ball diameter in the Brinell hardness test. 
Because of the shape of the indenter this is frequently called the diamond- 
pyramid hardness test. The diamond-pyramid hardness number (DPH), 
or Vickers hardness number (VHN, or VPH), is defined as the load 
divided by the surface area of the indentation. In practice, this area is 
calculated from microscopic measurements of the lengths of the diagonals 
of the impression. The DPH may be determined from the following 
equation, 

DPH = ^^ %W2) ^ 1^ („.,0) 

where P = applied load, kg 

L = average length of diagonals, mm 
6 = angle between opposite faces of diamond = 136" 

The Vickers hardness test has received fairly wide acceptance for 
research work because it provides a continuous scale of hardness, for a 
given load, from very soft metals with a DPH of 5 to extremely hard 
materials with a DPH of 1,500. With the Rockwell hardness test, 
described in the next section, or the Brinell hardness test, it is usually 
necessary to change either the load or the indenter at some point in the 
hardness scale, so that measurements at one extreme of the scale cannot 
be strictly compared with those at the other end. Because the impres- 
sions made by the pyramid indenter are geometrically similar no matter 
what their size, the DPH should be independent of load. This is gener- 
ally found to be the case, except at very light loads. The loads ordinarily 
used with this test range from 1 to 120 kg, depending on the hardness of 
the metal to be tested. In spite of these advantages, the Vickers hard- 
ness test has not been widely accepted for routine testing because it is 
slow, requires careful surface preparation of the specimen, and allows 
greater chance for personal error in the determination of the diagonal 
length. 

A perfect indentation made with a perfect diamond-pyramid indenter 





[a) 




290 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 1 1 

would be a square. However, anomalies corresponding to those described 
earlier for Brinell impressions are frequently observed with a pyramid 
indenter (Fig. 11-4). The pincushion indentation in Fig. 11-46 is the 

result of sinking in of the metal 
around the fiat faces of the pyra- 
mid. This condition is observed 
with annealed metals and results 
in an overestimate of the diagonal 
length. The barrel-shaped inden- 
Fig. 1 1-4. Types of diamond-pyramid in- ^^^:^^^ -^^ Ylg. 1 l-4c is found in cold- 
dentations, (a) Perfect indentation ; Vb) , , , , t, ^, r 

,• i,,- i . i-- worked metals. It results from 
pincushion indentation due to sinking in ; 

(c) barreled indentation due to ridging. ridging or piling up of the metal 

around the faces of the indenter. 
The diagonal measurement in this case produces a low value of the con- 
tr.ct area so that the hardness numbers are erroneously high. Empirical 
corrections for this effect have been proposed.^ 

11-7. Rockwell Hardness Test 

The most widely used hardness test in the United States is the Rock- 
well hardness test. Its general acceptance is due to its speed, freedom 
from personal error, ability to distinguish small hardness differences in 
hardened steel, and the small size of the indentation, so that finished 
heat-treated parts can be tested without damage. This test utilizes the 
depth of indentation, under constant load, as a measure of hardness. A 
minor load of 10 kg is first applied to seat the specimen. This minimizes 
the amount of surface preparation needed and reduces the tendency for 
ridging or sinking in by the indenter. The major load is then applied, 
and the depth of indentation is automatically recorded on a dial gage in 
terms of arbitrary hardness numbers. The dial contains 100 divisions, 
each division representing a penetration of 0.00008 in. The dial is 
reversed so that a high hardness, which corresponds to a small penetra- 
tion, results in a high hardness number. This is in agreement with the 
other hardness numbers described previously, but unlike the Brinell and 
Vickers hardness designations, which have units of kilograms per square 
miUimeter, the Rockwell hardness numbers are purely arbitrary. 

One combination of load and indenter will not produce satisfactory 
results for materials with a wide range of hardness A 120° diamond 
cone with a slightly rounded point, called a Brale indenter, and }/{&- and 
3/^-in. -diameter steel balls are generally used as indenters. Major loads 
of 60, 100, and 150 kg are used. Since the Rockwell hardness is depend- 
ent on the load and indenter, it is necessary to specify the combination 

1 T. B. Crowe and J. F. Hinsley, /. Inst. Metals, vol. 72, p. 14, 1946. 



>ec. 



11-8] The Hardness Test 291 



which is used. This is done by prefixing the hardness number with a 
letter indicating the particular combination of load and indenter for the 
hardness scale employed. A Rockwell hardness number without the 
letter prefix is meaningless. Hardened steel is tested on the C scale with 
the diamond indenter and a 150-kg major load. The useful range for 
this scale is from about Re 20 to Re 70. Softer materials are usually 
tested on the B scale with a 3^i6-in. -diameter steel ball and a 100-kg 
major load. The range of this scale is from Rb to Rb 100. The A scale 
(diamond penetrator, 60-kg major load) provides the most extended 
Rockwell hardness scale, which is usable for materials from annealed 
brass to cemented carbides. Many other scales are available for special 
purposes.^ 

The Rockwell hardness test is a very useful and reproducible one pro- 
vided that a number of simple precautions are observed. Most of the 
points listed below apply ecjually well to the other hardness tests : 

1. The indenter and anvil should be clean and well seated. 

2. The surface to be tested should be clean, dry, smooth, and free from 
oxide. A rough-ground surface is usually adequate for the Rockwell test. 

3. The surface should be flat and perpendicular to the indenter. 

4. Tests on cylindrical surfaces will give low readings, the error depend- 
ing on the curvature, load, indenter, and hardness of the material. Theo- 
retieal^ and empirical^ corrections for this effect have been published. 

5. The thickness of the specimen should be such that a mark or bulge 
is not produced on the reverse side of the piece. It is recommended that 
the thickness be at least ten times the depth of the indentation. Tests 
should be made on only a single thickness of material. 

6. The spacing between indentations should be three to five times the 
diameter of the indentation. 

7. The speed of application of the load should be standardized. This 
is done by adjusting the dashpot on the Rockwell tester. Variations in 
hardness can be appreciable in very soft materials unless the rate of load 
application is carefully controlled. For such materials the operating 
handle of the Rockwell tester should be brought back as soon as the 
major load has been fully applied. 

1 1 -8. Microhardncss Tests 

Many metallurgical problems require the determination of hardness 
over very small areas. The measurement of the hardness gradient at a 
carburized surface, the determination of the hardness of individual con- 

» See ASTM Standard El 8. 

2 W. E. Ingerson, Proc. ASTM, vol. 39, pp. 1281-1291, 1939. 

3 R. S. Sutton and R. H. Heyer, ASTM Bull. 193, pp. 40-41, October, 1953. 



292 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 11 

stituents of a microstructure, or the checking of the hardness of a delicate 
watch gear might be typical problems. The use of a scratch-hardness 
test for these purposes was mentioned earlier, but an indentation-hardness 
test has been found to be more useful.^ The development of the Knoop 
indenter by the National Bureau of Standards and the introduction of 
the Tukon tester for the controlled application of loads down to 25 g 
have made microhardness testing a routine laboratory procedure. 

The Knoop indenter is a diamond ground to a pyramidal form that 
produces a diamond-shaped indentation with the long and short diagonals 
in the approximate ratio of 7: 1. The depth of indentation is about one- 
thirtieth of the length of the longer diagonal. The Knoop hardness num- 
ber (KHN) is the applied load divided by the unrecovered projected area 
of the indentation. 

™N = £ = ^ (ll-U) 

where P = applied load, kg 

Ap — unrecovered projected area of indentation, mm^ 

L = length of long diagonal, mm 

C = a constant for each indenter supplied by manufacturer 
The low load used with microhardness tests requires that extreme care 
be taken in all stages of testing. The surface of the specimen must be 
carefully prepared. Metallographic polishing is usually required. Work 
hardening of the surface during polishing can influence the results. The 
long diagonal of the Knoop impression is essentially unaffected by elastic 
recovery for loads greater than about 300 g. However, for lighter loads 
the small amount of elastic recovery becomes appreciable. Further, 
with the very small indentations produced at light loads the error in 
locating the actual ends of the indentation become greater. Both these 
factors have the effect of giving a high hardness reading, so that it is 
usually observed that the Knoop hardness number increases as the load 
is decreased below about 300 g. Tarasov and Thibault- have shown that 
if corrections are made for elastic recovery and visual acuity the Knoop 
hardness number is constant with load down to 100 g. 

11-9. Hardness-conversion Relationships 

From a practical standpoint it is important to be able to convert the 
results of one type of hardness test into those of a different test. Since 

^ For a review of microhardness testing see H. Buckle, Met. Reviews, vol. 4, no. 3, 
pp. 49-100, 1959. 

2 L. P. Tarasov and N. W. Thibault, Trans. ASM, vol. 38, pp. 331-353, 1947. 



Sec. 11-10] The Hardness Test 293 

a hardness test does not measure a well-defined property of a material 
and since all the tests in common use are not based on the same type of 
measurements, it is not surprising that no universal hardness-conversion 
relationships have been developed. It is important to realize that hard- 
ness conversions are empirical relationships. The most reliable hardness- 
conversion data exist for steel which is harder than 240 Brinell. The 
ASTM, ASM, and SAE (Society of Automotive Engineers) have agreed 
on a table ^ for conversion between Rockwell, Brinell, and diamond- 
pyramid hardness which is applicable to heat-treated carbon and alloy 
steel and to almost all alloy constructional steels and tool steels in the 
as-forged, annealed, normalized, and quenched and tempered conditions. 
However, different conversion tables are required for materials with 
greatly different elastic moduli, such as tungsten carbide, or with greater 
strain-hardening capacity. Heyer^ has shown that the indentation hard- 
ness of soft metals depends on the strain-hardening behavior of the mate- 
rial during the test, which in turn is dependent on the previous degree of 
strain hardening of the material before the test. As an extreme example 
of the care which is required in using conversion charts for soft metals, 
it is possible for Armco iron and cold-rolled aluminum each to have a 
Brinell hardness of 66; yet the former has a Rockwell B hardness of 31 
compared with a hardness of Rb 7 for the cold-worked aluminum. On 
the other hand, metals such as yellow brass and low-carbon sheet steel 
have a well-behaved Brinell-Rockwell conversion^* relationship for all 
degrees of strain hardening. Special hardness-conversion tables for cold- 
worked aluminum, copper, and 18-8 stainless steel are given in the ASM 
Metals Handbook. 

11-10. Hardness at Elevated Temperatures 

Interest in measuring the hardness of metals at elevated temperatures 
has been accelerated by the great effort which has gone into developing 
alloys with improved high-temperature strength. Hot hardness gives a 
good indication of the potential usefulness of an alloy for high-temper- 
ature strength applications. Some degree of success has been obtained 
in correlating hot hardness with high-temperature strength properties. 
This will be discussed in Chap. 13. Hot-hardness testers using a Vickers 
indenter made of sapphire and with provisions for testing in either 

1 This table may be found in ASTM Standard E48-47, SAE Handbook, ASM 
Metals Handbook, and many other standard references. 

2 R. H. Heyer, Proc. ASTM, vol. 44, p. 1027, 1944. 

3 The Wilson Mechanical Instrument Co. Chart 38 for metals softer than BHN 240 
(see ASM Handbook, 1948 ed., p. 101) is based on tests on these metals. 



294 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 11 



vacuum or an inert atmosphere have been developed/ and a high-tem- 
perature microhardness test has been described.- 

In an extensive review of hardness data at different temperatures 




400 8 00 

Temperature, °K 

Fig. 11-5. Temperature dependence of the hardness of copper. (/. H. Westbrook, 
Trans. ASM, vol. 45, p. 233, 1953.) 



Westbrook^ showed that the temperature dependence of hardness could 
be expressed by 

H = Aexp (-BT) (11-12) 

where H = hardness, kg/mm^ 

T = test temperature, °K 
A, B = constants 
Plots of log H versus temperature for pure metals generally yield two 
straight lines of different slope. The change in slope occurs at a tem- 

1 F. Garofalo, P. R. Malenock, and G. V. Smith, Trans. ASM, vol. 45, pp. 377-396, 
1953; M. Semchyshen and C. S. Torgerson, Trans. ASM, vol. 50, pp. 830-837, 1958. 

2 J. H. Westbrook, Proc. ASTM, vol. 57, pp. 873-897, 1957; ASTM Bull. 246, 
pp. 53-58, 1960. 

3 J. H. Westbrook, Trans. ASM, vol. 45, pp. 221-248, 1953. 



Sec. 11-10] The Hardness Test 295 

perature which is about one-half the melting point of the metal being 
tested. Similar behavior is found in plots of the logarithm of the tensile 
strength against temperature. Figure 11-5 shows this behavior for 
copper. It is likely that this change in slope is due to a change in the 
deformation mechanism at higher temperature. The constant A derived 
from the low-temperature branch of the curve can be considered to be 
the intrinsic hardness of the metal, that is, H at 0°K. This value would 
be expected to be a measure of the inherent strength of the binding forces 
of the lattice. Westbrook correlated values of A for different metals 
with the heat content of the liquid metal at the melting point and with 
the melting point. This correlation was sensitive to crystal structure. 
The constant B, derived from the slope of the curve, is the temperature 
coefficient of hardness. This constant was related in a rather complex 
way to the rate of change of heat content with increasing temperature. 
With these correlations it is possible to calculate fairly well the hardness 
of a pure metal as a function of temperature up to about one-half its 
melting point. 

Hardness measurements as a function of temperature will show an 
abrupt change at the temperature at which an allotropic transformation 
occurs. Hot-hardness tests on Co, Fe, Ti, U, and Zr have shown^ that 
the body-centered cubic lattice is always the softer structure when it is 
involved in an allotropic transformation. The face-centered cubic and 
hexagonal close-packed lattices have approximately the same strength, 
while highly complex crystal structures give even higher hardness. These 
results are in agreement with the fact that austenitic iron-base alloys have 
better high-temperature strength than ferritic alloys. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Hardness Tests, "Metals Handbook," pp. 93-105, American Society for Metals, 

Metals Park, Ohio, 1948. 
Lysaght, V. E.: "Indentation Hardness Testing," Reinhold Publishing Corporation, 

New York, 1949. 
Mott, B. W.: "Micro-indentation Hardness Testing," Butterworth & Co. (Publishers) 

Ltd., London, 1956. 
Tabor, D.: "The Hardness of Metals," Oxford University Press, New York, 1951. 
Symposium on the Significance of the Hardness Test of Metals in Relation to Design, 

Proc. ASTM, vol. 43, pp. 803-856, 1943. 

1 W. Chubb, Trans. AIME, vol. 203, pp. 189-192, 1955. 



Chapter 12 

FATIGUE OF METALS 

12-1. Introduction 

It has been recognized since 1850 that a metal subjected to a repetitive 
■or fluctuating stress will fail at a stress much lower than that required to 
cause fracture on a single application of load. Failures occurring under 
conditions of dynamic loading are called fatigue failures, presumably 
because it is generally observed that these failures occur only after a 
considerable period of service. For a long time the notion persisted that 
fatigue was due to "crystallization" of the metal, but this view can no 
longer be considered in the light of concepts which hold that a metal is 
crystalline from the time of solidification from the melt. In fact, there 
is no obvious change in the structure of a metal which has failed in 
fatigue which can serve as a clue to our understanding of the reasons for 
fatigue failure. Fatigue has become progressively more prevalent as 
technology has developed a greater amount of equipment, such as auto- 
mobiles, aircraft, compressors, pumps, turbines, etc., subject to repeated 
loading and vibration, until today it is often stated that fatigue accounts 
for at least 90 per cent of all service failures due to mechanical causes. 

A fatigue failure is particularly insidious, because it occurs without 
any obvious warning. Fatigue results in a brittle fracture, with no gross 
deformation at the fracture. On a macroscopic scale the fracture surface 
is usually normal to the direction of the principal tensile stress. A fatigue 
failure can usually be recognized from the appearance of the fracture sur- 
face, which shows a smooth region, due to the rubbing action as the crack 
propagated through the section (top portion of Fig. 12-1), and a rough 
region, where the member has failed in a ductile manner when the cross 
section was no longer able to carry the load. Frequently the progress 
of the fracture is indicated by a series of rings, or "beach marks," pro- 
gressing inward from the point of initiation of the failure. Figure 12-1 
also illustrates another characteristic of fatigue, namely, that a failure 
usually occurs at a point of stress concentration such as a sharp corner or 
notch or at a metallurgical stress concentration like an inclusion. 

Three basic factors are necessary to cause fatigue failure. These are 
296 



Sec. 12-2] 



Fatigue of Metals 297 



(1) a maximum tensile stress of sufficiently high value, (2) a large enough 
variation or fluctuation in the applied stress, and (3) a sufficiently large 
number of cycles of the applied stress. In addition, there are a host of 
other variables, such as stress concentration, corrosion, temperature, 
overload, metallurgical structure, residual stresses, and combined stresses, 



■ o 




















rrri. 








1 


a 










^ 








1 




A 


^^ 






— - 




/ 




* . - 






^m 


L 


1 


— iTi 


=" 


A 






m 


IIIIIW 


1* 


*'^. 


'^hi 




=- 


^" 














"v^ 




^rf^ 


f 


















. 'I'l',' ■'■i',," 


^ 


















=.co 


9H 






'•; 








M 


E 


^L. 


H 














i^m 


K 


^r 


^H 




!k^' 


■.. . 






9 


mBm 


ft 


' =-«N 


V 






joMh 


^^&l^jll^^^l\ 


m 


mm 


H 


p 


=- 


1 






H 




1 


1 


w 




^p-l 


' ■"■ ^ 








^^^^^^^^^^^^^1 




^^^^^^1 


^^^^^^1 


w 
























— — ■■ a 








^^^^^^^^H^^^H 




^^^^^^1 


^^^H^^ 






— _— t 








^^^^^^^^^^^1 




^^^^^1 


Hjj^^ 






'""'""'' M 








^^^^^^^H^^^^H 




^^^^^^1 


^f^ 














































, zz:r * 








^^^Bi 




^^ , 








V 



Fig. 12-1. Fracture surface of fatigue failure which started at sharp corner of a key way 
in a shaft. 1 X. 

which tend to alter the conditions for fatigue. Since we have not yet 
gained a basic understanding of what causes fatigue in metals, it will be 
necessary to discuss each of these factors from an essentially empirical 
standpoint. Because of the mass of data of this type, it will be possible 
to describe only the highlights of the relationship between these factors 
and fatigue. For more complete details the reader is referred to the 
number of excellent publications listed at the end of this chapter. 



1 2-2. Stress Cycles 

At the outset it will be advantageous to define briefly the general types 
of fluctuating stresses which can cause fatigue. Figure 12-2 serves to 



298 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 12 



illustrate typical fatigue stress cycles. Figure 12-2a illustrates a com- 
pletely reversed cycle of stress of sinusoidal form. This is an idealized 
situation which is produced by an R. R. Moore rotating-beam fatigue 
machine^ and which is approached in service by a rotating shaft oper- 
ating at constant speed without overloads. For this type of stress cycle 
the maximum and minimum stresses are equal. In keeping with the 
conventions established in Chap. 2 the minimum stress is the lowest 





Fig. 12-2. Typical fatigue stress cycles, 
(c) irregular or random stress cycle. 



(a) Reversed stress; (6) repeated stress; 



algebraic stress in the cycle. Tensile stress is considered positive, and 
compressive stress is negative. Figure 12-26 illustrates a repeated stress 
cycle in which the mp^ximum stress o-max and minimum stress a^nin are not 
equal. In this illustration they are both tension, but a repeated stress 
cycle could just as well contain maximum and minimum stresses of 
opposite signs or both in compression. Figure 12-2c illustrates a com- 
plicated stress cycle which might be encountered in a part such as an 
aircraft wing which is subjected to periodic unpredictable overloads due 
to gusts. 

A fluctuating stress cycle can be considered to be made up of two com- 
ponents, a mean, or steady, stress (Xm, and an alternating, or variable, 

1 Common types of fatigue machines are described in the references listed, at the 
end of this chapter and in the Manual on Fatigue Testing, ASTM Spec. Tech. Publ. 
91, 1949. 



Sec. 12-3] 



Fatigue of Metals 299 



stress (Xa. We must also consider the range of stress Cr. As can be seen 
from Fig. 12-26, the range of stress is the algebraic difference between the 
maximum and minimum stress in a cycle. 



^T O'max O^n 



The alternating stress, then, is one-half the range of stress. 



(7„ - 2 



(12-1) 



(12-2) 



The mean stress is the algebraic mean of the maximum and minimum 
stress in the cycle. 

<Tm — ^ (12-6) 

Another quantity which is sometimes used in presenting fatigue data is 
the stress ratio R. Stress ratio is defined as 



R = 



(12-4) 



12-3. The >S-A^ Curve 

The basic method of presenting engineering fatigue data is by means 
of the S-N curve, which represents the dependence of the life of the 
specimen, in number of cycles to failure, A'^, on the maximum applied 
stress 0-. Most investigations of the fatigue properties of metals have 
been made by means of the rotating-beam machine, where the mean stress 
is zero. Figure 12-3 gives typical S-N curves for this type of test. Cases 



60 
t/i 

8 50 
o 

!^'40 

(/) 

1^30 

^20 

"O 
O 

o 
o 























V. 


^^/V 
^ 


d Sf6 


^el 






















,— . 


limit 




^^^ 
















.^_^AIum 


'nam 


alloy 









































\Q~ 



10^ 



10^ 



10^ 



10- 



Number of cycles to failure, N 
Fi9. 12-3. Typical fatigue curves for ferrous and nonferrous metals. 



300 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 1 2 

where the mean stress is not zero are of considerable practical interest. 
These will be discussed later in the chapter. 

As can be seen from Fig. 12-3, the number of cj^cles of stress which a 
metal can endure before failure increases with decreasing stress. Unless 
otherwise indicated, N is taken as the number of cycles of stress to cause 
complete fracture of the specimen. This is made up of the number of 
cycles to initiate a crack and the number of cycles to propagate the crack 
completely through the specimen. Usually no distinction is made 
between these two factors, although it can be appreciated that the 
number of cycles for crack propagation will vary with the dimensions 
of the specimen. Fatigue tests at low stresses are usually carried out 
for 10^ cycles and sometimes to 5 X 10^ cycles for nonferrous metals. 
For a few important engineering materials such as steel and titanium, 
the S-N curve becomes horizontal at a certain limiting stress. Below 
this limiting stress, which is called the fatigue limit, or endurance limit, 
the material can presumably endure an infinite number of cycles without 
failure. Most nonferrous metals, like aluminum, magnesium, and copper 
alloys, have an S-N curve which slopes gradually downward with increas- 
ing number of cycles. These materials do not have a true fatigue limit 
because the S-N curve never becomes horizontal. In such cases it is 
common practice to characterize the fatigue properties of the material 
by giving the fatigue strength at an arbitrary number of cycles, for 
example, 10* cycles. The reasons why certain materials have a fatigue 
limit are not known, although a hypothesis regarding this impor- 
tant question will be discussed later in the chapter. 

The usual procedure for determining an S-N curve is to test the first 
specimen at a high stress where failure is expected in a fairly short num- 
ber of cycles, e.g., at about two-thirds the static tensile strength of the 
material. The test stress is decreased for each succeeding specimen until 
one or two specimens do not fail in the specified number of cycles, which 
is usually at least 10'^ cycles. The highest stress at which a runout (non- 
failure) is obtained is taken as the fatigue limit. For materials without 
a fatigue limit the test is usually terminated for practical considerations 
at a low stress where the life is about 10* or 5 X 10* cycles. The S-N 
curve is usually determined with about 8 to 12 specimens. It will gener- 
ally be found that there is a considerable amount of scatter in the results, 
although a smooth curve can usually be drawn through the points with- 
out too much difficulty. However, if several specimens are tested at the 
same stress, there is a great amount of scatter in the observed values of 
number of cycles to failure, frequently as much as one log cycle between 
the minimum and maximum value. Further, it has been shown ^ that 
the fatigue limit of steel is subject to considerable variation and that a 

1 J. T. Ransom and R. F. Mehl, Trans. AIMS, vol. 185, pp. 364-365, 1949. 



Sec. 12-4] Fatisuc of Metals 301 

fatigue limit determined in the manner just described can be considerably 
in error. The statistical nature of fatigue will be discussed in the next 
section. 

An interesting test for obtaining a more rapid estimate of the fatigue 
limit than is possible by conventional means was proposed by Prot.^ In 
this method, each specimen is started at an initial stress below the 
expected value of the fatigue limit, and the stress is progressively 
increased at a constant rate until fracture occurs. Several specimens 
are tested at different values of stress increase per cycle. Prot suggested 
that a linear relationship should exist between the stress at which frac- 
ture occurs and y/ a, w^here a is the stress increase per cycle. The fatigue 
limit is obtained from this plot by extrapolation to y/ a = 0. Profs 
method has undergone considerable investigation and modification' and 
appears useful for the rapid determination of the fatigue limit of ferrous 
materials. 

A modification of the Prot method is sometimes used w^hen a special 
machine equipped to provide a continuously increasing stress is not avail- 
able or when the number of specimens is not large. The initial stress 
level is taken at about 70 per cent of the estimated fatigue limit. The 
test is run for a fixed number of cycles, for example, 10^, and if failure 
does not occur, the stress is raised by a certain amount. Another unit 
of cycles is applied at this stress, and the process is continued until failure 
occurs. The fatigue limit of the specimen is taken as the stress halfway 
between the breaking stress and the highest stress at which the specimen 
survived. Results obtained by this step method and the Prot method 
may not produce values of fatigue limit in agreement with those obtained 
from testing at constant stress, because of changes which can occur in 
the metal during testing at stresses below the fatigue limit. For example, 
certain metals can be strengthened b}^ "coaxing" at stresses below the 
fatigue limit. This topic is discussed in greater detail in Sec. 12-13. 

12-4. Statistical Nature of Fatigue 

A considerable amount of interest has been shown in the statistical 
analysis of fatigue data and in the reasons for the variability in fatigue- 
test results. A more complete description of the statistical techniques 
will be given in Chap. 16. However, it is important here to gain an 
acquaintance with the concept of the statistical approach so that existing 
fatigue data can be properly evaluated. Since fatigue life and fatigue 
limit are statistical quantities, it must be realized that considerable devi- 

1 M. Prot, Rev. mH., vol. 34, p. 440, 1937. 

2 H. T. Corten, T. Dimoff, and T. J. Dolan, Proc. ASTM, vol. 54, pp. 875-902, 
1954. 



302 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 12 



ation from an average curve determined with only a few specimens is to 
be expected. It is necessary to think in terms of the probabihty of a 
specimen attaining a certain Hfe at a given stress or the probability of 
failure at a given stress in the vicinity of the fatigue limit. To do this 
requires the testing of considerably more specimens than in the past so 
that the statistical parameters^ for estimating these probabilities can be 
determined. The basic method for expressing fatigue data should then 
be a three-dimensional surface representing the relationship between 



-.i 


V\\^-- /i verage curve P=0.50 

\ \ 1 NN^ 






\ \ \ 

\ \/ 
\l \ 


\ 


\. V"" — P=0.99 
\ P = 0.90 


P=0.99 






P=0.01 


H-- 


--U.IU 




) 1 - U.jU 


P = O.OJ 




\ 

1 
1 
1 




Mean fc 


itfgue 


limit 

1 



/V, /Vp 



^n 



Number of cycles (log scale) 
Fig. 1 2-4. Representation of fatigue data on a probability basis. 



stress, number of cycles to failure, and probability of failure. Figure 
12-4 shows how this can be presented in a two-dimensional plot. 

A distribution of fatigue life at constant stress is illustrated schemati- 
cally in this figure, and based on this, curves of constant probability of 
failure are drawn. Thus, at ci, 1 per cent of the specimens would be 
expected to fail at Ni cycles, 50 per cent at A''2 cycles, etc. The figure 
indicates a decreasing scatter in fatigue life with increasing stress, which 
is usually found to be the case. The statistical distribution function 
which describes the distribution of fatigue life at constant stress is not 
accurately known, for this would require the testing of over 1,000 identi- 
cal specimens under identical conditions at a constant stress. Muller- 
Stock- tested 200 steel specimens at a single stress and found that the 

^ The chief statistical parameters to be considered are the estimate of the mean 
(average) and standard deviation (measure of scatter) of the population. 

2 H. Muller-Stock, Mitteilung Kohle- u. Eisenforsch. G. m. b. H., vol. 8, pp. 83-107, 
1938. 



Sec. 12-4] Fatigue oF Metals 303 

frequency distribution of N followed the Gaussian, or normal, distribu- 
tion if the fatigue life was expressed as log N. For engineering purposes 
it is sufficiently accurate to assume a logarithmic normal distribution of 
fatigue life at constant life in the region of the probability of failure of 
P = 0.10 to P = 0.90. However, it is frequently important to be able 
to predict the fatigue life corresponding to a probability of failure of 
1 per cent or less. At this extreme limit of the distribution the assump- 
tion of a log-normal distribution of life is no longer justified, although it 
is frequently used. Alternative approaches have been the use of the 
extreme-value distribution ^ or Weibull's distribution. - 

For the statistical interpretation of the fatigue limit we are concerned 
with the distribution of stress at a constant fatigue life. The fatigue 
limit of steel was formerly considered to be a sharp threshold value, 
below which all specimens w^ould presumably have infinite lives. How- 
ever, it is now recognized that the fatigue limit is really a statistical 
quantity which requires special techniques for an accurate determination. 
For example, in a heat-treated alloy forging steel the stress range which 
would include the fatigue limits of 95 per cent of the specimens could 
easily be from 40,000 to 52,000 psi. An example of the errors which can 
be introduced by ordinary testing with a few specimens is illustrated in 
Fig. 12-5. This figure summarizes^ ten S-N curves determined in the 
conventional manner for the same bar of alloy steel, each curve being 
based on ten specimens. The specimens were as identical as it was possi- 
ble to make them, and there was no excessive scatter or uncertainty as to 
how to draw the S-N curves. Yet, as can be seen from the figure, there is 
considerable difference in the measured values of the fatigue limit for the 
steel due to the fact that the curves were based on insufficient data. 

In determining the fatigue limit of a material, it should be recognized 
that each specimen has its own fatigue limit, a stress above which it will 
fail but below which it will not fail, and that this critical stress varies 
from specimen to specimen for very obscure reasons. It is known that 
inclusions in steel have an important effect on the fatigue limit and its 
variability, but even vacuum-melted steel shows appreciable scatter in 
fatigue limit. The statistical problem of accurately determining the 
fatigue limit is complicated by the fact that we cannot measure the indi- 
vidual value of the fatigue limit for any given specimen. We can only 
test a specimen at a particular stress, and if the specimen fails, then the 
stress was somewhere above the fatigue limit of the specimen. Since 
the specimen cannot be retested, even if it did not fail at the test stress, 

1 A. M. Freudenthal and E. J. Gumbel, J. Am. Statist. Assoc, vol. 49, pp. 575-597, 
1954. 

2 W. WeibuU, J. Appl. Mech., vol. 18, no. 3, pp. 293-297, 1951. 

3 J. T. Ransom, discussion in ASTM Spec. Tech. Puhl. 121, pp. 59-63, 1952. 



304 Applications to Materials Testins 



[Chap. 12 



we have to estimate the statistics of the fatigue limit by testing groups of 
specimens at several stresses to see how many fail at each stress. Thus, 
near the fatigue limit fatigue is a "go-no go" proposition, and all that we 
can do is to estimate the behavior of a universe of specimens by means 
of a suitable sample. The two statistical methods which are used for 
m-aking a statistical estimate of the fatigue limit are called probit analysis 



3,000 



70,000 



60,000 



6" 2 !0 9175384 



50,000 



40,000 




Cycles to failure 



Fis. 1 2-5. Summary of B-'N curves, each based on 10 specimens, drawn from the same 
bar of steel. (J. T. Ransom, ASTM Spec. Tech. Publ. 121, p. 61, 1952.) 

and the staircase method. The procedures for applying these methods of 
analysis to the determination of the fatigue hmit will be given in Chap. 16. 



12-5. Structural Features of Fatigue 

Only a small fraction of the effort devoted to fatigue research has been 
concerned with the study of the basic structural changes that occur in a 
metal when it is subjected to cyclic stress. Fatigue has certain things in 



Sec. 12-5] Fatigue of Metals 305 

common with plastic flow and fracture under static or unidirectional 
deformation. The work of Gough^ has shown that a metal deforms 
under cyclic strain by slip on the same atomic planes and in the same 
crystallographic directions as in unidirectional strain. Whereas with 
unidirectional deformation slip is usually widespread throughout all the 
grains, in fatigue some grains will show slip lines while other grains will 
give no evidence of slip. Slip lines are generally formed during the first 
few thousand cycles of stress. Successive cycles produce additional slip 
bands, but the number of slip bands is not directly proportional to the 
number of cycles of stress. In many metals the increase in visible slip 
soon reaches a saturation value, which is observed as distorted regions 
of heavy slip. Cracks are usually found to occur in the regions of heavy 
deformation parallel to what was originally a slip band. Slip bands have 
been observed at stresses below the fatigue limit of ferrous materials. 
Therefore, the occurrence of slip during fatigue does not in itself mean 
that a crack will form. 

A study of crack formation in fatigue can be facilitated by interrupting 
the fatigue test to remove the deformed surface by electropolishing. 
There will generally be several slip bands which are more persistent than 
the rest and which will remain visible when the other slip lines have been 
polished away. Such slip bands have been observed after only 5 per 
cent of the total life of the specimen.^ These persistent slip bands are 
embryonic fatigue cracks, since they open into wide cracks on the appli- 
cation of small tensile strains. Once formed, fatigue cracks tend to 
propagate initially along slip planes, although they may later take a 
direction normal to the maximum applied tensile stress. Fatigue-crack 
propagation is ordinarily transgranular. 

An important structural feature which appears to be unique to fatigue 
deformation is the formation on the surface of ridges and grooves called 
slip-band extrusions and slip-band intrusions J Extremely careful metal- 
lography on tapered sections through the surface of the specimen has 
shown that fatigue cracks initiate at intrusions and extrusions.'* There- 
fore, these structural features are the origin of the persistent slip bands, 
or fissures, discussed in the previous paragraph. The study of slip-band 
intrusions and extrusions has been undertaken too recently to uncover 
all the factors responsible for their formation. However, it appears that 
intrusions and extrusions are produced at local soft spots in the crystal, 
and this suggests that cross slip is needed for their formation. This 

1 H. J. Gough, Proc. ASTM, vol. 33, pt. 2, pp. 3-114, 1933. 

2 G. C. Smith, Proc. Roy. Soc. (London), vol. 242A, pp. 189-196, 1957. 

3 P. J. E. Forsyth and C. A. Stubbington, J. Inst. Metals, vol. 83, p. 395, 1955-1956. 
* W. A. Wood, Some Basic Studies of Fatigue in Metals, in "Fracture," John 

Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1959. 



306 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 1 2 

hypothesis is borne out by the fact that fatigue failure is difficult to pro- 
duce in certain ionic crystals which do not easily undergo cross slip and by 
the fact that it is not possible to produce fatigue failure in zinc crystals, 
which are oriented to deform only in easy glide. 

In considering the structural changes produced by fatigue, it is advisa- 
ble to differentiate between tests conducted at high stresses or strain 
amplitudes, where failure occurs in less than about 10^ cycles of stress, 
and tests carried out at low stresses, where failure occurs in more than 
10^ cycles. Structural features produced in the high-stress region of the 
S-N curve bear a strong resemblance to those produced by unidirec- 
tional deformation. An annealed metal usually undergoes moderate 
strain hardening with increasing cycles in the high-stress region. Coarse 
slip bands are formed, and there is appreciable asterism in the X-ray 
diffraction pattern. However, in the low-stress region slip lines are very 
fine and are dif&cult to distinguish by ordinary metallographic techniques. 
There is essentially no strain hardening or distortion in the X-ray diffrac- 
tion pattern. For copper specimens tested in the high-stress region, the 
stored energy is released over a fairly narrow temperature range during 
annealing. This represents energy release due to both recovery and 
recrystallization, just as would be expected for a metal plastically 
deformed in tension. When the copper is fatigued in the low-stress 
region, the stored energy is released over a wide range of temperature, 
as would occur if only recovery took place. ^ 

A study of the dislocation structure in thin films of aluminum^ has 
shown that for high fatigue stresses dislocation networks are formed simi- 
lar to those formed on unidirectional loading. At low fatigue stresses 
the metal contains a high density of dislocation loops similar to those 
found in quenched specimens. This is a good indication that large num- 
bers of point defects are produced during fatigue. 

There are a number of other indications that cyclic deformation results 
in a higher concentration of vacancies than cold working by unidirec- 
tional deformation. The difference in the release of stored energy 
between fatigued and cold-worked copper is in line with what would be 
expected from a large concentration of point defects. The fact that 
initially cold-worked copper becomes softer as a result of fatigue^ can be 
explained by the generation of point defects which allow the metal partly 
to recover by permitting dislocations to climb out of the slip plane. 
Age-hardening aluminum alloys in the precipitation-hardened condition 
can be overaged by fatigue deformation at room temperature. This sug- 

1 L. M. Clarebrough, M. E. Hargreaves, G. W. West, and A. K. Head, Proc. Roy. 
Soc. (London), vol. 242A, pp. 160-166, 1957. 

2 R. L. Segall and P. G. Partridge, Phil. Mag., vol. 4, pp. 912-919, 1959. 

3 N. H. Polakowski and A. Palchoudhuri, Proc. ASTM, vol. 54, p. 701, 1954. 



Sec. 12-6] Fatigue of Metals 307 

gests that vacancies produced by fatigue are available to accomplish the 
diffusion required for the overaging process.^ Moreover, the fatigue 
strength increases markedly on going from 20 to — 190°C, where vacancy 
movement is negligible. However, the fact that fatigue fracture can be 
produced at 4°K indicates that a temperature-activated process such as 
the diffusion of vacancies is not essential for fatigue failure. - 

The process of the formation of a fatigue crack is often divided into 
three stages.' The primary stage occurs only in metals where the applied 
stress level is above the initial static yield stress. Widespread bulk defor- 
mation occurs until the metal strain hardens to the point where it can 
withstand the applied stress. Depending upon the stress, the first stage 
will last for 10^ to 10* cycles. The second stage comprises the major part 
of the fatigue life of a specimen. It extends from the initial widespread 
strain hardening to the formation of a visible crack. During the second 
stage of fatigue the crack is initiated. The third stage of fatigue con- 
sists of the propagation of the crack to a size large enough to cause failure. 

There is considerable evidence that a fatigue crack is formed before 
about 10 per cent of the total life of the specimen has elapsed, although 
the crack cannot be readily detected, except by repeated electropolishing, 
until many cycles later. The principal evidence for this'*'^ is that anneal- 
ing after only a small fraction of the expected total fatigue life does not 
significantly increase the fatigue life. It has been concluded that the 
damage produced by this small number of cycles must be in the nature 
of a crack. 

12-6. Theories of Fatigue 

It is perhaps unnecessary to state that no mechanism or theory has 
been proposed which adequately explains the phenomenon of fatigue. 
For one thing, it is unlikely that our knowledge of the structural changes 
produced by fatigue is at all complete. Many of the theories that exist 
have been qualitative and base their acceptance mainly on the fact that 
the analysis yields a stress-log A'' relationship similar to the observed 
S-N curve. However, this may not necessarily be a satisfactory criterion, 
for many assumed mechanisms can lead to a prediction of the general 
shape of the fatigue curve. 

1 T. Broom, J. H. Molineux, and V. N. Whittaker, J. Inst. Metals, vol. 84, pp. 357- 
363, 1955-56. 

2 R. D. McCammon and H. M. Rosenberg, Proc. Roy. Soc. (London), vol. 242A, 
p. 203, 1957. 

3 A. K. Head, /. Mech. and Phys. Solids, vol. 1, pp. 134-141, 1953. 

* G. M. Sinclair and T. J. Dolan, Proc. First Natl. Congr. Appl. Mech., 1951, pp. 
647-651. 

^ N. Thompson, N. Wadsworth, and N. Louat, Phil. Mag., vol. 1, pp. 113-126, 1956. 



308 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 1 2 

Orowan's Theory 

Orowan's theory of fatigue^ was one of the earUest generally accepted 
explanations for the fatigue process. This theory leads to the prediction 
of the general shape of the S-N curve, but it does not depend on any 
specific deformation mechanism other than the concept that fatigue defor- 
mation is heterogeneous. The metal is considered to contain small, weak 
regions, which may be areas of favorable orientation for slip or areas of 
high stress concentration due to metallurgical notches such as inclusions. 
It was assumed that these small regions could be treated as plastic regions 
in an elastic matrix. Orowan showed that for repeated cycles of constant 
stress amplitude the plastic regions will experience an increase in stress 
and a decrease in strain as the result of progressive localized strain harden- 
ing. He further showed that the total plastic strain (sum of positive and 
negative strains) converges toward a finite value as the number of cycles 
increases toward infinity. This limiting value of total plastic strain 
increases with an increase in the stress applied to the specimen. The 
existence of a fatigue limit hinges upon the fact that below a certain 
stress the total plastic strain cannot reach the critical value required for 
fracture. However, if the stress is such that the total plastic strain in 
the weak region exceeds the critical value, a crack is formed. The crack 
creates a stress concentration, and this forms a new localized plastic 
region in which the process is repeated. This process is repeated over 
and over until the crack becomes large enough so that fracture occurs on 
the application of the full tensile stress of the cycle. The essence of this 
theory is that localized strain hardening uses up the plasticity of the 
metal so that fracture takes place. 

Wood^s Concept of Fatigue 

W. A. Wood,^ who has made many basic contributions to the under- 
standing of the mechanism of fatigue, has evolved a concept of fatigue 
failure which does not require localized strain hardening for fatigue defor- 
mation to occur. He interprets microscopic observations of slip produced 
by fatigue as indicating that the slip bands are the result of a systematic 
build-up of fine slip movements, corresponding to movements of the order 
of 10~^ cm rather than steps of 10"^ to 10~* cm, which are observed for 
static slip bands. Such a mechanism is believed to allow for the accom- 
modation of the large total strain (summation of the microstrain in each 
cycle) without causing appreciable strain hardening. Figure 12-6 illus- 
trates Wood's concept of how continued deformation by fine slip might 
lead to a fatigue crack. The figures illustrate schematically the fine 

1 E. Orowan, Proc. Roy. Soc. {London), vol. 171A, pp. 79-106, 1939. 

2 W. A. Wood, Bull. Inst. Metals, vol. .3, pp. 5-6, September, 1955. 



Sec. 1 2-6] 



Fatigue of Metals 309 



structure of a slip band at magnifications obtainable with the electron 
microscope. Slip produced by static deformation would produce a con- 
tour at the metal surface similar to that shown in Fig. 12-6a. In con- 
trast, the back-and-forth fine slip movements of fatigue could build up 
notches (Fig. 12-66) or ridges (Fig. 12-6c) at the surface. The notch 
would be a stress raiser with a notch root of atomic dimensions. Such a 





[b] 



[c) 



Fig. 12-6. W. A. Wood's concept of microdeformation leading to formation of fatigue 
crack, (a) Static deformation; (6) fatigue deformation leading to surface notch 
(intrusion) ; (c) fatigue deformation leading to slip-band extrusion. 



situation might well be the start of a fatigue crack. This mechanism 
for the initiation of a fatigue crack is in agreement wdth the facts that 
fatigue cracks start at surfaces and that cracks have been found to initiate 
at slip-band intrusions and extrusions. 

Dislocation Models for Fatigue 

The growing awareness of the role played by subtle changes in surface 
topography in initiating fatigue cracks has led to several dislocation 
models for the generation of slip-band intrusions and extrusions. Cottrell 
and HulP have suggested a model involving the interaction of edge dis- 
locations on two slip systems, while Mott^ has suggested one involving 
the cross slip of screw dislocations. Fatigue experiments on ionic crys- 
tals^ tend to support the Mott mechanism and to disprove the Cottrell- 
Hull model. 

Theory of the Fatigue Limit 

One of the puzzling questions in fatigue is why certain metals exhibit 
an S-N curve with a well-defined fatigue limit, while other metals do not 
have a fatigue limit. The answer to this question appears to have been 

1 A. H. Cottrell and D. Hull, Proc. Roy. Soc. (London), vol. 242A, pp. 211-213, 1957. 

2 N. F. Mott, Acta Met., vol. 6, pp. 195-197, 1958; see also A. J. Kennedy, Phil. 
Mag., ser. 8, vol. 6, pp. 49-53, 1961. 

3 A. J. McEvily, Jr., and E. S. Machlin, Critical Experiments on the Nature of 
Fatigue in Crystalline Materials, in "Fracture," John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 
1959. 



310 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 12 

given by Rall}^ and Sinclair/ who noted that metals which undergo strain 
aging have an S-N curve with a sharp knee and a well-defined fatigue 
limit. Their tests with mild steel showed that as the total carbon and 
nitrogen content was decreased, so that the tendency for strain aging 
decreased, the S-N curve flattened out and the knee occurred at a larger 
number of cycles than if the carbon content were higher. Similar results 
were found by Lipsitt and Home." They proposed that the fatigue limit 
represents the stress at which a balance occurs between fatigue damage 
and localized strengthening due to strain aging. The correlation is fairly 
good between materials which show both strain aging and a fatigue limit. 
Low-carbon steel, titanium, molybdenum, and aluminum-7 per cent 
magnesium^ alloy are good examples. Heat-treated steel exhibits a 
definite fatigue limit; yet it does not ordinarily show strain aging in the 
tension test. However, only very localized strain aging is required to 
affect fatigue properties, and it is quite likely that the fatigue test is 
more sensitive to strain aging than the tension test. 

1 2-7. Effect of Stress Concentration on Fatigue 

Fatigue strength is seriously reduced by the introduction of a stress 
raiser such as a notch or hole. Since actual machine elements invariably 
contain stress raisers like fillets, keyways, screw threads, press fits, and 
holes, it is not surprising to find that fatigue cracks in structural parts 
usually start at such geometrical irregularities. One of the best ways of 
minimizing fatigue failure is by the reduction of avoidable stress raisers 
through careful design^ and the prevention of accidental stress raisers by 
careful machining and fabrication. While this section is concerned with 
stress concentrations resulting from geometrical discontinuities, stress 
concentration can also arise from surface roughness and metallurgical 
stress raisers such as porosity, inclusions, local overheating in grinding, 
and decarburization. These factors will be considered in other sections 
of this chapter. 

The effect of stress raisers on fatigue is generally studied by testing 
specimens containing a notch, usually a V notch or a circular notch. It 
has been shown in Chap. 7 that the presence of a notch in a specimen 

1 F. C. Rally and G. M. Sinclair, "Influence of Strain Aging on the Shape of the 
S-N Diagram," Department of Theoretical and Applied Mechanics, University of 
Illinois, Urbana, 111., 1955; see also J. C. Levy and S. L. Kanitkar, J. Iron Steel Inst. 
(London), vol. 197, pp. 296-300, 1961. 

2 H. A. Lipsitt and G. T. Home, Proc. ASTM, vol. 57, pp. 587-600, 1957. 
^ Broom, Molineux, and Whittaker, op. cit. 

* For examples of good design practice, see J. S. Caswell, Prod. Eng., January, 1947, 
pp. 118-119. 



)ec. 



12-7] Fatisue of Metals 311 



under uniaxial load introduces three effects: (1) there is an increase or 
concentration of stress at the root of the notch; (2) a stress gradient is 
set up from the root of the notch in toward the center of the specimen; 
(3) a triaxial state of stress is produced. 

The ratio of the maximum stress to the nominal stress is the theoretical 
stress-concentration factor Ki. As was discussed in Sec. 2-13, values of 
Kt can be computed from the theory of elasticity for simple geometries 
and can be determined from photoelastic measurements for more com- 
plicated situations. Most of the available data on stress-concentration 
factors have been collected by Peterson. ^ It is often desirable to include 
the effect of the biaxial state of stress at the root of a notch in the value 
of the stress-concentration factor. The distortion-energy criterion of 
yielding for biaxial stress can be expressed by 

a, = (7i(l - C + C2)^^ (12-5) 

where C = crz/ai and ao = 0. If we divide both sides of Eq. (12-5) by 
the nominal stress, we get the expression 

Kt' = Kt{l - C + Cy^ (12-6) 

where Kt' is the stress concentration factor including both combined stress 
and stress concentration. 

The effect of notches on fatigue strength is determined by comparing 
the S-N curves of notched and unnotched specimens. The data for 
notched specimens are usually plotted in terms of nominal stress based 
on the net section of the specimen. The effectiveness of the notch in 
decreasing the fatigue limit is expressed by the fatigue-strength reduction 
factor, or fatigue-notch factor, Kf. This factor is simply the ratio of the 
fatigue limit of unnotched specimens to the fatigue limit of notched speci- 
mens. For materials which do not exhibit a fatigue limit the fatigue- 
notch factor is based on the fatigue strength at a specified number of 
cycles. Values of Kf have been found to vary with (1) severity of the 
notch, (2) the type of notch, (3) the material, (4) the type of loading, and 
(5) the stress level. The values of Kf published in the literature are 
subject to considerable scatter and should be carefully examined for their 
limitations and restrictions. However, two general trends are usually 
observed for test conditions of completely reversed loading. First, 
Kf is usually less than Kt, and, second, the ratio of Kf/Kt decreases 
as Kt increases. Thus, very sharp notches (high Kt) have less effect on 
fatigue strength than would be expected from their high value of Kt. 
This is in agreement with observations that fatigue cracks can exist in a 

1 R. E. Peterson, "Stress-concentration Design Factors," John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 
New York, 195:1 



312 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 12 



specimen for millions of cycles without propagating. ^ However, this 
should not be interpreted as license to assume that a sharp notch or crack 
can be tolerated in a structure. 

The notch sensitivity of a material in fatigue is usually expressed by a 
notch-sensitivity index q. 



Q = 



Ki 



1 



Kt - 1 



or 



Kt - 1 



Kt' 



1 



(12-7) 



where q = notch-sensitivity index 
Kf — notch-fatigue factor 

= fatigue limit unnotched/fatigue limit notched 
Kt = theoretical stress-concentration factor = o-max/cnom 
Kt' = theoretical factor which combines Kt and a biaxial stress factor 
Equation (12-7) was chosen so that a material which experiences no 
reduction in fatigue strength due to a notch has an index of g = 0, while 
a material in which the notch has its full theoretical effect has a notch- 
sensitivity index of g = 1. However, q is not a true material constant 
since it varies with the severity and type of notch, the size of the speci- 
men, and the type of loading. The notch sensitivity increases with sec- 
tion size and tensile strength. Thus, because of increased q it is possible 
under certain circumstances to decrease the fatigue performance of a 
member by increasing the hardness or tensile strength. 




Fig. 1 2-7. Stress distribution at a notch in bending. 

The stress gradient, or slope of the stress-distribution curve near the 
root of the notch, has an important influence on the notch sensitivity. 
Figure 12-7 illustrates the stress distribution in a notched bar in bending. 
The maximum stress produced by the notch is o-max, and the nominal stress, 
neglecting the notch, is o-„. The unnotched fatigue limit of the material 
is (Tg. This stress is reached at a depth 5 below the root of the notch. 

» N. E. Frost, Engineer, vol. 200, pp. 464, 501, 1955. 



Sec. 12-7] Fatigue of Metals 313 

The stress gradient can then be written 

dy 5 

This expression can also be written in terms of the notch radius r. 

HO" ^ O^inax 

dy r 

Combining these two expressions and assuming that faikire occurs when 



in 






1 1 
















0.8 


^ 


rs 


, — " 


^- 






1 





' 




/ 


^i 


\. 


^^ 














■^0.6 


/ / 


/ \ 


.^\ 
















// 


X 


\. ^^ Quenched and tempered steel 






i ^-^ 


\h 


/ 


\^ 


^^Annealed and normalized steel 






\ 






Aluminum alloy 

1 










^ 0.2 

2 


I 











































f 





















0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.20 
r, in. 

Fig. 12-8. Variation of notch-sensitivity index with notch radius for materials of 
different tensile strength. {R. E. Peterson, in G. Sines and J. L. Waisman {eds.), 
"Metal Fatigue," p. 301, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 1959.) 

the stress ae at the depth 5 equals the fatigue strength K/Cn results in 

Kf = /vYl - ^^ (12-8) 

Typical values^ of Ci are 2.5 for bending and axial loading and 1.2 for 
torsion. If Eq. (12-8) is substituted into Eq. (12-7) and Kt is replaced 
by Kt', we get a relationship between q and notch radius.'^ 



q= 1 



(12-9) 



where a = Cih[Kt'/{Kt' - 1)]. Figure 12-8 shows typical values of 
notch-sensitivity index plotted against notch radius. Note the effect 
of the strength of the material (see Prob. 12.1). Since the stress gradient 
will vary with section size in the same way as notch radius, q will also 

1 M. M. Leven, Proc. Soc. Exptl. Stress Anal., vol. 13, no. 1, p. 207, 1955. 

2 R. E. Peterson, Notch-sensitivity, in G. Sines and J. L. Waisman (eds.), "Metal 
Fatigue," McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 1959. 



314 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 12 

increase with specimen diameter. In addition, there is a measurable 
effect of grain size on notch-sensitivity index. Fine grain size results in 
a higher q than coarse grain size. 

Several hypotheses have been made to explain the variation of notch 
sensitivity with notch radius, section size, and grain size. One hypothe- 
sis assumes that failure is determined by the volume of material that is 
stressed to within a small percentage, say, 5 per cent, of the maximum 
stress. This involves a statistical argument that the probability of find- 
ing a flaw or critical crack nucleus increases with the volume of highly 
stressed material. Another viewpoint is that the stress gradient across 
a grain is the critical factor. For a fine grain size the stress gradient is 
low, and the value of q is large. Geometrically similar notches will not 
produce the same stress gradient across the grains if the grain size is 
equal in different-diameter specimens. The specimen with the larger 
diameter will have the lower stress gradient across a grain. 

1 2-8. Size Effect 

An important practical problem is the prediction of the fatigue per- 
formance of large machine members from the results of laboratory tests 
on small specimens. Experience has shown that in most cases a size effect 
exists; i.e., the fatigue strength of large members is lower than that of 
small specimens. A precise study of this effect is difficult for several 
reasons. It is extremely difficult, if not altogether impossible, to prepare 
geometrically similar specimens of increasing diameter which have the 
same metallurgical structure and residual stress distribution throughout 
the cross section. The problems in fatigue testing large-sized specimens 
are considerable, and there are few fatigue machines which can accom- 
modate specimens having a wide range of cross sections. 

Changing the size of a fatigue specimen usually results in a variation 
in two factors. First, increasing the diameter increases the volume or 
surface area of the specimen. The change in amount of surface is of sig- 
nificance, since fatigue failures usually start at the surface. Second, for 
plain or notched specimens loaded in bending or torsion, an increase in 
diameter usually decreases the stress gradient across the diameter and 
increases the volume of material which is highly stressed. 

Experimental data on the size effect in fatigue are contradictory and 
not very complete. For tests in reversed bending and torsion, some 
investigators have found no change in fatigue limit with specimen diam- 
eter, while more commonly it is observed that the fatigue limit decreases 
with increasing diameter. For mild steel the decrease in bending fatigue 
limit for diameters ranging from 0.1 to 2 in. does not exceed about 10 per 



Sec. 12-9] Fatigue of Metals 315 

cent. Horger's data' for steel shafts tested in reversed bending (Table 
12-1) show that the fatigue limit can be appreciably reduced in large 
section sizes. 

Table 12-1 

Fatigue Limit of Normalized Plain-carbon Steel 

IN Reversed Bending 



Specimen diam, 


Fatigue limit, 


in. 


psi 


0.30 


36,000 


1.50 


29,000 


6.00 


21,000 



No size effect has been found- for smooth plain-carbon-steel fatigue 
specimens with diameters ranging from 0.2 to 1.4 in. when tested in axial 
tension-compression loading. However, when a notch is introduced into 
the specimen, so that a stress gradient is produced, a definite size effect 
is observed. These important experiments support the idea that a size 
effect in fatigue is due to the existence of a stress gradient. The fact 
that large specimens with shallow stress gradients have lower fatigue 
limits is consistent with the idea that a critical value of stress must be 
exceeded over a certain finite depth of material for failure to occur. This 
appears to be a more realistic criterion of size effect than simply the ratio 
of the change in surface area to the change in specimen diameter. The 
importance of stress gradients in size effect helps explain why correlation 
between laboratory results and service failure is often rather poor. 
Actual failures in large parts are usually directly attributable to stress 
concentrations, either intentional or accidental, and it is usually impossi- 
ble to duplicate the same stress concentration and stress gradient in a 
small-sized laboratory specimen. 

1 2-9. Surface Effects and Fatigue 

Practically all fatigue failures start at the surface. For many common 
types of loading, like bending and torsion, the maximum stress occurs 
at the surface so that it is logical that failure should start there. How- 
ever, in axial loading the fatigue failure nearly always begins at the 
surface. There is ample evidence that fatigue properties are very sensi- 
tive to surface condition. The factors which affect the surface of a 
fatigue specimen can be divided roughly into three categories, (1) surface 

1 O. J. Horger, Fatigue Characteristics of Large Sections, in "Fatigue," American 
Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1953. 

2 C. E. PhiUips and R. B. Heywood, Proc. Inst. Mech. Engrs. (London), vol. 165, 
pp. 113-124, 1951. 



316 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 12 



roughness or stress raisers at the surface, (2) changes in the fatigue 
strength of the surface metal, and (3) changes in the residual stress con- 
dition of the surface. In addition, the surface is subjected to oxidation 
and corrosion. 

Surface Roughness 

Since the early days of fatigue investigations, it has been recognized 
that different surface finishes produced by different machining procedures 
can appreciably affect fatigue performance. Smoothly polished speci- 
mens, in which the fine scratches (stress raisers) are oriented parallel with 
the direction of the principal tensile stress, give the highest values in 
fatigue tests. Such carefully polished specimens are usually used in 

Table 12-2 
Fatigue Life of SAE 3130 Steel Specimens Tested under 
Completely Reversed Stress at 95,000 PSI^^ 



Type of finish 


Surface roughness, lAn. 


Median fatigue life, cycles 


Lathe-formed 


105 
6 
5 

7 
2 

7 


24,000 


Partly hand-polished 

Hand-polished 

Ground 


91,000 
137,000 
217,000 


Ground and polished 

Superfinished 


234,000 
212,000 



t p. G. Fluck, Proc. ASTM, vol. 51, pp. 584-592, 1951. 



laboratory fatigue tests and are known as "par bars." Table 12-2 indi- 
cates how the fatigue life of cantilever-beam specimens varies with the 
type of surface preparation. Extensive data on this subject have been 
published by Siebel and Gaier.^ 

Changes in Surface Properties 

Since fatigue failure is so dependent on the condition of the surface, 
anything that changes the fatigue strength of the surface material will 
greatly alter the fatigue properties. Decarburization of the surface of 
heat-treated steel is particularly detrimental to fatigue performance. 
Similarly, the fatigue strength of aluminum-alloy sheet is reduced when 
a soft aluminum coating is applied to the stronger age-hardenable alumi- 
num-alloy sheet. Marked improvements in fatigue properties can result 
from the formation of harder and stronger surfaces on steel parts by 

1 E. Siebel and M. Gaier, VDI Zt., vol. 98, pp. 1715-1723, 1956; abstracted in Engi- 
neer's Digest, vol. 18, pp. 109-112, 1957. 



Sec. 12-9] Fatigue of Metals 317 

carburizing and nitriding. ' However, since favorable compressive resid- 
ual stresses are produced in the surface by these processes, it cannot be 
considered that the higher fatigue properties are due exclusively to the 
formation of higher-strength material on the surface. The effectiveness 
of carburizing and nitriding in improving fatigue performance is greater 
for cases where a high stress gradient exists, as in bending or torsion, 
than in an axial fatigue test. The greatest percentage increase in fatigue 
performance is found when notched fatigue specimens are nitrided. The 
amount of strengthening depends on the diameter of the part and the 
depth of surface hardening. Improvements in fatigue properties similar 
to those caused by carburizing and nitriding may also be produced by 
flame hardening and induction hardening. It is a general characteristic 
of fatigue in surface-hardened parts that the failure initiates at the inter- 
face between the hard case and the softer case, rather than at the surface. 
Electroplating of the surface generally decreases the fatigue limit of 
steel. Chromium plating is particularly difficult to accomplish without 
impairment of fatigue properties, while a softer cadmium plating is 
believed to have little effect on fatigue strength. The particular plating 
conditions used to produce an electroplated surface can have an appreci- 
able effect on the fatigue properties, since large changes in the residual 
stress, adhesion, porosity, and hardness of the plate can be produced. ^ 

Surface Residual Stress 

The formation of a favorable compressive residual-stress pattern at the 
surface is probably the most effective method of increasing fatigue per- 
formance. The subject of residual stress will be considered in greater 
detail in Chap. 15. However, for the present discussion, it can be con- 
sidered that residual stresses are locked-in stresses which are present in 
a part which is not subjected to an external force. Only macrostresses, 
which act over regions which are large compared with the grain size, are 
considered here. They can be measured by X-ray methods or by noting 
the changes in dimensions when a thin layer of material is removed from 
the surface. Residual stresses arise when plastic deformation is not uni- 
form throughout the entire cross section of the part being deformed. 
Consider a metal specimen where the surface has been deformed in 
tension by bending so that part of it has undergone plastic deformation. 
When the external force is removed, the regions which have been plasti- 
cally deformed prevent the adjacent elastic regions from undergoing com- 
plete elastic recovery to the unstrained condition. Thus, the elastically 

1 "Fatigue Durability of Carburized Steel," American Society for Metals, Metals 
Park, Ohio, 1957. 

2 A detailed review of the effect of electroplating on fatigue strength is given by 
R. A. R. Hammond and C. WiUiams, Met. Reviews, vol. 5, pp. 165-223, 1960. 



318 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 12 



deformed regions are left in residual tension, and the regions which were 
plastically deformed must be in a state of residual compression to balance 
the stresses over the cross section of the specimen. In general, for a 
situation where part of the cross section is deformed plastically while the 
rest undergoes elastic deformation, the region which was plastically 



Tension 




Connpression -^-crmo 



-^^/? 



^l 



-^o> 




id) 




Fig. 1 2-9. Superposition of applied and residual stresses. 



deformed in tension will have a compressive residual stress after unload- 
ing, while the region which was deformed plastically in compression will 
have a tensile residual stress when the external force is removed. The 
maximum value of residual stress which can be produced is equal to the 
elastic limit of the metal. 

For many purposes residual stresses can be considered identical to the 
stresses produced by an external force. Thus, the addition of a com- 
pressive residual stress, which exists at a point on the surface, to an 
externally applied tensile stress on that surface decreases the likelihood 
of fatigue failure at that point. Figure 12-9 illustrates this effect. Fig- 
ure 12-9a shows the elastic-stress distribution in a beam with no residual 
stress. A typical residual-stress distribution, such as would be produced 



Sec. 12-9] Fatigue of Metals 319 

by shot peening, is shown in Fig. 12-96. Note that the high compressive 
residual stresses at the surface must be balanced by tensile residual 
stresses over the interior of the cross section. In Fig. 12-9c the stress 
distribution due to the algebraic summation of the external bending 
stresses and the residual stresses is shown. Note that the maximum 
tensile stress at the surface is reduced by an amount equal to the surface 
compressive residual stress. The peak tensile stress is displaced to a 
point in the interior of the specimen. The magnitude of this stress 
depends on the gradient of applied stress and the residual-stress distri- 
bution. Thus, subsurface initiation of failure is possible under these 
conditions. It should also be apparent that the improvements in fatigue 
performance which result from the introduction of surface compressive 
residual stress will be greater when the loading is one in which a stress 
gradient exists than when no stress gradient is present. However, some 
improvement in the fatigue performance of axial loaded fatigue speci- 
mens results from surface compressive residual stresses, presumably 
because the surface is such a potential source of weakness. 

The chief commercial methods of introducing favorable compressive 
residual stresses in the surface are by surface rolling with contoured 
rollers and by shot peening. Although some changes in the strength of 
the metal due to strain hardening occur during these processes, it is 
believed that the improvement in fatigue performance is due chiefly to 
the formation of surface compressive residual stress. Surface rolling is 
particularly adapted to large parts. It is frequently used in critical 
regions such as the fillets of crankshafts and the bearing surface of rail- 
road axles. Shot peening consists in projecting fine steel or cast-iron shot 
against the surface at high velocity. It is particularly adapted to mass- 
produced parts of fairly small size. The severity of the stress produced 
by shot peening is frequently controlled by measuring the residual defor- 
mation of shot-peened beams called Almen strips. The principal varia- 
bles in this process are the shot velocity and the size, shape, and hardness 
of the shot. Care must be taken to ensure uniform coverage over the 
area to be treated. Frequently an additional improvement in fatigue 
properties can be obtained by carefully polishing the shot-peened surface 
to reduce the surface roughness. Other methods of introducing surface 
compressive residual stresses are by means of thermal stresses produced 
by quenching steel from the tempering temperature and from stresses 
arising from the volume changes accompanying the metallurgical changes 
resulting from carburizing, nitriding, and induction hardening. 

It is important to recognize that improvements in fatigue properties 
do not automatically result from the use of shot peening or surface roll- 
ing. It is possible to damage the surface by excessive peening or rolling. 
Experience and testing are required to establish the proper conditions 



320 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 12 

which produce the optimum residual-stress distribution. Further, cer- 
tain metallurgical processes yield surface tensile residual stresses. Thus, 
surface tensile stresses are produced by quenching deep-hardening steel, 
and this stress pattern may persist at low tempering temperatures. 
Grinding of hardened steel requires particular care to prevent a large 
decrease in fatigue properties. It has been shown ^ that either tensile or 
compressive surface residual stresses can be produced, depending upon 
the grinding conditions. Further, the polishing^ methods ordinarily used 
for preparing fatigue specimens can result in appreciable surface residual 
stress. It is quite likely that lack of control of this factor in specimen 
preparation is responsible for much of the scatter in fatigue-test results. 
It is important to realize that residual-stress patterns may be modified 
by plastic deformation or by thermal activation. Thus, it is possible for 
periods of overload or periods of increased temperature to result in some 
relief of residual stress. The data on "fading" of residual stress are very 
meager and not too reliable. In general, while the possibility of fading 
of residual stress during service should be recognized, it does not prohibit 
the use of compressive residual stress as the most effective method of 
combating fatigue failure. 

12-10. Corrosion Fatisue 

The simultaneous action of cyclic stress and chemical attack is known 
as corrosion fatigue.^ Corrosive attack without superimposed stress 
often produces pitting of metal surfaces. The pits act as notches and 
produce a reduction in fatigue strength. However, when corrosive attack 
occurs simultaneously with fatigue loading, a very pronounced reduction 
in fatigue properties results which is greater than that produced by prior 
corrosion of the surface. When corrosion and fatigue occur simultane- 
ously, the chemical attack greatly accelerates the rate at which fatigue 
cracks propagate. Materials which show a definite fatigue limit when 
tested in air at room temperature show no indication of a fatigue limit 
when the test is carried out in a corrosive environment. While ordinary 
fatigue tests in air are not affected by the speed of testing, over a range 
from about 1,000 to 12,000 cycles/min, when tests are made in a corrosive 
environment there is a definite dependence on testing speed. Since cor- 
rosive attack is a time-dependent phenomenon, the higher the testing 
speed, the smaller the damage due to corrosion. Corrosion-fatigue tests 
may be carried out in two ways. In the usual method the specimen is 

iL. P. Tarasov, W. S. Hyler, and H. R. Letner, Proc. ASTM, vol. 57, pp. 601-622, 
1957. 

2 An extensive review of the literature on this subject has been prepared by P. T. 
Gilbert, Met. Reviews, vol. 1, pp. 379-417, 1956. 



)CC. 



12-10] Fatigue of Metals 321 



continuously subjected to the combined influences of corrosion and cyclic 
stress until failure occurs. In the two-stage test the corrosion fatigue 
test is interrupted after a certain period and the damage which was pro- 
duced is evaluated by determining the remaining life in air. Tests of the 
last type have helped to establish the mechanism of corrosion fatigue.^ 
The action of the cyclic stress causes localized disruption of the surface 
oxide film so that corrosion pits can be produced. Many more small pits 
occur in corrosion fatigue than in corrosive attack in the absence of stress. 
The cyclic stress will also tend to remove or dislodge any corrosion prod- 
ucts which might otherwise stifle the corrosion. The bottoms of the pits 
are more anodic than the rest of the metal so that corrosion proceeds 
inward, aided by the disruption of the oxide film by cyclic strain. Crack- 
ing will occur when the pit becomes sharp enough to produce a high stress 
concentration. 

There is evidence to indicate that even fatigue tests in air at room 
temperature are influenced by corrosion fatigue. Fatigue tests on copper 
showed that the fatigue strength was higher in a partial vacuum than in 
air."^ Separate tests in oxygen and water vapor showed little decrease 
over the fatigue strength in vacuum. It was concluded that water vapor 
acts as a catalyst to reduce the fatigue strength in air, indicating that 
the relative humidity may be a variable to consider in fatigue testing. 
Subsequent work with copper^ showed that the fatigue life was much 
longer in oxygen-free nitrogen than in air. Metallographic observation 
showed that the development of persistent slip bands was slowed down 
when tests were made in nitrogen. 

A number of methods are available for minimizing corrosion-fatigue 
damage. In general, the choice of a material for this type of service 
should be based on its corrosion-resistant properties rather than the con- 
ventional fatigue properties. Thus, stainless steel, bronze, or beryllium 
copper would probably give better service than heat-treated steel. Pro- 
tection of the metal from contact with the corrosive environment by 
metallic or nonmetallic coatings is successful provided that the coating 
does not become ruptured from the cyclic strain. Zinc and cadmium 
coatings on steel and aluminum coatings on Alclad aluminum alloys are 
successful for many corrosion-fatigue applications, even though these 
coatings may cause a reduction in fatigue strength when tests are con- 
ducted in air. The formation of surface compressive residual stresses 
tends to keep surface notches from opening up and giving ready access 
to the corrosive medium. Nitriding is particularly effective in combating 
corrosion fatigue, and shot peening has been used with success under cer- 

1 U. R. Evans and M. T. Simnad, Proc. Roy. Soc. (London), vol. 188A, p. 372, 1947. 

2 H. J. Gough and D. G. Sopwith, J. Inst. Metals, vol. 72, pp. 415-421, 1946. 

3 N. Thompson, N. Wadsworth, and N. Louat, Phil. Mag., vol. 1, pp. 113-126, 1956. 



322 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 1 2 

tain conditions. In closed systems it is possible to reduce the corrosive 
attack by the addition of a corrosion inhibitor. Finally, the elimination 
of stress concentrators by careful design is very important when corrosion 
fatigue must be considered. 

Fretting 

Fretting is the surface damage which results when two surfaces in con- 
tact experience slight periodic relative motion. The phenomenon is more 
related to wear than to corrosion fatigue. However, it differs from wear 
by the facts that the relative velocity of the two surfaces is much lower 
than is usually encountered in wear and that since the two surfaces are 
never brought out of contact there is no chance for the corrosion products 
to be removed. Fretting is frequently found on the surface of a shaft 
with a press-fitted hub or bearing. Surface pitting and deterioration 
occur, usually accompanied by an oxide debris (reddish for steel and 
black for aluminum). Fatigue cracks often start in the damaged area, 
although they may be obscured from observation by the surface debris. 
Fretting is caused by a combination of mechanical and chemical effects. 
Metal is removed from the surface either by a grinding action or by the 
alternate welding and tearing away of the high spots. The removed 
particles become oxidized and form an abrasive powder which continues 
the destructive process. Oxidation of the metal surface occurs and the 
oxide film is destroyed by the relative motion of the surfaces. Although 
oxidation is not essential to fretting, as is demonstrated by relative motion 
between two nonoxidizing gold surfaces, when conditions are such that 
oxidation can occur fretting damage is many times more severe. 

There are no completely satisfactory methods of preventing fretting. 
If all relative motion is prevented, then fretting will not occur. Increas- 
ing the force normal to the surfaces may accomplish this, but the damage 
increases with the normal force up to the point where relative motion is 
stopped. If relative motion cannot be completely eliminated, then reduc- 
tion of the coefficient of friction between the mating parts may be bene- 
ficial. Solid lubricants such as MoS are most successful, since the chief 
problem is maintaining a lubricating film for a long period of time. 
Increasing the wear resistance of the surfaces so as to reduce surface 
welding is another approach. Exclusion of the atmosphere from the 
two surfaces will reduce fretting, but this is frequently difficult to do 
with a high degree of effectiveness. Several excellent reviews of this 
subject have been published.^' 

1 R. B. Waterhouse, Proc. Inst. Mech. Encjrs. {London), vol. 169, pp. 1157-1172, 
1955. 

2 P. L. Teed, Met. Reviews, vol. 5, pp. 267-295, 1960. 



12-11 



Fatigue of Metals 



323 



^;^,^ 


fO.J 


\\\^ /? = 





V^ >? = 


-0.3 


1 ' 


-1.0 

! 



10' 



10^ 
Cycles to failure 
(a) 



10' 



12-11. Effect of Mean Stress on Fatigue 

Most of the fatigue data in the Uterature have been determined for 
conditions of completely reversed cycles of stress, o-^ = 0. However, 
conditions are frequently met in engineering practice where the stress 
situation consists of an alternating 
stress and a superimposed mean, or 
steady, stress. The possibility of 
this stress situation has already been 
considered in Sec. 12-2, where var- 
ious relationships between a^ and 
a a have been given. 

There are several possible methods 
of determining an *S-A^ diagram for 
a situation where the mean stress 
is not equal to zero. Figure 12-10 
shows the two most common meth- 
ods of presenting the data. In Fig. 
12-lOa the maximum stress is plot- 
ted against log A'' for constant values 
of the stress ratio R = a^i^/cnm^. 
This is achieved by applying a series 
of stress cycles with decreasing maxi- 
mum stress and adjusting the mini- 
mum stress in each case so that it is 
a constant fraction of the maxi- 
mum stress. The case of com- 
pletely reversed stress is given at 
R = -1.0. Note that as R be- 
comes more positive, which is 
equivalent to increasing the mean 
stress, the measured fatigue limit 
becomes greater. Figure 12-105 
shows the same data plotted in 
terms of the alternating stress vs. 
cycles to failure at constant values 
of mean stress. Note that as the 

mean stress becomes more positive the allowable alternating stress 
decreases. Other ways of plotting these data are maximum stress vs. 
cycles to failure at constant mean stress and maximum stress vs. cycles 
to failure at constant minimum stress. 

For each value of mean stress there is a different value of the limiting 
range of stress, (7„ax — cr,„,n which can be withstood without failure. 




Fig. 12-10. Two methods of plotting 
fatigue data when the mean stress is 
not zero. 



324 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 12 



Early contributions to this problem were made by Goodman,^ so that 
curves which show the dependence of limiting range of stress on mean 
stress are frequently called Goodman diagrams. Figure 12-11 shows one 
common type of Goodman diagram which can be constructed from fatigue 
data of the type illustrated in Fig. 12-10. Basically, this diagram shows 
the variation of the limiting range of stress, o-max — o'min with mean stress. 
Note that as the mean stress becomes more tensile the allowable range of 
stress is reduced, until at the tensile strength d-„ the stress range is zero. 



Compression-^ 



> Tension 




Mean stress ct^^j -^ 

Completely reversed stress 
data plotted here 



Fig. 1 2-1 1 . Goodman diagram. 



However, for practical purposes testing is usually stopped when the yield 
stress (To is exceeded. The test data usually lie somewhat above and 
below the o-max and a^^^ lines, respectively, so that these lines shown on 
Fig. 12-11 may actually be curves. A conservative approximation of the 
Goodman diagram may be obtained, in lieu of actual test data, by draw- 
ing straight lines from the fatigue limit for completely reversed stress 
(which is usually available from the literature) to the tensile strength. 
A diagram similar to Fig. 12-11 may be constructed for the fatigue 
strength at any given number of cycles. Very few test data exist for 
conditions where the mean stress is compressive. Data^ for SAE 4340 
steel tested in axial fatigue indicate that the allowable stress range 
increases with increasing compressive mean stress up to the yield stress 

^ John Goodman, "Mechanics Applied to Engineering," 9th ed., Longmans, Green 
& Co., Inc., New York, 1930. 

2 J. T. Ransom, discussion in Proc. ASTM, vol. 54, pp. 847-848. 1954. 



Sec. 12-11] 



Fatigue of Metals 



325 



in compression. This is in agreement with the fact that compressive 
residual stress increases the fatigue limit. 

An alternative method of presenting mean-stress data is shown in Fig. 
12-12. This is sometimes known as the Haig-Soderberg diagram. ^ The 
alternating stress is plotted against the mean stress. A straight-line 
relationship follows the suggestion of Goodman, while the parabolic curve 
was proposed by Gerber. Test data for ductile metals generally fall 
closer to the parabolic curve. However, because of the scatter in the 
results and the fact that tests on notched specimens fall closer to the 



Gerber parabola 
Goodman line 




Compression 



Fig. 12-12. Alternative method of plotting the Goodman diagram. 



Goodman line, the linear relationship is usually preferred in engineering 
design. These relationships may be expressed by the following equation, 



Co — Ce 



-fe)' 



(12-10) 



where a: = 1 for the Goodman line, .r = 2 for the Gerber parabola, and 
Oe is the fatigue limit for completely reversed loading. If the design is 
based on the yield strength, as indicated by the dashed Soderberg line in 
Fig. 12-12, then ao should be substituted for o-„ in Eq. (12-10). 

Figure 12-12 is obtained for alternating axial or bending stresses with 
static tension or compression or alternating torsion with static tension. 
However, for alternating torsion with static torsion or alternating bend- 
ing with static torsion there is no effect of the static stress on the allow- 
able range of alternating stress provided that the static yield strength is 
not exceeded. Sines- has shown that these results can be rationalized 

1 C. R. Soderberg, Trans. ASME, vol. 52, APM-52-2, 1930. 

2 G. Sines, Failure of Materials under Combined Repeated Stresses with Super- 
imposed Static Stresses, NACA Tech. Note 3495, 1955. 



326 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 12 

in the following manner : The planes of maximum alternating shear stress 
are determined, and the static normal stresses Si and S2 on these planes 
are established. When *Si + S2 is positive, an increase in static stress 
reduces the permissible value of aa. When Si + S2 is negative, the per- 
missible value of aa is increased. Finally, when Si + ^2 is zero, the static 
stress has no effect on Ca regardless of the applied static stress. 

1 2-1 2. Fatisue under Combined Stresses 

Many machine parts must withstand complex loadings with both 
alternating and steady components of stress. Ideally, it should be possi- 
ble to predict the fatigue performance of a combined stress system by 
substituting the fatigue strength for simple types of loading into the 
equation of the failure criterion, just as the yield stress in tension can be 
used with the distortion-energy criterion of failure to predict static yield- 
ing under a complex state of stress. Although the data on combined- 
stress fatigue failure are fewer and less reliable than for static yielding, 
certain generalizations can be made. Fatigue tests with different 
combinations of bending and torsion ^ show that for ductile metals the 
distortion-energy criterion provides the best over-all fit. For brittle 
materials a maximum principal stress theory provides the best criterion 
of failure. 

Sines^ has suggested a failure criterion that accounts for the effect of 
combined stresses and the influence of a static mean stress. 

4= [(^1 - ^2)2 + (cr2 - a^y + (c73 - ai)Y' = <^e - C^iS, + Sy + S,) 
V2 

(12-11) 

where ai, a 2, 0-3 = alternating principal stresses 

Sx, Sy, Sz = static stresses 

(Te = fatigue strength for completely reversed stress 

C2 = a material constant giving variation of aa versus am', 

i.e., it is the slope of the Goodman line in Fig. 12-12 

Fatigue failure will occur if the left side of Eq. (12-11) is greater than the 

right side. The constants ae and C2 can be evaluated at any value of 

cycles to failure. The effect of residual stresses can be introduced by 

adding these terms to the static stresses on the right side of the equation. 

Thus, Eq. (12-11) shows that compressive residual stress will allow a 

greater alternating stress for the same fatigue life. 

1 H. J. Gough, Proc. Inst. Mech. Engrs. (London), vol. 160, pp. 417-440, 1949; 
W. N. Findley and P. N. Mathur, Proc. Soc. Exptl. Stress Anal, vol. 14, no. 1, pp. 35- 
46, 1956. 

" Sines, op. cit. 



Sec. 12-13] 



Fatigue of Metals 327 



Prestress 




12-13. Overstressing and Understressing 

The conventional fatigue test subjects a specimen to a fixed stress 
amplitude until the specimen fails. Tests may be made at a number of 
different values of stress to determine the S-N curve, but each time the 
maximum stress is held constant until the test is completed. However, 
there are many practical applications where the cyclic stress does not 
remain constant, but instead there are periods when the stress is either 
above or below some average design stress level. Further, in other appli- 
cations complex loading conditions, 
such as are illustrated in Fig. 12-2c, 
are encountered. For these condi- 
tions it is difficult to arrive at an 
average stress level, and the load- 
ing cannot be assumed to vary 
sinusoidally. Special fatigue tests 
which apply a random load have 
been developed for these cases. ^ 

Overstressing is the process of 
testing a virgin specimen for some 
number of cycles less than that re- 
quired for failure, at a stress above 
the fatigue limit, and then subse- 
quently running the specimen to 

failure at another stress. The initial stress to which the specimen is sub- 
jected is called the prestress, while the final stress is the test stress. The 
ratio of the number of cycles of overstress at the prestress to the mean vir- 
gin fatigue life at this same stress is called the cycle ratio. The damage 
produced by a given cycle ratio of overstress is frequently evaluated by the 
reduction in fatigue life at the test stress. Thus, referring to Fig. 12-13, 
for a cycle ratio at the prestress of AB/ AC the damage at the test stress 
is EF/DF. EF represents the amount which the virgin fatigue life at 
the test stress has been reduced by the overstress. Extensive experience^ 
with this type of test has shown that a high prestress followed by a lower 
test stress causes a higher percentage of damage at the test stress than 
the reduction in life used up by the cycle ratio. On the other hand, for a 
given cycle ratio at a prestress lower than the test stress, the reduction in 
life at the test stress will usually be a lower percentage than the cycle 
ratio. The higher the value of the test stress, for a constant difference 
between prestress and test stress, the more nearly the damage at the test 
stress equals the cycle ratio at the prestress. 

1 A. K. Head, Proc. Inter. Conf. Fatigue of Metals, London, 1956, pp. 301-303. 

2 J. B. Kommers. Proc. ASTM, vol. 45, pp. 532-541, 1945. 



log /!/ 



Fig. 1 2-1 3. Test procedure for determin- 
ing fatigue damage produced by over- 
stressing. 



328 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 1 2 

Another way of measuring the damage due to overstressing is to sub- 
ject a number of specimens to a certain cycle ratio at the prestress and 
then determine the fatigue Hmit of the damaged specimens. Bennett^ 
has shown that increasing the cycle ratio at the prestress produces a 
greater decrease in the fatigue limit of damaged specimens, while similar 
experiments^ which employed a statistical determination of the fatigue 
limit showed a much greater reduction in the fatigue limit due to the 
overstressing. In line with this point, it is important to note that, 
because of the statistical nature of fatigue, it is very difficult to reach 
reliable conclusions by overstressing tests, unless statistical methods are 
used. 

If a specimen is tested below the fatigue limit, so that it remains 
unbroken after a long number of cycles, and if then it is tested at a 
higher stress, the specimen is said to have been under stressed. Under- 
stressing frequently results in either an increase in the fatigue limit or 
an increase in the number of cycles of stress to fracture over what would 
be expected for virgin specimens. It has frequently been considered 
that the improvements in fatigue properties due to understressing are 
due to localized strain hardening at sites of possible crack initiation. A 
different interpretation of the understressing effect has resulted from 
experiments on the statistical determination of the fatigue limit. ^ Speci- 
mens which did not fail during the determination of the fatigue limit 
showed greater than normal fatigue lives when retested at a higher stress. 
By means of statistical analysis it was possible to show that the observed 
lives at the higher stress were to be expected owing to the elimination of 
the weaker specimens during the prior testing below the fatigue limit. 
Thus, it was concluded that understressing was at least partly due to a 
statistical selectivity effect. 

If a specimen is tested without failure for a large number of cycles 
below the fatigue limit and the stress is increased in small increments 
after allowing a large number of cycles to occur at each stress level, it is 
found that the resulting fatigue limit may be as much as 50 per cent 
greater than the initial fatigue limit. This procedure is known as coaxing. 
An extensive investigation of coaxing"* showed a direct correlation between 
a strong coaxing effect and the ability for the material to undergo strain 
aging. Thus, mild steel and ingot iron show a strong coaxing effect, while 
brass, aluminum alloys, and heat-treated low-alloy steels show little 
improvement in properties from coaxing. 



1 J. A. Bennett, Proc. ASTM, vol. 46, pp. 693-714, 1946. 

2 G. E. Dieter, G. T. Home, and R. F. Mehl, NACA Tech. Note 3211, 1954. 

3 E. Epremian and R. F. Mehl, ASTM Spec. Tech. Publ. 137, 1952. 
' G. M. Sinclair, Proc. ASTM, vol. 52, pp. 743-758, 1952. 



Sec. 12-14] Fatigue of Metals 329 

12-14. EFfect of Metallursical Variables on Fatigue Properties 

The fatigue properties of metals appear to be quite structure-sensitive. 
However, at the present time there are only a limited number of ways in 
which the fatigue properties can be improved by metallurgical means. 
By far the greatest improvements in fatigue performance result from 
design changes which reduce stress concentrations and from the intelli- 
gent use of beneficial compressive residual stress, rather than from a 
change in material. Nevertheless, there are certain metallurgical fac- 
tors which must be considered to ensure the best fatigue performance 
from a particular metal or alloy. Fatigue tests designed to measure the 
effect of some metallurgical variable, such as special heat treatments, on 
fatigue performance are usually made with smooth, polished specimens 
under completely reversed stress conditions. It is usually assumed that 
any changes in fatigue properties due to metallurgical factors will also 
occur to about the same extent under more complex fatigue conditions, 
as with notched specimens under combined stresses. That this is not 
always the case is shown by the notch-sensitivity results discussed 
previously. 

Fatigue properties are frequently correlated with tensile properties. 
In general, the fatigue limit of cast and wrought steels is approximately 
50 per cent of the ultimate tensile strength. The ratio of the fatigue 
limit (or the fatigue strength at 10^ cycles) to the tensile strength is called 
the fatigue ratio. Several nonferrous metals such as nickel, copper, and 
magnesium have a fatigue ratio of about 0.35. While the use of corre- 
lations of this type is convenient, it should be clearly understood that 
these constant factors between fatigue limit and tensile strength are only 
approximations and hold only for the restricted condition of smooth, 
polished specimens which have been tested under zero mean stress at 
room temperature. For notched fatigue specimens the fatigue ratio for 
steel will be around 0.20 to 0.30. 

Several parallels can be drawn between the effect of certain metallurgi- 
cal variables on fatigue properties and the effect of these same variables 
on tensile properties. The effect of solid-solution alloying additions on 
the fatigue properties of iron^ and aluminum^ parallels nearly exactly 
their effect on the tensile properties. The fatigue strength of nonferrous 
metals^ and annealed steel increases with decreasing grain size. Grain 
size does not have an important influence on the unnotched fatigue 

1 E. Epremian and E. F. Nippes, Trans. ASM, vol. 40, pp. 870-896, 1948. 

2 J. W. Riches, O. D. Sherby, and J. E. Dorn, Trans. ASM, vol. 44, pp. 882-895, 
1952. 

3 G. M. Sinclair and W. J. Craig, Trans. ASM, vol. 44, pp. 929-948, 1952. 



330 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 12 



properties of heat-treated steels. Gensamer^ showed that the fatigue 
hmit of a eutectoid steel increased with decreasing isothermal-reaction 
temperature in the same fashion as did the yield strength and the tensile 
strength. However, the greater structure sensitivity of fatigue proper- 
ties, compared with tensile properties, is shown in tests comparing the 
fatigue limit of a plain-carbon eutectoid steel heat-treated to coarse 
pearlite and to spheroidite of the same tensile strength. ^ Even though 
the steel in the two structural conditions had the same tensile strength, 
the pearlitic structure resulted in a significantly lower fatigue limit due to 
the higher notch effects of the carbide lamellae in pearlite. 

In general, quenched and tempered microstructures result in the opti- 
mum fatigue properties in heat-treated low-alloy steels. However, at a 
hardness level above about Re 40 a bainitic structure produced by 
austempering results in better fatigue properties than a quenched and 
tempered structure with the same hardness.^ Electron micrographs indi- 
cate that the poor performance of the quenched and tempered structure 

150 



140 
130 



120 

'no 

100 
90 
80 
70 
60 
50 



40 



























/ 


'- *^^^. 


^•-^ '^^^ 


^•v." 








^ 




^ 




/ 


m 




\ 






^\ 


1 


\ 




J 


^^ 




D 




y 


i 


• - SAE 4063 
A - SAE 5150 
A - SAE 4052 
o - SAE 4140 
» - SAE 4340 




/ 
















e - 5^ 


i 


2340 





20 



30 



40 50 

Rockwell C hardness 



60 



Fig. 12-14. Fatigue limit of alloy steels as a function of Rockwell hardness. (M. F. 
Garwood, H. H. Zurburg, and M. A. Erickson, in ^^Interpretation of Tests and Correla- 
tion with Service," p. 12, American Society for Metals Metals Park, Ohio, 1951.) 



1 M. Gensamer, E. B. Pearsall, W. S. Pellini, and J. R. Low, Jr., Trans. ASM, 
vol. 30, pp. 983-1020, 1942. 

2 G. E. Dieter, R. F. Mehl, and G. T. Home, Trans. ASM, vol. 47, pp. 423-439, 
1955. 

3 F. Borik and R. D. Chapman, Trans. ASM, vol. 53, 1961. 



Sec. 12-14] 



Fatigue of Metah 



331 



i 


a 
















nnl ^^ 
















^\n*^ 


1 
















^v. ^ "~~~"-^ 














RO 


^*~^ X 


• ~" — " 










70 
60 








1 — 


X 


^ X 

^— 1 • \ 












o -S/IE 1340 












• - SAE 4042 














A - SAE 4340 


50 












D -SAE 5140 












X - AISI-TS SOB 40 
1 ■ 


40 



















100 



90 



80 70 60 50 40 

Percent martensite as quenched 



30 



20 



Fig. 12-15. Fatigue limit of heat-treated steel as a function of per cent martensite in 
as-quenched steel. {F. Borik, R. D. Chapman, and W. E. Jominy, Trans. ASM, 
vol. 50, p. 250, 1958.) 

is the result of the stress-concentration effects of the thin carbide films 
that are formed during the tempering of martensite. For quenched and 
tempered steels the fatigue limit increases with decreasing tempering 
temperature up to a hardness of Re -45 to Re 55, depending on the steel.' 
Figure 12-14 shows the results obtained for completely reversed stress 
tests on smooth specimens. The fatigue properties at high hardness levels 
are extremely sensitive to surface preparation, residual stresses, and 
inclusions. The presence of only a trace of decarburization on the sur- 
face may drastically reduce the fatigue properties. As is shown by Fig. 
12-15, only a small amount of nonmartensitic transformation products 
can cause an appreciable reduction in the fatigue limit.' The effects of 
slack quenching would be expected to be greater at higher hardness levels. 
The influence of small amounts of retained austenite on the fatigue 
properties of quenched and tempered steels has not been well established. 
The results, which are summarized in Fig. 12-14, indicate that below a 
tensile strength of about 200,000 psi the fatigue limits of quenched and 
tempered low-alloy steels of different chemical composition are about 
equivalent when the steels are tempered to the same tensile strength. 
This generalization holds for steels made by the open-hearth or electric- 
furnace processes and for fatigue properties determined in the longitudinal 



^ M. F. Garwood, H. H. Zurburg, and M. A. Erickson, "Interpretation of Tests 
and Correlation with Service," American Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1951. 

2 F. Borik, R. D. Chapman, and W. E. Jominy, Trans. ASM, vol. 50, pp. 242-257, 
1958. 



332 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 12 



direction of wrought products. However, tests have shown^ that the 
fatigue Hmit in the transverse direction of steel forgings may be only 
60 to 70 per cent of the longitudinal fatigue limit. It has been estab- 
lished- that practically all the fatigue failures in transverse specimens 
start at nonmetallic inclusions. Nearly complete elimination of inclu- 
sions by vacuum melting produces a considerable increase in the trans- 
verse fatigue limit (Table 12-3). The low transverse fatigue limit in 

Table 12-3 
Influence of Inclusions on Fatigue Limit of SAE 4340 Steelj 



Longitudinal fatigue limit, psi . 
Transverse fatigue limit, psi . . 
Ratio transverse/longitudinal. 
Hardness, Re 



Electric-furnace- 
melted 



116,000 
79,000 

0.68 
27 



Vacuum- 
melted 



139,000 
120,000 

0.86 
29 



t Determined in repeated-bending fatigue test {R = 0). 
Trans. ASM, vol. 46, pp. 1254-1269, 1954. 



Data from J. T. Ransom, 



steels containing inclusions is generally attributed to stress concentration 
at the inclusions, which can be quite high when an elongated inclusion 
stringer is oriented transverse to the principal tensile stress. However, 
the fact that nearly complete elimination of inclusions by vacuum melt- 
ing still results in appreciable anisotropy of the fatigue limit indicates 
that other factors may be important. Further investigations^ of this 
subject have shown that appreciable changes in the transverse fatigue 
limit which cannot be correlated with changes in the type, number, or 
size of inclusions are produced by different deoxidation practices. Trans- 
verse fatigue properties appear to be one of the most structure-sensitive 
^engineering properties. 



12-15. Effect of Temperature on Fatigue 

Low-temperature Fatigue 

Fatigue tests on metals at temperatures below room temperature 
^how that the fatigue strength increases with decreasing temperature. 
Although steels become more notch-sensitive in fatigue at low temper- 
atures, there is no evidence to indicate any sudden change in fatigue 
properties at temperatures below the ductile-to-brittle transition temper- 

1 J. T. Ransom and R. F. Mehl, Proc. ASTM, vol. 52, pp. 779-790, 1952. 

2 J. T. Ransom, Trans. ASM, vol. 46, pp. 1254-1269, 1954. 

3 G. E. Dieter, D. L. Macleary, and J. T. Ransom, Factors Affecting Ductility and 
Fatigue in Forgings, "Metallurgical Society Conferences," vol. 3, pp. 101-142, Inter- 
science Publishers, Inc., New York, 1959. 



Sec. 12-15] Fatigue of Metals 333 

atiire. The fact that fatigue strength exhibits a proportionately greater 
increase than tensile strength with decreasing temperature has been inter- 
preted as an indication that fatigue failure at room temperature is associ- 
ated with vacancy formation and condensation. 

High-temperature Fatigue 

In general, the fatigue strength of metals decreases with increasing 
temperature above room temperature. An exception is mild steel, which 
shows a maximum in fatigue strength at 400 to 600°F. The existence of 
a maximum in the tensile strength in this temperature range due to strain 
aging has been discussed previously. As the temperature is increased 
well above room temperature, creep will become important and at high 
temperatures (roughly at temperatures greater than half the melting 
point) it will be the principal cause of failure. The transition from 
fatigue failure to creep failure with increasing temperature will result in 
a change in the type of failure from the usual transcrystalline fatigue 
failure to the intercrystalline creep failure. At any given temperature 
the amount of creep will increase with increasing mean stress. 

Ferrous materials, which ordinarily exhibit a sharp fatigue limit in 
room-temperature tests, will no longer have a fatigue limit when tested 
at temperatures above approximately 800°F. Also, fatigue tests at high 
temperature will be dependent on the frequency of stress application. 
It is customary to report the total time to failure as well as the number 
of cycles to failure. 

In general, the higher the creep strength of a material, the higher its 
high-temperature fatigue strength. However, the metallurgical treat- 
ment which produces the best high-temperature fatigue properties does 
not necessarily result in the best creep or stress-rupture properties. This 
has been shown by Toolin and MocheP in high-temperature tests of a 
number of superalloys. Fine grain size results in better fatigue proper- 
ties at lower temperatures. As the test temperature is increased, the 
difference in fatigue properties between coarse and fine grain material 
decreases until at high temperatures, where creep predominates, coarse 
grain material has higher strength. In general, wrought alloys show 
somewhat superior fatigue resistance, while castings are often more 
resistant to creep. Procedures which are successful in reducing fatigue 
failures at room temperature may not be effective in high-temperature 
fatigue. For example, compressive residual stresses may be annealed out 
before the operating temperature is reached. 

Thermal Fatigue 

The stresses which produce fatigue failure at high temperature do not 
necessarily need to come from mechanical sources. Fatigue failure can 
1 P. R. Toolin and N. L. Mochel, Proc. ASTM, vol. 47, pp. 677-694, 1947. 



334 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 12 

be produced by fluctuating thermal stresses under conditions where no 
stresses are produced by mechanical causes. Thermal stresses result 
when the change in dimensions of a member as the result of a temper- 
ature change is prevented by some kind of constraint. For the simple 
case of a bar with fixed end supports, the thermal stress developed by a 
temperature change AT is 

a = aE AT (12-12) 

where a = linear thermal coefficient of expansion 

E — elastic modulus 
If failure occurs by one application of thermal stress, the condition is 
called thermal shock. However, if failure occurs after repeated appli- 
cations of thermal stress, of a lower magnitude, it is called thermal fatigue.^ 
Conditions for thermal-fatigue failure are frequently present in high- 
temperature equipment. Austenitic stainless steel is particularly sensi- 
tive to this phenomenon because of its low thermal conductivity and high 
thermal expansion. Extensive studies of thermal fatigue in this material 
have been reported.^ The tendency for thermal-fatigue failure appears 
related to the parameter a/k/Ea, where o-/ is the fatigue strength at the 
mean temperature and k is the thermal conductivity. A high value of 
this parameter indicates good resistance to thermal fatigue. An excellent 
review of the entire subject of high-temperature fatigue has been prepared 
by Allen and Forrest.^ 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Battelle Memorial Institute, "Prevention of Fatigue of Metals," John Wiley & Sons, 
Inc., New York, 1941. (Contains very complete bibliography up to 1941.) 

Cazaud, R. : "Fatigue of Metals," translated by A. J. Fenner, Chapman & Hall, Ltd., 
London, 1953. 

"The Fatigue of Metals," Institution of Metallurgists, London, 1955. 

Freudenthal, A. M. (ed.): "Fatigue in Aircraft Structures," Academic Press, Inc., 
New York, 1956. 

Grover, H. J., S. A. Gordon, and L. R. Jackson: "Fatigue of Metals and Structures," 
Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C., 1954. (Contains very com- 
plete compilation of fatigue data.) 

Pope, J. A. (ed.): "Metal Fatigue," Chapman & Hall, Ltd., London, 1959. 

Proceedings of the International Conference on Fatigue of Metals, London, 1956. 

Sines, G., and J. L. Waisman (eds.): "Metal Fatigue," McGraw-Hill Book Company, 
Inc., New York, 1959. 

Thompson, N., and N. J. Wadsworth: Metal Fatigue, Advances inPhys., vol. 7, no. 25, 
pp. 72-169, January, 1958. 

^ Failure of metals like uranium which have highly anisotropic thermal-expansion 
coefficients mnder repeated heating and cooling is also called thermal fatigue. 

2L. F. Coffin, Jr., Trans. ASME, vol. 76, pp. 931-950, 1954. 

" N. P. Allen and P. G. Forrest, Proc. Intern. Conf. Fatigue of Metals. London, 1956, 
pp. 327-340. 



Chapter 13 

CREEP AND STRESS RUPTURE 

13-1. The High-temperature Materials Problem 

In several previous chapters it has been mentioned that the strength 
of metals decreases with increasing temperature. Since the mobility of 
atoms increases rapidly with temperature, it can be appreciated that 
diffusion-controlled processes can have a very significant effect on high- 
temperature mechanical properties. High temperature will also result in 
greater mobility of dislocations by the mechanism of climb. The equi- 
librium concentration of vacancies likewise increases with temperature. 
New deformation mechanisms may come into play at elevated temper- 
atures. In some metals the slip system changes, or additional slip sys- 
tems are introduced with increasing temperature. Deformation at grain 
boundaries becomes an added possibility in the high-temperature defor- 
mation of metals. Another important factor to consider is the effect of 
prolonged exposure at elevated temperature on the metallurgical stability 
of metals and alloys. For example, cold-worked metals will recrystallize 
and undergo grain coarsening, while age-hardening alloys may overage 
and lose strength as the second-phase particles coarsen. Another impor- 
tant consideration is the interaction of the metal with its environment at 
high temperature. Catastrophic oxidation and intergranular penetration 
of oxide must be avoided. 

Thus, it should be apparent that the successful use of metals at 
high temperatures involves a number of problems. Greatly accelerated 
alloy-development programs have produced a number of materials with 
improved high-temperature properties, but the ever-increasing demands 
of modern technology require materials with even better high-temper- 
ature strength and oxidation resistance. For a long time the principal 
high-temperature applications were associated with steam power plants, 
oil refineries, and chemical plants. The operating temperature in equip- 
ment such as boilers, steam turbines, and cracking units seldom exceeded 
1000°F. With the introduction of the gas-turbine engine, requirements 
developed for materials to operate in critically stressed parts, like turbine 

335 



336 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 13 

buckets, at temperatures around 1500°F. The design of more powerful 
engines has pushed this limit to around 1800°F. Rocket engines and 
ballistic-missile nose cones present much greater problems, which can be 
met only by the most ingenious use of the available high-temperature 
materials and the development of still better ones. There is no question 
that the available materials of construction limit rapid advancement in 
high-temperature technology. 

An important characteristic of high-temperature strength is that it 
must always be considered with respect to some time scale. The tensile 
properties of most engineering metals at room temperature are independ- 
ent of time, for practical purposes. It makes little difference in the 
results if the loading rate of a tension test is such that it requires 2 hr or 
2 min to complete the test. Further, in room-temperature tests the 
anelastic behavior of the material is of little practical consequence. 
However, at elevated temperature the strength becomes very dependent 
on both strain rate and time of exposure. A number of metals under 
these conditions behave in many respects like viscoelastic materials. A 
metal subjected to a constant tensile load at an elevated temperature will 
creep and undergo a time-dependent increase in length. 

The tests which are used to measure elevated-temperature strength 
must be selected on the basis of the time scale of the service which the 
material must withstand. Thus, an elevated-temperature tension test 
can provide useful information about the high-temperature performance 
of a short-lived item, such as a rocket engine or missile nose cone, but it 
will give only the most meager information about the high-temperature 
performance of a steam pipeline which is required to withstand 100,000 hr 
of elevated-temperature service. Therefore, special tests are required to 
evaluate the performance of materials in different kinds of high-temper- 
ature service. The creej) test measures the dimensional changes which 
occur from elevated-temperature exposure, while the stress-rupture test 
measures the effect of temperature on the long-time load-bearing charac- 
teristics. Other tests may be used to measure special properties such 
as thermal-shock resistance and stress relaxation. These high-temper- 
ature tests will be discussed in this chapter from two points of view. 
The engineering significance of the information obtained from the tests 
will be discussed, and information which is leading to a better under- 
standing of the mechanism of high-temperature deformation will be 
considered. 

13-2. The Creep Curve 

The progressive deformation of a material at constant stress is called 
creep. The simplest type of creep deformation is viscous flow. A mate- 



Sec. 13-2] 



Creep and Stress Rupture 337 



rial is said to experience pure viscous flow if the rate of shear strain is 
proportional to the applied shearing stress. 



^-/« 



(13-1) 



When the proportionality between these two factors can be expressed 
by a simple constant, the material is said to show Newtonian viscosity. 



T = V 



dy 
It 



(13-2) 



where ?? is the coefficient of viscosity. Most liquids obey Newton's law 
of viscosity, but it is only partially followed by metals. 



Primary creep 
-I H<- 



Secondary creep 

-n- 



Tertlory creep 



y Fracture 




Time t 

Fig. 1 3-1 . Typical creep curve showing the three stages of creep. Curve A, constant- 
load test; curve B, constant-stress test. 



To determine the engineering creep curve of a metal, a constant load is 
applied to a tensile specimen maintained at a constant temperature, and 
the strain (extension) of the specimen is determined as a function of time. 
Although the measurement of creep resistance is quite simple in principle, 
in practice it requires considerable laboratory equipment. ^-^ The elapsed 
time of such tests may extend to several months, while some tests have 
been run for more than 10 years. The general procedures for creep test- 
ing are covered in ASTM Specification E139-58T. 

Curve A in Fig. 13-1 illustrates the idealized shape of a creep curve. 
The slope of this curve (de/dt or e) is referred to as the creep rate. Follow- 

^ Creep and Creep Rupture Tests, ASM INIetals Handbook, Supplement, August, 
1955, Metal Progr., vol. 68, no. 2A, pp. 175-184, Aug. 15, 1955. 

U. A. Fellows, E. Cook, and H. S. Avery, Trans. AIME, vol. 150, p. 358, 1942. 



338 



Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 1 3 



ing an initial rapid elongation of the specimen, eo, the creep rate decreases 
with time, then reaches essentially a steady state in which the creep rate 
changes little with time, and finally the creep rate increases rapidly with 
time until fracture occurs. Thus, it is natural to discuss the creep curve 
in terms of its three stages. It should be noted, however, that the degree 
to which these three stages are readily distinguishable depends strongly 
on the applied stress and temperature. 

In making an engineering creep test, it is usual practice to maintain 
the load constant throughout the test. > Thus, as the specimen elongates 
and decreases in cross-sectional area, the axial stress increases. The 
initial stress which was applied to the specimen is usually the reported 
value of stress. Methods of compensating for the change in dimensions 
of the specimen so as to carry out the creep test under constant-stress 



Creep curve 



Sudden strain 



Transient creep 



Viscous creep 




+ 



+ 



Time Time Time Time 

Fig. 1 3-2. Andrade's analysis of the competing processes which determine the creep 



conditions have been developed. ^'^ When constant-stress tests are made, 
it is frequently found that no region of accelerated creep rate occurs 
(region III, Fig. 13-1) and a creep curve similar to B in Fig. 13-1 is 
obtained. Accelerated creep is found, however, in constant-stress tests 
when metallurgical changes occur in the metal. Curve B should be con- 
sidered representative of the basic creep curve for a metal. 

Andrade's pioneer work on creep^ has had considerable influence on 
the thinking on this subject. He considers that the constant-stress creep 
curve represents the superposition of two separate creep processes which 
occur after the sudden strain which results from applying the load. The 
first component is a transient creep, which has a decreasing creep rate 
with time. Added to this is a constant-rate creep process called viscous 
creep. The superposition of these creep processes is illustrated in Fig. 
13-2. Andrade found that the creep curve could be represented by the 

1 E. N. da C. Andrade and B. Chalmers, Proc. Roij Soc. (London), vol. 138A, p. 348, 
1932. 

2 R. L. Fullman, R. P. Carreker, and J. C. Fisher, Traris. AIME, vol. 3 97, pp. 657- 
659, 1953. 

^ E. N. da C. Andrade, Proc. Roy. Soc. (London), vol. 90A, pp. 329-342, 1914; 
"Creep and Recovery," pp. 176-198, American Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 
1957. 



Sec. 1 3-2] Creep and Stress Rupture 339 

following empirical equation, 

L = Lo(l + 131''^) exp Kt (13-3) 

where L = length of specimen at time t 
Lo, /3, K = empirically determined constants 

The constant Lo approximates the length of the specimen when the sudden 
strain produced by the application of the load has ceased. The transient 
creep is represented by the constant /3. Thus, when k = 0, Eq. (13-3) 
yields a creep rate which vanishes at long times. 

L = Io(l + 0t''^) 

■ "^^ = yiU&t-^'^ (13-4) 



dt 



When /3 = 0, 



L 

y- = exp Kt 

dL 

dt 



kLq exp Kt = kL 



The exponent k therefore represents an extension, per unit length, which 
proceeds at a constant rate. It represents the viscous component of 
creep. Strictly speaking, k represents quasi-viscous flow because the 
rate of change of length is not proportional to stress as required by Eq. 
(13-2). Sometimes transient creep is referred to as /3 flow, and viscous 
(steady-state) creep is referred to as k flow in keeping with Andrade's 
analysis of the creep curve. Andrade's equation has been verified for 
conditions extending up to several hundred hours, which result in total 
extensions in excess of 1 per cent. Modifications of these equations will 
be considered in another section of this chapter. 

The various stages of the creep curve shown in Fig. 13-1 require fur- 
ther explanation. It is generally considered in this country that the 
creep curve has three stages. In British terminology the instantaneous 
strain designated by eo in Fig. 13-1 is often called the first stage of creep, 
so that with this nomenclature the creep curve is considered to have four 
stages. The strain represented by eo occurs practically instantaneously 
on the application of the load. Even though the applied stress is below 
the yield stress, not all the instantaneous strain is elastic. Most of this 
strain is instantly recoverable upon the release of the load (elastic), while 
part is recoverable with time (anelastic), and the rest is nonrecoverable 
(plastic). Although the instantaneous strain is not really creep, it is 
important because it may constitute a considerable fraction of the allow- 
able total strain in machine parts. Sometimes the instantaneous strain 



340 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 13 




is subtracted from the total strain in the creep specimen to give the strain 
due only to creep. This type of creep curve starts at the origin of 
coordinates. 

The first stage of creep, known as primary creep, represents a region of 
decreasing creep rate. Primary creep is a period of predominantly tran- 
sient creep in which the creep resistance of the material increases by 
virtue of its own deformation. For low temperatures and stresses, as in 
the creep of lead at room temperature, primary creep is the predominant 
creep process. The second stage of creep, known also as secondary creep, 
is a period of nearly constant creep rate which results from a balance 

between the competing processes 
of strain hardening and recovery. 
For this reason, secondary creep is 
usually referred to as steady-state 
creep. The average value of the 
creep rate during secondary creep 
is called the minimum creep rate. 
Third-stage or tertiary creep mainly 
occurs in constant-load creep tests 
at high stresses at high tempera- 
tures. The reasons for the acceler- 
ated creep rate which leads to rapid 
failure are not well known. It is 
unlikely that tertiary creep is due 
solely to necking of the specimen, 
since many materials fail in creep 
at strains which are too small to produce necking. Tertiary creep is more 
probably the result of structural changes occurring in the metal. Evi- 
dence has been found for void formation and extensive crack formation 
during this stage. 

Figure 13-3 shows the effect of applied stress on the creep curve at 
constant temperature. It is apparent that a creep curve with three well- 
defined stages will be found for only certain combinations of stress and 
temperature. A similar family of curves is obtained for creep at con- 
stant stress for different temperatures. The higher the temperature, the 
greater t-he creep rate. The basic difference for this case would be that 
all the curves would originate from the same point on the strain axis. 

The minimum creep rate is the most important design parameter 
derived from the creep curve. Two standards of this parameter are 
commonly used in this country, (1) the stress to produce a creep rate of 
0.0001 per cent/hr or 1 per cent/10,000 hr, or (2) the stress for a creep 
rate of 0.00001 per cent/hr or 1 per cent/ 100,000 hr (about 11 ^ years). 
The first criterion is more typical of the requirements for jet-engine alloys, 
while the last criterion is used for steam turbines and similar equipment. 



Time, hr 



Fig. 13-3. Schematic representation of 
effect of stress on creep curves at con- 
stant temperature. 



13-3] 



Creep and Stress Rupture 341 



A log-log plot of stress vs. minimum creep rate frequently results in a 
straight line. This type of plot is very useful for design purposes, and 
its use will be discussed more fully in a later part of this chapter. 



13-3. The Stress-rupture Test 

The stress-rupture test is basically similar to the creep test except that 
the test is always carried out to the failure of the material. Higher loads 
are used with the stress-rupture test than in a creep test, and therefore 
the creep rates are higher. Ordinarily the creep test is carried out at 
relatively low stresses so as to avoid tertiary creep. Emphasis in the 
creep test is on precision determination of strain, particularly as to the 
determination of the minimum creep rate. Creep tests are frequently 
conducted for periods of 2,000 hr and often to 10,000 hr. In the creep 
test the total strain is often less than 0.5 per cent, while in the stress- 
rupture test the total strain may be around 50 per cent. Thus, simpler 
strain-measuring devices, such as dial gages, can be used. Stress-rupture 
equipment is simpler to build, maintain, and operate than creep-testing 
equipment, and therefore it lends itself more readily to multiple testing 
units. The higher stresses and 
creep rates of the stress-rupture test 
cause structural changes to occur in 
metals at shorter times than would 
be observed ordinarily in the creep 
test, and therefore stress-rupture 
tests can usually be terminated in 
1,000 hr. These factors have con- 
tributed to the increased use of the 
stress-rupture test. It is partic- 
ularly well suited to determin- 
ing the relative high-temperature 
strength of new alloys for jet-engine 
applications. Further, for appli- 
cations where creep deformation can be tolerated but fracture must be 
prevented, it has direct application in design. 

The basic information obtained from the stress-rupture test is the time 
to cause failure at a given nominal stress for a constant temperature. 
The elongation and reduction of area at fracture are also determined. 
If the test is of suitable duration, it is customary to make elongation 
measurements as a function of time and from this to determine the mini- 
mum creep rate. The stress is plotted against the rupture time on a 
log-log scale (Fig. 13-4). A straight line will usually be obtained for 
each test temperature. Changes in the slope of the stress-rupture line 
are due to structural changes occurring in the material, e.g., changes from 




0.001 001 



,000 



Rupture time, tir 



Fig. 1 3-4. Method of plotting stress- 
rupture data (schematic). 



342 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 1 3 

transgranular to intergraniilar fracture, oxidation, recrystallization and 
grain growth, or other structural changes such as spheroidization, graphi- 
tization, or sigma-phase formation. It is important to know about the 
existence of such instabilities, since serious errors in extrapolation of the 
data to longer times can result if they are not detected. 

1 3-4. Deformation at Elevated Temperature 

The principal deformation processes at elevated temperature are slip, 
subgrain formation, and grain-boundary sHding. High-temperature 
deformation is characterized by extreme inhomogeneity. Measure- 
ments of local creep elongation^ at various locations in a creep specimen 
have shown that the local strain undergoes many periodic changes with 
time that are not recorded in the changes in strain of the total gage 
length of the specimen. In large-grained specimens, local regions may 
undergo lattice rotations which produce areas of misorientation. 

A number of secondary deformation processes have been observed in 
metals at elevated temperature. These include multiple slip, the for- 
mation of extremely coarse slip bands, kink bands, fold formation at 
grain boundaries, and grain-boundary migration. Many of the defor- 
mation studies at elevated temperature have been made with large-grain- 
size sheet specimens of aluminum. (Aluminum is favored for this type 
of study because its thin oxide skin eliminates problems from oxidation.) 
Studies have also been made of creep deformation in iron, magnesium, 
and lead. It is important to remember that all the studies of high-tem- 
perature deformation have been made under conditions which give a 
creep rate of several per cent in 100 or 1,000 hr, while for many engi- 
neering applications a creep rate of less than 1 per cent in 100,000 hr is 
required. Because the deformation processes which occur at elevated 
temperature depend on the rate of strain as well as the temperature, it is 
not always possible to extrapolate the results obtained for high strain- 
rate conditions to conditions of greater practical interest. Much of the 
work on deformation processes during creep has been reviewed by SuUy^ 
and Grant and Chaudhuri.^ 

Deformation hy Slip 

New slip systems may become operative when metals are deformed at 
elevated temperature. Slip occurs in aluminum-* along the { lU } , { 100} , 
or {211} planes above 500°F. Zinc shps on the nonbasal {1010} planes 

1 H. C. Chang and N. J. Grant, Trans. AIME, vol. 197, p. 1175, 1953. 

2 A. H. Sully, "Progress in Metal Physics," vol. 6, pp. 135-180, Pergamon Press, 
Ltd., London, 1956. 

3 N. J. Grant and A. R. Chaudhuri, Creep and Fracture, in "Creep and Recovery," 
pp. 284-343, American Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1957. 

* I. S. Servi. J. T. Norton, and N. J. Grant, Trans. AIME, vol. 194, p. 965, 1952. 



Sec. 1 3-4] Creep and Stress Rupture 343 

in the (1210) directions above 570°F, and there is evidence of nonbasal 
high-temperature slip in magnesium. ^ The slip bands produced at high 
temperature do not generally resemble the straight slip lines which are 
usually found after room-temperature deformation. Although high-tem- 
perature slip may start initially as fairly uniformly spaced slip bands, as 
deformation proceeds there is a tendency for further shear to be restricted 
to a few of the slip bands. The tendency for cross slip and the formation 
of deformation bands increases with temperature. Fine slip lines, which 
are difficult to resolve with the optical microscope, have been found 
between the coarse slip bands in creep specimens of aluminum.^ These 
represent the traces of slip planes on which only very small amounts of 
shear have occurred. The significance of fine slip to creep deformation 
will be discussed later. 

In one of the first investigations of creep-deformation processes, Hanson 
and Wheeler^ established that the slip-band spacing increases with either 
an increase in temperature or a decrease in stress. Subsequent work 
on aluminum and its alloys^' ^ showed that the slip-band spacing was 
inversely proportional to the applied stress but independent of temper- 
ature. These observations may be interpreted in the following way: 
If aluminum with a certain initial grain size is tested at a certain stress, 
there will be a certain characteristic slip-band spacing. If the grain size 
is smaller than the slip-band spacing, the slip bands will not be visible 
in the specimen after deformation. Deformation of the grains will occur 
by shear along the grain boundaries and by the breakup of the grains into 
"cells," or subgrains.^ Deformation at high temperatures and/or low 
strain rates are conditions for which it is difficult to detect slip lines but 
for which there is abundant evidence of grain-boundary deformation. 
This condition has often been called "slipless flow." 

Complex deformation processes occur in the vicinity of the grain 
boundaries. While grain boundaries restrict deformation at high tem- 
perature to a lesser extent than at room temperature, they still exert a 
restraining influence on deformation. 

Suhgrain Formation 

Creep deformation is quite inhomogeneous, so that there are many 
opportunities for lattice bending to occur. Kink bands, deformation 
bands, and local bending near grain boundaries are known to occur. 

1 A. R. Chaudhuri, H. C. Chang, and N. J. Grant, Trans. AIME, vol. 203, p. 682, 
1955. 

2 D. McLean, J. Inst. Metals, vol. 81, p. 133, 1952-1953. 

3 D. Hanson and M. A. Wheeler, J. Inst. Metals, vol. 55, p. 229, 1931. 
^ I. S. Servi and N. J. Grant, Trans. .4 /il/E, vol. 191, p. 917, 1951. 

6 G. D. Gemmell and N. J. Grant, Trans. AIME, vol. 209, pp. 417-423, 1957. 
« W. A. Wood, G. R. Wilms, and W. A. Rachinger, J. Inst. Metals, vol. 79, p. 159, 
1951. 



344 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 13 

Polygoiiization can take place concurrently with lattice bending because 
dislocation climb can occur readily at high temperature (see Sec. 6-10). 
The formation of cells, or subgrains, as creep progresses has been observed 
by means of X rays and metallographic techniques. The size of the sub- 
grains depends on the stress and the temperature. Large subgrains, or 
cells, are produced by high temperature and a low stress or creep rate. 
The decreasing creep rate found during primary creep is the result of the 
formation of more and more subgrains as creep continues. The increased 
number of low-angle boundaries provides barriers to dislocation move- 
ment and results in a decrease in creep strain. 

Grain-boundary Deformation 

It has already been shown in Sec. 8-5 that the grain-boundary relax- 
ation which is measured by internal friction at elevated temperature 
indicates that the grain boundaries have a certain viscous behavior under 
these conditions. Therefore, it is not surprising that the grain boundaries 
behave in a manner to indicate considerable mobility when creep is pro- 
duced at high temperature. The main grain-boundary processes which 
are observed in high-temperature creep are grain-boundary sliding, grain- 
boundary migration, and fold formation. 

Grain-boundary sliding is a shear process which occurs in the direction 
of the grain boundary. It is promoted by increasing the temperature 
and/or decreasing the strain rate. The question whether the sliding 
occurs along the grain boundary ^ as a bulk movement of the two grains 
or in a softened area in each grain adjacent to the grain boundary ^ has 
not been answered. Grain-boundary shearing occurs discontinuously in 
time, and the amount of shear displacement is not uniform along the 
grain boundary. Although the exact mechanism is not known, it is clear 
that grain-boundary sliding is not due to simple viscous sliding of one 
grain past another because it is preceded by appreciable amounts of 
plastic flow in adjacent crystals. 

Grain-boundary migration is a motion of the grain boundary in a 
direction which is inclined to the grain boundary. It may be considered 
to be stress-induced grain growth. Grain-boundary migration is a creep 
recovery process which is important because it allows the distorted mate- 
rial adjacent to the grain boundary to undergo further deformation. The 
wavy grain boundaries which are frequently observed during high-tem- 
perature creep are a result of inhomogeneous grain-boundary deformation 
and grain-boundary migration. 

For grain-boundary deformation to occur without producing cracks 
at the grain boundaries, it is necessary to achieve continuity of strain 

' H. C. Chang and N. J. Grant, Trans. AIMS, vol. 206, p. 169, 1956. 

2 F. N. Rhines, W. E. Bond, and M. A. Kissel, Trans. ASM, vol. 48, p. 919, 1956. 




Sec. 1 3-5] Creep and Stress Rupture 345 

along the grain boundary. A common method of accommodating grain- 
boundary strain at high temperature is by the formation of folds at the 
end of a grain boundary. ^ Figure 13-5 shows a sketch of a fold. 

The relative importance of slip and grain-boundary displacement to 
the total creep deformation has been investigated by McLean- for alumi- 
num at 200°C. At this relatively low tem- 
perature he has shown that only a small 
fraction of the total deformation is due to 
grain-boundary displacement, about half the 
total deformation is due to slip which is 
readily attributed to coarse slip bands, while 
the remainder of the total deformation can- 
not be attributed to any microscopic defor- 
mation mechanism. McLean attributes this 
"missing creep" to deformation by fine slip, 
which is very difficult to detect with the I 

microscope. It is believed that deformation 

by fine slip can explain the observations Fig. 13-5. Fold formation at a 
of earlier workers that creep deformation ^^P^^ P^^'^t (schematic). 
occurs without slip (slipless flow). Greater 

contribution to the total deformation from grain-boundary displacement 
would be expected at higher temperatures and lower stresses. 

1 3-5. Fracture at Elevated Temperature 

It has been known since the early work of Rosenhain and Ewen' that 
metals undergo a transition from transgranular fracture to intergranular 
fracture as the temperature is increased. When transgranular fracture 
occurs, the slip planes are weaker than the grain boundaries, while for 
intergranular fracture the grain boundary is the weaker component. 
Jeffries'' introduced the concept of the equicohesive temperature (EOT), 
which was defined as that temperature at which the grains and grain 
boundaries have equal strength (Fig. 13-6a). Like the recrystallization 
temperature, the ECT is not a fixed one. In addition to the effect of 
stress and temperature on the ECT, the strain rate has an important 
influence. Figure 13-66 shows that decreasing the strain rate lowers the 
ECT and therefore increases the tendency for intergranular fracture. 
The effect of strain rate on the strength-temperature relationship is 
believed to be much larger for the grain-boundary strength than for 

1 H. C. Chang and N. J. Grant, Trans. AIME, vol. 194, p. 619, 1952. 

2 D. McLean, J. Inst. Metals, vol. 80, p. 507, 1951-1952. 

3 W. Rosenhain and D. Ewen, J. Inst. Metals, vol. 10, p. 119, 1913. 
♦Z. Jeffries, Trans. AIME, vol. 60, pp. 474-576, 1919. 



346 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 13 



the strength of the grains. Since the amount of grain-boundary area 
decreases with increasing grain size, a material with a large grain size 

will have higher strength above the 



Grain boundary 




ECT 

Temperature 

[a] 





w ^Low strain rate 

■<^^ y^High strain rate 


t 


-^ 


^>^^r^~-^^^v. 


U' 




\ — * 


f*~~~--— ^ 


n) 




\ 


"x^ ^ ' ^^ 


CO 




\ 


\ 
\ 



ECT, ECTg 
Temperature — ^ 

Grain boundary 
Grain 



Range 
of ECT 



Pure metal 



Temperature — ^ 
(f) 

Fig. 1 3-6. The equicohesive temperature. 
(After N. J. Grant, in " Utilization of Heat 
Resistant Alloys," American Society for 
Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1954.) 



ECT than a fine grain material. 
Below the ECT the reverse is true. 
For metals and alloys of commercial 
purity the ECT will occur within a 
fairly sharp temperature interval. 
However, for high-purity material 
there is a wide range of temperature 
where the strengths of the grains 
and the grain boundaries are not 




Fig. 1 3-7. Schematic drawings of the way 
intergranular cracks form owing to grain- 
boundary sliding. (H. C. Chang and 
N. J. Grant, Trans. AIME, vol. 206, 
p. 545, 1956.) 



very different^ (Fig. 13-6c) so that transgranular fracture can occur up 
to rather high temperatures. 

Under conditions where grain boundaries experience considerable 
mobility, we have the situation of a thin, plastically weak region 
embedded between two relatively strong matrix grains. This is a situ- 
ation that is conducive to grain-boundary failure. While a number of 

' Servi and Grant, op. cit., p. 909. 



Sec. 1 3-6] Creep and Stress Rupture 347 

reasonable models for grain-boundary fracture have been suggested, none 
are capable of predicting all the details of grain-boundary fracture. 

Two types of intergranular fracture have been observed under creep 
conditions. Under conditions where grain-boundary sliding can occur, 
cracks may be initiated at triple points where three grain boundaries 
meet on a plane of polish. This type of grain-boundary failure is preva- 
lent for high stresses, where the total life is fairly short. Several methods 
by which cracks form' as the result of grain-boundary sliding are shown 
schematically in Fig. 13-7. Zener- has shown that large tensile stresses 
should be developed at a triple point due to shear stresses acting along 
the grain boundaries. When grain-boundary migration and fold forma- 
tion can occur, the tendency for grain-boundary fracture is diminished. 
Grain-boundary migration displaces the strained grain boundary to a 
new unstrained region of the crystal, while the formation of folds per- 
mits the relief of stress concentration at grain corners by plastic defor- 
mation within the grains. 

The second type of intergranular fracture is characterized by the 
formation of voids at grain boundaries, particularly those which are 
perpendicular to the tensile stress. The voids grow and coalesce into 
grain-boundary cracks. This type of fracture is most prevalent when 
low stresses result in failure in relatively long times. At least two 
mechanisms have been suggested for this type of fracture. One mecha- 
nism is based on the idea that the voids are formed by the condensation 
of vacancies and grow by the diffusion of vacancies. Ballufh and Seigle* 
have advanced a theory for the growth of voids based on the ideas used 
to explain the sintering of metals. On the other hand, there are experi- 
ments" which show that grain-boundary voids are not formed unless there 
is grain-boundary sliding. It is uncertain, at present, whether voids are 
initiated at grain boundaries by a process of vacancy condensation or as 
the result of localized plastic yielding. 

1 3-6. Theories of Low-temperature Creep 

Creep is possible only because obstacles to deformation can be overcome 
by the combined action of thermal fluctuations and stress. Diffusion- 
controlled processes are important chiefly at temperatures greater than 
about one-half the melting point. At lower temperatures recovery proc- 

1 H. C. Chang and N. J. Grant, Trans. AIME, vol. 206, pp. 544-550, 1956. 

' C. Zener, Micromechanism of Fracture, in "Fracturing of Metals," p. 3, American 
Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1948. 

■" R. W. Balluffi and L. L. Seigle, Ada Met., vol. 5, p. 449, 1957. 

'C. W. Chen and E. S. Machlin, Trans. AIME, vol. 209, pp. 829-835, 1957; J. 
Intrater and E. S. MachHn, Acta Met., vol. 7, p. 140, 1959. 



348 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 1 3 

esses which are not dependent on diffusion, such as cross slip, play impor- 
tant roles in the creep process. High-temperature creep is predominantly 
steady-state or viscous creep, while below Tml'^ transient, or primary, 
creep predominates. 

Andrade's equation for describing transient and steady-state creep was 
discussed in Sec. 13-2. An alternative general equation for the time laws 
of creep was suggested by Cottrell.^ 

e = At-''' ' (13-6) 

where A and n' are empirical constants. Different types of creep behav- 
ior are described by Eq. (13-6) depending upon the value of n' . If n' = 0, 
the creep rate is constant and Eq. (13-6) represents steady-state creep. 
When n' = 1, Eq. (13-6) becomes 

e = a In f (13-7) 

where a is a constant. This is the logarithmic creep law found at low 
temperatures. 2 When n' = ^, Eq. (13-6) becomes Andrade's equation 
for transient creep, 

e = I3t'^^ (13-8) 

Logarithmic creep occurs at low temperatures and low stresses, where 
recovery cannot occur. It is believed to be a true exhaustion process in 
which the rate-determining step is the activation energy to move a dis- 
location. On the initial application of stress, the dislocations with the 
lowest activation energy move first to produce the initial creep strain. 
As these easy-to-move dislocations are exhausted, creep can continue only 
by the movement of dislocations of higher activation energy. Therefore, 
the activation energy for the process continuously increases, and the creep 
rate decreases. Theoretical treatments of exhaustion creep that result in 
a logarithmic equation have been proposed by Mott and Nabarro* and 
Cottrell.4 

Low-temperature logarithmic creep obeys a mechanical equation of 
state; i.e., the rate of strain at a given time depends only on the instan- 
taneous values of stress and strain and not on the previous strain history. 
However, creep at higher temperatures is strongly dependent on prior 
strain and thermal history and hence does not follow a mechanical equa- 
tion of state. 

An exhaustion theory does not adequately describe the behavior during 

1 A. H. Cottrell, /. Mech. and Phys. Solids, vol. 1, pp. 53-63, 1952. 

2 Logarithmic creep has been observed for copper below 200°K. [O. H. Wyatt, Proc. 
Phys. Soc. (London), vol. 66B, p. 495, 1953]. 

5 N. F. Mott and F. R. N. Nabarro, "Report on Strength of Solids," p. 1, Physical 
Society, London, 1948. 
^ Cottrell, op. cit. 



Sec. 1 3-7] Creep and Stress Rupture 349 

transient creep. The decreasing creep rate during transient creep arises 
from the increasing dislocation density and the formation of low-angle 
boundaries. The recovery mechanisms operating during transient creep 
are not well established. Analysis of existing data^ indicates that the 
escape of screw dislocations from pile-ups by cross slip may be the chief 
recovery mechanism in fee metals. 

1 3-7. Theories of Hish-temperaturc Creep 

Steady-state, or secondary, creep predominates at temperatures above 
about T'm/2. Although there is some question whether a true steady- 
state condition is achieved for all combinations of stress and temperature, 
there is ample experimental evidence to indicate that approximate steady- 
state conditions are achieved After a short period of testing in the high- 
temperature region. Steady-state creep arises because of a balance 
between strain hardening and recovery. The effects of strain hardening 
are recovered by the escape of screw dislocations from pile-ups by cross 
slip and the escape of edge dislocations by climb. Since dislocation 
climb has a higher activation energy than cross slip, it will be the rate- 
controlling step in steady-state creep. 

Orowan- first suggested that steady-state creep could be treated as a 
balance between strain hardening and recovery. If is the slope of the 
stress-strain curve at the applied stress a and r = da/dt is the rate of 
recovery of the flow stress on annealing, then the steady-state condition 
requires that the flow stress must remain constant. 

d<r = ^dt-\-^de = (13-9) 

ot oe 

, = , = _|fZ|' = r (13-10) 

0(T/oe <p 

where k is the steady-state creep rate (k flow) and r and ^ are defined 
above. Cottrell and Aytekin^ have shown that the thermally activated 
process of recovery can be expressed by 

da —{H — qa) /iQ 1 1\ 

r= -^ = Cexp ^ (13-11) 

where H = an activation energy 

q = an activation volume related to atomic stress concentration 

C = a constant 

k = Boltzmann's constant 

1 G. Schoeck, Theory of Creep, in "Creep and Recovery," American Society of 
Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1957. 

2 E. Orowan, J. West Scot. Iron Steel Inst., vol. 54, pp. 45-96, 1947. 

3 A. H. Cottrell and V. Aytekin, J. Inst. Metals, vol. 77, p. 389, 1950. 



350 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 1 3 

Substituting Eq. (13-11) into Eq. (13-10) gives an equation for the steady- 
state creep rate. 

. C -(H - qa) .^_^, 

^ = ^"^P kf (l-^-l^) 

Theories of steady-state creep based on Eyring's chemical theory of 
reaction rates were at one time very prominent in the thinking on this 
subject. i'^ According to this concept, creep resulted from the shear of 
"flow units" past each other through the periodic potential field of the 
crystal lattice. The metal was assumed to behave like a viscous mate- 
rial, and for creep to occur the flow unit had to acquire sufficient energy 
to surmount the potential barrier of the activated state. The theory 
predicted a steady-state creep rate of the form 

€ = C exp -j^ sinh ^ (13-13) 

where AF is the free energy of activation and 5 is a constant describing 
the size of the flow unit. The flow units were not defined in terms of 
crystal structure, so that this theory had little physical basis. However, 
it was an important advance in creep theory because it emphasized that 
creep was a thermally activated process. 

A relationship very similar to Eq. (13-13) has been used by a number 
of investigators for describing steady-state creep data of annealed metals 
in terms of applied stress and temperature.^ 

e = ^oexp-^ sinh|^ (13-14) 

The parameters Ao, H, and q are independent of a, and only q varies sig- 
nificantly with temperature. If qa/kT is greater than 2, the above 
equation simplifies to 

e = HAo exp — -^^^^^ (13-15) 

Equation (13-15) implies the existence of a linear relationship between 
log e and (T. A linear relationship is also often obtained when log e is 
plotted against logo-. This is a conventional method of plotting engi- 
neering creep data. The corresponding equation 

e = Ba-' (13-16) 

is often used in the engineering analysis of the creep of structures and 
machine elements. 

1 W. Kauzmann, Trans. AIME, vol. 143, pp. 57-83, 1941. 

"^ S. Dushman, L. W. Dunbar, and H. Huthsteiner, /. Appl. Phys., vol. 15, p. 108, 
1944. 

3 P. Feltham and J. D. Meakin, Acta Mel., vol. 7, pp. 614-627, 1959. 



)ec. 



13-7] 



Creep and Stress Rupture 351 



Dorn^'^ has made valuable contributions to the knowledge of high- 
temperature creep by putting the reaction-rate theory of creep on a 
better physical basis. In his creep experiments on high-purity poly- 
crystalline aluminum, careful attention has been given to changes in 
lattice distortion and subgrain formation during the creep test. It has 

" 0.60 



0.50 

0.40 

0.30 

0.20 

0.10 
t 






Pure aluminum (99.987%) 
Creep under constant stress of 3,000 psi 







4x10"'^ 



e^te-^"/RT, hr 



Fig. 13-8. Creep strain vs. = t %x^ {—l^H /RT). {J. E. Dorn, in "Creep and 
Recovery," American Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1957.) 



been found that creep can be correlated in terms of a temperature- 
compensated time parameter 6. 



= t exp 



-AH, 
RT 



(13-17) 



where t = time of creep exposure 
Ai/c = activation energy for creep 
R = universal gas constant* 
T = absolute temperature 
For constant load or stress conditions, the total creep strain is a simple 
function of d. 

e = f(d,ac) o'c = constant (13-18) 

Figure 13-8 shows a typical correlation between e and d for creep data 
obtained at several temperatures. An important characteristic of this 

' J. E. Dorn, The Spectrum of Activation Energies for Creep, in "Creep and Recov- 
ery," pp. 255-283, American Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1957. 

2 J. E. Dorn, /. Mech. and Phys. Solids, vol. 3, p. 85, 1954. 

^ Boltzmann's constant A; and the gas constant R are related through the equation 
R = kN, where A' is Avogadro's number. 



352 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 13 

correlation is that equivalent structure, as determined by metallography 
and X rays, is obtained for the same values of e and 6. 
If Eq. (13-18) is differentiated with respect to time, 

Evaluating Eq. (13-19) at the minimum creep rate im gives 

aTJ 

im = ner.,a) exp -^ (13-20) 

However, dm is only a function of the creep stress ac, so that 

<Tc = F (im exp H^ = F{Z) (13-21) 

Z is the Zener-Hollomon parameter considered previously in Sec. 9-8. 
Not only can this equation be used for describing the relation between 
temperature and strain rate for the relatively high strain rates of the 
tension test, but it appears to be reliable for the very low strain rates 
found in the creep test. 

The effect of stress on time to rupture can also be correlated with the 
time-temperature parameter 6, 

Or = tr exp ^^ = F{a) (13-22) 

where U is the time to rupture. For engineering analysis of creep, the 
stress dependence of the time to rupture is often expressed by the empiri- 
cal equation 

tr = aa"" (13-23) 

An empirical relationship also exists between the rupture life and the 
minimum creep rate e^ such that 

log tr -f C log e^ = iC (13-24) 

where C and K are constants for a given alloy. 

The activation energy for creep can be evaluated from two creep curves 
determined with the same applied stress at two different temperatures. 
Thus, for equal values of total creep strain obtained at the two temper- 
atures, the values of d are equal. Therefore, 

di = ti exp = $2 = h exp 



AHc = R J'^' Inf^ (13-25) 

J 1 — i 2 tl 



13-7] 



Creep and Stress Rupture 353 



A rather extensive correlation' of creep and diffusion data for pure metals 
shows that the activation energy for high-temperature creep is approxi- 
mately equal to the activation energy for self-diffusion (Fig. 13-9). At 
temperatures below about one-half the melting point A/fc is a function 
of temperature, and no correlation exists with the activation energy for 
self-diffusion. The excellent correlation between the activation energies 
for creep and self-diffusion indicates that dislocation climb is the rate- 



80 


















/ 
















/ 




70 
















^Fe 
















IV! > 


















/ 


oct-Fe 


60 














/ 
















/ 








50 










Au / 
















o / 










40 






































30 






Mc 
c 


/m 
















V 














20 




In -, 


/n 
















/ 


o 














10 




/ 
















/ 


















n 


/ 























10 



20 



30 40 

A// for creep, 



50 60 
kcal/mole 



70 80 



90 



Fig. 1 3-9. Correlation between activation energies for high-temperature creep and 
self-diffusion. (J. E. Dorn, in '^ Creep and Recovery,^' p. 274, Aynerican Society for 
Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1957.) 

determining step for high-temperature creep. The fact that a spectrum 
of activation energies is observed at lower temperatures indicates that 
the creep process is quite complex in this region. 

A simple functional relationship between the steady-state creep rate 
and the stress does not exist because the effect of stress depends on the 
development of the structural changes due to creep deformation. ^ One 
of the most reasonable equations relating creep rate with stress and tem- 
perature is 

em = S' exp -^^ exp B'cT (13-26) 

1 O. D. Sherby, R. L. Orr, and J. E. Dorn, Trans. AIME, vol. 200, pp. 71-80, 1954. 

2 A. E. Bayce, W. D. Ludemann, L. A. Shepard, and J. E. Dorn, Trans. ASM, 
vol. 52, pp. 451-468, 1960. 



354 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 1 3 

Avhere S' is a structure-sensitive parameter and B' is a constant which is 
independent of temperature and structural changes. For low stresses 
(below about 5,000 psi) this equation becomes 

A f/ 

6„. = ;S" exp -^jr c^"' (13-27) 

Another equation which gives good agreement between minimum creep 
rate and stress has been suggested by Conrad.^ 



t,n = iS exp smh 



.(T) 



(13-28) 



In Eq. (13-28) the structure term S is assumed constant at the minimum 
creep rate and the constant <Tc is dependent on temperature. 

Weertman^ has derived an equation for the steady-state creep rate 
which is similar to Eq. (13-27) by using the assumption that dislocation 
climb is the rate-controlling process. The obstacles to dislocation move- 
ment are considered to be immobile Cottrell-Lomer dislocations (see Sec. 
6-4). In order to escape from these obstacles, the dislocations climb into 
adjoining slip planes, forming low-angle boundaries. The activation 
energy for this process is the activation energy for self-diffusion. A 
steady state is established between the generation of dislocations and 
their annihilation. An alternative dislocation model of steady-state 
creep proposed by Mott^ considers that the rate-controlling process is 
the formation of vacancies due to the movement of jogs on screw dis- 
locations. This dislocation model leads to an equation for the steady- 
state creep rate similar to Eq. (13-12) in which the stress is present as a 
cr/r term. The choice of the proper functional relationship between 
creep rate and stress is difficult to make from existing experiment and 
theory. 

1 3-8. Presentation of Engineering Creep Data 

It should be apparent from the previous sections that knowledge of 
the high-temperature strength of metals has not advanced to the point 
where creep and stress-rupture behavior can be reliably predicted for 
design purposes on a theoretical basis. There is no other recourse than 
to make an intelligent selection of design stresses from the existing data. 
Fortunately, a large number of reliable high-temperature strength data 

1 H. Conrad, Trans. ASME, ser. D, vol. 81, pp. 617-627, 1959. 

2 J. Weertman, J. Appl. Phijs., vol. 26, pp. 1213-1217, 1955. 

= N. F. Mott, "NPL Sj'inposium on Creep and Fracture at High Temperature," 
pp. 21-24, H. M. Stationery Office, London, 1955. 



Sec. 1 3-8] 



Creep and Stress Rupture 355 



have been collected and published by the ASTM^ and by the producers 
of high-temperature alloys. 

A common method of presenting creep data is to plot the logarithm 
of the stress against the logarithm of the minimum creep rate (Fig. 13-10). 
With this type of plot straight lines will frequently be obtained for the 
lower temperatures, but discontinuities due to structural instabilities will 
often occur at higher temperatures. Values of minimum creep rate lower 



^ 6 
^ 5 
k 4 





















1 












l6-25-6_ 


■ 




__ 










,^,-^--^ 




— 


TdOO'F 


^^ 




^ 


- 


^^ 








— 


J400°F _ 


^ 


^' 






^ — 












^ — ■ — 






„,-■ 


— 
















■ — 














J500°F _ 


^_^,,^ — " 












. 




— ' 










_,.--- 
















-^ 
















^^ 










18-8 ^ 




_ ^ 





MOpjJ. 






^^ 


- 


--^'^ 












— "^ 





















0.01 0.02 0.03 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 

Rate of creep, %/l,000 hr 



0.5 



1.0 



Fig. 13-10. log-log plot of stress vs. minimum creep rate. For 16-25-6 alloy. {Cour- 
tesy C. L. Clark, Timken Roller Bearing Co.) 



than about 0.001 or 0.01 per cent/hr are generally determined by a 
standard creep test, while higher values of minimum creep rate are fre- 
quently determined by a stress-rupture test. 

In reporting creep data it is common practice to speak of creep strength 
or rupture strength. Creep strength is defined as the stress at a given 
temperature which produces a minimum creep rate of a certain amount, 
usually 0.0001 per cent/hr or 0.001 per cent/hr. Rupture strength refers 
to the stress at a given temperature to produce a life to rupture of a 
certain amount, usually 100, 1 ,000, or 10,000 hr. A plot of creep strength 
or rupture strength against temperature is another common method of 
presenting creep data. When relatively short-time life is an important 

' These data are published in the following ASTM Special Technical Publications: 
No. 124 (stainless steels), 1952; No. 151 (chromium-molybdenum steels), 1953; No. 
160 (superalloys), 1954; No. 180 (carbon steels), 1955; No. 181 (copper and copper- 
base alloys), 1956; No. 199 (wrought medium-carbon alloy steels), 1957. 



356 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 1 3 



design criterion, it is convenient to present the data as a plot of the time 
to produce different amounts of total deformation at different stresses 
(Fig. 13-11). Each curve represents the stress and time at a fixed 
temperature to produce a certain per cent of total deformation (sudden 
strain plus creep strain). A separate set of curves is required for each 
temperature. 

In designing missiles and high-speed aircraft data are needed at higher 
temperatures and stresses and shorter times than are usually determined 
tor creep tests. A common method of presenting these data is by the 
use of isochronous stress-strain curves. Creep tests are conducted at 



10 


Rate of creep, %/I,000 hr 
1.0 0.10 


0.01 


30 
25 

l20' 

o 
o 

°;15 

in 

55 10 
5 

n 














^^^v.^% 


'Rupture 


strength 








'^ 


,^ 








^^^ 




' — i£2j^"\ 




L... Creep streng 


'A 


-_^ 




-_^1£2%__^ 


--C::^. 




> 


"" — — ■ 




U.cO% 
. 0.10% 




1 


^ 















100 



1,000 



Time, hr 



10,000 



100,000 



Fig. 13-11. Deformation-time curves at 1300°F for 16-25-6 alloy. (C. L. Clarh, in 
''Utilization of Heat Resistant Alloys," p. 40, American Society for Metals, Metals 
Park, Ohio, 1954.) 

different stresses for each temperature of interest. From the family of 
creep curves the isochronous stress-strain curves are then obtained by 
replotting with stress as the ordinate, strain as the abscissa, and time, 
usually ranging from about 5 to 60 min, as the parameter for each stress- 
strain curve. 



13-9. Prediction of Long-time Properties 

Frequently high-temperature strength data are needed for conditions 
for which there is no experimental information. This is particularly true 
of long-time creep and stress-rupture data, where it is quite possible to 
find that the creep strength to give 1 per cent deformation in 100,000 hr 



Sec. 1 3-9] Creep and Stress Rupture 357 

(11 years) is required, although the alloy has been in existence for only 
2 years. Obviously, in such situations extrapolation of the data to long 
times is the only alternative. Reliable extrapolation of creep and stress- 
rupture curves to longer times can be made only when it is certain that 
no structural changes occur in the region of extrapolation which would 
produce a change in the slope of the curve. Since structural changes 
generally occur at shorter times for higher temperatures, one way of 
checking on this point is to examine the log-stress-log-rupture life plot 
at a temperature several hundred degrees above the required temperature. 
For example, if in 1,000 hr no change in slope occurs in the curve at 200°F 
above the required temperature, extrapolation of the lower temperature 
curve as a straight line to 10,000 hr is probably safe and extrapolation 
even to 100,000 hr may be possible. A logical method of extrapolating 
stress-rupture curves which takes into consideration the changes in slope 
due to structural changes has been proposed by Grant and Bucklin.^ 

Several suggestions of time-temperature parameters for predicting long- 
time creep or rupture behavior from the results of shorter time tests at 
high temperature have been made. The Larson-Miller parameter^ has 
the form 

(7^ + 460) (C -f log t) = constant (13-29) 

where T = temperature, °F 
/ = time, hr 

C = a constant with a value between about 10 and 30 
In the original derivation of Eq. (13-29) on the basis of reaction-rate 
theory a value of C = 20 was used. While this is a good approximation 
when other data are lacking, for best results C should be considered a 
material constant which is determined experimentally. Once the proper 
constant has been established, then a plot of log stress vs. the Larson- 
Miller parameter should give a master plot which represents the high- 
temperature strength of the material for all combinations of temperature 
and time. However, since the temperature term in this parameter is 
given considerable weight, the Larson-Miller parameter is not very sensi- 
tive to small changes in rupture life due to structural changes in the 
material. 

The parameter 6 suggested by Dorn [see Eq. (13-17)] is another time- 
temperature parameter. While this parameter has been useful for cor- 
relating creep and stress-rupture data for pure metals and dilute solid- 
solution alloys, it has not been used to any great extent with engineering 
high-temperature alloys. 

An extension of the Larson-Miller parameter has been suggested by 

1 N. J. Grant and A. G. Bucklin, Trans. ASM, vol. 42, pp. 720-761, 1950. 

2 F. R. Larson and J. Miller, Trans. ASME, vol. 74, pp. 765-771, 1952. 



358 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 1 3 

Manson and Haferd.^ The Manson-Haferd parameter has the form 

T - Ta 



log t — log ta 



= constant 



(13-30) 



where T = test temperature, °F 

t = time, hr 
Ta, log ta = constants derived from test data 
A straight line is obtained when log t is plotted against T for data obtained 



100 



10 















































/ 


r 


























/• 








- 


10- 
20- 














/ 


^4 


y*^ 










.30^ 

35 " -^ 

— o 

o 












/ 






















/ 
















_ 


40 ° 










/^ 


















m O) 


















Tensile ( 


C-=25) 








2 S 

x< 




/ 


/ 








o 6 = 0.0108 min~ 
A f = 0.0318 min" 
+ 6 = 0.0868 min~ 
n CrBf^D[C = P4.P\ 


I 
1 






45;: 

en 
o 

+ 


/ 














* 


Hardness 


{C = P5) 






- 


50^- 



100 
Hardness, DPH 



1,000 



Fig. 13-12. Hot-hardness-strength correlation for iron-20 per cent chromium alloy. 
{E. E. Underwood, Trans. ASM, vol. 49, p. 403, 1957.) 



at a constant stress. The lines obtained at different stresses converge 
toward a point with coordinates Ta, log ta. 

A comparison of these various parameters with experimental data 
shows that the Manson-Haferd parameter usually results in the best 
over-all agreement,^ although in certain cases^ none of these parameters 

1 S. S. Manson and A. M. Haferd, NACA Tech. Note 2890, March, 1953; S. S. Man- 
son, G. Succop, and W. R. Brown, Jr., Trans. ASM, vol. 51, pp. 911-934, 1959. 

2 R. M. Goldhoff, Trans. ASME, ser. D, vol. 81, pp. 629-644, 1959. 

3 F. Garofalo, G. V. Smith, and B. W. Royle, Trans. ASME, vol. 78, pp. 1423-1434, 
1956. 



Sec. 13-10] Creep and Stress Rupture 359 

has been found to provide satisfactory correlation of the data. In 
general, these parameters provide useful methods for presenting large 
numbers of data through the use of master plots of log stress vs. time- 
temperature parameter. Considerable use has been made of these 
parameters for predicting long-time data on the basis of short-time 
results. While there is no assurance that erroneous predictions will 
not result from this procedure, it is generally considered that the use of 
these parameters for this purpose will probably give better results than 
simple graphical extrapolation of log-log plots by one or two logarithmic 
cycles. 

A short-cut approach to high-temperature properties is through the 
use of the hot-hardness test. There are certain parallelisms between 
high-temperature strength results and hot-hardness data. Just as a 
linear relationship exists between stress and the logarithm of the rupture 
time, a similar relationship holds between hot hardness and the logarithm 
of the indentation time. In Sec. 11-10 it was shown that a linear rela- 
tion exists between hot hardness and tensile strength. Figure 13-12 illus- 
trates a similar relation between hot hardness and high-temperature 
strength.^ From the left-hand ordinate we get the relationship between 
tensile strength or creep strength and hot hardness. However, each point 
on the curve establishes a certain value of the Larson-Miller parameter 
along the right-hand ordinate. Thus, with a value of high-temperature 
stress and a value of the parameter we can establish values of temper- 
ature and rupture time. This procedure has been verified for both single- 
phase alloys and complex multiphase high-temperature alloys. It is a 
useful method for obtaining high-temperature properties of comparatively 
brittle materials. On the other hand, tests of this type give no indication 
of the ductility of the material, which in certain cases may be a more 
controlling factor than the strength. 

13-10. High-temperature Alloys 

High-temperature alloys are a particular class of complex materials 
developed for a very specific application. Some appreciation of the 
metallurgical principles behind the development of these alloys is impor- 
tant to an understanding of how metallurgical variables influence creep 
behavior. The development of high-temperature alloys has, in the main, 
been the result of painstaking, empirical investigation, and it is really 
only in retrospect that principles underlying these developments have 
become evident. 

The nominal compositions of a number of high-temperature alloys are 

1 E. E. Underwood, Materials & Methods, vol. 45, pp. 127-129, 1957; J. Inst. 
Metals, vol. 88, pp. 266-271, 1959-1960. 



360 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 1 3 



given in Table 13-1. Only a few of the many available alloys' could be 
included in this table. The ferritic alloys were developed first to meet 
increased temperature requirements in steam power plants. They are 
essentially carbon steels, with increased chromium and molybdenum to 
form complex carbides, which resist softening. Molybdenum is particu- 
larly effective in increasing the creep resistance of steel. Because of 



Table 13-1 
Compositions of Typical High-temperature Alloys 



Alloy 



C Cr Ni Mo Co W Cb Ti Al 



Fe Other 



Ferritic Steels 



1.25 Cr, Mo 

5 Cr, Mo 

"17-22-A" S 

410 

316 

347 

16-25-6 

A-286 

Inconel 

Inconel X 

Nimonic 90 

Hastelloy B 

Ren^ 41 

Udimet 500 

Vitallium (HS-21;. 
X-40 (HS-31) 

N-155 (Multimelt) 

S-590 

S-816 

K42 B 

Refractaloy 26 ... . 



0.10 
0.20 
0.30 
0.10 


1.25 
5.00 
1.25 
12.0 




0.50 
0.50 
0.50 












Balance 
Balance 
Balance 
Balance 















































Austenitic Steels 



0.08 
0.06 
0.10 
0.05 


17.0 
18.0 
16.0 
15.0 


12.0 
12.0 
25.0 
26.0 


2.50 

6.00 
1.25 












1 
Balance 
Balance 
Balance 
Balance 






0.70 
















1.95 


0.20 



Nickel-base Alloys 



0.04 
0.04 
0.08 
0.10 
0.10 
0.10 


15.5 
15.0 
20.0 
1.0 
19.0 
19.4 


76.0 
75.0 
58.0 
65.0 
53.0 
55.6 














7.0 
7.0 
0.5 
5.0 
2.0 
0.6 


28 

10 

4 


16 






2.5 
2.3 


0.6 
1.4 






11 
14 






3.2 
2.9 


1.6 
2.9 











Cobalt-base Alloys 



0.25 
0.40 


27.0 
25.0 


3.0 
10.0 


5 


62 
55 








1.0 
1.0 


8 











Complex Superalloys 



0.15 
0.40 
0.40 
0.05 
0.05 


21.0 
20.0 
20.0 
18.0 
18.0 


20.0 
20.0 
20.0 
43.0 
37.0 


3 
4 
4 

3 


20 

20 

Bal. 

22 

20 


2.5 
4.0 
4.0 


1.0 
4.0 
4.0 






Balance 

Balance 

3.0 

13 

18 










2.5 

2.8 


0.2 
0.2 











0.15A^ 



1 H. C. Cross and W. F. Simmons, Alloys and Their Properties for Elevated Tem- 
perature Service, "Utilization of Heat Resistant Alloys," American Society for 
Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1954. 



Sec. 13-10] Creep and Stress Rupture 361 

oxidation and the instability of the carbide phase these alloys are limited 
in use to about 1000°F. Owing to the increased oxidation resistance of 
austenitic stainless steels, these alloys extend the useful stress-bearing 
range to about 1200°F. 

The superalloys for jet-engine applications are based on either nickel 
or cobalt austenitic alloys or combinations of the two. In general the> 
contain appreciable chromium for oxidation resistance. Single-phase 
solid-solution alloys such as Nichrome (Ni-Cr) and austenitic stainless 
steel become weak above about 1300°F. Superalloys, therefore, are 
multiphase alloys which attain their strength primarily from a dis- 
persion of stable second-phase particles. In the cobalt-base alloys and 
certain complex Ni-Co-Cr-Fe alloys like N-155, S-590, and S-816 the 
second-phase particles are complex metal carbides. Molybdenum, tung- 
sten, and columbium are added to these alloys to form stable complex 
carbides. The carbon content of these alloys is usually critical and must 
be controlled carefully. Increasing the carbon content up to a certain 
limit increases the amount of carbide particles, and hence the rupture 
strength is increased. However, if too much carbon is present, the car- 
bides will no longer be present as discrete particles. Instead, massive 
carbide networks form and reduce the rupture strength. Certain carbide 
systems undergo a series of complex aging reactions which may result in 
additional strengthening. 

Nickel-base superalloys may be strengthened by the addition of small 
amounts of Al and/or Ti. The intermetallic compounds NisAl or NiaTi 
are formed by these additions. Up to three out of every five atoms of 
Al in NisAl may be replaced by Ti, to form Ni3(Al,Ti). Since this com- 
pound produces greater hardening than NisAl, it is customary to add 
both Al and Ti to these nickel-base alloys. Nickel-base alloys contain- 
ing Al and Ti are true age-hardening systems, so that their high-tem- 
perature strength depends on the ability of the system to resist overaging. 
The heat treatment must be carefully controlled to put these alloys in the 
condition of maximum particle stability. This can be destroyed if the 
service conditions fluctuate above the optimum aging temperature. 

A new class of dispersion-strengthened high-temperature alloys are 
being developed in which thermally stable second-phase particles, chiefly 
AI2O3, Si02, and Zr02, are introduced into a metal matrix by artificial 
means. ^ The prototype for this development was the sintered alumi- 
num-powder (SAP) alloy, in which fine AI2O3 particles were dispersed in 
an aluminum matrix owing to the breakoff of surface oxide during the 
extrusion of sintered aluminum powder. At present most developments 
are centered in the preparation of a dispersion-hardened alloy by powder- 
metallurgy methods. Mixtures of fine oxides and metal powders are 

» N. J. Grant and O. Preston, Trans. AIMS, vol. 209, pp. 349-356, 1957. 



362 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 13 



pressed, sintered, and extruded into useful shapes. Data for copper and 
nickel alloys prepared in this way show that the stress-rupture curves 
for a dispersion-strengthened alloy drop off much less rapidly with time 
than for the same metal without second-phase particles. By comparing 
on the basis of rupture time at a given stress, improvements of 1,000 per 
cent have been reported for dispersion-strengthened alloys, while increases 
in rupture stress at 100 hr of over 10,000 psi have been found for nickel. 




300 



500 



1000 



Temperature, °F 



1500 



2000 



Fig. 13-13. Typical curves of stress for rupture in 1,000 hr versus temperature for 
selected engineering alloys. (Z). P. Moon and W. F. Simmons, DMIC Memo 92, 
Battelle Memorial Institute, Mar. 23, 1961.) 



The production of artificial dispersion-strengthened alloys offers con- 
siderable promise, since in principle it permits the use of a second-phase 
particle with maximum resistance to growth, and at the same time the 
size and amount of the particles can be controlled. 

An analogous approach is the development of cermets, in which ceramic 
particles such as borides, carbides, and silicides are combined with a 
metallic binder by powder-metallurgy methods. Cermets have shown 
very high strength at 1800°F, but their use has been limited owing to 
poor ductility and insufficient thermal- and mechanical-shock resistance. 

The high-temperature strength of metals is approximately related to 



Sec. 13-11] Creep and Stress Rupture 363 

their melting points. For example, aluminum has better high-temper- 
ature strength than zinc, and copper is better than aluminum. Titanium, 
chromium, columbium, molybdenum, tantalum, and tungsten, in order 
of increasing melting point, are the relatively common metals with melt- 
ing points greater than iron, cobalt, and nickel, the principal constituents 
of present-day superalloys. Although the high-temperature strength of 
titanium has not proved to be so great as would be expected on the basis 
of its melting point, molybdenum and its alloys have the best high-tem- 
perature strength of any common metals available at the present time. 
Figure 13-13, which shows the stress for rupture in 1,000 hr at different 
temperatures for a number of engineering materials, illustrates the superi- 
ority of molybdenum. Unfortunately, the use of molybdenum is limited 
by the fact that it undergoes catastrophic oxidation at elevated temper- 
ature. Oxidation-resistance coatings for molybdenum are being used to 
a certain extent. Extensive development of ways of preparing, purifying, 
and fabricating the other refractory metals is under way. This work 
includes a search for methods of increasing their oxidation resistance and 
high-temperature strength by alloying. 

13-11. EFfect of Metallursical Variables 

The high-temperature creep and stress-rupture strengths are usually 
higher for coarse-grain material than for a fine-grain-size metal. This, 
of course, is in contrast to the behavior at lower temperature, where a 
decrease in grain size results in an increase in strength. The basic effect 
of grain size on high-temperature strength is clouded because it is practi- 
cally impossible to change the grain size of complex superalloys without 
inadvertently changing some other factor such as the carbide spacing or 
the aging response. In fact, Parker' has proposed that the observed 
dependence of high-temperature strength on grain size is basically incor- 
rect. Formerly it was suggested that the lower creep strength of fine 
grain material was due to greater grain-boundary area available for grain- 
boundary sliding. However, work which indicates that grain-boundary 
sliding can account for only about 10 per cent of the total creep strain 
has cast doubt on this explanation. 

Since high-temperature creep depends on dislocation climb, which in 
turn depends upon the rate at which vacancies can diffuse to edge dis- 
locations, Parker feels that the grain-size effect on creep is due to the 
effect of grain-boundary structure on vacancy diffusion. Vacancy diffu- 
sion is more rapid along high-energy grain boundaries than through the 
bulk lattice. Therefore, with fine-grain material with many high-angle 
grain boundaries dislocation climb will be rapid, and the creep rate is high. 

1 E. R. Parker, Trans. ASM, vol. 50, pp. 52-104, 1958. 



364 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 13 



However, when the same material is heated to a high temperature to 
coarsen the grain size, most of the high-energy grain boundaries disappear 
owing to grain growth. The boundaries which remain are mostly lower- 
energy grain boundaries, for which vacancy diffusion is relatively slow. 
Therefore, dislocation climb will be slower in the coarse-grain material. 
The fact that low-angle grain boundaries improve creep properties is 
shown in Fig. 13-14. Networks of low-angle boundaries were produced 
in nickel by straining small amounts in tension at room temperature and 
annealing at 800°C. Note the change in shape of the creep curves and 
the decreasing creep rate as more and more low-angle grain boundaries 
were introduced, with greater prestrain. Recent experiments by Parker 



0.10 




Fig. 1 3-1 4. Effect of substructure introduced by prestrain and anneal treatments on 
the creep curve of high-purity nickel. {E. R. Parker, Trans. ASM, vol. 50, p. 86, 
1958.) 



in which the grain size of copper was changed without changing the pro- 
portion of low-angle and high-angle grain boundaries have showai that 
the creep rate increases with increasing grain size. Thus, it appears as if 
the fundamental dependence of creep rate on grain size is no different 
from the dependence of strength on grain size at low temperature. How- 
ever, secondary effects which accompany the change in grain size when it 
is accomplished by commercial annealing procedures are responsible for 
the effect which is usually observed. 

Comparison of the properties of cast and forged high-temperature 
alloys in the same state of heat treatment shows that cast alloys gener- 
ally have somewhat higher hot strength and creep resistance than forgings 
at temperatures above the equicohesive temperature. The reasons for 



Sec. 13-11] Creep and Stress Rupture 365 

this are not well established, but it appears that it is related to a strength- 
ening from the dendritic structure of the casting. Advantages can be 
ascribed to both casting and forging as a method of production for high- 
temperature alloys. Most high-temperature alloys are hot-worked only 
with difficulty. There are certain alloys, particularly cobalt-base alloys, 
which cannot be hot-worked, and therefore they must be produced as 
castings. Although castings show somewhat better strength than forg- 
ings, the production conditions must be carefully controlled to provide 
uniform properties. Variations in grain size due to changes in section 
size may be a problem with castings. Because of their worked structure, 
forgings are more ductile than castings, and generally they show fatigue 
properties which are superior to those of castings. 

Since high-temperature alloys are designed to resist deformation at 
high temperatures, it is not surprising to find that they present problems 
in mechanical w^orking and fabrication. Hot working of superalloys for 
ingot breakdown is generally done in the range 1700 to 2200°F. It should 
be recognized that working highly alloyed materials like superalloys does 
not constitute true hot working since residual strains will be left in the 
lattice. For this reason the resulting properties of age-hardenable alloys 
are dependent on the hot-working conditions. The rupture properties 
of certain nonaging solid-solution alloys like 16-25-6, N-155, and S-816 
are appreciably improved by controlled amounts of reduction in the range 
1200 to 1700°F. This procedure is known as hot-cold working, or warm 
working. Deformation in this temperature region for these highly alloyed 
materials is about equivalent to working mild steel at room temperature. 
Warm working and cold working at room temperature of less highly 
alloyed materials produce higher creep strength because of the energy 
stored in the lattice as a result of the plastic deformation. For a given 
operating temperature there will be a critical amount of cold work beyond 
which the increased lattice strain causes rapid recovery and recrystalliza- 
tion. The critical amount of cold work decreases as the operating tem- 
perature is increased. 

In general, there is little correlation between room-temperature 
strength and high-temperature strength. For example, the incorpo- 
ration of a dispersion of fine oxide particles in the metal matrix may 
produce only a modest increase in room-temperature strength, but the 
improvement in rupture time at elevated temperature may be a thousand- 
fold. The importance of using a thermally stable metallurgical structure 
for long-time high-temperature service is well illustrated by the case of 
low-alloy steels. Although a quenched and tempered martensitic struc- 
ture of fine carbides has the best strength at room temperature and may 
have good strength for short times up to 1100°F, on long exposure at 
elevated temperature the carbides grow and coalesce and the creep 



366 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 1 3 

properties are very poor. Much better creep properties are obtained if 
the steel is initially in the stable annealed condition. The problem of 
selecting the best heat treatment for a complex superalloy is frequently 
difficult. A compromise must be reached between the fineness of the 
dispersion of second-phase particles and their thermal stability. Assum- 
ing that the transformation characteristics for the alloy are completely 
known, which is usually not the case, the selection of the heat treatment 
would be based on the expected service temperature and the required 
service life. One of the difficulties which must be guarded against is the 
formation of grain-boundary precipitates, which lead to intergranular 
fracture. 

High-temperature properties can show considerable scatter, and fre- 
quently measurably different results are obtained between different heats 
of the same material or even between different bars from the same heat. 
The creep properties of steels are particularly subject to variations in 
properties, which are related in complex ways to the composition, melting 
practice, type of mechanical working, and microstructure. Aluminum 
deoxidized steels generally have poorer creep properties than silicon deoxi- 
dized steels. Not only does aluminum refine the grain size, but it also 
accelerates spheroidization and graphitization. Considerable improve- 
ment in the high-temperature properties of superalloys results from 
vacuum melting. Fabricability is also improved, presumably because 
of the decrease in the number and size of inclusions. In general, life to 
rupture and ductility at fracture are both increased by vacuum melting. 
Better control of composition, and therefore more uniform response to 
heat treatment, is obtained with vacuum melting. 

The environment surrounding the specimen can have an important 
influence on high-temperature strength. Creep tests on zinc single crys- 
tals showed that creep practically stopped when copper was plated on 
the surface of the specimens.^ When the copper was electrolytically 
removed, creep began again at nearly the original rate. Stress-rupture 
tests on nickel and nickel-chromium alloys show a complex dependence 
on atmosphere.^ At high temperatures and low strain rates these mate- 
rials are stronger in air than in vacuum, while the reverse is true at low 
temperatures and high strain rates. This behavior is attributed to the 
competing effects of strengthening resulting from oxidation and weaken- 
ing due to lowering of the surface energy by absorbed gases. The nature 
of the oxidation can have an important influence on the high-temperature 
properties. A thin oxide layer or a finely dispersed oxide will usually 
lead to strengthening, but intergranular penetration of oxide will usually 
lead to decreased rupture life and intergranular fracture. When mate- 

1 M. R. Pickus and E. R. Parker, Trans. AIMS, vol. 191, pp. 792-796, 1951. 

2 P. Shahinian and M. R. Achter, Trans. ASM, vol. 51, pp. 244-255, 1959. 



Sec. 1 3-1 3] Creep and Stress Rupture 367 

rials must operate in an atmosphere of hot combustion gases or in cor- 
rosive environments, the service life is materially reduced. 

1 3-1 2. Creep under Combined Stresses 

Considerable attention has been given to the problem of design for 
combined stress conditions during steady-state creep. ^ In the absence 
of metallurgical changes, the basic simplifying assumptions of plasticity 
theory (see Sec. 3-8) hold reasonably well for these conditions. The 
assumption of incompressible material leads to the familiar relationship 
61 4- «2 + fs = 0. The assumption that principal shear-strain rates are 
proportional to principal shear stresses gives 

ji^lj2 ^ ^^^^ ^ hj^^ ^ ^ ^^3_3j^ 

0"! — 0'2 0'2 — (73 (Ti — (T\ 

Combining these eciuations results in 

ei =^kl - K(CT2 + CT3)] (13-32) 

Similar expressions are obtained for e-z and is. 

For engineering purposes the stress dependence of the creep rate can be 
expressed by Eq. (13-16). For combined stress conditions e and a must 
be replaced by the effective strain rate e and the effective stress a [see 
Eqs. (3-35) and (3-36)]. Thus, we can write 

i = Ba"' (13-33) 

Combining Eqs. (13-32) and (13-33) results in 

€1 = Ba"'-'[ai - H(^2 + C73)] (13-34) 

The effective stress and the effective strain rate are useful parameters 
for correlating steady-state creep data. When plotted on log-log coordi- 
nates, they give a straight-line relationship. Correlation has been 
obtained between uniaxial creep tests, creep of thick-walled tubes under 
internal pressure, and tubes stressed in biaxial tension.^ 

1 3-1 3. Stress Relaxation 

Stress relaxation under creep conditions refers to the decrease in stress 
at constant deformation. When stress relaxation occurs, the stress 

^ The original analysis of this problem was given by C. R. Soderberg, Trans. ASME, 
vol. 58, p. 733, 1936. Subsequent analysis has been made by I. Finnie, Trans. ASME, 
ser. D, vol. 82, pp. 462-464, 1960. For a critical review see A. E. Johnson, Met. 
Reviews, vol. 5, pp. 447-506, 1960. 

2 E. A. Davis, Trans. ASME, ser. D, vol. 82, pp. 453-461, 1960. 



368 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 1 3 



needed to maintain a constant total deformation decreases as a function 
of time. Consider a tension specimen which is under a total strain e at 
an elevated temperature where creep can occur. 



= 6e + 






(13-35) 



where e = total strain 
€e = elastic strain 
Cp = plastic (creep) strain 
For the total strain to remain constant as the material creeps, it is neces- 
sary for the elastic strain to decrease. This means that the stress required 
to maintain the total strain decreases with time as creep increases. 

The relaxation of stress in bolted joints and shrink or press-fit assem- 
blies may lead to loose joints and leakage. Therefore, stress-relaxation 




Time 
Fig. 1 3-1 5. Stress-relaxation curves. 

tests are commonly made on bolting materials for high-temperature 
service.^ Figure 13-15 shows the type of curves which are obtained. 
The initial rate of decrease of stress is high, but it levels off because the 
stress level is decreased and the transient creep rate decreases with time. 
These type of curves also can be used to estimate the time required to 
relieve residual stress by thermal treatments. If Eq. (13-16) can be used 
to express the stress dependence of creep, then the time required to relax 
the stress from the initial stress at to a is given by^ 



t = 



BE{n' - l)(r"'- 



1 



©" 



(13-36) 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 

"Creep and Fracture of Metals at High Temperatures," H. M. Stationery Office, 
London, 1956. 

^ Relaxation properties of steels and superalloys are given in ASTM Spec. Tech. 
PuU. 187, 1956. 

2 E. L. Robinson, Proc. ASTM, vol. 48, p. 214, 1948. 



Creep and Stress Rupture 369 

"Creep and Recoverj^," American Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1957. 
Finnie, I., and W. R. Heller: "Creep of Engineering Materials," McGraw-Hill Book 

Company, Inc., New York, 1959. 
Hehemann, R. F., and G. M. Ault (eds.): "High Temperature Materials," John Wiley 

& Sons, Inc., New York, 1959. 
"High Temperature Properties of Metals," American Society for Metals, Metals Park, 

Ohio, 1951. 
Smith, G. v.: "Properties of Metals at Elevated Temperatures," McGraw-Hill Book 

Company, Inc., New York, 1950. 
Sully, A. H.: Recent Advances in Knowledge Concerning the Process of Creep in 

Metals, "Progress in Metal Physics," vol. 6, Pergamon Press, Ltd., London, 1956. 
"Utilization of Heat Resistant Alloys," American Society for Metals, Metals Park, 

Ohio, 1954. 



Chapter 14 

BRITTLE FAILURE 
AND IMPACT TESTING 

14-1. The Brittle-failure Problem 

During World War II a great deal of attention was directed to the 
brittle failure of welded Liberty ships and T-2 tankers.^ Some of these 
ships broke completely in two, while, in other instances, the fracture did 
not completely disable the ship. Most of the failures occurred during 
the winter months. Failures occurred both when the ships were in heavy 
seas and when they were anchored at dock. These calamities focused 
attention on the fact that normally ductile mild steel can become brittle 
under certain conditions. A broad research program was undertaken 
to find the causes of these failures and to prescribe the remedies for their 
future prevention. In addition to research designed to find answers to 
a pressing problem, other research was aimed at gaining a better under- 
standing of the mechanism of brittle fracture and fracture in general. 
Many of the results of this basic work are described in Chap. 7, which 
should be reviewed before proceeding further with this chapter. While 
the brittle failure of ships concentrated great attention on brittle failure 
in mild steel, it is important to understand that this is not the only appli- 
cation where brittle fracture is a problem. Brittle failures in tanks, 
pressure vessels, pipelines, and bridges have been documented^ as far back 
as the year 1886. 

Three basic factors contribute to a brittle-cleavage type of fracture. 
They are (1) a triaxial state of stress, (2) a low temperature, and (3) a 
high strain rate or rapid rate of loading. All three of these factors do 
not have to be present at the same time to produce brittle fracture. A 

' M. L. Williams, Analysis of Brittle Behavior in Ship Plates, Symposium on Effect 
of Temperature on the Brittle Behavior of Metals with Particular Reference to Low 
Temperatures, ASTM Spec. Tech. Publ. 158, pp. 11-44, 1954. 

2 M. E. Shank, A Critical Survey of Brittle Failure in Carbon Plate Steel Structures 
Other than Ships, ASTM Spec. Tech. Publ. 158, pp. 45-110, 1954. 
370 



Sec. 14-2] Brittle Failure and Impact Testing 371 

triaxial state of stress, such as exists at a notch, and low temperature are 
responsible for most service failures of the brittle type. However, since 
these effects are accentuated at a high rate of loading, many types of 
impact tests have been used to determine the susceptibility of materials 
to brittle fracture. Steels which have identical properties when tested in 
tension or torsion at slow strain rates can show pronounced differences in 
their tendency for brittle fracture when tested in a notched-impact test. 
However, there are certain disadvantages to this type of test, so that 
much work has been devoted to the development of additional tests for 
defining the tendency for brittle fracture, and much effort has been 
expended in correlating the results of different brittle-fracture tests. 

Since the ship failures occurred primarily in structures of welded con- 
struction, it was considered for a time that this method of fabrication 
was not suitable for service where brittle fracture might be encountered. 
A great deal of research has since demonstrated that welding, per se, 
is not inferior in this respect to other types of construction. However, 
strict quality control is needed to prevent weld defects which can act as 
stress raisers or notches. New electrodes have been developed that make 
it possible to make a weld with better properties than the mild-steel plate. 
The design of a welded structure is more critical than the design of an 
equivalent riveted structure, and much effort has gone into the develop- 
ment of safe designs for welded structures. It is important to eliminate 
all stress raisers and to avoid making the structure too rigid. To this 
end, riveted sections, known as crack arresters, were incorporated in some 
of the wartime ships so that, if a brittle failure did occur, it would not 
propagate completely through the structure. 

14-2. Notched-bar Impact Tests 

Various types of notched-bar impact tests are used to determine the 
tendency of a material to behave in a brittle manner. This type of test 
will detect differences between materials which are not observable in a 
tension test. The results obtained from notched-bar tests are not readily 
expressed in terms of design requirements, since it is not possible to meas- 
ure the components of the triaxial stress condition at the notch. Further- 
more, there is no general agreement on the interpretation or significance 
of results obtained with this type of test. 

A large number of notched-bar test specimens of different design 
have been used by investigators of the brittle fracture of metals. Two 
classes of specimens have been standardized^ for notched-impact testing. 
Charpy bar specimens are used most commonly in the United States, 
while the Izod specimen is favored in Great Britain. The Charpy speci- 

1 ASTM Standards, pt. 3, 1958, Designation E23-56T, 



372 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 14 



men has a square cross section and contains a notch at the center of its 
length. Either a V notch or a keyhole notch is used. The Charpy 
specimen is supported as a beam in a horizontal position. The load is 
applied by the impact of a heavy swinging pendulum (approximately 
16 ft /sec impact velocity) applied at the midspan of the beam on the side 
opposite from the notch. The specimen is forced to bend and fracture 
at a strain rate on the order of 10* in. /(in.) (sec). The Izod specimen is 
either circular or square in cross section and contains a V notch near one 
end. The specimen is clamped vertically at one end like a cantilever 
beam and is struck with the pendulum at the opposite end. Figure 14-1 
illustrates the type of loading used with these tests. Note that the notch 
is subjected to a tensile stress as the specimen is bent by the moving 
pendulum. Plastic constraint at the notch produces a triaxial state of 
stress similar to that shown in Fig. 7-10. The relative values of the three 



Impact 
load 



7777777, 



Impact 
load 



7/7777/ 



Charpy V-notch Izod 

Fig. 14-1. Sketch showing method of loading in Charpy and Izod impact tests. 



principal stresses depend strongly on the dimensions of the bar and the 
details of the notch. For this reason it is important to use standard 
specimens. The value of the transverse stress at the base of the notch 
depends chiefly on the relationship between the width of the bar and the 
notch radius. The wider the bar in relation to the radius of the notch, 
the greater the transverse stress. 

The response of a specimen to the impact test is usually measured by 
the energy absorbed in fracturing the specimen. For metals this is usu- 
ally expressed in foot-pounds and is read directly from a calibrated dial 
on the impact tester. In Europe impact results are frequently expressed 
in energy absorbed per unit cross-sectional area of the specimen. Very 
often a measure of ductility, such as the per cent contraction at the 
notch, is used to supplement this information. It is also important to 
examine the fracture surface to determine whether it is fibrous (shear 
failure) or granular (cleavage fracture). Figure 14-2 illustrates the 
appearance of these two types of fractures. 

The notched-bar impact test is most meaningful when conducted over 
a range of temperature so that the temperature at which the ductile-to- 



)ec. 



14-2] 



Brittle Failure and Impact Testing 373 




4:60- 



o 40- 



.S 20- 



Fig. 14-2. Fracture surfaces of Charpy specimens tested at different temperatures. 
Left, 40°F; center, 100°F; right, 212°F. Note gradual decrease in the granular region 
and increase in lateral contraction at the notch with increasing temperature. 

brittle transition takes place can be determined. Figure 14-3 illustrates 
the type of curves which are obtained. Note that the energy absorbed 
decreases with decreasing temperature but that for most cases the 
decrease does not occur sharply at 
a certain temperature. This makes 
it difficult to determine accurately 
the transition temperature. In 
selecting a material from the stand- 
point of notch toughness or tend- 
ency for brittle failure the im- 
portant factor is the transition 
temperature. Figure 14-3 illus- 
trates how reliance on impact 
resistance at only one temperature 
can be misleading. Steel A shows 
higher notch toughness at room 
temperature; yet its transition 
temperature is higher than that of 

steel B. The material with the lowest transition temperature is to be 
preferred. 

Notched-bar impact tests are subject to considerable scatter,^ particu- 
larly in the region of the transition temperature. Most of this scatter is 

1 R. H. Frazier, J. W. Spretnak, and F. W. Boulger, Symposium on Effect of Tem- 
perature on the Brittle Behavior of Metals, ASTM Spec. Tech. Publ. 158, pp. 286-307, 
1954. 




-80 



-40 +40 

Temperature. °F 



+80 



Fig. 14-3. Transition-temperature curves 
for two steels, showing fallacy of depend- 
ing on room-temperature results. 



374 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 14 



due to local variations in the properties of the steel, while some is due to 
difficulties in preparing perfectly reproducible notches. Both notch 
shape and depth are critical variables, as is the proper placement of the 
specimen in the impact machine. 

The shape of the transition curve depends on the type of test and also 
on the material. For example, keyhole Charpy specimens usually give 



60 
50 

^ 40 

r 

=^30 

a> 

i5 20 

10 



100 

80 

fe"60 

to 

40 

20 





Semikilled mild steel - 0.1 8 percent C 
0.54 percent Mn 
0.07 percent Si 



Energy transition 



Charpy 
keyhole 




-60 -40 -20 20 40 60 
Ductility transition 



100 120 140 




20 40 60 
Temporcture, "F 



100 120 140 160 



Fig. 7 4-4. Transition-temperature curves based on energy absorbed, fracture appear- 
ance, and notch ductility. {.W ■ S. Pellini, ASTM Spec. Tech. Publ. 158, p. 222, 
1954.) 



Sec. 14-3] Brittle Failure and Impact Testing 375 

a sharper breaking curve than V-notch Charpy specimens. For a tough 
steel V-notch Charpy specimens generally give somewhat higher values 
than keyhole specimens. The transition temperature for a given steel 
will be different for different-shaped specimens and for different types 
of loading with different states of stress. The correlation of transition 
temperatures measured in different ways will be discussed in a later 
section. 

Because the transition temperature is not sharply defined, it is impor- 
tant to understand the criteria which have been adopted for its definition. 
The most suitable criterion for selecting the transition temperature is 
whether or not it correlates with service performance. In general, cri- 
teria for determining the transition temperature are based on a transition 
in energy absorbed, change in the appearance of the fracture, or a tran- 
sition in the ductility, as measured by the contraction at the root of the 
notch.' Figure 14-4 shows that the same type of curve is obtained for 
each criterion. This figure also illustrates the relative shapes of the 
curves obtained with keyhole and V-notch Charpy specimens. The 
energy transition temperature for V-notch Charpy specimens is fre- 
quently set at a level of 10 or 15 ft-lb. Where the fracture appearance 
changes gradually from shear through mixtures of shear and cleavage 
to complete cleavage, with decreasing temperature, the transition tem- 
perature is frequently selected to correspond to a temperature where 
50 per cent fibrous (shear) fracture is obtained. The ductility transition 
temperature is sometimes arbitrarily set at 1 per cent lateral contraction 
at the notch. One characteristic of these criteria is that a transition 
temperature based on fracture appearance always occurs at a higher tem- 
perature than if based on a ductility or energy criterion. 

14-3. Slow-bend Tests 

The slow bending of flat-beam specimens in a testing machine is some- 
times used as a method of determining the transition temperature. A 
biaxial state of stress is produced during the bending of an unnotched 
beam when the width is much greater than the thickness. When the 
ratio of width to thickness is close to unity, the stress is essentially uni- 
axial, but as the width increases, the ratio of the transverse to longi- 
tudinal stress approaches a value of }'2, the condition for a state of plane 
stress.^ The unnotched-bend test represents a condition of severity inter- 

' W. S. Pellini, Evaluation of the Significance of Charpy Tests, Symposium on 
Effect of Temperature on the Brittle Behavior of Metals with Particular Reference 
to Low Temperatures, ASTM Spec. Tech. Publ. 158, pp. 216-261, 1954. 

2 G. S. Sangdahl, E. L. Aul, and G. Sachs, Proc. Soc. Exptl. Stress Anal., vol. 6, 
no. 1, pp. 1-18, 1948. 



376 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 14 



mediate between that of the tensile test and a notched-impact test. Usu- 
ally a notch is used to introduce triaxial stress, in which case the transition 
temperature is raised. 

The effect of adding the variable of high strain rate is complex. In a 
comparison of the transition temperature measured with a slow-bend test 
and a Charpy impact test with identically notched specimens it was found 
that the ductility transition was raised by impact but that the fracture 
transition was lower for the impact test. From this and other work, it 
appears as if the fracture transition temperature is not sensitive to 
strain rate. 



45° notch -O.Ol" radius -0.05"deep 

Weld bead-. /^ 4" 




KINZEL BEND SPECIMEN 

Notch radius 1 mm - 0.080" deep 




LEHIGH. BEND SPECIMEN 
Fis. 1 4-5. Notch-bend test specimens. 



The Kinzel and Lehigh (Fig. 14-5) notch-bend specimens are frequently 
used for studying the effect of welding and metallurgical variables on 
notch toughness. Both specimens incorporate a longitudinal weld bead 
which is notched so that the weld metal, the heat-affected zone, and the 
unaffected base metal are exposed to the stress at the root of the notch. 
Both specimens are bent with the load applied opposite to the notch. 
The Lehigh specimen provides duplicate tests. Load-deflection curves 
are obtained and the data plotted in terms of energy absorbed to maxi- 
mum load, energy absorbed after maximum load to fracture, or total 
energy absorbed. Lateral contraction at the notch and bend angle are 
also measured. 



Sec. 1 4-4] 



Brittle Failure and impact Testing 377 



14-4. Specialized Tests for Transition Temperature 

A number of new tests for determining the transition temperature of 
steel have been developed as a result of the research on the brittle failure 
of ships. Space will permit only a brief description of several of the most 
interesting of these tests, which give indication of attaining more general 
acceptance. 

A number of tests subject the notch to simultaneous tension and 
bending. This can be done by eccentrically loading a notched tensile 




Sow cut 



Impact ^ (^ A_ 



Liquid Ng 
coolant 




Weld 



Heat 
applied 



[a) 
Fig. 14-6. (a) Specimen used in Navy tear test; (6) specimen used in Robertson test. 



specimen or by using a specimen such as shown in Fig. 14-6a. This 
specimen is used in the Navy tear test.^ It employs the full thickness 
of the steel plate. The advantage of a combined tension plus bending 
load over one of bending alone is that by suitably increasing the tensile 
load the compression region developed by the bending load can be elimi- 
nated. Since a high-compression region will retard crack propagation, a 
test which combines both bending and tension aids in crack propagation. 
Robertson^ devised an interesting test for determining the temperature 
at which a rapidly moving crack comes to rest. A uniform tensile stress 

1 N. A. Kahn and E. A. Imbemo, Welding J., vol. 29, pp. 153s-165s, 1949. 

2 T. S. Robertson, Engineering, vol. 172, pp. 445-448, 1951; J. Iron Steel Inst. 
{London), vol. 175, p. 361, 1953. 



378 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 14 

is applied to a specimen of the type shown in Fig. 14-66. A starter crack 
is cut with a jeweler's saw at one side of the specimen. This side is 
cooled with liquid nitrogen, and the other side is kept at a higher tem- 
perature. Thus, a temperature gradient is maintained across the width 
of the specimen. A crack is started at the cold end by an impact gun. 
The energy available from the impact is not sufficient to make the crack 
grow very large, but the applied tensile stress tends to keep it growing. 
The crack travels across the width of the specimen until it reaches a 
point where the temperature is high enough to permit enough yielding 
to stop the crack. This occurs when the plastic deformation required 
for further spread of the crack cannot be supplied by the stored elastic 
energy. For each applied tensile stress there is a temperature above 
which the crack will not propagate. Robertson's data showed that this 
arrest temperature decreases sharply for most mild-steel plates when the 
applied tensile stress is lowered to about 10,000 psi. For these steels 
the crack will not be arrested if the stress exceeds this value and the 
temperature is below room temperature. This test has been modified 
for use without a temperature gradient.^ 

The drop-weight test was developed by the Naval Research Labo- 
ratory^ to measure susceptibility to the initiation of brittle fracture in 
the presence of a cracklike notch. The specimen is a flat plate with a 
3-in.-long bead of hard-facing metal applied at the center and notched to 
half depth. The welded side of the specimen is placed face down over 
end supports, and the center of the specimen is struck with a 60-lb falling 
weight. The bead of hard-facing metal cracks in a brittle manner, pro- 
ducing a sharp, cracklike notch. Since the purpose of the drop-weight 
test is to see whether or not fracture will occur at a sharp notch when 
the amount of yielding that can occur is restricted, the bending fixture is 
designed so as to limit the deflection of the specimen to 5°. Only 3° of 
bend is needed to produce a crack in the brittle weld bead. The addi- 
tional 2° of bend provides a test of whether or not the steel can deform 
in the presence of the cracklike notch. This is a "go-no go" type of test 
in that at a given temperature the specimen either fractures completely or 
remains intact. The highest temperature of fracture is termed the nil- 
ductility transition temperature. This test provides a sharp transition 
temperature and is quite reproducible. 

The explosion-bulge test was developed by the Naval Research Labo- 
ratory^ to measure susceptibility to propagation of brittle fracture. A 
crack-starter weld is applied to the center of a 14-in.-square plate. The 

1 F. J. Feely, D. Hrtko, S. R. Kleppe, and M. S. Northrup, Welding J., vol. 33, 
pp. 99s-llls, 1954. 

2 Pellini, op. cit., pp. 233-235. 

3 Ibid., pp. 228-231. 



14-5] 



Brittle Failure and Impact Testing 379 



specimen is placed over a circular die and subjected to the force of a 
controlled explosion. The explosion produces a compressive shock wave 
which is reflected from the bottom of the plate as a tensile wave. This 
test is interpreted in terms of the appearance of the fracture in the plate. 
At a higher temperature the plate bulges, but the cracks still run to the 
edges of the plate. At still higher temperatures the plate bulges con- 
siderably more, and the crack becomes a shear crack which is confined to 
the center of the specimen. The fracture-appearance transition temper- 
ature is selected as the temperature at which cracking is confined to the 
bulged region of the plate. For most steels this transition temperature 
will fall 40 to 60°F above the nil-ductility transition of the drop-weight 
test. The two tests supplement each other. The drop-weight test 
establishes a temperature below which the material is very susceptible 
to fracture initiation, while the explosion-bulge test establishes a temper- 
ature above which the material is immune to brittle-fracture propagation. 



14-5. SisniFicance of the Transition Temperature 

The notch toughness of a material should really be considered in 
terms of two distinct transition temperatures. Figure 14-7 shows the 
transition-temperature curves for 



t 



Ductility 

transition 

tennperature 




such an ideal material. The duc- 
tility transition temperature is re- 
lated to the fracture-initiation 
tendencies of the material. Com- 
pletely brittle cleavage fracture 
occurs readily below the ductility 
transition temperature. The frac- 
ture-appearance transition temper- 
ature is related to the crack-prop- 
agation characteristics of the 
material. Above the fracture 
transition temperature cracks do 
not propagate catastrophically, 
because fracture occurs by the 
shear mode with appreciable ab- 
sorption of energy. In the region between these two transition temper- 
atures fractures are difficult to initiate, but once initiated they propa- 
gate rapidly with little energy absorption. 

Actual materials do not have two distinct transition temperatures 
such as were shown in Fig. 14-7. Instead, Fig. 14-8 is more character- 
istic of the type of curves that are obtained with Charpy V-notch tests 
on mild steel. The ductility transition temperature usually occurs at 



Temperature — > 

Fig. 14-7. Concept of two transition 
temperatures. 



380 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 14 



an energy- level of 5 to 20 ft-lb. Frequently a value of 15 ft-lb is used to 
establish this transition temperature. The ductility transition temper- 
ature may also be determined from measurements of the contraction at 
the root of the notch. The fracture-appearance transition temperature 
is measured by the per cent shear in the fracture surface. Usually it is 
taken at the temperature at which 50 per cent fibrous fracture is obtained. 
The fracture transition temperature always occurs at a higher temper- 
ature than the ductility transition temperature. For a given material 
the fracture-appearance transition temperature is fairly constant regard- 
less of specimen geometry, notch sharpness, and rate of loading. On the 
other hand, the ductility transition temperature depends very strongly 
on the testing conditions. The ductility transition temperature is usu- 



Ductility 
transition 



Shear fracture 




Ductile 
behavior 
in service 



Difficult crack 
initiation and 
propogation 



Temperature — ^ 
Fig. 14-8. Significance of regions of transition-temperature curve. 



ally more pertinent to service performance, because if it is difficult to 
initiate a crack, then it is not necessary to worry about its propagation. 

There is no general correlation between any of the brittle-fracture tests 
and service performance. The greatest number of data exist for failed 
hull plates in welded ships. Tests on these steels showed that they all 
had Charpy V-notch values of 11.4 ft-lb or less when tested at the 
temperature at which failure occurred. Experience with rimmed and 
semikilled mild-steel plates in thicknesses up to 1 in. indicates that a 
minimum Charpy V-notch value of 15 ft-lb at the lowest operating tem- 
perature should prevent brittle fracture if the nominal stresses are of the 
order of one-half the yield point. For higher alloy steels a higher value 
of minimum impact resistance may be required. 

Part of the difficulty in correlating notch-impact data has been caused 
by failure to recognize and distinguish between the two general types 



Sec. 14-6] Brittle Failure and Impact Testing 381 

of transition-temperature criteria. Comparisons should not be made 
between test results where the two criteria have been mixed. For exam- 
ple, no correlation is found between the keyhole and V-notch Charpy 
tests when the transition temperature is measured at a level correspond- 
ing to 50 per cent of the maximum energy. This is because the 50 per 
cent energy level is close to the ductility transition for the keyhole speci- 
men but near the fracture transition for the V-notch specimen. Good 
correlation is found between the two specimens when they are both evalu- 
ated with common ductility criteria. Further, good correlation has been 
obtained' between the nil-ductility transition measured by the drop- 
weight test and the Charpy V-notch test. Good correlation has been 
shown between the drop-weight-test nil-ductility transition and service 
fractures. The correlation problem is well illustrated by the work of the 
Ship Structure Committee.^ 

14-6. Metallurgical Factors Affecting Transition Temperature 

Changes in transition temperature of over 100°F can be produced by 
changes in the chemical composition or microstructure of mild steel. 
The largest changes in transition temperature result from changes in the 
amount of carbon and manganese.^ The 15-ft-lb transition temperature 
for V-notch Charpy specimens (ductility transition) is raised about 25°F 
for each increase of 0.1 per cent carbon. This transition temperature is 
lowered about 10°F for each increase of 0.1 per cent manganese. Increas- 
ing the carbon content also has a pronounced effect on the maximum 
energy and the shape of the energy transition-temperature curves (Fig. 
14-9). The Mn:C ratio should be at least 3:1 for satisfactory notch 
toughness. A maximum decrease of about 100°F in transition temper- 
ature appears possible by going to higher Mn : C ratios. The practical 
limitations to extending this beyond 7 : 1 are that manganese contents 
above about 1.4 per cent lead to trouble with retained austenite, while 
about 0.2 per cent carbon is needed to maintain the required tensile 
properties. 

Phosphorus also has a strong effect in raising the transition temper- 
ature. The 15-ft-lb V-notch Charpy transition temperature is raised 
about 13°F for each 0.01 per cent phosphorus. Since it is necessary to 
control phosphorus, it is not generally advisable to use steel made by the 
Bessemer process for low-temperature applications. The role of nitrogen 
is difficult to assess because of its interaction with other elements. It is, 

1 H. Greenberg, Metal Progr., vol. 71, pp. 75-81, June, 1957. 

2 E. R. Parker, "Brittle Behavior of Engineering Structures," chap. 6, John Wiley 
& Sons, Inc., New York, 1957. 

3 J. A. Rinebolt and W. J. Harris. Jr.. Trans. ASM, vol. 43, pp. 1175-1214, 1951. 



382 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 14 



however, generally considered to be detrimental to notch toughness. 
Nickel is generally accepted to be beneficial to notch toughness in 
amounts up to 2 per cent and seems to be particularly effective in lower- 
ing the ductility transition temperature. Silicon, in amounts over 
0.25 per cent, appears to raise the transition temperature. Molybdenum 
raises the transition almost as rapidly as carbon, while chromium has 
little effect. 

Notch toughness is particularly influenced by oxygen. For high-purity 
iron^ it was found that oxygen contents above 0.003 per cent produced 
intergranular fracture and corresponding low energy absorption. When 
the oxygen content was raised from 0.001 per cent to the high value of 



280 



Corbon 




■200 



200 

Temperature, °F 



400 



Fig. 14-9. Effect of carbon content on the energy-transition-temperature curves for 
steel. {J. A. Rinebolt and W. J. Harris, Jr., Trans. ASM, vol. 43, p. 1197, 1951.) 

0.057 per cent, the transition temperature was raised from 5 to 650°F. 
In view of these results, it is not surprising that deoxidation practice has 
an important effect on the transition temperature. Rimmed steel, with 
its high iron oxide content, generally shows a transition temperature 
above room temperature. Semikilled steels, which are deoxidized with 
silicon, have a lower transition temperature, while for steels which are 
fully killed with silicon plus aluminum the 15 ft-lb transition temper- 
ature will be around — 75°F. Aluminum also has the beneficial effect of 
combining with nitrogen to form insoluble aluminum nitride. The use 
of a fully killed deoxidation practice is not a completely practical answer 
to the problem of making steel plate with high notch toughness because 
there is only limited capacity for this type of production. 

Grain size has a strong effect on transition temperature. An increase 

1 W. P. Rees, B. E. Hopkins, and H. R. Tipler, /. Iron Steel Inst. (London), vol. 172 
pp. 403-409, 1952. 



Sec. 14-6] Brittle Failure and Impact Testing 383 

of one ASTM number in the ferrite grain size (actually a decrease in 
grain diameter) can result in a decrease in transition temperature of 
30°F for mild steel. Decreasing the grain diameter from ASTM grain 
size 5 to ASTM grain size 10 can change the 10-ft-lb Charpy V-notch 
transition temperature^ from about 70 to — 60°F. A similar effect of 
decreasing transition temperature with decreasing austenite grain size is 
observed with higher alloyed heat-treated steels. Many of the variables 
concerned with processing mild steel affect the ferrite grain size and 
therefore affect the transition temperature. Since normalizing after hot 
rolling results in a grain refinement, if not carried out at too high a tem- 
perature, this treatment results in reduced transition temperature. The 
cooling rate from the normalizing treatment and the deoxidation practice 
are variables which also must be considered. Air cooling and aluminum 
deoxidation result in a lower transition temperature. Using the lowest 
possible finishing temperature for hot rolling of plate is also beneficial. 

For a given chemical composition and deoxidation practice, the tran- 
sition temperature will be appreciably higher in thick hot-rolled plates 
than in thin plates. This is due to the difficulty of obtaining uniformly 
fine pearlite and grain size in a thick section. Generally speaking, allow- 
ance for this effect must be made in plates greater than ^ in. in thickness. 

The notch toughness of steel is greatly influenced by microstructure. 
The best notch toughness is obtained with a microstructure which is 
completely tempered martensite. A completely pearlitic structure has 
poor notch toughness, and a structure which is predominately bainite 
is intermediate between these two. As an example of the effect of micro- 
structure on transition temperature, in an SAE 4340 steel for which a 
tempered martensitic structure and pearlitic structure were compared at 
the same hardness, it was found that the Charpy-keyhole transition tem- 
perature at 25 ft-lb was 350°F lower for the tempered martensitic struc- 
ture. Further discussion of the notch toughness of heat-treated steels 
will be found in Sec. 14-8. 

Low-carbon steels can exhibit two types of aging phenomena which 
produce an increase in transition temperature. Quench aging is caused 
by carbide precipitation in a low-carbon steel which has been quenched 
from around 1300°F. Strain aging occurs in low-carbon steel which has 
been cold-worked. Cold working by itself will increase the transition 
temperature, but strain aging results in a greater increase, usually around 
40 to 60°F. Quench aging results in less loss of impact properties than 
strain aging. The phenomenon of blue hrittleness, in which a decrease in 
impact resistance occurs on heating to around 400°F, is due to strain 
aging. 

1 W. S. Owen, D. H. Whitmore, M. Cohen, and B. L. Averbach, Welding J., vol. 36, 
pp. 503s-511s, 1957. 



384 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 14 



The notched-impact properties of rolled or forged products vary 
with orientation in the plate or bar. Figure 14-10 shows the typical 
form of the energy-temperature curves for specimens cut in the longi- 
tudinal and transverse direction of a rolled plate. Specimens A and B 
are oriented in the longitudinal direction of the plate. In specimen A 
the notch is perpendicular to the plate, while in B the notch lies parallel 
to the plate surface. The orientation of the notch in specimen A is 
generally preferred. In specimen C this notch orientation is used, but 
the specimen is oriented transverse to the rolling direction. Transverse 
specimens are used in cases where the stress distribution is such that the 
crack would propagate parallel to the rolling direction. Reference to 



80- 



:? 60- 



S40- 



l5 20- 




+40 

Temperature, °F 



+ 80 



+120 



Fig. 14-10. Effect of specimen orientation on Charpy transition-temperature curves. 

Fig. 14-10 shows that quite large differences can be expected for different 
specimen orientations at high energy levels, but the differences become 
much less at energy levels below 20 ft-lb. Since ductility transition tem- 
peratures are evaluated in this region of energy, it seems that specimen 
and notch orientation are not a very important variable for this criterion. 
If, however, materials are compared on the basis of room-temperature 
impact properties, orientation can greatly affect the results. 



14-7. Effect of Section S 



ize 



Difficulty with brittle fracture usually increases as the size of the struc- 
ture increases. This is due to both metallurgical and geometrical factors. 



Sec. 14-8] Brittle Failure and Impact Testing 385 

In the previous section it was shown that the transition temperature of a 
given steel usually decreases with increasing plate thickness because of 
the increased grain size produced in hot-rolling thick plates. However, 
Charpy tests on specimens of varying size but identical metallurgical 
structure and geometrically similar notches show that there is a size 
effect. At some temperature the largest specimens will be completely 
brittle, while the small specimens will be completely ductile. The frac- 
tures for in-between specimens will vary from almost fully ductile to 
almost fully brittle. 

A dramatic demonstration of size effect was obtained in tests of ship 
hatch corners carried out at the University of California. Full scale, 
one-half scale, and one-quarter scale models were tested. These models 
were similar in all details and were made from the same material by the 
same welding procedures. When fracture strength was measured in 
terms of pounds per square inch of the net cross-sectional area, the full- 
sized specimen had only about one-half the strength of the quarter-scale 
model. 

The higher transition temperature or lower fracture stress of large 
structures is due to two factors. The larger structure can contain a 
more unfavorable state of stress due to stress raisers, and it also pro- 
vides a large reservoir for stored elastic energy. Since the Griffith cri- 
terion requires that the elastic strain energy must provide the surface 
energy for the formation of the fracture surface, the greater the available 
stored energy, the easier it is for the attainment of an uncontrollable, 
rapidly spreading crack. 

14-8. Notch Toughness of Heat-treated Steels 

It has been demonstrated many times that a tempered martensitic 
structure produces the best combination of strength and impact resist- 
ance of any microstructure that can be produced in steel. In Chap. 9 
it was shown that the tensile properties of tempered martensites of the 
same hardness and carbon content are alike, irrespective of the amount 
of other alloy additions. This generalization holds approximately for 
the room-temperature impact resistance of heat-treated steels, but it is 
not valid for the variation of impact resistance with temperature. Fig- 
ure 14-11 shows the temperature dependence of impact resistance for a 
number of different alloy steels, all having about 0.4 per cent carbon and 
all with a tempered martensite structure produced by quenching and 
tempering to a hardness of Re 35. Note that a maximum variation of 
about 200°F in the transition temperature at the 20-ft-lb level is possible. 
Even greater spread in transition temperature would be obtained if the 
tempering temperature were adjusted to give a higher hardness.^ Slack 

1 H. J. French, Trans. AIME, vol. 206, pp. 770-782, 1956. 



386 



Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 14 



quenching so that the microstructure consists of a mixture of tempered 
martensite, bainite, and peariite results in even greater differences between 
alloy steels and in a general increase in the transition temperature. 

The energy absorbed in the impact test of an alloy steel at a given 
test temperature generally increases with increasing tempering temper- 
ature. However, there is a minimum in the curve in the general region 



80 



70 



60 



-50 



S40 



°-30 



20 



10 

























4^ 


^ 








Q 


uenc 
nart 


hed 
ensit 


to 














, , /ir\ 










r 


e 




^ 


^ 


^ 






A 




" 
















/ 


^ 


^ 


























/ 


/ 


/ 










1 
5145 
















/ 


/ 




^ 










^340 
t64C 














/ 




/ 


/ 










^ 












o -2 yj c: 












^i 


/ 




^ 


























' 


/ 


1 


/ 
























/ 


h 


fl 


\. 


/ 
























/ 


/ 


A 


V 






















J^ 


4 


V 


/ 


r 






















=^ 


^ 


^ 

_> 


V 


























X 


/ 


^3 


\^ 


























y 































































-300 -200 



100 100 

Test temperature. 



200 



300 



400 



Fig. 14-11. Temperature dependence of impact resistance for different alloy steels 
of same carbon content, quenched and tempered to Re 35. {H. J. French, Trans. 
AIMS, vol. 206, p. 770, 1956.) 



of 400 to 600°r (Fig. 14-12). This has been called 500°F emhrittlement, 
but because the temperature at which it occurs depends on both the 
composition of the steel and the tempering time, a more appropriate 
name is tempered-martensite emhrittlement. Emhrittlement of steel in this 
tempering region is one of the chief deterrents to using steels at strength 
levels much above 200,000 psi. Studies of this emhrittlement phenome- 
non have shown' that it is due to the precipitation of platelets of cementite 

iL. J. Klingler, W. J. Barnett, R. P. Frohmberg, and A. R. Troiano, Trans. ASM, 
vol. 46, pp. 1557-1598, 1954. 



14-9] 



Brittle Failure and Impact Testing 387 



from e-carbide during the second stage of tempering. These platelets 
have no effect on the reduction of area of a tensile specimen, but they 
severely reduce the impact resistance. They can be formed at temper- 
atures as low as 212°F and as high as 800°F, depending on the time 
allowed for the reaction. Silicon additions of around 2.25 per cent are 



50 
45 
40 
35 
30 



|-25 



4330 8 4340: Ch 
Klingler, Bornett, 


orpy 
Frohm 


V- notch 
berg, 












and Troiano 1 
2340 a 4140: Charpy keyhole-notch 




/ 


1 






bros 


smann 














y 






















/ 


/ 










'l 


^ 


^ 


i 






/ 










^ 








V. 






















\^ 


■ 


/ 














^ 


/ 


^i^ 








/ 












^ 




1^ 


^ 


- 




^ 



































200 



400 600 800 

Tempering temperature, °F 



1000 



1200 



Fig. 1 4-1 2. Effect of tempering temperature on impact resistance at room temperature 
for four alloy steels quenched to martensite. {fl. J. French, Trans. AIMS, vol. 206, 
p. 770, 1956.) 

effective in increasing the temperature at which the platelets precipitate, 
and this permits tempering in the region 500 to 600°F, without severe 
embrittlement. 



14-9. Temper Embrittlement 

Temper embrittlement^ refers to a loss in notch toughness of plain- 
carbon and alloy steels when exposed at temperatures above about 700°E" 
but below the temperature for the formation of austenite. Alloy steels 
are particularly susceptible to embrittlement when they are tempered in 
the region 800 to 1100°F or slow-cooled through this temperature range. 

1 The extensive literature in this field has been reviewed by B. C. Woodfine, J. 
Iron Steel Inst. (London), vol. 173, pp. 229-240, 1953, and L. D. Jaffe, Welding J., 
vol. 34, pp. 1412-1502, 1955. 



388 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 14 

This can become a particularly important problem with heavy sections 
that cannot be cooled through this region rapidly enough to suppress 
embrittlement. Temper embrittlement also can be produced by iso- 
thermal treatments in this temperature region. The kinetics of the 
process produces a C-shaped curve when some parameter of embrittle- 
ment is plotted on temperature-time coordinates. More rapid embrittle- 
ment results from slow cooling through the critical temperature region 
than from isothermal treatment. Temper enibrittlement can be com- 
pletely eliminated from an embrittled steel by heating into the austenite 
region and cooling rapidly through the embrittling temperature region. 

The presence of temper embrittlement is usually determined by meas- 
uring the transition temperature by means of a notched-bar impact test. 
The hardness and tensile properties are not sensitive to the embrittle- 
ment, except for very extreme cases, but the transition temperature can 
be increased around 200°F by ordinary embrittling heat treatments. The 
fracture of a temper-embrittled steel is intergranular, while the brittle 
fracture of a nonembrittled steel is transgranular. This suggests that 
temper brittleness is due to a grain-boundary weakness. However, no 
evidence for a grain-boundary film or precipitate has been uncovered 
from studies by means of the electron microscope of the microstructure 
of temper-embrittled steel. Therefore it is generally hypothesized that 
temper embrittlement is due to the segregation of impurities to the grain 
boundaries without the formation of an observable precipitate phase. 
The effect of various alloying elements on this embrittlement can then be 
explained on the basis of their rates of diffusion and relative solubilities 
at the grain boundaries and within the grains. Much more information 
is needed before a detailed mechanism of temper embrittlement can be 
determined. 

Molybdenum is the only alloying element which decreases the suscepti- 
bility to temper embrittlement. The best solution to the problem is to 
avoid tempering in the region of greatest susceptibility to embrittlement. 
Tempering at a higher temperature for a short time may be better than 
a long tempering treatment at a lower temperature. A water quench 
from the tempering temperature will serve to minimize embrittlement 
on cooling. 

14-10. Hydroscn Embrittlement 

Severe embrittlement can be produced in many metals by very small 
amounts of hydrogen. Body-centered cubic and hexagonal close-packed 
metals are most susceptible to hydrogen embrittlement. As little as 
0.0001 weight per cent of hydrogen can cause cracking in steel. Face- 
centered cubic metals are not generally susceptible to hydrogen embrittle- 



14-10] 



Brittle Failure and Impact Testing 389 



ment.^ Hydrogen may be introduced during melting and entrapped 
during solidification, or it may be picked up during heat treatment, 
electroplating, acid pickling, or welding. 

The chief characteristics of hydrogen embrittlement are its strain-rate 
sensitivity, its temperature dependence, and its susceptibility to delayed 
fracture. Unlike most embrittling phenomena, hydrogen embrittlement 
is enhanced by slow strain rates. At low^ temperatures and high tem- 
peratures hydrogen embrittlement is negligible, but it is most severe in 
some intermediate temperature region. For steel the region of greatest 
susceptibility to hydrogen embrittlement is in the vicinity of room tem- 
perature. Slow bend tests and notched and unnotched tension tests will 
detect hydrogen embrittlement by a drastic decrease in ductility, but 
notched-impact tests are of no use for detecting the phenomenon. 

A common method of studying hydrogen embrittlement is to charge 
notched tensile specimens with know^n amounts of hydrogen, load them 
to different stresses in a dead-weight machine, and observe the time to 
failure. A typical delayed-fracture curve is shown in Fig. 14-13. Note 
that the notched tensile strength of 
a charged specimen may be much 
lower than the strength of a hydro- 
gen-free specimen. There is a re- 
gion in which the time to fracture 
depends only slightly on the applied 
stress. There is also a minimum 
critical value below which delayed 
fracture wnll not occur. The simi- 
larity of the delayed fracture curve 
to the fatigue S-N curve has led to 
the use of the term "static fatigue" 
for the delayed-fracture phenome- 
non. The minimum critical stress, 

or "static fatigue limit," increases with a decrease in hydrogen content 
or a decrease in the severity of the notch. The hydrogen content of 
steel may be reduced by "baking," or heating at around 300 to 500°F. 

Hydrogen is present in solution as monatomic hj^drogen. Because it is 
a small interstitial atom, it diffuses very rapidly at temperatures above 
room temperatvire. A commonly held concept of hydrogen embrittle- 
ment is that monatomic hydrogen precipitates at internal voids as 
molecular hydrogen. These voids might be true voids, microcracks, or 
perhaps simply regions of high dislocation density. As hydrogen diffuses 

1 The familiar example of the embrittlement of copper by hydrogen at elevated 
temperature is due to the reaction of hydrogen with oxygen to form internal pockets 
of steam. 





/!/o Ay 





---.ZL^f^gen 


o200 

o 

o_ 


^ 


|]00 


. A 


"q. 


x^arged with hydrogen 


< 







1 1 1 1 1 



0.01 



0.1 1 10 100 

Time to fracture, hr 



1,000 



Fis. 14-13. Delayed-fracture curve. 



390 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 14 

into the voids, the pressure builds up and produces fracture. While this 
concept explains the general idea of hydrogen embrittlement, it is not in 
agreement with all the experimental facts. Further insight into the 
mechanism has resulted from the work of Troiano and coworkers.^ By 
determining the rate of crack propagation by means of resistivity meas- 
urements they were able to show that the crack propagates discontinu- 
ously. This indicates that the rate of crack propagation is controlled by 
the diffusion of hydrogen to the region of high triaxial stress just ahead 
of the crack tip. When a critical hydrogen concentration is obtained, 
a small crack forms and grows, to link up with the previous main crack. 
The fact that the time for the initiation of the first crack has been found 
to be insensitive to applied stress supports the idea that the proc- 
ess depends on the attainment of a critical hydrogen concentration. 
The main effect of stress is to assist in the accumulation of this concen- 
tration. The minimum critical stress in Fig. 14-13 can be interpreted 
as the stress needed to cause a critical accumulation of hydrogen. The 
higher the average hydrogen content, the lower the necessary critical 
stress. 

The formation of hairline cracks, or flakes, in large ingots and forgings 
during cooling or room-temperature aging has long been attributed to the 
presence of hydrogen. Studies^ of flake formation have shown that in 
addition to containing hydrogen the steel must be subjected to transfor- 
mation stresses for flaking to occur. The hydrogen content necessary 
for flaking varies widely with composition, size, and segregation. Flakes 
have been observed in steel with as low as 3 ppm of hydrogen. On the 
other hand, very high amounts of hydrogen can be tolerated without 
causing flakes if the transformation stresses are minimized by decom- 
posing the austenite above the Ms temperature before cooling to room 
temperature. 

14-11. Flow and Fracture under Very Rapid Rates of Loading 

The mechanical properties of metals can be appreciably changed when 
they are subjected to very rapidly applied loads. Shock loading can be 
produced by high-velocity impact machines^ or by shock waves from the 
detonation of explosives.* In considering dynamic loading of this type 
it is important to consider effects due to stress-wave propagation within 

1 A. R. Troiano, Trans. ASM, vol. 52, pp. 54-80, 1960. 

2 A. W. Dana, F. J. Shortsleeve, and A. R. Troiano, Trans. AIME, vol. 203, pp. 
895-905, 1955. 

3 P. E. Duwez and D. S. Clark, Proc. ASTM, vol. 47, pp. 502-532, 1947. 

^ J. S. Rinehart and J. Pearson, "Behavior of Metals under Impulsive Loads," 
American Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1954. 



Sec. 14-11] Brittle Failure and Impact Testing 391 

the metal.' This is because a rapidly applied load is not instantaneously 
transmitted to all parts of the loaded body. Rather, at a brief instant 
after the load has been applied the remote portions of the body remain 
undisturbed. The deformation and stress produced by the load move 
through the body in the form of a wave that travels with a velocity ot 
the order of several thousand feet per second. Compression waves are 
generated in a metal when it is subjected to an explosive blast (impulsive 
loading), while tensile waves can be produced by a tension-impac\ 
machine. The propagation velocity of a compressive or tensile stress 
wave is given by 

c. = ('^' (14-1) 



where Co = velocity of wave propagation 
da/de = slope of stress-strain curve 
p = density of metal 
If the wave amplitude is low, so that the elastic limit is not exceeded, 
Eq. (14-1) can be written 

Co = (-T (14-2) 



Corresponding to the wave velocity co, a certain particle velocity Vp is 
produced in the metal. The wave velocity and particle velocity are in 
the same direction for a compressive wave, but they are in opposite direc- 
tions for a tensile wave. The particle velocity Vp is related to the wave 
velocity co by the following equations: 

Vp = f\,de = ~ ("— (14-3) 

Jo P Jo Co 

These equations can be used to determine the stress or strain in a dynami- 
cally loaded metal provided that the wave and particle velocities can be 
determined. When a bar is subjected to tension impact, it is found that 
there is a critical velocity which produces rupture at the impacted end 
at the instant of impact. By combining Eqs. (14-1) and (14-3) the 
equation for the critical velocity is obtained. 

where €„ is the strain corresponding to the tensile strength of the metal. 
For shock loads below Vu the bar would undergo deformation but would 
not fracture. The value of critical impact velocity for most metals lies 
in the range of 200 to 500 ft/sec. 

1 H. Kolsky, "Stress Waves in Solids," Oxford University Press, New York, 1953- 



392 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 1 4 

Measurement of the dynamic stress-strain curve is difficult because of 
the short time during which events occur and because care must be taken 
to consider all wave-propagation phenomena. The information which is 
available indicates that for shock loading the stress-strain curve is raised 
about 10 to 20 per cent compared with the static curve. There is gener- 
ally an increase in the energy to fracture with increasing impact velocity 
up to the point where the critical velocity is reached. 

Marked differences occur between fracture under impulsive loads and 
under static loads. With impulsive loads there is not time for the stress 
to be disturbed throughout the entire body, so that fracture can occur in 
one part of the body independently of what happens in another part. 
The velocity of propagation of stress waves in solids lies in the range 
3,000 to 20,000 ft/sec, while the velocity of crack propagation is about 
6,000 ft/sec. Therefore, with impulsive loads it may be found that 
cracks have formed but did not have time to propagate before the stress 
state changed. Reflections of stress waves occur at free surfaces and 
fixed ends, at changes in cross section, and at discontinuities within the 
metal. A compression wave is reflected from a surface as a tension wave, 
and it is this reflected tension wave which in most cases causes fracture 
under impulsive loading. When a thick plate is subjected to explosive 
loading against one surface, the interference from the incident and 
reflected wave from the opposite surface will cause a tensile stress to be 
built up a short distance from the opposite surface. The tensile stress 
may be high enough to cause fracture, and the plate is said to have 
scabbed. From studying^ the thickness of the scabs it is possible to 
arrive at values for a critical normal fracture stress. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Parker, E. R.: "Brittle Behavior of Engineering Structures," John Wiley & Sons 
Inc., New York, 1957. 

Queneau, B. R. : "The Embrittlement of Metals," American Society for Metals, 
Metals Park, Ohio, 1956. 

Shank, M. E.: "Control of Steel Construction to Avoid Brittle Failure," Welding 
Research Council, New York, 1957. 

Symposium on Effect of Temperature on the Brittle Behavior of Metals with Par- 
ticular Reference to Low Temperatures, ASTM Spec. Tech. Publ. 158, 1954. 

Tipper, C. F.: The Brittle Fracture of Metals at Atmospheric and Sub-zero Temper- 
atures, Met. Reviews, vol. 2, no. 7, pp. 195-261, 1957. 

1 J. S. Rinehart, J. Appl. Phys., vol. 22, p. 555, 1951; On Fractures Caused by 
Explosions and Impacts, Quart. Colo. School Mines, vol. 55, no. 4, October, 1960. 



Chapter 15 

RESIDUAL STRESSES 



1 5-1 . Origin of Residual Stresses 

Residual stresses are the system of stresses which can exist in a body 
when it is free from external forces. They are sometimes referred to as 
internal stresses, or locked-in stresses. Residual stresses are produced 
whenever a body undergoes nonuniform plastic deformation. For exam- 
ple, consider a metal sheet which is being rolled under conditions such 
that plastic flow occurs only near the surfaces of the sheet (Fig. 15-la). 






(a) id) 

Fig. 15-1. (a) Inhomogeneous deformation in rolling of sheet; (6) resulting distribu- 
tion of longitudinal residual stress over thickness of sheet (schematic). 

The surface fibers of the sheet are cold-worked and tend to elongate, 
while the center of the sheet is unchanged. Since the sheet must remain 
a continuous whole, the surface and center of the sheet must undergo a 
strain accommodation. The center fibers tend to restrain the surface 
fibers from elongating, while the surface fibers seek to stretch the central 
fibers of the sheet The result is a residual-stress pattern in. the sheet 

393 



394 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 15 

which consists of a high compressive stress at the surface and a tensile 
residual stress at the center of the sheet (Fig. 15-16). In general, the 
sign of the residual stress which is produced by inhomogeneous defor- 
mation will be opposite to the sign of the plastic strain which produced 
the residual stress. Thus, for the case of the rolled sheet, the surface 
fibers which were elongated in the longitudinal direction by rolling are 
left in a state of compressive residual stress when the external load is 
removed. 

The residual-stress system existing in a body must be in static equi- 
librium. Thus, the total force acting on any plane through the body 
and the total moment of forces on any plane must be zero. For the 
longitudinal stress pattern in Fig. 15-16 this means that the area under 
the curve subjected to compressive residual stresses must balance the 
area subjected to tensile residual stresses. The situation is not quite so 
simple as is pictured in Fig. 15-1. Actually, for a complete analysis, the 
residual stresses acting across the width and thickness of the sheet should 
be considered, and the state of residual stress at any point is a combined 
stress derived from the residual stresses in the three principal directions. 
Frequently, because of symmetry, only the residual stress in one direc- 
tion need be considered. A complete determination of the state of resid- 
ual stress in three dimensions is a very considerable undertaking. 

Residual stresses are to be considered as only elastic stresses. The 
maximum value which the residual stress can reach is the elastic limit 
of the material. A stress in excess of this value, with no external force 
to oppose it, will relieve itself by plastic deformation until it reaches the 
value of the yield stress. 

It is important to distinguish between macro residual stresses and 
microstresses. Macro residual stresses, with which this chapter is pri- 
marily concerned, vary continuously through the volume of the body 
and act over regions which are large compared with atomic dimensions. 
Microstresses, or textural stresses, act over dimensions as small as several 
unit cells, although their effects may extend throughout most of a grain. 
Because of the anisotropy of the elastic properties of crystals, micro- 
stresses will vary greatly from grain to grain. The back stress developed 
by a pile-up of dislocations is an example of this type of residual stress. 
Another example is the precipitation of second-phase particles from solid 
"solution. If the precipitate particles occupy a larger volume than the 
;omponents from which they formed, i.e., if the second-phase particles 
have a lower density than the matrix, then each particle in t'^ying to 
occupy a larger volume is compressed by the matrix. This, in turn, 
develops tensile stresses in the matrix in directions radial and tangential 
to the second-phase particles. The experimental determination of these 
localized stresses in two-phase systems is very difficult, although measure- 



Sec. 15-1] Residual Stresses 395 

ments of their average value have been made with X rays.''^ Calcu- 
lations of the microstresses existing in two-phase systems have been made 
by Lazlo/ who uses the terminology "tessellated stresses" for this type 
of residual stress. The determination of the microstresses which exist in 
plastically deformed single-phase metals is necessary for an understand- 
ing of the mechanism of strain hardening. Estimates of these micro- 
stresses can be made from detailed analysis of the broadening of X-ray 
diffraction lines. Further improvements on the techniques are needed 
before these measurements can be used without ambiguity. 

Residual stresses arise from nonuniform plastic deformation of a body. 
The principal methods by which this can occur are by inhomogeneous 
changes in volume and in shape. A third source of residual stress may 
exist in built-up assemblies, such as welded structures. Even though 
the structure is not subjected to external loads, different members of the 
structure may be under stress due to various interactions between the 
members of the assembly. This type of residual stress is called reaction 
stress. Because it falls in the area of structural engineering, it will not 
be considered further in this chapter. 

The precipitation of second-phase particles in a metal matrix is an 
example of a nonuniform volume change which produces very localized 
micro residual stresses. However, if the reaction does not proceed uni- 
formly over the cross section of the body because of differences in either 
chemical composition or rate of heat transfer, there will be a variation 
in the distribution of microstresses which will produce macro residual 
stresses. Nitriding and carburizing are processes in which a microstress 
distribution is produced around each nitride or carbide particle, but 
because these diffusion-controlled reactions occur only on the surface, 
there is a nonuniform volume increase in this region. Thus, a macro 
compressive residual stress is produced on the surface, and this is bal- 
anced by tensile residual stresses in the interior. The phase transfor- 
mation from austenite to martensite which occurs during the quenching 
of steel is an outstanding example of a nonuniform volume change lead- 
ing to high residual stresses. Because of the technological importance 
of this situation, it will be considered in a separate section of this chapter. 

Volume changes need not necessarily involve rapid quenching or phase 
changes to produce residual stresses. In the cooling of a large, hot ingot 
of a metal w^hich shows no phase change, the temperature differences 
which are present between the surface and the center may be enough to 

1 J. Gurland, Trans. ASM, vol. 50, pp. 1063-1071, 1958. 

2 C. J. Newton and H. C. Vacher, J. Research Natl. Bur. Standards, vol. 59, pp. 239- 
243, 1957. 

" For a review of Lazlo's exten:sivo and detailed work, see F. R. N. Nabarro, "Sym 
posiuni on Internal Stresses," p. Gl, In.-titute of .^!etals, London, 1948. 



396 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 1 5 



develop residual stresses.^ The edges of a hot slab cool faster than the 
center. The thermal contraction of the cooler edges produces a strain 
mismatch between the edges and center of the ingot which results in the 
distribution of longitudinal stresses shown in Fig. 15-26. Since the hot 
center has a lower yield stress, it cannot support the compressive stress 
imposed on that region and because of plastic deformation the center of 
the ingot shrinks to relieve some of the stress (Fig. 15-2c). When the 
center of the slab finally cools, the total contraction will be greater for 
the center than the edges because the center contracts owing to both 
cooling and plastic deformation (Fig. l5-2d). The center will then be 
stressed in residual tension, and the edges will be in compression. 






ia) 



(d) 



ic) 




Fig. 15-2. Development of residual stresses during cooling of a hot ingot. Cool 
portions shown shaded. {After W. M. Baldwin, Jr., Proc. ASTM, vol. 49, p. 541, 
1949.) 



The forming operations required to convert metals to finished and 
semifinished shapes rarely produce homogeneous deformation of the 
metal. Each particular plastic forming process has a residual-stress 
distribution which is characteristic of the process and is influenced to a 
certain extent by the way in which the process has been carried out. 
Earlier in this section we have seen how the residual stress in the rolling 
direction of a sheet results from inhomogeneous deformation through the 
thickness of the sheet. 

Other metalworking operations which are not generally classed as 
metal-forming processes can produce residual stresses because they 
involve inhomogeneous deformation. Spot welding and butt welding 
both produce high tensile stresses at the center of the area of application 
of heat. Shot peening, surface hammering, and surface rolling produce 
shallow biaxial compressive stresses on a surface which are balanced by 
biaxial tension stresses in the interior. As was noted in Chap. 12, shot 
peening is an effective method of reducing fatigue failures. Residual 

1 W. M. Baldwin, Jr., Proc. ASTM, vol. 49, pp. 539-583. 1949. 



)ec. 



1 5-2] Residual Stresses 397 



stresses are developed in electroplated coatings. Soft coatings such as 
lead, cadmium, and zinc creep sufficiently at room temperature to relieve 
most of tfiese plating stresses. Hard coatings like chromium and nickel 
can have either high tensile or compressive residual stresses, depending 
upon the conditions of the plating process. 

The superposition of several deformation operations does not produce 
a final residual-stress distribution which is the algebraic sum of the stress 
distributions produced by the preceding operations. In general, the final 
deformation process determines the resulting residual-stress pattern. 
However, superposition of stress distributions is a valid procedure when 
one is considering the effect of residual stress on the response of a body 
to an external stress system. For all practical purposes residual stresses 
can be considered the same as ordinary applied stresses. Thus, a com- 
pressive residual stress will reduce the effectiveness of an applied tensile 
stress in producing fatigue failure, and residual tensile stresses will 
increase the ease with which failure occurs. 

1 5-2. Effects of Residual Stresses 

The presence of residual stresses can influence the reaction of a mate- 
rial to externally applied stresses. In the tension test, that region of a 
specimen containing high residual tensile stresses will yield plastically at 
a lower value of applied stress than a specimen without residual stresses. 
Conversely, compressive residual stresses will increase the yield stress. 
This fact is used to strengthen gun tubes and pressure vessels by the 
process known as autofrettage. In autofrettage thick-walled cylinders are 
purposely strained beyond the elastic limit of the material at the bore of 
the cylinder so that this region will contain compressive residual stresses 
when the cylinder is unloaded. In a relatively brittle material like high- 
strength steel the presence of tensile residual stresses can cause a decrease 
in the fracture strength. The possibility of unknown residual stresses 
existing at the root of machined notches is a problem in notch tensile 
testing. The effect of residual stresses on fatigue performance is a well- 
recognized phenomenon and was considered in Sec. 12-9. 

Residual stresses are responsible for warping and dimensional insta- 
bility. If part of a body containing residual stresses is machined away, 
as in machining a long keyway in a cold-drawn bar, the residual stresses 
in the material removed are also eliminated. This upsets the static equi- 
librium of internal forces and moments, and the body distorts to establish 
a new equilibrium condition. Warping due to redistribution of residual 
stresses when surface layers are removed can be exceedingly troublesome, 
particularly with precision parts like tools and dies. However, there is 
a useful aspect to this, for as will be seen in the next section, the measure- 



398 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 15 

ment of dimensional changes when material is removed from a body is 
one of the established methods for measuring residual stresses. Dimen- 
sional instability refers to changes in dimensions which occur without 
any removal of material. These changes result from the deformation 
required to maintain equilibrium when the residual-stress distribution 
changes from stress relaxation on long-time room-temperature aging. 
The residual-stress pattern in steels may also be altered by the transfor- 
mation of retained austenite to martensite on aging. 

Stress corrosion cracking^ is a type of failure which occurs when cer- 
tain metals are subjected to stress in specific chemical enviroments. 
Residual stress is just as effective as stress due to an externally applied 
load in producing stress corrosion cracking. Examples of combinations 
which produce stress corrosion cracking are mercury or ammonia com- 
pounds with brass (season cracking) and chlorides with austenitic stain- 
less steels and certain age-hardenable aluminum alloys. Extreme care 
should be taken to minimize residual stress when these situations are 
likely to be encountered. In fact, accelerated stress corrosion cracking 
may be used as a qualitative test to indicate the presence of residual 
stresses. Typical solutions which are used for this purpose are listed 
below: 

1. Brass-mercurous nitrate in water; standardized for detection of 
residual stress in brass cartridge cases (ASTM B154) 

2. Austenitic stainless steel-boiling solution of 10 per cent H2SO4 and 
10 per cent CUSO4, or boiling MgCl2 

3. Mild steel-boiling NaOH 

4. Aluminum-NaCl solution 

5. Magnesium-potassium chromate solution 

1 5-3. Mechanical Methods for Residual-stress Measurement 

Residual stresses cannot be determined directly from strain-gage 
measurements, as is the case for stresses due to externally applied loads. 
Rather, residual stresses are calculated from the measurements of strain 
that are obtained when the body is sectioned and the locked-in residual 
stresses are released. 

The method developed by Bauer and Heyn- for measuring the longi- 
tudinal residual stresses in a cylinder is a good illustration of the tech- 
niques involved. The residual stresses in the cylinder can be likened to 
a system of springs (Fig. 15-3). In this example the cylindrical bar is 
assumed to contain tensile residual stresses around the periphery and 

^A review of this important subject is given by W. D. Robertson (ed.), "Stress 
Corrosion Cracking and Embrittlement," John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1956. 
2 E. Heyn and O. Bauer, Intern. Z. MetaUog., vol. 1, pp. 16-50, 1911. 



Sec. 15-3] 



Residual Stresses 



399 



compressive stresses at the center. By the spring analogy, the center 
springs would be compressed and the outer springs elongated (Fig. 15-.3a). 
Now, if the static equilibrium of forces is upset by removing the outer 
springs, the compressed springs will elon- 
gate (Fig. 15-36). The amount of elon- ^— 1--. 
gation experienced by the center springs 
is directly proportional to the force ex- 
erted on them by the outer springs. 

The strain experienced by the core 
is dei = dLi/L, where Li is the expanded 
length of the element. The stress re- 
lieved by this expansion, o-f, is related 
to the strain through Hooke's law. 

(Tc = E dei 

Since the cylinder was initially in equi- 
librium before the skin was removed, 
the force in the center core must 
balance the force in the removed mate- 
rial. 




[a) 



[d) 



AiE dei = -Pskin 



Fig. 1 5-3. (a) Heyn's spring model 
for longitudinal residual stresses in 
a cylinder; (b) elongation of center 
portion, due to removal of restraint 
of outer springs. 



If Ao is the original area of the cylin- 
drical bar, then the area of the skin is 

dAi = Aq — Ai. The average stress existing in the skin is as, so that 
the force in the skin may be written 

Pskin = asdAi 

Equating the force in the core and the skin results in an equation for the 
average stress in the skin. 

AiE dei 



dAi 



(15-1) 



The above equation expresses the residual stress when it has the very 
arbitrary distribution shown in Fig. 15-4a. Actually, the distribution 
of longitudinal residual stress is more likely to vary in the continuous 
manner shown in Fig. 15-46. 

The residual-stress distribution shown in Fig. 15-46 can be determined 
by the Bauer and Heyn method if the stresses are determined by remov- 
ing thin layers and measuring the deformation in the remaining portion. 
If sufficiently thin layers are removed and the process is repeated enough 
times, the measured stress distribution will approach the distribution 
shown in Fig. 15-46. When the stress distribution is measured by the 



400 



Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 15 



successive removal of thin layers, Eq. (15-1) gives the residual stress in 
the first layer removed. However, this equation will not give a true 

indication of the actual stress which 
originally existed in the second radial 
layer of the bar, because the removal 
of the first layer from, the bar has 
caused a redistribution of stress in 
the remainder of the bar. The 
actual stress in the second layer as it 
existed in the original bar is given by 

AiE de2 
dA2 



o 

tr 
1— 

t 


^ 




7/ 


I 




^^//////^ 




o 

O) 
Q. 

F 










-> " ia) (Z>) 

Fig. 15-4. Variation of longitudinal 
residual stress over the diameter of a 
bar. (a) Arbitrary case with constant 
residual stress; (b) realistic case with 
continuously varying stress from sur- 
face to center. 



0-2 = 



- E dei (15-2) 



where A2 is the area of the cylinder 
remaining after layer dAi has been 
removed. In determining the stress 
in succeeding layers a correction 
must be made for the stress relief due to all previous layer removals. 
AnE den 



dAn 



E{dei + de2 + dez + 



+ den-i) 



(15-3) 



If layers of differential thickness are removed, Eq. (15-3) may be written 

de 



= E 



Equation (15-4) may be used to determine the longitudinal residual stress 
at any radial position in the bar. The best procedure is to plot the axial 
strain e after each layer removal against the area of the remaining bar, A . 
Connecting the points for successive layers will give a smooth curve. 
For any radial position, given by A, this curve will give the value of e, 
and the slope of the curve at the point e, A, will be de/dA. 

The Bauer and Heyn method has been considered in considerable detail 
because it is a simple illustration of the methods used to convert measure- 
ments of strain into residual stresses. However, this technique can give 
values which are considerably in error because it does not consider tan- 
gential or radial residual stresses. In general, a bar will contain residual 
stresses in all three principal directions. The presence of transverse or 
radial stresses can result in up to 30 per cent error in the determination 
of the longitudinal residual stresses. 

Sachs Boring-out Method 

An exact method of determining the longitudinal, tangential, and radial 
residual stresses in bars or tubes was proposed by Mesnager^ and modified 
1 M. Mesnager, Compt. rend., vol. 169, pp. 1391-1393, 1919. 



Sec. 15-3] 



Residual Stresses 



401 



by Sachs. ^ This method is commonly known as the Sachs boring-out 
technique. The method is Hmited to cylindrical bodies in which the 
residual stresses vary in the radial direction but are constant in the 
longitudinal and circumferential directions. This is not a particularly 
restrictive condition since bars and tubes made by most forming oper- 
ations have the required symmetrical residual-stress pattern. 

In using this technique with a solid bar the first step is to drill an 
axial hole. Then a boring bar is used to remove layers from the inside 
diameter of the hollow cylinder, extreme care being taken to prevent 
overheating. About 5 per cent of cross-sectional area should be removed 
between each measurement of strain. To eliminate end effects, the 
specimen length should be at least three times the diameter. After each 
layer is removed from the bore, measurements are made of longitudinal 
strain cl and tangential strain ei. 



eL 
et 



Li — Lq 

Di - Do 
Do 



The changes in length L and diameter D may be measured with microme- 
ters, but better accuracy can be obtained by mounting SR-4 strain gages^'^ 
in the longitudinal and circumferential directions of the bar. 

In accordance with the Sachs analysis, the longitudinal and tangential 
strains are combined in two parameters. 

A = cl + vet 
6 = e< + veL 

The longitudinal, tangential, and radial stresses can then be expressed by 
the following equations, 



at = E' 

<Jr = E' 



{Ao - A) 



clA 



iA.-A)f^- 



A 

Ao + A 
2A 



e 



(15-5) 



(^i-'e) 



» G. Sachs, Z. Metallk., vol. 19, pp. 352-357, 1927. 

^ J. J. Lynch, "Residual Stress Measurements," pp. 51-52, American Society for 
Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1952. 

' A critical evaluation of experimental procedures has been presented by R. A. 
Dodd, Metallurgia, vol. 45, pp. 109-114, 1952. 



402 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 1 5 



where E' = E/(l - v"") 

Ao = original area of cylinder 
A = area of bored-out portion of cylinder 
V = Poisson's ratio 
In using the above equations it is convenient to plot the strain parame- 
ters and A as functions of the bored-out area A. The slopes of these 
curves are then used in the above equations. To estimate the stress 
along the axis of the bar or at the bore of a tube, it is necessary to extrapo- 
late the A versus A and 9 versus A curves to ^ =0. Similarly, to deter- 
mine the stresses on the outer surface of the bar, these curves should be 
extrapolated to Jl = ^o- There is a limit to how closely the bored-out 
diameter can approach the outside diameter of the bar without buckling. 
Since the residual stress near the outer surface may be rapidly changing 
with radial distance an extrapolation in this region may be in error. One 
way to get a better estimate of the stresses near the outside surface of the 
bar is to measure the changes in diameter of the axial hole while metal is 
removed from the outer surface of the bar. The Sachs equations for this 
case are given below, 



(TL = E' 
E' 



CFt 



(A-^.)^-A 



(A - An) 



de A + Ah 



dA 



2A 



e 



(15-6) 



= -E 



'(^'^) 



where Ah = area of bored-out hole 

A = area of cylinder after each layer removal 
A method for accurately determining both the longitudinal and tangential 
(circumferential) residual stresses in thin-walled tubing has been described 
by Sachs and Espey.^ 

Treuting-Read Method 

Treuting and Read^ developed a method for determining the biaxial 
residual-stress state on the surface of a thin sheet. The method assumes 
that the metal behaves in an elastically homogeneous manner and that 
the stress varies, not in the plane of the sheet, but only through the 
thickness. To apply the method, the sheet specimen is cemented to a 
flat parallel surface, and the thickness is reduced a certain amount by 
careful polishing and etching. The sheet specimen is then released from 

1 G. Sachs and G. Espey, Trans. AIMS, vol. 147, pp. 74-88, 1942; see also Lynch, 
op. cit., pp. 87-92. 

2 R. G. Treuting and W. T. Read, J. Appl. Phys., vol. 22, pp. 130-134, 1951. 



>ec. 



15-4] 



Residual Stresses 



403 



the surface, and measurements are made of the longitudinal radius of 
curvature Rx, the transverse radius of curvature Ry and the thickness t. 
Figure 15-5 illustrates the orientation of the principal stresses and the 
curvature of the sheet. 

The measured values of radius of curvature are expressed in terms of 
two parameters Px and Py. 



p. = ^ + ^ 

Rx Rv 



Py = — + — 
Ry Rx 



Measurements of Rx and Ry are made for different amounts of metal 
removal, and Px and Py are plotted against the sheet thickness t. The 



f 



/ 





/a> 




} 




\ ., J 



r 



^0 



(a) 




{b) 



Fig. 15-5. (a) Coordinate system for measuring biaxial stress in thin sheet; (6) curva- 
ture produced by removing material from top surface. 

residual stresses in the x and y directions of the sheet are determined for 
any value of t by the following equations: 



Cu — — 





E 




6(1 


E 


v') 


6(1 


- 


v'A 



(/o + /)2 ^ + 4(<o + t)Px + 2 r P. dt 



dP 

{u + ty^ + A{t, + t)Py + 2 



Pydt 



(15-7) 



Values of dP/dt are obtained from the slope of the curves of P versus t, 
and the integrals are evaluated by determining the area under the P 
versus t curve over the appropriate limits. 



1 5-4. DeHection Methods 

Complete analysis of the residual stresses in the principal directions 
and their variation with depth in the body by the methods described in 
the previous section is a laborous procedure. It is not uncommon to 



404 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 1 5 



find that nearly 40 hr is required for the complete analysis of a single 
specimen. Therefore, approximate methods which are more rapid but 
less accurate have been developed. Since the techniques involve a 
mechanical slitting of the specimen and measurement of the deflection 
of the slit element, they are usually called deflection methods. Deflection 
methods can be applied when it is reasonable to assume that the stress 
varies linearly through the thickness of a plate or tube but is constant 
along the length, width, or circumference. Actually, the stress distri- 



^' 



28 



"Residual stress 
distribution 




(a) 



^^' 





2S +2r 



Fig. 1 5-6. Determination of longitudinal residual stress by deflection method, (a) 
Rolled sheet; (Jo) drawn rod. 



bution through the thickness is rarely linear. The formulas that are 
presented below give the residual stress only at the surface of the body 
and consider the stress only in one particular direction. Although this 
is usually the direction of the maximum stress, it should be realized that 
the presence of stresses in the other principal directions can affect its 
value. - , 

Rolled Sheet 

The longitudinal residual stress at the surface of a rolled sheet can be 
determined by splitting the sheet down its central plane to release the 
bending moment which existed in the body' (Fig. 15-6a). The bending 

^ Lynch, op. at., pp. 81-82. 



Sec. 15-4] Residual Stresses 405 

moment in this sheet may be expressed as follows, 

M = ^ (15-8) 

where E' = E/(l - p') 

I = moment of inertia of split section 

R = radius of curvature 
Although the residual-stress distribution which went to make up this 
bending moment is unknown, it is assumed for the analysis that it varies 
linearly over the thickness t. Based on this linear relationship, the maxi- 
mum longitudinal stress at the surface is given by the familiar equation 
from strength of materials, 

^^ - n^o^ 

(^L = -J- (15-9) 

where c is the distance from the neutral axis to the outer fiber, in this 
case t/4. Substituting Eq. (15-8) into (15-9) and introducing the value 
for c results in 

<TL = ^ (15-10) 

The radius of curvature may be expressed in terms of the deflection 8 
and the length of the curved beam L by Eq. (15-11) if the deflection is 
small compared with the radius of curvature. 

K = g . (15-11) 

Thus, the longitudinal residual stress at the surface is given by 

aL = ^, (15-12) 

Round Bar 

The same procedure can be used to estimate the surface longitudinal 
stress in a round bar> (Fig. 15-66). With the notation given in Fig. 15-66 
the procedure outlined above results in the following equation: 

1.65^^5r 
(TL = y^ (15-13) 

Thin-wall Tubing 

The longitudinal stress at the surface of a tube may be determined^ by 
splitting a longitudinal tongue from the wall of the tube (Fig. 15-7a). 

1 Ibid., p. 82. 

* R. J. Anderson and E. G. Fahlman, J. Inst. Metals, vol. 32, pp. 3G7-383, 1924. 



406 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 1 5 



With the notation given in Fig. 15-7 a, the longitudinal stress is given by 
the following equation, 

(TL = -TIT (15-14) 



where 



E' 



E 
1 - v' 



Equation (15-14) is the same as Eq. (15-12) for a rolled sheet, except that 
t/2 is used in the latter case because only half the sheet thickness deflects. 





U) 






id) 

Fig. 15-7. Determination of residual stresses in thin-wall tube by deflection method, 
(a) Longitudinal stress; (b) circumferential stress. 



Experience with the slitting of tubes has shown that the observed deflec- 
tion is a function of the width of the tongue. The maximum deflection 
is obtained when the tongue width is 0.1 to 0.2 times the diameter of 
the tube. 

To determine the circumferential residual stresses in a tube, a longi- 
tudinal slit is made the entire length of the tube, and the change in 



Sec. 15-5] Residual Stresses 407 

diameter is measured^ (Fig. 15-76). With the notation in the figure, the 
circumferential residual stress at the surface is given by 



'''\k~wj 



1 5-5. X-ray Determination of Residual Stress 

The measurement of residual stress with X rays utilizes the interatomic 
spacing of certain lattice planes as the gage length for measuring strain. 
In essence, the interatomic spacing for a given lattice plane is determined 
for the stress-free condition and for the same material containing residual 
stress. The change in lattice spacing can be related to residual stress. 
Because X rays penetrate less than 0.001 in. into the surface of a metal, 
X-ray methods measure only surface strains and therefore only surface 
residual stresses can be determined. Since no stress exists normal to a 
free surface, this method is limited to uniaxial and biaxial states of stress. 
For many applications, particularly where fatigue failure is involved, this 
is not a serious disadvantage. 

X-ray methods have the important advantage that they are non- 
destructive and involve no cutting or slitting of the object to measure 
the stresses. Further, it is not always necessary to make measurements 
on the specimen in the unstressed condition. This is often an advantage 
in making post-mortem examinations of parts which failed in service. 
The X-ray method measures the residual stress in a very localized area,^ 
since the X-ray beam covers an area approximately 3^ in. in diameter. 
This makes the X-ray technique useful for measurements of sharply 
changing stress gradients, but it may be a disadvantage where the objec- 
tive is to characterize the over-all residual-stress condition in a surface. 
Since the X-ray method is based essentially on an accurate measurement 
of the shift in position of the X-ray reflection from a given set of lattice 
planes due to the presence of elastic strain, it is necessary that the dif- 
fraction lines be accurately located. Using film techniques to record the 
X-ray reflections requires that the specimen yield sharp diffraction lines 
if the lattice strain is to be measured with precision. Since severely 
cold-worked material and quenched and tempered steel give broad dif- 
fraction lines, the residual stresses in these important classes of specimens 
cannot be accurately determined by X-ray film techniques. However, 
the introduction of Geiger-counter X-ray spectrogoniometer equipment 

1 D. K. Crampton, Trans. AIME, vol. 89, pp. 233-255, 1930. 

2 Mechanical methods of measuring localized residual stresses around a small 
drilled hole have been developed. See J. Mathar, Trans. ASME, vol. 86, pp. 249- 
254, 1934. 



408 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 1 5 

has permitted a more accurate measurement of the X-ray diffraction-line 
profile than is possible with film techniques. Methods have been devel- 
oped of measuring with considerable precision residual stresses in heat- 
treated steel by means of X rays.^ 

Bragg's law expresses the relationship between the distance between a 
given set of lattice planes, d, and the wavelength of X-ray radiation, X, 
the order of the diffraction n, and the measured diffraction angle 6. 

n\ = 2d sin d (15-16) 

The simplest condition to consider will give values for a uniaxial surface 
stress or the sum of the principal stresses cri + 0-2. In the Sachs- Weerts^ 
method two X-ray determinations are made of the lattice spacing d for 
the X-ray beam oriented normal to the specimen surface. One shot gives 
the value di for the stressed surface, while the other shot gives do for the 
stress-free surface. The lattice constant in the stress-free condition is 
obtained either by removing a small plug of metal from the specimen or 
by thermally stress-relieving the sample. The strain normal to the 
surface which is measured by the X rays is 63. 

e, = ^±^ (15-17) 

do 

From the theory of elasticity (Chap. 2), the strain in the direction normal 
to the free surface can be expressed as 

63 = - i^l + ^- (15-18) 

Therefore, the sum of the principal stresses lying in the specimen surface 
is given by 

a, + a,= --^^^ (15-19) 

A much more general equation for determining the principal stresses 
in a surface by X rays can be obtained by considering the general case 
for principal stress (Sec. 2-5). The situation is discussed in detail by 
Barrett.^ The generalized state of principal stress acting on the surface 
can be represented in three dimensions by an ellipsoid (Fig. 15-8). The 
normal stress given by the coordinates rp and 4> can be expressed in terms 
of the three principal stresses and their direction cosines I, m, and n as 

1 A. L. Christenson and E. S. Rowland, Trans. ASM, vol. 45, pp. 638-676, 1953; 
D. P. Koistinen and R. E. Marburger, Trans. ASM, vol. 51, pp. 537-555, 1959. 

« G. Sachs and J. Weerts, Z. Physik, vol. 64, pp. 344-358, 1930. 

" C. S. Barrett, "Structure of Metals," 2d ed., chap. 14, McGraw-Hill Book Com- 
pany, Inc., New York, 1952. 



Sec. 15-5] 
follows, 



Residual Stresses 



(T = Pai -{■ mV2 + nVa 



409 



(15-20) 



where I = sin \p cos (f), m = sin i/' sin </>, and n = cos ^. Since the X-ray 
determination of residual stress considers only the stresses in the surface, 




Fig. 15-8. Representation of principal stresses ai, a-i, az by ellipsoid of stress. 

0-3 = 0. Referring to Fig. 15-8, this requires that yp = 90°. Therefore, 
Eq. (15-20) can be simplified as follows to give the component of stress 
in the direction 4>: 

0-0 = o"! cos^ <^ + 0-2 sin^ 4> (15-21) 

An equation exactly analogous to Eq. (15-20) can be written for the 
principal strains. 

e = r-ei -\- m^e.2 + n^e^ (15-22) 

If the values of the direction cosines, together with the values of d and 
€2 in terms of principal stresses are substituted into Eq. (15-22), we get 



e — 63 = — ^^ — sin- x}/ (a I cos^ <^ -\- a 2 sin- </>) 

Substitution of Eq. (15-21) into Eq. (15-23) leads to the relation 

_ e — 63 E 
sin'' 
However, 



sin^ xj/ I -{- V 



e — es 



d^ — do di — do d^ — di 



do 



do 



(15-23) 

(15-24) 
(15-25) 



where do = atomic spacing in unstressed condition 

di = atomic spacing in stressed metal perpendicular to specimen 

surface 
d^, = atomic spacing in direction defined by angles \p and <f> 



410 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 1 5 

Since the accuracy of Eq. (15-25) is chiefly determined by the precision 
with which the numerator is known, it is permissible to substitute di 
for do in the denominator without greatly affecting the results. This 
substitution is an important simplification of the experimental procedure 
because it eliminates the necessity for making measurements on stress- 
free samples. Therefore, the stress in the surface of the specimen for any 
orientation of the azimuth angle 4> is related to X-ray measurements of 
atomic lattice spacing by the following equation: 

d^ — di E I 

C4. = -^ :f— ] ^^-r (15-26) 

di 1 -\- V sm^ \l/ 

The number of X-ray exposures that is required depends on the infor- 
mation that is available. For any azimuth angle it is customary to 
make two exposures to determine the stress in the direction. One 
exposure is made normal to the surface {\f/ = 0) to give di, and another 
exposure is made for the same value of </>, but with the X-ray beam 
inclined at an angle \l/ from the normal. Generally Ap — 45° is used for 
this second exposure to give the value of d^. If the directions of two 
principal stresses o-i and a<i in the specimen surface are known, as is often 
the case for residual stresses produced by quenching or plastie--forming 
operations, all that is necessary is to make three exposures to determine 
the complete biaxial-stress state at the point on the surface. One per- 
pendicular exposure determines d\, one exposure at i/' = 45° in the direc- 
tion <^i determines a\ from Eq. (15-26), while a third exposure at 1/' = 45° 
in the direction of the other principal stress <^2 determines ai from 
Eq. (15-26). 0-3 is zero because the measurements are made on a free 
surface. 

If it is necessary to determine both the magnitude and direction of a\ 
and C7-2, it is necessary to make four X-ray exposures. Three arbitrary 
stress components in three known <^ directions on the surface must be 
determined in addition to a normal exposure to determine d\. It is cus- 
tomary to make these exposures at (^, </> -f 60°, and </> — 60°, with s/' = 45° 
for each value of 0. The stresses in the three arbitrary directions are 
calculated from Eq. (15-26) and are then converted into principal stresses 
by the methods given in Chap. 2 or by the equations given by Barrett^ 
for the specific conditions established above. 

In addition to the difficulties of accurately measuring the values of 
interatomic spacing in highly strained metals which have already been 
discussed, there is some uncertainty as to the values of elastic modulus E 
and Poisson's ratio v which should be used in Eq. (15-26) to calculate 
values of residual stress. It is known that for most metals these elastic 

1 Ihid., pp. 326-327. 



Sec. 15-6] Residual Stresses 411 

constants vary considerably with crystallographic direction. Since the 
residual stresses calculated from Eq. (15-26) are based on X-ray measure- 
ments of lattice strain in certain fixed directions in the crystal lattice, 
it is questionable that average values of E and v determined from the 
tension test should apply. Experimental data on this point are some- 
what contradictory. Most investigators who have used X-ray methods 
for residual-stress determination have considered that the use of the 
average value of E and v introduce no serious errors beyond that due to 
uncontrollable factors. For greatest accuracy, these constants should be 
determined for each material and experimental setup by making X-ray 
measurements on stress-relieved specimens which are subjected to known 
\ loads. 

1 5-6. Quenching Stresses 

In the introductory discussion of residual stresses in Sec. 15-1 it was 
shown that cooling an ingot of a metal which does not experience a phase 
change can produce residual stresses because of the strain mismatch pro- 
duced by the differential contraction between the cooler and hotter parts 
of the body. The development of the longitudinal residual-stress pattern 
was shown in Fig. 15-2. Quenching a body from a high temperature 
to a lower temperature accentuates the development of residual stresses 
because the greater temperature differential which is produced between 
the surface and the center due to the rapid rate of cooling produces a 
greater mismatch of strain. The situation of greatest practical interest 
involves the residual stresses developed during the quenching of steel for 
hardening. However, for this case the residual-stress pattern is due to 
thermal volume changes plus volume changes resulting from the trans- 
formation of austenite to martensite. The simpler situation, where the 
stresses are due only to thermal volume changes, will be considered first. 
This is the situation encountered in the quenching of a metal which does 
not undergo a phase change on cooling. It is also the situation encoun- 
tered when steel is quenched from a tempering temperature below the 
A I critical temperature. 

The distribution of residual stress over the diameter of a quenched bar 
in the longitudinal, tangential, and radial directions is shown in Fig. 15-9a 
for the usual case of a metal which contracts on cooling. Figure 15-9c 
shows that the opposite residual-stress distribution is obtained if the 
metal expands on cooling. The development of the stress pattern shown 
in Fig. 15-9a can be visualized as follows: The relatively cool surface of 
the bar tends to contract into a ring that is both shorter and smaller in 
diameter than the original diameter. This tends to extrude the hotter, 
more plastic center into a cylinder that is longer and thinner than its 



412 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 15 



original dimensions. If the inner core were free to change shape inde- 
pendently of the outer ring, it would change dimensions to a shorter and 
thinner cylinder on cooling. However, continuity must be maintained 
throughout the bar so that the outer ring is drawn in (compressed) in the 
longitudinal, tangential, and radial directions at the same time as the 
inner core is extended in the same directions. The stress pattern given 
in Fig. 15-9a results. 



k^L 




Longitudinol 




Tangential 




I = longitudinal 
r = tangential 
/?- radial 



Id) 




Radia 



Fig. 1 5-9. Residual-stress patterns found in quenched bars, due to thermal strains 
(schematic), (a) For metal which contracts on coohng; (6) orientation of directions; 
(c) for metal which expands on cooling. 



The magnitude of the residual stresses produced by quenching depends 
on the stress-strain relationships for the metal and the degree of strain 
mismatch produced by the quenching operation. For a given strain mis- 
match, the higher the modulus elasticity of the metal, the higher the 
residual stress. Further, since the residual stress cannot exceed the yield 
stress, the higher the yield stress, the higher the possible residual stress. 
The yield-stress-temperature curve for the metal is also important. If 
the yield stress decreases rapidly with increasing temperature, then the 
strain mismatch will be small at high temperature because the metal can 
accommodate to thermally produced volume changes by plastic flow. 
On the other hand, metals which have a high yield strength at elevated 
temperatures, like superalloys, will develop large residual stresses from 
quenching. 



Sec. 1 5-6] Residual Stresses 413 

The following combination of physical properties will lead to high mis- 
match strains on quenching: 

1. A low thermal conductivity k 

2. A high specific heat c 

3. A high coefficient of thermal expansion, a 

4. A high density p 

These factors can be combined into the thermal diffusivity, Dt = k/pc. 
Low values of thermal diffusivity lead to high strain mismatch. Other 
factors which produce an increase in the temperature difference between 
the surface and center of the bar promote high quenching stresses. These 
factors are (1) a large diameter of the cylinder, (2) a large temperature 
difference between the initial temperature and the temperature of the 
quenching bath, and (3) a high severity of quench. 

In the quenching of steels, austenite begins to transform to martensite 
whenever the local temperature of the bar reaches the Ms temperature. 
Since an increase in volume accompanies this transformation, the metal 
expands as the martensite reaction proceeds on cooling from the Ms to 
Mf temperature. This produces a residual stress distribution of the type 
shown in Fig. 15-9c. The residual-stress distribution in a quenched steel 
bar is the resultant of the competing processes of thermal contraction 
and volume expansion due to martensite formation. Transformation of 
austenite to bainite or pearlite also produces a volume expansion, but of 
lesser magnitude. The resulting stress pattern depends upon the trans- 
formation characteristics of the steel, as determined chiefly by its com- 
position and hardenability, and the heat-transfer characteristics of the 
system, as determined primarily by the bar diameter, the austenitizing 
temperature, and the severity of the quench. 

Figure 15-10 illustrates some of the possible residual-stress patterns 
which can be produced by quenching steel bars. The left side of this 
figure illustrates a typical isothermal transformation diagram for the 
decomposition of austenite. The cooling rates of the outside, midradius, 
and center of the bar are indicated on this diagram by the curves marked 
0, m, and c. In Fig. 15- 10a the quenching rate was rapid enough to 
convert the entire bar to martensite. By the time the center of the bar 
reached the Ms temperature, the transformation had been essentially 
completed at the surface. The surface layers tried to contract against 
the expanding central core, and the result is tensile residual stresses at 
the surface and compressive stresses at the center of the bar (Fig. 15-106). 
However, if the bar diameter is rather small and it has been drastically 
quenched in brine so that the surface and center transform at about the 
same time, the surface will arrive at room temperature with compressive 



414 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 15 



residual stresses. If the bar is slack-quenched so that the outside trans- 
forms to martensite while the middle and center transform to pearlite 
(Fig. 15-lOc), there is little restraint offered by the hot, soft core during 
the time when martensite is forming on the surface, and the core readily 
accommodates to the expansion of the outer layers. The middle and 



Austenite 




Martensite 



log time 
(a) 




Austenite 




Martensite 



log time 
ic) 



+cr 



L/^ 


1 


ff^ 


^ 


r/ 


\ 


/ 


\ 







id) 



Fig, 1 5-10. Transformation characteristics of a steel (a and c), and resulting residual- 
stress distributions {b and d). 



center pearlite regions then contract on cooling in the usual manner and 
produce a residual-stress pattern consisting of compression on the surface 
and tension at the center (Fig. 15-lOd). Other types of stress distribu- 
tions are possible, depending upon the cooling rate and the transforma- 
tion cKaraCteristics of the steel. For example, it is possible to produce a 



)ec. 



15-7] Residual Stresses 415 



stress pattern with tensile stresses at the surface and center of the bar 
and compressive stresses at midradius. 

In relatively brittle materials like tool steels, the yield stress is not far 
below the fracture stress. Surface tensile stresses equal to the yield stress 
may be produced by quenching. If stress raisers are present, the residual 
tensile stress may exceed the fracture stress. Cracks produced by tensile 
quenching stresses are called quench cracks. In order to minimize quench 
cracking in brittle steels, an interrupted quench, or martempering, pro- 
cedure is sometimes used. The steel is quenched from the austenitizing 
temperature into a holding bath which is maintained at a temperature 
above the Ms temperature of the steel. The steel is kept at the tem- 
perature long enough for it to come to thermal equilibrium, and then it is 
quenched to a lower temperature to form martensite. 

The reasons for tempering hardened steel are to relieve the high micro- 
stresses in the martensite and to reduce the level of macro residual stress. 
Although tempering generally lowers the level of residual stress, there are 
exceptions to this behavior.^ For steel bars which have been hardened 
through, the level of residual stress will decrease uniformly with increas- 
ing tempering temperature. For a bar with surface compressive stresses 
due to incomplete hardening an increase in tempering temperature will 
progressively reduce the residual stress. If a bar is almost completely 
hardened through, greater contraction due to tempering of the martensite 
will occur at the surface than at the center. This will cause the surface 
tensile stress to increase as tempering progresses. 

15-7. Surface Residual Stresses 

There are a number of important technological processes which pro- 
duce high surface residual stresses which have their maximum tvalue 
either at the surface or just below the surface and which fall off rapidly 
with distance in from the surface. The steep stress gradient produced 
by these processes is in contrast with the more uniform residual-stress 
gradient produced by quenching and most mechanical forming operations. 
Normally, these processes produce high surface compressive residual 
stresses which aid in preventing fatigue failure. Figure 15-11 is typical 
of the kind of residual-stress distribution which is considered in this 
section. 

The process of induction hardening consists in inductively heating a 
thin surface layer of a steel part above the transformation temperature 
and then flash-quenching this region to martensite with a spray of water. 
The localized expansion of the martensitic case produces a residual-stress 
pattern of compression stresses at the surface and tension in the interior 

1 A. L. Boegehold, Metal Progr., vol. 57, pp. 183-188, 1950. 



416 



Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 1 5 



Surface 



Surface 



Fig. 15-11. 

distribution 



Typical residual-stress 
produced by surface 
treatment like induction hardening, 
carburizing, or shot peening. 



Flame hardening produces the same metallurgical changes and residual- 
stress pattern as induction hardening, but the local heating is produced 
by a gas flame. Both processes not only produce a favorable residual- 
stress pattern but also leave a hardened surface which improves the 

resistance to wear. 

Carburizing consists in changing the 
carbon content of the surface layers 
of a steel part by the diffusion of 
carbon atoms into the surface. The 
process differs from induction hard- 
ening in that the entire part is heated 
into the austenite region during the 
diffusion process and when the part is 
quenched volume changes may occur 
through most of the cross section. In 
general, the carburized surface contains 
compressive residual stresses, but con- 
siderable variation in residual-stress 
distribution can be produced by changes 
in processing. 1 Ordinarily, the maxi- 
mum compressive residual stress occurs at a depth in from the surface which 
is just short of the boundary between the carburized case and the lower- 
carbon-content core. Nitriding consists in the diffusion of nitrogen into 
a steel surface at a temperature below the -4 1 transformation temperature. 
The only volume expansion arises from the formation of nitrides at the 
surface. The residual-stress pattern consists of compression at the sur- 
face and tension at the interior. Because there is no volume expansion 
occurring in the core, as is possible for carburizing, the residual-stress 
distribution produced by nitriding is easier to control. 

Shot peening consists in subjecting a metal surface to the impact of a 
stream of fine metallic particles (shot). The impact of the shot on the 
surface causes plastic stretching of the surface fibers at a multitude of 
localized regions. When this localized plastic flow is relieved, it leaves 
the surface in a state of compressive residual stress. In the shot peening 
of heat-treated steel the maximum compressive residual stress which is 
produced is about 60 per cent of the yield strength of the steel. The 
maximum residual stress occurs below the surface at a depth of about 
0.002 to 0.010 in. Higher values of compressive residual stresses can be 
obtained by strain peening. For example, if a flat leaf spring is preloaded 
in bending, the resulting compressive residual stress on the surface which 
was prestressed in tension will be greater than if the steel was shot-peened 
in an initially stress-free condition. The variables of the shot-peening 
1 R. L. Mattson, Proc. Intern. Conf. Fatigue of Metals, London, 1956, pp. 593-603. 



Sec. 15-8] Residual Stresses 417 

process''^ which mfluence the magnitude and distribution of the residual 
stresses are (1) the shot size, (2) the shot hardness, (3) the shot velocity, 
and (4) the exposure time (coverage). 

High surface compressive residual stress can also be developed by sur- 
face rolling, as was shown in Fig. 15-1. An estimate of the loads required 
for rolling to a given depth may be made by the use of Hertz's theory of 
contact stresses.^ 

Surface rolling is well adapted to the beneficial protection of critical 
areas like fillets and screw threads of large parts, while shot peening lends 
itself to high-production volume parts where broad or irregular surfaces 
are to be treated. Numerous instances have been reported in the liter- 
ature where the introduction of beneficial compressive residual stresses 
by flame hardening,'' carburizing,^ nitriding,^ shot peening,^ and surface 
rolling^ has resulted in improved fatigue performance. Surface working 
operations such as shot peening and rolling have also been successfully 
used to mitigate the effects of stress corrosion cracking. 

1 5-8. Stress Relief 

The removal or reduction in the intensity of residual stress is known as 
stress relief. Stress relief may be accomplished either by heating or by 
mechanical working operations. Although residual stresses will slowly 
disappear at room temperature, the process is very greatly accelerated 
by heating to an elevated temperature. The stress relief which comes 
from a stress-relief anneal is due to two effects. First, since the residual 
stress cannot exceed the yield stress, plastic flow will reduce the residual 
stress to the value of the yield stress at the stress-relief temperature. 
Only the residual stress in excess of the yield stress at the stress-relief 
temperature can be eliminated by immediate plastic flow. Generally, 
most of the residual stress will be relieved by time-dependent stress relax- 
ation. Relaxation curves such as those of Fig. 13-15 are useful for esti- 
mating stress-relief treatments. Since this process is extremely temper- 

1 Ibid.; R. L. Mattson and W. S. Coleman, Trans. SAE, vol. 62, pp. 546-556, 1954. 

^ J. M. Lessells and R. F. Brodrick, Proc. Intern. Conf. Fatigue of Metals, London, 
1956, pp. 617-627. 

3 J. M. Lessells, "Strength and Resistance of Metals," pp. 256-259, John Wiley & 
Sons, Inc., New York, 1954. 

* O. J. Horger and T. V. Buckwalter, Proc. ASTM, vol. 41, pp. 682-695, 1941. 

* "Fatigue Durability of Carburized Steel," American Society for Metals, Metals 
Park, Ohio, 1957. 

6 H. Sutton, Metal Treatment, vol. 2, pp. 89-92, 1936. 

^ O. J. Horger and H. R. Neifert, Proc. Soc. Exptl. Stress Analysis, vol. 2, no. 1, 
pp. 178-189, 1944. 

8 O. J. Horger, /. Appl. Mech., vol. 2, pp. A128-136, 1935. 



418 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 1 5 

ature-dependent, the time for nearly complete elimination of stress can be 
greatly reduced by increasing the temperature.^ Often a compromise 
must be made between the use of a temperature high enough for the 
relief of stress in a reasonable length of time and the annealing of the 
effects of cold work. 

The differential strains that produce high residual stresses also can be 
eliminated by plastic deformation at room temperature. For example, 
products such as sheet, plate, and extrusions are often stretched several 
per cent beyond the yield stress to relieve differential strains by yielding. 
In other cases the residual-stress distribution which is characteristic of a 
particular working operation may be superimposed on the residual-stress 
pattern initially present in the material. A surface which contains tensile 
residual stresses may have the stress distribution converted into beneficial 
compressive stresses with a surface working process like rolling or shot 
peening. However, it is important in using this method of stress relief 
to select surface working conditions which will completely cancel the 
initial stress distribution. For example, it is conceivable that, if only 
very light surface rolling were used on a surface which initially contained 
tensile stresses, only the tensile stresses at the surface would be reduced. 
Dangerously high tensile stresses could still exist below the surface. 

An interesting concept is the use of thermal stresses to reduce quench^ 
ing stresses. Since residual stresses result from thermal gradients pro- 
duced when a part is being quenched, it is possible to introduce residual 
stresses of opposite sign by subjecting a cold piece to very rapid heating. 
This concept of an "uphill quench" has been used^ in aluminum alloys 
to reduce quenching stresses by as much as 80 per cent at temperatures 
low enough to prevent softening. 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Baldwin; W. M. : Residual Stresses in Metals, Twenty-third Edgar Marburg Lecture, 

Proc. ASTM, vol. 49, pp. 539-583, 1949. 
Heindlhofer, K.: "Evaluation of Residual Stress," McGraw-Hill Book Company, 

Inc., New York, 1948. 
Horger, O. J.: Residual Stresses, "Handbook of Experimental Stress Analysis," 

pp. 459-469, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1950. 
Huang, T. C: Bibliography on Residual Stress, SAE Spec. Publ. SP-125, 1954; 

suppl. 1, SP-167, February, 1959. 
Residual Stresses, Metal Progr., vol. 68, no. 2A, pp. 89-96, Aug. 15, 1955. 
"Residual Stress Measurements," American Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 

1952. 
Symposium on Internal Stresses in Metals and Alloys, Inst. Metals Mon. Rept. Ser. 5, 

1948. 
* Typical stress-relief temperatures and times for many metals will be found in 
Metal Prog., vol. 68, no. 2A, p. 95, Aug. 15, 1955. 

2 H. N. Hill, R. S. Barker, and L. A. Willey, Trans. ASM, vol. 52, pp. 657-674, 1960. 



Chapter 16 

STATISTICS APPLIED TO 
MATERIALS TESTING 

16-1. Why Statistics? 

There are at least three reasons why a working knowledge of statistics 
is needed in mechanical metallurgy. First, mechanical properties, being 
structure-sensitive properties, frequently exhibit considerable variability, 
or scatter. Therefore, statistical techniques are useful, and often even 
necessary, for determining the precision of the measurements and for 
drawing valid conclusions from the data. The statistical methods which 
apply in mechanical metallurgy are in general no different from the tech- 
niques which are used for analysis of data in other areas of engineering 
and science. Mechanical metallurgy is one of the few areas of metal- 
lurgy where large numbers of data are likely to be encountered, and there- 
fore it is a logical place in which to introduce the elements of statistical 
analysis of data to metallurgists who may have had no other training in 
the subject. A second reason for considering statistics in conjunction 
with mechanical metallurgy is that statistical methods can assist in 
designing experiments to give the maximum amount of information with 
the minimum of experimental investigation. Finally, statistical methods 
based on probability theory have been developed to explain certain prob- 
lems in mechanical metallurgy. The explanation of the size effect in 
brittle fracture and fatigue is a good example of the use of statistical 
theory in mechanical metallurgy. 

It is recognized that the material which can be included in a single 
chapter can hardly consist of more than an introduction to this subject. 
In order to cover the greatest amount of ground, no attempt has been 
made to include the mathematical niceties which are usually a part of 
a course in statistics. Instead, emphasis has been placed on showing 
how statistics can be put to work. Numerous references are included to 
sources of more complete discussions and to techniques and applications 

419 



420 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 16 

which could not be included because of space limitations. It is hoped 
that this chapter contributes to a better appreciation of the usefulness of 
statistics in metallurgical research by providing the background neces- 
sary to see a problem from a statistical viewpoint and enough of the 
standard tools of statistics to allow a valid analysis in straightforward 
applications. It is important to emphasize that many practical prob- 
lems are just too complicated to treat by means of the simpler statistical 
techniques. In these cases it is important to acquire the services of a 
trained statistician for the planning of the experiment and the analysis 
of the data. 

16-2. Errors and Samples 

The act of making any type of experimental observation involves two 
types of errors, systematic errors (which exert a nonrandom bias), and 
experimental, or random, errors. Systematic errors arise because of 
faulty control of the experiment. Experimental, or random, errors are 
due to limitations of the measuring equipment or to inherent variability 
in the material being tested. As an example, in the measurement of the 
reduction of area of a fractured tensile specimen, a systematic error could 
be introduced if an improperly zeroed micrometer were used for measur- 
ing the diameter, while random errors would result from slight differences 
in fitting together the two halves of the tensile specimen and from the 
inherent variability of reduction-of-area measurements on metals. By 
averaging a number of observations the random error will tend to cancel 
out. The systematic error, however, will not cancel upon averaging. 
One of the major objectives of statistical analysis is to deal quantitatively 
with random error. 

When a tensile specimen is cut from a steel forging and the reduction 
of area is determined for this specimen, the observation represents a sam- 
ple of the "population from which it was drawn. The population, in this 
case, is the collection of all possible tensile specimens which could be cut 
from this forging or from all other forgings which are exactly identical. 
As more and more tensile specimens are cut from the forging and reduc- 
tion-of-area values measured, the sample estimate of the population 
values becomes better and better. However, it is obviously impractical 
to sample and test the entire forging. Therefore, one of the main pur- 
poses of statistical techniques is to determine the best estimate of the 
population parameters from a randomly selected sample. The approach 
which is taken is to postulate that for each sample the population has 
fixed and invariant parameters. However, the corresponding parameters 
calculated from samples contain random errors, and therefore the sample 
provides only an estimate of the population parameters. It is for this 



Sec. 16-3] 



Statistics Applied to Materials Testing 421 



reason that statistical methods lead to conclusions having a given proba- 
hiliiij of being correct. 



16-3. Frequency Distribution 

When a large number of observations are made from a random sample, 
a method is needed to characterize the data. The most common method 
is to arrange the observations into a number of equal-valued class intervals 
and determine the frequency of the observations falling within each class 
interval. In Table 16-1, out of a total sample of 449 measurements of 

Table 16-1 
Frequency Tabulation of Yield Strength of Steelj 



Yield 














strength, 

1,000 psi, 

class 


Class 

midpoint 

Xi 


Frequency 
/i 


fiXi 


Frequency, 
% of total 


Cumulative 
frequency 


Cumulative 
frequency, 

% 


interval 














(1) 


(2) 


(3) 


(4) 


(5) 


(6) 


(7) 


114-115.9 


115 


4 


460 


0.9 


4 


0.9 


116-117.9 


117 


6 


702 


1.3 


10 


2.2 


118-119.9 


119 


8 


952 


1.6 


18 


3.8 


120-121.9 


121 


26 


3,146 


5.8 


44 


9.6 


122-123.9 


123 


29 


3,657 


6.5 


73 


16.1 


124-125.9 


125 


44 


5,500 


9.8 


117 


25.9 


126-127.9 


127 


47 


5,969 


10.5 


164 


36.4 


128-129.9 


129 


59 


7,611 


13.1 


223 


49.5 


130-131.9 


131 


67 


8,777 


15.0 


290 


64.5 


132-133.9 


133 


45 


5,985 


10.0 


335 


74.5 


134-135.9 


135 


49 


6,615 


10.9 


384 


85.4 


136-137.9 


137 


29 


3,973 


6.5 


413 


91.9 


138-139.9 


139 


17 


2,363 


3.8 


430 


95.7 


140-141.9 


141 


9 


1,269 


2.0 


439 


97.7 


142-143.9 


143 


6 


858 


1.3 


445 


99.0 


144-145.9 


145 


4 


580 


0.9 


449 


99.9 



S/i = 449 -LfiXi = 58,417 
X = 58,417/449 = 130,300 psi 

t Data from F. B. Stulen, W. C. Schulte, and H. N. Cummings, in D. E. Harden- 
bergh (ed.), "Statistical Methods in Materials Research," Pennsylvania State Uni- 
versity, University Park, Pa., 1956. 

yield strength, 4 observations fell between 114,000 and 115,900 psi, 
26 fell between 120,000 and 121,900 psi, etc. An estimate of the fre- 
quency distribution of the observations can be obtained by plotting the 
frequency of observations against the class intervals of the yield-strength 



422 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 16 



70 


- 




























60 
50 


- 






p 




1 — 














40 


- 
















30 


J 
















-^ 




20 
























10 


- 






















~i 





rT 


























Ti 



114 118 122 126 130 134 138 142 146 
Yield strength, 1,000 psi 

Fig. 16-1. Frequency histogram of data in Table 16-1. 



70 


- 


Mean 


Median 
xMode 


60 


- 


/ \ 


50 


- 


/ \ 


40 


- 


/ \ 


30 


- 


/ \ 


20 


- 


/ \ 


10 


- / 


\ 





1 1 1 


1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 



114 



122 126 130 134 138 142 146 
Yield strength, 1,000 psi 



Fig. 16-2. Frequency distribution of data in Table 16-1. 



Sec. 16-3] 



Statistics Applied to Materials Testing 423 



measurements (Fig. 16-1). This type of bar diagram is known as a 
histogram. As the number of observations increases, the size of the class 
interval can be reduced until we obtain the limiting curve which repre- 
sents the frequency distribution of the sample (Fig. 16-2). Note that most 
of the values of yield strength fall within the interval from 126,000 to 
134,000 psi. 

If the frequency of observations in each class interval is expressed as 
a percentage of the total number of observations, the area under a fre- 
quency-distribution curve which is plotted on this basis is equal to unity 
(Fig. 16-3). The probabihty that a single random measurement of yield 
strength will be between the value Xi and a slightly higher value Xi + AX 
is given by the area under the frequency-distribution curve bounded by 
these two limits. Similarly, the probability that a single observation 



20 


- 








15 


^ 


10 
5 


- / 


1 




\ 





1 1 1 1 1 1 


1 


1 1 1 


1 1 1 1 1 1 



114 118 122 126 130 134 138 142 146 

Yield strength, 1,000 psi 

Fig. 16-3. Frequency distribution based on relative frequency. 



will be greater than some value X2 is given by the area under the curve 
to the right of Xo, while the probability that the single observation will be 
less than X2 is given by the area to the left of X2. 

Another way of presenting these data is to arrange the frequency in a 
cumulative manner. In Table 16-1, column 6, the frequency for each 
class interval is accumulated with the values of frequency for the class 
intervals below it to indicate the total number of observations with a 
value of reduction of area less than or equal to the value of the upper 
hmit of the class interval. As an example, for the sample described in 
Table 16-1, 164 out of 449 observations of yield strength have a value of 
127,900 psi or less. If the cumulative frequency is expressed as the per- 
centage of the total (Table 16-1, column 7), the values represent the 
probability that the yield strength will be less than or equal to the value 
of the observation. Figure 16-4 shows the cumulative frequency distri- 
bution plotted on this basis. The presentation of data as a cumulative 



424 



Applications to Materials Testing 

100 



fChap. 16 




114 118 122 126 130 134 138 142 146 
Yield strength, 1,000 psi 

Fig. 16-4. Cumulative frequency distribution. 



distribution is sometimes preferred to a frequency distribution because 
it is much less sensitive than the frequency distribution to the choice of 
class intervals. 

16-4. Measures of Central Tendency and Dispersion 

A frequency distribution such as that of Fig. 16-2 can be described 
with numbers which indicate the central location of the distribution and 
how the observations are spread out from the central region (dispersion). 
The most common and important measure of the central value of an array 
of data is the arithmetic mean, or average. The mean of Xi, X2, • • • , 
Xn observations is denoted by X and is given by 



X 



Ix. 



(16-1) 



The arithmetic mean is equal to the summation of the individual obser- 
vations divided by the total number of observations, n. If the data are 
arranged in a frequency table, as in Table 16-1, the mean can be most 



Sec. 16-4] Statistics Applied to Materials Testing 425 

conveniently determined from 

k 

X = ^^^ (16-2) 

where /» is the frequency of observations in a particular class interval 
with midpoint X,. The summation is taken over all class intervals (see 
Table 16-1, column 4). Equation (16-2) is an approximation to Eq. 
(16-1). 

Two other common measures of central tendency are the mode and the 
median. The mode is the value of the observations which occurs most 
frequently. The median is the middle value of a group of observations. 
For a set of discrete data the median can be obtained by arranging the 
observations in numerical sequence and determining which value falls in 
the middle. For a frequency distribution the median is the value which 
divides the area under the curve into two equal parts. The mean and 
the median are frequently close together; but if there are extreme values 
in the observations (either high or low), the mean will be more influenced 
by these values than the median. As an extreme example, the situation 
sometimes arises in fatigue testing that out of a group of specimens tested 
at a certain stress a few do not fail in the time allotted for the test and 
therefore they presumably have infinite lives. These extreme values 
could not be grouped with the failed specimens to calculate a mean 
fatigue life; j^et they could be considered in determining the median. 
The positions of the mean, median, and mode are indicated in Fig. 16-2. 

The most important measure of the dispersion of a sample is given by 
the variance s^. 

I (Xi - xy 

s' = '^ (16-3) 

w — 1 

The term Xi — X is the deviation of each observation Xi from the 
arithmetic mean X of the n observations. The quantity n — 1 in the 
denominator is called the number of degrees of freedom and is equal to 
the number of observations minus the number of linear relations between 
the observations. Since the mean represents one such relation, the num- 
ber of degrees of freedom for the variance about the mean is n — 1. 
For computational purposes it is often convenient to calculate the vari- 
ance from the following relation: 



n 



n{n — 1) 



426 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 16 



When the data are arranged in a frequency table, the variance can be 
most readily computed from the following equation: 

k \ 2 



2 fiXi 



-d/'^') 



s' = 



n — I 



(16-5) 



In dealing with the dispersion of data it is usual practice to work with 
the standard deviation s, which is defined as the positive square root 
of the variance. 



s = 



I (X, - xy 



1 



(16-6) 



Sometimes it is desirable to describe the variability relative to the 
average. The coefficient of variation v is used for this purpose. 






(16-7) 



A measure of dispersion which is sometimes used because of its extreme 
simplicity is the range. The range is simply the difference between the 
largest and smallest observation. The range does not provide as precise 
estimates as does the standard deviation. 

16-5. The Normal Distribution 

Many physical measurements follow the symmetrical, bell-shaped 
curve of the normal, or Gaussian, frequency distribution. Repeated 
measurements of the length or diameter of a bar would closely approxi- 
mate this frequency distribution. The distributions of yield strength, 
tensile strength, and reduction of area from the tension test have been 
found to follow the normal curve to a suitable degree of approximation. 
The equation of the normal curve is 



viX) 



1 



^ exp 



aVSTT 



\{^) 



(16-8) 



where p(X) is the height of the frequency curve corresponding to an 
assigned value X, fx is the mean of the population, and <y is the standard 
deviation of the population.^ 

The normal frequency distribution described by Eq. (16-8) extends 
from X = — octoX= +oo and is symmetrical about fx. The constant 



It should be noted that o- is used for normal stress in the other chapters of this book. 



Sec. 16-5] 



Statistics Applied to Materials Testing 427 



l/o- \/27r is used to make the area under the curve equal unity. Figure 
16-5 shows the standardized normal curve when /x = and o- = 1. The 
parameter z, defined by Eq. (16-9), is called the standard normal deviate. 

z = ^^^^ (16-9) 



For this case, the equation of the normal curve becomes 



(16-10) 



The total area under the curve in Fig. 16-5 is equal to unity. The rela- 
tive frequency of a value of z falling between — oo and a specified value 





pi 


/) 




OA 


% 




/ 0.3 


A 




0.2 


- \ 


A^///// 


0.1 


- \ 


...mB. 




1 1 1— _ 



-3 



-1 



Fig. 16-5. Standardized normal frequency distribution. 



is given by the area under the curve between these limits. Table 16-2 
lists some typical values.^ As an example, the area shown shaded in 
Fig. 16-5 is 0.16 the total area under the curve. Further, if ju = 20 and 
(7 = 5, what proportion of the sample observations would fall between 
X = 20 and X = 10? The respective values of z are and —2, so that 
the area under the normal curve between these limits is 

0.50 - 0.02 = 0.48 

Reference to Table 16-2 will also show that approximately 68 per cent 
of the area lies in the limits /x ± o", 95 per cent of the area is within the 
limits /x + 2o-, while 99.7 per cent of the area is covered by the limits 

/X + 3(7. 

^ For complete tables see W. J. Dixon and F. J. Massey, Jr., "Introduction to Sta- 
tistical Analysis," 1st ed., p. 306, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 1951. 



428 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 16 

Table 16-2 
Areas under Standardized Normal Frequency Curve 

z = X — n/a Area 



-3.0 


0.0013 


-2.0 


0.0228 


-1.0 


0.1587 


-0.5 


0.3085 


0.0 


0.5000 


+0.5 


0.6915 


+ 1.0 


0.8413 


+2.0 


0.9772 


+3.0 


0.9987 



A quick method for determining whether a sample frequency distri- 
bution is a normal distribution is to plot the observed cumulative fre- 
quency distribution on normal-probability paper. ^ If the data plot is 
an approximate straight line, then the distribution can be considered to 
be a normal frequency distribution. Figure 16-6 shows the data from 
Table 16-1 plotted on probability paper. The mean and standard devi- 
ation can be readily determined from this type of plot. The mean is the 
value of the abscissa corresponding to a cumulative frequency of 50 per 
cent. Since 68 per cent of the area under the standardized normal curve 
is included within plus or minus one standard deviation of the mean, 
it follows that the standard deviation can be obtained from Fig. 16-6 
by taking half the intercept of the abscissa between 84 and 16 per cent. 
This method of determining the mean and standard deviation is often 
accurate enough for engineering purposes. However, it can be used only 
when the data plot as a fairly good line on probability paper. The sta- 
tistical advantages of the normal distribution are quite considerable, so 
that in cases where the data do not fit the normal curve it is often worth- 
while to search for a simple transformation which will normalize the data. 
The most common transformations are X = log X and X = X''^. As 
an example, the distribution of fatigue life at constant stress is skewed 
with respect to the variable of number of cycles to failure, but it is 
approximately normal with respect to the logarithm of the number of 
cycles to failure. This is called a log-normal distribution.- 

The mean of a sample provides an unbiased estimate of the mean of 
the population, or universe, from which it was drawn. If repeated sam- 

^ An analytical method for determining how well a sample frequency distribution 
compares with the normal distribution is the chi-square test for goodness of fit. This 
technique is discussed in any standard statistics text. For example, see ibid., pp. 
190-191. 

2 A complete description of the log-normal distribution is given by A. Hald, "Sta- 
tistical Theory with Engineering Applications," pp. 160-174, John Wiley & Sons, 
Inc., New York, 1952. 



16-5] 



Statistics Applied to Materials Testins 



429 



pies are taken from the population, they will each in general yield a 
different value of mean A" and standard deviation s. The sample values 
of the mean will, however, be normally distributed about the population 
mean fx. The central-limit theorem of statistics provides a method for 
estimating the population mean n and standard deviation a. According 
to this theorem, if A" is the mean value of a random sample of n observa- 
tions A is normally distributed about the population mean with a stand- 
ard deviation (r/\/n. With this as a basis, it is possible to determine the 
confidence limits within w^hich the sample mean approaches the population 
mean to a certain level of certainty. 



99.99 



99.9 



99 

. 95 

I 90 

I 80 

■^ 70 

I 60 

50 
= 40 

1 30 
20 

o 

■t 10 

I 5 

I 2 

1 

0.5 

0.2 

0.1 

0.05 

0.01 





















- 


















/ 
















\^ 


















/ 




















/ 


















/ 




















/ 


















<< 




















/ 




















^ 


















/ 


















J 


/ 


















/ 


















9' 


A> 


















y 




















^ 



































































































114 



122 126 130 134 138 
Yield strength, 1,000 psi 



142 146 



Fig. 16-6. Normal-probability plot of data in Table 16-1. 

For samples with many observations (w > 30) or where the population 
variance is known (which is rarely the case), the determination of the 
confidence limits of the mean is based on the standard normal deviate z. 
For example, suppose that we want to know the interval about a meas- 
ured sample mean which will include the population mean 95 per cent 
of the time, i.e., the 95 per cent confidence level. Reference to an 
enlarged version of Table 16-2 would show that 95 per cent of the area 
under the normal curve would be included within the interval [i ± 1.96ct. 
Now, since the central-limit theorem states that the observations of A 



430 Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 16 



are normally distributed about fx with a standard deviation (x/\/n, we can 
conclude that 95 per cent of the time the mean of the population will be 
within the interval X ± 1.96a-/\/n. Since the sample estimate of the 
variance s- cannot be substituted for the population variance o-^ when the 
sample size is small, it is necessary to base the calculation^ on the sam- 
pling distribution of the statistic known as t. From the standpoint of 
calculation, this means only that the constant changes with sample size. 
For a given confidence level the true mean of the population lies within 
the interval X ± ts/\/n, where values of t are obtained from Table 16-3. 

Table 16-3 
Values of t for Determining the Confidence Limits of X and s 



Confidence 


Sample size n 


level, % 


3 


5 


7 


10 


12 


15 


20 


00 


90 
95 
99 


2.35 
3.18 
5.84 


2.01 
2.57 
4.03 


1.89 
2.36 
3.50 


1.81 
2.23 
3.17 


1.78 
2.18 
3.05 


1.75 
2.13 
2.95 


1.72 
2.09 
2.85 


1.64 
1.96 
2.58 



The confidence limits for the standard deviation are best obtained from 
a table of the chi-square (x^) distribution. The limits within which the 
population variance a^ will lie, based on the sample variance s^, are given 

by 






<a' < 



X? 



(16-11: 



Values of x^ are taken from tables of the distribution for the degrees of 
freedom equal to n — 1. For example, if the limits within which s- 
approaches a^ are required to a 95 per cent level of confidence, then xi" is 
taken from the table at a probability of 0.975, while X2^ is taken at the 
0.025 probability level. An approximation which is good for large sam- 
ple sizes is that the true standard deviation lies within the interval s + 
ts/\/2n, where the same values of t listed in Table 16-3 apply. 



16-6. Extreme-value Distributions 

The argument is sometimes raised that the normal frequency distri- 
bution is unsuited for describing mechanical property data because the 
long tails on each side of the mean are unrealistic and do not represent 
the observed facts. However, for many practical problems involving 
statistics these tails can be ignored without affecting the results. More- 
over, it is possible to set arbitrary lower and/or upper limits to the normal 

^ For a discussion of this point see Dixon and Massey, op. at., pp. 97-101. 



Sec. 16-6] Statistics Applied to Materials Testins 431 

distribution' without destroying its statistical usefulness. The central- 
limit theorem shows that a normal frecjuency distribution is to be expected 
when the effect being observed results from averaging the effects of a 
whole series of variables. However, if the effect being observed is due 
to the smallest or largest of a number of variables, an extreme-value distri- 
bution is to be expected. If failure is due to one weakest link or to a 
number of more or less equally weak links, the extreme-value distribution 
would apply. 

The application of the extreme-value distribution to engineering prob- 
lems has been largely the result of the work of E. J. Gumbel.^ This 
theory has been used to predict the maximum wind velocity or the crest 
of floods (largest values) and the fatigue life for a 0.1 per cent probability 
of failure (smallest value). While the mathematical details of the 
extreme-value theory are outside the scope of this chapter, an idea of 
the concept can be obtained from an example. Consider a group of 
fatigue specimens tested to failure at a constant stress. The distribution 
of fatigue life obtained from this sample can be considered to be an 
extreme-value distribution if it is assumed that each specimen which 
failed represents the weakest out of a large number of specimens tested 
to the same particular number of cycles of stress reversal. Methods of 
using the extreme-value distribution with fatigue data have been devel- 
oped,^ and extreme-value probability paper is available for plotting the 
results. 

A special type of extreme-value distribution is the Weibull distri- 
bution.^ For this frequency distribution, the cumulative-distribution 
function is given by 



(^■) 



P(X) = 1 - exp - ^^-^^ (16-12) 



where P(X) is the probability that a value less than X will be obtained, 
Xn is the value of X for which P(X) = 0, and Xo and m are empirically 
determined constants. This equation gives a cumulative-distribution 
curve which resembles that for a normal distribution except that Weibull's 
distribution has a finite lower limit X„. Weibull's distribution has been 
used to describe the yield-strength distribution of steel and the fatigue 

1 For a discussion of the truncated normal distribution, see Hald, op. cit., pp. 144- 
151; A. C. Cohen, J. Am. Statist. Assoc, vol. 44, pp. 518-52-5, 1949. 

2 E. J. Gumbel, Statistical Theory of Extreme Values and Some Practical Applica- 
tions, Natl. Bur. Standards Appl. Math. Ser. 33, Feb. 12, 1954; Probability Tables for 
the Analysis of Extreme-value Data, Natl. Bur. Standards Appl. Math. Ser. 22, July 
6, 1953; see also J. Lieblein, NACA Tech. Note 3053, January, 1954. 

3 A. M. Freudenthal and E. J. Gumbel, Proc. Intern. Conf. Fatigue of Metals, Lon- 
don, 1956, pp. 262-271. 

' W. Weibull, J. Appl. Meek., vol. 18, pp. 293-297, 1951, vol. 19, pp. 109-113, 1952. 



432 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 16 

life at constant stress. It appears to be particularly well suited to 
describing the distribution of fatigue life of bearings. ^ 

When a mass of mechanical test data is analyzed to select reliable 
design values, the design engineer is usually interested in establishing 
the smallest values of the property being tested, so that the design can be 
based on conservative yet realistic strength values. For example, the 
designer might be interested in knowing the value of yield strength which 
would be exceeded by 99.9 per cent of the specimens, while the metal- 
lurgist who is trying to improve the yield strength by heat treatment 
would be mainly interested in knowing the mean and standard deviation 
of his test values. Of course, the value of yield strength which would be 
exceeded by 99.9 per cent of the specimens can be calculated from the 
sample observations provided that the frequency distribution of the obser- 
vations is known and the observations faithfully follow this distribution. 
Unfortunately, although most mechanical property data fit a normal or 
log-normal frequency distribution over the central region of probability, 
at the tails or extremes of the distribution appreciable deviations usually 
occur. A mean and standard deviation can be determined from any set 
of observations by the methods described previously, regardless of the 
nature of the frequency distribution, and even if the observations deviate 
considerably from a normal distribution, the powerful statistical tests 
described in the next section can still be used with relatively little error. 
On the other hand, estimates of the probability of failure are not valid 
outside the regions in which the data are known to fit the frequency 
distribution. The prediction of values at low probabilities of failure, 
e.g., the 0.1 per cent level, on the basis of the assumption that the data 
follow the normal distribution in this region can lead to considerable 
error. Further, because of the large number of tests required to make 
an experimental determination of the stress which gives a 1 or 0.1 per 
cent probability of failure, there are few experimental observations in 
the extreme regions which can be used for guidance. While extreme- 
value statistics have not yet met with universal acceptance, this approach 
is the most reasonable in deahng with small probabilities of failure. 

16-7. Tests of Significance 

An important feature of statistical analysis is the ability, through tests 
of significance, to make comparisons and draw conclusions with a greater 
assurance of being correct than if the conclusions had been based only on 
intuitive interpretation of the data. Most of the common statistical tests 
of significance are based on the use of the normal distribution, so that it 

^ J. Lieblein and M. Zelen, J. Research Natl. Bur. Standards, vol. 57, pp. 273-316, 
1956. 



Sec. 16-7] Statistics Applied to Materials Testing 433 

is a distinct advantage if the test data conform to this frequency distri- 
bution. A common problem which is readily treated by means of tests 
of significance is to determine whether the means and/or standard devi- 
ations of two samples drawn from essentially the same population really 
differ significantly or whether the observed differences are due to random 
chance. In statistics the term significant difference is used much more 
precisely than in everyday usage. In determining whether or not two 
statistics are significantly different it is always necessary to specify the 
probability of the test predicting an erroneous conclusion. This is known 
as the level of significance. For example, if the test of significance is 
made at the 5 per cent level of significance there is 1 chance in 20 that 
an erroneous conclusion would be reached by the test. 

Difference between Two Sam-pie Standard Deviations 

It is often of interest to know whether or not the variability of one set 
of measurements differs significantly from that of another set of data. 
For example, it may be important to know whether or not a certain 
metallurgical condition shows more scatter in fatigue life than another 
treatment or whether or not the scatter is significantly different at high 
stresses and at low stresses. The test of significance which is used for 
this situation is the F test. 

Let Si be the standard deviation for a sample size Wi from the first 
population, and let S2 and n^ be the same terms for the second population. 
The following ratio is determined, where Si^ > §2^: 

F = 'A (16-13) 

The F ratio obtained from Eci. (16-1.3) is compared with tables of the 
F distribution.' The table corresponding to the selected level of signifi- 
cance is used. This table is based on the number of degrees of freedom, 
which for this case is one less than the sample size. The table is entered 
across the top for the degrees of freedom for the numerator in the F ratio 
and along the left-hand edge for the degrees of freedom for the denomi- 
nator. Where this column and row intersect, we get the value of the 
F ratio. If the ratio calculated in Eq. (16-13) is greater than the F ratio 
obtained from the table, the two sets of standard deviations are signifi- 
cantly different at the chosen level of significance. Note that, as the 
level of significance is raised (less risk of making an erroneous decision), 
the greater must be the F ratio determined from Eq. (16-13). For exam- 
ple, for ni = no = 21, the F tables give 2.12 at the 5 per cent level and 
2.94 at the 1 per cent level of significance. 

1 M. Merrington and C. M. Thompson, Biometrika, vol. 33, p. 73, 1943; see also 
Dixon and Massey, op. cit., pp. 310-313. 



434 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 16 

Difference between Two Means 

Sample Standard Deviations Not Significantly Different. If the F test 
shows that the standard deviations of the two samples are not signifi- 
cantly different, the following procedure can be used to determine whether 
or not there is a significant difference between the means of the two sam- 
ples Xi and X2 : First, the variance of the two samples in common should 
be determined. 

2 ^ (ni — l)gi^ -h (n2 - l)s2^ 
^1 + W2 — 2 

Then a value for the t statistic can be determined. 



(16-14) 



If the value of t determined from Eq. (16-15) is greater than the value 
obtained from tables of the t distribution^ at the specified level of signifi- 
cance and with the degrees of freedom equal to ni -\- n^ — 2, there is a 
significant difference between the means. 

Sample Standard Deviations Significantly Different. If the F test shows 
that the standard deviations of the two samples are significantly different, 
it is not correct to determine a common variance. The value of t is 
determined from Eq. (16-16), and a value of c is calculated from Eq. 
(16-17) to use in determining the number of degrees of freedom (d.f.) 
which is used with the t tables. 

^ = / 2/ ^ ^ — 27~ul (16-16) 

c = ./^Y''\/ (16-17) 



d.f. = 



siV^i + S2^/n2 

^ (1 - cr 



(16-18) 



ni — 1 n2 — 1 

N onparametric Tests of Significance 

The F test and the t test depend on the requirement that the popu- 
lations are a good approximation to the normal distribution. Techniques 
which do not depend on the mathematical form of the frequency distri- 
bution are available. These nonparametric methods may be useful in 
cases where the data are too meager to allow an estimate of the frequency 
distribution to be made. However, because they do not depend on any 
sampling distribution, they are less powerful than the methods which 
have been described above. Only a brief description of some of the non- 

1 Ibid., p. 307. 



Sec. 16-8] Statistics Applied to Materials Testins 435 

parametric techniques can be given here. For details, reference should 
be made to the original sources. 

The rank test^ arranges the two samples in numerical order and assigns 
rank numbers. The totals of the rank for each sample are compared 
with tables to determine whether or not a significant difference exists. 

The run test"- arranges all values from both samples in ascending order. 
The number of "runs" from each sample are determined, and by com- 
paring with tables, it can be found whether or not the observations of 
both samples have been drawn from the same population. To illus- 
trate the meaning of the term run, if two samples A and B are 
arranged in order to give the series ABA ABB A A ABB, there are six 
runs A-B-AA-BB-AAA-BB in this series. 

The confidence interval for the median of a population can be obtained 
very readily without any consideration of the distribution function of the 
population. If the observations are listed in ascending order, we know 
with great certainty that the median of the population lies between the 
smallest and largest observation. As we approach the central value of 
the sample, our degree of certainty decreases. Tables are available^ for 
predicting at various levels of confidence and for different sample sizes 
what values in the array the population median would be expected to lie 
between. For example, if n = 15, the fourth and twelfth observations 
are confidence limits of more than 95 per cent for the population median, 
while if n = 50, the population median will lie between the eighteenth 
and thirty-third observation. 

16-8. Analysis of Variance 

The statistical tests of significance discussed in the previous section 
deal only with the analysis of a single factor at two different levels. For 
example, by using the methods of the previous section, one could deter- 
mine whether the transverse reduction of area is significantly different 
for different forging reductions or for different heat treatments. How- 
ever, to determine the interaction between the two requires the analysis 
of variance. One method* of analysis of variance will be described below 
by means of a simplified illustrative example. 

Table 16-4 gives the values of RAT for a hypothetical situation where 
tensile tests were determined from forgings with 10:1 and 30:1 forging 

' F. Wilcoxon, "Some Rapid Approximate Statistical Procedures," American 
Cyanamid Co., New York, 1949. 

2 Dixon and Massey, op. cit., pp. 25-1-255. 

3 Ibid., table 25, p. 360. 

* Based on a procedure given by C. R. Smith, Metal Progr., vol. 69, pp. 81-86, 
February, 1956. 



436 



Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 16 



reductions, with and without a homogenization heat treatment. We are 
interested in answering the following questions. 

1. Is there a significant difference in RAT for a 10: 1 and 30: 1 forging 
reduction? 

2. Is there a significant difference in RAT between a forging which was 
given no homogenization treatment and one given the homogenization 
treatment? 

3. Is there a significant interaction between forging reduction and 
homogenization which affects the level of RAT? 



Table 16-4 

Effect of Forging Reduction and Homogenization Treatment on 

Transverse Reduction of Area (RATj 



Homogenization 


Forging reduction 
















10:1 






30:1 


None 




25.8 
30.4 
28.6 
35.6 
20.3 






22.8 
19.5 
30.6 
28.5 
25.5 




Ti 


y. 140 


7 


Ti 


,-. 126.9 


2400°F, 50 hr 




26.4 
35.6 
30.2 
21.4 

27.2 






30.6 
35.3 
27.9 
28.2 
31.5 




Ti 


i. 140 


8 


Ti 


y. 153.5 



T.i. 267.6 



281.5 



280.4 



T.j. 294.3 



561.9 



For the arrangement of the data shown in Table 16-4 vertical listings 
are called columns and horizontal listings are called rows. The experi- 
mental values for each condition constitute a cell. The total of all the 
values in each cell is indicated by {Ta). The total for each forging 
reduction irrespective of homogenization is called {Ti.). The total for 
each homogenization condition regardless of forging reduction is (T.j.). 
(T...) is the total of all values in the table. Further definitions are as 
follows : 

k = number of columns in table = 2 
I = number of rows in table = 2 
m = number of readings in each cell = 5 



Sec. 16-8] Statistics Applied to Materials Testing 437 

The following computations are made from Table 16-4: 

1. Total sum of squares (TSS) 

where ^X^j is the summation of the square of all readings, or 
TSS = 16,208.67 - J^l;^l\ = 422.09 

2. Subtotal sum of squares (SSS) 



4^- - 7^ (16-20) 



m klm. 



ggg ^ (140.7)^ + (126.9)-- + (140.8)^ + (153.5)^ _ (561.9)'^ ^ ^^ ^^^ 

5 20 ■ " 

3. Within-cells sum of squares (WSS) 

WSS = TSS - SSS (16-21) 

WSS = 422.09 - 70.82 = 351.27 

4. Between-columns sum of squares (BCSS) 

y 7^2 712 

BCSS = ^ - if- (16-22) 

Im klm 

^^^^ (281.5)^ + (280.4)^ (561.9)^ „_ 

5. Between-rows sum of squares (BRSS) 

y /T12 7^2 

BRSS = ^ - fy- (16-23) 

km klm 

(267.6)^^ + (294.3)=^ (561.9)^ _ 

^^'^^ = 2IO 20^ " 

6. Interaction sum of squares (ISS) 

ISS = SSS - BCSS - BRSS (16-24) 

ISS = 70.82 - 0.06 - 35.65 = 35.11 

Once the computations are made, the results can be entered in an 
analysis-of- variance table such as Table 16-5. Values of mean square 
are obtained by dividing the values of sum of the squares by their respec- 
tive degrees of freedom. To determine whether or not there are signifi- 



438 



Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 16 



cant differences between the columns and rows and interactions between 
the two, the respective mean squares are used in the F test. For example, 
to determine whether or not there is a significant interaction between 
forging reduction and homogenization treatment, the following F ratio is 
determined : 

interaction mean square 



F = 



F = 



within-cells mean square 
35.11 



21.92 



= 1.61 



A check of tables of the F distribution at the 5 per cent level of signifi- 
cance shows that the F ratio must exceed 4.49 for the variability to be 
significant. Therefore, there is no significant interaction between these 
two variables. 

Table 16-5 
Analysis of Variance 



Source of variability 


Degrees of 
freedom 


Sum of 
squares 


Mean 
square 


Between columns (forging reduction) 

Between rows (homogenization) 

Interaction between columns and rows 

Within cells 


1 

1 

1 

16 


0.06 

35.65 

35.11 

351.276 


0.06 
35.65 
35.11 
21.92 






Total 


19 





To determine whether or not there is a significant effect of homogeni- 
zation on the level of RAT, the following F ratio is determined: 



F = 



F = 



between-rows mean square 

interaction mean square 
35.65 
35.11 



1.016 i^(0.05) = 161.00 



Since the calculated F ratio is far less than the value of F at the 5 per cent 
level of significance, it must be concluded that the data show no signifi- 
cant effect of homogenization on RAT. In the same way it can be shown 
that there is no significant difference between the two forging reductions. 



16-9. Statistical Design of Experiments 

The greatest benefit can be gained from statistical analysis when the 
experiments are planned in advance so that data are taken in a way 
which will provide the most unbiased and precise results commensurate 



Sec. 16-9] Statistics Applied to Materials Testing 439 

with the desired expenditure of time and money. This can best be done 
through the combined efforts of a statistician and the engineer during 
the planning stage of the research project. Only a brief introduction to 
commonly used statistical designs of experiments can be given in this 
section. For details the reader is referred to several excellent texts on 
this subject.^ 

In any experimental program involving a large number of tests, it is 
important to randomize the order in which the specimens are selected for 
testing. By randomization we permit any one of the many specimens 
involved in the experiment to have an equal chance of being selected for 
a given test. In this way, bias due to uncontrolled second-order varia- 
bles is minimized. For example, in any extended testing program errors 
can arise over a period of time owing to subtle changes in the character- 
istics of the testing equipment or in the proficiency of the operator of the 
test. In taking metal specimens from large forgings or ingots the possi- 
bility of the variation of properties with position in the forging must be 
considered. If the objective of the test is to measure the average proper- 
ties of the entire forging, randomization of the test specimens will mini- 
mize variability due to position in the forging. 

One way of randomizing a batch of specimens is to assign a number to 
each specimen, put a set of numbered tags corresponding to the specimen 
numbers in a jar, mix them thoroughly, and then withdraw numbers from 
the jar. Each tag should be placed back in the jar after it is withdrawn 
to allow an equal probability of selecting that number. The considerable 
labor which is involved in this procedure can be minimized by using a 
table of random numbers. The first number is selected by placing your 
finger on a number with your eyes closed. For two digit numbers, 
the next number in the table will be found on the page corresponding 
to the first digit of the number in the column given by the second digit. 
This procedure is repeated over and over until all the specimens are 
selected. 

In the early stages of a research project it is frequently important to 
determine what are the important factors in the problem under study 
and what is the relative importance of each of these factors. The use of 
a factorial design in place of the conventional approach of changing each 
factor one at a time will provide a more efficient answer. Assume that 
the problem is to determine the effect of boron and nickel content on the 
yield strength of a high-strength steel. In the first trial each factor will 
be investigated at two levels. Table 16-6 indicates that three runs would 

' K. A. Brownlee, "Industrial Experimentation," 4th ed., Chemical Publishing 
Company, Inc., New York, 1952; O. L. Davies, "The Design and Analysis of Indus- 
trial Experiments," Oliver & Boyd, Ltd., Edinburgh and London, 1954; W. G. Cochran 
and G. M. Cox, "Experimental Designs," John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1950. 



440 



Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 16 



be required by the conventional approach of varying each factor one at 
a time. By comparing run 1 with run 2, we can find the effect of varying 
the boron content at constant nickel content. Comparing run 1 with 
run 3 gives the effect of varying the nickel content for a constant boron 
content. For this design, one control experiment, run 1, is used to judge 



Table 16-6 
Design of Experiment Based on Conventional One-at-a-time Variation 

OF Each Factor 



Factor 


B, % 


Ni, % 


Run 1 

Run 2 

Run 3 


0.002 
0.020 
0.002 


1.0 
1.0 
3.0 



the effect produced by varying the levels of boron and nickel content. 
No information is provided on the effect of boron and nickel when they 
are both at their upper level. Furthermore, it is quite possible that the 
effect of changing the boron content from the low to the high level would 
not be the same at both the low and the high level of nickel content. 
In other words, there may be an interaction between the effect of boron 
and nickel. A simple design of experiment such as is given in Table 16-6 
cannot determine the existence of interaction. 

The factorial design of the experiment for two variables at two levels 
is given in Table 16-7. This design has several advantages over that 

Table 16-7 
Factorial Design of the Experiment 



Factor 


B, % 


Ni, % 


Run 1 


0.002 


1.0 


Run 2 


0.002 


3.0 


Run 3 


0.020 


1.0 


Run 4 


0.020 


3.0 



given in Table 16-6. First, more precise statements can be made about 
the effect of varying boron and nickel content. All four runs are used in 
measuring this main effect by comparing the two runs made at the low 
level with the two runs made at the upper level. Second, the interaction 
V^etween boron and nickel is determined from a comparison of the differ- 
ence in results of runs 1 and 4 with the difference in results of runs 2 
and 3. An analysis of variance is used to make these comparisons. 



Sec. 16 10] Statistics Applied to Materials Testing 441 

The illustration given above represents the simplest case of a factorial 
design. The number of runs required in a factorial design is equal to 
the number of levels raised to the power of the number of factors being 
investigated. Thus, if we were interested in four variables at four levels, 
256 runs would be required. The very rapid rate at which the number 
of runs required by a factorial design increases with small increases in 
the number of either variables or levels is the chief disadvantage of this 
type of experimental design. However, the disadvantages of simple fac- 
torial design are overcome to a great extent by a modification known 
as fractional replication.^ The number of runs required is substantially 
reduced without greatly affecting the power of the method. The main 
sacrifice is in runs which, if included, would provide information on 
higher-order interactions between the variables. The construction of 
fractional replicate designs is covered in the foregoing reference and in a 
number of others.^ 

16-10. Linear Regression 

The term regression is used in statistics to refer to the determination 
of a functional relationship between one or more independent variables 
Xi and a dependent variable Yi. Regression techniques are ordinarily 
used where it is assumed that a fixed but unknown relationship exists 
between the X and Y populations but the random errors in the measure- 
ments prevent a reliable determination of the relationship by inspection. 
An example might be the determination of the relationship between 
tensile strength (F) and Brinell hardness (.Y). In this section only the 
simplest case of linear regression will be considered. This is also called 
the method of least squares because the line which results from the analy- 
sis has the property that the sum of the squares of vertical deviations of 
observations from this line is smaller than the corresponding sum of the 
squares of deviations from any other line. Multiple regression, where 
there are two or more independent variables in the regression equation, 
is an extension of this analysis, and curvilinear regression, where a curved 
line is fitted to the data, is a further refinement. 

Frequently, the term correlation is used in conjunction with regression. 
A clear distinction should be made between regression and correlation. 
Regression deals with the situation where there is a clear distinction 
between the dependent and independent variables, while correlation deals 
with the relationship between two or more sets of data which vary jointlj'. 

' D. J. Finney, Ann. Eugenics, vol. 12, pp. 291-301, 1945. 

2 K. A. Brownlee, B. K. Kelly, and P. K. Loraine, Biometrika, vol. 35, pts. Ill, IV, 
pp. 268-276, 1948; A. L. Davies and W. A. Hay, Biometrics, vol. 6, no. 3, pp. 233-249, 
1950. 



442 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 16 

A linear-regression equation between the dependent variable Y and 
the independent variable X is given by 

Y = a + b(X - X) (16-25) 

i = n 

where a = '-^ — = Y (16-26) 

n 

n I X.Y, - (I X,)\l F.) 

b = -^^ '-^^ i=i (16-27) 

nlX^-(l X.y 

1=1 1=1 

The measure of the variation of the observed value of Y from the value 
calculated from the regression equation is called the standard error of 
estimate Syx. It plays the role of the standard deviation in regression 
analysis. 

s,. = ' (s,2 - b's.') (16-28) 



The quantity which determines how well the regression equation fits the 
experimental data is the correlation coefficient r. A value of r close to zero 
indicates that the regression line is incapable of predicting values of Y, 
while a value close to unity indicates nearly perfect prediction. 

n n n 

n I X.F, - J X, 2 Y, 
r = -^^ ^^^ '^ — (16-29) 

ft Ox<>y 

16-11. Control Charts 

A statistical technique which has proved very useful for routine analy- 
sis of data is the control chart. The use of this technique is based on the 
viewpoint that every manufacturing process is subject to two sources of 
variation, chance variation and variation due to assignable causes. The 
control chart is a graphical method of detecting the presence of variation 
which is greater than that expected as a result of chance. The control 
chart is one important method which is used in the branch of applied 
statistics known as quality control.^ 

The use of the control chart can best be described by means of an 

1 E. L. Grant, "Statistical Quality Control," 2d ed., McGraw-Hill Book Company, 
Inc., New York, 1952. 



Sec. 16-11] 



Statistics Applied to Materials Testing 443 



illustration. Consider a commercial heat-treating operation where bear- 
ing races are being quenched and tempered in a conveyor-type furnace 
on a continuous 24-hr basis. Every 2 hr the Rockwell hardness is meas- 
ured on 10 bearing races to determine whether or not the product con- 
forms to the specifications. The mean of each sample X is computed 
and the dispersion is determined by computing the range R. A separate 
control chart is kept for the mean and the range (Fig. 16-7). The aver- 
age of the sample means, /x, and the mean of the sample values of the 



47 
46 - 
45 



43 
42 
41 
40 



Rockwell C hardness 



UCL 
LCL 



J I I L 



2 4 6 8 10 12 14 

Batch number 



UCL 



LCL 



2 4 6 8 10 12 14 

Batch number 

Fig. 16-7. Control charts for X and R. 



range, R, are first determined. Next, the control limits are determined. 
Points which fall outside the control limits indicate that the variation is 
greater than would be expected solely from chance and that corrective 
action should be taken to bring the process into control. 

The determination of the upper control limit (UCL) and the lower 
control limit (LCL) for the mean and the range is greatly simplified by 
the use of tables developed by Shewart. ' The control limits for the range 
and the means for a 1 per cent chance of the sample value exceeding the 
control limits due to random chance can be determined from Table 16-8. 

' W. A. Shewart, "Economic Control of Quality of Manufactured Product," D. Van 
Nostrand Company, Inc., Princeton, N.J., 1931. 



444 Applications to Materials Testing 

For the range 



For the means 



UCL = DuR 
LCL = DlR 

UCL = M + A^R 
LCL = M - A2R 



[Chap. 16 
(16-30) 
(16-31) 



Table 16-8 

Multipliers for Use in Determining Control Limits 

OF Control Charts f 



Sample 
size 


Dl 


Do 


A2 


2 


0.009 


3.52 


1.88 


4 


0.185 


2.26 


0.73 


6 


0.308 


1.97 


0.48 


8 


0.386 


1.84 


0.37 


10 


0.441 


1.76 


0.31 


12 


0.482 


1.70 


0.27 


15 


0.524 


1.64 


0.22 



t W. J. Dixon and F. J. Massey, Jr., "Introduction to Statistical Analysis," 1st ed., 
p. 113, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 1951. 

16-12. Statistical Aspects of Size Effects in Brittle Fracture 

Mechanical-strength measurements of brittle materials, like glass and 
ceramics, and of metals, under conditions where they behave in a brittle 
manner, show a dependence of strength on the size of the test specimen. 
As the size of the specimen decreases, the fracture stress in tension, bend- 
ing, torsion, or impact increases. This is known as a size effect. The 
existence of a size effect in fatigue has already been considered in Chap. 12. 

An explanation for the size effect can be provided by statistical reason- 
ing. If it is assumed that brittle fracture is controlled by a distribution 
of imperfections or cracks, the fracture stress is given by the Griffith 
criterion. 



/2Ey 
\ ire 



r 



(16-32) 



For every size of crack c there will be a certain fracture stress ac given 
by Eq. (16-32). It is assumed that the specimen is made up of many 
volume elements which each contains a single crack. Since it is assumed 
that there is no interaction between the cracks in the different volume 
elements, the strength of the specimen is determined by the element with 
the longest crack, for this results in the lowest value of fracture stress. 



Sec. 16-12] Statistics Applied to Materials Testing 445 

Therefore, the brittle-fracture strength is determined, not by an average 
value of the distribution of imperfections, but by the one, most dangerous 
imperfection. This concept of brittle fracture is called the weakest-link 
concept in direct analogy with the fact that the strength of a chain is 
determined by the strength of its weakest link. The existence of a size 
effect arises quite naturally from this concept. If the crack density of 
the material is assumed constant, as the volume of the specimen increases 
the total number of cracks also increases and therefore the probability of 
encountering a severe crack is increased. If the stress distribution 
imposed by the test method is nonuniform, as in bending or torsion, the 
analysis must be based on the surface area. 

The problem of relating the crack distribution to the fracture strength 
is one of finding the distribution function of the smallest value of strength 
as a function of the number of cracks A'' for a given distribution function 
of crack sizes. Frequently, the distribution of crack size is assumed to 
be Gaussian. This implies that the probability of having a small defect 
is the same as the probability of occurrence of a large defect. The 
mathematics for this crack distribution has been worked out by Frenkel 
and Kontorova.^ For a Gaussian distribution of the strength of the 
weakest element the strength should decrease linearly with increasing 
(log Vy^, where V is the volume of the specimen. WeibuU's distribution 
function (see Sec. 16-6) has also been used to describe the distribution 
of crack sizes. ^ This predicts that the strength should decrease with 
increasing volume according to V~'^''", where m is the experimentally 
determined factor in WeibuU's distribution function. Experiments on 
the size effect in tension and bending of steel at low temperature show 
good agreement with WeibuU's prediction.^ It is also argued that a 
more reasonable distribution of defects decreases in proportion with the 
size of the defect. The Laplacian distribution adequately expresses this 
requirement. 

p{c) =expf-^^ (16-33) 



where p(c) = probability of occurrence of a crack of length c 

a = a constant 
The Laplacian distribution predicts that the strength decreases linearly 
with an increase in log V. Figure 16-8 shows the calculated frequency 
distribution of fracture stresses as a function of the number of cracks N 

1 J. I. Frenkel and T. A. Kontorova, /. Phijsics (U.S.S.R.), vol. 7, pp. 108-114, 1943. 

2 W. WeibuU, A Statistical Theory of the Strength of Materials, Roij. Swed. Inst. 
Eng. Research, no. 151, 1939. 

3 N. Davidenkov, E. Shevandin, and F. Wittman, J. Appl. Mech., vol. 14, pp 
63-67, 1946. 



446 



Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 16 



on the basis of a Laplacian distribution of cracks. ^ Note that the larger 
the total number of cracks the smaller the scatter in fracture stress 
because of the higher probability of finding a critical defect. Also, as 
the number of defects increases, the mean value of the fracture stress 
decreases, but as the number of defects reaches large values, there is less 
relative decrease in the mean value. Existing data are not numerous 
enough to determine which of these distribution functions for crack size 
is most generally applicable. 



120 
>.100 

o 

1 80 
1 60 

D 
11) 

^ 40 

20 




- 




/I/ 


= 10'6 






- 












- 






n-/l/-10^2 






- 












- 












- 






.. 






- 


/ 


]) 


\J\ 


^^ 


^-lO'' 



0.2 0.3 

Relative fracture stress 



0.4 



0.5 



Fig. 16-8. Calculated frequency distribution of fracture stress as a function of number 
of cracks, A^. (J. C. Fisher and J. H. Hollomon, Trans. AIME, vol. 171, p. 555, 1947.) 

Ductile metals do not exhibit so large a size effect as brittle materials. 
The weakest-link concept is not well suited to this situation. The diffi- 
culty with using the weakest-link concept with ductile metals is that 
plastic deformation alters both the size and the orientation of the defects, 
and the individual volume elements can no longer be assumed to be 
independent. 



16-13. Statistical Treatment of the Fatigue Limit 

The statistical nature of the fatigue properties of metals has been 
discussed in Chap. 12. In analyzing the results of a number of fatigue 
specimens tested to failure at a constant stress, it is usual procedure to 
assume that the logarithm of the number of cycles to failure is normally 
distributed. The standard procedures for determining the mean and 
standard deviation and the F test and t test for significant differences 
can be used provided that all computations are based on log N instead of 
A''. However, there are reasons to believe that the logarithmic-normal 

' J. C. Fisher and J. H. Hollomon, Trans. AIME, vol. 171, pp. 546-561, 1947. 



Sec. 16-13] Statistics Applied to Materials Testing 447 

distribution does not accurately describe the distribution of fatigue life 
at the upper and lower extremes of the distribution. Since fatigue life 
depends on the weakest section rather than on average behavior, it is 
to be expected that the extreme-value distribution function would pro- 
vide better agreement in these regions. 

The statistical analysis of the fatigue data in the region of the fatigue 
limit requires special techniques which have not yet been discussed in 
this chapter. In making tests to measure the fatigue limit, we can test 
a given specimen only at a particular stress, and if the specimen fails 
before the cutoff limit of 10^ cycles then we know that the fatigue limit 
of the specimen is somewhere below the stress level which we used. 
Consequently, if the specimen does not fail (a run-out) in the prescribed 
number of cycles, we know that its fatigue limit lies somewhere above 
the test stress. Because a given specimen cannot be tested more than 
once, even if it "ran out," it is necessary to estimate the statistics of the 
fatigue limit by testing a large number of presumably identical specimens 
at different stress levels. Experiments of this type are known as sensi- 
tivity experiments. Two particular types of statistical analysis of sensi- 
tivity experiments have been applied to the statistical determination of 
the fatigue limit. The procedures used will be briefly described below. 
Step-by-step procedures for the analysis will be found in the ASTM 
Manual on statistical analysis of fatigue data.^ 

The first of the methods for the statistical determination of the fatigue 
limit is known as probit analysis. A number of specimens are tested at 
each of four to six stress levels in the vicinity of the estimated fatigue 
limit. When the percentage of the specimens which survived at each 
stress is plotted on normal-probability paper against the stress level, a 
straight line is obtained. One way of performing the experiment is to 
test 20 specimens at each stress level. The analysis follows the pro- 
cedures given by Finney in his book on probit analysis.^ The percentage 
of survivors are converted to probit values^ and a regression line is deter- 
mined according to Finney's procedure for weighting the values at differ- 
ent percentages of survival. However, the same type of analysis can be 
made without resorting to any special techniques. 

The number of specimens tested at each stress should be apportioned 
with regard to the expected percentage of survival. Not fewer than 
5 specimens should be tested at a stress level, and at least a total of 
50 specimens should be used in the determination of the median value 

1 "A Tentative Guide for Fatigue Testing and the Statistical Analysis of Fatigue 
Data," ASTM Spec. Tech. Publ. 9lA, 1958. 

2 D. J. Finney, "Probit Analysis," Cambridge University Press, New York, 1952. 
^ The term probit is an abbreviation of probability unit. Transformation to probits 

is a method of eliminating negative values from the standard normal deviate z. 



448 



Applications to Materials Testing 



[Chap. 16 



of fatigue limit. If 10 specimens are tested at stress levels which give 
between 25 and 75 per cent survival, 15 specimens should be tested at 
stresses which give 15 to 20 and 80 to 85 per cent survival and 20 speci- 
mens are required at stresses which result in 10 and 90 per cent survival. 
With this relative distribution of specimens the test values are adequately 
weighted at the extreme values, and it is possible to use a standard linear- 
regression analysis. In the standard linear-regression equation X is the 
stress level, and Y is the percentage of survivors converted to values of 
the standard normal deviate z. The values of z corresponding to a given 
percentage of survivors p are obtained by entering an expanded version 
of Table 16-2 under the column headed Area with 1 — p/100. The 



50 
.-48 

a. 

O 

S46 
44 
42 
40 



X = failure 
o = nonfailure 

J I I I 1 I I I 



J \ L 



J I 



2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 

Specimen number 

Fig. 16-9. Staircase testing sequence for determination of mean fatigue limit. 



median value of the fatigue limit (often loosely called the mean fatigue 
limit) is given by the stress which intercepts the regression line at 50 per 
cent survival. Its standard deviation is given by the stress range between 
50 and 84 per cent survival. 

The second method of analyzing fatigue data at the fatigue limit is the 
staircase, or up-and-down, method.^ This method provides a good meas- 
ure of the mean fatigue limit with fewer specimens than are required with 
the probit method, but it has the disadvantage that tests must be run in 
sequence. The testing procedure is illustrated in Fig. 16-9. The first 
specimen is tested at the estimated value of the fatigue limit. If this 
specimen fails, the stress for the next specimen is decreased by a fixed 
increment. This procedure is continued for each succeeding specimen 
until a runout is obtained. The stress applied to the next specimen is 
then increased by the increment. The procedure is further continued, 

1 W. J. Dixon and A. M. Mood, J. A^n. Statist. Assoc, vol. 43, p. 109, 1948. 



16-13] 



Statistics Applied to Materials Testing 



449 



the stress being increased when a specimen runs out and decreased when 
it fails. Fifteen to twenty-five specimens must be tested. 



Table 16-9 
Method of Analyzing Staircase Data 



Stress, 
psi 


i 


nonfailures 


irii 


I'^m 


46,000 


3 


1 


3 


9 


45,000 


2 


2 


4 


8 


44,000 


1 


4 


4 


4 


43,000 





1 










A' = 8 


^ = 11 


B = 21 



d = stress increment = 1,000 psi 
A'o = first stress level = 43,000 psi 
X = 43,000 + 1,000(11.^ + }.i) = 44,870 psi 



s = 1.620(1,000) 



8 X 21 - (11)2 



+ 0.029 



]-■ 



240 psi 



To determine the mean fatigue limit, the data are arranged in a tabular 
form as in Table 16-9. A study of Fig. 16-9 shows that there are 10 fail- 
ures and 8 nonfailures out of the 18 specimens which were tested. Since 
the analysis is based on the least frequent event (failures or nonfailures), 
only the nonfailures are considered in Table 16-9. The lowest stress level 
at which a nonfailure is obtained is denoted i = 0, the next i = 1, etc. 
The mean fatigue limit X and its standard deviation s are determined 
from Eqs. (16-34) and (16-35). The constants in these equations are 
explained in Table 16-9. The positive sign is used in Eq. (16-34) when 
the analysis is based on nonfailures, while the negative sign is used when 
it is based on failures. 



X = Xo + d 
s = 1.620rf 



(NB_j-A^ 



-f 0.029 



NB - A-" 



(16-34) 
> 0.3 (16-35; 



The staircase method provides a better estimate of the mean fatigue limit 
than the probit method, and with a fewer number of specimens. How- 
ever, the latter method gives a better estimate of the standard devia- 
tion, and it provides over-all a greater amount of information because the 
probit curve is actually a response curve between percentage survival and 
stress. 



450 Applications to Materials Testing [Chap. 16 

BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Dixon, W. J., and F. J. Massey, Jr.: "Introduction to Statistical Analysis," 1st ed., 
McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 1951. 

Fisher, R. S.: "Statistical Methods for Research Workers," 12th ed., Hafner Pub- 
lishing Company, New York, 1954. 

Goulden, C. H. : "Methods of Statistical Analysis," 2d ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 
New York, 1952. 

Hald, A.: "Statistical Theory with Engineering Applications," John Wiley & Sons, 
Inc., New York, 1952. 

Olds, E. G., and Cyril Wells: Statistical Methods for Evaluating the Quality of Cer- 
tain Wrought Steel Products, Trans. ASM, vol. 42, pp. 845-899, 1950. 



Part Four 

PLASTIC FORMING OF METALS 



Chapter 17 

GENERAL FUNDAMENTALS 
OF METALWORKING 

17-1. ClassiFication of Formins Processes 

The importance of metals in modern technology is due, in large part, 
to the ease with which they may be formed into useful shapes. Hundreds 
of processes have been developed for specific metalworking applications. 
However, these processes may be classified into only a few categories on 
the basis of the type of forces applied to the work piece as it is formed 
into shape. These categories are: 

1. Direct-compression-type processes 

2. Indirect-compression processes 

3. Tension-type processes 

4. Bending processes 

5. Shearing processes 

In direct-compression processes the force is applied to the surface 
of the workpiece, and the metal flows at right angles to the direction 
of the compression. The chief examples of this type of process are 
forging and rolling (Fig. 17-1). Indirect-compression processes include 
wire and tube drawing, extrusion, and the deep drawing of a cup. 
The primary applied forces are frequently tensile, but the indirect com- 
pressive forces developed by the reaction of the workpiece with the die 
reach high values. Therefore, the metal flows under the action of a com- 
bined stress state which includes high compressive forces in at least one 
of the principal directions. The best example of a tension-type forming 
process is stretch forming, where a metal sheet is wrapped to the contour 
of a die under the application of tensile forces. Bending involves the 
application of bending moments to the sheet, while shearing involves the 
application of shearing forces of sufficient magnitude to rupture the metal 
in the plane of shear. Figure 17-1 illustrates these processes in a very 
simplified way. 

453 



454 



Plastic Forming of Metals 



[Chap. 17 



Plastic forming operations are performed for at least two reasons. One 
objective is to produce a desired shape. The second objective is to 
improve the properties of the material through the alteration of the 
distribution of microconstituents, the refinement of grain size, and the 
introduction of strain hardening. 






Forging 




Rolling 




Wire drawing 









Extrusion 



t t A 






Deep drawing 




^ 



^■\ 






Stretch forming Bending 

Fig. 1 7-1 . Typical forming operations. 



Shearing 



Plastic working processes which are designed to reduce an ingot or 
billet to a standard mill product of simple shape, such as sheet, plate, 
and bar, are called primary mechanical working processes. Forming meth- 
ods which produce a part to a final finished shape are called secondary 
mechanical working processes. Most sheet-metal forming operations, wire 
drawing, and tube drawing are secondary processes. The terminology in 
this area is not very precise. Frequently the first category is referred to 
as processing operations, and the second is called fabrication. 

An important purpose of plastic working operations is to break down 
and refine the columnar or dendritic structure present in cast metals and 



Sec. 1 7-2] General Fundamentals of Metalworking 455 

alloys. Frequently the low strength and ductility of castings are due to 
the presence of a brittle constituent at the grain boundaries and dendritic 
boundaries. By compressive deformation it is often possible to fragment 
a brittle microconstituent in such a way that the ductile matrix flows 
into the spaces between fragments and welds together to leave a per- 
fectly sound structure. Once the brittle constituent is broken up, its 
effect on the mechanical properties is minor and ductility and strength 
are increased. Forging and rolling are the processes ordinarily used for 
breaking down a cast structure. However, extrusion is the best method 
because the billet is subjected to compressive forces only. 

17-2. Effect of Temperature on Forming Processes 

Forming processes are commonly classified into hot-working and cold- 
working operations. Hot working is defined as deformation under cou' 
ditions of temperature and strain rate such that recovery processes take 
place simultaneously with the deformation. On the other hand, cold 
working is deformation carried out under conditions where recovery proc- 
esses are not effective. In hot working the strain hardening and distorted 
grain structure produced by deformation are very rapidly eliminated by 
the formation of new strain-free grains as the result of recrystallization. 
Very large deformations are possible in hot working because the recovery 
processes keep pace with the deformation. Hot working occurs at an 
essentially constant flow stress, and because the flow stress decreases with 
increasing temperature, the energy required for deformation is generally 
much less for hot working than for cold working. Since strain hardening 
is not relieved in cold working, the flow stress increases with deformation. 
Therefore, the total deformation that is possible without causing fracture 
is less for cold working than for hot working, unless the effects of cold 
work are relieved by annealing. 

It is important to realize that the distinction between cold working and 
hot working does not depend upon any arbitrary temperature of defor- 
mation. For most commercial alloys a hot-working operation must be 
carried out at a relatively high temperature in order that a rapid rate of 
recrystallization be obtained. However, lead and tin recrystallize rapidly 
at room temperature after large deformations, so that the working of these 
metals at room temperature constitutes hot working. Similarly, working 
tungsten at 2,000°F, in the hot-working range for steel, constitutes cold 
working because this high-melting metal has a recrystallization temper- 
ature above this working temperature. 

Hot Working 

Hot working is the initial step in the mechanical working of most 
metals and alloys. Not only does hot working result in a decrease in 



456 Plastic Forming of Metals [Chap. 17 

the energy required to deform the metal and an increased abihty to flow 
without cracking, but the rapid diffusion at hot-working temperatures 
aids in decreasing the chemical inhomogeneities of the cast-ingot struc- 
ture. Blowholes and porosity are eliminated by the welding together of 
these cavities, and the coarse columnar grains of the casting are broken 
down and refined into smaller equiaxed recrystallized grains. These 
changes in structure from hot working result in an increase in ductility 
and toughness over the cast state. 

However, there are certain disadvantages to hot working. Because 
high temperatures are usually involved, surface reactions between the 
metal and the furnace atmosphere become a problem. Ordinarily hot 
working is done in air, oxidation results, and a considerable amount of 
metal may thus be lost. Reactive metals like molybdenum are severely 
embrittled by oxygen, and therefore they must be hot-worked in an inert 
atmosphere or protected from the air by a suitable container. Surface 
decarburization of hot-worked steel can be a serious problem, and fre- 
quently extensive surface finishing is required to remove the decarburized 
layer. Rolled-in oxide makes it difficult to produce good surface finishes 
on hot-rolled products, and because allowance must be made for expan- 
sion and contraction, the dimensional tolerances for hot-worked mill 
products are greater than for cold-worked products. Further, the struc- 
ture and properties of hot-worked metals are generally not so uniform 
over the cross section as in metals which have been cold-worked and 
annealed. Since the deformation is always greater in the surface layers, 
the metal will have a finer recrystallized grain size in this region. Because 
the interior will be at higher temperatures for longer times during cooling 
than will be the external surfaces, grain growth can occur in the interior 
of large pieces, which cool slowly from the working temperature. 

The lower temperature limit for the hot working of a metal is the 
lowest temperature at which the rate of recrystallization is rapid enough 
to eliminate strain hardening in the time when the metal is at temper- 
ature. For a given metal or alloy the lower hot-working temperature 
will depend upon such factors as the amount of deformation and the time 
when the metal is at temperature. Since the greater the amount of defor- 
mation the lower the recrystallization temperature, the lower temperature 
limit for hot working is decreased for large deformations. Metal which 
is rapidly deformed and cooled rapidly from temperature will require a 
higher hot-working temperature for the same degree of deformation than 
will metal slowly deformed and slowly cooled. 

The upper limit for hot working is determined by the temperature at 
which either melting or excessive oxidation occurs. Generally the maxi- 
mum working temperature is limited to 100°F below the melting point. 
This is to allow for the possibility of segregated regions of lower-melting- 



17-2] 



General Fundamentals of Metalworking 457 



point material. Only a very small amount of a grain-boundary film of 
a lower-melting constituent is needed to make a material crumble into 
pieces when it is deformed. Such a condition is known as hot shortness, 
or burning. 

Most hot-working operations are carried out in a number of multiple 
passes, or steps. Generally the working temperature for the intermediate 
passes is kept well above the minimum working temperature in order to 
take advantage of the economies offered by the lower flow stress. It is 
likely that some grain growth will occur subsequent to the recrystalli- 
zation at these temperatures. Since a fine-grain-sized product is usually 
desired, common practice is to lower the working temperature for the 
last pass to the point where grain growth during cooling from the work- 
ing temperature will be negligible. This finishing temperature is usually 
just above the minimum recrystallization temperature. In order to 
ensure a fine recrystallized grain size, the amount of deformation in the 
last pass should be relatively large. 

Cold Working 

As was shown in Sec. 5-9, cold working of a metal results in an increase 
in strength or hardness and a decrease in ductility. When cold working 
is excessive, the metal will fracture before reaching the desired size and 
shape. Therefore, in order to avoid such difficulties, cold-working oper- 
ations are usually carried out in several steps, with intermediate anneal- 
ing operations introduced to soften the cold-worked metal and restore the 
ductility. This sequence of repeated cold working and annealing is fre- 
quently called the cold-work-anneal cycle. Figure 17-2 schematically 
illustrates the property changes involved in this cycle. 

Although the need for annealing operations increases the cost of form- 
ing by cold working, particularly for reactive metals which must be 
annealed in vacuum or inert atmospheres, it provides a degree of versa- 
tility which is not possible in hot-working operations. By suitably 



Cold work 



Annealing 





Per cent cold work 



Annealing temperature 



Fig. 17-2. Typical variation of strength and ductility in the cold-work-anneal cycle. 



458 Plastic Forming of Metals [Chap. 17 

adjusting the eold-work anneal cycle the part can be produced with any 
desired degree of strain hardening. If the finished product must be 
stronger than the fully annealed material, then the final operation must 
be a cold-working step with the proper degree of deformation to produce 
the desired strength. This would probably be followed by a stress relief 
to remove residual stresses. Such a procedure to develop a certain 
combination of strength and ductility in the final product is more suc- 
cessful than trying to achieve the same combinations of properties by 
partially softening a fully cold-worked material, because the recrystalli- 
zation process proceeds relatively rapidly and is quite sensitive to small 
temperature fluctuations in the furnace. If it is desired to have the final 
part in the fully softened condition, then an anneal follows the last cold- 
working step. 

It is customary to produce cold-worked products like strip and wire in 
different tempers, depending upon the degree of cold reduction following 
the last anneal. The cold-worked condition is described as the annealed 
(soft) temper, quarter-hard, half-hard, three-quarter-hard, full-hard, and 
spring temper. Each temper condition indicates a different percentage 
of cold reduction following the annealing treatment. 

1 7-3. Effect of Speed of Deformation on Forming Processes 

The response of a metal to forming operations can be influenced by the 
ispeed with which it is deformed. The existence of a transition from a 
ductile to brittle condition for most body-centered cubic metals over a 
certain temperature range has already been discussed in earlier chapters. 
This transition-temperature phenomenon is more pronounced for rapid 
rates of deformation. Thus, for certain metals there may be a temper- 
ature region below which the metal will shatter when subjected to a high- 
speed or impact load. For example, iron and steel will crack if hammered 
at temperatures well below room temperature, whereas a limited amount 
of slow-speed deformation can be accomplished in the same temperature 
range. 

Table 17-1 lists typical values of velocities for different types of testing 
and forming operations. It is important to note that the forming veloc- 
ity of most commercial equipment is appreciably faster than the cross- 
head velocity used in the standard tension test. Therefore, values of 
flow stress measured in the tension test are not directly applicable for 
the computation of forming loads. For cold working a change in the 
forming speed of several orders of magnitude results in only about a 
20 per cent increase in the flow curve, so that for practical purposes the 
speed of deformation can be considered to have little effect. Exceptions 
to this statement are the possibility of brittle behavior in a certain tem- 
p<jrature region at high forming speeds and the fact that high-speed 



Sec. 1 7-4] General Fundamentals of Metalworking 459 

deformation accentuates the yield-point phenomenon in mild steel. 
High-speed deformation may produce regions of nonuniform deformation 
(stretcher strains) in a steel sheet which shows no stretcher strains on 
slow-speed deformation. 

Table 17-1 
Typical Values of Velocity Encountered in 
Different Testing and Forming Operations 

Operation Velocity, ft /sec 

Tension test 2 X lO"" to 2 X IQ-^ 

Hydraulic extrusion press 0.01 to 10 

Mechanical press . 5 to 5 

Charpy impact test 10 to 20 

Forging hammer 10 to 30 

Explosive forming 100 to 400 

The flow stress for hot working is quite markedly affected by the speed 
of deformation. There are no routine methods for measuring the flow 
stress during hot working. However, a high-speed compression testing 
machine, called the cam plastometer, is one device which has given good 
results. Data obtained^ for copper, aluminum, and mild steel at a series 
of constant temperatures indicate that the dependence of flow stress on 
strain rate over a range of e from 1 to 40 sec~' can be expressed by Eq. 
(9-35). Because the time at temperature is shorter for high forming 
speeds, the minimum recrystallization temperature is raised and the 
minimum hot-working temperature will be higher. On the other hand, 
because the metal retains the heat developed by deformation to a greater 
extent at high forming speeds, there is a greater danger of hot shortness. 
For metals which have a rather narrow hot-working range these opposing 
effects serve to close the gap still further and make it impractical to 
carry out hot working at very high forming speeds. 

A recent development has been the ultrahigh-velocity forming of metals 
at velocities of 100 to 400 ft /sec by using the energy generated by the 
detonation of explosives.^ Among the advantages offered are the fact 
that high-strength materials can be formed without large springback, 
that metals flow readily into the recesses of the die, and that certain 
shapes can be produced which cannot be made by any other technique. 

1 7-4. Effect of Metallurgical Structure on Formins Processes 

The forces required to carry out a forming operation are directly related 
to the flow stress of the metal being worked. This, in turn, depends on 

1 J. F. Alder and V. A. Phillips, /. Inst. Metals, vol. 81, pp. 80-86, 1954-55; J. E. 
Hockett, Proc. ASTM, vol. 59, pp. 1309-1319, 1959. 

2 T. C. DuMond, Metal Prog., vol. 74, pp. 68-76, 1958. 



460 Plastic Formins of Metals [Chap. 17 

the metallurgical structure and composition of the alloy. For pure 
metals the ease of mechanical working will, in general, decrease with 
increasing melting point of the metal. Since the minimum recrystalli- 
zation temperature is approximately proportional to the melting point, 
the lower temperature limit for hot work will also increase with melting 
point. (As a rough approximation, this temperature is about one-half 
the melting point.) The addition of alloying elements to form a solid- 
solution alloy generally raises the flow curve, and the forming loads 
increase proportionately. Since the melting point is often decreased by 
solid-solution alloying additions, the upper hot-working temperature 
must usually be reduced in order to prevent hot shortness. 

The plastic working characteristics of two-phase (heterogeneous) alloys 
depend on the microscopic distribution of the second-phase particles. 
The presence of a large volume fraction of hard uniformly dispersed 
particles, such as are found in the SAP class of high-temperature alloys, 
greatly increases the flow stress and makes working quite difficult. If 
the second-phase particles are soft, they have only a small effect on the 
working characteristics. If these particles have a lower melting point 
than the matrix, then difficulties with hot shortness will be encountered. 
The presence of a massive, uniformly distributed microconstituent, such 
as pearlite in mild steel, results in less increase in flow stress than for 
very finely divided second-phase particles. The shape of the carbide 
particles can be important in cold-working processes. For annealed steel, 
a spheroidization heat treatment, which converts the cementite platelets 
to spheroidal cementite particles, is often used to increase the formability 
at room temperature. An important exception to the general rule that 
the presence of a hard second phase increases the difficulty of forming is 
brass alloys containing 35 to 45 per cent zinc (Muntz metal). These 
alloys, which consist of a relatively hard beta phase in an alpha-brass 
matrix, actually have lower flow stresses in the hot-working region than 
the single-phase alpha-brass alloys. In the cold-working region the flow 
stress of alpha-beta brass is appreciably higher than that of alpha brass. 
Alloys which contain a hard second phase located primarily at the grain 
boundaries present considerable forming problems because of the tend- 
ency for fracture to occur along the grain boundaries. 

As the result of a mechanical working operation second-phase particles 
will tend to assume a shape and distribution which roughly correspond 
to the deformation of the body as a whole. Second-phase particles or 
inclusions which are originally spheroidal will be distorted in the principal 
working direction into an ellipsoidal shape if they are softer and more 
ductile than the matrix. If the inclusions or particles are brittle, they 
will be broken into fragments which will be oriented parallel to the work- 
ing direction, while if the particles are harder and stronger than the 



Sec. 17-4] General Fundamentals of Metalworking 461 

matrix, they will be essentially undeformed.' The orientation of second- 
phase particles during hot or cold working and the preferred fragmen- 
tation of the grains during cold working are responsible for the fibrous 
structure which is typical of wrought products. The fiber structure can 
be observed after macroetching (Fig. 17-3). Microscopic examination 
of wrought products frequently shows the results of this mechanical fiber- 
ing (Fig. 17-4). An important consequence of mechanical fibering is that 
the mechanical properties may be different for different orientations of 
the test specimen with respect to the fiber (working) direction. In 




Fig. 17-3. Fiber structure in wrought product revealed by macroetching. 5X- 

general, the tensile ductility, fatigue properties, and impact properties 
will be lower in the transverse direction (normal to the fiber) than in the 
longitudinal direction. 

The forming characteristics of an alloy can be affected if it undergoes 
a strain-induced precipitation or strain-induced phase transformation. 
If a precipitation reaction occurs in a metal while it is being formed, it will 
produce an increase in the flow stress but, more important, there will be 
an appreciable decrease in ductility, which can result in cracking. When 
brittleness is caused by precipitation, it usually results when the working 
is carried out at a temperature just below the solvus line- or from cold 

1 H. Unkel, J. Inst. Metals, vol. 61, pp. 171-1<)G, 1937; F. B. Pickering, J. Iron 
Steel Inst. (London), vol. 189, pp. 148-159, 1958. 

2 The boundary on the phase diagram of the limit of solid solubility of a solid solu- 
tion. 



462 Plastic Forming of Metals [Chap. 17 

working after the alloy had been heated to the same temperature region. 
Since precipitation is a diffusion-controlled process, difficulty from this 
factor is more likely when forming is carried out at a slow speed at an 
elevated temperature. To facilitate the forming of age-hardenable 
aluminum alloys, they are frequently refrigerated just before forming 
in order to suppress the precipitation reaction. 

A most outstanding practical example of a strain-induced phase trans- 
formation occurs in certain austenitic stainless steels where the Cr:Ni 
ratio results in an unstable austenite phase. When these alloys are cold- 
worked, the austenite transforms to ferrite along the slip lines and pro- 











«* r>* 



Fi3. 1 7-4. Fibered and banded structure in logitudinal direction of a hot-rolled mild- 
steel plate. 100 X. 

duces an abnormal increase in the flow stress for the amount of defor- 
mation received. While this phase transformation is often used to 
increase the yield strength by cold rolling, it can also result in cracking 
during forming if the transformation occurs in an extreme amount in 
regions of highly localized strain. 

1 7-5. Mechanics of Metal Forming 

One of the prime objectives of research in metal forming is to express 
the forces and deformations involved in forming processes in the mathe- 
matical language of applied mechanics so that predictions can be made 
about the forces required to produce the desired shape. Since the forces 



Sec. 17-5] General Fundamentals of Metalworking 463 

and deformations are generally quite complex, it is usually necessary to 
use simplifying assumptions to obtain a tractable solution. This branch 
of mechanics is an outgrowth of the theory of plasticity discussed in 
Chap. 3, which should be reviewed before completing this chapter and 
the remaining chapters of this book. 

Plasticity theory has made important advances since World War II, 
and numerous efforts have been made to utilize the new knowledge to 
improve the accuracy of prediction of the metal-forming equations. 
Most of this work involves the use of the slip-field theory discussed briefly 
in Sec. 3-12. While in many instances the use of these more advanced 
methods provides a deeper insight into the forming process, usually this 
additional information cannot be obtained without considerable increase 
in mathematical complexity. Because an analysis based on slip-field 
theory cannot be made with the background provided in Chap. 3, in dis- 
cussing the mathematical aspects of specific forming processes in succeed- 
ing chapters only the simpler equations will be derived. References to 
more advanced treatments will be given wherever this is applicable. 

The mathematical descriptions of technologically important forming 
processes which were developed by SiebeP and other German workers 
were based on the assumption that the maximum-shear-stress law was 
the proper criterion for describing the stress condition for producing 
plastic flow.- 



0"! 



(17-1) 



Subsequent work showed that the distortion-energy, or Von Mises, flow 
criterion [Eq. (17-2)] provided better agreement with experimental data. 

(cTi - cr.>)2 + (a, - as)' + (era - cti)^ = 2^0^ (17-2) 

Therefore, the distortion-energy criterion for yielding is to be preferred 
and will be used in most of the analyses of forming processes presented in 
subsequent chapters. However, as was seen in Sec. 3-4, the distortion- 
energy and maximum-shear-stress criteria differ at most by only 15 per 
cent, and in view of the uncertainties present in the analysis of some of 
the complex forming operations the tw^o yield criteria can be considered 
nearly equivalent. Therefore, the maximum-shear-stress law will be 
used in certain cases where it provides appreciable simplification to the 
analysis. 

An important feature of plasticity theory is the assumption that the 

1 An excellent review of E. Siebel's work is available in an English translation by 
J. H. Hitchcock; it appeared weekly in the magazine Steel, from Oct. 16, 1933, to 
May 7, 1934. 

2 In much of the literature in this field the flow stress o-q is denoted by the symbol k. 
In this text k is taken to indicate the ^I'-eld stress in shear. 



464 Plastic Forming of Metals [Chap. 17 

introduction or removal of a hj^drostatic or mean stress has no effect on 
the flow stress or the state of strain. It is considered that only the stress 
deviator (see Sec. 2-14) is of importance in producing plastic flow, and it 
is this stress term which appears in the plasticity equations [see Eq. 
(3-42)]. This assumption is borne out by the experimental fact that the 
yield stress for the beginning of flow is independent of the mean stress. 
However, at large plastic strains the hydrostatic stress does have an effect 
on the flow stress. For increasing hydrostatic stress, the flow curve at 
large strains is raised. Moreover, as was shown in Sec. 7-16, the ductility 
of metals in tension is appreciably increased when a high hydrostatic 
pressure is present. This explains why nominally brittle materials may 
often be extruded successfully, since a high hydrostatic compression is 
developed owing to the reaction of the workpiece with the extrusion 
container. 

Because large deformations occur in metal forming, it is important to 
express stress and strain as true stress and true, or natural, strain. To a 
very good approximation it is permissible to assume that the volume 
remains constant during deformation. This leads to the convenient 
relationships 

€1 + €2 + €3 = ('[7 ^^ 

or dei + de2 + des = 

Frequently it can be assumed that the strain increment is proportional 
to the total strain. This is called proportional straining and leads to the 
following equation, which is often useful for integrating equations con- 
taining the strain differential. 

dei ^ de2 ^ des (\7 A) 

ei 62 63 

A basic premise of plasticity theory is that equivalent strain hardening 
is obtained for an equivalent tensile or compressive deformation. For a 
tensile strain ei equal to a compressive strain €3, we can write 

ei = —63 = In^ = ~lnr- = In t- 









ho 








hi __ 
ho 


= 1 + 


hi — ho 
ho 


From 


constancy of volume 










Lo 


Ai 








Li 


Ao 


Therefore 




hq 


- h, 

7_ 



_ Ao - Ai 

Ao 
Ao - Ai 



(17-5) 



Sec. 17-5] 



General Fundamentals of Metalworking 465 



Equation (17-5) expresses the fact that for equal true strains the reduc- 
tion of area is equal to the reduction in height or thickness. It is fre- 
quently useful to employ these parameters as a substitute for strain in 
metal-forming experiments. 

The flow curve (true stress-strain curve) determined for either tension 
or compression is the basic relationship for the strain-hardening behavior 
of the material. It is used to determine the value of the flow stress o-q 
for calculating forming loads. The value of the flow stress will of course 
depend on the temperature, the speed of deformation, and possibly the 
existence of a strain-induced transformation, as described in earlier sec- 
tions of this chapter. For most commercial forming operations the 





10 20 30 40 50 

Reduction of area by drawing, % 



True strain € 



Fig. 17-5. Flow curve constructed from Fig. 17-6. Method of using average flow 
stress-strain curves after different amounts stress to compensate for strain hardening, 
of reduction. 



degree of strain hardening which occurs for a given reduction is higher 
than would be determined from a tensile-flow curve. This is due to the 
fact that the metal undergoes nonuniform flow during deformation 
because it is not allowed to flow freely. The lightly deformed regions 
provide a constraint to plastic flow, just as in the case of a notch in a 
tension specimen (Sec. 7-12), and the flow stress is raised. One way of 
determining the flow curve in cases where deformation is nonvniiform is to 
determine the yield stress after different amounts of reduction in the 
forming operation (Fig. 17-5). A method for measuring the flow stress 
for cold-worked metals, which is used frequently in England,^ is to meas- 
ure the pressure required to produce plastic flow when a sheet is com- 
pressed between two rigid anvils. In this test the metal is subjected to 
plane compression, since there is no deformation in the width direction. 



1 A. B. Watts and H. Ford, Proc. Inst. Mech. Engrs. {London), vol. IB, pp. 448-453, 
1952-53. 



466 Plastic Forming of Metals [Chap. 17 

Flow curves for a number of steels and nonferrous metals have been 
obtained^ by this method. 

In many plastic forming operations, such as extrusion, the strains are 
much greater than can be obtained in a tension or compression test. 
It is possible to get good estimates of the flow stress for reductions greater 
than 70 to 80 per cent by linear extrapolation when ctq is plotted against 
the logarithm of the strain or the reduction in area.^ 

For hot working the metal approaches an ideal plastic material, and 
the flow stress is constant and independent of the amount of deformation 
at a given temperature and speed of deformation. To allow for strain 
hardening in cold working, it is customary to use a constant value of 
flow stress which is an average over the total strain, as in Fig. 17-6. An 
alternative, which adds to the mathematical complexity, is to include a 
mathematical expression for the flow curve in the analysis. Usually this 
is limited to a simple power function like Eq. (3-1). 

To describe the plastic flow of a metal, it is just as important to 
describe the geometry of flow in relation to the stress system as it is to 
be able to predict the stress conditions to produce plastic flow. A basic 
assumption of plasticity theory which allows this is that at any stage in 
the deformation process the geometry of strain rates is the same as the 
geometry of stress, i.e., that stress and strain are coaxial. This is a good 
assumption up to moderate strains, but at large strains, where preferred 
orientations may have been developed, the stress and strain systems usu- 
ally are not identical. If Lode's stress and strain parameters are equal 
(see Sec. 3-5), then the plastic stress and strain can be considered coaxial. 

Since metal-forming problems are concerned with large strains of the 
order of unity, elastic strains of the order of 0.001 are negligible by com- 
parison and the metal can be treated as a rigid plastic material. Regions 
of the metal which have been strained only elastically and regions between 
the elavstic-plastic boundary in which the yield stress has been exceeded 
but flow is constrained by the elastic region are considered to be rigid. 
Only flow in the completely plastic region of the body is considered in 
the relatively simple analyses of plastic forming given in succeeding 
chapters. By using the more advanced slip-field theory, it is possible 
to consider the stress and strain in both the elastic and plastic regions, 
and also along the elastic-plastic boundary. 

1 7-6. Work of Plastic Deformation 

The total work required to produce a shape by plastic deformation 
can be broken down into a number of components. The work of defor- 

1 R. B. Sims, J. Iron Steel Inst. {London), vol. 177, pp. 393-399, 1954. 

2 R. J. Wilcox and P. W. Whitton, J. Inst. Metals, vol. 88, pp. 145-149, 1959-1960. 



Sec. 1 7-6] General Fundamentals of Metalworking 467 

mation Wd is the work required for homogeneous reduction of the voUime 
from the initial to final cross section by uniform deformation. Often 
part of the total work is expended in redundant work Wr. The redundant, 
or internal-deformation, work is the energy expended in deforming the 
body which is not involved in a pure change in shape. Finally, part of 
the total work must be used to overcome the frictional resistances at the 
interface between the deforming metal and the tools. Therefore, the 
total work can be written as the summation of three components. 

Wt = Wd + Wr + W, (17-6) 

From the above definitions, it can be seen that the work of deformation 
represents the minimum energy which must be expended to carry out a 
particular forming process. This is equal to the area under the effective 
stress-strain curve multiplied by the total volume. 

Wd = Vja dl (17-7) 

The efficiency of a forming process is the work of deformation divided 
by the total work of deformation. 

W^ 
Efficiency = r, = ^ (17-8) 



W 



The total work is usually measured with a wattmeter attached to the 
electrical drive of the forming equipment. Typical efficiencies for form- 
ing processes 1 are extrusion 30 to 60 per cent, wire drawing 50 to 75 per 
cent, and sheet rolling 75 to 95 per cent. 

The following analysis'- for the work of plastic deformation assumes 
that the metal is an ideal plastic material which obeys the distortion- 
energy criterion of yielding and the Levy-Von Mises theory of plastic 
flow (Sec. 3-9). dWd is the increment of work per unit volume dissipated 
during the infinitesimal straining of increments dei, dc2, and des. 

dWd = (Xl dei + (To de, + (T3 d€3 (17-9) 

Since constancy of volume exists, de^ = —dei — de2. 

dWd = ((Ti - as) rfei + {a-i - <J-i) de2 (17-10) 

From Eq. (3-48) it follows that 

de, = deJ ;""' - ""' - "' ) (17-11) 

1 J. G. Wistreich, J. Iron Steel Insl. (Lundon), vol. 180, p. 54, 1955. 

2 O. Hoffman and G. Sachs, "Introduction to the Theory of Plasticity for Engi- 
neers," pp. 52-54, McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc., New York, 1953. 



468 Plastic Forming of Metals [Chap. 17 

Introducing Eq. (17-11) into Eq. (17-10) and simplifying, 

2(7i — 'T2 — (Xz 

Upon referring to Eqs. (3-12) and (3-47) it is possible to simplify the 
above equation to 

dWa = ^dt - :47-13) 

oA 

To integrate this equation, the variable X must be known as a function 
of strain. X is given in terms of effective stress and strain by 

_ a dt 
3 de 

and since the effective stress a is equal to the uniaxial yield stress in the 
distortion-energy yield criterion, ao, we can write 

X = ^°| (17-14) 

o ae 

Substituting into Eq. (17-13), 

dWa = ^^^ = aode (17-15) 

o Zero dt 

From the definition of effective strain 

a/2 
rfe = -V [{dei - de^y + ((ies - de,)^ + (^€3 - de^)']^^ (17-16) 
o 

and from the constancy-of-volume relationship 

des = —dei — de2 
Simplifying Eq. (17-16), 

2 

de = —7- (dei^ + de, de^ + de^'^f'^ (17-17) 

For the case of proportional straining, Eq. (17-15) can be integrated to 
obtain the total ideal work per unit volume. 

Wa= f dWa=^ ^ Toie,' + e^e, + e^)^^ (17-18) 

1 7-7. Formability Tests and Criteria 

The success of a forming operation depends on the application of high 
enough forces to overcome the resistance to deformation without exhaust- 



Sec. 17-7] General Fundamentals of Metalworking 469 

ing the ductility of the metal. It is only natural that attempts have been 
made to predict the success of forming operations on the basis of simple 
laboratory tests. Reliable information on the flow stress required to pro- 
duce deformation can be obtained with the tension or compression test 
for slow rates of deformation, but there is no convenient test for exactly 
determining these data at high rates of deformation. 

Because of the difficulty of obtaining reliable data on the deformation 
resistance of metals during hot working at high deformation rates a num- 
ber of empirical tests have been developed to evaluate the hot formability 
of materials. The single-blow impact test^ has been used for many years 
to evaluate whether or not a material can be hot-worked without crack- 
ing. Good correlation with hot-working operations, such as forging and 
piercing of solid rounds to make seamless tubes, has b